# Cristi Cotovan
> I teach you video and podcast editing
Public Ghost content for AI and LLM tooling. This file includes a bounded export of public pages first, then recent public posts.
Append `.md` to any post or page URL to get the content in Markdown (for example, `/example-post.md`).
## Pages
### About this site
URL: https://cotovan.com/about/
Last updated: 2025-06-02T12:44:29.000Z
Cristi Cotovan is an independent publication launched in March 2025 by Cristi Cotovan. If you subscribe today, you'll get full access to the website as well as email newsletters about new content when it's available. Your subscription makes this site possible, and allows Cristi Cotovan to continue to exist. Thank you!
### Access all areas
By signing up, you'll get access to the full archive of everything that's been published before and everything that's still to come. Your very own private library.
### Fresh content, delivered
Stay up to date with new content sent straight to your inbox! No more worrying about whether you missed something because of a pesky algorithm or news feed.
### Meet people like you
Join a community of other subscribers who share the same interests.
---
### Start your own thing
Enjoying the experience? Get started for free and set up your very own subscription business using [Ghost](https://ghost.org/?ref=cotovan.com), the same platform that powers this website.
### 1-on-1 Training: Riverside, Descript, Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/coaching/
Last updated: 2026-08-20T10:23:04.000Z
Let me help you get started with Descript, Camtasia, Riverside, edit videos, podcasts and walk through difficult issues to get you going.
I've trained many students through one-on-one coaching sessions, courses, and I'd love to help you as well.
My rates for coaching are shown below. You can pay that at the time of scheduling.
For any questions, don't hesitate to contact me: **coaching@cotovan.com**
You get a discount if you think you'll need more sessions - just select the appropriate package of sessions below:
1 Session
$149
Perfect for getting started or if you have questions.
- 1-on-1 coaching session
- 60 minutes duration
- Session recording + cheatsheet
[Book Single Session](https://calendly.com/graphicious/1-coaching-session?ref=cotovan.com)
3 Sessions
$399
Develop workflows or tackle advanced features.
- 3 one-on-one sessions
- 60 minutes per session
- Session recording + cheatsheet
[Book 3-Session Package](https://calendly.com/graphicious/3-coaching-sessions?ref=cotovan.com)
5 Sessions
$499
Learn from scratch with a progressive walkthrough.
- 5 comprehensive sessions
- 60 minutes per session
- Deep-dive into workflows
- Session recording + cheatsheet
[Book 5-Session Package](https://calendly.com/graphicious/5-coaching-sessions?ref=cotovan.com)
## How does it work?
1. You schedule a session (or a pack)
2. We connect on a Zoom call, walk through your questions over 1 hour
3. At the end, you get the recording so you can re-watch if you need to.
4. Each session's **recording is provided** as soon as the session ends, so you can rewatch at your own leisure.
5. You also get a **session cheatsheet** with all the things we discussed in that session, any tips, tricks, workflows, keyboard shortcuts mentioned - easily digestible for your reference.
**If you have any other questions regarding coaching, I'd be happy to help. Please email me at: coaching@cotovan.com**
I worked with Cristi for a video narration project, and he was a fantastic Descript instructor. He is extremely knowledgeable and has a way of making the entire process feel completely effortless. I highly recommend his coaching to anyone looking to master the platform.
Vladimir Benoit, CFRE
President and CEO - Somerville YMCA
Cristi is a super helpful coach. I have had several sessions with Cristi as he has held my hand to learn and use Descript. He is very knowledgeable, patient, and an effective teacher. I highly recommend Cristi as a coach.
Dennis Corley
DCPutt Golf
I contacted Cristi for coaching after watching his video tutorials, which were clear, concise and fully-understandable -- particularly for Riverside novices. Our Zoom with shareable screens was equally beneficial as Cristi patiently walked me through answers to my multiple questions. With his full mastery of Riverside's features, Cristi focuses on everything that CAN be done, not what should be done. He's aware that everyone has a unique, individual approach to creativity, and he seeks to provide a clear picture of all the tools available — and the easiest ways to use them. It was time very well spent.
David Adelson
Venice, California
Cristi was AMAZING as a coach and if I could give more than 5 stars to review him, I would. First he is extremely patient for a beginner video editor like me, that says a lot. He walked me through some issues that I was having that I could not find the resolution for anywhere in the Descript tutorials, or by contacting customer support (which does not get you much). He went above and beyond when giving me editing advice, and went way over our session time without charging me. This was so appreciated. I can't say enough good things and look forward to working with him again.
Sandra
HealthyLivinginaToxicWorld.com
With the support of Cristi's YouTube videos I was able to create my first training videos with Descript. To take the next step, I decided to book a personal coaching session with him, and it was absolutely worth it. The session saved me so much time in figuring things out on my own, and as a bonus I learned a number of valuable tips and tricks. I really appreciated the session format: Cristi came well prepared and even took a quick look at my training beforehand. He answered all my questions using a clear show-and-tell approach, and shared many practical suggestions I can use to improve my videos. I highly recommend working with him, and will likely book another session once I've mastered this stage.
Frank de Visser
ERP Driven Change Expert | Consultant | Writer | Trainer
Cristi is wonderful to work with! Patient, kind, and brilliant in his understanding of programs. It’s not often you can find someone who provides such expert skill in combination with thoughtful care. I highly recommend connecting with him.
Michelle Mullins
Spirit Led Voice
Cristi is great in showing not telling how applications work. In other words, he works with the customer's product to demonstrate to them how they can make the editing choices they want. He goes another step and records the session so the customer can refer back to the tutorial.
As a visual artist I'm also a visual learner. I sincerely appreciate Cristi's visual application and universal design for learning.
Melanie McLaughlin
Training Manager, Federation for Children with Special Needs.
I've begun thinking of Cristi as "The Exterminator" because he is so skilled at finding and fixing the bugs I've accidentally created while learning Descript - as well as helping me avoid the bugs that inhabit Descript's ever-evolving video program.
Over the past year, my wife and I hired three other online coaches to help us convert our "Less Stress, Better Health and More Love" booklets into videos that could be viewed from any smartphone, tablet or PC. Although each consultant was helpful, none can compare to Cristi's mix of in-depth knowledge, teaching skills and engaging personality. By directing me as I share my screen, he assures that I REALLY AM LEARNING.
Plus, he provides a recording of our sessions for future reference.
Dr. Tom DeLoughry
I took Cristi's Descript course on Udemy a month ago, and he was the best instructor I've had on the platform. He's incredibly clear and thorough, with deep expertise that comes from years of hands-on experience with Descript.
I recently booked a one-hour consultation with him, and once again, he delivered. He helped me clearly understand my issue and guided me through to a solution. The session was well worth the cost. Highly recommend Cristi for anyone looking to truly master Descript.
C. Matthews
Winnipeg, Manitoba
I recently invested in Cristi Cotovan’s one-on-one Descript coaching, and it’s been an absolute game-changer for my podcast editing workflow. As someone who was struggling with the complexities of Descript, Cristi’s expertise has been invaluable. His training is incredibly comprehensive and user-friendly. He walks you through the process step by step live which is invaluable.
What impressed me most was how he breaks down complex editing techniques into simple, actionable steps. I’ve gone from barely navigating the software to confidently using advanced features like studio sound, transcript editing, and scene management. The keyboard shortcuts Cristi taught me have been a massive time-saver. I can now zip through editing tasks in minutes, removing filler words and adjusting gaps with incredible efficiency. His approach is perfect for content creators who want to streamline their editing process without sacrificing quality.
What sets Cristi apart is his ability to explain technical concepts in an understandable way. Whether you’re a complete beginner or have some editing experience, his coaching adapts to your skill level. I’ve significantly improved my podcast editing skills, and the investment has paid for itself many times over. If you’re serious about podcast editing, Cristi Cotovan’s one on one coaching is absolutely essential. It’s the best decision I’ve made for my content creation journey.
John M Tarantino
LSA, CSA, CSFA
Connectopod creates podcasts with youth as a means to help them understand the power of their own voice, the importance of their unique point of view, and their agency to create change. Cristi was instrumental in helping Melissa Peruch gain the technical skills to go from youth journalist to youth producer, creating broadcast ready content for her very own Connectopod series 'restictED' about eating disorders.
We contracted Cristi for 5 coaching sessions for Melissa, a novice to editing. By the third session, she was editing in Descript, EQ-ing her sound, and using strikethrough edits for content. He also coached first time video editor Angelica Benitez to create a video for a live presentation. Both girls enjoyed working with Cristi and it shows in the quality of their work and the speed with which they are learning!
We look forward to ongoing collaboration with Cristi.
Betsy Foldes Meiman
Co-founder, Co-executive Director, Connectopod
Speaking with Cristian for 30 minutes saved me hours on the learning curve of Descript. I recommend Cristian if you need any help with the complex tools he specializes in. Happy to have found a great video editing coach.
Matteo Cassese
Business Coach
I cannot recommend Cristi's coaching services enough. I was quite intimidated to learn an entirely new software system. However, Cristi has such deep expertise that he put my fears to rest by the end of our first session.
Cristi has a knack for teaching critical elements of the software in minutes that would take me hours to uncover on my own via online tutorials. His guidance has exponentially expedited my learning of the interface and, more importantly, how to leverage it in ways that address my specific project needs.
He brings such a professional and pleasant demeanor to every interaction that I actually enjoy the learning process. He truly is a gem and a wealth of knowledge.
Jandi Kelly
University of Michigan Center for the Study of Higher & Postsecondary Education
Wow! Cristi is the best. He knows his stuff cold. Cristi provided me with one-on-one consulting via Zoom for the video editing software Descript that I had been struggling to learn based on the company's tutorials. I would never have been able to use the Descript software as effectively and efficiently as I do today without Cristi's consulting.
The guy is patient, insightful and a problem solver. As an added bonus, Cristi is always available. I hope he actually sleeps. Just kidding. If you are looking for consulting services from an authority, hire this guy! You will thank me for the recommendation.
Peter Zalewski
Host at Miami Real Estate Investing Podcast
### Free Riverside.fm Training
URL: https://cotovan.com/riverside-newsletter/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T13:57:15.000Z
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
## What is Riverside?
[Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) is an **all-in-one content creation platform** primarily designed for podcasting, video recording, and content production.
Riverside is an "end-to-end production platform" that lets you:
- **Record** interviews and content
- **Edit** with built-in video/audio editing tools
- **Live stream** to multiple platforms simultaneously
- **Host and distribute** podcasts
- **Use AI features** like transcript generation, filler word removal, and audio enhancement ("Magic Audio")
[Riverside.fm Review: Complete Feature Guide for Podcasters & CreatorsRiverside.fm features have evolved rapidly over the last couple of years. What started as a recording-first tool is now a full end-to-end production platform for podcasters, YouTubers, course creators, coaches and teams.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/)
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Posts
### Riverside Screen Glow and Lighting Controls: How to Look Better Before You Record
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-screen-glow-and-lighting-controls/
Last updated: 2026-09-03T15:02:43.000Z
Riverside has had appearance effects inside the recording studio for a while, and I already walked through the first version of them in my guide on [how to touch up your appearance in Riverside Studio](https://cotovan.com/post/touch-up-your-appearance-in-riverside-studio/). The latest update turns that handful of toggles into a proper lighting kit — and adds the one control I was pleasantly surprised with: a software ring light that lives on your own screen.
This matters more than it sounds. I've had clients tell me flat out that they'd rather record in Zoom because Riverside didn't smooth their skin. That objection is gone, and what replaced it goes further than Zoom does.
One thing to be clear about up front: everything here happens *before or during* recording or live streaming, in the studio. It isn't a post-production effect. The payoff is that the file you record is already better, instead of you fixing it in the editor afterwards.
## Riverside now tells you when your lighting is bad
Open a project and click **Record** to launch the studio. You land on the "Let's check your devices" screen — the lobby where you confirm your camera, microphone, and headphones before joining. It's a good moment to sanity-check the rest of your [Riverside studio settings](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/) too.
What's new is that Riverside now watches your camera feed here and speaks up when the light isn't good enough. A Tip panel appears over your preview: *"Your lighting could be better — Check that you have enough light and that you're facing it,"* with an **Adjust lighting** link right underneath it.
I switched my key light off on purpose for this, and on a Logitech C925e webcam the image drops off a cliff — which is exactly the situation the tip is built to catch.
With the room light off, Riverside flags the problem itself and offers an Adjust lighting shortcut. Notice the 1080p / 24fps readout in the same corner — that's what will actually be recorded.
While you're looking at that corner, the "1080p / 24fps — This is how you'll be recorded" line is worth a glance every time. If it isn't showing the resolution you expect, sort that out before you fix anything cosmetic — here's [how to record in high resolution in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-record-in-high-resolution-in-riverside/).
## The framing guide you get for free
Click **Adjust lighting** and two things happen. The effects panel opens on the right, and your preview picks up a framing overlay: a rule-of-thirds grid plus a green bracketed rectangle.
Put your face inside those brackets and your framing is right. Not cropped at the forehead, not floating in the middle of the frame with a metre of empty headroom above you. I had been planning to make a whole video about camera framing, and this overlay does most of the teaching for me.
The green brackets show where your face should sit. Line yourself up with them and you've solved framing before you've touched a single slider.
If framing slips during a real session, you can still recover it later with [AutoCrop and reframe in the Riverside editor](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-autocrop-and-reframe-video-in-riverside/), which can centre your face automatically. But getting it right in the lobby costs you nothing and looks better.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Where the controls live
The panel that opens is called **Background and effects**, and it has two tabs. **Background** is the one you may already know — blur your background or swap it for an image. The new stuff is on the **Appearance** tab, and there are four controls on it:
- **Touch up** — smooth your skin on camera
- **Face lighting** — improve lighting on your face
- **Studio lighting** — adjust the lighting in your scene
- **Screen glow** — brighten your face when your lighting is low
All four appearance controls sit on one tab, each with a plain-language description of what it does.
They stack, so you can run all four at once. In practice you won't want to — I'll come back to that.
## Touch up: skin smoothing
Toggle **Touch up** on and a dropdown appears underneath it with two strengths: **Subtle** and **Smooth**. Subtle is the default and Smooth is the more pronounced of the two.
This is AI processing running in real time on your camera feed, so the preview may hesitate for a moment when you switch it on or change the strength. That's normal — let it settle before you judge the result.
Touch up gives you two strengths. Subtle is where I'd leave it — Smooth is noticeably heavier.
My advice: stay on Subtle. The point of a touch-up is that nobody can tell you used one. Smooth is there if you want it, but it starts to look like a filter rather than good lighting.
## Face lighting: brighten just your face
**Face lighting** is a single toggle with no slider. It detects your face and relights it specifically, so your features come up while the rest of the frame stays where it was. In a dark room the difference is immediate — my face lifts noticeably while the acoustic panels behind me stay dark.
Face lighting targets your face rather than the whole scene, which is why the background doesn't come up with it.
This is so helpful when you're recording in bad conditions — a hotel room at night, a corner of the office with one overhead lamp.
## Studio lighting: brighten the whole scene
**Studio lighting** is a toggle plus a slider, labelled **Reduce light** on the left and **Increase light** on the right. Unlike Face lighting, this one works on the entire image. Push it up and the whole scene lifts, including the room behind you; pull it down and everything dims.
The Studio lighting slider raises or lowers the whole scene. Pushed far enough, it starts revealing the parts of the room you'd rather stayed dark.
Use it sparingly. Brightening a dark image in software also amplifies whatever noise your camera sensor produced in the shadows, so if you crank it you'll trade darkness for grain — and you'll reveal the background clutter the darkness was hiding. I sit just past the middle and leave it there.
## Screen glow: a ring light made of your own screen
This is my favourite of the four, and it's the one I want to explain properly because it works differently from the others.
**Screen glow** doesn't process your camera feed at all. It paints a bright border around the Riverside window on your display. Because you're looking at that screen while you record, the light bounces off it and onto your face. It's a real, physical light source — your monitor — being used as a fill light, and your camera captures the result exactly as it would capture a lamp.
Screen glow turns the edges of the Riverside window into a soft white ring light. My face brightens because the screen is genuinely lighting it.
Two sliders come with it. The first is brightness, from **Dim** to **Bright**, for when you only need a touch of fill. The second is colour temperature, from **Warmer** to **Cooler**, and I love it!
My face always reads slightly too warm on camera, and being able to dial a cooler light onto it fixes that at the source instead of in a colour grade. Slide it toward Warmer and you get that orange, tungsten-lamp look; slide it toward Cooler and you get something closer to daylight. I keep mine slightly cool.
Dragging the temperature slider toward Warmer turns the on-screen ring orange. Watch your face, not the border — that's where the change matters.
The panel also notes that Screen glow *works best at full screen brightness*, and it means it. A software ring light can only put out as much light as your display can, so turn your monitor up before you judge whether it's doing anything.
One more thing worth knowing: once Screen glow is doing the work, you often don't need Face lighting any more. I turned mine back off — the real light on my face had made the software version redundant.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Your settings follow you into the studio
Set all this up in the lobby, click **Join studio**, and everything carries over already applied. The glow stays on screen, the touch-up stays on your feed.
Inside the studio the glow is still there, still lighting my face. It never appears in the recording — only its effect on me does.
Two details to note in there. First, the glow is not recorded. It exists on your screen, not in your video track, so your viewers never see the border — they only see the better-lit version of you. Second, because the glow takes up the edges of the window, you see a little less of the studio interface while it's on. That's the trade, and for me it's an easy one.
You can also reach these controls mid-session: hover your own video tile and open the effects button there, and the Appearance tab is right where you left it.
## Why it's worth fixing at the source
This is what I tell every client I coach. When you record in Riverside, try to get good light, good framing, and a decent camera. Every problem you solve before you press record is a problem nobody has to solve afterwards — no colour correction pass, no exporting to another tool, no rescuing a dark face in the grade.
Riverside can help after the fact — its [colour adjustment tools will lift dark or off-colour footage](https://cotovan.com/post/quick-color-adjustments-fixes-riverside/) in the editor. But recovering a bad image is always more work and always a worse result than capturing a good one. If the recording is right up front, it's easier on everybody.
These controls are in the browser studio now. The effects panel points you toward the Mac app for the best-quality visual effects, and I'd expect this full set of appearance controls to land in the Mac recording app before long, along with other improvements.
## The settings I'd start with
- **Touch up:** on, set to Subtle
- **Face lighting:** on only if Screen glow isn't giving you enough
- **Studio lighting:** on, slider just past the middle — not maxed
- **Screen glow:** on, brightness high, temperature slightly cool
- **Your display:** turned up to full brightness
- **Your face:** inside the green brackets
Dial that in once and it takes about thirty seconds before every session. If you're setting up your workflow from scratch, you can [try Riverside here](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Related guides
[How to Touch Up Your Appearance in Riverside StudioRiverside added a control inside the recording studio that helps you smooth your skin, improve your lighting, and generally look more polished before you ever press record. If you've ever missed the appearance and skin-smoothing options you had in Zoom, this closes that gap — a lot of that same polish now lives right inside Riverside, and it's one less reason to record anywhere else. One thing to know up front: these Appearance effects currently live only in the recording studio — on the setupCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/touch-up-your-appearance-in-riverside-studio/)
[Best Settings for Your Riverside Studio: A Feature-by-Feature GuideThe best settings for your Riverside recording studio to ensure your podcasts, livestreams, and recordings are of the highest quality.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/)
[How to Use Color Adjustments in Riverside to Fix Dark or Off-Color FootageA new feature to adjust colors has been added in Riverside and it could save a lot of back and forth in color correcting.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/quick-color-adjustments-fixes-riverside/)
[How to Use AutoCrop and Reframe Video in RiversideRiverside's new editor detects faces and centres them in one click. Here's how to use AutoCrop, control the zoom, and push the same crop across every matching scene with Similar scenes.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-autocrop-and-reframe-video-in-riverside/)
[Blue Background Appears in Camera on Mac? Here's the FixIf you're using Riverside on a Mac (or any other recording app) and a blue background suddenly appears behind you in the camera preview, it's not a Riverside bug — it's a macOS feature that's been turned on without you realising. What's Happening macOS includes system-level camera effects that apply to every app using your webcam — Riverside, Zoom, Google Meet, FaceTime, browser-based video tools, all of them. One of these effects is Background, which replaces your real background with a soliCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/blue-background-camera-mac-riverside-fix/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Use AutoCrop and Reframe Video in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-autocrop-and-reframe-video-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-08-26T18:00:32.000Z
If a guest drifts to the edge of their camera frame, every scene you build on top of that recording inherits the problem. I used to fix it by dragging each box around by hand, one scene at a time. The new Riverside editor now has an **AutoCrop** button that detects the face in a video stream and centres it in the box for you, and it can push that same crop to every matching scene in the edit.
Here is the whole workflow, from checking your original framing to spot-checking the result.
## Start by looking at the untouched framing
Riverside does have a framing helper at the recording stage (article and video on this coming soon). But you never get perfect recordings from clients. Someone sits too far left, someone leans out of shot, and you only find out once the files land in the editor.
So the first thing I do is open the edit and look at the raw recording before I touch anything.
Straight out of the recording, neither of us is centred in our own half of the frame.
It gets more obvious when you expand one person to fill the screen. Click their box, switch the layout so they fill the frame, and the empty space on one side gives the crop away.
Filling the frame with one speaker makes the off-centre framing impossible to miss.
You can still fix this the manual way — enter crop mode and drag the box left or right, exactly as I covered in my guide to [cropping, repositioning and reframing in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/). You just don't have to any more.
## Centre a face with Auto-crop
Riverside now detects faces in every video stream in the project, so the centering is ready with one click the moment you open the edit.
Click the box holding the person you want to centre. The clip toolbar appears above the preview with the speaker's name on the left.
Select the speaker's box and the clip toolbar appears. The crop icon is the second one along.
Click the crop icon. The toolbar swaps for the crop bar: an **Auto-crop** button, a zoom slider with a percentage field, and **Cancel** and **Done** buttons. A rule-of-thirds grid drops over the box so you can see how far off-centre the subject is.
The crop bar with the Auto-crop button, zoom slider and percentage field. The grid shows how far off-centre the shot still is.
Now click **Auto-crop**. The face snaps to the middle of the box, nicely proportioned against the grid, and the zoom nudges up slightly to make the framing work — 116% in this case.
One click on Auto-crop and the face lands dead centre, with the zoom adjusted to suit.
Repeat it for your guest: click their box, open the crop tool, click Auto-crop. Two clicks per person.
Do this *before* you cut your scenes and every scene you create afterwards inherits centred framing, which saves you the cleanup pass later.
## Adjust the zoom without losing the centre
Auto-crop picks a zoom level, but you stay in control of it. Drag the slider, or type a value into the percentage field.
Pull it too far out and the crop shrinks inside the box, leaving black around the video.
Drop the zoom too low and the video no longer fills the box. Click Auto-crop again and it snaps back to filling the frame.
Click Auto-crop again and it pulls the shot back in so it fills the box properly. Push the other way and you get a tighter, closer crop.
At 140% the crop is much tighter — and the face stays centred the whole way in.
The old plus and minus buttons are gone, but you still have fine control: click the small stepper arrows next to the percentage to nudge the zoom up and down, or click inside the box and use the up and down arrow keys to shift the framing. The face holds its centre as you zoom, which is the part that used to take the most fiddling. If you build [dynamic zoom edits](https://cotovan.com/post/dynamic-zoom-edits-riverside-polished-podcasts/) on top of this, starting from a centred crop makes the whole sequence steadier.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Fixing framing after Smart Layouts has already cut your scenes
Centering before you cut is ideal, but that is not always how the edit goes. Here is the situation I run into more often: I open the AI tools panel and run **Smart layouts** on a project that still has no scenes on the timeline.
The AI tools panel before Smart layouts runs — notice the timeline underneath has no scene breaks yet.
Smart layouts cuts the scenes for you and drops each speaker into whatever layout fits. It does a good job of choosing shots, but it does not fix framing. Scroll through the project afterwards and you are still drifting left and right in every side-by-side scene.
With scenes already cut, going back and centering each one by hand is a waste of an afternoon. That is what **Similar scenes** is for.
## Push one crop to every matching scene with Similar scenes
Under the preview there is a row of buttons: **This scene**, **Similar scenes** and **All scenes**. They control how widely your change is applied.
The order matters here. Click the speaker's box, then choose **Similar scenes** *before* you make any changes. Riverside selects every scene that shares the same layout and track — all your side-by-side shots, in this case.
Similar scenes applies the crop to every scene sharing the same track and layout. Check it is still selected before you click Auto-crop.
One thing to watch: the selection sometimes switches itself off when you open the crop tool. Glance at the button row and re-select **Similar scenes** if it has dropped back to **This scene** — otherwise you will only fix the scene you are parked on.
With Similar scenes selected, click **Auto-crop**, then **Done**. Every matching scene gets the same centred crop in one shot. Do the same for your guest — select their box, confirm Similar scenes is on, Auto-crop, Done.
It behaves the same way as [saving and reusing scene layouts](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/): you make the decision once and Riverside repeats it everywhere the layout matches, instead of you clicking through the timeline. If a particular scene needs its own treatment, you can always [adjust the scene break](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-scene-break-location-in-riverside/) and crop that one on its own with **This scene**.
## Spot-check before you move on
Two clicks doing work across dozens of scenes is a big time save, and it is also a good reason to check the results. Jump back to the start of the edit and scrub through a handful of scenes.
After Auto-crop with Similar scenes, both speakers hold the centre through the whole edit.
Face detection is very good, but it is still detection. A scene where someone turns away from camera or leans right out of shot can land differently from the rest. A quick spot-check catches those in under a minute, and you can drop into any single scene and correct it without disturbing the others.
## Where this fits in your edit
My order of work now looks like this:
1. Open the edit and check the raw framing on each speaker.
2. Auto-crop each person before cutting scenes, so every scene starts centred.
3. If scenes are already cut, use Similar scenes plus Auto-crop to fix them in bulk.
4. Adjust the zoom on anything that wants a tighter or wider shot.
5. Spot-check, then carry on with the rest of the edit.
It is a small feature, but framing is one of those things viewers notice without being able to say why. Getting it right used to cost real editing time. Now it is two clicks per speaker. If you are still finding your way around the redesigned workspace, my [walkthrough of Riverside's new editor](https://cotovan.com/post/riversides-new-editor-a-complete-walkthrough-of-the-redesigned-workspace/) covers where everything else moved to.
If you want to try any of this yourself, you can [get started with Riverside here](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
## Related guides
[Crop, Reposition, Reframe: Video Editing in Riverside.fmAdjust the framing and cropping of individual videos during editing in Riverside.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/)
[Riverside's New Editor: A Complete Walkthrough of the Redesigned WorkspaceA full tour of Riverside's rebuilt editor: the new project sidebar, resizable panels, AI workflow toggles, version history, free-form layouts, the frame-accurate timeline, transcript corrections, motiCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riversides-new-editor-a-complete-walkthrough-of-the-redesigned-workspace/)
[How to Save and Reuse Scene Layouts in RiversideWhen you're editing a podcast or video interview in Riverside, the layout determines how speakers are arranged on screen. But you don't have to stick with the same layout for the entire episode. You cCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/)
[How to Use Riverside Scene Templates to Speed Up Podcast EditingEvery time you start a new episode edit in Riverside, do you find yourself rebuilding the same scene layouts from scratch? Speaker name overlays, side-by-side arrangements, solo speaker close-ups — itCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-riverside-scene-templates-to-speed-up-podcast-editing/)
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit. In this comprehensive gCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Riverside Markers and Chapters: A Complete Workflow Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-markers-and-chapters-complete-workflow-guide/
Last updated: 2026-08-23T11:49:58.000Z
Markers and chapters are two of the quietest features in Riverside, and they end up touching every phase of a project: recording, editing, and publishing. They look similar, they get talked about interchangeably (I do it myself), but they behave very differently — and once you know which one to reach for, long recordings stop feeling like a wall of waveform.
Here's the whole workflow: how to drop markers while you're still rolling, what happens to them in the editor, how chapters get created, how to rename, move, delete and add your own, and how to push the finished chapter list out to YouTube and Spotify.
## Markers vs. chapters: what's actually different
Markers are timestamps you create *during* a recording. They're notes to yourself — "clip this," "we messed that up," "great answer." Once the recording lands in the editor, they show up as **comments**.
Chapters are something else entirely. They're named sections of your episode that live in the transcript and on the timeline, they carry a timestamp, and they're what you export to give your audience a clickable table of contents. Markers do *not* turn into chapters automatically. If you want a chapter, you add it yourself — but a well-placed marker from the recording session is the perfect hint for where one belongs.
## Add markers while you record
You don't need to wait until editing. Open your project, hit **Create → Record**, and once you're rolling, look at the bottom of the studio toolbar. There's a button called **Mark**, with **M** as its keyboard shortcut.
The Mark button sits in the studio toolbar next to Stop. Press M and a marker is dropped at the current moment — no menus, no interruption.
This feature has been in Riverside for ages, but it was reworked recently after a lot of user feedback, and the improvement is the part that matters: you can now attach a note to the marker instead of just a bare timestamp.
Press M once and you get a silent marker at that moment. Press **M** (or click **Mark**) and a small input pops up at the top of the screen where you can type a comment. Hit Enter and it's saved.
Type your note and press Enter. If you don't click into the field, the popup disappears after a few seconds and you're left with a plain marker. Notice the button now reads Mark (2) — it counts what you've added so far.
That's the whole interaction. You're back in the conversation in about three seconds. In practice I use it for exactly two things: flagging a moment I want pulled as a [social clip](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-reveal-more-content-in-a-riverside-magic-clip/), and flagging something I'll need to fix in the edit.
Markers stay attached to the recording files. Every edit you create from those recordings inherits them.
## Where markers show up in the editor
Open an edit from that recording and the markers are waiting for you in three places at once: as coloured circles above the timeline (each one stamped with the initial of whoever added it), inline in the [transcript](https://cotovan.com/post/unlimited-free-ai-transcription-with-riversides-new-tool/) at the exact word, and in the Comments sidebar on the right.
The Comments sidebar lists every marker with its timestamp. Markers you left a note on show the note; the ones you didn't are simply labelled Marker 1, Marker 2, and so on. Click any of them to jump there.
Two things worth knowing here.
**You can resolve them.** Once you've acted on a marker — or decided you don't care about it — tick it off as resolved and it disappears from the timeline. This is how you keep the marker layer meaningful instead of letting it pile up.
**You can hide them without deleting them.** If the timeline gets busy, open the options at the top of the Comments panel and toggle **Show on → Transcript** and **Show on → Timeline** independently.
Turn off Transcript, Timeline, or both. The markers are still there — you've just cleared the visual noise while you work.
Because these are comments, they're also conversational: you can reply to them. If a co-host left the marker, or you've [invited an editor into your account](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-invite-an-editor-to-your-riverside-account-without-sharing-full-access/), you can go back and forth on a specific moment instead of trading messages elsewhere. This is the same comment stream that [review-link feedback](https://cotovan.com/post/send-review-links-clients-riverside/) lands in, so everything about a given timestamp collects in one place.
## Chapters get created automatically
When you finish recording or uploading a project, Riverside runs an AI pass over it and writes chapters into the transcript.
Scroll through the transcript of any project and you'll see them: short bold headings with a timestamp next to them, breaking the episode into phases.
Chapter headings sit inline in the transcript with their timestamp. Even a two-minute test recording gets a couple of them.
On a short recording you'll get two or three. On a full hour-long interview you'll get twenty-plus, and that's where they start earning their keep.
## Navigate a long episode with the chapters index
Open the chapters navigation and you get the entire episode as a clickable list with timestamps. Click one and the transcript, the playhead, and the preview all jump to that point.
The chapters index for an hour-long episode. This is the fastest way to get from one end of a long recording to the other without scrubbing.
If you spend a lot of time hunting for a specific moment, pair this with the other [navigation shortcuts in the editor](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-navigate-faster-between-edits-in-riverside-studio/) — between the two you rarely need to scrub the timeline at all.
## If chapters don't appear, ask Co-Creator
In my experience Riverside generates chapters every single time. But if you're working with an older recording, or a file you uploaded rather than recorded, they might not be there. In that case just ask for them.
Co-Creator sits in the right-hand rail. Type a plain-language request into the prompt box.
Something as simple as *"Please create chapters for this episode"* is enough. You can also steer the density — ask for 10, 15, or 20 and it'll try to break the episode down at that granularity. If you already have chapters, expect it to add more rather than replace what's there. Worth knowing if you've already curated the list. (If you use Co-Creator often, it's also worth [telling it how you like your outputs](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-personalize-ai-responses-and-automations-in-riverside/) so you're not re-explaining yourself every session.)
## Edit chapters in the transcript
AI chapters are a good starting point, not a finished product. I always end up rewording some, moving some, and adding my own. All of it happens right in the transcript.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Rename a chapter
Click the three dots on the chapter row and choose Rename — or, much faster, just **double-click the title**. It becomes editable immediately with the text selected.
Double-click puts you straight into edit mode. Trim the wording, press Enter, done.
### Move a chapter
AI break points are usually close but not exact — often a sentence or two early. Grab the four-dot handle on the right of the chapter row and drag. A purple line shows you where it'll land, and you can drop it between any two paragraphs.
The purple line is your drop target. Release and the chapter moves — its timestamp updates to match the new position.
### Delete a chapter
Three dots → Delete. Gone from the transcript, the timeline, and the exported chapter list.
### Insert your own
Hover between two paragraphs in the transcript and a thin line with a **+** appears. Click it and you get the insert menu — the same one you'd use to drop in [a new scene](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riversides-new-editor-using-scenes/), stock footage, music, or text. One of the options is **Add chapter**.
Add chapter is in the same insert menu as scenes and media. Click it and the new chapter appears already selected, ready for you to type the title.
Type your title, press Enter, and it's placed exactly where you clicked.
## Work with chapters on the timeline
If you're a timeline editor — waveforms, tight trims, [precision work](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/) — you don't have to go back up to the transcript to manage chapters. There's a dedicated chapter rail running along the top of the timeline.
The chapter rail always tells you which section you're in. Scroll along and the name updates — and because each block spans its section, you can see at a glance how long a chapter runs.
Everything you can do in the transcript works here too: three dots for rename and delete, or double-click the name to edit it in place.
### Adding a chapter at the playhead
This is where I add most of mine. Zoom in with [Command and the mouse wheel](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/), park the playhead exactly where the new section should start, and click the Add chapter button in the timeline toolbar.
One gotcha to know about first. If a chapter block on the rail is currently **selected** — you'll see it highlighted in purple — the Add chapter button won't be available.
With the chapter rail selected, there's no Add chapter button in the toolbar. Riverside assumes you're working on the existing chapter, not creating a new one.
Click somewhere empty above the timeline to deselect, and the button reappears.
Deselect, position the playhead, then click Add chapter. The tooltip confirms it — this button only shows up when a new chapter can actually be inserted.
The chapter lands exactly at the playhead. It doesn't snap to paragraph breaks or respect the transcript's structure — it goes precisely where you put it. Then double-click to name it, and it shows up in the transcript at whatever phrase Riverside considers the matching break point.
## Why chapters are worth the effort
Navigation inside the editor is the obvious payoff, but it's not my main reason. I build chapters because they publish.
YouTube, Spotify, and most podcast players read timestamped chapter lists and turn them into clickable segments in the player. Your audience gets a table of contents: they can skip to the part they came for, or jump ahead if a section isn't for them. On a long episode that's the difference between someone bouncing at 40 seconds and someone finding the one answer they needed.
There's a second benefit that's becoming more useful. When you ask AI to pull clips or summaries out of an episode, a chaptered episode gives it structure to work with. It understands where topics start and end instead of guessing from a wall of text — and the clips it picks are better for it.
## Export chapters to YouTube and Spotify
Getting the list out takes one click. In the editor, open the three-dot menu above the transcript.
Copy chapters list puts the whole thing on your clipboard, timestamps included. The same menu also exports the transcript, subtitles, and your comments.
Paste it anywhere and you'll see the format is already exactly what the platforms expect — timestamp first, title after.
No cleanup needed. Each line is a timestamp followed by the chapter title, which is precisely the format YouTube parses.
Drop that block into your YouTube description and YouTube converts it into chapters automatically. It's one of the pieces I always include when I [prepare metadata for an episode](https://cotovan.com/post/quick-youtube-metadata-riverside/).
In the description the timestamps become clickable links. YouTube picks this up automatically — there's no separate chapters field to fill in.
And in the player, viewers get the full chapter list with thumbnails.
The same chapters, rendered in the YouTube player. Viewers can browse the episode and jump straight to the section they want.
The same paste works for [Spotify](https://cotovan.com/post/add-video-spotify-podcasts-riverside-workaround/) and other platforms that support timestamped chapters — one list, reused everywhere.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## The workflow, end to end
Put together, this is how the two features hand off to each other:
1. **While recording:** press **M** whenever something matters. Add a note if you have a spare second; a bare marker is fine if you don't.
2. **In the editor:** work through the markers in the Comments sidebar, resolve them as you handle them, and hide the layer when you want a clean timeline.
3. **Chapters:** start from what the AI generated. Rename the ones that don't read well, move the ones that landed early, delete the ones that don't earn their place, and add your own — from the transcript or the timeline, whichever you're already in.
4. **Publishing:** Copy chapters list, paste into your YouTube description and your podcast host, done.
Markers won't become chapters on their own — that translation is your job. But that's the point: the markers are the hints you left yourself while you were too busy talking to think about structure, and chapters are what you do with those hints afterwards.
The [redesigned Riverside editor](https://cotovan.com/post/riversides-new-editor-a-complete-walkthrough-of-the-redesigned-workspace/) made this whole thing much lighter to manage. Adding a chapter used to feel like a detour; now it's a double-click and it doesn't break my flow. If you're new to the platform and want to see how the rest of it fits together, my full [Riverside guides and resources](https://cotovan.com/riverside) are a good place to start.
## Related guides
[Riverside's New Editor: A Complete Walkthrough of the Redesigned WorkspaceA full tour of Riverside's rebuilt editor: the new project sidebar, resizable panels, AI workflow toggles, version history, free-form layouts, the frame-accurate timeline, transcript corrections, motiCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riversides-new-editor-a-complete-walkthrough-of-the-redesigned-workspace/)
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit. In this comprehensive gCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
[How to Zoom and Pan the Riverside Timeline with Your MouseNavigating the Riverside timeline with a mouse is faster than you'd think — if you know two shortcuts. Zoom In and Out Hold Cmd (Mac) or Ctrl (Windows) and scroll your mouse wheel to zoom in and ouCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/)
[How I prepare metadata for YouTube quickly using RiversideI walk through the exact steps I follow so you can replicate the same process and prepare metadata for YouTube without overworking each upload.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/quick-youtube-metadata-riverside/)
[How to Navigate Faster Between Edits in Riverside StudioWhen you have multiple edits inside a single Riverside project, switching between them used to require going back to the project page each time. Riverside's updated editor now lets you navigate betweeCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-navigate-faster-between-edits-in-riverside-studio/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Add B-Roll in Riverside: Overlay vs Insert to Timeline
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riverside-overlay-vs-insert-to-timeline/
Last updated: 2026-08-12T14:34:49.000Z
There is a bit of confusion around inserting videos and photos in Riverside. Sometimes you want a clip to sit *on top* of what you already have, playing at the same time as your episode. Other times you want it to take its own place in the main timeline, pushing everything else along to make room. Those are two completely different results, and Riverside handles them differently.
The good news is that both live in the same place, and once you know which gesture triggers which behaviour, you will feel right at home in the [new Riverside editor](https://cotovan.com/post/riversides-new-editor-a-complete-walkthrough-of-the-redesigned-workspace/). Here is how each one works, and when to reach for which.
## Overlay or timeline insert: the difference
An **overlay** is B-roll in the classic sense. The clip sits above your existing footage on its own track and plays simultaneously with your episode. Your audio keeps running underneath, your speakers keep talking, and the overlay covers part or all of the canvas.
An **insert** is a separate clip in the main timeline. Riverside makes room for it, pushes everything after it further along, and plays it on its own. Nothing plays underneath it. This is what you want for a pre-recorded advert, an intro, or any segment that needs its own slot in the show.
I have covered [adding images as B-roll using scenes](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riversides-new-editor-using-scenes/) before, but for video, I've made this separate guide, so let's walk through it properly.
## Method 1: click to add a video as an overlay
The fastest route is a single click, and the only thing you need to get right first is your playhead. Wherever the playhead sits is where the clip lands.
Open your media panel from the right-hand rail. You can pull from **Your media** — recordings, uploads, images, audio clips and anything from previous projects — or from **Stock**. It genuinely does not matter which source you use; the behaviour is identical.
Your media holds recordings, uploads, images and audio from every project. Before you click anything, check where the playhead is sitting.
The Stock panel works exactly the same way. Same click, same drag, same two drop zones.
Now click the clip you want. Riverside drops it in at the playhead, on a track above your existing video, and it immediately covers the canvas.
One click and the clip lands at the playhead as an overlay, sitting on its own track above the episode.
At full size it hides everything underneath, which makes it look like a timeline insert. It isn't. Grab a corner handle and pull it in, and you will see your episode still playing behind it. You can [resize, reposition and crop](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/) the overlay however you like on the canvas.
Shrink the overlay and the truth shows: both the B-roll and your episode are playing at the same time.
## Method 2: drag it in and pick your drop zone
Clicking always gives you an overlay. If you want the other behaviour, don't click — **drag**.
Press and hold on the clip in the media or Stock panel and start dragging it towards the canvas. As soon as you do, Riverside splits the canvas into two labelled regions: **Add overlay** across the top, and **Insert to timeline** across the bottom.
Start dragging and the canvas offers you two choices. The top region overlays; the bottom strip inserts into the main timeline.
Drop it on the lower strip and Riverside makes room for it in the main timeline, pushes the rest of the show along, and places the clip in its own slot. That is exactly the behaviour you want for a recorded advert or a [sponsorship read you produced separately](https://cotovan.com/post/insert-a-sponsorship-ad-in-riverside-with-b-roll-and-music/) — you don't want that talking over your episode.
Dropped on "Insert to timeline", the clip takes its own place at the playhead and everything after it shifts along.
## Method 3: split the clip and insert with precision
Dragging to the timeline drops the clip at the playhead, which is fine for the top of the show. When you need something dropped at an exact point in the middle of a conversation, make the room yourself first.
Park the playhead where you want the break, select the clip, and split it. Press **S** on the keyboard, or click the Split button in the toolbar above the timeline.
Split the clip at the playhead with the toolbar button or the S shortcut. Now you have two clips and a seam between them.
Now [zoom in on the timeline](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/) and hover your mouse over that seam. A small **plus** button appears on the split. Move the playhead out of the way if it is sitting on top of the seam and hiding the button.
Click the plus and Riverside asks what you would like to drop in: Stock, Music, Text, Upload, Your media, a New scene, a chapter marker, or an empty section.
The plus button on a split opens every insert option at once — including uploading a fresh file straight into that gap.
Pick your source — I'll use Stock here — and choose the clip. It lands precisely in the gap you created, not at the playhead, not at the start, exactly where you split. This is also the route to take when you want to drop in a file you edited elsewhere and re-uploaded, or a piece you already used in another project. The same menu handles [intros, outros and music beds](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/) too.
The clip drops into the gap you made, sitting cleanly between the two halves of the split.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## You can still stack an overlay on top
These methods are not mutually exclusive. Once you have inserted a clip into the main timeline, you can still drag another piece of media in and drop it on **Add overlay** — and it will play on top of whatever is underneath at that point.
Overlay track on top, main timeline underneath. Nothing stops you from using both in the same spot.
## Where you place it decides whether it gets a transcript
This is the part that catches people out, and it is worth committing to memory.
A clip sitting on the overlay track will **not** produce a transcript. Even if it has audio, and even if that audio contains speech, it will not appear in the transcript panel and you will not be able to text-edit it.
If you need a clip to be transcribed and editable by text, two things have to be true: it has to go into the **bottom track**, in the main timeline, and it has to have arrived in Riverside through **Recordings**. That is the pathway that triggers transcription. A clip pulled from Stock, or dropped in from somewhere else, will not be transcribed — there is no way to force it at the moment. Riverside will, however, happily [transcribe your own files](https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside/) once they come in through the right door.
## The takeaway
Two rules cover almost everything:
- **Set the playhead first, then drag.** Dragging gives you the choice between overlay and timeline insert, so you decide the behaviour instead of guessing at it. Clicking always gives you an overlay.
- **For precise placement, make the room first.** Split the clip where you want the break, hover the seam, click the plus, and pick your source. Stock, uploads, media from previous projects — it all goes in the same way.
Everything else — resizing, cropping, repositioning — you can do after the fact on the canvas. The only decision you cannot undo casually is whether the clip lives on the overlay track or in the main timeline, because that is what determines transcription.
If you are still setting things up, you can [try Riverside here](https://cotovan.com/riverside). And if you would like to learn Riverside with me one-on-one, I offer [coaching sessions](https://cotovan.com/coaching) — complete beginner to advanced, the new editor, and whatever you are currently stuck on.
## Related guides
[How to Add B-Roll in Riverside's New Editor Using ScenesHow do you drop a B-roll clip, an image, or a video on top of just one part of a podcast episode, hide the host and guest for that section, and do it without cropping, stretching, or forcing the mediaCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riversides-new-editor-using-scenes/)
[Insert a sponsorship ad in Riverside with B-roll and musicInsert a sponsor or coaching ad into a Riverside episode, even when the ad is just audio and an image. Add it to the timeline, lay an image over it as B-roll, balance the audio, and finish with music Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/insert-a-sponsorship-ad-in-riverside-with-b-roll-and-music/)
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit. In this comprehensive gCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
[How to Add Intros, Outros, Hooks, and Music in RiversideIn this tutorial, I walk through the complete workflow for adding intros, outros, hooks, background music, and YouTube end screens to a podcast episode in Riverside. Whether you record your intro dirCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/)
[How to Use Riverside Scene Templates to Speed Up Podcast EditingEvery time you start a new episode edit in Riverside, do you find yourself rebuilding the same scene layouts from scratch? Speaker name overlays, side-by-side arrangements, solo speaker close-ups — itCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-riverside-scene-templates-to-speed-up-podcast-editing/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Riverside's New Editor: A Complete Walkthrough of the Redesigned Workspace
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/riversides-new-editor-a-complete-walkthrough-of-the-redesigned-workspace/
Last updated: 2026-08-07T17:50:54.000Z
Riverside has rebuilt its editor, and the headline change is not a single feature — it is the whole workspace. The old editor could feel slow and cramped: I would reload the page more often than I want to admit, and jumping between edits meant leaving the editor entirely.
The rebuilt one is quick, and almost everything I used to leave the editor for now lives inside it.
Below is the full tour: where every panel lives, what moved, what is genuinely new, and how to set the workspace up so you have room to actually edit. If you are new to Riverside, you can [try it here](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
## Getting into the editor
Open a project, go to the **Edits** tab, and click any edit. That drops you straight into the editor with the transcript, canvas, and timeline ready to go. The load is fast enough that you can treat edits as disposable — open one, look at it, jump to another — which was never really practical before.
## The new sidebar puts the whole project in one place
The left sidebar is the biggest structural change. It shows the project name at the top, and underneath it every asset that belongs to that project: source files, edits, Magic Clips, exports, assets, show notes, and snapshots. You no longer have to exit to the recordings tab to find a file.
The sidebar lists everything in the project. Source files at the top, then every edit you have made, each with a thumbnail and a last-edited timestamp.
### Source files
Expand a recording to see its individual tracks. Click the three dots next to a track and you can add it to the timeline, start a fresh edit from it, translate it, or rename it. The download submenu is the useful one: raw video, aligned video, raw audio, compressed audio, and enhanced audio are all one click away.
Every version of a track is downloadable from inside the editor — raw, aligned, compressed, or Magic Audio enhanced.
### Edits
This is where you will spend most of your time. Every edit in the project is listed, regardless of type, and switching between them takes a fraction of a second. Click the **Edits** folder itself to see them all laid out at once.
Two habits worth building here. First, when you [start a new edit](https://cotovan.com/post/create-new-riverside-edit-from-existing-one-without-starting-over/) — via the three dots on a source file, then **Edit** — it opens immediately without kicking you out of the editor. Second, **rename it right away**. Riverside names new edits sequentially, so you will end up with Edit 19, Edit 20, Edit 21 and no idea which was which. Right-click the entry in the sidebar, or click the name at the top, and give it something meaningful. It updates everywhere instantly.
The per-edit menu handles renaming, duplicating, exporting, and copying a preview link without leaving the editor.
If the thumbnails take up too much room, click the three-lines icon above the list and switch to the compact list view — smaller thumbnails, more names on screen. You can also drag the sidebar wider when file names get long.
### Magic Clips, exports, assets, and snapshots
Magic Clips get their own folder. Open the folder to see them all, then use the three dots on any clip to export it, copy a preview link, rename, duplicate, or move it to another project.
Exports lists every version you have rendered from the project. From each one you can share it, add it to your schedule, download the file, resume editing it, or copy a preview link. Assets holds your show notes and everything else the AI generated, and Snapshots collects the stills captured during recording.
The full folder structure. Everything in the project is one click from the editor, which makes moving between edits far quicker than it used to be.
## Make room: collapse, resize, and rearrange
The old editor felt claustrophobic. This one does not have to. Use the button at the top of the sidebar to collapse it, close whichever tool panel is open on the right, and collapse the timeline from its own button. What is left is a wide-open editing area.
With both side panels closed you get the transcript and canvas at full width.
Every panel is also resizable. If you are working purely on text, shrink the video preview. If you are checking framing, make the canvas larger. And you can drag the timeline up to give it real height — worth doing, because the new timeline holds a lot more than it used to.
## Turn automatic AI workflows on or off
By default, Riverside starts generating Magic Clips, Magic segments, a Magic episode, show notes, and more the moment you stop recording. Plenty of people do not want that — you would rather edit the episode first and then cut clips from the finished version.
You can now switch all of it off. At the top of the sidebar, click [**Personalize**](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-turn-riverside-made-for-you-ai-workflows-on-or-off/) and open the **Workflows** tab. Every workflow has its own toggle.
Each workflow can run automatically, be disabled, or sit somewhere in between. This is the same set of controls covered in my guide to [turning Made For You workflows on or off](${P}/how-to-turn-riverside-made-for-you-ai-workflows-on-or-off/).
If you keep a workflow on, expand it and you can shape exactly what it produces. For a Magic episode that means ratio, layout, whether your brand gets applied, how aggressively pauses are removed, whether [filler words are stripped](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-filler-words-in-riverside-ai-manual/), Smart Mute, Magic Audio, and hooks — each with its own parameters.
Expanding a workflow exposes every setting it uses. Set it once and every future clip follows the same recipe.
This is where the time saving lives. If you produce twenty social clips a month and apply the same four adjustments to each, define them once here and stop clicking. There is more on tailoring the AI to your own style in my guide to [personalizing AI responses and automations](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-personalize-ai-responses-and-automations-in-riverside/).
## Words on the timeline
Words now appear on the timeline next to the waveform. Expand the timeline, zoom in, and you will see the individual words sitting on each track.
Clicking a word selects the exact region of audio it occupies.
Click a word and it selects the region of audio that corresponds to it. To select a range, either click and drag across the timeline, or click the first word, hold **Shift**, and click the last one — the selection follows.
## Aspect ratio and the audio-only view
The aspect ratio selector sits in the top bar. Switch between 16:9 for YouTube and Spotify, 1:1 for LinkedIn, X and Instagram, or 9:16 for Shorts, Reels and TikTok, and the canvas rearranges itself.
There is also an Audio only mode that hides the canvas entirely.
Audio only hides the video so you can concentrate on the sound. Nothing is destroyed — switch back to 16:9 and the canvas returns exactly as it was.
## Version history saves you from yourself
This one has rescued me more than once. Click the small cloud icon next to the edit name to open **Version history**. Riverside takes snapshots as you work, roughly every fifteen minutes, and groups the changes made in that window together.
Snapshots are grouped by time — expand one to see the individual versions inside it, then preview and restore any of them.
Expand a snapshot and you will see it contains several individual versions. You can preview each one and restore it. Say you have already removed filler words and set your layout, then realise you deleted something you needed two hours ago — you can go back to that version. Restoring does discard the edits made after that point, so preview before you commit.
Version history is also broken down by user. On your own it is all you; add collaborators through the collaborator add-on and every snapshot shows who made it.
## The tools rail on the right
All the tools live in a vertical rail on the right edge.
**Co-Creator** sits at the top. It is the AI chat: ask it to do something and it does it, mostly by driving the same tools you can operate manually. It will remove filler words, generate an image, find B-roll, or pull out a clip on a given topic. It is the same assistant behind [AI thumbnails](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-ai-thumbnails-in-riverside-with-co-creator/).
**AI tools** are the manual equivalents: remove pauses, remove filler words, find fluff, Magic Audio for sound enhancement, Smart Mute to silence whoever is not speaking, Smart layouts for automatic camera switching, and eye contact to correct the gaze of someone reading off-screen.
The AI tools panel groups everything into refine content, sound clear, and look amazing.
**Brand** is where you upload your logo and set titles, fonts, colours, and captions, then apply the lot with one click. If you have not set that up yet, start with [customizing your logo and brand kit](https://cotovan.com/post/customize-logo-brand-riverside/).
**Tracks** gives you per-speaker controls: rename speakers, adjust volume when levels are uneven, apply Magic Audio and set its strength, use the equaliser, flip or rotate the video, adjust colour, and toggle eye contact for that track alone.
Track-level controls apply to the whole track, even where it has been split into sections.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free-form layouts on the canvas
This is the change I had been waiting for. Layouts used to be a short list of presets — side by side, full screen, a couple of variations. Now you can grab any video on the canvas and move, resize, crop, or rotate it freely.
One speaker filling the frame, the other rounded into a small talking-head circle in the corner — built by hand, not chosen from a preset.
A few things that make it workable rather than fiddly:
- Hold **Shift** to constrain rotation to right angles.
- Elements snap to each other and to the edges of the canvas as you drag.
- Round the corners of any clip to turn a rectangle into a circular talking head.
- Control the stacking order with move forward and move backwards, and add drop shadows.
If you mostly need to reframe rather than rebuild, my guide to [cropping, repositioning and reframing](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/) covers that side of it.
## The upgraded timeline
The timeline deserves a walkthrough of its own, but here is what has changed most.
**It goes down to the frame.** Expand it, expand the tracks, and you get a ruler marked in frames. Zoom with **Command** and the mouse wheel on a Mac, **Control** and wheel on Windows — the same [zoom and pan gestures](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/) as before.
Your arrow keys then step one frame at a time, which is what makes [precision editing](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/) practical.
Expanded tracks, words on the clips, and the lock button that keeps tracks in sync.
**You can move tracks independently.** There is a lock in the timeline toolbar that keeps tracks in sync. Unlock it, split a clip with **S**, and you can drag that piece anywhere on the timeline. This is the direct fix for [crosstalk](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-crosstalk-in-riverside-and-keep-both-speakers/): pull the two speakers apart so they stop talking over each other, then cover the video gap with a different scene or layout.
**Volume is per segment.** Isolate a section and change its level without touching the rest of the track — something the old editor could not do. Useful when one person spikes loud for a few seconds, or when you want to duck a passage rather than the whole recording.
**Overlays get their own tracks.** Add a text box from the Text panel and it lands as an overlay with its own track. Add another and it gets another track. They snap to clip boundaries as you resize them, and you can drag them between tracks — hover between two existing tracks and a line appears showing you are about to create a new one.
Each overlay lands on its own track, and they snap to clip edges when you resize them.
**Splitting is context-aware.** Select a single clip and press **S** to split just that clip. Click on the timeline without selecting anything and press **S** to split everything at the playhead — scene, tracks, and all. Select the scene bar and press **S** to create a scene boundary.
Between those and the plus button you can slot new material into the middle of an edit, whether that is B-roll, images, video, or [scene-based B-roll](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riversides-new-editor-using-scenes/).
## Transcript corrections and comments
Transcript editing still works the way it always has — select words, press Delete, they are gone. What is improved is proper correction.
Selecting text brings up the toolbar with the Correct option.
Select a word and click **Correct**, or click the word and press **C**, and a text box opens. Type the fix and press Enter. If pressing **C** grabs the wrong word, click just before the word you want so the playhead lands on it, then press **C** again.
Corrected words are shown underlined, so you can see at a glance what you have changed — and revert if you got it wrong. For a name that appears throughout an episode, correct it once and choose **Correct All** to replace every instance in one go.
Comments now show up in the timeline as well as the transcript. Comments you added during recording, comments from collaborators, AI comments, and fluff detections all appear as markers you can click through, reply to, or delete.
Comments appear as markers on the timeline, which makes review passes much faster.
If that starts to look cluttered, open the options and turn comments off in the transcript, in the timeline, or both. Worth knowing if you use [review links with clients](https://cotovan.com/post/send-review-links-clients-riverside/) and end up with a lot of feedback on one edit.
## Motion graphics
[Motion graphics](https://cotovan.com/post/add-ai-motion-graphics-in-riverside-2-0/) are animated assets you can drop in as overlays or B-roll — lower thirds, name plates, subscribe buttons, stat overlays, animated waveforms, match cuts.
Motion graphics are grouped into sets. Pick one, then customise it by describing what you want.
You do not edit them with sliders and colour pickers. You tell the AI what you want changed — the text, the colours — and it produces the version, which you then save and use. There is a fuller walkthrough in my post on [adding AI motion graphics](https://cotovan.com/post/add-ai-motion-graphics-in-riverside-2-0/).
## Export, share, and publish
The Export panel is broadly what it was, with everything gathered in one place. Export and download the current edit, copy a link, embed it on your site if your plan allows, or publish it as an episode if you [host your podcast with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/).
Export, sharing, collaboration, and scheduling all sit in the same panel.
Underneath that: share for review so people can comment on the edit, invite an editor to work on it, share straight to YouTube, and schedule social posts, episodes, and meetings. Magic Clips and social clips can be scheduled from here too, which pairs with the [content planner](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-content-planner-schedule-social-media-posts-inside-riverside/).
One thing lives elsewhere: the transcript downloads. Use the three dots above the transcript for download transcript, download subtitles, copy transcript, copy chapters list, and copy comments. The chapters list is the one to remember if you have set markers.
The transcript menu sits above the transcript rather than inside Export.
## The new music library and custom fades
The audio library has been replaced. There is a new Riverside music library with something that was badly missing before: **search**. You can also filter by mood, style and genre, preview tracks, and favourite the ones you use repeatedly so they surface first in every future edit.
Search, filters, favourites, and ready-made collections. If you imported your own music into the project, that is still available too.
Click the plus on a track to insert it at the playhead. From there it behaves like any other clip: drag it along the timeline, move it between tracks, and split it with **S**.
Combine that with per-segment volume and you can finally do proper music ducking by hand — start loud, drop the level when the speech begins, bring it back up at the end. Split the music, set each segment's level, done.
The fades are the other real improvement. You used to be limited to one, two, or three seconds. Now a fade can run up to roughly the full length of the clip — a sixty-second fade in is possible if that is what the piece needs. Open **Volume & Effects** on a music clip and set fade in and fade out independently.
Three segments of the same track: the first fades out, the middle stays low under the speech, and the third fades back in and out again. The slope on each clip shows you where the fade starts.
The slope drawn on the clip tells you where the fade begins and ends, so you can judge it by eye. If you are building an episode from scratch, this pairs with [adding background music](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-riverside/) and [assembling intros, outros and hooks](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/).
## Where this leaves the workflow
The short version: apart from recording and publishing, you can now do essentially everything from inside the editor. Tools, project files, edits, clips, exports, music, and assets are all one click away, and the interface gets out of the way when you want space.
The timeline is my favourite part — frame-level precision, independent track movement, segment volume, and overlays on their own tracks change what is realistically editable inside Riverside rather than in a separate NLE. I have dedicated guides coming on the timeline and on the sidebar tools.
## Related guides
[How to Add B-Roll in Riverside's New Editor Using ScenesHow do you drop a B-roll clip, an image, or a video on top of just one part of a podcast episode, hide the host and guest for that section, and do it without cropping, stretching, or forcing the mediaCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riversides-new-editor-using-scenes/)
[How to Turn Riverside Made for You AI Workflows On or OffUntil now, Riverside started working the second you stopped recording. Finish a session, upload a file, walk away for coffee — and by the time you came back there were magic clips, a magic episode, shCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-turn-riverside-made-for-you-ai-workflows-on-or-off/)
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit. In this comprehensive gCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
[Add AI Motion Graphics in Riverside 2.0Riverside 2.0 adds a Motion panel that lets you build animated titles and motion graphics right inside the editor — and instead of hunting through properties panels and color pickers, you customize evCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/add-ai-motion-graphics-in-riverside-2-0/)
[How to Fix Crosstalk in Riverside and Keep Both SpeakersTwo ways to fix overlapping speech in Riverside — mute and hide one speaker, or duplicate the overlap and play both voices back-to-back so you don't lose either one.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-crosstalk-in-riverside-and-keep-both-speakers/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Change Your Riverside Studio Invitation Link
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-change-your-riverside-studio-invitation-link/
Last updated: 2026-07-30T14:43:10.000Z
Yes, you can finally change your [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) Studio invitation link — the link you send to guests and producers so they can join you and record. For a long time this was fixed at whatever slug Riverside generated when the Studio was created. After a lot of requests, Riverside added the ability to edit it, so you can now give each Studio a personalized, branded URL.
That matters more than it sounds. If you renamed a Studio months ago, or you spun one up quickly for a one-off session, the URL you're handing to guests probably has nothing to do with your show. Here's exactly how to change it, and — just as important — what to check before you hit Save so you don't lock anyone out of a session you've already booked.
## Switch to the right Studio first
The Studio link is a per-Studio setting, not an account-wide one. If you have [more than one Studio in your account](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-studios-vs-projects-how-to-organize-your-account-the-right-way/), you have to be inside the Studio you want to change before you go anywhere near Settings — otherwise you'll happily edit the URL of the wrong show.
Use the Studio switcher at the top of the left sidebar. Click it and you'll see every Studio in your account listed out. I keep separate ones for coaching calls, live streaming, and individual podcasts, so I pick the one I actually want — in this case a test Studio called New Podcast.
Click the Studio switcher at the top of the sidebar and select the Studio whose invitation link you want to change. If you only have one Studio, you can skip this step.
## Open Studio settings
Once you're in the right Studio, go to the bottom left corner and click your avatar. In that menu you'll find **Settings**.
Click your avatar in the bottom-left corner, then choose Settings.
Inside Settings, open **Studio settings** under Audio & Video. That page is where all the per-Studio options live, and it's worth a browse on its own — I've walked through [every setting on this page and what I recommend](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/) in a separate guide. The section you want here is **Studio link**, marked with a NEW badge.
The Studio link section shows your current URL. The description says it plainly: changing it updates all invite links.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Guest, producer, and audience links are not the same
Just below the Studio link you'll see **Invite links**, with a role dropdown next to it. This is the part people miss. The link you copy depends on which role you pick, and each one behaves differently: a Guest joins for a recorded session, a Producer helps run the session and manage settings without being recorded, and an Audience member watches live and chats if you're running a webinar. See here for the [invite roles explained](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-roles-guest-producer-audience/).
Switch the role dropdown before you copy. Guest, Producer, and Audience links point at the same Studio but grant completely different permissions.
So copy the Guest link for the people you're interviewing, and the Producer link for whoever is running the board. If you want the full breakdown of what each role can and can't do, I've covered [how to pick the right invite role every time](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-roles-guest-producer-audience/). And if you just need the fastest path to getting someone into a session, see [how to quickly invite guests to record](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-quickly-invite-guests-to-record-in-riverside/).
## Set a unique Studio URL
Click into the Studio link field and type the slug you want after `riverside.com/studio/`. I changed mine to `cristi-new-podcast`.
Riverside checks the slug as you type, and it has to be unique. My reading is that it's unique across the entire Riverside platform, not just your account — so if someone else already claimed the name you want, you can't have it. To test that, I tried `80s-guys`, which is the slug on another Studio of mine, and it rejected it straight away with *Link already in use*.
Slugs have to be unique. When the name is taken, the field turns red, you get Link already in use, and the Save button stays disabled.
Keep the slug short and readable, and lean toward something that [matches the branding](https://cotovan.com/post/customize-logo-brand-riverside/) your guests already associate with your show. This is a link real people will look at in an email or a calendar invite.
## You can only change it once per week
This is the constraint to plan around: Riverside only lets you change the Studio slug **once per week**. If you've already changed it recently and try again, you'll get *You can only change your slug once per week. Try again later.*
Change it once and you're locked for a week. Decide on the exact slug you want before you save, because you don't get a quick second attempt.
So treat this as a one-shot decision. Sit with the name for a minute, check the spelling and the hyphens, and only then save.
## Save and verify the new link
When the field is valid, the Save button lights up. Click it and the change applies immediately. The thing to check right afterwards is the Invite links line underneath — it should now show your new slug with the invite token appended, which confirms Riverside really did propagate the change to every role's link.
After saving, the invite link below picks up the new slug. That's your confirmation that guest, producer, and audience links were all rewritten.
From that moment on, that's your invitation link. Copy it from here whenever you need to bring someone into the Studio.
## Don't break sessions you've already booked
Here's the part I'd underline. Changing the slug breaks the old link. If you've already emailed the old URL to a guest for a session next Tuesday, that link will not work anymore and they will not be able to join.
My recommendation: only change the slug when you have nothing on the calendar. If you have [recordings already scheduled](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-schedule-podcast-recordings/) — and especially if you've [booked several sessions in advance](https://cotovan.com/post/schedule-multiple-recording-sessions-in-advance-with-riversidefm/) — wait until the diary is clear, then change it. If you can't wait, change it and immediately re-send the new link to everyone who has the old one.
## Update Calendly and any other integrations
The same problem applies anywhere you've saved the link outside Riverside. I use Calendly, and Calendly lets you attach a custom location link so that anyone who books a call with me gets the Studio URL in their confirmation. That works beautifully — until you change the slug and Calendly keeps handing out a dead link.
So before you save, make a quick list of everywhere the old URL lives: your booking pages, email templates, guest onboarding docs, [automations](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-personalize-ai-responses-and-automations-in-riverside/), Zapier or Make scenarios, pinned Slack messages. Then go update every one of them right after you change it. Nothing in Riverside will do this for you.
## The Studio name and the Studio URL are separate
One last thing: at the top of the same Settings page is **Studio info** with a **Name** field. That name is just the label you see in the Riverside interface, and it is completely independent of the URL. I renamed the Studio to "Cristi's New Podcast" while the slug stayed `cristi-new-podcast`.
The Name field and the Studio link are separate. Rename the Studio as often as you like — only the URL has to be unique and only the URL is rate-limited.
That means you can freely rename a Studio, use spaces and apostrophes, and change it as often as you want. The uniqueness requirement and the once-per-week limit apply only to the URL.
## Worth doing
It's a small quality-of-life improvement, but a welcome one. I create Studios for all sorts of purposes and then decide later what they're actually for, so being able to bring the invitation link in line with the show name is genuinely useful. Just pick your slug deliberately, change it when your calendar is empty, and go update Calendly and anything else holding the old URL.
If you're setting up your recording workflow from scratch, you can [try Riverside here](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
## Related guides
[Riverside Invite Roles Explained: How to Pick the Right Role Every TimeThis quick guide walks you through the three role types - Guest, Producer, and Audience - how they behave during a session, and exactly when to choose each one.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-roles-guest-producer-audience/)
[How to Quickly Invite Guests to Record in RiversideGetting guests into your Riverside recording studio is quick — you can share a link or send an email invite directly from the app. Here's how to do both. Open the Invite Panel From your Riverside dCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-quickly-invite-guests-to-record-in-riverside/)
[How to Invite an Editor to Your Riverside Account Without Sharing Full AccessRiverside’s Editor add-on lets you bring in an outside editor to work on your recordings without giving them access to your full account. Here’s how it works and how to set it up. What the Editor AdCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-invite-an-editor-to-your-riverside-account-without-sharing-full-access/)
[Riverside Studios vs Projects: How to Organize Your Account the Right WayA common mistake I see in Riverside is creating a new studio for every episode. It seems like a reasonable way to stay organized — but it causes real problems down the line. Riverside has a better strCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-studios-vs-projects-how-to-organize-your-account-the-right-way/)
[Best Settings for Your Riverside Studio: A Feature-by-Feature GuideThe best settings for your Riverside recording studio to ensure your podcasts, livestreams, and recordings are of the highest quality.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Turn Riverside Made for You AI Workflows On or Off
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-turn-riverside-made-for-you-ai-workflows-on-or-off/
Last updated: 2026-07-25T15:17:50.000Z
Until now, [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) started working the second you stopped recording. Finish a session, upload a file, walk away for coffee — and by the time you came back there were magic clips, a magic episode, show notes, hooks, social captions and a blog post already sitting in your project. All generated with AI, all before you had touched a single frame.
That was a common complaint I heard from people using the platform: *"I haven't edited the episode yet. Why is it making clips out of a rough cut?"*
Riverside has now fixed that. You can tell it to hold off, do your editing first, and generate the AI assets afterwards — either automatically or on demand. Here is exactly where those controls live and how to set them up.
## What Riverside Generates Automatically
Open any project and click the **Made for You** tab. If you have recorded recently, you will find a stack of assets already created: magic clips, a full magic episode, magic segments, hooks, show notes, a blog post, social captions and more.
The Made for You tab fills up on its own — magic segments, clips, and episodes all created from the raw recording.
None of that is wrong, exactly. The problem is timing. These assets are built from the *unedited* recording, so the [magic clips](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-reveal-more-content-in-a-riverside-magic-clip/) include the false starts, the magic episode includes the bit where your guest's dog barked, and the show notes summarise a conversation you were planning to trim by ten minutes. You end up regenerating everything anyway.
## Where the Personalize Controls Live
Scroll to any section header in the Made for You tab — Magic Episodes, Magic Clips, Magic Segments, it does not matter which — and you will see a **Personalize** button next to it.
Every Made for You section has its own Personalize button, and they all open the same panel.
Click it and the Personalize panel opens on the **Workflows** tab. Riverside calls these post-recording jobs "workflows" now, and the panel sums up what it does in one line: choose what to create, customise how it is generated, and decide when it runs.
The Workflows tab, split into Recommended and Additional. Each row is one thing Riverside can build for you.
The list is split into two groups. **Recommended** holds the heavy hitters — Magic episode, Magic clips, Magic hooks, Show notes and Blog post. **Additional** holds everything else. If you have already spent time [personalizing AI responses and automations in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-personalize-ai-responses-and-automations-in-riverside/), this is the same panel, now with an on/off switch attached to every entry.
## The Two Buttons That Control Every Workflow
On the right of each row are two small icon buttons. This is the new part, and it is the whole point of the update.
The **circular-arrows icon** means *generate automatically after each recording*. That is Riverside's old behaviour, and it is what the Recommended workflows are set to by default.
Hover the circular-arrows button and Riverside tells you exactly what it does: generate automatically after each recording.
The **circle-slash icon** means *only generate when you choose*.
The circle-slash button does not delete the workflow. It just waits for you to ask.
## Turning the Automatic Workflows Off
Click the circle-slash button on every workflow you do not want running unattended. I turned off Magic episode, Magic clips and Magic hooks, because those are the ones I want to build myself after the edit is locked.
Three workflows switched to manual. Show notes and Blog post are still set to run automatically.
Scroll down past the Recommended group and you will find the **Additional** list: Magic segments, Episode title, Episode description, Top insights, Newsletter email, Instagram caption, X thread and LinkedIn post.
In my studio, most of these were already set to manual, and yours may be too — but check, because anything left on the circular-arrows setting will fire after your next session.
The Additional group. Nine more workflows, each with the same two-button control.
Two things to know about how these settings behave:
- **They apply to future recordings.** Whatever is already sitting in your Made for You tab stays there. The next session is the one that respects your new settings.
- **Turning things off may speed up processing.** Riverside is doing less work in the background after each recording, so you are not waiting on jobs you were never going to use.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## The Same Controls Are Inside the Editor
You do not have to go back to the project page every time. Open a project, go to the **Recordings** tab and [start an edit from your recording](https://cotovan.com/post/create-new-riverside-edit-from-existing-one-without-starting-over/). That opens [Riverside's new editor](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riversides-new-editor-using-scenes/), which is noticeably faster than the old one.
In the editor, look at the sidebar on the left. If it is hidden, open it with the panel button in the top-left corner. At the top of that sidebar, above your source files and edits, sit **Brand** and **Personalize**.
The editor sidebar carries the same Brand and Personalize entries, so you never have to leave your edit.
Click **Personalize** and you get the identical panel, with every choice you made earlier still remembered.
## Customising What Each Workflow Actually Produces
Turning a workflow off is only half of it. Click the chevron on the right of any row — on or off, it does not matter — and the workflow expands into its own settings.
Magic episode expanded. Eight settings that decide what the AI rough cut looks like before it is ever built.
There is a **Reset to default** link at the top of every expanded workflow, so you can experiment freely and get back to the starting point in one click. Here is what the Magic episode settings do.
### Ratio
Pick the shape of the output: **16:9** for YouTube and Spotify, **1:1** for LinkedIn, X and Instagram, **9:16** for Shorts, Reels and TikToks, or **Audio only** if you do not publish video at all.
The Ratio dropdown labels each option with the platforms it suits, including an Audio only choice for audio-first shows.
### Layout
The Layout panel decides how Riverside frames your speakers. Choose **Fill** or **Fit**, then either let **Smart layouts** auto-switch views based on who is talking, or pick a fixed look — Full screen, Picture in picture, Split screen or Grid.
Smart layouts comes with a Rhythm slider — drag it to make Riverside cut between speakers more often or more rarely.
The **Rhythm** slider is the one worth playing with. Slide it one way and the camera changes more often, slide it the other way and it settles down. If you would rather do this by hand, turn Smart layouts off, set it to Grid, and [save your own scene layouts](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/) instead.
### Brand, Pauses, Filler Words and Audio
The remaining rows are straight toggles:
- **Brand** — applies your logo, colours and lower thirds automatically. Set this up once in the [Brand Kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/) and every magic episode picks it up.
- **Remove pauses** — with a Balanced / more / less dropdown. If you prefer to [handle gaps and pauses yourself](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-and-restore-gaps-or-pauses-in-riverside/), switch it off.
- **Remove filler words** — the same idea for the ums and ahs. Worth knowing you can also [remove filler words manually](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-filler-words-in-riverside-ai-manual/) after the fact.
- **Smart mute** and **Magic audio** — both let you target all participants or specific ones.
- **Hooks** — adds an attention-grabbing opener pulled from the strongest moment in the conversation.
## Automation as a Head Start, Not a Replacement
Here is the way I think about it now. Go through your own editing routine and ask what you do to *every single episode*. If the answer is "tighten the gaps, strip the filler words, apply my brand, let the scenes switch on speaker" — that is four rounds of clicking you repeat every week, and Riverside can do all of it before you open the edits.
So configure those settings properly and leave Magic episode on. Turn off the workflows whose output you would rewrite anyway — the blog post, the social captions, the clips you want to pick yourself. You get a sensible rough cut waiting for you and nothing else cluttering the project.
None of it stops you editing. The magic episode is a starting point you open, adjust and finish like any other edit. It just means you start from something shaped like your show instead of a raw recording.
This is one of a run of improvements landing in the new editor I like — not another AI feature, just control over the ones that were already there.
## Related guides
[How to Personalize AI Responses and Automations in RiversideMake the Riverside AI and Automations Yours!Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-personalize-ai-responses-and-automations-in-riverside/)
[How to Reveal More Content in a Riverside Magic ClipHere's how to reveal more content around the magic clip and include the parts that were trimmed by Riverside.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-reveal-more-content-in-a-riverside-magic-clip/)
[How to Remove Filler Words in Riverside (AI + Manual)Removing filler words — the ums, uhs, and occasional "likes" — is one of the simplest ways to clean up a recording. Riverside does most of it automatically with AI, but there are some nuances worth knCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-filler-words-in-riverside-ai-manual/)
[How to Remove and Restore Gaps or Pauses in RiversideLong pauses and gaps can make podcast recordings feel slow and awkward. Riverside's Remove Pauses feature in the AI Producer panel lets you automatically cut gaps from your recording — and restore theCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-and-restore-gaps-or-pauses-in-riverside/)
[How to Add B-Roll in Riverside's New Editor Using ScenesHow do you drop a B-roll clip, an image, or a video on top of just one part of a podcast episode, hide the host and guest for that section, and do it without cropping, stretching, or forcing the mediaCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riversides-new-editor-using-scenes/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Bleep Words in Riverside: Mute a Speaker and Add a Censor Sound
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-bleep-words-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-07-16T15:24:57.000Z
One of the questions I get asked often about Riverside is a simple one: can I bleep a word? Maybe someone swears, maybe a name or a number needs to disappear, and you want to cover it with a beep while keeping the laughter, reactions, and everything else around it intact. The good news is that this is genuinely easy in Riverside's new editor, and I'll walk you through the whole thing step by step.
By the end you'll know how to mute just the speaker you want, drop in your own censor sound, and fine-tune the timing, trimming, fades, and volume so the beep sits cleanly in your edit. If you want to follow along in your own account, you can [try Riverside here](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
## Get a bleep or censor sound ready
Riverside's new editor doesn't have a built-in sound-effects library yet. The stock library currently holds music only, so a proper beep isn't in there (hopefully a sound-effects library is on the way). That means you'll bring your own bleep sound, and you only need to do this once.
Grab a free censor beep from Pixabay — [here's the exact one I use](https://pixabay.com/sound-effects/film-special-effects-censor-beep-1-372459/?ref=cotovan.com) — and save it somewhere handy. I renamed mine "Censor Beep" so it's easy to find later. We'll upload it into Riverside in a moment, and once it's in there it stays available for every future project.
## Select the words you want to bleep
Open your project and expand the timeline so you can see the audio clearly. Find the moment you want to cover, then select the words right in the transcript by dragging across them. As you do, you'll notice the matching section light up in the timeline below — the transcript and the timeline are linked, so selecting text selects the audio.
Drag across the words in the transcript and the matching audio highlights in the timeline.
Here's the catch to watch for: if two people are talking over each other, selecting a phrase can grab both voices. In my example, I'm laughing while my guest is speaking, and I don't want to mute my own laughter — only his words. So the next step is telling Riverside exactly whose audio to silence.
## Mute only the speaker you want
With the words selected, click Mute. Riverside asks who you want to mute, and you simply pick the speaker — in my case that's my guest, leaving my own track untouched. This same idea of silencing one person while keeping the other is exactly how I [handle crosstalk in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-crosstalk-in-riverside-and-keep-both-speakers/), so it's a handy technique to have in your back pocket.
After you click Mute, Riverside asks who to silence — choose just the speaker you want and leave your own audio alone.
There's a second way to be even more surgical. Expand your tracks so each speaker sits on their own row — you can press **Shift+E** or use the Separate tracks option. Now you can make a selection on a single speaker's track and mute only that part, without touching anyone else. If you spend a lot of time working this way, my guide to [multi-track editing in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/) goes deeper on the separated-track workflow.
Press Shift+E to separate the tracks, then you can mute a section on just one speaker's row.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Fine-tune the muted section
Muting through the transcript is fast, but it isn't always perfectly precise — word-level alignment can be a little off, so the muted region might start or end slightly early or late. That's easy to fix. Expand your tracks again and you'll see the muted part shown as a hatched, highlighted block. Grab either edge and drag it to reveal or cover more of the audio until the mute lines up exactly where you want it.
The muted section shows as a hatched block — drag its edges to adjust exactly how much audio is silenced.
## Add your bleep sound
Now bring in the beep. On the right-hand side of the editor, open **Your media** and switch to the **Audio** tab. At the moment you can't drag a file straight from your computer into the panel, so use the **Upload** button and pick your censor sound. Once it uploads, it lives in Your media permanently — it'll stay there until you delete it.
Upload your beep once and it stays in Your Media, ready to reuse in any project.
To place it, move the playhead — the white marker — to the start of your muted section, then click the sound in Your media. It drops in right at the playhead. Don't worry about being exact yet; you can slide it left or right afterwards. The same upload-and-position routine is what I use when I [add background music in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-riverside/), so once you've got the hang of it here it carries over.
The beep drops onto its own audio track at the playhead position, right over the muted words.
## Bleep another word
Repeat the process for any other word. Select it in the transcript — say you want to cover the word "money" in your own sentence — and mute your own track this time.
A quick tip: don't hit Delete when you only want to mute, because deleting collapses the word and removes it from the edit. Mute keeps the timing intact and simply silences the audio.
If the muted word is short and hard to see, [zoom into the timeline](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/) so you can work precisely, then move the playhead to the start of the muted spot and click your beep in Your media to drop it in.
## Trim, position, fade, and set the volume
Short words rarely need the full length of a beep. If the sound runs longer than the word, grab the end of the clip and trim it back — you can drag either edge in. You can also grab the middle of the clip and slide it left or right so it lands earlier or later, lining the beep up with the exact syllable.
Trim the beep by dragging its edge, then slide it into position so it covers just the muted word.
For a smoother result, click the three dots on the sound clip to open Volume & Effects. There you can fade the beep in or out — keep in mind fades are set in whole seconds, so a beep shorter than a second can't really be faded, but a longer one can. In the same panel you can turn the volume down so the beep doesn't fight with laughter or anything else playing underneath it.
The three-dot menu opens Volume & Effects, where you can lower the beep's volume and add fades in whole-second steps.
## Reuse your beep anytime
That's the whole workflow: find your word, select it in the transcript, mute the right speaker, and cover it with a beep from Your media — then trim, position, fade, and balance the volume for a clean edit. Because your censor sound stays in Your media, you never have to hunt for it again; it's one click away in every project you open.
Find a bleep you like, upload it once, and you've got a repeatable way to censor words in Riverside without losing any of the audio around them.
## Related guides
[How to Add Background Music in Riverside.fm: A Step-by-Step TutorialHow to easily add background music using Riverside's new editor.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-riverside/)
[How to Fix Crosstalk in Riverside and Keep Both SpeakersTwo ways to fix overlapping speech in Riverside — mute and hide one speaker, or duplicate the overlap and play both voices back-to-back so you don't lose either one.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-crosstalk-in-riverside-and-keep-both-speakers/)
[Multi-Track Editing with Riverside.fm: A Feature-by-Feature GuideRiverside's powerful multi-track editing capabilities allow you to take complete control over your audio and video editing.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/)
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit . In this comprehensive Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
[How to Remove Filler Words in Riverside (AI + Manual)Removing filler words — the ums, uhs, and occasional "likes" — is one of the simplest ways to clean up a recording. Riverside does most of it automatically with AI, but there are some nuances worth knCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-filler-words-in-riverside-ai-manual/)
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Add B-Roll in Riverside's New Editor Using Scenes
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-b-roll-in-riversides-new-editor-using-scenes/
Last updated: 2026-07-08T15:29:27.000Z
**How do you drop a B-roll clip, an image, or a video on top of just one part of a podcast episode, hide the host and guest for that section, and do it *without* cropping, stretching, or forcing the media to full screen?**
**With the new editor that shipped as part of the Riverside 2.0 update, this is now a quick job. Let me walk you through the exact workflow.**
## The new Riverside editor
If you haven't opened [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) since the 2.0 launch, the editor looks and feels different. It is noticeably faster, the panels are flexible so you can adjust your workspace, and the three modes at the top — Scene, Layout, and Design — give you far more control than the old editor did. Everything below is done inside this editor on a short example edit.
The new editor: flexible panels, and the Scene / Layout / Design controls at the top right.
## The quick way to add media — and why it isn't enough
The obvious approach is to open the stock library (or your own uploads), pick an image or video, and click to add it. It lands on the timeline as a layer on top of your video. If that media happens to be a 16:9 clip, you can click the frame to fill the screen and it covers everything cleanly.
Adding a stock image is one click — but on its own it sits on top of your entire video.
The problem shows up the moment you use media with a different aspect ratio — a portrait photo, a square graphic, an off-ratio screenshot. Fill the frame and you either crop the image or distort it. Leave it at its native size and your own video is still visible behind it. And if you simply delete your video track to get rid of yourself, it disappears from the *entire* episode, not just this moment. That is where scenes come in.
## Isolate the change with a scene
A scene is a section of your edit that you can style independently from everything around it. To place B-roll over one segment only, you first need a scene wrapped around that exact segment.
The easiest way to create one is right in the transcript: select the words where you want the B-roll to start and end, click **Add**, and choose **New scene**.
Don't pick Stock or an image from this menu yet — you specifically want **New scene** first, so you have a boundary to drop the media into.
Select your text, click Add, then choose New scene — this wraps a scene around exactly the words you highlighted.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Read your scene boundaries in the timeline
Creating the scene doesn't change anything you can see in the preview yet, but look at the timeline at the bottom. You now have a scene break where your selection begins and another where it ends, with your segment highlighted between them. That highlighted region is the scene you'll be working inside.
Two scene breaks now bracket your selection in the timeline — this is the section you'll restyle.
One small thing I'm still hoping Riverside adds: scene breaks aren't marked in the transcript text itself yet, only in the timeline. For now, the timeline is where you confirm where a scene begins and ends.
## Drop your B-roll inside the scene
With the scene in place, go back to the stock library or your own media and click the image or video you want. Instead of covering the whole video, it snaps to the boundaries of the scene you defined — it starts and stops exactly where those scene breaks are. If you still had the text selection active when you clicked, it expands to that selection; if not, just make sure your playhead is inside the scene and the media will fill it.
The media now fills only this scene. Your own video is still behind it — the next step hides it.
## Hide the host so only the B-roll shows
To remove yourself from just this moment, click your video in the preview. Check the timeline as you do — it confirms the scene is selected, which means whatever you change affects this scene only.
Now delete the video. It doesn't leave your edit; Riverside simply hides it for this scene, and you can bring it back any time. The result: your B-roll fills the frame here, while you stay on screen everywhere else in the episode.
With the host video hidden for this scene, the B-roll fills the frame cleanly — no cropping, no distortion.
## Control the layout scene by scene
This per-scene control is the real power of the new editor. Move your playhead outside the scene and you're full screen again. Inside it, it's just the B-roll. And each scene remembers its own arrangement — you might be full screen in scene one, hidden in scene two, and picture-in-picture in the corner in scene three. Changing the layout in one scene never touches the others.
If you decide you'd rather show your video *beside* the image instead of hiding it, that's just as easy. Slide the picture to one side, deselect everything, and set the layout to **Solo Speaker** to bring your camera back in. If you have a guest, choose **One on One** instead and both of you return. The same idea lets you [style captions differently per scene](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-place-captions-differently-per-scene-in-riverside/) too.
Prefer both on screen? Set the layout to Solo Speaker or One on One to place your camera beside the B-roll.
## Crop and reposition each element
Once your video is back in the frame you can resize it, drag it into place, and zoom into your shot. Double-click the video (or click the crop icon) to enter crop mode, zoom in, and reposition — the alignment guides snap things into place. Click Done when you like it.
You can crop and reframe images exactly the same way. If you want to go deeper on this, I have a full guide on [cropping, repositioning, and reframing video in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/).
Double-click an element to enter crop mode, then zoom and reposition using the snapping guides.
## Adjust the timing when you change your mind
Timing isn't locked in. If you want the scene to start earlier or end later, grab a scene boundary in the timeline and drag it — the scene gets shorter or longer, and your speech and camera stay put.
One thing to know: stretching the scene won't automatically stretch the B-roll, because Riverside doesn't assume you want the media to fill the new space. Just grab the end of the image and extend it to the new boundary; it snaps into place there too. If you want more precision on where those breaks land, see my guide on [adjusting scene break locations in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-scene-break-location-in-riverside/).
Drag a scene boundary to retime the segment. Extend the B-roll to the new boundary and it snaps to fit.
## The recipe, in one line
So here's the whole answer: create a scene around the exact segment you want, drop your B-roll inside it so it stretches to the boundaries, then hide or reposition the person behind it. That's it. Scenes were always powerful, and the new editor makes them fast and flexible — you can even [save scene layouts to reuse later](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/), which is a huge time-saver once you settle on a look.
Have you tried the new Riverside editor yet? If not, give it a go — the speed difference alone is worth it. And if you get stuck on any of these steps, let me know and I'll put together a video for it.
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Related guides
[Insert a sponsorship ad in Riverside with B-roll and musicInsert a sponsor or coaching ad into a Riverside episode, even when the ad is just audio and an image. Add it to the timeline, lay an image over it as B-roll, balance the audio, and finish with music Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/insert-a-sponsorship-ad-in-riverside-with-b-roll-and-music/)
[How to Use Riverside Scene Templates to Speed Up Podcast EditingEvery time you start a new episode edit in Riverside, do you find yourself rebuilding the same scene layouts from scratch? Speaker name overlays, side-by-side arrangements, solo speaker close-ups — itCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-riverside-scene-templates-to-speed-up-podcast-editing/)
[How to Save and Reuse Scene Layouts in RiversideWhen you're editing a podcast or video interview in Riverside, the layout determines how speakers are arranged on screen. But you don't have to stick with the same layout for the entire episode. You cCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/)
[How to Adjust Scene Break Location in RiversideWhen Riverside automatically creates scenes from your recording, the scene breaks don't always land exactly where you want them. Maybe the break comes a second too early or cuts into a speaker's senteCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-scene-break-location-in-riverside/)
[Add AI Motion Graphics in Riverside 2.0Riverside 2.0 adds a Motion panel that lets you build animated titles and motion graphics right inside the editor — and instead of hunting through properties panels and color pickers, you customize evCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/add-ai-motion-graphics-in-riverside-2-0/)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Add AI Motion Graphics in Riverside 2.0
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/add-ai-motion-graphics-in-riverside-2-0/
Last updated: 2026-07-03T09:50:59.000Z
[Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) 2.0 adds a Motion panel that lets you build animated titles and motion graphics right inside the editor — and instead of hunting through properties panels and color pickers, you customize everything by simply telling the AI what you want.
In this guide I'll show you how I take a stock subscribe animation that comes included with the new Motion library, change the name, handle, colors, and avatar to match my channel, drop it onto the timeline, position it on the canvas, save it as a reusable scene, and then try a second prompt-style graphic — all without leaving Riverside.
## Where to find the Motion panel
Open any edit in the new Riverside editor and look at the toolbar running down the right-hand side. There's a new entry called **Motion**, sitting alongside [Co-Creator](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-ai-thumbnails-in-riverside-with-co-creator/), AI tools, [Brand](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/), Tracks, and the rest. Click it and the Motion graphics library slides open.
This isn't a traditional stock library. Everything here is animated and built to be personalized, and the graphics are organized into categories: Motion Sets, Stats & Waveforms, name tags, intros, and Subscribe and Follow buttons. What you see today is essentially version 1.0 of the panel — expect a lot more graphics, plus search and favorites, to show up over time, including ability to create your own from scratch (which sounds quite cool).
Click ****Motion** in the right-hand toolbar to open the graphics library. Notice the categories — Motion Sets, Stats & Waveforms, and more below.
## Pick a subscribe or follow graphic
Scroll down to the Subscribe and Follow buttons. These are the kind of animated call-to-action assets I used to build in an external tool and import — a real pain whenever I needed to change a single word. Now they live inside the editor. Pick one that fits your channel; for this walkthrough I'll grab a social profile follow pill.
The Subscribe and Follow category — animated channel widgets, follow pills, and subscribe cards you can customize.
## Customize it with AI in Co-Creator
Here's where it gets interesting. When you click a graphic, it doesn't just drop onto your timeline — it opens **Co-Creator**, the same AI assistant that [builds AI thumbnails in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-ai-thumbnails-in-riverside-with-co-creator/). Co-Creator previews the animation, tells you what it's looking at, and invites you to either add it as is or ask it to tweak the text, color, style, or anything else.
Clicking a graphic opens Co-Creator, which previews the animation and asks what you'd like to change.
Instead of clicking buttons, describe the change in plain language. I typed: *"Change the name to Cristi Cotovan, and the handle underneath to @graphicious."* Press Enter and Co-Creator works for a few seconds, generating a new version that matches exactly what you asked for. The result comes back in very high resolution — click the preview to see it larger.
Describe the change in plain language and Co-Creator rebuilds the graphic — here the name and handle now match my channel.
## Replace the channel avatar
Text isn't the only thing you can change. To swap the avatar, attach an image from your computer using the upload button in the reply box, select your photo, and then tell Co-Creator what to do with it: *"Change the channel avatar to this image."* A tip from experience — these edits each take a few seconds, so if you have several changes in mind, it helps to ask for them all in one message rather than one at a time.
Attach an image and ask Co-Creator to swap the avatar — it updates the graphic to use your photo.
## Add it to the timeline
When you're happy with the graphic, click **Add to Timeline**. That turns into a command to Co-Creator — effectively "go ahead and add it to the timeline" — and it places the animation where your playhead is. It's a small preview of where things are heading with Riverside's MCP integration, which will let you connect the editor to an AI chat or agent like Claude or ChatGPT and drive it by conversation. That's a topic for another day, but it's worth noticing.
Add to Timeline drops the animated call-to-action into your edit at the playhead.
## Position it on the canvas
By default the graphic lands in the middle of the frame, but the new editor's canvas is fully flexible — every element can be moved, scaled, and repositioned freely. Drag the graphic down, pull a corner to make it smaller, and place it wherever it looks best over your video. This flexibility is one of the biggest wins in the new editor.
Move and resize the graphic anywhere on the canvas — the clip shows up as B-roll on its own track in the timeline.
## Save it as a reusable scene
Once a graphic is placed the way you like, you can reuse it. For a quick copy, select the element and copy and paste it elsewhere in the timeline. But the better move is to save it as a scene.
Press **slash** (/) at the start of the segment, then slash again at the end, to create a scene that includes the graphic. Go to **Scene** at the top, choose **Save current scene**, and it's stored under Your scenes.
Save the current scene to reuse the graphic later — even across other edits, like your own custom templates.
Now you can jump anywhere in the timeline — add a new scene with the slash shortcut or the add-scene button — open **Scene > Your saved scenes**, and click the one you saved. The animation reappears in that spot, and because saved scenes carry across edits, you're essentially building your own [custom scene templates](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-riverside-scene-templates-to-speed-up-podcast-editing/). If you want to go deeper on organizing these, see how I [save and reuse scene layouts](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/).
## Try a prompt-style text graphic
Subscribe pills are just one category. There are quirky options too — paper-cutout looks, chat simulations, and typing animations you can fill with your own words. Pick one of the caret prompt animations, and in Co-Creator ask it to change the text: *"Change the text on the closeup caret prompt animation to say 'Book a coaching call with Cristi to learn Riverside.'"* Wait a few seconds and it's personalized, ready to drop wherever you want it in the timeline.
Prompt-style graphics let you type in your own message — great for an animated coaching or call-to-action moment.
## Resize and add transitions
Any graphic you add can be selected, resized, or set to fill the video. Select it and press fill video if you want it edge to edge. You can also give it transitions: open the Animation panel and set an **In** and an **Out** — for example, fade in when it appears and fade out when it leaves. Simple, but it makes the graphic feel intentional rather than abrupt. If you're layering these with openers and closers, my guide to [adding intros, outros, hooks, and music](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/) pairs well with this.
Give any graphic an In and Out animation — a fade in and fade out keeps it feeling polished.
## Why this approach works
What impressed me most is that motion graphics were built into the AI workflow instead of handed to you as a wall of buttons, properties panels, and color pickers to dig through. Describing what you want — and letting Co-Creator handle the how — keeps a genuinely complex feature easy to use. As more variety shows up, you'll be able to assemble your own library of animated assets to spice up any edit.
This is just one taste of what's new in Riverside 2.0\. Over the coming weeks I'll be walking through the new editor, the recording tools, the AI features, newsletters, and much more — Riverside is clearly building toward an entire creator stack in a single platform: recording, editing, social, scheduling, newsletters, and podcast hosting all in one place. If you want a hand getting set up, you can always [book a coaching call](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
## Related guides
[How to Create AI Thumbnails in Riverside with Co-CreatorCreating thumbnails used to mean opening a separate design tool, finding the right frame, and manually composing text and images. Riverside now handles it directly inside the editor through Co-Creator — the same AI assistant that generates titles, descriptions, and show notes, and works with you inside the editor. In this tutorial, I walk through the full thumbnail workflow: picking a style, customizing the title, requesting edits through the chat, and applying brand kit colors for a consistentCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-ai-thumbnails-in-riverside-with-co-creator/)
[How to Save and Reuse Scene Layouts in RiversideWhen you're editing a podcast or video interview in Riverside, the layout determines how speakers are arranged on screen. But you don't have to stick with the same layout for the entire episode. You can save custom scene layouts and reuse them across projects — building a personal library of go-to arrangements. This tutorial covers how to change layouts per scene, save your favorites, and apply them consistently across episodes. Watch the Full Tutorial How to Save and Reuse SCENE LAYOUTS inCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/)
[How to Use Riverside Scene Templates to Speed Up Podcast EditingEvery time you start a new episode edit in Riverside, do you find yourself rebuilding the same scene layouts from scratch? Speaker name overlays, side-by-side arrangements, solo speaker close-ups — it's the same setup every time. Scene templates solve this by letting you apply pre-built or custom layouts with a single click. In this tutorial, I'll show you how to use Riverside's built-in scene templates and how to save your own custom scenes so you can reuse them across every project. Watch tCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-riverside-scene-templates-to-speed-up-podcast-editing/)
[How to Add Intros, Outros, Hooks, and Music in RiversideIn this tutorial, I walk through the complete workflow for adding intros, outros, hooks, background music, and YouTube end screens to a podcast episode in Riverside. Whether you record your intro directly in the studio, import an external file from a client, or use AI-generated hooks, Riverside handles all of it — and with the Brand Kit, you can even automate the process. I'll be working with a real client episode from the Builders Straight Talk podcast to demonstrate everything. The typical lCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/)
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit. In this comprehensive guide, I walk through every precision editing technique available in Riverside's editor, from AI-powered cleanup to manual timeline surgery, to make your final edited episode as polished as you want it to be. Whether you're editing a podcast interview, a multi-speaker show, or a solo video, these teCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Upload Riverside Exports to Google Drive
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-upload-riverside-exports-to-google-drive/
Last updated: 2026-06-29T13:22:17.000Z
Riverside can now send your finished exports straight to Google Drive — no downloading to your computer and re-uploading. It's a server-to-server transfer, so [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) pushes the file directly into your Drive in a second or two. It's something a lot of people had been asking for.
One thing to know up front: this is for **exports** only — the full episodes and clips you've already edited and rendered. It doesn't (yet) move your original raw recordings. So whether you're sending out a full episode or a batch of [social media clips](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multiple-exports-from-the-same-edit-in-riverside/), here's exactly how it works.
## Find the Google Drive option in your exports
Open the studio and go to the project that holds your finished work. Switch to the **Exports** tab — these are the files you've already edited and rendered, like full episodes or short clips for social. Find the export you want to send over, and click **Share** next to it.
In the Exports tab, click Share next to the file you want to send to Google Drive.
The Share panel gives you several options. You can turn the export into a [new podcast episode](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/) if you host your show on Riverside, download the file yourself, or — the one we want — send it to **Google Drive**. Click the Drive icon.
Among the Share options, click the Drive icon to send the export to Google Drive.
## Connect your Google account (first time only)
The first time you do this, Riverside asks you to connect your account. A browser window opens so you can sign in to Google, pick the account you want, and grant permission. You only have to do this once — after that, Riverside remembers the connection and skips straight to the upload.
## Choose the file name and save
Once connected, a **Save to Google Drive** panel appears. It shows three things: the Google account you're saving to, a preview of the clip you're uploading, and the destination folder — a folder called **Riverside** that's created for you automatically.
You can rename the file right here so it lands in Drive with a name that makes sense to you. When you're happy, click **Save to Google Drive**.
The Save to Google Drive panel: confirm the account, set the file name, and save. The destination is the Riverside folder.
The transfer is quick — usually a second or two — because it happens server to server. Riverside sends the file straight to Google without it ever passing through your computer. When it's done, you'll see a **View Folder** link you can click to jump right to the file in Drive.
## Where your files land in Google Drive
Head to your Google Drive and open **My Drive**. You'll find a new folder called **Riverside**, and your exported file will be sitting inside it.
Riverside creates a folder called Riverside in My Drive, and your exports land inside it.
## Keep things organized with a file-name prefix
Here's the current limitation to plan around: you can't change the destination folder. Every export goes into that one **Riverside** folder — you can't rename it or pick a different one. The only thing you control is the file name.
So if you're uploading several clips and you don't want them mixed up with everything else, give each file a clear **prefix**. I add something like "Chris-Cristi" in front of the clip name, so related files group together and are easy to spot in the folder.
Adding a prefix to the file name keeps related clips grouped together inside the single Riverside folder.
From there it's easy to send clips onward — posting to social platforms from your phone, or wiring up an automation. If you publish on a schedule, Riverside's own [content planner](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-content-planner-schedule-social-media-posts-inside-riverside/) is worth a look too.
## What I'd like to see next
This is a first version, so it's still a little rough. Two things would make it much more useful: the ability to **bulk upload** several exports at once instead of one at a time, and support for sending the **original raw recordings** to Drive — ideally into a subfolder named after the project. Archiving those big recording files is always time-consuming, so being able to push them straight to Drive would save real effort. I'd expect the folder controls and organization to improve over time.
That's the whole workflow. If you're still setting up your account, my guide on [organizing studios and projects](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-studios-vs-projects-how-to-organize-your-account-the-right-way/) pairs well with this. And if you're new to Riverside, you can try it out [here](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
## Related guides
[How to Create Multiple Edits and Exports from One Recording in RiversideOne of the most useful workflows in Riverside is the ability to create multiple edits from the same recording and export each one differently. You can have a video version for YouTube, an audio-only version for podcast platforms, a shorter segment for social media — all from one set of source files, without re-uploading anything. Start from the Recordings Tab Open your project in Riverside and go to the Recordings tab. You will see the source tracks for each speaker, along with the transcriptCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multiple-exports-from-the-same-edit-in-riverside/)
[Host Your Podcast on Riverside: Migration WalkthroughNow you can host your podcast on Riverside and you can stop juggling downloads and uploads between recording, editing and distribution. This step-by-step guide shows exactly how to do it.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/)
[Riverside Content Planner: Schedule Social Media Posts Inside RiversideRiverside just rolled out a feature I've been wanting for a long time: the Content Planner. This new tool replaces the old Scheduler and brings everything related to planning, recording, and publishing into a single unified calendar view. The standout addition? You can now schedule social media posts directly from Riverside — no need to jump to a separate scheduling platform. Where to Find the Content Planner The Content Planner lives inside each studio. If you have multiple studios, each oneCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-content-planner-schedule-social-media-posts-inside-riverside/)
[How to Export Edited Separate Tracks in Riverside for Multitrack Post-ProductionYou've finished editing an interview in Riverside. You've removed the filler words, closed gaps, applied Magic Audio. Now you want to send each speaker's track to a separate piece of software for further mixing or video work — but you want those tracks to carry all of your edits, not the raw, untouched recordings. If you head to the Recordings tab, that's exactly what you'll get: raw, unedited files. None of your edits exist there — the Recordings tab only stores the original captures, and downCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-export-edited-separate-tracks-in-riverside-for-multitrack-post-production/)
### How to Touch Up Your Appearance in Riverside Studio
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/touch-up-your-appearance-in-riverside-studio/
Last updated: 2026-06-26T19:00:05.000Z
Riverside added a control inside the recording studio that helps you smooth your skin, improve your lighting, and generally look more polished before you ever press record. If you've ever missed the appearance and skin-smoothing options you had in Zoom, this closes that gap — a lot of that same polish now lives right inside [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), and it's one less reason to record anywhere else.
One thing to know up front: these Appearance effects currently live **only in the recording studio** — on the setup screen and inside the live session. They aren't part of post-production yet, though that may well change. For now, you apply them before or during recording.
## Open the recording studio
Open one of your projects and click **Record** to launch the studio. You'll land on the redesigned entry screen — the "Let's check your devices" page where you confirm your camera, microphone, and headphones. The new appearance controls are already available right here, before you even join the studio, so you can dial in your look while you're checking your gear. It's a good moment to review the rest of your [studio settings](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/) at the same time.
The redesigned “Let’s check your devices” screen — your appearance controls are available here before you join.
## Open the Effects panel
In the top-right corner of your video preview, click **Effects**. That opens the side panel you may already recognize from background settings. On the **Background** tab you can blur your background or swap it for an image — even one you upload yourself. The appearance controls sit one tab over, so switch to **Appearance** next.
Click Effects in the top-right of the preview to open the panel. Background blur and custom backgrounds live on the first tab.
## Touch Up: smooth your skin
On the **Appearance** tab, the first control is **Touch Up**, which smooths your skin on camera. It has two strengths in a dropdown — **Subtle** and **Smooth** — with Smooth being the stronger of the two.
When you turn it on you might notice a slight delay in the preview; that's just the effect processing, and it's normal.
Touch Up smooths your skin on camera. Use the dropdown to choose Subtle for a light pass or Smooth for a stronger result.
## Face Lighting
The next control is **Face Lighting**. It relights your face and gently darkens the area around you, so your features stand out more. Even in a reasonably well-lit room the difference is visible — the background drops back a touch and the focus shifts onto your face.
Face Lighting brightens your face and lets the background fall away slightly, drawing attention to you.
## Studio Lighting
Finally there's **Studio Lighting**, which works on a slider rather than a simple on/off toggle. Slide it up and it's almost like turning your lights up — the whole scene brightens. Slide it down and everything dims (go too far and it gets too dark). Find the point that looks natural for your room and camera.
Studio Lighting is a slider: drag toward “Increase light” to brighten the scene or “Reduce light” to pull it back.
## Adjust the effects inside the studio
If you set these on the device-check screen and then click **Join studio**, your effects carry straight over and are already applied. You can also change them mid-session: hover over your own video tile and click the same **Effects** button. The Appearance tab opens right there, so you can toggle Touch Up, Face Lighting, and Studio Lighting on the fly without leaving the recording.
Inside the studio, hover your video tile and click Effects to adjust Touch Up, Face Lighting, and Studio Lighting at any time.
## When these effects help most
None of this is dramatic, and that's the point — it's a natural touch-up, not a heavy filter. You'll notice it most when you're working with a lower-resolution camera or less-than-ideal lighting, where a little skin smoothing and some extra light make the biggest difference. For me the skin looks a touch smoother and the lighting a bit cleaner, without ever looking artificial.
If your footage still comes out darker or more off-color than you'd like, you can [fix it afterward with color adjustments](https://cotovan.com/post/quick-color-adjustments-fixes-riverside/) in the editor. And if you're shooting with a webcam, it helps to [record in the highest resolution your setup supports](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-record-in-high-resolution-in-riverside/) so these effects have more detail to work with.
## Related guides
[Best Settings for Your Riverside Studio: A Feature-by-Feature GuideThe best settings for your Riverside recording studio to ensure your podcasts, livestreams, and recordings are of the highest quality.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/)
[How to Use Color Adjustments in Riverside to Fix Dark or Off-Color FootageA new feature to adjust colors has been added in Riverside and it could save a lot of back and forth in color correcting.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/quick-color-adjustments-fixes-riverside/)
[How to Record in High Resolution in RiversideBy default, Riverside records in 720p. But if your camera supports it, you can bump the recording quality up to 1080p or even 4K HD. Here's how to change the resolution setting. Find the Recording Settings Go to Settings in the Riverside sidebar, then click Studio settings. Select the Recording tab at the top. Change Video Resolution Scroll down to the Advanced section. You'll see a toggle to switch between: \* Up to 1080p — Full HD recording, good balance of quality and file size \* Up tCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-record-in-high-resolution-in-riverside/)
[All Riverside.fm Features: The Complete Review and How to Use ThemRiverside.fm features have evolved rapidly over the last couple of years. What started as a recording-first tool is now a full end-to-end production platform for podcasters, YouTubers, course creators, coaches and teams.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Insert a sponsorship ad in Riverside with B-roll and music
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/insert-a-sponsorship-ad-in-riverside-with-b-roll-and-music/
Last updated: 2026-06-19T15:24:55.000Z
If your podcast has a sponsor read, a promo, or a coaching offer you want to drop into an episode, you can build that ad break right inside Riverside — even when the ad is just audio plus a logo or image. In this guide I'll insert a short ad segment into an existing episode, then make it feel polished with an image as B-roll, a balanced voice track, and music that fades in and out around the break.
A quick note before we start: this is *fixed* insertion, not dynamic ad insertion. We're not swapping ads in at the hosting level — we're making this ad segment a permanent part of the episode edit. When you export, the ad is baked into the video.
## Start your edit from the recording
Open the project that contains your episode and go to the **Recordings** tab. Click **Edit** on the recording you want to work with — that opens a fresh editing project in Riverside, ready to go. If you'd rather keep your original edit untouched, this is also a good moment to [start a new edit from an existing one](https://cotovan.com/post/create-new-riverside-edit-from-existing-one-without-starting-over/) so your ad experiments stay separate.
From the Recordings tab, click Edit on the episode to open a fresh editing project.
## Choose where the ad goes
There are two ways to pick the insertion point, and which one you use depends on how precise you need to be.
**From the transcript.** If you like working in the transcript, hover your mouse between two paragraphs. A small **+** appears at that exact spot — click it and you'll get an **Add section** menu asking what you want to add: something from your media, a new video, a music file, or an empty section. This drops the new section precisely at that paragraph break.
Hover between paragraphs in the transcript and click the + to open the Add section menu.
**From the timeline.** Paragraph breaks won't always land where you want the ad — sometimes you need to insert in the middle of a sentence. That's where the timeline wins, because you're not constrained by transcript breaks. Open the timeline at the bottom of the editor (use the timeline button if it isn't showing). You can [zoom in with Command + Mouse Wheel](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/) (Control + Mouse Wheel on Windows) to find the perfect spot.
Place the play head exactly where you want the ad — the play head position is what matters here — then click the split button or press **S**. Splitting cuts that piece of media into two, which gives you a gap to insert into.
Move the play head away and you'll see the two segments; hover between them and the same **\+ Add section** menu appears.
(Heads up: I'm using the older Riverside editor here — the new one hasn't rolled out to everyone yet — but the workflow is the same.)
Drop the play head where the ad should go, then split the clip to open a gap to insert into.
## Record or upload the advert
From the **Add** section menu you can upload an audio file, choose a clip you've already added under **Your media** (uploads show under Audio; anything you recorded shows under Recordings), or record a fresh ad on the spot. If you've already got the ad as a file, upload it and skip ahead.
For this example I'll record the ad directly. Click **Record** and Riverside jumps you straight into the recording studio. Before you hit record, double-check your microphone is the right one.
Record your read — you can use your camera, but you don't have to, since we'll lay an image over the video next. When you're done, click **Stop**. Anything you say after you think you've finished is still being captured, so stop promptly.
Recording the ad directly in the Riverside studio. Check your mic first, then hit Record.
Riverside takes a second or two to finish uploading the recording from your computer. Once it shows as uploaded, click **Continue editing** and it drops you back into the editor with the new recording placed exactly where you started recording — right at your split point.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Review the inserted segment
Look down in the timeline (it expands to show all the tracks) and you'll see the segment you just recorded. At first it may show as roughly five seconds long — that's just Riverside still processing it. Give it a moment and it expands to the full length of your recording. In my case the ad came in at just under sixty seconds.
The recording lands right at your split point. It may show as \~5 seconds until processing finishes.
## Trim the advert
Almost always you'll have a little dead air to clean up — a breath before you start, some talk after you stop. Find the beginning of the ad and drag the split point in to trim the front.
Use **Shift + Mouse Wheel** to scroll along the timeline. For the end, drop the play head right where the ad should stop, split again, click the leftover tail segment, and press **Delete**. Now the episode flows straight into your ad and back out again.
If you want to be surgical about these cuts, the same playhead-and-split technique is the heart of [precision editing in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/).
Once processed, the ad expands to its full length. Trim the breath at the start and any talk after the end.
## Balance the ad's volume
Your ad recording will often be louder or quieter than the episode. Click the ad segment, open the **Tracks** panel, and find that track — you can toggle it and change its volume right there. Riverside also offers **Magic Audio** to clean up the recording; flip it on if it helps.
Open the ad's track to adjust its volume so it matches the episode, and turn on Magic Audio to clean it up.
One tip that saves a lot of confusion: rename the ad's speaker. In the track list the ad shows up in a different color from the interview, but to be certain you're adjusting the right thing, click the speaker name and rename it to something like **Advert**. Now it's labelled clearly in the timeline, the track list, and the transcript, so you always know which track you're touching.
(Because I recorded the ad inside Riverside, it transcribes automatically — and if you [upload your ad file to the Recordings section](https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside/) of the same project, it transcribes on insert too.)
Rename the ad's speaker to something like Advert so you always know which track you're editing.
## Add your image as B-roll
Now the part that makes this work even without ad video: laying an image over the segment. I designed a simple coaching graphic in Affinity Designer, but Canva or any graphics tool works — you can even ask ChatGPT or Riverside's own Co-creator to generate one for you.
This image is *not* a new section — it goes on top of the video as B-roll. The easiest route is **Your media → Upload** (the Images tab does the same thing; it doesn't matter which you use).
Upload the file, make sure the play head is roughly in the area you're inserting, then click the image. It appears on the canvas. It won't fill the frame automatically — click **Fill video** and it expands to cover the whole image, or drag the corners to size it by hand.
The image sits on its own layer above the video as B-roll. Use Fill video so it covers the whole frame.
In the timeline the image lands on its own layer above the video track, so it's easy to spot as B-roll. Zoom in close and you'll see little handles on the edges — grab them and drag to extend the image. Pull the start back to where your ad begins; it snaps neatly to the cut point. Do the same at the end so the image covers exactly the length of the ad.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Add music
An ad break feels flat without music. The approach I like is to bring music in just before the ad starts — a small cue that something's changing — and fade it out at the end. You can use a track from Riverside's built-in stock library (browse by mood or style), but I prefer my own, so here I'll upload a track I made in Suno.
With the play head already where I want the music to begin, I click **Upload**, choose the file, and the music drops onto its own track at the bottom of the timeline (in the old editor, music gets a dedicated track).
For a nice touch, select the music clip, open **Audio → Volume and effects**, and fade it in over about five seconds and out over five seconds. This is the same fade-and-balance idea I cover in [adding background music in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-riverside/) and in my walkthrough of [intros, outros, hooks, and music](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/).
Uploaded music lands on its own track. Add five-second fades in and out, and balance its volume against your voice.
## Balance the music and tighten the timing
Play it back and listen. The first time through, my music was too loud against the voice, so I selected the clip and pulled its volume down to around 45–50%. Much better.
Then I tuned the timing: I wanted the music to end exactly when the ad ends, so I dragged the music clip forward until its natural ending lined up with the end of the read.
Trimming a clip in Riverside doesn't throw anything away — you can always pull the edges back out — so it's safe to nudge the music left or right until it sits right.
I also pulled the image to start just a touch before the video underneath it, because I'd noticed a brief flash of my camera before the B-roll kicked in. A small move like that is the difference between an ad break that feels intentional and one that feels patched together.
## Reuse the ad in future episodes
If this is an ad you'll run again, don't rebuild it every time. My recommendation: create the ad as its own separate edit in Riverside, then insert that edit into your episodes. Riverside lets you drop one edit into another, which keeps the ad self-contained. I show this kind of workflow in my 'create [compilations](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-best-of-compilations-in-riverside-extract-and-combine-clips/) with Riverside' article.
The catch is that because this ad carries music and B-roll, things can shift around depending on what else is in the target episode — extra tracks or assets can knock pieces out of place. To keep it clean, make the music exactly the same length as the ad so the whole block is self-contained. When you bring that edit back in, you can still extend its edges and nudge the placement left or right to fit.
## That's the ad break
And that's it — a sponsor or coaching ad inserted right in the middle of an episode, with an image on top of the video, balanced audio, and music that comes and goes cleanly.
The camera footage is still sitting behind the image if you ever want it, but the graphic is what your audience sees. Export the episode and the ad shows up in that exact moment, baked in.
The finished ad break: image B-roll over the frame, the ad audio, and a music track trimmed to match.
If you'd like to learn Riverside one-on-one, you can [book a coaching call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching) and we'll work through your exact editing questions together. And if you have a workflow you'd like me to demonstrate, leave it in the comments — I'm happy to make a follow-up.
## Related guides
[How to Add Background Music in Riverside.fm: A Step-by-Step TutorialHow to easily add background music using Riverside's new editor.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-riverside/)
[How to Add Intros, Outros, Hooks, and Music in RiversideIn this tutorial, I walk through the complete workflow for adding intros, outros, hooks, background music, and YouTube end screens to a podcast episode in Riverside. Whether you record your intro d…Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/)
[How to Create a New Riverside Edit from an Existing One (Without Starting Over)Don't start from scratch. Pull any segment of a finished Riverside edit into its own standalone edit — keeping every cleanup, scene, and camera change you've already done.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/create-new-riverside-edit-from-existing-one-without-starting-over/)
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit. In this comprehensiv…Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Record a Reaction or Commentary Segment in Riverside (Screen + Camera)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-record-a-reaction-or-commentary-segment-in-riverside-screen-camera/
Last updated: 2026-06-11T15:26:25.000Z
Sooner or later you'll want to drop a reaction or commentary moment into something you're editing — a spot where you watch a clip, pause it, and talk about what's on screen.
This is one of the questions I get from my students: "*How do I record myself watching a video, capture both the video and my camera, and slot that into an edit I'm already working on?*" The good news is that [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) handles this beautifully, and you don't need any extra software to do it.
Below I'll walk you through the whole workflow — splitting your timeline at the right spot, recording yourself with your screen shared, capturing the audio of whatever you're reacting to, and then styling the result with layouts and scenes.
## Choose where to insert your reaction segment
Start in the editor and decide where the new segment should go. You can add it at the very beginning or the very end using the plus buttons on either side of your timeline — but most of the time you'll want it somewhere in the middle.
To do that, move your play head to the exact point where the new segment should begin, then click the split button. That cuts your clip in two and opens up a gap you can drop something into.
Once the clip is split, [zoom in on the timeline](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/) with Command and your mouse wheel (Control and the mouse wheel on Windows) so you can clearly see the little plus button that appears between the two sections.
That plus button is where you'll insert your recording.
Drop your play head where the segment should start and click the split button — the clip divides into two and a plus button appears between them.
## Open the insert menu and choose Record
Click the plus button between the two sections and the insert menu opens, asking what you'd like to add. You can pull in a file from your media, another edit from your Riverside account, a video, a music file, an empty section, or an upload.
For a reaction segment, choose **Record**. That takes you straight into the Riverside [recording studio](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/) so you can capture yourself fresh.
The insert menu gives you several options — choose Record to jump into the studio and capture a new segment.
## Share your screen and capture the audio
Inside the studio, the trick to a reaction segment is sharing your screen. Click the share button — you can do this before you start recording or while you're already recording, it's up to you. Your browser asks what you want to share.
Pick the Chrome tab that has your video open (in my case, a YouTube tab).
This next part is the one people forget: turn on **Also share tab audio**. If you skip it, Riverside captures the picture but none of the sound, so the video you're reacting to will be silent in your recording. Flip that toggle on, then click Share.
Select the tab with your video, then switch on Also share tab audio — otherwise the clip you're reacting to records with no sound.
## Sharing an entire screen or a window instead
You don't have to share a single tab. You can share a specific window, or your entire screen. If you choose Entire screen, you'll see a slightly different option called **Also share system audio** — turn that on and Riverside captures every sound playing on your computer, not just one tab. That's handy when you're presenting something that isn't in a browser but still has sound.
Sharing your entire screen swaps the toggle to Also share system audio, which captures every sound on your computer.
## Check your preview, then hit record
Back in the studio you'll see two things side by side: the tab you're sharing and your camera. Riverside records your camera and the shared screen as two separate, clean tracks and drops both into your edit.
When everything looks right, click record. I keep the countdown on, so I get five seconds before recording actually starts.
Before you record, the studio shows your shared screen and your camera together — they're captured as two separate tracks.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Record your reaction
Once you're recording, switch over to the tab you're sharing and play your video. You'll see it playing and hear the sound, and you can talk over it, pause it, and comment as much as you like — your voice and the video audio are captured at the same time.
One thing worth knowing: if you click full screen on the video, it goes full screen inside the browser tab rather than taking over your whole monitor. That's normal for tab sharing (the behavior may differ on Windows). You can still play, pause, and react exactly as you would.
You also don't have to stop recording to change what you're sharing. If you want to switch tabs or windows, just click **Stop sharing** — that ends the screen share but keeps recording your camera. So your reaction can continue on camera even after the shared clip is gone.
While recording, play the clip in the shared tab and react to it live — Riverside captures both the video's audio and your commentary.
## Stop recording and let both tracks upload
When you're done, click stop and stay in the studio while everything uploads. On a fast connection this only takes a few seconds. You'll notice two tracks finish uploading — your camera and your screen share — because Riverside recorded them separately. Once both show as complete, click **Continue editing** to head back to the editor.
Riverside uploads two separate tracks — your camera and your screen share. Wait for both, then click Continue editing.
## Back in the editor: your recording drops into the edit
The spot where you split your timeline will show as still processing for a moment, with a default five-second placeholder while Riverside finishes your files. Wait a minute or two and that section expands to fit everything you just captured.
Because it came in as a separate recording, it shows up in a different color on the timeline — which actually helps, since you can instantly see where the new segment starts and stops. You can trim the beginning and end just like any other clip by grabbing the edges.
Your inserted recording appears in a different color, so it's easy to see where the new segment begins and ends. Trim the edges as needed.
## Change the layout for your reaction segment
Because this came in as a real Riverside recording, you get the full editing experience — your voice is transcribed, you show up as a speaker, and you can create scenes and [change layouts](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/) for it.
Click outside the canvas, go to Layout at the top, and scroll down to the "Sharing content" styles. From there you can put the video full screen with yourself tucked in a corner, sit yourself on the side, and more.
Open Layout and choose a Sharing content style to decide how your camera and the shared screen are arranged.
A few refinements I reach for: if you're facing the wrong way relative to the screen, use the mirror option so you appear to be looking at the content.
You can drop your camera into the corner, click it and switch its shape to a circle, and double-click to zoom and reposition so your face is framed nicely.
You can even [crop the shared video](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/) — go into crop mode, zoom in, and place the video neatly on screen so you're not showing the browser chrome around it. And if you want to draw attention to one spot, zoom into a particular part of the screen.
The finished look: the video you're reacting to fills the frame while your camera sits in the corner as a circle.
## Add a scene when the screen share ends
If you stopped sharing your screen before you stopped recording, the tail end of your clip is just you on camera with no screen behind it. Scrub along the timeline to find the exact point where the share ended, then press the scene button to [insert a scene break](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-scene-break-location-in-riverside/) right there.
In that new scene, switch the layout to Solo speaker so it's just you full screen — no empty screen-share area. Before the break you're shown alongside the screen; after it, you're on your own. Clean and intentional.
Add a scene break where the share stopped and switch to a Solo speaker layout so the end of the clip is just you on camera.
## That's the whole workflow
That's how you record yourself, share your screen, capture the audio, and insert the whole thing into an existing edit — then style it with layouts and scenes. You can record from scratch the same way, too. I love how flexible this is: pick exactly what you want to insert and where, pop into the recording studio, and come right back out. If you'd like to go deeper, take a look at the related guides below, and feel free to [book a one-on-one Riverside coaching call](https://cotovan.com/coaching) with me.
## Related guides
[How to Create a New Riverside Edit from an Existing One (Without Starting Over)Don't start from scratch. Pull any segment of a finished Riverside edit into its own standalone edit — keeping every cleanup, scene, and camera change you've already done.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/create-new-riverside-edit-from-existing-one-without-starting-over/)
[How to Record in High Resolution in RiversideBy default, Riverside records in 720p. But if your camera supports it, you can bump the recording quality up to 1080p or even 4K HD. Here's how to change the resolution setting. Find the Recording...Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-record-in-high-resolution-in-riverside/)
[Dynamic Zoom Edits in Riverside for Polished PodcastsHave you ever watched a podcast where the camera zooms in on the speaker making a point, then pulls back to the wide shot, and thought they had a camera operator doing it live? They almost certainl...Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/dynamic-zoom-edits-riverside-polished-podcasts/)
[Upload Separate Recordings in Riverside and Edit as Multi-TrackIf you record one-on-one sessions in a studio or use a different recorder, you can still bring those files into Riverside and treat them like native multi-track sessions.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/import-separate-recordings-riverside-multi-track/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Fix Crosstalk in Riverside and Keep Both Speakers
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-crosstalk-in-riverside-and-keep-both-speakers/
Last updated: 2026-05-15T16:51:23.000Z
Crosstalk happens in almost every podcast or interview recording — the moment two people talk at the same time. The instinct is to mute one voice, but that means losing what the other person was saying. In this tutorial I'll show you two practical ways to fix crosstalk in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), including a clever trick to **keep both speeches** in the final edit, played back-to-back instead of on top of each other.
## Why Riverside makes this possible
Riverside records each participant on a **separate track**, locally and in full quality. That means even though the speakers overlap in real time, their audio lives on independent layers in the editor.
You can mute, split, or rearrange one person's audio without touching the other — which is the foundation of every crosstalk fix below. Editing is also non-destructive, so anything you trim can be expanded back out later.
## Method 1: Mute the overlap and hide the speaker
Use this when one person's overlap is filler — a duplicated word, a quick reaction, or something you don't need in the edit.
### Step 1 — Expand the tracks
By default, Riverside collapses both speakers into a single waveform lane in the timeline. You can see different colors for each speaker, but the overlapping audio sits on top of itself, so you can't make precise edits.
Click the **Expand tracks** button on the right side of the timeline controls to split each speaker into their own lane.
With tracks expanded you can clearly see Chris (green) starting to speak while Cristi (purple) is still talking — that is the crosstalk region
Note: this is the current Riverside editor. The [new Riverside editor](https://cotovan.com/riverside) rolling out soon makes this workflow even smoother — you can slide entire track segments around in time, which we'll cover in upcoming tutorials.
### Step 2 — Select and mute the overlap
Click and drag on the overlapping track to make a selection over the part you want to silence. Then mute it — either with the mute button on the timeline header or by pressing **M** on your keyboard.
Drag a selection on the overlapping track to isolate the exact slice you want to silence, then press M to mute
Once muted, the audio in that region is gone but the video still plays normally. That creates a problem: the muted speaker is still on screen, mouth moving with no sound coming out.
We fix that visually with [scenes](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/).
### Step 3 — Hide the muted speaker with a scene
A scene in Riverside is a region of the timeline with its own layout. To switch the visible layout for just the muted section, drop the playhead at the start of that region, click **Add Scene** on the timeline (or press **Shift+S**), then add another scene at the end. You now have a small isolated scene that covers exactly the muted overlap.
The muted region appears striped on the track and a new scene block sits above it on the timeline — that scene will get its own single-speaker layout
With the new scene selected, open the **Layout** menu at the top of the preview and pick a **Solo Speaker** layout. If Riverside shows the wrong person, click on the video, then use the speaker dropdown at the top of the preview to switch the visible speaker.
Inside the new scene, the layout switches to a single speaker — the muted person is no longer on camera, so the edit looks natural
After the scene ends, the layout returns to whatever it was before — usually side-by-side. The viewer sees a clean conversation with no awkward silent mouth movements.
## Method 2: Keep both speakers during the overlap
The mute trick is fine when one person's overlap is throwaway. But sometimes both people say something you want to keep. The current editor doesn't let you slide individual track segments left or right, so you can't separate the overlap by shifting one speaker in time (the new editor will fix this).
The workaround is to **duplicate the overlapping region** and sequence the two speeches back-to-back.
### Step 1 — Spot the crosstalk in the transcript
Riverside transcribes each track separately, so you'll often find crosstalk faster by looking at the transcript than at the waveform. Whenever a speaker's text appears **indented under another speaker's line**, that's an interruption — Riverside is telling you visually that this speech overlaps the line above.
The indented line is Riverside's visual cue for an overlap — the indented speaker started before the previous speaker finished
### Step 2 — Expand tracks to confirm the overlap
Click **Expand tracks** again so you can see both waveforms separately. In this example the overlap is much longer than before, and both speakers say something the viewer needs to hear: Cristi finishes "you're furious" while Chris launches into "they took it away."
A longer, content-rich overlap — both speakers are saying things that need to stay in the final edit
### Step 3 — Find the split point
The split point goes **where the second speaker starts talking**, with a small buffer before that. Position the playhead just before Chris starts his sentence, then collapse the tracks back to single-lane view (the duplicate trick only works from the collapsed view).
Set the playhead right before the second speaker comes in — leave a tiny buffer so the cut sounds natural
With the playhead in place, press **S** to split the segment.
### Step 4 — Duplicate by expanding the segment
Here's where the non-destructive editing pays off. Because Riverside doesn't actually throw audio away when you split, you can grab the **left edge of the right-hand segment** and drag it backward. This reveals the same audio twice — once in the original left segment, and again in the dragged-back right segment.
Drag the handle backward until the right segment fully covers the overlap region. Expand the tracks again to see what just happened: **Chris's speech now appears twice and so does Cristi's**, side by side in the timeline.
After splitting and dragging the right segment back, you have two consecutive copies of the same overlap — each will keep only one speaker
### Step 5 — Mute opposite speakers on each copy
This is the trick: on the **first copy**, mute the second speaker (Chris in this example) — so only Cristi's "you're furious" is heard. On the **second copy**, mute the first speaker (Cristi) — so only Chris's "they took it away…" is heard.
Each duplicate plays one speaker only — sequenced back-to-back instead of stacked on top of each other
### Step 6 — Delete the gap
After muting, you'll often see a small dead zone between the two segments. Collapse the tracks, select that empty slice, and press **Delete** or **Backspace** to close it up.
The result: two complete sentences playing one after the other, with no overlap and no muted silence.
The fix is complete — both speakers' lines play in full, sequenced rather than stacked
Play it back. The overlap is gone, both people are heard in full, and the conversation flows naturally.
### Step 7 — Hide the muted mouths with scenes
Same visual problem as Method 1 — on each duplicate, one speaker is muted but still on screen. Add a scene over each copy and switch its layout to a Solo Speaker view of whichever person is talking in that segment.
For each muted region, swap the scene layout to Solo Speaker — and use the speaker dropdown above the preview to pick which person stays on camera
For the first duplicate, set the layout to show only Cristi (since Cristi is the one speaking). For the second, switch to Chris. After both scenes end, the layout returns to side-by-side and the viewer never sees a moving mouth without audio.
## When to use which method
**Mute and hide** works when one speaker's overlap is throwaway — a filler word, a "yeah", a duplicated phrase. It's fast and the result is invisible.
**Duplicate and sequence** works when both speakers are saying something you need. It takes more clicks, but you keep every word both people said. The viewer never knows it was a crosstalk.
A heads-up for the near future: the new Riverside editor (rolling out soon) lets you slide isolated track segments in time, which collapses Method 2 into a much shorter workflow. Until then, the duplicate-and-mute approach is the cleanest way to preserve both voices in the current editor.
## Key takeaways
- Riverside records separate tracks per speaker, so you can edit one person without touching the other.
- Click **Expand tracks** to see each speaker on their own lane before fixing any crosstalk.
- Use the transcript's indented lines as a fast way to spot every overlap in your recording.
- For throwaway overlaps, select and press **M** to mute, then add a scene with a Solo Speaker layout over the muted region.
- For content-rich overlaps, split before the second speaker comes in, drag the right segment back to duplicate the overlap, then mute opposite speakers on each copy.
- Always cover muted regions with single-speaker scenes so viewers don't see a moving mouth with no audio.
### Related guides
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit. In this comprehensive gCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
[Multi-Track Editing with Riverside.fm: A Feature-by-Feature GuideRiverside's powerful multi-track editing capabilities allow you to take complete control over your audio and video editing.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/)
[How to Adjust Scene Break Location in RiversideWhen Riverside automatically creates scenes from your recording, the scene breaks don't always land exactly where you want them. Maybe the break comes a second too early or cuts into a speaker's senteCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-scene-break-location-in-riverside/)
[How to Save and Reuse Scene Layouts in RiversideWhen you're editing a podcast or video interview in Riverside, the layout determines how speakers are arranged on screen. But you don't have to stick with the same layout for the entire episode. You cCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/)
[How to Fix Choppy Audio and Video Cuts in RiversideWhen Riverside removes gaps and silences from your recording, the cuts sometimes sound choppy — words get clipped, or the edit feels abrupt. The audio and video themselves are fine. The problem is in Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-choppy-audio-and-video-cuts-in-riverside/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Create a New Riverside Edit from an Existing One (Without Starting Over)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/create-new-riverside-edit-from-existing-one-without-starting-over/
Last updated: 2026-05-08T14:49:39.000Z
You've finished editing a long-form podcast or video in Riverside. You removed filler words, shortened the gaps, set up your scenes and camera changes, and the whole thing is exactly how you want it. Now you realise you also need a shorter, standalone clip from that same episode — maybe a longer topic segment, a vertical cut for Reels, or a highlight you can share on its own.
The instinct is to start a brand-new edit from the recordings. **Don't.** You'd throw away every cleanup, every scene, every camera change you just spent hours dialling in. Riverside lets you extract any portion of an existing edit into its own separate edit — with all that work already applied.
## Use the Edits tab, not the Recordings
When you go into your Riverside project, the default view is the Recordings tab. If you click **Edit** on a recording from there, Riverside starts a fresh edit from scratch — none of your previous work comes with it.
The Recordings tab — clicking Edit here would start a brand-new edit from scratch and lose all the work you did on your main edit.
Instead, switch to the **Edits** tab at the top. This shows every edit you've ever done in the project. Find your finished long-form edit (the one with all the cleanup, the [filler-word removal](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-filler-words-in-riverside-ai-manual/), the [gap shortening](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-gaps-and-shorten-clips-perfectly-in-riversides-editor/), and your scene work) and click into it.
Switch to the Edits tab to find your finished edit. This is where you start from when you want to keep all the cleaning, filler removal, scenes, and camera work you've already done.
If you've already exported this edit, that's fine — exporting doesn't lock anything. You can keep extracting new edits from it as many times as you need.
## Select the segment in the editor
The fastest way to define your new segment is the transcript. Scroll down to where you want to start, click at the beginning of that line, and drag your selection down through the text. As you reach the bottom of the visible area, the transcript will start scrolling on its own — you can let it run, watch where you're going, and stop when you've reached the end of the segment you want to pull out.
If your edit has chapters, use them as anchors — selecting from the start of one chapter to the start of the next is a clean way to grab a topic segment.
## Create a new edit from your selection
As soon as you've made the selection, a small floating toolbar appears with a few action icons. The one you want is **Create new edit**.
After highlighting the section you want to extract, a small toolbar appears. The Create new edit button on that toolbar is what turns your selection into a separate edit.
Click it, and Riverside opens a drawer at the top of the screen showing all the edits in the project. You'll see your original edit there, highlighted in purple (because you're still inside it), and your newly created edit sitting right next to it.
## Rename the new edit immediately
Here's the problem. The new edit is created with the **exact same name** as the one you extracted from. So if your original was "Main Episode EDIT," the new one is also "Main Episode EDIT." The only thing distinguishing them at a glance is the duration shown on the thumbnail.
The new edit (02:52) appears in the drawer at the top — but notice it's been created with the exact same name as the original. Renaming it immediately is recommended.
Rename it right away — before you do anything else, before you click around, before you forget which one is which. Hover over the new edit in the drawer, click the **three-dots menu**, and choose **Rename**. Give it a name that tells you what it is — something like "Shorter Segment 1" or the actual topic of the clip.
Open the three-dots menu on the new edit and choose Rename. Give it a clear name like 'Shorter Segment 1' so you can tell your edits apart later.
If the drawer ever disappears (you click somewhere outside it), it's not gone — there's a small arrow next to the edit name at the top of the screen that opens it back up. From the same top bar you can also rename the edit you're currently inside.
## Switch between edits in the project
The drawer is also how you jump between edits in the same project. Click any edit in the drawer and Riverside switches to it. The new editor that's coming to Riverside makes navigating between edits in a project significantly faster, but the current one already does the job.
## Understand and hide the crossed-out text
When you open your new edit, you might see something unexpected: a wall of crossed-out text with only your selected portion looking active. That's not a bug.
Inside the new edit you may see a lot of crossed-out text. Riverside duplicates the entire original edit and crosses out everything you didn't select — your selected portion is the only part that's active.
What Riverside actually did was duplicate the entire original edit, then mark everything outside your selection as deleted. Your segment is the only part that plays — but the rest is still technically there, which means you can restore any of it later if you change your mind ("Actually, I want that other 30 seconds back too"). It's a useful safety net.
If the crossed-out text bothers you visually, you can hide it. At the top of the transcript there's a small round filter button — click it and toggle **Show Deleted Parts** off. Everything except your active segment disappears from view.
Toggle Show Deleted Parts off (the round button at the top of the transcript) and the crossed-out text disappears. Now you only see the segment you actually extracted.
## Export and adjust the format
From here, your extracted edit behaves like any other Riverside edit. You can export it, share it, and adjust the orientation. If you're pulling out a clip for vertical platforms, click the format selector at the top and pick **9:16** for Reels, TikTok, or Shorts — or **1:1** for LinkedIn and X. For the same kind of reframing tricks once you're in vertical, the [crop, reposition, and reframe controls](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/) are where you'll spend your time.
Before exporting, you can change the orientation at the top — 1:1 for LinkedIn or X, 9:16 for Reels, TikTok, or Shorts, or stay on 16:9 for YouTube.
## The edit-once workflow
This is the workflow that saves the most time over a year of producing content: **edit once, extract many times.** Build the long-form version first. Do all the heavy lifting there — the cleaning, the corrections, the cuts, the scene work, the captions presets, the branding. Then, when you need a shorter cut, a topic segment, a vertical clip, or a highlight reel, extract it from the finished edit instead of repeating any of that work on the recording.
And whatever you extract — rename it. Always. A folder full of edits called "Main Episode EDIT" is a nightmare to navigate three weeks from now.
If you also want to spin up several edits from the *same recording* rather than from a finished edit, that's a related but different workflow — covered in [how to create multiple edits and exports from one recording in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multiple-exports-from-the-same-edit-in-riverside/).
### Related guides
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideRiverside has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — the real magic happens in the edit. In this comprehensive gCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
[How to Create Multiple Edits and Exports from One Recording in RiversideOne of the most useful workflows in Riverside is the ability to create multiple edits from the same recording and export each one differently. You can have a video version for YouTube, an audio-only vCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multiple-exports-from-the-same-edit-in-riverside/)
[How to Add Intros, Outros, Hooks, and Music in RiversideIn this tutorial, I walk through the complete workflow for adding intros, outros, hooks, background music, and YouTube end screens to a podcast episode in Riverside. Whether you record your intro dirCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Export Edited Separate Tracks in Riverside for Multitrack Post-Production
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-export-edited-separate-tracks-in-riverside-for-multitrack-post-production/
Last updated: 2026-04-30T16:01:14.000Z
You've finished editing an interview in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside). You've removed the filler words, closed gaps, applied Magic Audio. Now you want to send each speaker's track to a separate piece of software for further mixing or video work — but you want those tracks to carry all of your edits, not the raw, untouched recordings.
If you head to the **Recordings** tab, that's exactly what you'll get: raw, unedited files. None of your edits exist there — the Recordings tab only stores the original captures, and downloading from it skips your entire post-production pass.
The right place to do this is the **edit** itself, using the Tracks panel. Here's the full workflow.
## Why not the Recordings tab?
From the project page, the Recordings tab is tempting. Each speaker's track is right there, with a Download button next to it. But these are the raw uploads — nothing you did in the edit is reflected here. No filler word removal, no Magic Audio, no trims. If you bring these files into Logic, Premiere, or Auphonic, you're starting from scratch.
The Recordings tab gives you per-speaker downloads, but those are the raw recordings — not your edited tracks.
## Open the edit and find the Tracks panel
Open the actual edit you've been working on — the one where you've already done your [filler word removal](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-filler-words-in-riverside-ai-manual/), gap removal, and Magic Audio. In the right-hand sidebar, look for the **Tracks** tab (the icon with two stacked rectangles). This is the panel that drives separate-track exports.
Make sure all of your edits are applied first — filler words removed, pauses cut, Magic Audio enhanced. Whatever is on the timeline now is what gets exported.
Inside the Tracks panel, every speaker in the session shows up as a row with a toggle. Toggle off the speakers you *don't* want to export, leaving only the one you want.
The Tracks panel — toggle off the speakers you don't want, leaving only the one you're exporting now.
Notice what happens on the timeline: the parts where the muted speaker was talking go silent, but the timeline **does not collapse**. Your edit's overall length stays the same — you're just removing the muted speaker from the mix, not rebuilding the timing. That's exactly what you want for multitrack work, because all the tracks need to line up when you load them into your DAW or video editor.
## Rename the edit before you export
Before clicking Share, rename the edit to match the track you're exporting. Click the edit's name at the top of the editor and change it to something like *Michael Only*. Whatever you name the edit becomes the file name in the Exports tab — and when you're back-to-back exporting two or three speaker tracks, those names are the only thing keeping them straight.
Rename the edit at the top before exporting. This is the file name you'll see in the Exports tab.
## Export via Share → Video
Click **Share** in the top-right and choose **Video**. Pick your quality — 1080p HD is what I use. You can normalize audio levels and remove background noise here too, but if you've already applied Magic Audio you can leave both off. Click **Export Video**.
Share → Video → 1080p HD. Skip "Normalize audio" and "Remove background noise" if you've already applied Magic Audio.
Riverside will ask if you want to jump to the Exports tab. Say **No** if you have another track to export — let the export run in the background and queue up the next one.
## Switch tracks and export the next speaker
Back in the Tracks panel, flip the toggles: turn the speaker you just exported *off*, and turn the next speaker *on*. Rename the edit again — for me, that meant changing *Michael Only* to *Cristi Only*. Then Share → Video → Export Video again.
Flip the toggles, rename the edit to match the new track, and export again.
## What the video layout actually looks like
One thing to be aware of: when you mute one speaker, Riverside doesn't preserve the original side-by-side layout. With one speaker muted, the video reverts to whatever is left — usually a single full-screen view of the remaining person.
With one track muted, the side-by-side layout collapses. For audio multitrack work this is fine — for video, you'll rebuild the layout in your destination editor.
For pure audio work this is a non-issue — the audio tracks line up perfectly. For video, plan to rebuild your side-by-side scene in your destination editor (Premiere, Final Cut, DaVinci, [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia)) once the separate tracks are imported.
## Check Exports and download
Open the **Exports** tab and you'll see your two queued exports, named exactly what you renamed them to: *Cristi Only* and *Michael Only*. Once each one finishes processing, the Download button activates.
Both edited tracks waiting in the Exports tab, named after each speaker. Click Download once they're ready.
Download both, drop them into your DAW or video editor, and you've got fully edited speaker stems ready for the next stage of post-production — color grading, mixing, mastering, sound design, whatever the project calls for.
If you're heading deeper into multitrack post-production, the [multi-track editing guide](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/) covers the rest of what Riverside's track tools can do, and [creating multiple edits and exports from one recording](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multiple-exports-from-the-same-edit-in-riverside/) walks through the variant workflows.
If you have other Riverside questions, leave them in the comments and I'll cover them in a future video.
### Related guides
[How to Create Multiple Edits and Exports from One Recording in RiversideOne of the most useful workflows in Riverside is the ability to create multiple edits from the same recording and export each one differently. You can have a video version for YouTube, an audio-only vCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multiple-exports-from-the-same-edit-in-riverside/)
[Multi-Track Editing with Riverside.fm: A Feature-by-Feature GuideRiverside's powerful multi-track editing capabilities allow you to take complete control over your audio and video editing.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/)
[Upload Separate Recordings in Riverside and Edit as Multi-TrackIf you record one-on-one sessions in a studio or use a different recorder, you can still bring those files into Riverside and treat them like native multi-track sessions.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/import-separate-recordings-riverside-multi-track/)
[Separate Speakers from a Single Audio File in Riverside.fmA feature I see requested many times, and I don't know of another app that does this at the moment.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/separate-speakers-audio-file-riverside-fm/)
[How to Remove Filler Words in Riverside (AI + Manual)Removing filler words — the ums, uhs, and occasional "likes" — is one of the simplest ways to clean up a recording. Riverside does most of it automatically with AI, but there are some nuances worth knCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-filler-words-in-riverside-ai-manual/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Riverside Studios vs Projects: How to Organize Your Account the Right Way
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-studios-vs-projects-how-to-organize-your-account-the-right-way/
Last updated: 2026-04-22T14:57:27.000Z
A common mistake I see in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) is creating a new studio for every episode. It seems like a reasonable way to stay organized — but it causes real problems down the line. Riverside has a better structure built specifically for this: **studios for shows, projects for episodes**.
Here is exactly how to organize your account the right way and why it matters.
## Studios Are for Shows, Not Episodes
A **studio** is the top-level container in your Riverside account. Older Pro plans let you create multiple studios; newer Pro plans have a single studio, with multiple studios reserved for Enterprise tier.
If your plan allows multiple studios, use them for **different shows or podcasts** — not for different episodes of the same show.
The studio dropdown in Riverside — one studio per show, not per episode.
## Projects Are Where Episodes Live
Inside each studio, you use **Projects** to organize individual episodes. Think of projects like folders — each one holds a single episode and all its associated content: raw recordings, transcripts, edits, Made For You clips, Magic Segments, exports, and any other assets tied to that recording.
Every project is its own folder. Everything recorded or generated for that episode stays inside.
Projects auto-create when you schedule and record a session via the **Planner**. Go to Planner, pick a date, click to schedule a session, name it, and invite your guest. When you record, Riverside creates a project with that name automatically.
Schedule a session in the Planner — Riverside creates a project automatically when recording starts.
## Why This Matters: Benefits of One Studio Per Show
### 1\. Brand Settings Are Per-Studio
Your [**logo**](https://cotovan.com/post/customize-logo-brand-riverside/)**, color palette, text styles, caption styles,** [**intro, and outro**](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/) are all stored at the studio level. If you create a new studio for every episode, you lose all these [brand assets](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/) and have to reconfigure them every time. One studio means every episode inherits the same brand automatically.
Brand assets live at the studio level — reuse them across every episode automatically.
### 2\. Studio Settings Stay Consistent
Recording resolution, audio quality, noise reduction, guest-join preferences, live stream destinations — all these live in your [**Studio Settings**](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/). A new studio means configuring everything from scratch and almost certainly forgetting something.
### 3\. Podcast Hosting Is Tied to the Studio
If you [host your podcast on Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/), the hosting configuration — show artwork, distribution platforms (Apple Podcasts, Spotify, YouTube), [website](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-activate-your-podcast-website-on-riverside-free/) — is all attached to one studio. Each episode goes into that hosting setup.
Hosting settings and distribution links are configured once per studio, not per episode.
### 4\. The Studio Record Link Stays the Same
This one catches a lot of people. When you send a guest a [link to record](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-quickly-invite-guests-to-record-in-riverside/) with you, it is the **studio link** — the same for every project in that studio. Put that link in Calendly, in your email signature, in your newsletter, in any automation. If you create a new studio for every episode, that link changes every time, and your automations break.
## Finding Episodes in a Large Studio
Some people worry that keeping everything in one studio makes episodes hard to find. Not true. Projects act as folders — sort by date created, date viewed, or alphabetically, switch between grid and list views, and dig in.
Even better, the **search bar** at the top of Riverside searches across everything: projects, recordings, magic clips, edits, exports. Type a guest name and you get every episode with that guest. Type a keyword from the transcript and you can find specific moments across all your recordings.
Search finds projects, recordings, clips, edits, and more — across the entire studio.
## Starting a New Project Without the Planner
When Riverside updated the Planner, the old behavior where scheduling created an empty project disappeared. Now a project only gets created once you actually record. If you want to set up a project manually — maybe to prepare for a recording without scheduling — go to **Projects** in the sidebar and click **New**. Name it, and you can immediately record into that project.
Create a project manually from the Projects tab and start recording straight into it.
For recordings scheduled through the [Planner](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-content-planner-schedule-social-media-posts-inside-riverside/), empty projects no longer clutter your workspace until you actually hit record. Scheduled sessions live in the Planner view, and the project only gets created when the recording happens.
## The Rule of Thumb
- **One studio per show** — podcast, live stream series, video series. Contains brand, hosting, settings, and the single recording link.
- **One project per episode** — contains raw recordings, edits, clips, exports, and everything generated for that specific episode.
- **The Planner** — schedule future recordings. Projects auto-create when recording starts.
- **Search** — find anything across the studio by name, guest, or keyword.
## Related Riverside Guides
[Best Settings for Your Riverside Studio: A Feature-by-Feature GuideThe best settings for your Riverside recording studio to ensure your podcasts, livestreams, and recordings are of the highest quality.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/)
[How to Schedule Podcast Recordings in Riverside.fmManage multiple guests without a hitch in Riverside by scheduling your recording sessions in advance.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-schedule-podcast-recordings/)
[Schedule Multiple Recording Sessions in Advance with Riverside.fmRiverside announced that you can schedule an unlimited number of sessions in advance in the studio.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/schedule-multiple-recording-sessions-in-advance-with-riversidefm/)
[How to Select a File from Projects and Use as Podcast Episode in RiversideTurn any project file into a published podcast episode using Riverside's built-in hosting.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-move-a-video-from-projects-to-hosting-in-riverside/)
[Riverside Content Planner: Schedule Social Media Posts Inside RiversidePlan and schedule social media posts directly from your Riverside studio with the new Content Planner.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-content-planner-schedule-social-media-posts-inside-riverside/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
This structure also prepares you for the new Riverside editor, where all project assets stay inside the project for faster access. Stick to one studio per show and organize episodes with projects — your automations, brand kit, and hosting setup will thank you.
### How to Remove Filler Words in Riverside (AI + Manual)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-filler-words-in-riverside-ai-manual/
Last updated: 2026-04-17T16:01:58.000Z
Removing filler words — the ums, uhs, and occasional "likes" — is one of the simplest ways to clean up a recording. [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) does most of it automatically with AI, but there are some nuances worth knowing: which removal method to choose, how to adjust sensitivity, how to remove words that Riverside does not detect, and how to restore anything the AI cuts by mistake. Here is the full workflow.
## Find the Filler Words Tool
Open your edit and go to the **AI Tools** panel on the right. Under **Refine content**, you will see **Remove filler words** with a count of detected ums and uhs — in this example, 320 of them. Clicking **Apply** runs a smart, balanced removal: some words are cut, others are muted.
The AI Tools panel shows the number of detected filler words and an Apply button for one-click removal.
## Choose Your Removal Method
Before clicking Apply, open the dropdown arrow next to Remove filler words to see the three removal options:
- **Smart** — a balanced mix of cuts and mutes to preserve natural flow. Probably the safest default.
- **Cut** — removes filler words from the timeline entirely, including the video. Faster-paced results, but can introduce jumpy cuts if the speaker moves during the filler word.
- **Mute** — silences the audio but leaves the video unchanged. The speaker looks like they briefly close their mouth, but nobody really notices.
Three removal methods: Smart (balanced), Cut (removes entirely), Mute (silences audio only).
For long-form podcast episodes, I usually prefer **Mute**. Jumpy cuts are more noticeable than a fraction of a second of silence, and the video stays intact. For short-form social media clips where pacing matters more, **Cut** can be fine.
## Adjust the Sensitivity
Below the removal method, there is a **Sensitivity** slider. Move it all the way to the right — labeled **"All disfluencies"** — to get the most aggressive removal. The further left you slide, the more it focuses on longer, obvious filler words and leaves short ones alone.
Slide the sensitivity all the way right to catch all disfluencies, or leave it lower to only catch longer filler words.
## What You See After Applying
Once you click Apply, filler words in the transcript appear grayed out. If you muted them, they stay visible in the transcript but do not play audibly. If you cut them, they disappear unless you turn on **Show deleted parts** — then they come back crossed out to indicate they are removed from playback.
After applying with Mute, filler words remain in the transcript but are silenced on playback.
## Remove Words Riverside Does Not Detect
Right now, Riverside's AI focuses primarily on ums and uhs. If your speaker says **"like"**, **"so"**, or repeats words often, those will not be caught automatically. To remove them manually, use the search feature.
Press **Cmd+F** (Mac) or **Ctrl+F** (Windows) to open the search bar at the top. Type the filler word — for example, **"like,"** with a comma, since transcripts often put a comma after filler words. Use the up and down arrows to navigate between matches.
Search for specific filler words with a trailing comma to find instances that Riverside's AI does not catch automatically.
### Mute or Delete Individual Words
Click on a highlighted match to select it. An editing toolbar appears with options to **Mute**, **Delete**, **Add**, **Correct**, or **VideoDub** the word. Choose Delete to cut it out, or Mute to silence it.
Selecting a word brings up the editing toolbar — choose Mute or Delete based on your preference.
With **Show deleted parts** on, deleted words stay visible but crossed out. Use the down arrow in the search bar to jump to the next match and repeat the process.
Deleted words appear crossed out in the transcript when Show deleted parts is enabled.
## Restore Anything the AI Cut by Mistake
The AI sometimes cuts words in the wrong place due to alignment issues, or occasionally misfires on a non-filler word. To restore, click on the crossed-out word in the transcript and choose **Restore**, or press **R** on the keyboard.
You can do the same thing on the timeline: zoom in with **Cmd/Ctrl + mouse wheel**, click on the removed portion, and press **R**. The waveform shows exactly what was cut, making it easier to target the right spot.
Zoom into the timeline to see exactly what was removed and press R to restore any word.
## Recommended Workflow
- **Do bulk removals first.** Apply the AI filler word removal at the beginning, before you have watched the episode. Same for bulk pause removal and any other AI cleanup.
- **Then watch through** and check each section. Restore anything that got cut incorrectly.
- **Finish with manual search-and-replace** for any filler words Riverside does not detect automatically (like, so, repeated words).
## Related Riverside Guides
[Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete GuideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/)
[Remove "Fluff" with Riverside: How to Quickly Cut Unnecessary Parts from RecordingsThis new AI Tool in Riverside allows you to remove behind-the-scenes talk, mistakes and unnecessary segments from your recording.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/clean-riverside-recordings-find-fluff-workflow/)
[How to Create Multiple Edits and Exports from One Recording in RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multiple-exports-from-the-same-edit-in-riverside/)
[Dynamic Zoom Edits in Riverside for Polished PodcastsCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/dynamic-zoom-edits-riverside-polished-podcasts/)
[How to Add Guest Names and Titles in the Riverside Editor After RecordingCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-guest-names-and-titles-in-the-riverside-editor-after-recording/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
Once Riverside expands the list of automatically detected filler words, this workflow will get even faster. For now, combining AI bulk removal with search-based manual cleanup gets you to a clean recording with minimal effort.
### How to Create Multiple Edits and Exports from One Recording in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multiple-exports-from-the-same-edit-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-04-08T13:48:42.000Z
One of the most useful workflows in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) is the ability to create multiple edits from the same recording and export each one differently. You can have a video version for YouTube, an audio-only version for podcast platforms, a shorter segment for social media — all from one set of source files, without re-uploading anything.
## Start from the Recordings Tab
Open your project in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) and go to the **Recordings** tab. You will see the source tracks for each speaker, along with the transcript. From here, click **Edit** to open a new edit of the recording.
The Recordings tab shows your source tracks. Click Edit to start a new edit from these files.
## Apply AI Tools and Name Your Edit
Once in the editor, use the **AI tools** panel to clean up the recording: remove pauses, filler words, find fluff, apply Magic Audio, Smart Mute, and Smart Layouts. These tools run in the background, so you do not need to wait for them to finish.
Apply AI tools to your first edit — they process in the background while you continue working.
Rename this edit by clicking the title at the top of the editor. For example, call it **"Video Version"** to keep things organized. When you exit the editor, this edit appears in the **Edits** tab.
Your named edit shows up in the Edits tab, ready to be exported or duplicated.
## Create a Second Edit
There are two ways to create another version:
- **Start from scratch:** Go back to the **Recordings** tab and click **Edit** again. This creates a brand-new edit with no cuts applied — a blank slate from the original files.
- **Duplicate an existing edit:** In the **Edits** tab, click the three-dot menu on any edit and select **Duplicate**. This copies all the cuts and settings from the original, so you can make incremental changes without starting over.
For an audio-only version, starting from scratch can be useful because you might want more aggressive cuts — audio listeners do not see jump cuts, so you can remove more without worrying about visual glitches.
A fresh edit from the same recording — no cuts applied, ready for a different editing approach.
## Switch Between Edits
While inside the editor, click the dropdown arrow at the top to open the edit switcher. This shows all your edits as thumbnails and lets you jump between them without leaving the editor. You can also see your Magic Clips and other generated content here.
The edit switcher lets you jump between different versions of your recording without leaving the editor.
## Export Each Version Differently
When an edit is ready, go to the **Edits** tab and click the three-dot menu, then **Export**. For the audio version, switch the export type to **Audio**, choose WAV or MP3, and optionally enable **Normalize audio levels** or **Remove background noise**. Click **Export audio only**.
Export the audio version as WAV or MP3 with optional audio processing.
Each export gets the same name as the edit, which keeps everything organized. The **Exports** tab shows all your exports with download links, and you also receive an email when each export finishes.
The Exports tab tracks all your exports — you also get an email notification when they finish.
## Keep Multiple Edits Organized
Both edits remain in the **Edits** tab side by side. You can rename, duplicate, or export any of them at any time. The original recordings stay untouched — each edit is non-destructive.
All your edit versions are organized in the Edits tab. Rename them to stay on top of your workflow.
### Use "Keep Only This" for Segments
If you want to isolate a specific segment — say a highlight reel or a standalone topic — duplicate an edit, select the portion you want, click the three-dot menu, and choose **Keep only this**. Everything outside your selection gets removed, leaving just that segment ready for export.
## Publish Directly to Your Podcast
If you [host your podcast](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/) with Riverside, you can turn any export into a podcast episode without downloading it first. Go to the **Share** button on an export, and under **Hosting**, click **New Episode**. Riverside creates the episode automatically from your exported file.
Turn any export into a podcast episode directly from Riverside — no download needed.
## Tips
## Related Riverside Guides
[How to Turn an Audio Podcast into a Video in RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-turn-an-audio-podcast-into-a-video-in-riverside/)
[Spotify episodes audio-only when hosting podcast with Riverside?I host my show on Riverside and recently ran into an issue: even when I publish a video episode from Riverside, Spotify displays it as audio-only.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/add-video-spotify-podcasts-riverside-workaround/)
[Dynamic Zoom Edits in Riverside for Polished PodcastsCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/dynamic-zoom-edits-riverside-polished-podcasts/)
[How to Add Guest Names and Titles in the Riverside Editor After RecordingCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-guest-names-and-titles-in-the-riverside-editor-after-recording/)
[How to Fix Choppy Audio and Video Cuts in RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-choppy-audio-and-video-cuts-in-riverside/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
- **Name your edits immediately** — "Video Version," "Audio Version," "Short Clip" — so you always know which is which.
- **Duplicate before experimenting.** If your video edit is finished, duplicate it before making an audio version with more aggressive cuts.
- For audio-only exports, you can be more aggressive with pause and filler removal since there are no visual jump cuts to worry about.
- No need to re-upload anything. Every edit works from the same original recording files.
### How to Turn an Audio Podcast into a Video in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-turn-an-audio-podcast-into-a-video-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-04-03T14:58:03.000Z
If you have an audio-only podcast and want to post it on YouTube or other video platforms, [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) makes it straightforward. Upload your audio, add a cover image, and export as video — all in a few clicks. Here is the full workflow.
## Upload Your Audio File
Start by uploading your audio file to a project in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside). You can upload separate audio tracks for different speakers, or upload a single file and tell Riverside [how many speakers](https://cotovan.com/post/separate-speakers-audio-file-riverside-fm/) are on it. Riverside will automatically analyze the audio, separate the speakers, and transcribe everything.
Once processing finishes, go to the **Recordings** tab. You will see the separated speaker tracks listed as Speaker-0 and Speaker-1 (or however many speakers were detected), each marked as "Ready."
Click **Edit** to start a new edit from these files.
The Recordings tab shows the auto-separated speaker tracks ready for editing.
## Rename the Speakers
In the editor, the speakers show up with different colors in the transcript. Click on each speaker's name and select **Rename** to give them proper names. This makes the transcript easier to follow and is important if you plan to add captions later.
Rename each speaker in the editor so the transcript labels them correctly.
## Switch from Audio Only to Video Format
By default, the edit opens in **Audio Only** mode. To turn it into a video, click the format selector at the top left where it says "Audio Only." A dropdown appears with format options:
- **16:9** — YouTube, Spotify (widescreen)
- **1:1** — LinkedIn, X, Instagram (square)
- **9:16** — Shorts, Reels, TikToks (vertical)
- **Audio only** — the current setting
Select **16:9** for YouTube. The editor immediately switches to video mode with a preview area where you can add visual elements.
Switch from Audio Only to 16:9 to enable the video canvas.
## Add a Cover Image
With the video canvas active, open the **Images** panel from the right sidebar. Click **Upload** to add your own image — a podcast thumbnail, a Canva design, or any cover artwork you have prepared.
The Images panel lets you upload your own cover art or search royalty-free images.
Once uploaded, click the image to add it to the canvas. If it is a landscape image that does not fill the entire preview area, use the **Fill Video** button (the expand icon in the toolbar above the image) to make it fit the full screen.
The uploaded cover image appears on the canvas with selection handles and a toolbar for adjustments.
### Handling Square Images
If your cover image is square rather than widescreen, it will not fill the entire 16:9 canvas. You have two options: leave the surrounding area black, or set a custom background color to blend with your design.
To set the background, deselect the image and click **Background** at the top of the preview. Use the color picker to choose a color that matches your artwork — typically a dark shade works well.
Use the background color picker to match the area around a square cover image.
## Extend the Image to the Full Episode Duration
By default, Riverside adds the image for only about five seconds. For a static cover that should stay on screen the entire episode, you need to extend it manually.
Zoom into the timeline using **Ctrl + mouse wheel** (Windows) or **Cmd + mouse wheel** (Mac). You will see the image as a thin slice at the beginning of the timeline. Select the image, then drag the right edge to extend it. Keep zooming out and dragging until the image snaps to the end of the timeline.
After extending the image, it stays on screen throughout the entire episode — no matter where you scrub in the timeline.
## Export as Video
When everything looks right, click **Share** in the top right corner and go to **Export**. Set the file type to **Video**, choose your quality (1080p HD is fine for a static image), and optionally enable **Normalize audio levels** or **Remove background noise**. Click **Export Video** to render and download your file.
Export as video with 1080p quality — the static image and your audio become a ready-to-upload video file.
## Tips
## Related Riverside Guides
[Dynamic Zoom Edits in Riverside for Polished PodcastsCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/dynamic-zoom-edits-riverside-polished-podcasts/)
[How to Add Guest Names and Titles in the Riverside Editor After RecordingCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-guest-names-and-titles-in-the-riverside-editor-after-recording/)
[How to Invite an Editor to Your Riverside Account Without Sharing Full AccessCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-invite-an-editor-to-your-riverside-account-without-sharing-full-access/)
[How to Fix Choppy Audio and Video Cuts in RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-choppy-audio-and-video-cuts-in-riverside/)
[Spotify episodes audio-only when hosting podcast with Riverside?I host my show on Riverside and recently ran into an issue: even when I publish a video episode from Riverside, Spotify displays it as audio-only.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/add-video-spotify-podcasts-riverside-workaround/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
- My recommendation is to record with video if possible, but if you have audio-only episodes, this workflow gets them onto YouTube quickly.
- You can also add **captions**, **brand elements**, and **text overlays** before exporting to make the video more engaging.
- If you have multiple speakers on a single audio file, [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) can automatically separate them — just specify the number of speakers during upload.
### How to Personalize AI Responses and Automations in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-personalize-ai-responses-and-automations-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-04-01T15:54:47.000Z
[Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) does a lot of heavy lifting for you once you finish recording or uploading files. It automatically generates a polished Magic Episode, Magic Clips for social media, longer Magic Segments, hooks, blog posts, social media posts, and more.
But here is the thing: you can control *how* all of this gets created. Today I want to walk through every personalization point available in the automation settings and in the AI Co-creator, so your output matches your style from the start.
## The Made For You Section
When you open a project in Riverside and go to the **Made For You** tab, you will find everything the AI has already created: the Magic Episode (a fully processed long-form edit), Magic Clips (vertical social media clips with a virality rating), Magic Segments (longer topic-based extracts in landscape), hooks (short vertical openers), and posts (blog posts, social media captions, Instagram content).
All of this gets generated automatically once your recording finishes processing.
The Made For You section shows all AI-generated assets, each with a Personalize button.
You cannot disable these automations from running, but you can control what they do. Each major section has a **Personalize** button, and clicking it opens a settings panel where you configure every aspect of the output. These settings apply per studio, so if you run multiple podcasts, you can customize each one independently.
## Configuring Hooks
Hooks are short clips designed to grab attention at the start of your episode or social post. By default, they are created in 9:16 (vertical) format. If you typically use hooks in your long-form landscape episode, change the ratio to **16:9** so they match.
The **Layout** option controls how speakers appear. For hooks, I keep it on **Full screen** because I usually pick a hook from the guest, so I want them filling the frame. Other options include Picture-in-picture, Split screen, and Grid.
The Hooks Layout options let you choose how speakers appear: Full screen, Picture-in-picture, Split screen, or Grid.
You can also toggle the **Brand** on or off. The brand applies your [brand kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/) (logo, intro/outro, caption style) from a previous setup. For hooks that get integrated into a longer edit, I usually disable this since the branding will come from the main episode. There is also a **Remove pauses** toggle with an intensity slider for how aggressively it trims silence.
## Configuring Magic Clips
Magic Clips are where you probably spend the most time deciding what to post. The personalization dialog gives you control over ratio, layout, duration, branding, pause removal, fill word removal, and smart muting.
Magic Clips personalization: set your preferred ratio, layout, clip duration, and branding preferences.
The **Layout** section is particularly useful for clips. If you select **Smart layouts**, Riverside automatically [switches camera views](https://cotovan.com/post/dynamic-zoom-edits-riverside-polished-podcasts/) based on who is speaking. You can control the **Rhythm** (how often it switches) and choose what it switches *to*: Full screen, Picture-in-picture, or other options.
Smart layouts automatically switch camera views. Control the rhythm and choose between Picture-in-picture and Full screen for the switch-to view.
For **Duration**, I usually set it between one and one-and-a-half minutes. That is my sweet spot for social clips. Riverside aims for that range, though it cannot always hit precise timings since it is cutting on natural quote boundaries.
**Remove fill words** and **Smart muting** are also available. Smart muting silences the other speaker's microphone when they are not talking, which reduces background noise and cross-talk.
## Magic Segments and Magic Episodes
Magic Segments and Magic Episodes have the same personalization options: ratio, layout, duration, branding, and pause removal. The main difference is that segments are longer topic-based extracts (3-10 minutes), while the Magic Episode is a full polished edit.
Personally, I do not use the Magic Episode because I prefer [editing the episode](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/) myself. But since there is no way to disable the feature, Riverside generates it regardless. You can simply choose not to use it.
There is also a small **+** button at the right of the personalization tabs. This does not add a custom workflow yet. Instead, it lets you submit a feature request to the Riverside team for new automation types you would like to see.
## The AI Co-creator
The second major personalization area is the **Co-creator**, [Riverside's AI chat](https://cotovan.com/post/quick-youtube-metadata-riverside/) interface. You can find it by clicking **Ask Co-creator** in the top right of any project. The Co-creator has access to your full transcript and can generate clips, blog posts, social media posts, show notes, and more on demand.
The Co-creator offers preset suggestions for episode descriptions, show notes, blog posts, social media posts, and more.
### Setting the Tone and Persona
Click **Personalize** in the Co-creator to open the personalization settings. This is essentially a system prompt that governs how the AI writes and responds. You can choose from preset tones: **Thought Leader** (clear and insightful), **Late Night Host** (energetic and witty), **Influencer** (passionate and deep), or **Custom** (define your own).
Choose a preset tone or go Custom to write your own instructions for the Co-creator.
Select **Custom** to write your own instructions. You get a free-text field where you can specify things like "*Write in first person from the point of view of the host*" or "*Do not use cliches, hyperboles, or gratuitous comparisons.*" This is where you can inject your personality into every piece of AI-generated content.
Below that is a **"What's your show about?"** field. Fill this in with your show name, host, and a brief description. This gives the AI context about your content so it can match the language and framing.
Custom instructions let you control the AI's voice. Here I have specified first-person writing and provided the show description.
### Adding Asset-Specific Instructions
The **Instructions** section lets you add specific rules for individual asset types. Click **New Instruction** and choose which asset to configure: Episode title, Episode description, Show notes, Newsletter email, Blog post, LinkedIn post, and more.
For the **Blog post**, I replaced the default vague instruction with something specific: "Figure out the main topic of the episode, then generate a comprehensive blog post covering all the topics in the discussion. Write in first person using I and me as the speaking voice. I am the host, and the blog post should be written from my own perspective as if I am narrating the blog post."
The blog post instruction tells the AI exactly how to write: first person, comprehensive coverage, from the host's perspective.
For **social media posts** (like X/Twitter threads), I added instructions to keep posts short (around 280 characters), and to include a placeholder link like `[URL to video]` so I can substitute the real URL once the episode is published.
## The Results
After saving these personalizations, every time you use the Co-creator suggestions, the output reflects your instructions. Here is what the generated X thread looked like with these settings:
The generated X thread uses first-person voice ("Here's what I learned") and includes the URL placeholder exactly as instructed.
And here is the blog post output. Notice how it speaks from the host's first-person perspective: "When I first sat down with Chris Lyons, president of the Texas State Association of Home Builders, I quickly realized this wasn't just another industry talk..."
The blog post is now written from the host's perspective in first person, exactly as specified in the custom instruction.
## Tips for Getting the Best Results
- **Provide samples.** If you have examples of the tone you want, paste them into the custom instructions so the AI can match your style.
- **Be specific about what you do not want.** Telling the AI "do not create key takeaways sections" or "avoid generic phrases" produces cleaner output than leaving it on defaults.
- **Review and iterate.** The first batch of outputs after personalizing may still need minor tweaks. Adjust your instructions based on what you see.
- **Per-studio settings.** If you run multiple podcasts in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), remember that each studio has its own personalization settings. Tailor them to each show's voice.
## Related Riverside Guides
[Quick YouTube Metadata Workflow with RiversideI walk through the exact steps I follow so you can replicate the same process and prepare metadata for YouTube without overworking each upload.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/quick-youtube-metadata-riverside/)
[How to Create AI Thumbnails in Riverside with Co-CreatorCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-ai-thumbnails-in-riverside-with-co-creator/)
[Riverside Content Planner: Schedule Social Media Posts Inside RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-content-planner-schedule-social-media-posts-inside-riverside/)
[How to Customize Logo and Brand in Riverside: Step-by-step GuideLet me show you how I customize logo and brand in Riverside so your podcast or show consistently displays the right logo, colors, and placement across recordings and edits.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/customize-logo-brand-riverside/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
The AI saves me a significant amount of time packaging episodes and getting them ready to publish. Most of the time when I submit the generated content to clients for review, they come back with minimal changes or none at all. With these personalization controls, you can get the output much closer to your final version right from the start.
### Riverside Content Planner: Schedule Social Media Posts Inside Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-content-planner-schedule-social-media-posts-inside-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-03-26T15:58:36.000Z
Riverside just rolled out a feature I've been wanting for a long time: the **Content Planner**. This new tool replaces the old [Scheduler](https://cotovan.com/post/schedule-multiple-recording-sessions-in-advance-with-riversidefm/) and brings everything related to planning, [recording](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-record-in-high-resolution-in-riverside/), and publishing into a single unified calendar view. The standout addition? You can now **schedule social media posts directly from Riverside** — no need to jump to a separate scheduling platform.
## Where to Find the Content Planner
The Content Planner lives inside each studio. If you have multiple studios, each one gets its own planner — it's studio-specific. Head into your studio, and you'll see **Planner** in the left-hand sidebar navigation. Click it and you land on a full month calendar view.
Your Riverside studio home page with the Planner option visible in the left sidebar.
This calendar shows all your scheduled activities at a glance — recording sessions, webinars, [podcast episodes](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-schedule-podcast-recordings/), and now social media posts. Everything lives in one place.
The Content Planner displays a month calendar with all your scheduled sessions, episodes, and social posts. Click the + button on any day to add something new.
## Scheduling a Recording Session
Click the **+** button at the top of any day and you get four options: **Session**, **Webinar**, **Episode**, or **Social media post**.
The scheduling dropdown gives you four options: Session, Webinar, Episode, and Social media post.
Scheduling a recording session works exactly the way it did before. Pick a date, give it a name (something like "Catch Up with Chris"), set the time, add a description, and invite your guest by email.
If you want to go live while recording, toggle the **Live stream** option — you can connect destinations like X (Twitter), LinkedIn, Facebook, and YouTube right from within the session setup.
When scheduling a recording session, you can enable live streaming and choose destinations like X, LinkedIn, Facebook, and YouTube.
Once you create the session, it appears on the calendar. You can also add it to your Google Calendar if you want a reminder there too.
## Scheduling Social Media Posts
This is the feature that really excites me. Social media scheduling might even help you **replace some of the standalone scheduling platforms** you're currently paying for.
Click the **+** button on a day and choose **Social media post**. You'll see a panel open on the right side of the screen where you choose your platform. At the moment, **YouTube** and **YouTube Shorts** are the supported platforms, with more on the way.
Choose your connected YouTube account and select YouTube or YouTube Shorts. The preview updates to show the correct aspect ratio — vertical for Shorts.
### Selecting Your File
Here's a key detail: you're not uploading a file from your computer. When you click **"Click to select file"**, Riverside pulls from your **exported edits** inside the platform. So if you've already recorded, edited, and exported a clip in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), it's right there waiting to be scheduled. No downloading and re-uploading needed.
### AI-Generated Descriptions
Writing descriptions for social media takes time — especially if you're scheduling multiple clips. Riverside has an answer for that. Click the **Generate Description** button (the little pen/AI icon), and Riverside's AI will analyze your clip and draft a description for you.
It generates a summary, key takeaways, and even chapters for longer videos.
The AI-generated description includes a summary, takeaways, and chapters. Edit it to match your voice, or use it as a starting point.
You don't have to keep everything it generates. Delete whatever doesn't fit, polish the language, and you're good to go. It's a starting point that saves you from staring at a blank description field.
### Visibility and Scheduling
Just like publishing directly on YouTube, you can choose the visibility for your scheduled post: **Public**, **Unlisted**, or **Private**.
Choose whether your scheduled post will be Public, Unlisted, or Private when it goes live.
I personally use **Private** or **Unlisted** for my YouTube Shorts because I like to link them to the original long-form video before making them public. Since the Riverside integration doesn't offer that linking option yet, I schedule as private, then finalize things in YouTube Studio.
But if you don't need that extra step, scheduling as Public means it goes live automatically at the chosen date and time.
Pick your date and time, hit **Schedule**, and the post appears on your planner calendar.
The scheduled social media post now appears on the calendar alongside your recording sessions and podcast episodes.
## Why This Matters: Riverside as a One-Stop Shop
[Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) has been steadily building out its platform to cover the entire content creation workflow. With the Content Planner, you now have **planning, recording, editing, live streaming, webinars, podcasting,** [**podcast hosting**](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UjzWkxbAa6s&ref=cotovan.com)**,** [**podcast website**](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5KzHx-qjAZ8&ref=cotovan.com)**, and social media scheduling** — all in one place.
While YouTube is the only social media platform available for scheduling right now, you can already see placeholders for additional platforms coming soon. I expect more integrations to be added in the near future.
I love it when tools keep adding features that keep your workflow centralized. It saves time, reduces context-switching, and makes your content production more efficient.
## Want to Learn More?
If you'd like to learn Riverside with me one-on-one, I offer [coaching sessions](https://cotovan.com/coaching) where we can cover the best workflows, tips, and workarounds for your specific needs. And if you want to stay updated on all things Riverside, subscribe to my [Riverside newsletter](https://cotovan.com/riverside-newsletter) to get notified when new tutorials go live.
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Dynamic Zoom Edits in Riverside for Polished Podcasts
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/dynamic-zoom-edits-riverside-polished-podcasts/
Last updated: 2026-03-19T21:02:29.000Z
Have you ever watched a podcast where the camera zooms in on the speaker making a point, then pulls back to the wide shot, and thought they had a camera operator doing it live? They almost certainly did not. It is all done in post-production, and if you use [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), you can do it in a couple of minutes.
In this tutorial, I will walk you through two techniques that give your podcast or interview that polished, dynamic look: **zooming in and out on a single speaker** and **switching between different camera layouts**.
I use both in every episode I produce, typically making eighty to a hundred camera changes per show. It sounds like a lot, but once you learn the workflow, it goes fast.
## Why Static Shots Lose Viewers
A single static shot running for forty-five minutes is hard to watch. Nothing moves, there is no visual cue telling the viewer who to pay attention to, and people click away.
Adding zoom changes and layout switches does two things: it **breaks the visual monotony** so your audience stays engaged, and it **signals who the focus is** at any given moment.
There is also a very practical benefit. You can use zoom changes to **hide bad cuts**. When you trim out a mistake or a long pause, the jump cut can look jarring – the speaker's head snaps from one position to another. A zoom or angle change at that exact point makes the cut invisible. Professional podcasters and YouTubers use this all the time, and most of the time they only have one camera.
## The Two Techniques
Before we dig in, here is the overview of what we are working with:
1. **Zoom in and out on a single speaker** using the [Crop and Zoom](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/) tools. This gives you a simulated second camera angle from a single recording.
2. **Switch between different camera layouts** \-- going from a side-by-side wide shot to a single-speaker close-up and back. This works when you have two or more speakers.
You combine these two, and you get that polished, [multi-camera look](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/) without ever needing a second camera.
## How to Add Scenes and Change the Layout
Everything in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) starts with **scenes**. A scene is a segment of your video where you can apply a different layout, zoom level, or crop. The timeline at the bottom shows your scenes, and you can add new scene breaks wherever you want.
To create a scene break, bring your playhead to the position where you want a change and click the **Add Scene** button (or press **Shift + S**). You will see a vertical divider appear in the timeline, splitting your video into separate segments.
Once you have isolated a scene, you can change its layout independently. Click **Layout** at the top of the editor, and you will see pre-built layout options including Solo Speaker views and multi-speaker grids. Select the one you want for that scene.
If the layout shows the wrong person, click on the video itself and use the dropdown at the top to switch which speaker is displayed. You can toggle between any participant in the recording.
## How to Zoom In and Out
The zoom effect is where the real production value comes in. Here is the step-by-step process:
1. **Navigate to the point** where you want the zoom to begin.
2. **Create a scene break** at that point (Shift + S or the Add Scene button).
3. **Navigate to the point** where you want the zoom to end.
4. **Create another scene break** there. You have now isolated the segment you want zoomed in.
5. **Click on the video** in that scene, then click **Crop** at the top.
6. Use the **plus and minus buttons** to zoom in or out. One or two clicks is usually enough -- you want the movement to feel subtle, not dramatic.
7. **Drag the video** to reframe it. You will see alignment grid lines to help you keep the speaker centered.
8. **Click outside the video area** to apply the crop.
When you play back across the scene boundary, you will see the video smoothly jump between your normal framing and the zoomed-in framing. The scene after will return to the original zoom level.
Keep your zoom changes **subtle -- fifteen to twenty percent in or out at most**. You want the viewer to feel the movement rather than be distracted by it. If you are zooming in too much, it starts to look pixelated and unnatural.
## Using Zoom to Hide Jump Cuts
This is where the technique becomes genuinely useful for editing, not just aesthetics. When you cut out a mistake, a stutter, or a long pause, you are left with a jump cut. The speaker's head position shifts, their expression changes mid-sentence, and it looks off.
The fix: **place a zoom change right at the cut point**. Go from your normal framing to a slightly tighter crop (or vice versa). The viewer reads it as an intentional camera move rather than a bad edit.
Here is my approach: I look at the transcript in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) and find the edit points where content was removed. At each cut, I insert a scene break and change the zoom level. I alternate between my normal framing and my punched-in framing throughout the video. Every cut becomes a zoom change, and every zoom change becomes invisible.
This is the same technique YouTubers use when they shoot with two cameras – except you are creating the second angle in post with the Crop tool, rather than recording from a separate camera.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Switching Camera Layouts in Interviews
When you have two or more speakers, you get a third creative tool: **switching between layouts entirely**. Instead of just zooming in on one person, you can go from the side-by-side wide shot to a full-screen close-up of whoever is speaking.
This gives you three angles to work with:
- **The wide shot** \-- both speakers side by side
- **Your close-up** \-- just you, full frame
- **The guest close-up** \-- just your guest, full frame
Three angles from a single recording, switched between throughout the episode. That is your multi-camera look.
## When to Switch to a Close-Up
Timing matters. Here is the workflow I recommend:
**Do not switch the moment someone starts talking.** Let them begin speaking with both of you still on screen. After a sentence or two, switch to their close-up. Then, when they are about to finish, switch back to the wide shot *before* they are done -- let them finish their point with both speakers visible.
This feels less jarring than cutting right on the dot. The color-coded waveforms in the Riverside timeline help enormously here. Each speaker's audio is a different color, so you can see at a glance who is talking and for how long.
My rules of thumb:
- Use the **wide shot** when both speakers are in a quick back-and-forth exchange
- Switch to a **close-up** when one person is telling a longer story or making an extended point
- Cut to **your close-up** when you are making a key point as the host or a reaction shot
- Let each scene breathe for **fifteen to twenty seconds** minimum – if you are changing every five seconds, it feels frantic
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Combining Both Techniques
Here is where it all comes together. You are on your guest's close-up and they stumble over a word. You cut out the stumble, and right at that cut point, you switch back to the wide shot. The angle change hides the edit completely.
Or: stay on the guest's close-up, but punch in tighter right at the cut point using the Crop tool. Either way, the jump cut disappears.
You can layer both techniques throughout an entire episode. Layout switches for the bigger transitions, zoom changes for the subtle movement within a single speaker's segment.
## A Practical Episode Structure
Here is a formula you can follow for every episode:
1. **Open with you full screen.** If you are the host, start with a Solo Speaker layout for your intro.
2. **Switch to side-by-side** when you introduce your guest.
3. **Cut to close-ups** when either person speaks for an extended stretch. Use the waveform colors to guide your decisions.
4. **Add zoom changes within close-up shots** to create movement. Push in for emphasis, pull back out for context.
5. **Use every edit point as a zoom-change opportunity.** Every time you remove a mistake, change the zoom level at that cut.
6. **Do not overdo it.** Let each scene breathe. Subtle, fifteen to twenty percent zoom changes work better than dramatic pushes. You must also make peace with the fact that you won't be able to hide all the cuts.
## Adjusting Captions Per Scene
One thing to watch out for: if you are creating social media clips with captions enabled, changing the camera layout can cause the [captions to overlap with the speaker's face](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-captions-presets-save-time/).
In the wide shot, your captions might sit nicely in the center of the frame. But when you switch to a solo speaker close-up, those same captions could land right on their face.
The fix is simple: **select the scene**, click on the captions, and make sure you select **"This Scene"** (not "All Scenes") before repositioning them. Drag the captions down to where they belong. The change only applies to that specific scene -- the scene before and after will keep their original caption position.
[Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) lets you position captions independently per scene, which is exactly what you need when switching between layouts that frame the speaker differently.
## Fixing Off-Center Framing After Zoom
Sometimes when you zoom in, the speaker ends up off to one side. This happens when they were not centered in the original recording -- they were leaning to one side, or their camera was not positioned squarely.
To fix this, click on the speaker's video, go to **Crop**, and simply drag the frame to reposition them. Use the grid lines as a guide. Click outside to apply, and the speaker will be [properly centered in that scene](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/).
Take a few seconds to check your zoomed-in crops. What looks fine at the normal zoom level can look unbalanced when you push in tighter.
## Putting It All Together
That is the entire technique. No special camera, no live operator, just scenes, cropping, and layout changes inside [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside). Once you get the hang of it, you can add sixty to a hundred camera changes to a forty-five-minute episode in about fifteen to twenty minutes.
The result looks like a professionally produced podcast with multiple camera angles. Your viewers stay engaged because the visuals keep moving. Your edits are invisible because every cut point has a zoom change. And you did it all with a single recording.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Related Riverside Tutorials
[How I Save Time with Captions Presets in RiversideI’ll show you a straightforward, repeatable process for creating and applying captions presets in Riverside so you don’t have to style captions from scratch for every video.cotovan.com](https://cristi-cotovan.ghost.io/riverside-captions-presets-save-time/?ref=cotovan.com)
[Crop, Reposition, Reframe: Video Editing in Riverside.fmAdjust the framing and cropping of individual videos during editing in Riverside.cotovan.com](https://cristi-cotovan.ghost.io/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/?ref=cotovan.com)
[How to Zoom and Pan the Riverside Timeline with Your Mousecotovan.com](https://cristi-cotovan.ghost.io/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/?ref=cotovan.com)
[How to Fix Choppy Audio and Video Cuts in RiversideFix choppy cuts in Riverside caused by misaligned word-level transcription timestamps. Learn how to adjust cut boundaries in the timeline to restore clean edits.cotovan.com](https://cristi-cotovan.ghost.io/how-to-fix-choppy-audio-and-video-cuts-in-riverside/?ref=cotovan.com)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Courses, Memberships, Digital Products in One Platform with Thinkific
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/courses-memberships-digital-products-in-one-platform-with-thinkific/
Last updated: 2026-03-17T13:47:33.000Z
There's a specific kind of fatigue that comes from managing too many platforms. One tool for hosting video, another for taking payments, a third for your community, a fourth for sending emails to your students, and somewhere in there a spreadsheet tracking who has access to what.
I've been there. Which is a big part of why I've built so much of my work on [Thinkific](https://cotovan.com/thinkific) over the years, and why I wanted to write this out properly rather than just mention it in passing.
This is more of a map of what the platform actually does, written by someone who uses it to run online courses, a membership community ([MediaMakers.club](https://mediamakers.club/?ref=cotovan.com)), and digital product sales.
[](https://mediamakers.club/?ref=cotovan.com)
If you're a creator, educator, or subject matter expert thinking about where to build your digital education business, this should give you a clear-eyed look at what Thinkific offers and how it all fits together.
### The Core Idea: One Platform, Many Product Types
[Thinkific](https://cotovan.com/thinkific) positions itself as a learning commerce platform. In practice, that means it supports the full range of things a creator or educator typically needs to sell: online courses, memberships, digital downloads, live sessions, webinars, coaching packages, and community spaces. You can use some of these or all of them, and they all live in the same place, connected to the same student accounts and the same checkout flow.
That last part matters more than it sounds. When your courses, your membership, and your digital products all share the same backend, your students don't have to manage multiple logins, and you don't have to stitch together different tools just to figure out who has access to what.
### Building and Hosting Courses
The course builder is drag-and-drop and requires no coding knowledge. You build courses in modules and lessons, and within each lesson you can include video, audio, PDF downloads, written content, quizzes, and assignments.
You can also drip-release content on a schedule, which works well for programs where you want students to move through material at a particular pace rather than jumping straight to the end.
Thinkific hosts your course videos directly, so you're not relying on YouTube or Vimeo embeds. You can control exactly what students see, without related-video suggestions pulling them away.
The course player is fully branded. You choose colors, fonts, and layout, so the learning experience looks like your product, not a generic template. You can also preview courses from a student's perspective before publishing, which is a small thing that saves a lot of back-and-forth when you're setting things up.
I use this to host my courses, and what I appreciate most is that once a course is live, there's genuinely not much maintenance overhead. Students get access, they work through the content, and I can see their progress without having to do anything manually.
Completion certificates are built in. You can design branded certificates that students receive when they finish a course or a learning path. That kind of credential matters in certain fields and adds real weight to professional development content.
### Communities: Not Just a Discussion Board
Communities is one of the features that has developed most noticeably over the past couple of years.
The structure works through spaces. A community can have multiple spaces, each with its own focus and discussions. Some spaces can be open to all members; others can be private, restricted to specific cohorts, tiers, or groups. Members can post, comment, react, and use @mentions. There's a threading structure that keeps discussions readable rather than turning into a wall of replies.
Thinkific recently added direct messaging within communities and video upload inside posts, which makes the interaction feel closer to a modern social platform rather than a bulletin board.
What makes this genuinely useful rather than just a nice extra is the integration with the rest of the platform. The Learner Hub lets students move between their courses and their community spaces in one connected experience. They don't have to leave your ecosystem to find the conversation.
There's also a mobile app with push notifications, so members can stay connected without having to log into a browser. [Thinkific](https://cotovan.com/thinkific) recently modernized the community interface and mobile experience, and the weekly digest emails that go out automatically help keep engagement going between active sessions.
One practical thing worth knowing: you can sell a community as a standalone product, not just as part of a course or membership. If your business is primarily community-driven rather than course-driven, that flexibility matters.
### Memberships: Recurring Access, Not Just Recurring Payments
A Thinkific membership is essentially a subscription container. Inside it, you can include any combination of courses, community access, digital downloads, and live sessions. Members pay a recurring fee and get ongoing access to everything you've packaged into that membership.
For [MediaMakers.club](https://mediamakers.club/?ref=cotovan.com), this is how I give members monthly access to a growing content library alongside the community. As I add new courses or resources, I add them to the membership and existing subscribers automatically get access. There's no need to manually adjust anything per member or send individual access links.
You can create multiple membership tiers at different price points, each with different levels of access. A lower tier might include the community and a selection of courses; a higher tier might include everything plus priority access to live sessions. Each tier is set up as a separate membership product, and they're displayed together on your site for potential members to compare.
Subscriptions run through Stripe or Thinkific Payments, and the billing management is handled on the platform side. You can set billing dates, trial periods, and pricing adjustments, and the recent commerce updates have made it easier to apply coupons to subscriptions and manage what happens when payment fails.
### Digital Products and Bundles
Beyond courses and memberships, Thinkific supports the sale of digital downloads as standalone products. These can be PDFs, templates, workbooks, audio files, or any other downloadable file. You set a price, someone checks out, and they get access to the download. Simple. I use this to sell my Camtasia assets, for example:
[](https://www.mediamakers.club/products/digital%5Fdownloads/camtasia-grids-guides?ref=cotovan.com)
Bundles let you package multiple products together at a combined price. You might bundle three related courses at a discount, or pair a course with a set of templates. This is where you can get creative with your product catalog without needing to manage it across multiple platforms.
I sell a few digital products this way, and having them in the same place as my courses and membership means there's one checkout experience, one student account, one place where everything lives.
There's also a one-click upsell feature built into checkout. After a student purchases, you can present a relevant offer before they complete the process. It's a straightforward sales mechanic that doesn't require any third-party funnel tool.
### The Website and Storefront
Thinkific includes a website builder, which means you don't need a separate hosting setup just to have a storefront for your courses. You can build landing pages, a home page, a course catalog, and individual course or product pages, all within the platform.
You can use a custom domain, so it looks like your own site rather than a subdomain of Thinkific's. The builder is template-based, but it gives you enough control over branding that the result feels like your own space. If you already have a website built on WordPress or another CMS, you can integrate Thinkific so that courses and products appear as part of your existing site rather than replacing it.
SEO settings are built in at the page level, so you can set titles, meta descriptions, and slugs without needing a plugin.
## Analytics, Integrations, and the Practical Bits
Thinkific's analytics dashboard shows you enrollment numbers, completion rates, revenue, and student engagement data. On higher plans, you get more granular reporting. You can export data or connect external analytics tools through integrations.
The integrations list covers most of what you'd need. Email marketing tools including Mailchimp, ConvertKit, and others connect through either native integrations or Zapier. CRM tools connect at higher plan levels. The API is available on Grow and above, which opens up more custom workflows if you have development resource.
There's also a built-in affiliate program, so you can let others promote your courses and products in exchange for a commission. It's not the most feature-rich affiliate system on the market, but it covers the basics without requiring a separate tool.
## AI Features
The most recent addition worth noting is Thinker, Thinkific's AI teaching assistant, which became generally available in February 2026\. The idea is that you train it on your own course content and it can answer learner questions based on what you've already created, essentially acting as a first-line support layer that knows your material.
For creators running at scale or with a large content library, this reduces the support burden without replacing the human side of your teaching.
[](https://cotovan.com/thinkific)
There's also an AI course outline generator, which is useful when you're starting a new course and want to turn your existing knowledge into a structured curriculum faster than you would working from a blank page.
## A Few Honest Notes
Thinkific removed its free plan a couple of years ago, so there's no indefinitely free tier. There is a [30-day trial](https://cotovan.com/thinkific) that lets you build and explore before committing. The paid plans start at around $36/month on the Basic plan and go up depending on what you need. Memberships and live lessons are on the Start plan and above. Communities with multiple spaces and advanced analytics are on Grow and above.
The customization options are solid for most use cases, but if you want fully custom page designs that go beyond the template system, you'll need either coding knowledge or a developer. That's not unusual for platforms at this level.
What I can say from using it consistently is that the things I rely on most work reliably. Payments process correctly, student access is managed automatically, and the community stays organized without constant manual input. For a creator running a medium-complexity business without a large technical team, that reliability is worth a lot. And I like the unlimited video space!
---
## The Bottom Line
If you're building any combination of online courses, a paid community, a subscription membership, or digital product sales, [Thinkific](https://cotovan.com/thinkific) covers all of it from one place. That's not a given in this space. A lot of platforms do one or two of these things well but require you to stack additional tools for the rest.
What I run through Thinkific, including courses, [MediaMakers.club](https://mediamakers.club/?ref=cotovan.com), and a selection of digital products, would otherwise require at least three or four separate platforms stitched together. Instead, students have one login, I have one backend, and payments and access management happen automatically.
### How to Activate Your Podcast Website on Riverside (FREE)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-activate-your-podcast-website-on-riverside-free/
Last updated: 2026-03-11T14:49:00.000Z
If you're hosting your podcast with [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), there's a feature that's been highly requested since the [hosting service launched](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/) — you can now create a website for your podcast directly on the platform. It only takes a couple of clicks, and you'll have a landing page to share your podcast with the world.
## How to Create Your Podcast Website
Start by going to your studio — the one where you record and host your podcast. Navigate to the **Hosting** tab. Across the top, you'll see the platforms where your podcast is distributed. If you don't see a website option, look for the **plus (+) menu** and click it — you'll find **Create Website** right there.
The Create Website option appears under the plus menu in the Hosting tab
Click **Create**, and Riverside suggests a subdomain based on your podcast name. The URL ends with `riverside.com` — for example, `yourname.riverside.com`. You can customize it to something shorter, but it must be unique. You can also redirect a custom domain through your DNS settings if you prefer a branded URL.
Once you pick an available name, your website is instantly live.
Your podcast website goes live immediately after choosing a subdomain
## What Your Podcast Website Includes
The website comes with several useful features right out of the box.
Your podcast website includes artwork, description, distribution links, and a full episode listing
The homepage displays your podcast artwork, description, and links to distribution platforms like Apple Podcasts, Spotify, and YouTube. Episodes are organized under **Recent** and **Popular** tabs.
Each episode gets its own dedicated page with the artwork, a play button (for video episodes, listeners can play them right in the browser), and the full episode description with all the links you've added.
Each episode has its own page with playback, distribution links, and a subscribe widget
The website also includes dark and light mode, a search function to find episodes, an About page pulled from your hosting settings, and sharing options so listeners can copy the link or share on social media.
Listeners can subscribe with their name and email address to get notified when you publish new episodes — they'll need to verify their email through a confirmation link.
The subscribe modal lets listeners sign up for episode notifications
## How to Export Your Subscribers
A common question I've seen on social media: do you have access to the email addresses of people who subscribe through your podcast website? The answer is yes.
Back in your [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) studio, click the **Website** link in the Hosting tab. You'll see the option to **Export subscribers (.csv)**.
Export your subscriber list as a CSV file directly from the Hosting tab
Download the file and you'll get a spreadsheet with all your subscriber data — email addresses, full names, country, and subscription date.
The exported CSV includes email addresses, names, country, and subscription date
This is a great way to build a direct connection with your listeners outside of the podcast platforms. If you're already [hosting your podcast on Riverside](https://cotovan.com/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/), creating a website takes just seconds and gives your show a professional home on the web.
### Related guides
[Host Your Podcast on Riverside: Migration WalkthroughNow you can host your podcast on Riverside and you can stop juggling downloads and uploads between recording, editing and distribution. This step-by-step guide shows exactly how to do it.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/)
[How to Select a File from Projects and Use as Podcast Episode in RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/how-to-move-a-video-from-projects-to-hosting-in-riverside/)
[How to Remove or Unpublish a Podcast Episode in RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/how-to-remove-or-unpublish-a-podcast-episode-in-riverside/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Add Guest Names and Titles in the Riverside Editor After Recording
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-guest-names-and-titles-in-the-riverside-editor-after-recording/
Last updated: 2026-03-11T13:43:57.000Z
If you've recorded an interview in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) and noticed that your guests' names and titles are missing when you open the editor, don't worry — this is expected behavior, and adding them back is straightforward.
## Why Names Disappear After Recording
During a live recording session, Riverside displays participant names and titles in each person's video box. However, the files saved after recording are raw, unedited, and untouched. The names and labels you saw during the session are part of the live studio interface — they are not baked into the actual video files.
This is by design. It gives you full control over how names, titles, and other visual elements appear in your final edit, and allows you to download the individual raw files without any elements burned onto them.
## How to Add Names and Titles in the Editor
When you open your recording in the Riverside Editor, you can add names and titles back using text fields or [templates and the Brand Kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/).
Here's how:
### Option 1: Apply a Template
Riverside includes pre-built templates that come with name labels, lower thirds, and other design elements already in place.
To use one:
1. Open your recording in the **Editor**
2. Click "Scene" at the top of the video canvas area.
3. Browse the available **Templates** on the right panel
4. Select a template that includes name labels
5. Edit the names and titles directly in the template fields to match your guests
Templates are the fastest way to get a polished look with names, titles, and consistent [branding](https://cotovan.com/post/customize-logo-brand-riverside/) across all your episodes.
### Option 2: Add Text Boxes Manually
Add a text element from "Text" in the sidebar, then add a variant you like on screen. Then, customize it, add the name of the person and place it where you want on the screen.
### **Save Your Design for Reuse**
Once you've set up your names, titles, and branding the way you want, save it as a [reusable scene design](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/). This way you won't have to recreate the layout for every episode — just load your saved scene and update the names.
[How to Save and Reuse Scene Layouts in RiversideWhen you’re editing a podcast or video interview in Riverside, the layout determines how speakers are arranged on screen. But you don’t have to stick with the same layout for the entire episode. You can save custom scene layouts and reuse them across projects — building a personal library of go-toCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/)
### Related guides
[Apply Branding with One Click in Riverside.fm Brand KitRiverside has introduced a new feature in their editor, allowing you to apply a brand kit to your edits in just one click.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/)
[How to Customize Logo and Brand in Riverside: Step-by-step GuideLet me show you how I customize logo and brand in Riverside so your podcast or show consistently displays the right logo, colors, and placement across recordings and edits.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/customize-logo-brand-riverside/)
[Crop, Reposition, Reframe: Video Editing in Riverside.fmAdjust the framing and cropping of individual videos during editing in Riverside.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/)
[How I Save Time with Captions Presets in RiversideI’ll show you a straightforward, repeatable process for creating and applying captions presets in Riverside so you don’t have to style captions from scratch for every video.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-captions-presets-save-time/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Add Intros, Outros, Hooks, and Music in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-intros-outros-hooks-and-music-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-03-06T16:31:31.000Z
In this tutorial, I walk through the complete workflow for adding intros, outros, hooks, background music, and YouTube end screens to a podcast episode in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
Whether you record your intro directly in the studio, import an external file from a client, or use AI-generated hooks, Riverside handles all of it — and with the [Brand Kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/), you can even automate the process.
I'll be working with a real client episode from the Builders Straight Talk podcast to demonstrate everything. The typical layout for this show is: a hook at the beginning, a company promo segment, the host's personal intro, the main episode, an outro promo, and finally a YouTube end screen.
That sounds like a lot, but Riverside makes it manageable. Let me show you how.
## Method 1: Record Your Intro Directly in Riverside
If you're the host and want to record a quick intro without leaving the editor, this is the fastest option. In the timeline, click the **\+ button** at the position where you want the intro — typically at the very beginning. From the menu, select **Record**.
Click the + button at the beginning of your timeline to see all the options for adding content to your edit.
This takes you out of the current edit and into the [Riverside studio](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/), where you can record yourself on camera. Make sure your microphone and camera are set correctly, then hit Record.
When you're done, stop the recording and Riverside will process and transcribe it. You'll see a **Continue Editing** button — click it, and you're right back in your edit with the new intro already inserted at the beginning of the timeline.
After recording your intro in the studio, Riverside places it at the beginning of your edit and transcribes it automatically.
The recording is automatically transcribed, so you can immediately edit it using the text-based editor — trim silence from the beginning and end by collapsing the tracks and dragging the handles. Riverside keeps this recording under the project's **Recordings** tab, so you can reuse it later or create a standalone edit from it.
## Method 2: Import an External Intro File
Often, you'll have a pre-recorded intro — maybe the host sends you a separate file for each episode, or you have a standard intro video from a client. The key here is **how** you upload the file.
**Important:** Do not upload the file through the Uploads area (B-roll). If you do, Riverside won't [transcribe](https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside/) it, meaning you won't be able to use the text-based editor on that segment. Instead, go to the project's Recordings tab and click **\+ Create → Import**.
Use the +Create button and then Import to upload an external file that will be transcribed by Riverside.
This opens an upload dialog where you can drop your MP4, MP3, or WAV file. Riverside will ask how many speakers are in the file — select the correct number and click **Upload**.
When importing via Create > Import, Riverside asks how many speakers are in the file and will transcribe it using the studio's default language.
Riverside processes the file, transcribes it using the studio's default language, and makes it available as a full recording with transcript. You can now create a separate edit from this recording, clean it up (remove filler words, trim dead air), and have it ready to insert into the main episode.
### Give Your Edits Descriptive Names
Before inserting the intro, rename it — click the name at the top of the editor and type something clear like "Michael's Intro." This matters because you'll be searching for it later in Your Media.
## Navigating Between Edits
One of the most convenient features is the **edit dropdown** at the top of the editor. Click it to see every edit in the current project — your main episode, your intro, social media clips, Magic Segments, and anything else Riverside generated. You can jump between them instantly without leaving the studio.
The edit dropdown at the top lets you quickly jump between all edits in your project — intros, clips, and the main episode.
## Inserting Content with Your Media
To add your prepared intro (or any other content) to the main episode, click the **\+ button** at the position where you want it inserted. Then select **Your Media**. This panel gives you a unified view of everything in your account — Recordings, Edits, Videos, Images, and Audio files.
The fastest way to find what you need is the **search bar**. Type the name of your edit (e.g., "Michael's Intro") and it appears immediately. Click it, and it's inserted at the position you selected.
Search for any edit, recording, or file by name in the Your Media panel. This is the fastest way to find and insert content.
If you prefer browsing, use the **file type filter**. Under Projects, you can filter by All files, Recording, Edit, Hook, Magic Clip, Magic Episode, Magic Segment, or Export. You can also narrow down by project to stay within the current one.
Filter by file type in Your Media to quickly find hooks, edits, recordings, or any other content across all your projects.
### Renaming Speakers
When you import a file through your own account, Riverside assigns your name as the speaker. To fix this, click on the speaker name in the transcript and select **Rename**. Type the correct name — this updates it throughout the edit.
## Adding Promo Segments
For recurring segments like company promos, you can upload video or audio files and reuse them across episodes. Click the **\+ button** at the desired position (beginning or end of the episode) and select **Upload**. Choose your file, and once Riverside processes it, click to insert it.
Use **Shift + mouse wheel** to quickly scroll through the timeline to the end of the episode, where you can add the outro promo the same way.
The complete episode layout with all segments visible in the timeline — promo, intro, main episode, outro promo, and background music.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Brand Kit: Auto-Apply Intros and Outros
If your intro and outro are the same for every episode, you can save time with the [Brand Kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/). Open the **Brand panel** from the right sidebar. Along with logos, color palettes, fonts, and captions, you'll see sections for **Intro** and **Outro**.
The Brand Kit panel lets you designate a standard intro and outro that can be auto-applied to every edit with one click.
Click the + button next to Intro and select the format — 16:9 for landscape, 9:16 for vertical clips, or 1:1 for square. Choose your intro file from Your Media. Do the same for Outro. You can set different versions for each format.
Now, whenever you click **Apply Brand**, your designated intro and outro are automatically placed at the beginning and end of the edit. This also applies when Riverside generates Magic Clips, Magic Segments, and the Magic Episode.
## Using AI-Generated Hooks from Made For You
Riverside automatically creates hook clips from your recording as soon as you finish. Find them in the project's **Made for You** tab under Hooks. These are short, attention-grabbing moments selected by AI.
Riverside automatically generates hook clips from your recording. They're vertical by default, but you can change the orientation.
These hooks are **vertical by default** (9:16). To use one in your landscape episode, open it in the editor and change the orientation to **16:9** using the format selector at the top. You'll also want to remove any auto-applied captions and logos that the Brand Kit may have added.
Give the hook a descriptive name (like "Hook 1") so you can find it easily. Then jump back to your main episode using the edit dropdown, click **+** at the very beginning, open **Your Media**, and search for your hook by name. Click it to insert.
## Adding a YouTube End Screen
YouTube allows a 20-second end screen where you can place clickable elements like "Subscribe," related videos, or playlists. To include this, design or use a pre-made 20-second video and upload it at the end of your episode the same way — **+** at the end → **Upload** → select file → click to insert.
## Adding Background Music
Look at the bottom of the timeline for the **Add Music** button. Clicking it opens the Music panel, which has two tabs: Stock Media (Riverside's built-in library) and your own uploaded files.
The Music panel gives you access to stock media and your own uploaded tracks. Your music appears on a dedicated track below the main timeline.
Move your playhead to where you want the music to start — typically the very beginning of the episode. Click **Upload** in the Music panel, select your audio file, and once it's processed, click it to add. The music appears on a dedicated **purple track** below the main audio tracks.
You can also access your music files through **Your Media → Audio** if you prefer that path.
### Setting the Right Volume
Click on the music in the timeline to select it, then look for the **Volume & effects** button. This opens a popup with a volume slider and fade controls.
Set your background music to around 40% volume so it complements the dialogue without overpowering it. Use Fade in and Fade out for smooth transitions.
For [background music](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-riverside/) playing under dialogue, **around 40% volume** works well as a starting point. Play the section back and adjust while listening — the music should complement the voices without overpowering them.
### Synchronizing Music with Transitions
Here's a technique I like to use: find the final beat or "release" of your music track — in this case, a guitar twang at the end of a rock track — and align it with a key transition point, like the moment the host starts speaking after the intro segments. This creates a satisfying audio cue that signals the main episode is beginning.
To do this, grab the music clip with your mouse and **slide it left or right** along the timeline until the ending aligns where you need it. If the music extends too far before the beginning of the show, **trim the start** by dragging the left edge inward.
Position your music so the final beat aligns with the transition from the intro to the main episode for a professional feel.
### Fade In and Fade Out
To avoid an abrupt start, add a **fade in**. Select the music, open Volume & effects, and set the fade in to about **5 seconds**. The music will gradually rise instead of starting at full volume. Do the same with fade out at the end of the outro music.
### Current Limitation: No In-Track Volume Automation
At the moment, Riverside doesn't support volume automation within the [music track](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-riverside/) — you can't have the music get louder and quieter at different points. The only controls are the overall volume, fade in at the start, and fade out at the end. Hopefully this will come in a future update of the editor.
### Adding Music to the Outro
Repeat the same process for the end of the episode. Place your playhead near the end of the conversation, add the same music file again from the Music panel, and position it so the ending of the track aligns with the start of the YouTube end screen. Set the volume to 40%, add a fade in, and the goodbyes and final words will have music playing softly underneath.
## Wrapping Up
That covers the complete workflow for building out a podcast episode in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) with all the polish — hooks, intros, promos, music, and end screens. Between the direct recording option, external file imports, Your Media panel, Brand Kit automation, and the dedicated music track, Riverside gives you multiple paths to assemble professional episodes without needing a separate DAW.
If you have questions about a specific workflow, let me know in the comments!
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Related guides
[How to Invite an Editor to Your Riverside Account Without Sharing Full AccessRiverside’s Editor add-on lets you bring in an outside editor to work on your recordings without giving them access to your full account. Here’s how it works and how to set it up. What the Editor Add-On Gives Access To When you invite someone as an editor, they can: \* Trim and edit recordings using the transcript-based editor \* Create clips from recordings \* Add and edit captions \* Change layouts \* Export finished recordings They cannot access your billing, account settings, studio, prCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-invite-an-editor-to-your-riverside-account-without-sharing-full-access/)
[How I Save Time with Captions Presets in RiversideI’ll show you a straightforward, repeatable process for creating and applying captions presets in Riverside so you don’t have to style captions from scratch for every video.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-captions-presets-save-time/)
[Upload Separate Recordings in Riverside and Edit as Multi-TrackIf you record one-on-one sessions in a studio or use a different recorder, you can still bring those files into Riverside and treat them like native multi-track sessions.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/import-separate-recordings-riverside-multi-track/)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Change the Transcript Language in Riverside After Recording
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-change-the-transcript-language-in-riverside-after-recording/
Last updated: 2026-03-03T10:42:09.000Z
If you recorded a session in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) with the wrong transcript language selected, you might wonder whether there's a way to fix it without losing your work.
Unfortunately, Riverside doesn't offer a direct re-transcribe option within an existing studio at the moment, but there is a straightforward workaround.
## The Fix: Re-Upload with the Correct Language
1. **Download your raw recordings** from the original studio (each participant's track).
2. **Change the language setting** in the studio to the correct one (e.g., English).
3. **Re-upload both tracks** to the same or a new studio.
When you re-upload, [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) will re-transcribe the audio using the new language setting. It also assembles the files as a [multi-track project](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/), so you keep full editing control.
## Related Resource
For a walkthrough on how to upload and edit multi-track recordings in Riverside, check out this video:
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Invite an Editor to Your Riverside Account Without Sharing Full Access
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-invite-an-editor-to-your-riverside-account-without-sharing-full-access/
Last updated: 2026-03-03T10:43:43.000Z
Riverside’s Editor add-on lets you bring in an outside editor to work on your recordings without giving them access to your full account. Here’s how it works and how to set it up.
## What the Editor Add-On Gives Access To
When you invite someone as an editor, they can:
- Trim and edit recordings using the transcript-based editor
- Create clips from recordings
- Add and edit captions
- Change layouts
- Export finished recordings
They **cannot** access your billing, account settings, studio, projects, or any recordings you haven’t specifically assigned to them. This makes it a secure option for outsourcing editing work.
## One Thing to Know First
The email address you use to invite the editor **must not already be connected to an existing Riverside account**. If they already have one, they’ll need to use a different email.
## How to Invite an Editor
1. Open your [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) Studio
2. Click **Settings** in the bottom left
3. Navigate to **Team,** then **Members**
4. Click **Invite**
5. Enter their email address and send the invite
The Editor add-on is billed separately per seat, either monthly or annually depending on your plan. You can cancel it anytime.
## When This Is Useful
If you’re [collaborating on edits](https://cotovan.com/how-to-collaborate-with-comments-in-riverside-edits/) with your clients or a freelance editor, virtual assistant, or team member who only needs editing access, this keeps your account locked down while still letting them do their work. They’ll only see the recordings you assign to them — nothing else.
## **Related**
[Riverside Roles Explained — Pick Guest, Producer, or AudienceThis quick guide walks you through the three role types - Guest, Producer, and Audience - how they behave during a session, and exactly when to choose each one.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-roles-guest-producer-audience/)
[How to Send Review Links to Clients in RiversideRiverside’s Share for Review feature lets you send a link to clients so they can leave timestamped comments on your edit — no exports, no extra tools needed.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/send-review-links-clients-riverside/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Create AI Thumbnails in Riverside with Co-Creator
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-ai-thumbnails-in-riverside-with-co-creator/
Last updated: 2026-02-26T15:01:37.000Z
Creating thumbnails used to mean opening a separate design tool, finding the right frame, and manually composing text and images. [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/) now handles it directly inside the editor through [Co-Creator](https://cotovan.com/quick-youtube-metadata-riverside/) — the same AI assistant that generates titles, descriptions, and show notes, and works with you [inside the editor](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/).
In this tutorial, I walk through the full thumbnail workflow: picking a style, customizing the title, requesting edits through the chat, and applying [brand kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/) colors for a consistent look across episodes.
## Finding the Thumbnail Tool
Open any recording in the Riverside editor and click **Co-Creator** in the right-hand sidebar. If you don't see a thumbnail option right away, check the **Suggestions** section — Co-Creator offers context-aware suggestions based on your recording, and thumbnail generation is one of them.
Once selected, Co-Creator automatically extracts faces from the video and asks which participants to feature. This saves you from manually scrubbing through footage looking for a usable frame.
## Choosing a Style and Title
Co-Creator presents several thumbnail styles to choose from - **Highlight a Point**, **Make a Statement**, **Editorial Take,** and others - each with a different layout and text treatment. You can scroll through two pages of options.
Next, it asks for a title. Co-Creator suggests titles pulled from the video content (it already knows what the episode is about), but you can also type your own. This is where you dial in the exact text that appears on the thumbnail.
Co-Creator offers multiple thumbnail styles — each with a different layout for text and speaker photos.
## Reviewing and Editing Generated Thumbnails
After choosing a style and title, Co-Creator generates two thumbnail variants. Each uses the extracted face photos and your title text, arranged according to the selected style. You can download either variant immediately, or refine it further.
The editing works through the chat interface — just type what you want changed. I ask for a color change ("make the text red") and Co-Creator regenerates the variant with that adjustment.
This iterative approach means you don't need any design skills — just describe what you want.
Co-Creator generates two variants per request — download directly or refine through the chat.
## Brand Kit Colors and Consistency
Co-Creator pulls colors from your [brand kit](https://cotovan.com/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/) automatically. The generation progress shows steps like "Applying template style," "Matching colors," "Composing portrait and text," and "Creating variations" — brand matching happens as part of the pipeline, not as an afterthought.
This means every thumbnail you create inherits your brand's visual identity without manual adjustments. If you produce content regularly, this consistency adds up fast.
The Editorial Take style with brand kit colors applied — consistent visual identity across every episode.
### Related guides
[How to Customize Logo and Brand in Riverside: Step-by-step GuideStep-by-step guide to add and position logos in Riverside. Learn to export transparent PNGs in Affinity and Canva (3000×3000 px tips), upload assets, and apply brand kits for consistent podcast visualCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/customize-logo-brand-riverside/)
[Apply Branding with One Click in Riverside.fm Brand KitRiverside has introduced a new feature in their editor, allowing you to apply a brand kit to your edits in just one click.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/)
[How I prepare metadata for YouTube quickly using RiversideSpeed up YouTube uploads using Riverside: auto-transcript + CoCreator for SEO titles & descriptions, precise chapter timestamps, tags and clean subtitles.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/quick-youtube-metadata-riverside/)
[All Riverside.fm Features: The Complete Review and How to Use ThemIn-depth Riverside.fm review: local-first multi-track recording, text-based editing with AI, multi-destination live streaming, and podcast hosting—how each feature fits into practical production workfCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
Try [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) to create polished thumbnails directly from your recordings, without leaving the editor.
### How to Send Review Links to Clients in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/send-review-links-clients-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-02-20T17:03:41.000Z
If you edit videos or podcasts for clients, you know the feedback loop: export the file, upload it to a review platform, wait for comments, download the notes, go back to your editor, make changes, and repeat.
Tools like Frame.io and TechSmith Review exist specifically for this — but they're separate subscriptions on top of your editing tools.
[Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) now has this built in. The new **Share for Review** feature lets you send a review link directly from your editor. Your client watches the video, leaves timestamped comments, and you see them right inside your edit — no exports, no downloads, no extra tools.
## How to Generate a Review Link
Open your edit in Riverside and click the **Share** button in the top-right corner. You'll see a new option: **Share for Review**.
The Share for Review option appears under the Share button — click it to generate a unique review link
Click it, and Riverside generates a unique link automatically. This link:
- Doesn't require your client to log in
- Doesn't require any downloads
- Updates in real time as you make changes to your edit
- Is secret, nobody can guess it
Copy the link and send it to your client via email, Slack, or however you communicate.
## What Your Client Sees
When your client opens the link, they get a clean, simplified version of the Riverside editor. They can see the transcript and the video preview, but without the editing tools, timeline, or sidebar — they can't accidentally change anything.
The reviewer's view — they see the transcript and video but can't make edits
## How Clients Leave Feedback
To leave a comment, your client simply selects a portion of the transcript text and clicks the **Comment** button (or presses **Option + C** / **Alt + C**). The first time they comment, they'll be asked for a name and email — just so you know who's leaving feedback.
Comments are tied to specific timestamps — your client can point to exact moments in the edit
Each comment is anchored to a specific time range in the transcript, so there's no ambiguity about which section the feedback refers to.
## Reviewing Feedback in Your Editor
Back in your editor, reload the page and the comments appear directly in your workspace. Each one shows:
- The **exact text selection** highlighted in yellow
- The **timestamp range** the comment refers to
- **Comment markers** on the timeline at the precise moment
- A **reply field** so you can discuss feedback with your client (use @ to mention them)
- A **Mark as resolved** button to track what you've addressed
Comments land right in your editor — highlighted text, timestamps, and a reply thread for discussion
Click any comment marker on the timeline and it jumps to that exact spot in your edit. No hunting through email threads or separate documents.
## Multiple Reviewers
You can send the same link to multiple people. Each reviewer gets their own session — they provide their name when commenting, and each person's comments appear with a distinct color and label on the timeline. Reviewers can also see each other's comments, which helps avoid duplicate feedback.
Multiple reviewers get their own colored markers — easy to tell who said what
## Why This Matters
The key advantage is that everything stays inside Riverside. You don't export a file, upload it somewhere else, collect feedback in yet another tool, and then come back to your editor to make changes. The review happens on the same edit you're working in, and changes sync in real time.
If you've been paying for separate review platforms like Frame.io or TechSmith Review specifically for client feedback on video and podcast edits, this feature could replace them entirely.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
For more on Riverside's commenting system (including internal team comments while editing), see:
**Full overview of what the Riverside editor can do:**
[Riverside.fm Review: Complete Feature Guide for Podcasters & CreatorsRiverside.fm features have evolved rapidly over the last couple of years. What started as a recording-first tool is now a full end-to-end production platform for podcasters, YouTubers, course creators, coaches and teams.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/)
**Editing multiple speakers in the same project:**
[Multi-Track Editing with Riverside.fm: A Feature-by-Feature GuideRiverside’s powerful multi-track editing capabilities allow you to take complete control over your audio and video editing.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/)
**Bring external files into Riverside for editing:**
[Import Separate Recordings into Riverside and Edit as Multi-Track — Quick How-ToIf you record one-on-one sessions in a studio or use a different recorder, you can still bring those files into Riverside and treat them like native multi-track sessions.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/import-separate-recordings-riverside-multi-track/)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Blue Background Appears in Camera on Mac? Here's the Fix
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/blue-background-camera-mac-riverside-fix/
Last updated: 2026-02-20T13:34:36.000Z
If you're using [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) on a Mac (or any other recording app) and a blue background suddenly appears behind you in the camera preview, it's not a Riverside bug — it's a macOS feature that's been turned on without you realising.
## What's Happening
macOS includes system-level camera effects that apply to *every* app using your webcam — Riverside, Zoom, Google Meet, FaceTime, browser-based video tools, all of them. One of these effects is **Background**, which replaces your real background with a solid colour (often blue) or a blurred version.
Because these effects are applied at the OS level *before* the video feed reaches Riverside, it looks like Riverside is causing it — but it's actually macOS.
## How to Fix It
1. Make sure your camera is active (open Riverside or any video app)
2. Look at the **menu bar** at the top of your screen (system tray)
3. Click the **camera icon** (near the green dot indicator)
4. Find **Background** and turn it **off**
The Background setting in macOS camera controls — disable it to remove the blue background
## Other Camera Effects to Check
While you're in those settings, it's worth checking these too — they can all cause unexpected changes to your video:
- **Portrait** — adds background blur (similar to smartphone portrait mode)
- **Studio Light** — brightens your face and dims the background
- **Reactions** — triggers emoji animations on hand gestures (balloons, confetti, etc.)
These features were introduced in macOS Sonoma and can be toggled per-app, which makes it easy to accidentally enable one and forget about it.
## Still Not Working?
If disabling Background doesn't fix it:
- Try a different browser — some browsers handle macOS camera effects differently
- Quit and reopen the browser after changing the setting
- Check if your webcam software (e.g., Logitech Tune) has its own virtual background feature enabled
[Best Settings for Your Riverside Studio: A Feature-by-Feature GuideThe best settings for your Riverside recording studio to ensure your podcasts, livestreams, and recordings are of the highest quality.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/)
---
*Record in up to 4K with local recording that doesn't depend on your internet connection —* [*try Riverside*](https://cotovan.com/riverside)*.*
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Zoom and Pan the Riverside Timeline with Your Mouse
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/
Last updated: 2026-02-19T15:46:26.000Z
Navigating the [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) timeline with a mouse is faster than you'd think — if you know two shortcuts.
## Zoom In and Out
Hold **Cmd** (Mac) or **Ctrl** (Windows) and **scroll your mouse wheel** to zoom in and out on the timeline. This lets you quickly jump between a high-level overview and frame-level precision without touching any buttons.
## Pan Sideways
Hold **Shift** and **scroll your mouse wheel** to move left and right through your edit. No more dragging the scrollbar or clicking tiny arrows — just smooth, fluid horizontal navigation.
Both shortcuts shown: Ctrl/Cmd + scroll to zoom, Shift + scroll to pan through the Riverside timeline
These two shortcuts make browsing and jumping around your edit significantly faster — especially on longer recordings where the timeline stretches out.
### Related Riverside Guides
[How to Adjust Scene Break Location in RiversideWhen Riverside automatically creates scenes from your recording, the scene breaks don’t always land exactly where you want them. Maybe the break comes a second too early or cuts into a speaker’s sentence. The good news: you can manually adjust scene break locations directly in the Riverside timeline. Here’s howCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-scene-break-location-in-riverside/)
[Crop, Reposition, Reframe: Video Editing in Riverside.fmAdjust the framing and cropping of individual videos during editing in Riverside.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/)
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Leave Breathing Room When Removing Gaps in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-gaps-and-shorten-clips-perfectly-in-riversides-editor/
Last updated: 2026-02-18T17:53:13.000Z
When you shorten or remove gaps in Riverside's editor, it's tempting to trim them down to nothing — cutting right where one word ends and the next begins - or maybe the AI does that with the automated gap removal tool. The result sounds robotic. Words slam into each other with no space to breathe, and the video cuts look jerky too.
A small change in approach fixes this: **leave a buffer zone on each side of the gap.**
## What the Buffer Looks Like
In the Riverside timeline, a removed gap shows as a shaded section between two waveform segments. Each segment represents a word or phrase. When you look at the gap between them, you can see where one word's audio ends and where the next word's audio begins.
The gap between two waveform segments — the blue selection box shows the area that has been removed
If you drag this gap all the way to zero, the two waveforms butt up against each other. The speaker will sound like they never paused, even briefly.
Before the adjustment — there's no space between the two waveform segments - the shaded segment is what was removed
## Leave a Sliver
Instead of closing the gap entirely, leave a small amount of silence before the next word starts. You don't need much — just enough that the previous word finishes, there's a brief pause, and the next word begins naturally.
After the cut adjustment - a little breathing room on either side
Play it back. The speaker should sound like they're speaking with a normal rhythm, not like words were glued together in post.
## Why It Matters
Zero-gap cuts create two problems: the audio sounds rushed and unnatural, and the video transitions feel abrupt. A small buffer solves both. The listener won't consciously notice the pauses — they'll just hear natural-sounding speech.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Export SRT Subtitles from Descript for Toggleable Captions
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-export-srt-subtitles-from-descript-for-toggleable-captions/
Last updated: 2026-02-18T17:05:40.000Z
If you burn captions directly into your video in Descript, they become permanent — viewers can't turn them off. That's fine for social media clips, but for longer content hosted on Vimeo, Wistia, or YouTube, you typically want toggleable captions that viewers can enable or disable.
The solution is to **export your captions as a separate SRT or VTT file** and upload it alongside your video to the hosting platform.
## How to Export Subtitles from Descript
1. Click **Export** in the top-right corner of Descript
2. Select the **Subtitles** tab
3. Choose your format — **SubRip Titles (.srt)** or **WebVTT (.vtt)**
4. Click **Export**
The Export dialog in Descript — select the Subtitles tab to export captions as SRT or VTT
## SRT vs VTT — Which Format?
Both are standard subtitle formats supported by virtually all video platforms:
- **SRT (SubRip Titles)** — the most widely supported format. Works on YouTube, Vimeo, and most video players.
- **VTT (WebVTT)** — a newer format with slightly more styling options. Also widely supported.
When in doubt, go with SRT — it's the safest bet for compatibility.
## Key Points
- There's no way to toggle captions on/off *inside* Descript. You either burn them in (permanent) or export them separately.
- Both SRT and VTT are "soft captions" — they're separate files the platform overlays on the video.
- Your hosting platform must support subtitle uploads for this to work. YouTube, Vimeo, and Wistia all do.
- Export the video *without* burned-in captions, then upload the subtitle file separately to your host.
### Related articles
[Should You Burn Captions in Descript for YouTube, or Upload Them Separately?When editing in Descript, you have the option to burn captions directly onto your video. But should you use that feature for YouTube uploads? The short answer: usually, no. While you can burn in captions in Descript, uploading them separately to YouTube gives you and your viewers far more flexibility.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/should-you-burn-captions-in-descript-for-youtube-or-upload-them-separately/)
[Descript Exports a Second Set of Subtitles with My VideoWhen you export a video from Descript, it will export the video but secretly add ‘soft subtitles’ to that video in the metadata as a subtitle track. There’s no way to disable this in Descript, but you can remove them.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/descript-exports-a-second-set-of-subtitles-with-my-video/)
### How to Fix Choppy Audio and Video Cuts in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-choppy-audio-and-video-cuts-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-02-18T17:08:28.000Z
When [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) removes gaps and silences from your recording, the cuts sometimes sound choppy — words get clipped, or the edit feels abrupt. The audio and video themselves are fine. The problem is in the **transcription alignment**.
Riverside transcribes your recording at the word level, assigning timestamps to the start and end of each word. It then uses these word boundaries to detect gaps and silences. When the transcription places a word boundary slightly before or after the actual audio, the resulting cut lands in the wrong spot — clipping the beginning or end of a word.
## Why This Happens
Automatic speech recognition isn't perfect. It identifies words and maps them to timestamps, but those timestamps can be off by fractions of a second. When Riverside's gap removal relies on those timestamps to decide where silence begins and ends, a misaligned word boundary means the cut happens mid-word instead of in actual silence.
This isn't an audio/video sync issue. The tracks are perfectly in sync. The issue is that the *transcription's word-level timestamps* don't line up precisely with the audio waveform.
## How to Fix It
1. **Switch to the timeline view** in the Riverside editor
2. **Zoom in** on the cut that sounds choppy — you'll see a shaded area where the gap was removed
3. **Adjust the edges of the cut** — drag the boundary of the shaded area to shorten the removed section, giving the word more room to play fully
4. **Preview the edit** to confirm the word is no longer clipped
The key is to look at the waveform. If you can see that the cut is eating into the audio of a word (the waveform is still active where the cut begins), pull the cut boundary back until the word plays cleanly.
## Tips
- Zoom in as far as you can — these adjustments are often just a few frames
- Focus on the waveform, not the transcript text — the waveform shows you exactly where audio starts and stops
- If many cuts are choppy, consider reducing the aggressiveness of gap removal or switching to manual editing for that section
### How to Select a File from Projects and Use as Podcast Episode in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-move-a-video-from-projects-to-hosting-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-02-17T11:15:33.000Z
If you've uploaded a video to **Projects** in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) and want to use it as a podcast episode in **Hosting**, here's how it actually works.
## You Don't Move Files — You Select Them
Riverside doesn't have a "move to Hosting" feature. Instead, when you create a new episode in Hosting, you **choose** which file to use from your existing projects. Your files stay in Projects — Hosting simply references them.
## How to Create an Episode from an Existing Project
1. Go to **Hosting** in the Riverside sidebar
2. Click **New Episode**
3. In the new episode dialog, you'll see two options: **Choose Riverside file** and **Upload new file**
4. Click **Choose Riverside file**
5. A popup window appears where you can **filter and browse your projects**
6. Select the edit or export you want to use as the episode media
7. Fill in the episode title, description, and publish
Here's what the new episode dialog looks like — notice the "Choose Riverside file" option on the left:
Riverside new episode dialog showing 'Choose Riverside file' and 'Upload new file' options
After clicking "*Choose Riverside file*," a popup lets you search and filter through all your projects to find the right edit or export:
Riverside 'Select file' popup showing project thumbnails with search filter and 'All projects' dropdown
## Important: You Need an Edit or Export First
There's one catch — you **can't use raw recordings** (whether recorded or uploaded into a project) directly as an episode. You must first create at least one **edit** from the recording, or upload a file right there and that will be used as the episode media file.
Once you have an edit, that edit can be selected as the episode media.
If you uploaded a video and haven't edited it yet:
1. Open the project in **Projects**
2. Click **Edit** to create a new edit (even if you don't change anything)
3. Now go to **Hosting → New Episode** and the edit will appear in the file picker
## Quick Summary
- There's **no "move" option** from Projects to Hosting — that's by design
- You **select existing edits/exports** when creating a new episode
- Raw recordings need at least **one edit** before they can be used
- The project picker has **filters** to help you find the right file
New to Riverside's hosting feature? Check out my complete guide:
[Migrate & Host Your Podcast on Riverside — Complete Step-by-Step GuideNow you can host your podcast on Riverside and you can stop juggling downloads and uploads between recording, editing and distribution. This step-by-step guide shows exactly how to do it.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/)
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Apple Podcasts Is Getting Video - Here's What It Means for Podcasters
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/apple-podcasts-is-getting-video-heres-what-it-means-for-podcasters/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T20:14:43.000Z
Apple just announced that **video is coming to Apple Podcasts this spring**. For the first time, podcasters will be able to deliver full video episodes directly inside Apple Podcasts — and listeners can seamlessly switch between audio and video without losing their place.
This is a big deal for video podcasters. It means video is no longer optional, more and more platforms are embracing it.
Here's what we know, what it means for your workflow, and where tools like Riverside fit in.
## What Apple Announced
- **Seamless audio/video switching** — Listeners can move between audio and video without interruption. Start watching at home, switch to audio in the car, pick up video again later — all from where you left off.
- **HLS delivery** — Video is delivered via HLS (HTTP Live Streaming), Apple's standard for adaptive streaming. This matches how video works across Apple's ecosystem.
- **Dynamic video ads** — You can dynamically insert video ads, including host-read ads, through your hosting partner. This opens up new monetization that wasn't possible with audio-only RSS.
- **Creator control preserved** — You choose your hosting provider, ad partners, and business model. Existing features like followers and downloads stay the same.
## Which Hosting Providers Are Supported?
At launch, video delivery via HLS is available through these hosting providers:
- Acast
- Art19
- Omny Studio
- Simplecast
Standard RSS feeds can also support video through many additional providers. Apple says broader HLS availability is coming over time.
Notably absent from the initial list: **Transistor, Buzzsprout, Podbean, Captivate, Spotify for Podcasters (Anchor), and Riverside's own podcast hosting**. If your show is hosted on one of these, you'll need to wait for them to add HLS support.
## What This Means for Riverside Users
If you record your podcast with [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), you're already producing video content. Riverside records in up to 4K resolution with separate audio and video tracks per participant — which means you already have broadcast-quality video ready to go.
The question is: **will Riverside's podcast hosting support Apple's HLS video delivery?**
Riverside [launched its own podcast hosting](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/) service, and it already supports video podcast distribution to some platforms. Adding Apple Podcasts HLS support would be the natural next step — and a huge competitive advantage. Record, edit, and distribute video podcasts all from one platform.
I'm hoping Riverside will be among the next wave of hosting providers to add HLS support.
## Why This Matters for Podcasters
Video podcasting has been growing for years, but distribution has been fragmented. YouTube is the dominant video podcast platform, Spotify added video support a while back, and now Apple is joining.
What makes Apple's approach interesting:
- **It's podcast-native** — Video lives inside Apple Podcasts alongside your audio episodes. No separate channel to manage.
- **Seamless switching is a killer feature**
- **Monetization is built in** — Dynamic video ad insertion through your existing hosting partner means you can monetize video without a separate ad stack.
- **HLS is a proven standard** — Unlike bolting video onto RSS (which has always been clunky), HLS is purpose-built for streaming. This should actually work well.
## The Bottom Line
Apple entering the video podcast space validates what many of us have been saying: **video is no longer optional for serious podcasters**. Between YouTube, Spotify, and now Apple Podcasts, every major platform supports video.
If you're recording with Riverside, you're already producing the content — it's just a matter of distribution catching up. And with Apple's announcement, it just did.
Read the full announcement: [Video on Apple Podcasts](https://podcasters.apple.com/video-apple-podcasts?ref=cotovan.com)
Image source: [Apple](https://podcasters.apple.com/video-apple-podcasts?ref=cotovan.com)
---
*Need help setting up a video podcast workflow? I* [*coach podcasters and video creators*](https://cotovan.com/coaching) *— from recording setup to editing to distribution.*
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Adjust Scene Break Location in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-scene-break-location-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T20:06:03.000Z
When Riverside automatically creates scenes from your recording, the scene breaks don't always land exactly where you want them. Maybe the break comes a second too early or cuts into a speaker's sentence. The good news: you can manually adjust scene break locations directly in the Riverside timeline.
Here's how to reposition scene breaks for cleaner edits.
## Finding Scene Breaks in the Timeline
In the Riverside editor, scene breaks appear as small markers on the timeline between audio waveforms. They separate your recording into distinct scenes — typically aligned with speaker changes or pauses. The transcript panel on the left shows the corresponding text, while the video preview displays the current scene's layout.
You'll notice the scene break sits by the small thumbnail, on top of the waveforms.
The Riverside editor with a scene break marker sitting between two speaker waveforms on the timeline
## Dragging the Scene Break
To move a scene break, hover over it on the timeline until you see the move cursor. Then click and drag the scene break left or right to reposition it. The break snaps to a new location as you drag.
This is useful when:
- The automatic scene break cuts into a speaker's sentence
- You want the scene to start slightly earlier or later
- The break landed in the middle of a pause rather than at the natural transition point
The move cursor appears when hovering over a scene break — click and drag to reposition
## Repositioning to the Right Spot
As you drag, the playhead follows so you can see exactly where the new scene will start. Release the mouse button when the break is at the right position.
You can use the playback controls to scrub through the audio and find the exact transition point before moving the break.
## Verifying the Result
After repositioning, play through the transition to confirm it sounds natural. The **"This scene"** and **"Similar scenes"** tabs above the timeline let you review the current scene or find other scenes with the same layout.
## Quick Tips
- **Zoom in** on the timeline for more precise placement — use the zoom slider or Cmd + Scroll / Ctrl + Scroll
- **Listen before and after** the break to make sure the transition sounds natural
- **Scene breaks affect layouts** — each scene can have its own layout (side-by-side, speaker focus, etc.), so the break position determines when the layout switches
- **Undo with Cmd+Z / Ctrl+Z** if the new position doesn't work
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Place Captions Differently Per Scene in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-place-captions-differently-per-scene-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-04-01T11:19:06.000Z
When you're editing a video in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) that switches between layouts — solo speaker, two-person interview, screen share — you probably don't want captions in the same position for every scene. A caption that looks great centered on a solo shot might overlap someone's face in a side-by-side layout.
Riverside lets you reposition captions on a [per-scene basis](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/), so each layout gets the right placement. Here's how it works.
## The Editor Overview
When you open an edit in Riverside, the right sidebar gives you access to the [**Brand** panel](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/), which includes your logo, color palette, text styles, design, and — importantly — **Captions**. The video preview shows your current scene with captions overlaid, and the timeline at the bottom displays all your scenes.
The Riverside editor with the Brand panel open — Captions settings are accessible from here
## Understanding Scene Scope: This Scene, Similar Scenes, All Scenes
This is the key feature. When you make changes to captions (or other design elements), Riverside asks you **which scenes should be affected**. At the bottom of the video preview, you'll see three options:
- **This scene** — changes apply only to the current scene
- **Similar scenes** — changes apply to all scenes with the same layout (e.g., all solo speaker scenes)
- **All scenes** — changes apply everywhere
The scope selector — "Similar scenes" applies changes to all scenes with the same layout
This is what makes per-scene caption placement work. You select "This scene" or "Similar scenes" before repositioning, and the change only affects the scenes you intended.
## Repositioning Captions
To move captions on a specific scene:
1. Navigate to the scene in the timeline
2. Click on the captions in the video preview — they become selected with drag handles
3. A **styling toolbar** appears with options for font, size, color, line count, alignment, and more
4. Drag the captions to your desired position
5. Choose the scope: **This scene** for just this one, or **Similar scenes** to apply the position to all scenes with the same layout
Click captions to select them — drag to reposition, use the toolbar to adjust style
## Different Positions for Different Layouts
The real power shows when your video has multiple layouts. For example:
- **Solo speaker scene** — place captions in the lower third, centered
- **Two-speaker scene** — move captions to the middle so they don't cover either person's face
- **Screen share scene** — position captions at the top or bottom, wherever they don't obstruct the content
Solo speaker scene with captions centered — "Similar scenes" ensures all solo shots match
Two-speaker layout — captions placed in the middle where they don't overlap either person
## The Workflow
Here's the recommended approach for multi-layout videos:
1. **Start with "All scenes"** — set your baseline caption style (font, color, size) across the entire video
2. **Switch to "Similar scenes"** — navigate to each distinct layout type and reposition captions for that layout
3. **Use "This scene" sparingly** — only for one-off adjustments where a specific scene needs unique placement
This way, you set the global style once, then fine-tune position per layout type — efficient and consistent.
## Tips
- Use the **Layout** panel to see which layout types exist in your video — Solo speaker, One-on-one, etc.
- The **Brand** panel lets you save caption styles as part of your brand kit, so your preferred look carries across projects
- If captions overlap a logo or other element, reposition for just that scene type using "Similar scenes"
- Caption styling (font, color, background) can also be scoped per scene, not just position
## Related Riverside Guides
[How to Save and Reuse Scene Layouts in RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/)
[Crop, Reposition, Reframe: Video Editing in Riverside.fmAdjust the framing and cropping of individual videos during editing in Riverside.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/)
[How to Adjust Scene Break Location in RiversideCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-scene-break-location-in-riverside/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
Ready to create professional-looking videos with properly placed captions? [Get started with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
### Master Precision Editing in Riverside: The Complete Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/
Last updated: 2026-07-03T09:53:16.000Z
[Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) has become one of the most powerful browser-based editors for podcasters and video creators. But recording is just the beginning — **the real magic happens in the edit**. In this comprehensive guide, I walk through every precision editing technique available in Riverside's editor, from AI-powered cleanup to manual timeline surgery, to make your final edited episode as polished as you want it to be.
Whether you're editing a podcast interview, a multi-speaker show, or a solo video, these techniques will help you produce polished, professional results without leaving Riverside.
### Watch the full tutorial
## Start With a New Episode Edit
Before diving into manual edits, you need to start an edit on your recorded episode. In Riverside, navigate to your recording and click the **Edit** button. This opens the full editor with your transcript on the left, a video preview on the right, and the timeline at the bottom.
The Riverside editor layout: transcript panel (left), video preview (top right), and timeline (bottom)
The editor is non-destructive — nothing you do here changes your original recording. You can always undo, restore, or start over. This is a key advantage over other editors where destructive cuts are permanent.
## Apply AI Tools First
My recommended workflow is to **let the AI do the heavy lifting first**, then go through the entire episode manually to refine what the AI did. Riverside offers several AI tools that can save you hours of work:
The AI Tools panel — start with these before doing any manual editing
- **Remove Pauses** — Automatically shortens or removes dead air between speakers
- **Remove Filler Words** — Cuts "um," "uh," "like," and other filler words
- **Find Fluff** — Identifies and removes [repetitive or unnecessary phrases](https://cotovan.com/post/clean-riverside-recordings-find-fluff-workflow/)
- **Magic Audio** — Enhances audio quality
- **Smart Mute** — Automatically mutes the non-speaking participant to reduce background noise
**Important tip:** Apply AI tools at the beginning of your edit, not at the end. If you apply them after making manual cuts, you can't easily check what the AI changed. By applying them first, you can then listen through the entire episode and catch any mistakes the AI made.
## Navigate the Timeline and Transcript
Riverside's editor gives you two ways to work: the **transcript panel** and the **timeline**. Each speaker gets a different color label, and those colors carry through to the timeline waveform — making it easy to see who's talking at any point.
I recommend editing primarily in the timeline because you can see the waveform shapes and make more precise cuts. The transcript is great for understanding what's being said, but the timeline shows you the actual audio.
## Zoom, Scroll, and Navigate
Navigation shortcuts are essential for efficient editing:
- **Command/Ctrl + Mouse Wheel** — Zoom in/out on the timeline
- **Shift + Mouse Wheel** — Scroll the timeline sideways
- **Navigation arrows** — Jump between edits quickly
I highly recommend using a mouse for editing rather than a trackpad. The mouse wheel makes zooming and scrolling so much faster.
## Show and Hide Deleted Parts
After the AI removes pauses, filler words, and fluff, those deleted sections are hidden by default. You'll see small indicators in the timeline and transcript showing something was removed, with a tooltip showing how much time was cut.
Hovering over removed sections shows exactly how much was cut — 0.4 seconds in this case
To see what was actually removed, go to the top of the editor and click **Show Deleted Parts**. This reveals the deleted regions as darker sections in the timeline and crossed-out text in the transcript. The deleted content doesn't play back — the playhead simply jumps over it — but now you can see exactly what the AI did and decide whether to adjust or restore any of it.
## Adjust and Trim Deleted Regions
This is where precision editing really starts. When you can see the deleted regions, you can fine-tune exactly where each cut begins and ends.
Grab the white trim handle at the edge of a deleted region to adjust the cut point precisely
Click on a deleted region in the timeline, and you'll see **white handles** at each end. Click and drag these handles to expand or shrink the deleted area. This is incredibly useful when the AI cut too aggressively and clipped the beginning or end of a word.
Zoom in close to see the waveform and position your cut right where the speech starts
You can zoom in very close (Command + Mouse Wheel) and position your cut at exactly the right point in the waveform. Look for where the speech waveform begins, and place your handle just before it for a clean transition.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Restore Removed Filler Words
Sometimes the AI removes a filler word that actually sounds natural in context, or it removes something that wasn't a filler word at all (this can happen with accented speakers). Restoring is easy:
- **In the transcript:** Click the crossed-out word, then click **Restore**
- **In the timeline:** Click the deleted region, then click **Restore** on the toolbar
- **Keyboard shortcut:** Select the region and press **R** to restore instantly
For example, if the AI removed the word "I" because Chris has an accent and the AI misidentified it as a filler word like "a," you just click on that region and press R. The word comes right back.
## Fix Rough Transitions After Fluff Removal
The [fluff removal AI is powerful](https://cotovan.com/post/clean-riverside-recordings-find-fluff-workflow/), but it doesn't always leave perfect transitions. When you listen through your episode and hear a jarring jump between two sentences, here's what to do:
1. Zoom into the transition point in the timeline
2. Find the deleted region between the two sentences
3. Drag the edge of the deleted region to **add a little breathing room** — a small gap before the next sentence starts
This tiny adjustment makes a huge difference. Without it, one person finishes talking and the next person starts immediately, which sounds unnatural. Even 0.3 seconds of silence makes the transition feel organic.
## Cut Gaps Manually in the Timeline
If you didn't use the AI to remove pauses, or if you want to make additional cuts, you can do it manually. The technique is straightforward:
1. Zoom into the gap you want to remove
2. Click and drag to make a selection in the timeline
3. Press **Backspace** or **Delete** to hide that section
You can also merge two adjacent deleted regions by dragging one into the other. And if you made a mistake, just adjust the handles to expand or shrink the deleted area.
## Leave Breathing Room When Removing Gaps
Here's a pro tip: **don't cut gaps right where the speech starts and ends**. If you cut too tightly, the words get glued together and it sounds robotic. [Leave a small buffer zone](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fix-choppy-audio-and-video-cuts-in-riverside/) on each side of your cut so the speakers have a moment to breathe. This makes the conversation sound natural, even with substantial gaps removed.
## Fix AI Mistakes With Misidentified Words
The AI relies on transcript accuracy to make its cuts. If the transcript is off — which happens with accents, technical jargon, or overlapping speech — the AI may cut in the wrong places. Common issues include:
- Words cut off mid-syllable (e.g., "two thousand elev—" instead of "two thousand eleven")
- Filler words incorrectly identified (e.g., "I" misheard as "a")
When you encounter these, simply adjust the deleted region's handle to include the full word, or restore the section entirely. This is why listening through the full episode after AI processing is essential.
## Mute Instead of Delete for Smoother Cuts
This is one of my favorite techniques for a polished final product. When you delete a section, the video jumps — you'll see heads suddenly in a different position. For sections where the speaker is moving or gesturing, this jump can be very noticeable.
Instead of deleting, use the Mute button to silence a section without creating a visual jump
The solution? **Mute instead of delete.** Here's how:
1. Select the region in the timeline (not by word, but precisely on the waveform)
2. Click the **Mute** button (or press **M** on the keyboard)
3. Choose which speaker to mute
The result: the audio goes silent for that brief moment, but the video plays continuously. When someone says "um" and is muted, they just look like they're closing their mouth — completely natural. No visual jump at all.
## Fix Crosstalk With Expanded Tracks
Crosstalk — when two people talk over each other — is one of the trickiest editing challenges. [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) records separate tracks for each speaker, which gives you a powerful advantage.
Expanded tracks view — each speaker has their own waveform, making it easy to mute individuals
Click the **Expand Tracks** icon to show each speaker's audio on a separate line. Now you can see exactly who is talking (and who is interrupting) at every moment. To fix crosstalk:
1. Identify the section where one person interrupts the other
2. Select just that speaker's track in the interruption area
3. Press **M** to mute them for that specific portion
You can also adjust individual speaker volumes from the Tracks panel if one person is quieter than the other.
## Use Scene Changes to Hide Crosstalk
Sometimes you can't just mute the interrupting person — maybe they're saying something relevant, or maybe muting them would look odd because their mouth is clearly moving. In that case, use a **scene change** to switch to a single-speaker view.
The Layout panel lets you change the view for just the current scene — switch to a single speaker to hide crosstalk
Here's the technique:
1. Create a scene around the problematic section (click the plus icon in the scene bar)
2. Click **Layout** and select **"Just This Scene"**
3. Switch to a **Single Speaker** view, showing only the person you want visible
When the scene ends, it goes back to the normal side-by-side view. The muted person's audio is gone (or reduced), and they're not visible during the interruption, so no one notices.
## Split the Timeline and Insert Sections
Need to insert a title card, an ad break, or a B-roll clip in the middle of your recording? Riverside lets you **split the timeline** and add content between the halves.
After splitting, click the plus icon to insert media, video, music, AI voice, or an empty gap
1. Position the playhead where you want the split
2. Click **Split** (or press **S** on the keyboard)
3. Click the **plus icon** that appears at the split point
4. Choose what to insert: your media, video, music, AI voice, an empty section, upload new content, or even record something new
A common use case: clients who want a 2-second ad slot midway through the episode. Just insert an empty section, drag the handles to the right duration, and you're done. You can even add text like "We'll Be Right Back" for a professional touch.
## Use Splits and Snapping to Position Text Precisely
When you add text overlays (like a speaker's name or a title), positioning them precisely in the timeline can be tricky — especially if you're still making cuts that shift things around.
A subtitle text element positioned in the timeline — use splits as snap points for precise alignment
The trick is to **create splits as anchor points**:
1. Place the playhead where you want the text to start → press S to split
2. Place the playhead where you want the text to end → press S again
3. Add your text element (subtitle, title, etc.)
4. Drag the edges of the text element — they **snap to the split points**
This snap behavior is incredibly useful. Even if you make further edits that shift the timeline, you can quickly re-snap the text to your split markers. Think of splits as visual bookmarks for your timeline.
## Adjust Scene Boundaries
Whether you created scenes manually or let the AI generate them, you'll often need to adjust where one scene ends and another begins.
Drag scene boundaries in the timeline to fine-tune exactly when the camera angle changes
In the timeline, look for the **small vertical lines** between scene thumbnails. Hover over them, and you'll see a drag cursor. Click and drag to move the scene boundary forward or backward. This controls exactly when the camera angle switches — say, from side-by-side to a single speaker.
**Feature request note:** Currently, elements (text, images) don't automatically stick to scene boundaries. If you make cuts inside a scene, the element may go out of sync. You'll need to manually re-position it. Hopefully this gets improved in a future update or in the new Riverside editor!
## Crop and Reframe Speakers
Riverside gives you per-speaker crop and reframe controls. When you select a scene, you'll see a speaker dropdown at the top of the video preview. Select a speaker and click the **Crop** tool to reframe their video.
Use the Crop tool per speaker to reframe their video within each scene
This is useful when someone's camera was positioned awkwardly, or when you want to [zoom into a speaker for emphasis](https://cotovan.com/post/dynamic-zoom-edits-riverside-polished-podcasts/). You can apply different crops to different scenes, so the framing can change throughout the episode.
## Essential Keyboard Shortcuts
Here are the shortcuts that will speed up your editing workflow:
- **S** — Split at the playhead position
- **R** — Restore a selected deleted region
- **M** — Mute the selected region
- **Delete / Backspace** — Remove the selected region
- **Cmd/Ctrl + Mouse Wheel** — Zoom in/out on timeline
- **Shift + Mouse Wheel** — Scroll timeline sideways
- **Cmd/Ctrl + Z** — Undo
## Wrap-Up: The Precision Editing Workflow
Here's the complete workflow I recommend for any [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) edit:
1. **Apply AI tools first** — pauses, filler words, fluff removal
2. **Show deleted parts** — so you can see what the AI did
3. **Listen from beginning to end** — catch AI mistakes, rough transitions, and crosstalk
4. **Fix transitions** — add breathing room, restore over-cut words
5. **Mute instead of delete** — when you want smooth video without jumps
6. **Expand tracks for crosstalk** — mute individual speakers precisely
7. **Add scenes** — for camera angle changes and hiding problematic sections
8. **Insert sections** — for ad breaks, titles, or B-roll
9. **Position text with splits** — use snap points for precise alignment
10. **Crop and reframe** — per speaker, per scene
The beauty of Riverside's editor is that all of this happens in your browser, with non-destructive editing. You can always undo, restore, and refine until you're happy with the result.
## Related Riverside Guides
[Crop, Reposition, Reframe: Video Editing in Riverside.fmAdjust the framing and cropping of individual videos during editing in Riverside.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/)
[How to Add Guest Names and Titles in the Riverside Editor After RecordingCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-guest-names-and-titles-in-the-riverside-editor-after-recording/)
[How to Invite an Editor to Your Riverside Account Without Sharing Full AccessCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-invite-an-editor-to-your-riverside-account-without-sharing-full-access/)
[How to Create AI Thumbnails in Riverside with Co-CreatorCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-ai-thumbnails-in-riverside-with-co-creator/)
[How to Zoom and Pan the Riverside Timeline with Your MouseCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-zoom-and-pan-the-riverside-timeline-with-your-mouse/)
If you're eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have a one-on-one Riverside coaching session, feel free to book a call with me. I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
Want to try these techniques yourself? [Get started with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) and bring your recordings to the next level.
### How to Cut an Animated GIF to a Specific Length in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/cut-animated-gif-length-descript/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T10:30:24.000Z
If you've dropped an animated GIF into [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) and tried to trim it to a specific length, you've probably noticed something frustrating: split, blade, and dragging the clip's end don't work the way you'd expect. Dragging just either moves teh clip or expands only the original part - it doesn't let you cut to a precise duration.
That's because Descript treats animated GIFs as looping media. You can only cut or alter the original segment, not the repeated parts. So the standard editing tools won't get you to an exact length.
## Workaround: Use Scenes as Boundaries
The trick is to use **scenes** to control how long the GIF is visible. A scene acts as a container — anything inside it is bounded by the scene's start and end points. Place your GIF inside a scene, set the scene to the exact duration you need, and the GIF gets cut off at the scene boundary.
**Here's how:**
1. Add a **scene break** at the exact point where you want the GIF to stop playing
2. Place your animated GIF in that scene
3. The GIF now only displays for that scene's duration
4. Fine-tune by dragging the scene break in the [timeline](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-new-descript-timeline-guide/)
That's it. The GIF still loops internally, but it stops at the scene boundary — giving you precise control over its visible length.
## Managing Scenes Effectively
If you're not already working with scenes in Descript, they're worth learning. Beyond controlling GIF duration, scenes help you organise your project into logical sections where assets **stay in place**.
Here are some useful techniques:
- [Edit Objects Across Multiple Scenes](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=U-rxfJ09xGQ&ref=cotovan.com) — apply changes to objects that span multiple scenes
- [REORDER Scenes](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mTmyZupELx8&ref=cotovan.com) — rearrange your project structure
- [Apply Transitions to All Scenes](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yGz39bveiVA&ref=cotovan.com) — add smooth transitions between scenes
For a deeper look at how scenes and the timeline work in Descript, that guide walks through the visual interface step by step:
[Your Guide to the New Descript Timeline InterfaceDiscover how to master the new Descript timeline with our detailed walkthrough. Learn navigation tips, key features, and workflow optimizations to boost your editing efficiency.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-new-descript-timeline-guide/)
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### How to Create Best-Of Compilations in Riverside: Extract and Combine Clips
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-best-of-compilations-in-riverside-extract-and-combine-clips/
Last updated: 2026-06-18T12:28:30.000Z
If you've recorded multiple podcast episodes or interviews in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), you can pull the best moments from each one and combine them into a single "best-of" compilation — all without leaving the platform. No need to export clips individually or use external editing software.
## The Big Picture
The workflow has three phases:
1. **Extract** — Go through each episode, mark and isolate the best moments
2. **Rename** — Create standalone clips from each episode's highlights
3. **Combine** — Import all the best-of clips into a new episode and arrange them into a compilation
This works because Riverside stores all your recordings as individual projects, and edits from different projects can be imported into new ones.
## Step 1: Start from Your Projects
Your Riverside dashboard shows all your recorded episodes organized as projects. Each project contains the original recording plus any edits you've created.
The Projects page — each recording becomes a project you can extract clips from
For a best-of compilation, you'll open each episode one at a time to find the highlight moments.
## Step 2: Mark Best-Of Sections in the Transcript
Open an episode's edit and use the transcript view to find your best moments. Riverside's text-based editing makes this easy — you're reading through the conversation and can quickly identify compelling segments.
To mark a section as a "best of" clip:
1. Navigate to the start of the highlight in the transcript
2. Add a chapter marker or text note labeling it (e.g., **"BEST OF Clip"**)
3. At the end of the highlight, add another marker (e.g., **"END OF BEST OF Clip"**)
Mark the start and end of each highlight segment in the transcript
Do this for every episode you want to pull clips from. The markers help you find the sections later when extracting.
## Step 3: Duplicate and Isolate the Clip
Once you've identified a best-of section, you need to create a standalone clip from it:
1. Right-click on the edit (or click the three-dot menu)
2. Select **Duplicate** to create a copy of the full episode
3. **Rename** the duplicate to something identifiable (e.g., "BEST OF 5 (Mick)")
4. Open the duplicate and **delete everything except your marked best-of section**
Duplicate the edit, then rename it and trim it down to just the best moment
Repeat this for each episode — you'll end up with a collection of standalone best-of clips, each named clearly.
## Step 4: Create a New Episode and Import Clips
Now for the magic — combining everything:
1. Create a **new episode** in Riverside
2. Instead of recording or uploading, choose **"My files"**
3. Browse your **Edits** and search for "best of"
4. All your prepared clips appear — select the ones you want to combine
Search "best of" in your edits to find all prepared clips ready to combine
Import them one by one or in batch. Each clip arrives as a segment in your new compilation timeline.
## Step 5: Arrange and Edit the Compilation
Once all clips are imported, you have a full multi-segment timeline:
The compilation timeline with clips from multiple guests stitched together
From here you can:
- **Reorder clips** by dragging segments in the timeline
- **Add transitions** between guest segments
- **Add chapter markers** for each guest's segment
- **Apply branding** — logo, colors, captions style — consistently across all clips
- **Add intro/outro** to bookend the compilation
The final compilation with all guest segments, branding, and captions applied
## When to Use This
- **Year-end recap episodes** — pull the best moments from a full season
- **Theme compilations** — group clips by topic across multiple episodes
- **Promotional content** — create a "best of" reel to showcase your podcast
- **Highlight reels** — shorter compilations for social media or YouTube
## Tips
- **Name clips consistently** — "BEST OF \[number\] (\[guest name\])" makes searching easy
- **Use the search function** — Riverside's edit search lets you find all your best-of clips instantly
- **Add chapter markers** in the final compilation so viewers can jump between guests
- Consider using [Magic Clips](https://cotovan.com/how-to-manually-create-magic-clips-in-riverside/) to auto-identify compelling moments as a starting point
- For per-scene branding, see [placing captions differently per scene](https://cotovan.com/how-to-place-captions-differently-per-scene-in-riverside/)
Ready to create your own best-of compilation? [Get started with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Split a Single Video into Multicam in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-split-a-single-video-into-multicam-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-06-18T12:27:02.000Z
If you recorded a video call on Zoom, Teams, or another platform, you probably ended up with a single video file where all speakers appear in one frame. That's fine for playback, but it limits your editing options — you can't zoom into one speaker, switch between angles, or apply per-speaker layouts.
[Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) can take that single combined video and split it into separate tracks for each speaker, effectively turning it into a multicam recording. Here's how it works.
## What You Start With
A typical Zoom or video call recording looks like this — both speakers visible in a single frame, side by side or in a grid layout. It's one video file with one video track.
The starting point — a single combined video file from a Zoom call with both speakers in one frame
## Upload with "Separate Video Tracks" Enabled
When you upload the video to Riverside, the key setting is **"Separate video tracks"** — marked with a **NEW** badge. This is what tells Riverside to use AI to detect and split the speakers.
1. Create a new project in Riverside
2. Choose **Upload** and select your video file
3. Set **"How many speakers?"** to match your video (e.g., 2 speakers)
4. Toggle on **"Separate video tracks"**
5. Click **Upload**
Enable "Separate video tracks" before uploading — Riverside will split the speakers using AI
**Important:** The video must show the same speakers in a single, fixed view from start to finish. If the layout changes during the call (e.g., grid to fullscreen), the tracks can't be separated properly.
## The Result: Separate Speaker Tracks
After processing, Riverside creates individual tracks for each speaker. Instead of one combined file, you now have:
- **Speaker-0** — cropped video of the first person
- **Speaker-1** — cropped video of the second person
- **Transcript** — with speaker labels
Two separate speaker tracks created from the single video — each can be edited independently
## Editing with Separate Tracks
Click **Edit** and you're in the full Riverside editor with multicam capabilities — exactly as if you'd recorded natively in Riverside with separate cameras.
The split video in the editor — each speaker is individually cropped and can be repositioned
You now have access to all of Riverside's multi-track editing features:
- **Smart Layouts** — automatic switching between speakers based on who's talking
- **Crop and reframe** each speaker independently (see also: [crop, reposition, and reframe in Riverside](https://cotovan.com/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/))
- **Solo speaker views** — zoom into one person for emphasis
- **Side-by-side layouts** with customizable positioning
## AI Tools and Speaker Identification
Once split, Riverside's full AI toolkit becomes available:
The full editor with transcript, AI tools, and multi-track timeline — all working with the split tracks
- **Remove pauses** — automatically cut dead air
- **Remove filler words** — strip "ums" and "ahs"
- **Find fluff** — AI recommends parts to cut (see also: [Remove Fluff with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/clean-riverside-recordings-find-fluff-workflow/))
- **Magic Audio** — studio-quality sound enhancement
- **Smart Mute** — mute anyone not talking (see also: [What is Smart Mute](https://cotovan.com/what-is-smart-mute-in-riverside-and-how-to-use-it/))
- **Smart layouts** — automatic camera switching based on who's speaking
AI tools including Smart Layouts applied — plus speaker name and title overlays ready to customize
## When to Use This
- **Repurposing Zoom recordings** — turn basic calls into polished podcast episodes or interviews
- **Client recordings from other platforms** — clients send you a Zoom/Teams file, you split and edit it professionally in Riverside
- **Archive footage** — older recordings that weren't captured with separate tracks
- **Quick social clips** — split the video, then create Magic Clips from specific moments
## Tips
- **Fixed layout required** — the call must stay in the same grid/view throughout. If the layout switches (gallery to speaker view), the split won't work
- **Rename speakers** after splitting — they'll be labeled "Speaker-0" and "Speaker-1" initially (see: [rename speakers on uploaded files](https://cotovan.com/how-to-rename-speakers-on-uploaded-files-in-riverside/))
- **Resolution varies** — each speaker's track will be lower resolution than the original since it's cropped from a portion of the full frame
- After splitting, you can use **all the same editing features** as a native Riverside recording — layouts, captions, branding, export
Ready to turn your Zoom recordings into multicam productions? [Get started with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Use Riverside Scene Templates to Speed Up Podcast Editing
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-riverside-scene-templates-to-speed-up-podcast-editing/
Last updated: 2026-06-18T12:24:58.000Z
Every time you start a new episode edit in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), do you find yourself rebuilding the same scene layouts from scratch? Speaker name overlays, side-by-side arrangements, solo speaker close-ups — it's the same setup every time. Scene templates solve this by letting you apply pre-built or custom layouts with a single click.
In this tutorial, I'll show you how to use Riverside's built-in scene templates and how to save your own custom scenes so you can reuse them across every project.
## Watch the Full Tutorial
## Where to Find Scene Templates
When you're in the Riverside editor, click the **Scene** tab at the top of the canvas area. This opens the Scenes panel on the left side, which has two tabs:
- **My Scenes** — Your saved custom scenes
- **Templates** — Riverside's built-in template gallery
The Templates tab shows Riverside's built-in scene gallery with various layout options for solo, two-speaker, and multi-speaker arrangements.
## Applying a Template
Click on any template thumbnail to apply it to your current scene. The template instantly sets up the speaker layout, overlays (like speaker names and titles), and positioning. You'll see the canvas update immediately with the new arrangement.
Templates include layouts for:
- Solo speaker (full screen or with sidebar)
- Two-speaker side-by-side
- Two-speaker with one featured larger
- Multi-speaker (three or more participants)
- Dynamic layouts with branded overlays
After applying a template, the canvas shows the layout with speaker name and title placeholder overlays that you can customize.
## Working with Scenes on the Timeline
Scenes in Riverside work like chapters — each scene can have a different layout. On the timeline, you can see your scenes as labeled sections. To add a new scene at a specific point, position the playhead where you want the scene change, then use the **"Add scene"** option.
This is especially useful for podcasts where you want to:
- Show the guest solo when they're telling a story
- Switch to side-by-side during conversation
- Feature the host for intro and outro segments
The timeline shows scene breaks with labeled sections. Use "Add scene" to insert a new scene at the playhead position.
## Saving Your Own Scene Templates
Once you've designed a scene layout you like — with your brand colors, speaker positioning, overlays, and styling — you can save it as a custom scene for reuse.
Go to the **My Scenes** tab in the Scenes panel. Your saved scenes appear as thumbnails. Click any saved scene to apply it to the current section of your edit.
The My Scenes tab stores your custom layouts. Click any thumbnail to apply that scene to your current timeline position.
## Templates with Brand Kit Integration
Templates work alongside Riverside's brand kit. When you apply a template, you can customize it with your brand elements — then use **"Edit your brand"** at the top of the Templates panel to update colors, fonts, and logos that apply across all templates.
The "Edit your brand" button at the top of the Templates panel lets you customize templates with your brand kit settings.
## Tips for Using Scene Templates Effectively
- **Create a standard set** — Save 3-4 go-to scenes (intro, conversation, solo guest, outro) that match your brand
- **Apply to similar scenes** — Use the "This scene" and "Similar scenes" options to apply layouts consistently
- **Combine with** [**per-scene captions**](https://cotovan.com/how-to-place-captions-differently-per-scene-in-riverside/) — Different scene layouts may need different caption positioning
- **Use the Tracks panel** — Toggle individual speaker tracks on/off to control which speakers appear in each scene
## Try It Yourself
Scene templates are one of the biggest time-savers in Riverside's editor. Instead of manually positioning speakers and adding overlays for every episode, set up your templates once and apply them with a click. [Try Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) and start building your template library.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Save and Reuse Scene Layouts in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-scene-layouts-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-03-11T13:42:50.000Z
When you're editing a podcast or video interview in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), the layout determines how speakers are arranged on screen. But you don't have to stick with the same layout for the entire episode. You can save custom scene layouts and reuse them across projects — building a personal library of go-to arrangements.
This tutorial covers how to change layouts per scene, save your favorites, and apply them consistently across episodes.
## Watch the Full Tutorial
How to Save and Reuse SCENE LAYOUTS in Riverside:
## Understanding Layouts vs. Scenes
In Riverside's editor, **Layouts** and **Scenes** work together but serve different purposes:
- **Layout** — Controls how speakers are arranged on the canvas (side-by-side, solo speaker, picture-in-picture, etc.)
- **Scene** — A section of your timeline that can have its own layout, overlays, and styling, in addition to the layout set up
Think of scenes as chapters in your episode, and layouts as the visual arrangement within each chapter.
## Changing the Layout
Click the **Layout** tab at the top of the canvas area. The Layouts panel opens showing your options organized by category:
- **Recently used** — Quick access to layouts you've applied before
- **Solo speaker** — Full-screen views of a single speaker
- **Side-by-side** — Two or more speakers shown together
Click any layout thumbnail to apply it. You'll see the "Changes applied to this scene" confirmation.
The Layouts panel organizes options by category — Recently used, Solo speaker, and more. Click any thumbnail to apply it.
## Controlling Speaker Visibility with Tracks
The **Tracks** panel (in the right sidebar) lets you toggle individual speakers on or off for each scene. This is how you create solo speaker moments — turn off one track so only the other speaker appears.
Changes to tracks apply to the **whole track**, even if split into sections. This keeps your speaker visibility consistent throughout the episode.
Toggle speakers on/off in the Tracks panel. Changes apply to the whole track for consistency.
## Saving a Custom Scene
Once you've set up a scene with your preferred layout, overlays, speaker names, and positioning, you can save it for reuse:
1. Click the **Scene** tab to open the Scenes panel
2. Switch to the **My Scenes** tab
3. Click **"Save scene"**
4. Your current scene setup is saved as a thumbnail in your library
Click "Save scene" in the My Scenes tab to store your current layout as a reusable template.
## Reusing Saved Scenes
Your saved scenes appear in the **My Scenes** tab. Click any saved scene thumbnail to apply it to your current timeline position. This is how you maintain a consistent look across episodes without rebuilding layouts from scratch.
Your saved scenes are available in My Scenes. Click any thumbnail to apply that layout to the current scene.
## Applying Changes to This Scene vs. Similar Scenes
When you change a layout, Riverside shows "This scene" and "Similar scenes" options at the bottom of the canvas. This lets you decide whether the change applies to just the current scene or to all scenes with the same layout.
After applying a layout change, use "This scene" to apply only here or "Similar scenes" to update all matching scenes at once.
## Splitting Scenes at the Playhead
To create a new scene break at a specific moment, position the playhead and use **Split at playhead** (keyboard shortcut: Shift + S). This creates a new scene at that point where you can apply a different layout.
On the timeline, you'll see scene elements — speaker title overlays, logos, and other elements — displayed as colored blocks that you can drag to adjust timing.
Use Split at playhead (Shift + S) to create a new scene break at the current playhead position.
## Workflow Tips
- **Build a standard set** — Save 3-4 layouts you use every episode (intro, interview, solo guest, outro)
- **Use with** [**scene templates**](https://cotovan.com/how-to-use-riverside-scene-templates-to-speed-up-podcast-editing/) — Combine your saved scenes with Riverside's built-in templates for maximum variety
- **Pair with** [**per-scene captions**](https://cotovan.com/how-to-place-captions-differently-per-scene-in-riverside/) — Different layouts may need different caption positioning
- **Keep it consistent** — Use "Similar scenes" to update all matching scenes at once when you refine a layout
## Try It Yourself
Saving and reusing scene layouts eliminates repetitive setup work. Build your library once, and every new episode starts with your proven layouts ready to apply. [Try Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) and start building your layout library.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Use Color Adjustments in Riverside to Fix Dark or Off-Color Footage
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/quick-color-adjustments-fixes-riverside/
Last updated: 2025-12-31T14:23:25.000Z
I want to walk you through the new color adjustments in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings) and show a practical, step-by-step way to rescue footage that’s too dark, too warm, or too flat. I use Riverside every time I record interviews and podcasts, and this built-in color adjustment tool saves me from exporting clips to another program for simple fixes. In this tutorial you'll learn where to find the controls, how each control works, and a few tips I use for precise results when applying color adjustments in Riverside.
## Open the track settings to access the color adjustments
To begin applying color adjustments in Riverside, select the track you want to fix. You can either click the clip in the [editor](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside) and open the Options panel, or go to the Tracks panel, click the little arrow next to the track, and reveal the [Track Settings](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside).
There’s a toggle labeled Color Adjustments that you need to enable before you can change anything.
When the track is selected, enabling color adjustments applies the effect to every scene on that track. That track-wide behavior is deliberate: it’s great when a guest’s camera has consistent lighting issues and you want a single fix applied across the whole recording.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Four basic controls
Once you open the color adjustment panel you’ll see four controls: brightness, contrast, saturation, and temperature. These are intentionally simple — they address the most common problems you’ll see in remote interviews and webcam recordings.
Here’s how I think about each control when I’m adjusting footage:
- **Brightness**: Raises or lowers the overall luminance. Use this when footage looks too dark or underexposed.
- **Contrast**: Adjusts the separation between highlights and shadows. Increase contrast when the image looks flat; reduce it if skin tones or highlights blow out.
- **Saturation**: Controls color intensity. Dial it down to desaturate or even go black-and-white, or increase it to make colors pop.
- **Temperature**: Shifts white balance between cool and warm. Helpful when a camera’s white balance is off or when ambient lighting casts a color tint.
I usually start with brightness and contrast, make a modest change, then adjust saturation and temperature only if needed. Small moves go a long way with these sliders.
## Make the adjustments - coarse then fine
Begin with coarse adjustments: drag brightness up a little if the subject is dark, increase contrast if the image lacks punch, then tweak saturation if colors feel dull.
The temperature control is powerful, so move it in small steps. I often find it’s the most sensitive of the four — a slight nudge can make footage look noticeably warmer or cooler. I keep changes here conservative.
If you need finer control than dragging the sliders allows, place the cursor inside the numeric text box for any control and use the arrow keys.
Pressing the up or down arrow will change the value in single increments. Hold Shift and the values change by tens. This lets me make very controlled adjustments while watching the preview update in real time.
## Watch for strong temperature shifts and how to correct them
The temperature control can quickly push footage into an overly warm orange or excessively cool blue look. When I spot that happening, I dial the temperature back with the arrow-key method so the change is subtle. Also check skin tones after a temperature change — they’re the best indicator that your white balance is in a usable range.
Remember, because adjustments are track-wide, a single temperature tweak affects every clip on that track. If someone moves between different light sources during the recording, the single adjustment may not suit every scene.
## When to stay in Riverside and when to export
Color adjustments in Riverside are designed for quick corrections and salvage work. They’ll fix a slightly underexposed webcam or a mildly off white balance without leaving the editor. Use these tools when you want a fast turnaround and consistent results across a guest or host track. They are by no means a complete color grading solution.
Also, if you need scene-by-scene grading, selective masks, or advanced color grading features (curves, LUTs, vectorscopes), you’ll get better results by exporting the file to a dedicated color grading program.
I treat Riverside’s color adjustments as the first pass: tidy and efficient for everyday problems, but not a replacement for professional-grade color work.
## Before you publish
Before you finalize your edit, run through this short checklist I use to ensure the color adjustments look consistent and natural:
1. Play through the entire track to check for lighting changes that the single track adjustment might not handle.
2. Verify skin tones look healthy — not too magenta, green, warm, or cool.
3. Check highlights and shadows for clipping after increasing contrast.
4. Reduce saturation if colors feel oversaturated, or increase slightly if things look too flat.
5. If a small temperature tweak changes the mood too much, revert and use arrow-key fine-tuning instead of slider swings.
### When the feature saves you time
I often use color adjustments in Riverside to salvage guest video from calls where lighting was out of my control. Rather than exporting and re-importing clips, I enable the track-wide color adjustments and make a couple of conservative edits. It’s faster and keeps my workflow inside Riverside’s editor.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Spotify episodes audio-only when hosting podcast with Riverside?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/add-video-spotify-podcasts-riverside-workaround/
Last updated: 2025-12-26T11:10:06.000Z
If you want to **add video to Spotify podcast** episodes while Riverside and Spotify work out their integration, there's a simple manual workaround I use that takes a minute per episode.
## Confirm your episode landed on Spotify
First, make sure your [Riverside-hosted](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/) episode has been delivered to Spotify via your RSS feed or hosting setup. Log in to Spotify for Creators and find the episode in your episode list.
If the episode plays as audio only or show the label "**Audio**" in the list, you’ll need to add the video manually.
## Export the video from Riverside
In Riverside, export the edited episode as a video file (MP4 or MOV). Use Riverside’s export tool, download the resulting file to your computer, and keep it handy.
This is the exact file you will upload to Spotify for the episode so listeners can watch the video instead of only hearing audio.
Quick checklist for the video file:
- Format: MP4 or MOV
- Resolution: match your usual upload size (1080p preferred for sharp playback)
- Filename: include episode number and title to avoid confusion
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Open the episode menu in Spotify for Creators
In [Spotify for Creators](https://creators.spotify.com/?ref=cotovan.com), go to your podcast’s episode list. Hover over the episode you want to upgrade and click the three-dot menu. One of the options is **Upload video** — this is the manual path to add video to Spotify podcast episodes when your host isn't pushing video directly.
## Upload the video file
Click **Upload video**. On the upload screen you can either select the MP4/MOV file or drag and drop it into the area.
I drag the Riverside-exported file in and let Spotify process the upload. Spotify will accept common video files and show an upload progress indicator.
Notes while uploading:
- You can replace the file if you picked the wrong one before finalizing.
- Spotify may take a while to process large files
## Add a widescreen thumbnail
Spotify supports two thumbnail formats: the square cover used across platforms and a widescreen thumbnail used for video episode.
On the same upload screen you’ll see an option to upload a widescreen thumbnail. Replace the automatic image if you want a custom visual that appears before the video plays.
Tips for thumbnails:
- Use a 16:9 image for widescreen displays.
- Keep text large and legible - Spotify may show the thumbnail at small sizes.
- Match the thumbnail style to your show branding for consistency across platforms.
## Finalize and let Spotify process
After uploading the file and thumbnail, confirm whether you have any promotional content and click Next. Spotify will queue the file for processing. Once processing finishes, Spotify swaps the audio-only episode with the uploaded video on platforms that support video playback.
Processing times vary by file size and Spotify’s backend load. I usually check back in 10–30 minutes for shorter episodes and up to a few hours for longer, high-resolution videos.
## Verify playback and maintain the episode
After processing, play the episode in Spotify to confirm the video appears and the thumbnail displays properly. From the episode menu you can also download the video you uploaded later if needed — Spotify keeps that file available on the episode management page.
If something looks off, replace the video or the thumbnail and re-submit. Small fixes (wrong image, wrong file) are straightforward from the same episode menu.
### Why this is necessary
Riverside can record and edit video, and many hosts can publish to platforms like YouTube automatically. At the time I tested this process, the [Riverside-to-Spotify](https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/) path didn’t support sending the video file via the API. I'm sure Riverside are working with Spotify to rectify this.
That means episodes delivered from Riverside arrive as audio-only on Spotify unless you manually attach the video file. Uploading the video yourself lets you maintain a consistent video presence on Spotify without changing your Riverside workflow.
[Riverside.fm Review: Complete Feature Guide for Podcasters & CreatorsRiverside.fm features have evolved rapidly over the last couple of years. What started as a recording-first tool is now a full end-to-end production platform for podcasters, YouTubers, course creators, coaches and teams.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/)
### What to expect going forward
I expect Riverside and Spotify will eventually coordinate a direct video delivery option, but until that happens the steps above let you add video to Spotify podcast episodes reliably. The manual upload preserves your video content on Spotify and ensures viewers who prefer watching can do so.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How I prepare metadata for YouTube quickly using Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/quick-youtube-metadata-riverside/
Last updated: 2025-12-18T14:18:46.000Z
I regularly prepare metadata for [YouTube](https://cotovan.com/youtube) for tutorial videos edit. Over time I've developed a short workflow that gets me an SEO-friendly title, a concise description, chapter timestamps, tags and clean subtitles in minutes. You can run this in [Riverside's Co-Creator](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
## Step 1: Create a project and upload the finished video
I start with the final edited file (I often edit tutorials in [Camtasia ](https://cotovan.com/tag/camtasia-articles/)because it allows zooming in and out, adding annotations, etc.) and upload it to Riverside’s studio when finished.
Upload launches the [automatic transcription](https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside) and a few AI-generated assets. I don’t use the auto clips here - I only want the transcript so the AI can read the recording.
[Transcribe Your Own Files with Riverside: A Step-by-Step GuideUpload, Transcribe, Edit and Repurpose audio and video with Riverside.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside/)
This initial upload is the fastest way I prepare metadata for YouTube because Riverside gives me a ready transcript to prompt from.
## Step 2: Use Co-Creator to generate title and description
With the transcription available, I run Riverside’s Co-Creator prompt.
My prompt asks for:
- a compelling, SEO-friendly description written in first person
- a primary title plus two alternative titles suitable for A/B testing
- two short phrases (2–3 words) suitable for thumbnail text
- a comma-separated list of relevant tags under the 500-character limit
I include negative instructions to avoid clichés and vague superlatives and I ask the model to describe concrete benefits - for example, what each function does and who benefits - rather than using hyperbolic language. I paste the transcript into the prompt and run it. The result gives me a usable description and multiple title options I can tweak.
**Here's the full prompt, feel free to copy it, use it or tweak it:**
> *You are an expert YouTube writer and SEO specialist. I will give you the transcript of a YouTube video that is a tutorial by \[AUTHOR\].*
>
> *Please write a compelling SEO-friendly optimized description for YouTube for this tutorial.*
>
> *Also, write a compelling SEO-friendly title for YouTube no longer than 70 characters.*
>
> *Then for this video, give me three SEO-optimised, attention grabbing but not clickbait titles for YouTube title A/B testing. Respect the length of 70-80 characters max. Include relevant keywords that will help make this video findable in search.*
>
> *Give me a few 2-3 word titles that I can add to the thumbnail of this video - thumbnails on YouTube typically must have very little text.*
>
> *Finally give me a list of SEO-friendly relevant tags for YouTube for this video separated by commas.*
>
> *Do not use:*
>
> *\- Clichés*
> *\- Gratuitous comparisons*
> *\- Hyperbolae*
> *\- Overly corporate language*
>
> *Avoid these specific cliches and overused phrases:*
>
> *\- "changes everything" / "game changer" / "revolutionize"*
> *\- "you need to know about" / "you won't believe"*
> *\- "secret" / "hidden gem" / "best kept secret"*
> *\- "take your \[X\] to the next level"*
> *\- "in \[current year\]"*
> *\- Starting with rhetorical questions*
>
> *Instead, be direct and factual. State what the feature does and who benefits, without overpromising or using vague superlatives.*
>
> *Focus on specific, concrete benefits rather than transformative language. Instead of saying something "changes everything," describe the actual workflow improvement or time saved.*
>
> *Do not start with a cliche question. Do not be cringey. Be professional and concise without giving away all of the tricks. Speak in first person, addressing the viewer in second person.*
>
> *Here is the transcript:*
## Step 3: Pick and tweak titles, prepare A/B test variations
I select a primary title that respects the 70-character guideline and create two alternates for YouTube’s A/B testing. Each title includes keywords that match likely search queries for the topic.
YouTube's A/B testing for titles was recently introduced and it helps if you're undecided which titles/keywords to use in your video for best reach. Here is the result of one of the many A/B tests I've done on [Chris Menard's](https://chrismenardtraining.com/?ref=cotovan.com) videos:
I also pick two short thumbnail phrases from the AI suggestions and edit them down so they fit the thumbnail visually.
## Step 4: Generate chapter markers with exact timestamps
Chapters improve navigation and search discoverability on YouTube. I ask Co-Creator to generate chapter markers with precise timestamps by using the transcript as the source.
If the first pass has formatting issues (brackets, misspelled function names), I revise the prompt to request no brackets and provide the exact spelling of function names (for example UNIQUE, LEFT, SEARCH, TEXTBEFORE, SORT in this tutorial).
Then I copy the cleaned list into my [YouTube description](https://cotovan.com/post/youtube-allows-you-to-mention-other-channels-in-your-titles-and-description).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Step 5: Copy tags and paste into YouTube
I instruct the AI to return tags separated by commas so they paste cleanly into YouTube’s tags field and also to keep the total characters to 500 (including commas), which is YouTube's limit.
Riverside preserves the comma-separated format, so a simple copy/paste expands into individual tags on the YouTube form. This step saves me the repeated typing of related keywords.
## Step 6: Use Riverside transcript to create clean subtitles
I prefer to upload my own subtitles rather than relying on YouTube’s automatic captions. [I copy the transcript from Riverside](https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside/), then open the YouTube subtitles editor and paste that text.
Before copying, I correct function names and common misread words inside Riverside’s transcript editor using “*Correct everywhere*” so the subtitles are accurate and consistent.
## Step 7: Final checks - end screen, monetization and upload
With title, description, chapters, tags and subtitles in place I finish the YouTube upload flow: set monetization, add an end screen or playlist suggestion, and save. If I exported the video from Riverside I can also upload directly from Riverside to YouTube to skip a local download step.
### Quick checklist I use every upload
- Upload final video to Riverside and wait for transcript.
- Run CoCreator with transcript to generate title(s), description and tags.
- Tweak titles for A/B testing and pick two thumbnail phrases.
- Generate and clean chapter timestamps; paste them into the description.
- Correct transcript text, copy it, and paste into YouTube subtitles.
- Set end screen, monetization and publish settings.
### Why this approach works for me
This routine lets me prepare metadata for YouTube quickly while keeping the language factual and focused on concrete benefits. Using the transcript as the source keeps titles and descriptions tightly tied to the video content, and correcting transcript terms once eliminates small errors in both the description and subtitles.
It's not a perfect shot every time - the AI seems to insist on embellishing the description a lot, but I tweak and clean it up to match my own voice.
### Final notes
If you create tutorials, capture the transcript and use it as the single source of truth for titles, descriptions, chapters and subtitles. Over time you can refine the Co-Creator prompts to match your voice and eliminate repetitive edits. That reduces the time it takes to prepare metadata for YouTube from many minutes to just a minute or two per video.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### What Is Aligned Video in Riverside and When to Use It
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/what-is-aligned-video-in-riverside-and-when-to-use-it/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T10:46:46.000Z
When you download recordings from [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), you'll notice two video options: **Raw video** and **Aligned video**. If you plan to edit in external software like Premiere Pro, DaVinci Resolve, or Descript, the aligned video is the one you want, especially if you've had more than one participant in your recording, people came late or you had glitches and interruptions.
## Where to Find It
After your recording finishes processing, go to your project, the Recordings tab, and you'll see each participant's track listed with duration and resolution.
Each participant's track is listed with duration and resolution once processing completes
Click the **Download** button next to any track and you'll see the download options menu.
The download menu — choose Aligned video for editing in external software
## Raw Video vs. Aligned Video
### Raw Video
The original recording file exactly as captured. Each participant's file starts when *they* joined the call, which may be at slightly different times. Raw video uses variable frame rate, which can cause sync issues in some editors.
### Aligned Video
Aligned video solves both problems:
- **Padding at the start** — if someone joined the call late, their file gets padded with silence/blank frames so all tracks start at the exact same point
- **Constant frame rate (CFR)** — converted from VFR to CFR, which editing software handles much better
- **Same duration** — all tracks are the same length, making it easy to drop them onto a timeline and have everything line up
## When to Use Each
- **Use Aligned video** when editing in Premiere Pro, DaVinci Resolve, Final Cut Pro, Descript, or any external NLE. The files will sync perfectly when placed on the same timeline.
- **Use Raw video** when you need the absolute highest quality original file, or you're archiving the recording.
If you want to skip the download entirely and edit directly in Riverside, you can use the [built-in precision editor](https://cotovan.com/master-precision-editing-in-riverside-the-complete-guide/) instead.
Ready to record and edit? [Get started with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Customize Logo and Brand in Riverside: Step-by-step Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/customize-logo-brand-riverside/
Last updated: 2025-12-11T15:39:58.000Z
This walkthrough covers where to add a logo in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), how to export a transparent PNG in Affinity and Canva, and how to apply and position your branding inside the studio and edit workspace.
## Where to add your logo in Riverside
Start in your Riverside account and open the studio you want to brand. You can add a logo from two places: the [Studio Settings](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit) (Design > Customize) or from an Edit (open a recorded file and go to the [Brand panel](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit)). Both paths lead to the same branding options, so use whichever fits your workflow.
In the Riverside [recording studio](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/), you’ll find a Brand sidebar with options to add a logo, brand color, overlays, etc. Click the plus icon next to Logo to upload an image.
In the Riverside editor, there are even more options, in addition to adding the logo.
## Why you should export a transparent PNG
For clean overlays on top of video, export your logo with a **transparent background**. Riverside accepts logos with a white or colored background, but a PNG with transparency looks more professional and adapts to different video shots - especially when guests sit against light or dark backgrounds.
Two practical tips:
- Keep a light and a dark version of your logo so it stays visible against varying footage.
- Export at a large size (for example 3000×3000 px) so Riverside can scale it without losing quality.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Exporting transparent PNGs - Affinity Designer
I use [Affinity Designer](https://www.affinity.studio/?ref=cotovan.com) to create and export transparent PNGs. Create a new document with a transparent background, place or design your logo, then export as PNG.
When exporting, choose PNG (not JPEG) and confirm the export region — export the selection or full document depending on whether you want a tight crop or a square canvas around the mark.
Export settings I use:
- Format: **PNG**
- Canvas size: **3000×3000 px** (or large square)
- Background: **Transparent** (alpha channel)
## Exporting transparent PNGs - Canva
If you prefer [Canva](https://canva.com/?ref=cotovan.com), create a custom design (for example 3000×3000 px), upload or build your logo, then download as PNG and check “Transparent background.”
Note that transparent downloads require a *Canva Pro* account.
Make sure you select PNG and confirm the transparent background option before downloading.
## Uploading and positioning your logo in Riverside
Back in Riverside, upload your PNG from the **Brand > Logo** panel. Once uploaded, the logo joins your brand assets and you can set a default placement (top left, top right, bottom right) in the studio.
If you need multiple versions, upload both light and dark PNGs to your account assets and swap them as needed for different episodes.
You can also change placement live in the studio - useful when streaming or recording - so the logo doesn’t overlap lower-thirds or guest name plates.
## Apply brand kit to edits and new recordings
When you apply your [brand kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit) to an edit or new recording, Riverside automatically adds the logo, applies your color palette to captions and graphics, and inserts any intros/outros you’ve defined. This keeps exports and short clips consistent without editing the same elements manually each time.
If you manage multiple podcasts or clients, on Business plan, you can keep separate studios or saved brand kits so you can quickly apply the correct logo and color set for each show.
I’ll cover creating overlays, intros, and outros in follow-up guides - but this gets your logo into Riverside correctly and cleanly.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Record in High Resolution in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-record-in-high-resolution-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T10:11:51.000Z
By default, [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) records in 720p. But if your camera supports it, you can bump the recording quality up to **1080p or even 4K HD**. Here's how to change the resolution setting.
## Find the Recording Settings
Go to **Settings** in the Riverside sidebar, then click **Studio settings**. Select the **Recording** tab at the top.
The Recording tab in Studio settings — scroll down to find the video resolution options
## Change Video Resolution
Scroll down to the **Advanced** section. You'll see a toggle to switch between:
- **Up to 1080p** — Full HD recording, good balance of quality and file size
- **Up to 4K HD** — Maximum quality, requires a camera that supports 4K
The default 1080p setting — toggle right to switch to 4K
Click the toggle to switch to **Up to 4K HD**:
Switched to 4K HD — note the warning about longer upload and processing times
## Trade-offs to Consider
- **4K files are much larger** — expect longer upload and processing times
- **Your camera must support it** — if your webcam only does 1080p, the setting won't help
- **Frame rate** is set separately (24 FPS recommended) — also visible on this settings page but is not enabled for plans lower than Business.
- **Audio sample rate** (44.1 kHz vs 48 kHz) can also be configured here to help [avoid lip sync issues](https://cotovan.com/how-to-avoid-lip-sync-issues-in-riverside/)
For most podcasters and content creators, **1080p is the sweet spot** — high enough quality for YouTube and social media without the massive file sizes of 4K.
Ready to record in high quality? [Get started with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How I Save Time with Captions Presets in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-captions-presets-save-time/
Last updated: 2025-12-03T16:04:08.000Z
I use this when I edit episodes, separately for each studio: set the look once, save it to my brand, and have Riverside apply it automatically to future clips and episodes.
## Step 1: Set the aspect ratio and add a captions block
I often create captions presets in Riverside for [vertical videos](https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside), so I switch the player to 9:16 first, if that's what I'm designing for. That rearranges the layout and gives a realistic preview of where captions will sit on-screen.
Next, open the [Captions panel](https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside) and pick one of the built-in styles as a starting point. Riverside adds the captions to the timeline so you can immediately see how they behave with your footage.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Step 2: Customize the caption style
Now tweak the details: text color, background color, font, alignment, corner radius, and animation. I usually match the background to a [brand color](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/) (or pick a contrasting highlight color for visibility).
[Apply Branding with One Click in Riverside.fm Brand KitRiverside has introduced a new feature in their editor, allowing you to apply a brand kit to your edits in just one click.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/)
Riverside also offers animation options - none, highlight-as-you-speak, scale, boxed - so choose what fits your video’s energy.
A few practical adjustments I make:
- Increase **font size** by typing an exact number for consistent readability across videos.
- Try the **invert background** option to swap text and background color without losing brand consistency.
- Use a **bright highlight** (even if it’s not a brand color) if legibility is the priority
## Step 3: Save the style as a captions preset
Once I’m happy with the look, I open the Captions Presets menu and save the style. You can mark any preset as a favorite so it appears at the top of the caption picker.
To make the preset part of your brand, use the three-dot menu on the preset and choose “*Add to my brand*.” That stores the caption style alongside your logo, colors, and other brand assets.
## Step 4: Apply the brand and adjust per scene
Applying your saved brand to an edit brings in the caption preset and your logo in one action. Keep in mind that logos apply across the entire edit, so move and position the logo once and it will hold for every scene.
[Apply Branding with One Click in Riverside.fm Brand KitRiverside has introduced a new feature in their editor, allowing you to apply a brand kit to your edits in just one click.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/)
Captions can be placed differently depending on who’s on screen. When a scene contains both host and guest, captions can cover faces unless you adjust them. Here’s the quickest way to fix that in Riverside:
1. Select the captions block you want to move.
2. Click “Similar Scenes.” Riverside selects every scene with the same layout (for example, both speakers on screen).
3. Move the captions to the safe position and then deselect.
That ensures captions shift consistently across all matching scenes. If the logo clashes with a particular background, you can swap it for a dark or light version for those parts.
## Step 5: Use the preset across future videos
After you add captions presets in Riverside to your brand, any new episodes recorded in that [studio](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings) will automatically pull the brand styling - logo, captions preset, and other branding - into the edit. That saves me repeated formatting work and keeps every clip visually consistent.
**Small tips:**
- If a highlight color isn’t legible on some footage, invert the background or pick a high-contrast accent for the highlight only.
- For cross-format publishing, create separate caption presets for vertical (9:16), horizontal, and square outputs so placement and size are optimized for each format.
### Summary
Captions presets in Riverside let you design a consistent caption style once and apply it reliably across edits. I create the style, save it as a preset, add it to my brand, and then use “[Similar Scenes](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside)” to make sure the captions don’t block faces. This workflow reduces repetitive work and keeps branding consistent across episodes.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Remove "Fluff" with Riverside: How to Quickly Cut Unnecessary Parts from Recordings
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/clean-riverside-recordings-find-fluff-workflow/
Last updated: 2025-11-26T17:40:11.000Z
I walk through a simple workflow to remove fluff with Riverside so you can publish cleaner interviews and recordings without re-listening to every minute. I’ll show you how the **Find Fluff AI tool** detects behind-the-scenes talk, repetitions, and technical hiccups, how to review suggestions, and how to restore anything you change.
Below I break the process into practical steps you can follow the first time you open the AI tools panel. If you want to remove fluff with Riverside but prefer a hands-on approach, these steps are what I use every time I edit an episode.
## Open the AI tools and locate “Find Fluff”
Start by opening your Riverside project and looking at the AI tools in the sidebar. The Find Fluff feature is listed among other AI tools like filler-word removal, smart mute and others. When it finds issues it marks them with purple dots in the [timeline](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside), which makes it easy to spot where the AI thinks you have non-essential material.
When I open Find Fluff it immediately reports how many suggested cuts it found. This gives you a quick sense of how much cleanup might be necessary before you start reviewing each suggestion.
## Begin reviewing suggestions
Click the review button in the Find Fluff panel to jump to the first suggested cut. Riverside adds each suggestion as a comment attached to the relevant segment, and the tool highlights the exact portion it analyzed so you don’t need to guess where the issue is.
Each comment explains why the segment was flagged - for example, an internal conversation, a repetition, or a technical problem. The comment is also actionable: you can ignore the suggestion or apply it to remove that segment from the timeline.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Apply or ignore each suggestion
Applying a suggestion removes the highlighted portion and advances you to the next flagged segment. I usually apply cuts that are clearly behind-the-scenes (like planning or private coordination) and any obvious repeats or sound-problem retakes.
The AI doesn’t try to micro-edit minor speaking quirks; it focuses on the more obvious parts you likely don’t want in the final cut.
When I apply a suggestion it’s removed from the active timeline. If I’m unsure, I ignore the suggestion and come back to it later. Using this method lets me move through multiple issues quickly while deciding what must stay for context.
## Navigate suggestions from the timeline
You can also jump directly to any purple dot on the timeline if you want to skip ahead or revisit a particular part. That’s useful when you remember a specific problem in a segment and don’t want to step through every suggestion in order.
The comment attached to the flagged segment often includes short notes like “internal conversation, not intended for the audience” or “repetition” so you can make a fast judgement. I find this especially helpful in longer interviews where scanning manually would take too long.
## Use non-destructive restoring to check changes
Riverside treats these removals as [non-destructive edits](https://cotovan.com/post/never-delete-always-ignore-descript-storyboard-transcripts). If you think you removed something too quickly, toggle “**show deleted part**s” from the top of the editor. Deleted sections reappear as greyed-out, underlined text so you can inspect what was removed and restore segments if needed.
This safety net is the reason I recommend using Find Fluff even when you plan to listen to the full episode later. It exposes the most problematic parts quickly, and you can always bring any removed material back for a second review.
## How I decide what to accept and what to keep
My goal when I remove fluff with Riverside is clarity, not perfection. I accept cuts when a segment meets one of these criteria:
- It’s clearly an internal discussion or planning that adds no value for the viewer.
- It’s a repeated idea where the repetition doesn’t add emphasis or clarity.
- It’s an audio or technical problem segment where the speaker restarts and the redo is already present.
## Some tips
Over time I use a few simple habits to speed up the process when I remove fluff with Riverside:
1. Work in short passes. Apply obvious cuts in a first pass and then do a quick review to restore anything important.
2. Use timeline navigation to target specific moments you remember were problematic.
3. Keep an eye on the comment explanations - they’re often precise about why a segment was flagged.
4. If you routinely record polished conversations, expect fewer suggestions; if you record lively, informal chats, you’ll see more.
5. After removing or accepting a suggestion, I recommend you go back to that cut and make sure it is a 'clean' cut.
If you don’t have time to listen through a long episode, using Find Fluff can save hours. It helps you quickly address the content most likely to harm audience experience, so you can publish with more confidence. I still recommend a quick final listen of the whole episode, but this feature reduces the number of obvious issues you need to hunt for manually.
Try [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) today.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Host Your Podcast on Riverside: Migration Walkthrough
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/migrate-host-podcast-on-riverside-guide/
Last updated: 2025-11-26T17:35:33.000Z
In this article you will learn how to import an existing show, create a new podcast from scratch, switch your RSS feed, publish episodes directly from your [Riverside exports](https://riverside.com/?ref=cotovan.com), and connect distribution platforms so you can record - edit - and host your podcast on Riverside end-to-end.
## What it means to host your podcast on Riverside
Hosting your podcast on Riverside means Riverside stores your finished audio (and optional video) files on their servers and produces the RSS feed other platforms use to fetch episodes.
When you choose to host your podcast on Riverside you remove the manual step of downloading exports and uploading them to a separate host. Instead, you record, edit, export and publish all within the same workspace.
Key benefits when you host your podcast on Riverside:
- **No manual file transfers** between editor and host.
- A Riverside-generated **RSS feed** you can submit or redirect to major platforms.
- **Direct publishing** from your Riverside exports to connected platforms.
- Basic **analytics** included inside the Riverside dashboard to track streams and geography.
Before you decide to host your podcast on Riverside, check these constraints:
- You need a paid Riverside account - hosting is available on all paid plans.
- Riverside supports one podcast per studio. If your plan has multiple studios, you can host one podcast per studio.
- Phase one analytics are basic; expect deeper analytics and ad features to evolve over time.
## Prepare your account and pick the studio to host your podcast
If your account contains [multiple studios](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings), pick the studio you want to link to a single podcast. Each studio can support one podcast. If you only have a single studio on your plan, that studio will be the only place you can host a podcast.
Checklist before you migrate or create a show to host your podcast on Riverside:
1. Confirm you’re on a **paid Riverside plan**.
2. **Decide which studio** will house the show.
3. Gather your **current podcast RSS feed** or your show links (Spotify, Apple) if you plan to import.
4. Prepare your **show artwork** at 3000 x 3000 px to meet common directory recommendations.
Open the studio menu and pick the studio you want to host your podcast in.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Import an EXISTING podcast into Riverside (fast path)
Importing an existing show is the quickest way to host your podcast on Riverside without losing episodes. Riverside attempts to find your podcast automatically when you type the show name, and you can also paste your RSS feed manually if needed.
How to import an existing show to host your podcast on Riverside:
1. **Open the studio** you chose and click the **Hosting tab** in the left menu.
2. Click **Import Podcast**.
3. Type the **podcast name** and let Riverside search for the show, or paste the current RSS feed from your host.
4. **Review the preview** information (source platform, episode list, artwork) and confirm.
5. **Start the import** and wait for your episodes to appear in Riverside’s hosting dashboard.
Riverside will import episode metadata, artwork and publication dates. Depending on the number of episodes, the import can take minutes to up to an hour. Once imported you’ll be able to manage episodes and publish future episodes directly from Riverside.
Import finished — use the modal to continue setup or proceed to redirect the feed.
## Switch your RSS feed to point to Riverside (the redirect)
To host your podcast on Riverside and ensure platforms like Apple and Spotify fetch future episodes from Riverside, you must redirect your existing RSS feed to the [Riverside RSS](https://riverside.com/?ref=cotovan.com) URL. This step tells all podcast directories to look at Riverside for new episodes.
How to set up the RSS redirect so you can host your podcast on Riverside:
1. In Riverside’s Hosting settings click the button to **Set up Redirect** and copy the Riverside RSS URL.
2. Log into your **current host** (or the platform where your RSS is managed) and find the setting for feed or RSS redirection.
3. **Paste the Riverside RSS URL** and confirm the redirect.
4. Return to Riverside and **verify the redirect**. Riverside will check that your old host points to the new feed and confirm completion.
Common redirect locations:
- Spotify for Podcasters — settings → redirect your podcast.
- Libsyn, Anchor and other hosts — search for “RSS redirect” in settings.
- Your current host’s documentation will usually explain how to change or redirect the feed.
Redirect dialog open — copy the Riverside RSS URL and check the redirect.
**Notes on redirects:**
- Redirecting the feed is the canonical way to migrate; it avoids broken links for subscribers and prevents duplicate listings.
- Redirecting may cancel or affect host-specific ad integrations - check the warning when you redirect.
- It can take a short time for platforms to reflect the change; Riverside documentation warns scheduling and publish propagation may take up to an hour to appear on other platforms.
Paste the Riverside RSS URL into the Redirect URL field to start the redirect.
## Verify import, analytics and episode metadata
Once your episodes import and the redirect is in place, confirm that metadata and artwork look correct inside Riverside. This is the time to tidy up episode titles, descriptions and thumbnails.
What to check after you host your podcast on Riverside:
- Episode titles match what appears in directories.
- Publication dates are correct.
- Episode artwork and show artwork display properly at 3000 x 3000 px.
- Basic analytics show stream counts and country information (phase one analytics are included).
- Check your episodes. One of mine had a warning sign next to it because the imported description was too long. I had to shorten it to make that error go away.
**Remember:** existing analytics from your previous host are not automatically imported. The analytics you’ll see after migration will reflect activity from Riverside onward.
Hosting dashboard with show header and episodes list — verify imported episodes, artwork and metadata here.
## Exporting edits inside Riverside - no downloads required
One of the major conveniences when you choose to host your podcast on Riverside is that exported files from your Riverside editor are available directly as files to attach to episodes - no local downloads needed.
How to export and make an episode ready to publish inside Riverside:
1. Open your project and go to **Edits**.
2. **Finalize your edit** and click **Export**.
3. During export choose audio normalization, noise removal and any other processing options offered.
4. When the **export completes**, it will be available inside Riverside.
5. Return to the **Hosting tab** to create a new episode and **attach the Riverside export file**.
Exports tab with clear thumbnails of recent exports ready to attach to episodes.
Because exports remain in the Riverside environment, the file selection dialog shows your recent Riverside exports. This makes the publish workflow much faster: export → create episode → attach Riverside file → publish.
## Create and publish a new episode directly from Riverside
Publishing a new episode after you host your podcast on Riverside follows the standard episode-creation flow, but now the audio file lives inside Riverside.
To publish a new episode:
1. Go to **Hosting → New Episode**.
2. Enter **your episode title**, season and episode numbers, and episode type (normal, trailer, bonus).
3. Add **episode artwork** if you want a unique thumbnail.
4. Choose the **file source** — select *Choose Riverside File* to pick the export you just created.
5. Fill in description, explicit content flag and any show notes.
6. **Publish immediately or schedule** for a future date (scheduling may require you to connect distribution platforms first).
**Scheduling reminders:**
- Scheduled episodes may take up to an hour to appear on other directories after the scheduled time.
- Always verify the scheduled episode appears correctly on major directories after publishing.
## Connect distribution platforms (Spotify, Apple, YouTube and RSS)
To get episodes out to listeners, connect platforms from the Riverside hosting dashboard. Riverside supports direct connections to Spotify, Apple Podcasts and [YouTube](https://cotovan.com/youtube); you can also distribute to other platforms via the Riverside RSS feed if they accept self-hosted RSS.
How to connect platforms so you can host your podcast on Riverside and distribute automatically:
1. From the **Hosting dashboard**, locate the Connect Platforms section.
2. For Spotify: paste your Spotify show URL (from Spotify for Podcasters) and click Connect.
3. For Apple Podcasts: paste your Apple show link (from Apple Podcasts Connect) and click Connect.
4. For YouTube: authorize your YouTube account and choose the channel to which episodes should be uploaded.
5. For other directories: copy your Riverside RSS URL and submit it to any platform that accepts direct RSS submission.
Connect apps panel — link Spotify, Apple Podcasts and YouTube from Hosting.
After connecting platforms, any time you publish an episode in Riverside you can push it to the connected destinations automatically. This closes the loop so that recording, editing and publishing all happen from a single place.
Connect YouTube dialog — choose to upload imported episodes and authorize YouTube.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
## Create a NEW podcast on Riverside from scratch
If you don’t have an existing show to migrate and you want to start clean, [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) lets you create a new podcast inside a chosen studio and immediately begin publishing - all without an external host.
Steps to create a brand new show when you decide to host your podcast on Riverside:
1. Open the **Hosting tab** in the selected studio and click **Create New Podcast**.
2. Enter your **podcast name and a brief description**.
3. Select a category and **upload your cover art** (3000 x 3000 px recommended).
4. Add an **optional website URL** and any other show details.
5. Set up **distribution connections** (Spotify, Apple, YouTube) or copy the Riverside RSS to submit to directories.
Write a concise podcast description — example text entered here.
Once the podcast is set up you can create episodes, attach Riverside exports, and manage your show from a single dashboard. This all-in-one flow streamlines the entire production and publishing lifecycle.
The final touches — complete your show details (author, language, explicit/clean) before creating the podcast.
## Scheduling, publishing cadence and best practices when you host your podcast on Riverside
Hosting your podcast on Riverside gives you scheduling control and workflow efficiencies. Use that advantage to create consistent publishing habits.
Best-practice checklist for scheduling and cadence:
- **Plan episodes ahead** \- use Riverside projects to schedule, store raw recordings and edits so you can batch produce.
- Use **consistent episode metadata** (titles, season numbering, categories) to help directories and listeners navigate your show.
- When scheduling, factor in the **propagation window** \- allow up to an hour for directories to refresh new episodes.
- Design your **3000 x 3000 cover artwork** once and reuse it across episodes to ensure consistent branding.
## Troubleshooting and frequently asked questions
These are the most common migration questions when you host your podcast on Riverside and how to resolve them quickly.
### My episodes imported but the feed still shows the old host - what now?
Confirm you copied and pasted the Riverside RSS URL into your old host’s redirect setting and that the redirect completed. Once redirected, Riverside will check and verify. If it does not verify, double-check the old host’s redirect field and try again.
### Will my listeners notice the migration?
Generally no - if you correctly set up the RSS redirect, listeners receive new episodes from Riverside without re-subscribing. Ensure the redirect is complete before publishing new episodes.
### Can I keep using my old host while I test Riverside?
Yes. Import episodes into Riverside first and test publishing to a single platform. However, to avoid split traffic and duplicate listings, set the redirect once you are ready to make Riverside the canonical host.
### Can I host multiple podcasts on Riverside?
Riverside allows one podcast per studio. If your plan supports multiple studios, you can host one podcast per studio. If your plan includes a single studio, you can host only one podcast on Riverside.
### What about advertising, advanced analytics and ad insertion?
Riverside’s hosting feature is in phase one - analytics are basic now. Expect improvements such as deeper analytics, ad insertion and monetization features in later updates. If you rely on host-specific ad delivery, check how redirecting will affect those services.
## Checklist to complete your migration and host your podcast on Riverside
Use this short checklist to make sure nothing is missed when you migrate or start a new show to host your podcast on Riverside.
1. Confirm **paid Riverside account** and select studio to host the show.
2. **Import** episodes or **create** a new podcast in Riverside.
3. Copy **Riverside RSS URL** and set up redirect at your current host (if migrating).
4. **Verify redirect** and check episode metadata and artwork inside Riverside.
5. **Export edited episodes** inside Riverside and attach exports to new episodes.
6. **Connect** Spotify, Apple Podcasts and YouTube (optional) or submit Riverside RSS to other directories.
7. **Publish or schedule episodes** and confirm they appear correctly on connected platforms.
8. **Monitor basic analytics** in Riverside and plan for future enhancements.
Riverside’s hosting capability turns the platform into an end-to-end solution for many [podcasters](https://cotovan.com/services/podcast-editing).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Unlimited Free AI Transcription with Riverside's New Tool
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/unlimited-free-ai-transcription-with-riversides-new-tool/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:53:57.000Z
Riverside now offers **100% free transcription** for your podcast episodes and video interviews. This isn't a limited trial or freemium model with restrictions – it's completely free to use.
## How It Works
Getting your content transcribed is surprisingly simple:
1. Visit [**riverside.fm/transcription**](https://cotovan.com/post/should-you-burn-captions-in-descript-for-youtube-or-upload-them-separately/)
2. Drag and drop your video or audio file
3. Let Riverside's AI do the work
4. Download your results
## Key Features
**Multi-Language Support**: The tool works in over 100 different languages, making it accessible for creators worldwide.
**Powered by OpenAI Whisper**: The transcription uses Whisper technology from OpenAI, which has been trained on hundreds of thousands of hours of analyzed audio data, ensuring high accuracy.
**Flexible Output Options**: Once your transcription is complete, you can:
- Copy and paste the text directly
- Download as a text file
- Export as a caption file
## Who Should Use This?
This tool is perfect for:
- Podcasters who need episode transcripts
- Content creators making video interviews
- Anyone needing accurate, multilingual transcription services
- Creators looking to add captions to their content
You can download the transcription or edit your transcribed files inside Riverside's editor, using text-based editing, removing filler words, gaps, creating social media clips for repurposing your content and more!
### How to Reveal More Content in a Riverside Magic Clip
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-reveal-more-content-in-a-riverside-magic-clip/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T10:09:21.000Z
When [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) generates a Magic Clip, it trims your recording down to what the AI thinks is the most interesting segment. But sometimes the clip cuts off just before a great point, or starts too late. Here's how to **reveal more content** around the clip and include the parts that were trimmed.
## Extend the Clip with + Add
Open any Magic Clip in the Riverside editor. You'll see **\+ Add** buttons at the top and bottom of the transcript. They don't help because they are just for adding new content into this edit.
The + Add buttons are just for adding NEW content to the clip
## See What Was Trimmed
To see exactly what content was cut from the original recording, click the **filter icon** (or three-dot menu) at the top of the transcript and enable **Show deleted parts**.
Toggle "Show deleted parts" to see what content was trimmed from the original recording
## Restore Deleted Content
With "Show deleted parts" enabled, trimmed content appears as **strikethrough text** above or below your clip. This shows you exactly what was said before and after the clip boundary.
Strikethrough text shows what was trimmed — click on it and pres R to restore it
To restore any of the deleted content, simply click on the strikethrough text to select it, then either click R to restore it or click the restore icon.
## When to Use This
- **Context is missing** — the clip starts mid-thought and needs the setup
- **Great follow-up** — the speaker said something great right after the clip ends
- **Wrong speaker cut** — the AI clipped one speaker but you want to include the other person's response too
- **Longer clip needed** — you need more content for a platform that requires minimum length
Want to create your own clips from scratch instead? Learn how to [manually create Magic Clips](https://cotovan.com/how-to-manually-create-magic-clips-in-riverside/) by selecting transcript text.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Riverside Invite Roles Explained: How to Pick the Right Role Every Time
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-roles-guest-producer-audience/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:17:15.000Z
If you use [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) to record interviews, webinars, or internal broadcasts, understanding Riverside invite roles is the single easiest way to avoid costly mistakes.
****Learn Riverside one-on-one with me**
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Guest Role
The most common role on Riverside is the **Guest**. If you need someone recorded in high-quality video and audio, invite them as a Guest.
Guests are designed for remote interviews, podcast co-hosts, and any conversation where each person needs their own separate audio and video track.
**Key Guest information to remember:**
- Guests are **recorded in high-quality** audio and video.
- Each guest has **separate audio and video tracks** after the recording finishes, which makes editing and mixing far easier.
- Guests can **see and hear the host** and other participants before recording starts, share their screen, and use studio chat.
- Guests **cannot start or stop the recording** \- only the host can control recording state.
If you need editable [individual tracks](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside) for post-production, and are recording someone for your podcast, **Guest** is the role to choose.
## Producer Role
A **Producer** in Riverside works behind the scenes. The producer is not recorded and is focused entirely on managing the technical aspects of the session. This is especially helpful on larger productions where you want someone who can focus on audio levels, media cues, and the waiting room while you handle content.
**Producer capabilities include:**
- Adjusting participant **volume levels** and fine-tuning **audio settings**.
- Accepting Guests from the **waiting room** and managing audience call-ins.
- **Sharing screens, controlling media board** files, and managing teleprompters and presentations.
- Working **without being recorded**, which lets them monitor and fix problems without adding another track.
Note: The Producer role is available only on the [Riverside Business Plan](https://riverside.com/pricing?ref=cotovan.com). If you run frequent multi-person recordings, [hiring](https://cotovan.com/training/coaching) or assigning a dedicated Producer is an investment that usually pays off in saved editing time and fewer live-session errors.
## Audience Role
**Audience** role is intended for webinars, live streams, and broadcasts where many viewers need to watch, ask questions, or participate in chat without being part of the recorded interview. Audience members are not recorded by default and only see or hear the studio once the recording starts.
**Important Audience features:**
- Audience members can **watch the recording live** and **participate in chat**, perfect for webinars and large events.
- Audience members are **not recorded** unless you accept their request to call in during the live presentation.
- When an audience member requests a **call-in** and you let them in, they become a recorded participant like a Guest; when they leave, their recording stops.
- Audience mode supports high-capacity viewing, enabling hundreds of people to join.
[Schedule Multiple Recording Sessions in Advance with Riverside.fmRiverside announced that you can schedule an unlimited number of sessions in advance in the studio.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/schedule-multiple-recording-sessions-in-advance-with-riversidefm/)
## Avoid the most common mistakes
People often mix up Riverside invite roles and send the wrong type of invite - most of the time by mistake. The two most frequent errors are:
1. **Inviting someone as a Producer** when you meant to record them - they won’t be recorded even though they can manage the session, they can be seen and heard during the discussion.
2. **Inviting speakers as Audience members** \- they can watch and chat, but they won’t be on the final recorded tracks unless you admit them in a call-in them mid-session.
## Quick Recap
Quick recap: **if you want a participant recorded, invite them as a Guest**.
If someone needs to manage the session but not appear in the final recording, assign **Producer** (Business Plan).
If the person only needs to watch and participate via chat, use **Audience**.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Upload Separate Recordings in Riverside and Edit as Multi-Track
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/import-separate-recordings-riverside-multi-track/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:01:00.000Z
I discovered how to edit separate recordings in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) as [multi-track](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside) recently, and it now enables me to handle interviews recorded outside the platform.
In this tutorial I’ll show the exact steps I use to upload separate files, synchronize them, and use Riverside’s editing and [AI tools](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside) to finish an episode.
## Step 1: Create a new project
Start in your Riverside studio and choose **Projects → New Project**. Give the project a name - it doesn’t matter much since you can rename later. Creating a project is required before you upload files so Riverside has a container to process and store the synchronized multi-track session.
## Step 2: Upload the separate recordings
Click Upload instead of Record. Riverside supports uploading files from your local drive or importing from Google Drive. Select the video (or audio) files you recorded separately. I usually select each participant’s camera feed or [clean audio](https://cotovan.com/post/separate-speakers-audio-file-riverside-fm) track. Hold your modifier key to pick multiple files at once, then click Open.
When you upload, Riverside will detect multiple files and ask if these are different participants from the same recording session. If they are part of the same conversation and already time-aligned, check that box. That is the key step to tell Riverside to combine the files as a synchronized multi-track.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
If the files are unrelated, don’t check the box - Riverside will keep them as separate recordings.
## Step 3: Ensure tracks are time-aligned before upload
Riverside only assembles the files into a multi-track edit if each track starts at the same time and is in sync. Before you upload, verify the recordings start and end at the same time. If they’re offset by a few seconds, adjust them in your local editor or add silent padding so each file begins at the same timestamp, to prevent unexpected results. This small prep step prevents sync issues and saves editing time later.
## Step 4: Let Riverside process and create the project
After upload, Riverside will process the files. This step includes free [transcription](https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside) and audio/video processing. Depending on file size, this may take a few minutes. When processing finishes, Riverside will list the recordings inside the project exactly like native Riverside sessions.
You’ll see the files available to download, edit, and use [in the editor](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/).
Riverside also creates a “magic episode” automatically. It applies your [brand kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit) (logo, caption presets), generates show notes with AI, and starts producing social clips and longer “magic segments.” This automated output gives you a head start if you want quick promotional assets.
## Step 5: Open the edit and verify the multi-track assembly
Go to **Recordings** inside the project and click Edit to open the Riverside editor. You’ll notice a few things immediately:
- **Transcripts** are already generated and aligned to the timeline.
- **Chapters** are created automatically and appear in the left navigation.
- The **separate tracks** are already aligned and accessible as discrete participant tracks.
At this point you can switch camera angles, hide or show tracks, and treat the session exactly like a recording made inside Riverside. All the [Riverside editor features](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/) are available to you because Riverside assembled the files as a multi-track project.
## Step 6: Use Riverside’s AI tools to speed up post-production
Riverside exposes the full AI toolset for uploaded multi-track sessions. From the AI Tools menu you can:
1. Remove **pauses and filler words** (ums, ahs).
2. Apply **Magic Audio** to clean noise and balance levels.
3. Use **Smart Mute** to silence non-speaking tracks automatically.
4. Adjust **eye contact** on video tracks where available.
These features let you polish separate recordings in Riverside as multi-track sessions without switching platforms. I often run automatic cleanup first, then fine-tune manually for pacing and emphasis.
## Step 7: Create clips, show notes, and export
Once your edit is ready, use Riverside’s publishing tools. You can:
- Generate social clips using the AI-created hooks and magic segments.
- Export a branded episode video that uses your layout and caption presets.
- Download individual tracks for further local processing, or publish directly to a supported podcast host (or publish to Riverside, if you use Riverside hosting).
Because Riverside treated the upload as a multi-track session, switching layouts and camera angles will be a breeze.
## When to use this workflow
I use the ability to edit separate recordings in Riverside as multi-track when:
- I record interviews in a professional studio that provides clean video and audio but want Riverside’s AI and publishing tools.
- I have existing episodes recorded elsewhere and want to migrate them into Riverside for centralized editing and hosting.
- I record locally with separate recorders and need smart mutes, filler removal, or branded clip generation without manual multi-track assembly.
I hope this clear, step-by-step guide helps you confidently start and edit separate recordings in Riverside as multi-track projects.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks,
and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Quickly Invite Guests to Record in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-quickly-invite-guests-to-record-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T10:16:18.000Z
Getting guests into your [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) recording studio is quick — you can share a link or send an email invite directly from the app. Here's how to do both.
## Open the Invite Panel
From your Riverside dashboard, look at the bottom of the left sidebar. Next to the **Open studio** button, you'll see a **people icon**. Click it to open the **Invite to record** panel.
Click the people icon next to "Open studio" to invite guests
## Option 1: Share a Link
The fastest way to invite someone. In the **Invite people** panel:
1. You'll see a studio link under **Share a link**
2. Choose the role from the dropdown (Guest, Producer, etc.)
3. Click **Copy link** and send it to your guest via any messaging app
Copy the studio link and share it — your guest clicks it to join the recording
Anyone with the link can join your studio in their browser — no account or download required.
## Option 2: Invite via Email
If you prefer, send an email invitation directly from Riverside:
1. In the same **Invite people** panel, scroll to **Invite via email**
2. Type your guest's email address
3. Choose their role (Guest by default)
4. Click **Send invite**
Enter an email address and click Send invite — Riverside emails them instructions to join
Riverside sends them an email with a direct link to your studio and instructions on how to join.
## About Roles
When inviting, you can assign different roles:
- **Guest** — the default role, can speak and be recorded
- **Producer** — can manage the session but isn't recorded
- **Audience** — can watch but not participate
Choose the role from the dropdown next to the link or email field before sending the invite.
- **No app needed** — guests join directly in their browser
- **Send early** — give guests time to test their microphone and camera before the session
- **Multiple guests** — send the same link to multiple people, or use email invites for individual tracking
Ready to start recording with guests? [Get started with Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### All Riverside.fm Features: The Complete Review and How to Use Them
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:42:16.000Z
In this long review I break down every major [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) capability, explain how it fits into a production workflow, show how to combine tools, and offer practical recommendations based on real-world use.
**Riverside.fm features** are best experienced within the context of a **studio**. Riverside organises everything around a virtual [**recording studio**](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/): branding, projects, scheduling, recording, live streaming, and exports. This review explains how the studio model works and why it matters for creators who want a reliable, scalable workflow.
[Best Settings for Your Riverside Studio: A Feature-by-Feature GuideThe best settings for your Riverside recording studio to ensure your podcasts, livestreams, and recordings are of the highest quality.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/)
## Quick Verdict
If you want a single platform that can reliably record high-quality local audio and video, provide modern text-based editing and AI tools, handle live multi-destination streaming, and host your podcast, then these Riverside.fm features offer a compelling one-stop solution.
The platform is not perfect - some UI areas could be clearer, and advanced post-production tools still require external editors - but the overall feature set is cohesive and purpose-built for creators who want to record, edit and publish faster, without having to download and upload files from one tool to the other.
## What Riverside Does
At its core, Riverside.fm features are designed around high-quality content creation. The platform provides:
- Local-first **multi-track recording** (audio and video recorded on each participant's device)
- A modern editor with **text-based editing** and AI-powered cleanup
- Branding controls and bulk assets generation for **social repurposing**
- **Live streaming** to multiple platforms while also recording separate tracks
- **Podcast hosting** and distribution (recently added)
Think of Riverside as a production suite that spans from "hit record" to "publish to platform". The rest of this review breaks down each piece in detail and includes practical notes on limitations, best practices and tips.
## Studio, Projects and Scheduling
The [Riverside studio](https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/) is the central organisational unit. When you sign up you create a studio (the Pro plan gives you one; Business plans allow multiple studios and additional team features). Inside a studio you create **projects**, which behave like enhanced folders: projects can start from a recording, a single uploaded file, or multiple uploaded files assembled into a multitrack edit.
**Riverside.fm features** for scheduling are robust: you can [schedule unlimited sessions](https://cotovan.com/post/schedule-multiple-recording-sessions-in-advance-with-riversidefm/), send invitations, and integrate with calendars.
[Schedule Multiple Recording Sessions in Advance with Riverside.fmRiverside announced that you can schedule an unlimited number of sessions in advance in the studio.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/schedule-multiple-recording-sessions-in-advance-with-riversidefm/)
Riverside integrates with Google Calendar and also supports scheduling through external booking tools like Calendly or Cal.com. When someone books, they get the unique Riverside recording link to join your studio. This link doesn't change.
### Practical scheduling tips
- Use Calendly (or your preferred scheduler) to automate invitation delivery; add the Riverside link as the meeting join URL.
- Add a buffer before and after sessions to avoid rushed uploads or missed backups.
- Label projects clearly - but don't worry if you don't, you can always rename pretty much anything later.
## Recording: Local-First, Multi-Track Reliability
One of the core selling points of Riverside is the recording architecture. The platform records audio and video locally on each participant's machine (desktop app or mobile apps), then uploads those files to the cloud in the background. That means the final high-resolution files are independent of the live internet quality during the session.
Because the recording is local-first:
- Final exports are **high quality** even if the live feed looks pixelated.
- If a guest loses internet, their recording still takes place locally and **uploads later** when back online.
- Uploads can be resumed; guests can **continue uploading days later** via an upload link.
This local-first approach is the reason many creators choose Riverside: reliable, recoverable, high-resolution tracks for every participant.
### How the actual recording looks and what you get
When you hit record, Riverside simultaneously starts a recording on every participant's device. Each participant's audio and video is saved as separate files and later assembled into a synchronized multitrack timeline in your project. That provides massive flexibility in post-production: you can equalise voices individually, swap camera angles, fix lip-sync issues per track and export separate audio stems.
## In-Person & Hybrid Recording
Newer Riverside.fm features include hybrid recording options where you can add in-person guests via audio interfaces or secondary cameras. This lets you blend remote participants with local studio recordings while preserving separate tracks for each person. Riverside supports second-microphone inputs and mobile devices as additional local recorders, which is useful in hybrid interviews or live panel formats.
### Use cases
- One host in a studio, one guest remote - both recorded individually.
- Two people in the same room on separate inputs - useful for in-person interviews that still require isolated tracks.
- Mobile guest joining via the iOS or Android app while you record from the desktop.
## Automatic Assets: Transcripts, Show Notes, Magic Clips
After recording, Riverside automatically generates a transcript and a set of derivative assets. These Riverside.fm features save you hours of manual work:
- **Free automated transcription** for the entire session (speaker‑labelled)
- AI-generated **show notes**, summary, takeaways and suggested episode title
- Magic clips: **short clips** optimised for social platforms with auto-generated titles and layouts
- Magic segments: longer sections extracted as standalone parts suitable for republishing
- **Hooks** and suggested social copy
These auto-created items are not final copy, but they provide a polished starting point. You can edit the show notes, tweak titles and choose which magic clips you want to use. You can also create your own manually, from the main episode edit.
### How to make the automated assets useful
1. Scan the transcript for accuracy and correct speaker assignments.
2. Review suggested titles and hooks; treat suggestions as inspiration rather than finished headlines.
3. Use magic segments for republishing longer highlights or bonus episodes.
## The Editor: Text-Based Editing and AI Tools
Riverside provides a modern, [web-based editor](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/) that blends timeline editing with text-based editing - you edit by changing the transcript directly, which removes the corresponding audio and video segments from the timeline.
[Multi-Track Editing with Riverside.fm: A Feature-by-Feature GuideRiverside’s powerful multi-track editing capabilities allow you to take complete control over your audio and video editing.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/)
### Transcript-first editing
Editing with text makes a familiar workflow for podcasters and video editors who want to rapidly remove filler and tighten dialogue. You can select words or phrases in the transcript, delete them and the editor performs the edit in the timeline. **This is completely non-destructive** because Riverside keeps a record of deleted parts so you can restore sections later if required.
### Major AI tools inside the editor
Some of the most useful editor-level AI tools are:
- **Remove Pauses:** Detects long pauses and shortens or removes them, shaving minutes off your episode.
- **Remove Filler Words:** Removes "ums", "uhs" and filler tokens with multiple handling modes.
- **Find Fluff:** Detects internal chatter and technical interruptions and suggests removal.
- **Magic Audio:** AI-based noise reduction and audio levelling that can be applied per-track with adjustable intensity.
- **Smart Mute:** Helps reduce mic bleed and cross-talk by automatically muting silent participant segments per-track.
These tools run across the entire episode, so the recommended workflow is to run the AI passes first to save time and then manually review the episode to ensure no unintended cuts were made. No AI is perfect: the transcript can miss nuances and edits can create awkward transitions if not reviewed.
### Smart ways to apply AI tools
1. Run Remove Pauses with conservative thresholds, then listen to flagged sections.
2. Apply Filler Word removal, but keep a fallback by viewing deleted parts - Riverside lets you restore easily.
3. Use Magic Audio per track: if your guest has noisy audio, apply stronger cleaning to their track only.
## Co-Creator: Your AI Assistant
Riverside’s Co-Creator is an AI assistant that has access to your project and can generate thumbnails, captions, magic clips or summaries on demand. It works at both project and edit levels, and you can prompt it with tasks like "generate a 150-word blog post from this recording" or "create 5 social captions".
At the time of review, the co-creator is a helpful automation but still feels like a beta: prompts can be inconsistent, and the ability to save commonly used prompts would be a welcome improvement. Treat the co-creator as a productivity assistant rather than an autopilot editor.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Brand Kit and Bulk Styling
One of the standout **Riverside.fm features** is the [Brand Kit](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/). This studio-level tool lets you upload logos, define brand colours, pick caption styles, and add intros/outros for multiple aspect ratios (16:9, 9:16, 1:1).
[Apply Branding with One Click in Riverside.fm Brand KitRiverside has introduced a new feature in their editor, allowing you to apply a brand kit to your edits in just one click.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/)
Once configured, the brand kit can be applied to multiple assets and bulk-generated clips so your social content keeps a consistent look.
When you apply the brand to an edit, Riverside automatically inserts the logo, caption style and brand background into the export. This is a single-click way to turn raw footage into branded content - hugely valuable if you repurpose content across platforms.
### Practical brand kit tips
- Prepare three versions of your intro: short (for reels/shorts), medium (for social) and long (for full episodes).
- Design caption styles for each aspect ratio
- Use background colour options sparingly; test contrast with captions to preserve readability.
## Scenes, Layouts and Smart Layouts
Riverside’s layout tools let you control how tracks appear visually. You can manually select grid, split-screen, picture-in-picture or full-screen views and create scenes that split your timeline into camera-angle sections.
Alternatively, **Smart Layout** automates camera switching using conversation rhythm and speaker activity. Of course, after Smart Layout is applied, you can still tweak scenes and layouts to your own taste.
Smart Layout analyses speech and decides when to switch to full-screen for a single person or keep side-by-side views during fast exchanges. You can set the rhythm - conservative or aggressive - to avoid too many cuts.
### How to use scenes effectively
1. Apply Smart Layout first, then make changes to the layouts or scene boundaries when you review the entire episode.
2. Create side-by-side scenes for conversational sections and full-screen for longer monologues.
3. Use scene cuts (Shift + S) to split and refine camera changes manually where auto-switching doesn’t produce the desired effect.
4. You can create specific scenes with picture-in-picture and full screen screen share if you share your screen or run a presentation during your recording.
## Per-Track Controls and Audio Editing
Because Riverside records separate tracks, the editor exposes per-track controls:
- Volume sliders and trims
- Per-track Magic Audio cleaning and equaliser with custom curves
- Smart mute and isolation options to reduce background noise
- Per-track eye contact correction and lip-sync offset adjustments
The ability to **fix lip-sync** by nudging audio a few milliseconds is invaluable. Differences in sample rates or hardware can introduce small delays; being able to correct them per track avoids complex exports to external editors.
## Captions, Titles and Text Overlays
Riverside’s caption system ties into the transcript and **Brand Kit**. You can design caption presets, choose fonts, set animations, and control the number of lines of text. Caption styles can be applied globally or per project, and Riverside renders them both for full-length exports and for social clips.
Text overlays (titles, speaker names, body text) are flexible and can be recreated across scenes and exports.
## Uploads, Stock Library and AI Enhancements
The Uploads section acts as a media library inside your studio. You can store logos, intros, outros, music files and b-roll. Riverside also includes a searchable stock media library for B-roll images or video that you can import directly into projects.
Riverside offers AI-based features that convert images into video or generate B-roll from scratch. These features require AI credits - a separate purchase - so if you plan to use AI generation heavily, budget for credits on top of your subscription.
## Music Library and Audio Fading
There is a built-in music library with mood tags. The player lacks a robust search in some parts of the UI, but you can preview and add tracks to your timeline, adjust volume and apply fades. I’d like to see better filtering and search in future iterations.
## Exporting, Integrations and XML Timeline Export
Riverside supports exports in high quality up to 4K. You can export composite videos, audio-only (MP3/WAV), and a normalized audio master with background noise removal.
There’s also a useful XML export that carries timeline cuts, markers and basic metadata to external editing systems - valuable if you prefer colour grading or advanced effects in another NLE.
Note: XML timeline export is available only on certain plans (Business), so check your plan if you need to round-trip edits into DaVinci Resolve, Premiere Pro, Final Cut or similar.
### Direct Uploads to Platforms
Riverside gives you direct-publish capabilities. After exporting a final file, you can upload directly from Riverside to a number of platforms and create drafts on YouTube automatically. This removes one step in the publish pipeline and helps speed up distribution.
## Live Streaming: Multi-Destination and Studio Chat
Live streaming is one of the major differentiators in **Riverside.fm features**. With the live package you can stream to multiple destinations simultaneously - YouTube, Facebook, LinkedIn, X (Twitter), Twitch, TikTok and Custom RTMP endpoints. You can also stream to Riverside’s own “public streaming” page where viewers can chat and call in.
Important aspects:
- Simultaneous **multi-destination streaming** plus local recording of multi-tracks.
- Incoming **chat consolidation** for supported platforms - chat messages show inside the studio so you can interact without switching dashboards.
- **Custom RTMP** is useful for platforms that don’t have an integration or for streaming into scheduled events on YouTube.
Because Riverside records local, high-quality tracks while streaming, you get the immediacy of live video plus the flexibility of post-production - a significant workflow advantage over many streaming-only systems. I use this all the time, for example to repurpose live Q&A Sessions into separate polished videos [for my membership](https://mediamakers.club/?ref=cotovan.com).
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Podcast Hosting and Distribution
A recent addition to **Riverside.fm features** is native podcast hosting. You can create a podcast, upload episodes, and have Riverside distribute to podcast directories. The platform also allows importing existing podcasts so you can migrate feeds.
Podcast hosting integrated with recording and editing removes the need to stitch together multiple tools for recording, editing, and publishing. If you want fewer logins and a single billing relationship, this can simplify operations.
## Pricing, Plans and What You Actually Get
[Riverside’s pricing](https://riverside.com/pricing?ref=cotovan.com) tiers typically include a free trial or limited free version, a Pro plan, and Business-level tiers with additional seats, productions, and enterprise-level features.
Add-ons like **Live streaming** and **Webinar functionality** require different plans or separate purchases; AI credits are bought separately for advanced AI generation. Exact pricing can change, so always consult [the latest plan matrix](https://riverside.com/pricing?ref=cotovan.com).
Pricing advice:
- If you record regularly and need reliable multi-track archives, Pro is usually a good value.
- If you manage teams, client projects, or need productions across multiple brands, consider Business for its multi-studio and team features.
- Buy AI credits incrementally to test workflows before committing to heavy usage.
## Pros and Cons - Honest Assessment
### Pros
- **Reliable local-first recording:** I never lost a recording in years. I also recommend it to my clients.
- **Integrated editor:** Transcript-based editing plus per-track control reduces the time from raw to publishable content.
- **Brand kit and smart asset generation:** Fast, consistent social repurposing and bulk branding.
- **Live streaming with local recording:** Stream to multiple platforms while preserving high-quality tracks. Opens up possibilities for repurposing.
- **Podcast hosting:** Simplifies end-to-end publishing.
### Cons
- **AI imperfections:** The co-creator and some auto-edits still need human oversight.
- **Search and media management:** Music and stock search and discovery could be improved.
- **Advanced post-production:** For colour grading or motion graphics you may still need an external NLE; XML export is plan-limited.
## Who Should Use Riverside?
**Riverside.fm features** fit different creator profiles. Here’s a quick guide:
- **Podcasters** \- Especially interview-based shows. Isolated tracks, transcript editing and podcast hosting make Riverside a smart choice for end-to-end production.
- **Video producers and YouTubers** \- If you do talk shows, interviews or long-form content and want time savings with editing and auto assets.
- **Online coaches and educators** \- Hybrid recordings, multi-destination live streaming and repurposing clips for courses add value.
- **You can easily ditch Zoom** for your meetings and get much higher quality video, not to mention the separate video tracks, join with a single link, AI summaries and integration with your scheduling platform.
- **Small agencies and teams** \- Business features like productions and team roles support collaborative workflows.
- **Live streamers who need post-production** \- If you stream but want the ability to repurpose a high-quality recorded archive, Riverside offers the best of both worlds.
## Recommended Workflow for Most Creators
Below is a practical workflow that makes the most of **Riverside.fm features**:
1. **Plan and schedule:** Create a project in your studio, schedule the session and send the Riverside invite through your calendar or booking tool.
2. **Record locally:** Use the desktop app for best quality; ask guests to use headphones to reduce bleed if they have poor acoustics.
3. **Run the AI passes:** After recording, run Remove Pauses, Remove Filler Words, and Magic Audio to save time. Fix the audio/video sync if you need to.
4. **Manual polish:** Listen through the edit, restore any parts removed in error, tidy the scene changes.
5. **Branding and assets:** Apply your Brand Kit, assemble your final episode with intro, outro. Generate Magic Clips and Magic Segments, and tweak thumbnails and captions.
6. **Export and publish:** Export masters in the required formats; upload directly to platforms via Riverside or download and publish from your podcast host.
## Practical Tips and Gotchas
- **Prefer everyone using headphones if possible:** This will avoid echo, even though Riverside has echo cancellation built in. Headphones + echo cancellation off ensures nobody is 'silenced' when interrupted.
- **Ask guests to upload if they leave:** If a guest disconnects before upload completes, send them the resume upload link so the files finish later.
- **Review AI edits:** Always listen through the episode before publishing - AI saves time but human oversight prevents awkward cuts.
- **Test camera layouts:** Smart Layout is great, but tweak the rhythm to avoid overly frequent switches on rapid-fire conversations.
## Final Recommendation
[Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) isa strong contender for creators wanting an integrated recording-to-publish workflow. Reliability is the headline: local-first, multi-track recordings combined with a powerful editor and built-in branding tools create a smooth path from session to publishable asset.
If you are a solo podcaster, a small production team or a creator who values time-saving automation and consistent branding, Riverside will likely reduce friction and increase output.
If you rely heavily on advanced colour grading, VFX or an elaborate NLE pipeline, you will still need to download the raw recordings from Riverside or export into those tools for final polish - but Riverside will accelerate the upstream parts of production and keep your raw files organised.
## Closing Thoughts
Over the past few years, **Riverside.fm features** have matured from a reliable recording platform into an integrated production suite. The biggest wins are reliability of recording, the productivity gains from transcript-based editing and the brand automation that makes finishing your edited work a two-click process, and repurposing efficient.
The platform is not a replacement for every single advanced tool in your post-production chain, but for most creators producing interviews, lessons, coaching sessions and talk shows, it is perfect!
Try the platform with small projects first, confirm which plan aligns with your needs, and integrate it into your publishing workflow for the fastest gains.
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Create Masks in Camtasia: Media Matte Explained
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-masks-camtasia-media-matte-explained/
Last updated: 2026-06-18T12:18:50.000Z
The **Media Matte** effect in Camtasia is one of the most powerful visual effects available, yet its name can be a bit misleading. In simple terms, Media Matte is just a **mask** — it lets you show only a specific portion of your video or image by placing a shape on top of it and telling Camtasia to treat that shape as a transparent window.
In this guide, you'll learn how to create masks using the Media Matte effect, understand the different masking modes (Alpha, Alpha Invert, Luminosity), animate content inside a mask, and add a visible border frame around your masked area.
## What Is Media Matte in Camtasia?
Media Matte is Camtasia's masking feature. Despite the technical-sounding name, it works exactly like a mask: you place an object (like a rectangle) on top of your media, apply the Media Matte effect, and Camtasia turns that shape into a transparent viewport that reveals only the content underneath it.
Start with any image or video on your Camtasia canvas — here we're using a firefighter photo as our example
## Step 1: Add a Shape as Your Mask
The first step is to add a shape that will become your mask. Go to the **Annotations** panel (or Shapes), pick any shape — a rectangle works perfectly — and place it on your canvas on top of the area you want to reveal.
The key rule: **the mask shape must be on a track above the content** you want to mask in the timeline. This layering order is what tells Camtasia which object is the mask and which is the content being masked.
Add a rectangle shape from the Annotations/Shapes panel and position it over the area you want to reveal
## Step 2: Apply the Media Matte Effect
With your shape in place, go to **Visual Effects** in the left panel and find **Media Matte**. Drag it onto your rectangle shape. The moment you apply it, the rectangle visually disappears — it has become a transparent mask. You'll still see it on the timeline, but on the canvas it now acts as a window into the content below.
Find Media Matte in the Visual Effects panel — drag it onto your shape to turn it into a mask
After applying Media Matte, the rectangle becomes a transparent viewport — only the content inside the shape is visible
You can move the mask around on the canvas to reposition the viewport. You can also resize it to reveal more or less of the underlying content. The mask is still a distinct, independent object — it just behaves transparently now.
## Understanding Mask Modes: Alpha vs. Alpha Invert
Media Matte has four modes, but the two most useful are:
- **Alpha** (default) — wherever the mask shape is, you can see through to the content below. Everything outside the shape is hidden.
- **Alpha Invert** — the opposite. Wherever the mask shape is, the content is hidden. Everything outside the shape remains visible. Think of it as poking a hole through your content.
There are also **Luminosity** and **Luminosity Invert** modes, which base the mask on brightness values rather than shape boundaries — useful for more advanced compositing, but less commonly needed for everyday editing.
The Mode dropdown lets you switch between Alpha (see through the mask) and Alpha Invert (hide what's under the mask)
Alpha Invert mode punches a hole through the content — here the blue canvas background shows through where the mask shape is
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Animating Content Inside a Mask
One of the best things about Media Matte masks is that you can animate the content independently. For example, you can add a zoom animation to your image while keeping the mask in a fixed position. The image will scale and move within the mask boundaries, creating a clean, professional-looking effect.
To do this:
1. Select the **content layer** (the image or video being masked), not the mask itself
2. Go to the **Animations** panel and add a Custom animation
3. Set your end keyframe (e.g., zoom in, pan to the side)
4. The content animates while staying constrained within the mask area
The mask and the content don't need to be grouped for this to work — the mask just needs to be on the track directly above.
## Adding a Visible Border Around Your Mask
A common need is to have a visible border or frame around your masked area. However, if you try adding an outline directly to the mask shape, it won't work as expected — the border becomes part of the mask itself and simply makes the transparent area larger.
The solution is to **duplicate the mask shape** and use the copy as a frame:
1. **Duplicate** the mask shape (Ctrl+D or Ctrl+C / Ctrl+V)
2. On the duplicate, **remove the Media Matte effect** from the Properties panel
3. Set the duplicate's **fill opacity to 0%** (fully transparent fill)
4. Add an **outline/border** with your desired color and thickness
5. Position it on a track above the mask so the border is visible
A visible green border frame created by duplicating the mask shape and adding an outline without fill
Now you have three layers working together:
- **Top track:** The border frame (duplicate shape, no fill, with outline)
- **Middle track:** The mask (original shape with Media Matte applied)
- **Bottom track:** The content (your image or video)
## Grouping and Final Tips
Once you're happy with the result, select all three elements and press **Ctrl+G** to group them. This creates a single grouped object on the timeline that you can move, resize, and reposition as one unit while maintaining all the masking behavior.
Group all elements (Ctrl+G) for a clean, portable masked object you can move and resize freely
A few important things to remember:
- **Match durations:** Make sure your mask, border frame, and content clips all end at the same point on the timeline. If the mask ends before the content, the full unmasked content will become visible.
- **Track order matters:** The mask shape must always be on a track directly above the content it's masking.
- **Any shape works:** You're not limited to rectangles — circles, stars, custom shapes, and even text can be used as masks with Media Matte.
## Watch the Full Tutorial
For a complete step-by-step walkthrough with live demonstrations, watch the full video: [How to Create Masks in Camtasia | Media Matte Explained](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wesPr5wjl7M&ref=cotovan.com)
Want to try Camtasia? [Get Camtasia here](https://cotovan.com/camtasia).
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Descript pricing changes: What You Need to Know!
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-pricing-media-minutes-ai-credits-topups/
Last updated: 2025-11-11T13:21:24.000Z
In this [Descript update](https://cotovan.com/descript) I explain exactly what changed, how the new model works, how it affects common workflows, how the new top-ups and AI credits are priced, and what realistic alternatives exist if you decide to move away from Descript.
## Overview: What happened with Descript pricing changes
In short: **Descript moved from transcription-minute plans to media-minute plans and introduced purchasable “top-ups” for both media minutes and AI credits.**
That sounds straightforward, but the devil is in the details. The new billing model counts every file you upload as media minutes. It also meters AI-driven operations (studio sound, filler removal, AI actions, avatar generation, etc.) against a monthly AI credit allowance. If you run out, you must buy top-ups - but top-ups are shared at the drive level, carry over for up to 12 months, and are only available on paid Creator and Business plans.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Old model vs new model - the core difference
Before the change, Descript plans were measured in transcription minutes: you paid for the amount of audio you wanted transcribed. Plans like Hobbyist (10 hours), Creator (30 hours), and Business (40 hours) made it simple: your quota measured what you transcribed.
**The old Descript plans were defined by transcription minutes - here's the breakdown.*
That approach aligned cost to the most compute-heavy feature - automatic transcription - and left other file uploads and editing behaviours largely unrestricted.
With the Descript pricing changes, everything is now measured in media minutes - in other words, how many minutes of media you upload. That subtle shift changes how many minutes a single project consumes because now multiple files for the same content count multiple times. Upload two files for the same hour of content? That’s two media minutes per minute of content, doubling the quota drain.
## Why this matters: real-world workflow examples
The difference is easiest to see with examples.
Imagine a one-hour, two-person interview recorded on Zoom as a single mixed file. Under the old model you would upload the cleaned audio and transcribe one hour - one hour from your transcription allowance.
Under the new Descript pricing changes, if you upload multiple files (host track + guest track + cleaned audio + camera footage + B-roll), each file counts against your media minutes.
Here's a realistic workflow many creators use:
- Zoom mixed recording - 60 minutes uploaded = 60 media minutes
- Two separate camera files - 2 × 60 = 120 media minutes
- Two videos + Two cleaned audio files (processed outside Descript, e.g., in [Auphonic](https://cotovan.com/auphonic)) - 2 × 60 = 120 media minutes
That dramatic increase is a core complaint many long-time users have highlighted since the announcement.
How media minutes add up - one file equals one hour, two files equal two hours.
## AI features are now metered - what uses credits
Another major change in the Descript pricing changes is that many AI-powered features that were previously included on paid plans are now metered via an AI credit balance. Examples of features that now consume AI credits include:
- Studio Sound (audio enhancement)
- Filler words removal (really!?)
- Shortening gaps (silence removal)
- Eye contact correction (video)
- AI Actions and the new AI chat assistant (Underlord)
- Generative features like avatar videos and AI-generated B-roll images
Previously, if you were on a paid plan, many of these were “free” to use (or included in plan allowances). Under the new regime each operation reduces your monthly AI credit balance. If you run out of credits, your options are to either stop using the features or purchase additional AI credits via top-ups.
The updated pricing table - AI credits are now a metered line item.
### Why Descript says they did this
Descript’s stated rationale is this: storing and processing media and running AI compute costs money. Bandwidth, cloud storage, and GPU compute for AI models are expensive. Metering media uploads and AI usage makes those costs more closely aligned with the company’s expenses.
The company also argues the change helps customers who use minimal features pay less, and it gives heavy users a path to cover spikes in usage via top-ups.
That rationale makes business sense, but the implementation impacts long-standing user expectations and common workflows in ways that feel punitive to many creators who rely on multi-track files and external audio processing.
## Top-ups and pricing breakdown
Under the Descript pricing changes, two types of top-ups are available: media top-ups (extra media minutes) and AI credit top-ups. Important details:
- Top-ups are available **only on the Creator and Business plans** (they are not available for Free or Hobbyist plans).
- Top-ups are applied at the **drive (workspace) level** \- they are shared by everyone on the team and are not per-seat.
- Descript draws from the **included monthly quota first**, then uses purchased top-ups.
- Top-ups **roll over month to month** but **expire after 12 months**.
### Media top-up tiers
- 5 hours (300 minutes) for $25 - $5 per hour
- 20 hours (1,200 minutes) for $80 - $4 per hour
- 50 hours (3,000 minutes) for $150 - $3 per hour
### AI credit top-up tiers
- 350 credits for $35 - \~10¢ per credit
- 1,000 credits for $80 - \~8¢ per credit
- 4,000 credits for $200 - \~5¢ per credit
How many credits a specific operation uses is not always obvious from the interface. Descript has introduced different AI models and it’s reasonable to assume that different models and features consume credits at different rates.
That uncertainty makes budgeting AI usage more difficult for creators who run regular workflows and expect predictable costs.
Descript media top-up tiers and pricing for quick reference.
## Example cost comparison for a single project
To make the numbers concrete: a one-hour, two-person interview where you upload both microphones and two cleaned audio tracks counts as four hours of media under the new rules.
If you’ve used up your included quota and must buy a media top-up, at the lowest bulk rate ($3/hr) that’s $12 for that project; at the standard $5/hr top-up rate it’s $20.
That’s on top of your subscription.
Multiply by multiple episodes per month and the math quickly becomes painful for creators and podcasters who've made Descript their core editing solution.
For a weekly one-hour interview with similar assets, you could be spending at least an extra $80 per month on top-ups depending on the tier and usage - a non-trivial increase for independent creators.
## Who is likely affected by the Descript pricing changes?
Descript claims only a small percentage of its user base (around 2%) will be affected by quotas. Whether that’s accurate depends on how the user base is distributed. Who is most likely to feel the impact?
- **Pro and power users** who upload multi-track recordings, multi-camera video, and separate stems for each guest.
- People and teams who **preprocess audio in external tools** ([Auphonic](https://cotovan.com/auphonic), iZotope RX) and then upload both raw and processed files into Descript.
- Video creators who upload **multiple B-roll files, intros, outros**, and repetitive assets across projects.
- **Agencies or teams** who share a workspace drive and therefore share top-ups.
Who is less affected? Users who upload a single mixed file per episode and rely on transcript-based editing primarily. If your workflow is “upload one cleaned audio file, transcribe, edit out filler words, export,” you may notice little change unless your total monthly media minutes exceed your plan.
## Community reaction and legacy user concerns
The reaction in Descript’s Discord, Facebook groups, and other creator communities has been strong. Many long-time users are frustrated because:
- Descript had a history of grandfathering old plans for long-time users; this time they announced a **migration of everyone to the new pricing** by the end of 2025.
- Features that were **previously included are now metered**, changing the value proposition of paid plans.
- The media-minute model **penalizes common multi-file workflows**.
Descript has said it surveyed existing users and that users were "broadly happy with the changes." From the public discourse I’ve observed, that claim does not reflect the broader sentiment among long-term power users and teams that rely on multi-track and multi-file workflows.
Riverside.fm - the strongest contender I recommend.
## Alternatives - is there a better option?
If the new Descript pricing changes push you to look elsewhere, a few alternatives are worth considering. I’ll focus on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) since it’s the one I discuss most frequently and it’s the closest competitor for many creators.
### Riverside.fm - the strongest contender
Riverside is not a direct one-to-one replacement for everything Descript provides yet, but it has made rapid progress and now offers many overlapping features:
- High-quality **remote and in-person recording** with local tracks
- **Transcript-based editing** tools
- Automatic **clip extraction for social media**
- **Intro/outro automation** and **branding** options
- **Filler word and silence removal**
- Built-in **AI assistant** features (Co-Creator)
Riverside’s current gap relative to Descript is multi-track assembly and a Descript-like sequence/timeline where you can freely combine and assemble arbitrary files in a multi-track editing environment.
Riverside has announced they’re working on improvements in that area, and many creators already find Riverside covers most of their recording and basic editing needs.
I recently [reviewed all of Riverside's functions](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/) (and [published a video](https://youtu.be/OOTXdKjkI2Q?ref=cotovan.com)) going through all of its functionality, if you want to check it out and see if it would be a good replacement for your Descript workflows:
[Riverside.fm Review: Complete Feature Guide for Podcasters & CreatorsRiverside.fm features have evolved rapidly over the last couple of years. What started as a recording-first tool is now a full end-to-end production platform for podcasters, YouTubers, course creators, coaches and teams.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-features-complete-review-for-podcasters-creators/)
### Other alternatives to consider
- Stable of DAWs and NLEs (Reaper, Adobe Audition, Premiere Pro) plus cloud transcription services - more manual but controllable costs.
- [ElevenLabs](https://cotovan.com/elevenlabs), Otter.ai and Sonix for transcription (pay per minute) combined with a simple text-based editor if that suits your workflow.
- Smaller tools and new entrants that focus on specific parts of the workflow (audio cleaning, AI noise reduction, clip extraction).
- Alternative to Studio Sound: Magic Audio from [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), [Auphonic](https://cotovan.com/auphonic), Adobe Voice Enhance, DaVinci Resolve Voice Isolation (paid).
## Pros and cons of the new Descript pricing changes
### Pros
- Costs are now more directly tied to media storage and AI compute - potentially more sustainable for Descript as a business.
- Top-ups let you cover short-term spikes rather than permanently upgrading your plan.
- Top-ups roll over and are shared at the drive level, which can help if a team pools resources.
### Cons
- Media-minute accounting **penalizes multi-file workflows** and common pro-level practices (multiple camera angles, separate stems, cleaned files).
- Features that **used to be part of a plan** are now metered through AI credits, reducing predictability of monthly costs.
- Top-ups are **only on Creator and Business** plans, locking Hobbyist and Free users out of emergency purchases.
- **Grandfathered and long-term users** will be migrated to the new model by end of 2025 - no special treatment.
- **Unclear and inconsistent visibility** on how many AI credits specific actions consume makes budgeting harder.
## Practical recommendations - how to respond
If you use Descript, here are practical steps to decide your next move:
1. Audit your recent usage. Contact Descript support (help.descript.com) and ask for your media and AI consumption for the last 2–3 months. This helps estimate whether you’ll exceed your new quotas. Mine does... by a lot!
2. Map your workflow. Do you upload multiple files per episode? Do you preprocess audio externally? If so, calculate the new media-minute cost for your typical project and see if you can merge audio + video into a single file before you upload. [Losslesscut](https://cotovan.com/tag/losslesscut/) does this.
3. Consider alternatives. [Test Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) or other services to see if they can replicate your essential workflow. Riverside is an especially strong contender if you primarily need recording, transcript editing, and clip exports.
4. Think about passing the cost on. If you provide services to clients, consider adjusting pricing or including a “platform fee” to recover additional tool costs.
5. Experiment with optimization. Could you switch to uploading a single mixed track? Could you avoid uploading raw + processed files? Small workflow changes can reduce media usage immediately.
6. Decide on a commitment window. If you’re unsure, you might keep your Descript subscription while piloting alternatives for a month to compare total costs and productivity impact. You might still have some time if you are on a yearly plan. Descript said they are only going to migrate you on your next billing cycle.
## Final recommendation
The [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) pricing changes are not inherently wrong from a business perspective - storage and AI compute cost real money - but the implementation changes the economics for creators who use multi-file workflows and those who've been with Descript from day 1.
If your usage profile is simple (single-file uploads, light AI use), you may be largely unaffected. If you’re a pro user uploading multiple tracks, cleaning audio externally, or using generative features frequently, you'll likely face higher costs.
My recommendation is to audit your usage now, contact Descript support for a usage report, and run a short pilot with an alternative (such as [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside)) to see whether switching is feasible. This lets you make an informed decision rather than a reactive one.
## Closing thoughts
The Descript pricing changes mark a significant shift in how the product is monetized. Counting media minutes rather than transcription minutes and metering many AI features introduces new friction for creators with established multi-file workflows. For some users, the change will be a minor adjustment. For others, it will be a catalyst to re-evaluate tools and workflows.
I also feel like Descript's focus is shifting towards enterprise more and away from solo creators or small agencies. That's where the money are, right
I understand the economics behind the decision, but from a user-experience perspective this feels like a loss of flexibility. If you're a creator or a team using Descript often, do the homework now - get your usage numbers, estimate the cost impact, and try an alternative if needed. You don’t want to be surprised by a higher invoice months into the migration.
If you found this breakdown helpful, consider testing your current usage against the new Descript pricing changes and planning a month-long alternative pilot. The right choice depends on your workflow, frequency, and willingness to adapt.
Have questions or want a walkthrough of estimating your monthly media-minute usage? Drop a note in the comments below the video or reach out to Descript support for your specific usage breakdown.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Descript Changing Your Audio Levels? Here's How to Fix It
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-changing-your-audio-levels-heres-how-to-fix-it/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T20:55:29.000Z
You import audio or video into Descript and suddenly the volume is different from what you recorded. Maybe it's louder, maybe quieter — but it's definitely not what you expected. This is Descript's automatic volume leveling at work, and it catches a lot of people off guard.
Here are three places where Descript controls your audio levels, and how to fix each one.
## Step 1: Check Account-Wide Settings
Descript has a global toggle called **"Automatic volume levels"** buried in your account settings. When this is enabled, every new project you create will automatically level all clips on import.
To find it:
1. Click the **hamburger menu** (☰) in the top-left corner
2. Go to **Settings**
3. Scroll down to the **Advanced** section
4. Look for **"Automatic volume levels"**
The tooltip confirms exactly what it does: *"If on, new projects will have auto-leveling enabled, which applies -16dB loudness normalization to all new clips. This can be overridden in each project's settings."*
If you don't want Descript touching your audio levels globally, **toggle this off**. This only affects new projects — existing ones keep their current setting.
The "Automatic volume levels" toggle in Account Settings — hover over the info icon to see the -16dB normalization tooltip
## Step 2: Check Project-Level Settings
Even if you turn off the global setting, individual projects can still have auto-leveling enabled. This is the per-project override.
To check, when you're inside a project:
1. Go to **File → Project settings** (or use the keyboard shortcut)
2. Look for **"Perform automatic leveling on clips"**
3. The description says: *"Automatic leveling is done after import and record."*
The tooltip here is even more specific: *"Applies -16dB loudness normalization to clips."*
If this toggle is on and you don't want it, switch it off and click **Save changes**. Note that this won't undo leveling already applied to existing clips in the project — it only affects new imports and recordings from this point forward.
Open File → Project settings to access per-project audio leveling controls
## Step 3: Check Export Normalization
There's one more place where Descript can change your audio levels: the **export settings**. Even if you've turned off auto-leveling everywhere else, the export panel has its own normalization setting.
When you export:
1. Click **Export**
2. Choose your destination (Local export, Descript web link, YouTube, etc.)
3. Expand the **Advanced** section
4. Look for **"Normalize volume"** — it defaults to **\-16 LUFS**
This applies loudness normalization to your final export. If you want your export to match exactly what you hear in the editor (with no additional processing), you may want to adjust or disable this setting.
That said, -16 LUFS is a reasonable target for most content — it's the standard for platforms like YouTube and most podcast directories. Only change this if you have a specific reason to.
The Export Advanced panel — "Normalize volume: -16 LUFS" applies final loudness normalization to your export
## Which Setting Should You Use?
Here's a quick decision guide:
- **You want consistent levels across all projects** → Leave the account-wide setting ON. Descript normalizes everything to -16dB on import — no manual leveling needed.
- **You want control per project** → Turn OFF the account setting, then enable/disable leveling in each project's settings as needed.
- **You handle audio leveling yourself** (e.g., with [Auphonic](https://cotovan.com/auphonic) or another tool) → Turn OFF both the account and project settings, and review the export normalization setting.
- **Your exported audio sounds different from the editor** → Check the export "Normalize volume" setting — it may be applying additional normalization on top of what you've already done.
## Watch the Full Tutorial
[Descript Changing Your Audio Levels? Fix It in 3 Simple Steps](https://youtu.be/k705KxL-jDI?ref=cotovan.com) — Full walkthrough on YouTube (5 min)
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Descript Export button is disabled: How I Fix the Export Button When It’s Greyed Out
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-export-button-greyed-out-fix/
Last updated: 2025-11-11T18:19:30.000Z
I walk you through the exact steps I take when the export option is greyed out and you cannot download your final project. If you are seeing the message that the Descript Export button is disabled, this article will give you a clear, step by step process to identify the root cause and resolve it without losing your edits.
## Outline
- Step 1: Identify the export issue
- Step 2: Check the file panel for problematic files
- Step 3: Replace the problematic file from disk
- Step 4: Reload or restart Descript if needed
- Step 5: Confirm export and additional troubleshooting tips
## Step 1: Identify the export issue
The first sign that something is wrong is simple: the export button is greyed out. You open the export dialog, switch to local export, toggle formats, and nothing becomes available. When the Descript Export button is disabled, the app will not allow you to begin a download. My rule of thumb is to stop and check the project files before attempting more complex fixes.
> "The export button is grayed out."
Descript relies on cloud uploads even when you are working on the desktop app. The local copy lets you edit, but for final renders and some processing steps, Descript needs the cloud copy to be complete. When any file in the project has not finished uploading or has an upload error, the system can prevent export. If the Descript Export button is disabled, it often means one of the project files has not uploaded or processed correctly.
## Step 2: Check the file panel for problematic files
Open the project area in the top right corner and choose Files. This panel lists every asset you have used in the project. Look for these indicators:
- A file icon with a small spinning circle
- A file showing 0% uploaded
- An explicit warning sign next to the filename
In my case I discovered a song showing 0% upload. Even though I had edited with that music file and everything worked locally, the audio had not finished uploading to Descript’s cloud. The presence of a stalled asset frequently causes the Descript Export button is disabled behavior. When you hover over the file icon, Descript may show upload progress or a status message such as 0% uploaded.
Note that a failed upload does not always show a bright red error. Sometimes the indicator is subtle—a spinner or a stuck percentage—so inspect every asset carefully. If you do not see any obvious problems, expand the Files list, look at media types (audio, video, images), and check any newly added assets first. Those are the ones most likely to be incomplete.
## Step 3: Replace the problematic file from disk
If a file is stalled, my preferred fix is to replace that file with a fresh copy from my local drive. This typically preserves your edits. Descript matches the file to the project locations where it is used, so your cuts, transcriptions, and placements remain intact as long as the replacement matches the original length.
1. Open Project → Files and locate the problematic file.
2. Right click on the file and choose Replace file.
3. Use the Choose file dialog to select the same file from your disk.
4. Confirm Replace and let Descript attempt to upload the new copy.
Important: you cannot replace a file with a different file that has a different duration. Descript checks the length and will only accept a replacement that matches. That restriction is what allows the platform to keep edits aligned. When I replaced the stalled music file with the same-length local copy, Descript accepted it and began uploading immediately. After that upload started properly, the Descript Export button is disabled condition resolved in many cases.
Replacing a file works because the app retains local edits while attempting to resubmit the asset to the cloud. The script updates the project to reference the new cloud resource once the upload completes. In my experience this preserves everything: cuts, fades, transcriptions, and position markers.
## Step 4: Reload or restart Descript if the upload still stalls
Sometimes replacing the file is enough. Sometimes you need to force the application to reload its state. If the Descript Export button is disabled after replacing a stalled asset, do the following:
1. Use Command+Shift+R on Mac or Control+Shift+R on Windows to reload the app.
2. If you prefer, use the Window menu and choose Reload (on both Mac and Windows this will reset the UI state).
3. If prompted with a warning about unsaved changes, proceed—most project changes are synced to the cloud except for the problematic file.
After reloading, check the Files panel again. The replaced file should no longer show the spinner or the 0% label. If Descript completed the upload during the reload, the Descript Export button is disabled state should clear. I have used reload in several situations where the UI did not recognize a resumed upload until the app restarted its session.
## Step 5: Confirm export and additional troubleshooting tips
Once the problematic asset is uploaded and the UI reflects that change, open Export again. The export button should now be active and allow you to choose format, resolution, and either cloud or local export.
If the export button remains disabled after replacing the file and reloading, try these additional checks:
- Verify that your internet connection is stable and that firewall rules are not blocking Descript.
- Check permissions for the specific file on your disk. If Descript cannot read the file your replacement may not upload.
- Ensure no other assets in the project are stuck. Sometimes multiple files need attention.
- Try signing out and back in to reset your cloud session.
- If none of the above resolve the problem, export a copy of your project or use the project duplicate feature and attempt export from the duplicated project.
For most users the Descript Export button is disabled issue resolves by locating the stalled file, replacing it with a same-length local copy, and reloading the app. That workflow prevents data loss and keeps your edits intact. When I follow these steps, the edits, transcriptions and placements remain where they were, and the export proceeds without forcing me to rebuild the project.
## Troubleshooting checklist
- Look for spinners, warning icons, or 0% upload markers in Project → Files.
- Replace stalled files with the same-length local copy through the right click Replace file option.
- Reload the application using Command+Shift+R or Control+Shift+R if the UI does not update.
- Confirm that exports succeed once the offending asset is uploaded.
- Use export diagnostics such as attempting a short clip export to test whether the platform will render other content.
## Why this happens and how to avoid it
Descript operates as a hybrid local/cloud editor. Your edits are made locally but several operations depend on cloud processing. A single stalled file can block the export pipeline. The most common causes I see are:
- Intermittent network interruptions while a large audio or music file uploads.
- Permission restrictions on the file that prevent Descript from reading the replacement.
- Temporary cloud processing errors on Descript’s side that stall a file state.
To reduce the chance you encounter the Descript Export button is disabled problem, adopt these practices:
- Upload critical assets early and let them fully process before making heavy edits.
- Keep local backups of any music or large audio files used in projects.
- Match replacement file length exactly if you need to swap a file.
- Monitor the Files panel during long editing sessions so you can catch stalls early.
## Closing thoughts
When the Descript Export button is disabled it is usually a symptom, not a root cause. The most reliable fix is to inspect the project file list, replace any stalled asset with the same-length local copy, and then reload Descript if the UI does not catch up. These steps preserve your edits and allow export to proceed.
If you need more direct help with Descript or want a guided walk-through of your workflow, I offer one-on-one coaching. I can review projects, suggest workflow changes, and help troubleshoot edge cases that cause exports to fail.
Follow the steps above the next time you see the Descript Export button is disabled and you will most likely be able to finish your export without rebuilding your project from scratch.
### New Descript Timeline: A Comprehensive Step-by-Step Walkthrough
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-new-descript-timeline-guide/
Last updated: 2025-11-11T11:12:11.000Z
Here's an extensive guide on the **new Descript timeline** \- an updated interface feature that has recently been rolled out to all Descript users. Whether you’ve just been thrust into the new environment with little warning or you’ve been experimenting with it for a few weeks, this tutorial will walk you through every nook and cranny of the new timeline. From navigating the interface to managing scenes, applying layouts, and optimizing your workflow, you’ll get a detailed, practical understanding of how to make the most out of this powerful, albeit sometimes challenging, update.
## Table of Contents
- [Understanding the New Descript Timeline Interface](#step-1:-understanding-the-new-descript-timeline-interface)
- [Navigating the New Timeline](#step-2:-navigating-the-new-timeline)
- [Creating and Managing Scenes](#step-3:-creating-and-managing-scenes)
- [Managing Gaps and Using the Range Tool](#step-4:-managing-gaps-and-using-the-range-tool)
- [Adding and Deleting Scenes with New Controls](#step-5:-adding-and-deleting-scenes-with-new-controls)
- [Visual Indicators and Comments in the Timeline](#step-6:-visual-indicators-and-comments-in-the-timeline)
- [Working with Layouts and Scene Customization](#step-7:-working-with-layouts-and-scene-customization)
- [Using Storyboard View for Better Project Overview](#step-8:-using-storyboard-view-for-better-project-overview)
- [Reordering Scenes and Managing Complex Projects](#step-9:-reordering-scenes-and-managing-complex-projects)
- [Creating and Saving Custom Layouts](#step-10:-creating-and-saving-custom-layouts)
- [Navigating Efficiently with the Command Palette](#step-11:-navigating-efficiently-with-the-command-palette)
- [Tips and Final Thoughts for Working with the New Descript Timeline](#step-12:-tips-and-final-thoughts-for-working-with-the-new-descript-timeline)
- [One-on-One Coaching and Learning Resources](#bonus:-one-on-one-coaching-and-learning-resources)
- [Conclusion](#conclusion)
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Understanding the New Descript Timeline Interface
Before diving into the nitty-gritty, it’s important to get familiar with the overall layout and philosophy behind the new Descript timeline. The interface has shifted significantly from the old version, and this change has understandably caused some confusion.
One of the most noticeable changes is that more elements are now located at the bottom of the screen - such as the scene rail - consolidating various controls and visual elements into one big expandable area. This contrasts with the previous vertical scene rail on the left side of the script, which many users had grown accustomed to.
Additionally, the “Underlord” feature, which was previously top-right, has been relocated to the bottom right corner, and “AI Actions” have been renamed “AI Tools.”
> “Try to learn Descript by learning principles, notions, workflows, and names of things and how things are organised so that when they move, you are not stuck and confused or thrown into a loop whenever they change something.”
This mindset is useful because the Descript team frequently updates and rearranges the interface, and flexibility is key to maintaining productivity.
### How to Turn the New Timeline On or Off
If you find the new timeline overwhelming or buggy, you can temporarily switch back to the old timeline while you get used to the changes. Here’s how:
1. Go to the top-left corner and click the three-line app menu.
2. Select **Settings**.
3. Scroll down to the **Labs** section.
4. Toggle the option for the new timeline on or off.
Keep in mind that this is a temporary option. Descript plans to eventually force everyone onto the new timeline without the ability to disable it. So, consider this a grace period to get comfortable with the new environment.
## Navigating the New Timeline
The new timeline contains multiple layers of visual information, including the script track, scene thumbnails, audio waveforms, and a new global progress bar. Let’s break down how to effectively navigate and interact with these components.
### The Global Progress Bar
One of the new features is a large progress bar that spans the entire width of your composition. This bar is always visible at the top of the timeline and allows you to scrub through the whole project quickly, regardless of how zoomed-in you are on the timeline below.
This can be helpful for long or complex projects where the timeline itself may be zoomed into a small section. You can drag this progress bar to jump to any point in the composition instantly, but it is not incredibly precise. I tend to avoid it and only click it by mistake.
### Zooming and Panning
For precise editing, you’ll want to zoom in and out on the timeline and pan left or right. Here are the key controls:
- **Zoom In/Out:** Hold the `Command` key (Mac) or `Control` key (Windows) and scroll your mouse wheel up or down. The zoom focuses on where your mouse pointer is.
- **Pan Left/Right:** Hold the `Shift` key and scroll your mouse wheel left or right to move horizontally across the timeline.
- **Keyboard Shortcuts:** You can also use `Command +` or `Command -` (Mac) or `Control +` or `Control -` (Windows) to zoom in and out.
These controls are pretty standard in video editing software, and it’s great to see Descript adopting them to enhance navigation.
### Opening and Closing the Timeline
If the timeline is hidden, you can reveal it by dragging up the small arrow handle located at the bottom center of the screen or by pressing the shortcut `Command + Option + T` (Mac) or `Control + Alt + T` (Windows).
To hide the timeline, simply drag the arrow handle down or use the same keyboard shortcut again.
## Creating and Managing Scenes
Scenes are essential building blocks in your Descript video project, and the new timeline offers multiple ways to create and manipulate them.
### Creating Scenes
There are several ways to create a scene boundary:
- **Using the Timeline:** Move the playhead to the desired position in the timeline and press the `/ (forward slash)` key on your keyboard to split the scene.
- **Split Button:** Click the **Split** button (or press `S`) located in the timeline controls to insert a scene boundary at the playhead.
- **In the Text Editor:** Place your cursor next to a word in the transcript and press `/ (forward slash)`. This inserts a scene boundary based on the word position, although it’s less precise than splitting on the timeline.
Creating scenes in the timeline is more accurate since it allows you to position boundaries precisely in gaps between speech, rather than at exact word positions. This is my preferred method.
### Moving Scene Boundaries
Adjusting scene boundaries is one of the more fiddly parts of the new timeline due to overlapping controls. Here’s the correct way to move a scene boundary without cutting or trimming content:
1. Make sure you are in the **Select Tool** mode by pressing `A`.
2. Click on the scene to select it (the rail at the top of the timeline). The scene should highlight in blue.
3. Look for a tiny vertical marker (a small bracket-like icon) at the edge of the scene boundary.
4. Click and drag this marker left or right to move the boundary. This adjusts where one scene ends and the next begins without trimming the content.
Be careful not to drag the bottom edge of the scene track, which trims the scene and removes content instead of shifting the boundary.
### Expanding and Trimming Scenes
If you want to trim the content at the start or end of a scene, you can drag the bottom edge of the scene track. This is useful for hiding unwanted speech or silence. However, keep in mind that this will cut content, unlike moving the boundary marker which preserves everything.
### Deleting Scenes
To delete a scene, select it by clicking on its thumbnail in the timeline or transcript, then press the `Backspace` key. Alternatively, right-click on the scene thumbnail and select **Delete Scene**.
Note: You cannot delete scenes while using the range tool; you must be in the **Select tool (A)**.
### Merging Scenes
If you accidentally created too many scenes or want to combine two scenes back into one, you can merge them:
- Right-click on the scene you want to merge.
- Select **Merge with Scene Before** or **Merge with Scene After**.
However, merging scenes can cause unpredictable behavior if the scenes contain different elements like music or graphics. For instance, music tracks from merged scenes may overlap and play simultaneously, which can be confusing.
Always double-check your merged scenes for such overlaps and unwanted duplicated (or removed) elements.
## Managing Gaps and Using the Range Tool
Gaps between spoken words or scenes represent pauses or silence in your audio. The new timeline makes it easier to see the length of these gaps, which are displayed as lighter-colored sections with their duration shown in seconds.
You can adjust gaps by dragging the edges of words, but this often cuts from the beginning of a word, which might not be ideal. A better method is to use the **Range Tool** to select the gap precisely:
1. Switch to the **Range Tool** from the dropdown menu in the toolbar or press **R**.
2. Select the gap area by clicking and dragging over it in the timeline.
3. Press `Backspace` to delete the selected range, effectively shortening the gap.
This method lets you trim gaps from the middle, preserving natural breathing space and making your edits sound more polished.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Adding and Deleting Scenes with New Controls
Besides splitting scenes, the new timeline allows you to add completely new scenes at specific positions:
- **Add at the Beginning:** Click the big plus icon at the start of the timeline to add a blank scene.
- **Add at the End:** Similarly, click the big plus icon at the end to append a blank scene, useful for end screens or credits.
- **Add Between Scenes:** Hover your mouse between two scenes in the timeline, and a large plus icon will appear. Click it to insert a new blank scene of default 5 seconds.
To delete scenes, select a scene and press `Backspace` or right-click and choose **Delete Scene**. Remember, the range tool does not support scene deletion.
## Visual Indicators and Comments in the Timeline
The new timeline provides enhanced visual cues to help you manage your project better:
- **Element Indicators:** Icons appear along the timeline to denote where music, markers, or comments exist. For example, a musical note icon shows where music clips are anchored.
- **Markers:** When you add chapter markers or other markers, they show up as colored lines on the timeline and progress bar.
- **Comments:** Comments from collaborators also appear as icons along the timeline. Clicking these icons navigates directly to the comment location in the script.
These indicators provide a quick overview of your composition’s structure and feedback, which is invaluable when working on longer projects or with teams.
## Working with Layouts and Scene Customization
Layouts control how your video and audio elements are arranged visually within each scene. The new timeline offers multiple ways to apply, copy, paste, and reset layouts.
### Applying Layouts
You can apply layouts in several ways:
- Using the Scene Panel on the right: Select a scene and choose **Choose Layout**.
- Right-click on a scene thumbnail and select **Change Layout**. This opens a floating panel to pick a layout.
- Using the keyboard shortcut `Command + /` (Mac) or `Control + /` (Windows): Select text or a scene and press this shortcut to open the layout selector.
The keyboard shortcut is especially powerful for quickly applying layouts based on speaker segments or scene content. For example, if you want your guest to appear full screen during their speaking parts, simply select the relevant text and use the shortcut to apply the appropriate layout instantly. This will create the correct scene boundaries automatically.
### Copying and Pasting Layouts
If you want to replicate the look of one scene in another, you can right-click a scene and choose **Copy Layout**, then right-click the target scene and select **Paste Layout**. This is useful for maintaining consistent visual style across multiple scenes.
### Resetting Layouts
If a scene’s layout becomes messy or you want to revert changes, right-click the scene and select **Reset Layout**. This restores the scene to its default visual arrangement.
### Bringing Back Hidden Elements
If a video or audio element disappears from a scene, check the **Scene Panel** on the right. Hidden elements have a closed eye icon next to them. Click the icon to reveal the element again.
## Using Storyboard View for Better Project Overview
One of the biggest complaints about the new timeline was the loss of the vertical scene rail on the left side of the script. Descript has addressed this with the **Storyboard View** found on the right side of the interface.
This view provides a horizontal list of all scenes, each with a thumbnail preview and scene number. It allows you to:
- See all scenes at a glance and their order.
- Drag and reorder scenes easily.
- Right-click to apply, change, or reset layouts per scene.
- See where transitions exist between scenes.
This is especially useful for long-form content such as hour-long podcasts or interviews where you switch between multiple camera angles and layouts.
### Managing Transitions in Storyboard View
Transitions (like fades) show as black blocks between scenes in the storyboard. You can click on these to change or remove the transition.
If you want to disable automatic smart transitions that Descript applies when you create new scenes:
1. Go to **File > Settings**.
2. Locate the option **Apply smart transitions to new scenes**.
3. Toggle it off to stop Descript from adding transitions automatically.
## Reordering Scenes and Managing Complex Projects
Reordering scenes is simple in the storyboard view - just drag and drop the scene thumbnails where you want them. The content and timing adjust accordingly.
However, be aware that when working on complex projects with multiple video streams, looped backgrounds, and many elements, the timeline can become very slow and less responsive. This is true even on powerful machines like the Mac Studio.
For large-scale projects with many graphics and video layers, Cristi recommends editing the audio and transcript first, creating scenes manually, and applying layouts only after the heavy editing work is done to avoid slowdowns.
## Creating and Saving Custom Layouts
Custom layouts in Descript allow you to define how your video elements are presented. They apply at scene level. Here’s the workflow for creating and saving layouts:
1. Edit your scene by adjusting boxes, positioning graphics, adding logos, and designing the visual elements within the scene.
2. Once satisfied, right-click on the scene and select **Save Scene as New Layout**.
3. Choose or create a **Layout Pack** to organize your layouts.
4. Name your layout and save it.
Layouts saved in packs can be quickly applied to other scenes within the same project or new projects, streamlining the editing process.
### Challenges with Layouts Across Different Projects
Applying layouts saved in one project to a different project can cause issues, especially when the track names or video streams differ. Descript may misplace video boxes or show inverted or empty screens.
To mitigate this, I recommend creating layout packs per project and adjusting layouts as needed when working with new guests or different setups. You can copy and paste layouts between scenes within a project to maintain consistency.
## Navigating Efficiently with the Command Palette
The command palette is a powerful but underused tool in Descript that lets you quickly jump to timestamps, execute commands, or find features without hunting through menus.
Activate the command palette by pressing `Command + K` (Mac) or `Control + K` (Windows). Then type your command or the time you want to jump to.
For example, typing “27:00” will move your playhead to the 27-minute mark in your project instantly.
You can also use it to search for AI tools like “YouTube description” or “summarize” to generate content or perform actions quickly.
## Tips and Final Thoughts for Working with the New Descript Timeline
After spending extensive time with the new timeline, here are some key takeaways and tips to help you work more efficiently:
- **Learn Principles, Not Just Clicks:** Because Descript frequently updates its interface, focus on understanding workflows and concepts rather than memorising exact button sequences.
- **Use Keyboard Shortcuts:** Keyboard shortcuts like `Command + /` for layouts and `Command + K` for the command palette can dramatically speed up your editing process.
- **Manage Scenes Manually:** Avoid relying solely on AI-generated scenes. Manual scene creation offers better control and cleaner edits.
- **Apply Layouts After Editing:** To avoid slowdowns in complex projects, do your heavy editing first, then apply layouts and visual elements.
- **Utilize Storyboard View:** Use storyboard view to get an overview of your project, reorder scenes, apply layouts fast, and manage transitions easily.
- **Watch for Overlapping Elements:** Merging scenes or copying layouts can cause duplicated music or graphics. Always double-check your timeline for unexpected overlaps.
- **Be Patient with Performance:** The new timeline is feature-rich but can be slow with complex projects. Descript may need to optimize backend technology in the future.
While the new Descript timeline introduces many powerful features and visual improvements, it’s a work in progress. With time, updates, and user feedback, it will become an even more efficient tool.
## Conclusion
The **new Descript timeline** represents a significant evolution in how you edit transcripts, audio, and video within the [Descript platform](https://cotovan.com/descript). It consolidates multiple editing features into a compact, visual interface, introduces new ways to manage scenes and layouts, and enhances project navigation with global progress bars and visual indicators.
While the update comes with a learning curve and some performance challenges, especially for complex projects, the new timeline offers greater flexibility and control but you will have to take the time to figure out how it works and master its functions.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Display Speaker Names as They Speak in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-display-speaker-names/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T21:06:42.000Z
When editing a multi-speaker video in [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript), you may want to show each speaker's name on screen as they talk. Instead of manually placing text and timing it, Descript's **Speaker** text type automatically displays the correct name based on who is currently speaking in the transcript.
## Setting Up a Multi-Speaker Project
Start by importing your video files into [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript). When working with multiple speakers — like a podcast or interview — Descript automatically detects and labels each speaker in the transcript.
You'll see speaker names (like "Cristi" and "Chris Menard") in the left panel, with their dialogue color-coded in the transcript. The transcript shows separate Script tracks for each speaker.
A multi-speaker project — Descript automatically identifies and labels each speaker
## Step 1: Add a Text Element
To display speaker names on screen, go to the **Elements** panel on the right side. You'll see options for **Text**, **Subtitle**, and **Title** under the Text section, plus shapes and dynamic text options like Timer, Composition, and Marker. Click **Text** to add a text element to the canvas. A text box appears on the video preview that you can position wherever you want the speaker name to appear.
Add a Text element from the Elements panel — this will become your dynamic speaker name
## Step 2: Change the Text Type to "Speaker"
Here's the key step: select the text element you just added, and in the properties panel on the right, change the **Type** from regular text to **Speaker**. A dropdown appears where you can select which speaker this text element should follow — for example, "Chris Menard". Once set, the text automatically shows that speaker's name whenever they're talking, and hides when they're not.
Change the text Type to "Speaker" and select which speaker it should track — the name appears automatically
## Step 3: Add Names for All Speakers
Repeat the process for each speaker in your video. Add another text element, set its Type to Speaker, and assign it to the other speaker. Position each name where you want it on screen — typically in the lower third area near each speaker.
You can customize the font, size, color, and position independently for each speaker's name element. Both text elements will appear on the timeline for the entire duration (of the timeline or the scene, depending on how you added them), but the name will only appear on the screen in the relevant box when the person is actually talking.
Both speaker names positioned on screen — each appears automatically when that person is speaking
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Remove and Restore Gaps or Pauses in Riverside
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-and-restore-gaps-or-pauses-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2026-06-18T12:22:11.000Z
Long pauses and gaps can make podcast recordings feel slow and awkward. Riverside's **Remove Pauses** feature in the AI Producer panel lets you automatically cut gaps from your recording — and restore them if you remove too much.
This guide walks you through using the pause removal slider, understanding the different pace settings, and reverting changes when needed.
## Where to Find Remove Pauses
Open your project in the Riverside editor and click **AI Producer** in the right sidebar. Under **Refine content**, you'll see **Remove pauses** with a count of how many pauses were detected and the total time they represent.
The AI Producer panel shows exactly how many pauses exist and how much time they take up.
## Using the Pace Slider
Click **Apply** next to Remove pauses. Riverside opens a slider that controls how aggressively pauses are removed. The slider ranges from **Natural pace** (gentle, only removes pauses 3 seconds or longer) to **Super fast** (removes pauses as short as 0.5 seconds).
Natural pace removes only the longest pauses (3 seconds or more) — keeping conversation flow intact.
### Understanding the Slider Settings
As you drag the slider from left to right, Riverside removes progressively shorter pauses:
- **Natural pace (3s+)** — Gentle removal, keeps natural breathing room
- **Balanced pace (1.5s+)** — Middle ground, good for most podcasts
- **Super fast (0.5s+)** — Aggressive, removes nearly all gaps
At a lower setting, only 30 pauses are removed (55 seconds total).
Moving the slider higher removes 120 pauses (2 minutes 41 seconds). The "Revert to original" button is always available.
## Restoring Removed Pauses
Made it too tight? Click **Revert to original** to undo all pause removal and start fresh. You can also readjust the slider to a different position — the changes update in real time.
At the maximum "Super fast" setting, all 1437 pauses are removed — saving over 13 minutes. Use Revert to original to bring them back.
## Tips for Best Results
- **Start with Balanced pace** — it works well for most podcast conversations without making speech sound rushed
- **Preview before exporting** — play back sections to make sure the conversation still sounds natural
- **Combine with other AI Producer tools** — after removing pauses, use **Remove filler words** to cut "ums" and "ahs" for an even cleaner result
- **You can always revert** — pause removal is non-destructive, so experiment freely
## Try Riverside
Ready to clean up your podcast recordings? [Try Riverside free](https://cotovan.com/riverside) and use the AI Producer to remove pauses, filler words, and more — all without manual editing.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Create a Typewriter Text Effect in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/create-typewriter-text-effect-descript/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:45:29.000Z
Today I'm going to guide you through creating a captivating **typewriter text effect** in [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript). You'll learn how to add and customize text elements, set up the typewriter effect using the latest animation features, and apply both in and out animations for a polished look.
## Step 1: Set Up a Composition/Project
To get started, open [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) and create a new blank composition. This composition is your canvas where you’ll add the text elements you want to animate. It’s important to note that you don’t need to have video content yet; a simple blank composition will suffice.
## Step 2: Add a Text Element
Once your composition is ready, it’s time to add text elements. Navigate to the elements panel on the right side of the screen. Here, you have a variety of text options available, including subtitles, plain text, and titles. For this tutorial, I recommend using the **subtitle** option, as it provides a clean and clear way to display your text.
## Step 3: Customise Your Text
After adding your subtitle, you can customise it to fit your style. Click on the text to activate the scene editor. Here, you can adjust various parameters such as text size, font, and thickness. Feel free to drag and modify these settings until you achieve the desired look for your text.
## Step 4: Set Up the Typewriter Effect
Now that your text is in place, let’s implement the **typewriter text effect**. Double-click on the text and type in the phrase you want to animate. Next, look for the **animation** option on the toolbar that appears. You’ll see options to add in and out animations, as well as the ability to create custom animations using keyframes.
For the typewriter effect, we only need the in animation. You can choose between a fade or an appear animation; I recommend using the **appear** option, as it allows each letter to show up instantly, mimicking the typewriter style.
## Step 5: Adjust Animation Duration
Next, you’ll want to customize the duration of the animation. This is crucial for achieving the right pace for your typewriter effect. If you want the effect to last longer, you might set it to around five seconds. Conversely, for a quicker effect, you can opt for a shorter duration.
To adjust the duration, simply enter the desired time in the duration field. Don’t worry about the easing settings; for this effect, they won’t play a significant role.
☕
If you’re eager to learn more about Descript or wish to have a [one-on-one Descript coaching session](https://cotovan.com/coaching), feel free to book a call.
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best Descript workflows, tips, workarounds, you name it!
## Step 6: Animate by Character
To truly capture the typewriter effect, you need to change the animation setting from **word** to **character**. This allows each letter to appear independently, creating the classic typewriter feel. Select the **character** option, and you’re almost there!
## Step 7: Preview Your Typewriter Animation
Before finalizing everything, it’s a good idea to preview your animation to see how it looks in real-time. Click the play button to see the animation in action. If the timing feels off, you can always go back and adjust the duration until you’re satisfied.
## Step 8: Add an "Out" Animation
Now that your text animates in beautifully, let’s make it exit just as elegantly. Select your text again and navigate back to the animation options. This time, you’ll want to add an **out animation**. I suggest using a fade effect for a smooth transition.
## Step 9: Adjust the "Out" Animation
Just like with the in animation, you can control the duration of the out animation. Set it to around two seconds for a seamless fade out. Make sure to select the option to fade characters as well, ensuring that each letter fades out individually.
Adjust transitions or animations in the timeline
With both the IN and OUT animations set, you can now see the complete effect in action. Play your composition to test the typewriter text effect.
Remember, you can control the timing and transitions for every letter, word, line, or paragraph individually.
## Conclusion
And there you have it! You’ve successfully created a stunning **typewriter text effect** in Descript. This technique can add a professional flair to your videos and presentations, making your text not just informative but also visually engaging.
If you’re eager to learn more about Descript or wish to have a [one-on-one Descript coaching session](https://cotovan.com/coaching), feel free to book a call. I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the exciting world of Descript.
Thank you for following along, and I look forward to seeing you in the next tutorial!
### How to Navigate Faster Between Edits in Riverside Studio
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-navigate-faster-between-edits-in-riverside-studio/
Last updated: 2026-06-18T12:20:11.000Z
When you have multiple edits inside a single Riverside project, switching between them used to require going back to the project page each time. Riverside's updated editor now lets you **navigate between edits directly** from inside the editor — no need to leave your current view.
## The Editor View
When you open an edit in Riverside, you get the full editing workspace: transcript on the left, video preview with captions on the right, and the timeline with scene markers at the bottom.
The main editor view with transcript, video preview, and timeline.
## Navigating Between Edits
At the top of the editor, you'll see a row of **edit thumbnails** — each one representing a different edit in your project. Click any thumbnail to instantly switch to that edit without leaving the editor.
The edit navigation bar shows all edits in your project — click any thumbnail to switch instantly.
You can scroll through the thumbnails horizontally to see all available edits. Each thumbnail shows a preview image and the edit's duration, making it easy to identify which edit you want.
Each edit shows its name, duration, and a preview thumbnail for quick identification.
## Managing Edits from the Navigation Bar
Right-click (or click the three-dot menu) on any edit thumbnail to see management options: **Rename**, **Duplicate**, or **Remove** the edit — all without leaving the editor view.
Right-click any edit thumbnail for quick management: rename, duplicate, or remove.
## Why This Matters
If you create multiple edits from the same recording — for example, a full episode, a highlight clip, and social media shorts — this feature saves significant time. Instead of navigating back to the project page and reopening each edit, you stay in the editor and switch with a single click.
## Try Riverside
Want faster editing workflows? [Try Riverside free](https://cotovan.com/riverside) — the editor keeps improving with features like this that speed up your production process.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### All Descript Tools Walkthrough with Examples: A Complete Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/all-descript-tools-walkthrough-with-examples-a-complete-guide/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T16:35:19.000Z
Descript packs a lot of tools into one editor — and if you're not sure what each one does, you might be missing features that could save you hours. In this walkthrough, I'll show you every major tool in Descript with real examples, so you can understand how they all work together.
## The Underlord Panel (Now, AI Tools)
Underlord is Descript's AI-powered command center (Now renamed to "AI Tools". When you open a new project, you'll see it in the right sidebar, organized into three sections:
- **Sound Good** — Edit for clarity, Studio Sound, remove filler words, remove retakes, shorten word gaps, and add chapters
- **Look Good** — Eye Contact correction, center active speaker, green screen removal, automatic multicam, and AI image generation
- **Repurpose** — Create clips, highlights, and find key moments automatically
Descript aims for Underlord to be your AI assistant that handles the tedious parts of editing — the stuff that used to take hours can now happen in a few clicks.
The Underlord panel organizes Descript's AI tools into Sound Good, Look Good, and Repurpose categories
## Elements Panel: Shapes, Text, and Dynamic Elements
The Elements panel is where you add visual elements to your video. You'll find:
- **Text elements** — Text, Subtitle, and Title presets for adding on-screen text
- **Placeholder** — Templates for scene layouts
- **Basic shapes** — Triangles, circles, squares, stars, arrows, lines, and more
- **Dynamic text** — Timer, Title, and Marker elements that update automatically
- **Waveforms** — Audio visualizers you can add to your video
Each element can be placed on the timeline and customized with the Layer properties panel. You can set the fill color, border, shadow, and even add animations — all without leaving Descript.
The Elements panel gives you shapes, text overlays, dynamic elements, and waveforms to enhance your video
## Layer Properties — Position, Effects, and Animation
When you select any element on the canvas, the Layer panel appears with detailed controls:
- **Position toolbar** — The floating bar above your canvas lets you adjust position (0px offset), opacity (100%), and access Effects and Animation settings
- **Size and position** — Precise X/Y coordinates and width/height with aspect ratio lock
- **Fill and Border** — Change colors, add borders to any element
- **Effects and Shadow** — Add visual effects and drop shadows
- **Animation** — Add entrance and exit animations to any layer
You can also scope elements to appear in just the selected scene, the current scene, or all scenes — which is powerful for things like lower thirds or persistent logos.
The floating toolbar and Layer panel give you precise control over every visual element's position, size, and effects
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Properties Panel: Audio Controls and Effects
The Layer (now renamed to **Properties**) panel is where Descript shows its power as a text-based editor. But it also gives you granular audio controls:
- **Duration and Speed** — Adjust playback speed for any clip
- **Audio level** — Set dB levels per clip (e.g., -7.0dB for a background track, +0.0dB for dialogue)
- **Audio effects** — Apply Studio Sound for AI noise reduction and Ducking to automatically lower music when someone speaks
- **Multicam controls** — When working with multiple speakers, you get separate tracks for each person with their own audio settings
The combination of text-based editing with per-clip audio control means you can fine-tune your podcast or video without switching to a separate audio editor.
The Script panel provides per-clip audio controls including Studio Sound AI enhancement and automatic Ducking
## Stock Library: Photos, Videos, Music and Sound Effects
Descript includes a built-in stock library with royalty-free audio you can drop right into your timeline:
- **Music** — Browse instrumental tracks by mood and genre, with preview and duration info
- **Sound effects** — Cinematic whooshes, impacts, transitions, and more
- **Visual stock** — The Visuals tab gives you access to stock footage and images
Adding stock audio is as simple as dragging it onto your timeline. And combined with the Ducking effect, it automatically lowers when dialogue plays.
The Stock panel includes royalty-free music and sound effects you can drag directly onto your timeline
## Multicam Editing
If you're recording with multiple cameras or multiple speakers (like a podcast with separate feeds), Descript's multicam editor lets you manage each source on its own track. You can:
- See each speaker's audio waveform separately
- Adjust individual audio levels per speaker
- Cut and rearrange clips on a per-track basis
- Add B-roll or additional media on new tracks
The multicam timeline view is especially useful for podcast editors who need to switch between speaker views and manage separate audio feeds.
## Watch the Full Walkthrough
This article covers the highlights, but the full video goes deeper into each tool with live examples. Watch it here:
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### FIXED: iPhone Not Detected: Troubleshooting Continuity Camera Issues
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/fix-iphone-not-detected-continuity-camera/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:02:51.000Z
**iPhone not detected when trying to use Continuity Camera on Mac: this is a common problem that many users encounter. I’ve experienced this myself and found a reliable workaround that often resolves the issue.**
## Initial Troubleshooting Steps
First things first, let’s run through some basic troubleshooting steps. When your iPhone isn’t detected:
## Unlocking the iPhone
Sometimes, simply unlocking your iPhone can help. Here’s what to do:
This step might seem trivial, but it can often help in re-establishing the connection.
## Using Photo Booth to Detect iPhone
If the previous steps didn’t work, let’s try using the **Photo Booth** app, which is known for better detecting the iPhone camera:
By doing this, your iPhone is essentially “woken up” and recognized by the system. Don't ask me why! :D
## Confirming iPhone Connection in Riverside
Once your iPhone shows up in Photo Booth, you can return to Riverside:
Make sure to confirm your devices before hitting record, as changes can’t be made during a recording session.
## Final Tips and Conclusion
I hope these steps help you resolve the iPhone not detected issue and get your Continuity Camera working smoothly.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Separate Speakers from a Single Audio File in Riverside.fm
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/separate-speakers-audio-file-riverside-fm/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:02:42.000Z
Riverside.fm has introduced a feature that can automatically separate speakers from a single audio file, a feature that I see requested many times, and I don't know of another app that does this at the moment.
## Understanding Riverside's Speaker Separation Feature
Riverside.fm allows you to upload audio files that contain multiple speakers on the same track and automatically separates them. This feature is especially useful for podcasters and content creators who often have conversations with multiple participants.
When you upload a file, Riverside will identify different speakers and segregate the audio for each one. This functionality works with both YouTube imported videos and external audio files, such as Zoom recordings.
This then opens up the possibilities of editing the audio for each person separately, cleaning up the noise, changing the volume, and more.
## Importing and Transcribing YouTube Videos
Riverside allows you to import videos directly from YouTube. To do this, go to the upload section and paste the YouTube link into the provided field. Riverside will then automatically transcribe the video for you, which is free of charge.
This is particularly useful if you already have content uploaded to YouTube and want to repurpose it.
## Uploading and Separating Audio Tracks
Next, let’s talk about uploading your audio tracks. For instance, if you have a Zoom call recording, simply upload it to Riverside. You’ll need to specify that there are two speakers involved in the conversation, which helps Riverside understand how to separate the audio.
After uploading, Riverside will process the file. You can monitor the progress, which usually takes just a minute for short recordings. Once processed, you’ll see that Riverside has successfully separated the audio into distinct tracks for each speaker.
## Testing with a Zoom Call Recording
Let’s test this feature with a Zoom call recording. After uploading the file, you’ll notice options to download the audio for each speaker as separate files. This means you can access high-quality audio for both speakers, whether you need the raw or compressed versions.
Once the upload is complete, simply navigate to the files section to download the separated audio files. This feature is incredibly beneficial for editing, as you can now work on each speaker’s audio individually.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Editing and Enhancing Separated Audio
Now that you have your audio tracks separated, it’s time to edit and enhance them. Riverside provides a user-friendly interface for making edits. You can easily mute portions of the audio, adjust volumes, or apply effects.
The editing features are intuitive, making it easy to fine-tune the audio quality for each speaker.
One of the standout features is the ability to use Riverside's "magic audio" option. This allows you to enhance the audio for individual speakers, ensuring that everyone sounds their best.
You can adjust volumes and apply effects to just one speaker’s track without affecting the other.
## Renaming and Organizing Your Tracks
To keep things organized, you can rename the audio tracks for each speaker. This makes it easier to identify who is who during the editing process.
## Applying Magic Audio Features
Once you’ve separated and named the tracks, you can apply Riverside’s "magic audio" settings to enhance the audio quality further. This feature lets you adjust settings specifically for each track, ensuring that both speakers are heard clearly and with the best possible sound quality.
For instance, if your audio isn’t coming through as clearly as you’d like, you can turn on the magic audio feature specifically for your track. This allows for precise adjustments without affecting the other speaker’s audio quality.
Riverside.fm’s speaker separation feature is an invaluable tool for podcasters and content creators. It simplifies the process of managing multiple speakers and enhances the overall quality of your audio recordings.
If you’re ready to experience Riverside for yourself, check out their site and try it out. There’s a free version available, so you can get started without any commitment. And for those looking to upgrade, there are plenty of advanced features waiting for you!
Interested in learning more? Join the Media Makers Club for access to resources that can help you take your editing skills to the next level.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Crop, Reposition, Reframe: Video Editing in Riverside.fm
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/crop-reposition-reframe-video-editing-riverside/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:02:34.000Z
[**Riverside**](https://cotovan.com/riverside) **has introduced a fantastic feature that allows you to adjust the framing of individual videos during editing.** If you've ever struggled with guests being off-screen or not centred, this guide will show you how to achieve this.
## How to Change Layout to Grid
To start, you’ll want to change your layout to a grid to accommodate both guests efficiently. Here’s how:
Grid will display both guests on screen, filling half the space each.
An important note: if one of the speakers is not in the middle of the frame, you can easily adjust this in the next steps.
## Reposition Guests in the Frame
Now that you have the grid layout, it’s time to reposition your guests. Here’s how:
You can repeat this for the other guest as well. Each track can be managed individually, allowing for precise adjustments.
## Zooming and Cropping for Better Fit
Sometimes, the layout doesn't fit perfectly, and you might see black bars around your videos. Here’s how to zoom and crop for a better fit:
This is particularly useful if your layout is set to "fit" rather than "fill." By zooming in, you can provide the necessary space to move the video around effectively.
## Reordering and Disabling Tracks
If you want to change the order of your guests or disable a track, it’s straightforward:
This feature is handy if you want to focus on just one guest or yourself, removing distractions from the screen.
Check out [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), an all-in-one platform that makes recording, streaming, editing, and publishing podcasts a breeze. Riverside harnesses AI functionality to enhance your sound quality and streamline your editing process.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Best Settings for Your Riverside Studio: A Feature-by-Feature Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/optimize-riverside-studio-settings/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:03:01.000Z
**In this comprehensive tutorial, I'll walk you through my best settings for your Riverside recording studio to ensure your podcasts, livestreams, and recordings are of the highest quality.**
Whether you’re a beginner or looking to optimise your existing setup, this guide will walk you through each step of the process.
## Introduction
Let's explore how to effectively manage multiple studios within your account. Whether you're recording podcasts, hosting live streams, or conducting coaching calls, having the right setup is important for delivering high-quality content.
## Managing Multiple Studios
Riverside allows you to create multiple studios tailored to different purposes. You can easily switch between studios, each with its own unique settings and configurations. For instance, you might have a studio dedicated to podcasting, another for live streaming, and yet another for client calls.
Each studio keeps its recordings organized, making it simple to find and manage your content. In addition to the settings we are about to learn about, separate studios allow you to also customize your brand colors, logo, and other elements that you can re-use in your edits.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Creating a New Studio
Creating a new studio is a straightforward process. Start by navigating to your Riverside dashboard. Click the plus sign to create a new studio. You’ll be prompted to choose between recording audio only or capturing both video and audio.
For most creators, selecting video and audio is the best option to capture the full experience, even if at the end you only want to create audio content.
## Configuring Studio Settings
Once your studio is created, it's time to configure the settings. Start by selecting the transcription language. This ensures accurate transcriptions of your recordings.
Next, explore the recording options. You can choose to record in high resolution, which significantly enhances the quality of your videos. I recommend using the advanced settings to record in 1080p or even 4K if your equipment supports it.
## Studio Settings
Now that you've configured the initial settings, let’s dive deeper into the studio settings. The recording tab allows you to control file quality, format, and other processing details. It’s essential to ensure that you’re recording in the best settings for Riverside to maximise your output quality.
For audio settings, avoid enabling noise reduction during recording. Instead, handle any noise issues during post-production. This approach keeps your recordings raw and authentic, allowing for more flexibility in editing.
## Enable Lobby
One feature I highly recommend is enabling the lobby waiting room. This allows you to manage who enters your studio and when. Guests will wait in the lobby until you're ready to start recording, preventing any interruptions during your session.
It’s a simple but effective way to maintain professionalism in your recordings. Plus, it prevents any unwelcome surprises from guests who might join early (or previous guests who click the link again!)
## Customizing Colors and Branding
Customisation is key to making your studio reflect your brand. Riverside allows you to change background colours, logos, and other visual elements. This personal touch can enhance your brand identity and make your streams more engaging.
To customise, simply click on the ‘customize’ button in the settings. You can upload your logo and adjust the placement to suit your preference. Additionally, you can modify the style of names and titles that appear during your recordings or live streams.
## Advanced Recording Settings
The first thing to consider is the resolution. By default, Riverside records at 720p, which is standard but not ideal. To enhance your output, switch to advanced settings and opt for 1080p or even 4K, depending on your camera's capabilities.
Next, consider the audio sample rate. If you're recording both audio and video, set the sample rate to 48 kHz. This ensures higher audio quality, which is particularly important for podcasts and interviews where clarity matters.
Remember, these adjustments may affect upload times, as higher resolutions and sample rates will require more bandwidth. However, the final files will be worth the wait, providing you with high-quality content ready for editing.
## Record Modes
Riverside offers different record modes to suit your needs. You can choose between recording audio only or both audio and video. While audio-only recordings can be useful for specific podcasts, capturing both is generally the best practice.
This allows for more flexibility during editing, enabling you to create a richer experience for your audience and why not, repurpose your content to video, social media clips if you want to.
Consider enabling a countdown timer. This feature gives everyone in the studio a moment to prepare before recording begins. It’s a simple yet effective way to ensure that everyone starts off on the same page.
## Noise Reduction
While Riverside provides a noise reduction feature during recording, I recommend using it with caution. Enabling noise reduction during the recording process can alter the raw quality of your audio, limiting your editing options later on.
Instead, I suggest handling noise issues in post-production. Riverside's magic audio is an excellent tool for cleaning up sound after recording. It uses AI to enhance audio quality, allowing you to maintain the integrity of your original recording while still achieving a polished final product.
## Audio Sample Rate
For most applications, a sample rate of 44.1 kHz is sufficient for audio-only recordings. However, if you're capturing video alongside audio, bumping it up to 48 kHz is advisable. This ensures a higher quality of sound.
Always keep in mind that higher sample rates can lead to larger file sizes. But the trade-off is worth it for the improved quality.
## Frame Rate
Frame rate is another essential factor that impacts the quality of your recordings. By default, Riverside records at 24 frames per second (fps). I vaguely remember it was possible to change this in the past, but now you can't anymore. Or it's likely that it's only for the Enterprise plan, of which I am not sure because I'm not subscribed to that.
Higher frame rates can make your footage look smoother, especially during fast-paced footage. Increasing the frame rate may also affect your file sizes and upload times.
## Countdown and Auto Record
The countdown feature allows everyone in the studio to get ready before recording starts.
The auto record option is useful, as it automatically starts recording when the first guest joins the studio. If you often forget to hit the record button, this is for you.
## Pause Uploads
Finally, the pause uploads feature can be a lifesaver during recording sessions with slow internet connections. If you or your guests are experiencing connectivity issues, this option allows you to pause the upload process while still recording. This can free up bandwidth, ensuring a smoother conversation.
However, it’s important to remember that once you stop recording, you (or the person you pause the uploads for) will need to wait for all uploads to finish before leaving the studio. This is crucial to ensure that all your recordings are safely uploaded to Riverside’s servers.
## Live Streaming with Riverside
Riverside Studio isn't just for recording; it’s also perfect for live streaming (while also recording)! To get started, you'll need to ensure you have the live streaming add-on included in your plan. Once activated, you can easily set up your stream settings.
While you can stream live even on the free plan, the quality will be less than 1080p and there will be a watermark on the video.
Navigate to the live stream tab and add your streaming destinations. Riverside supports major platforms like YouTube, Facebook, LinkedIn, and Twitch. If you want to stream to a custom destination, you can use the RTMP settings to configure it.
## Custom RTMP
If you have a custom streaming service, Riverside allows you to input RTMP configurations. This is a common protocol used by many platforms. Simply enter the RTMP URL and stream key provided by your service. YouTube also supports this and it is what I use at the moment.
Remember to test your connection before going live. A good internet connection is crucial to ensure smooth streaming without interruptions.
## Personalizing Your Studio
Personalisation will make your Riverside studio feel like home. After setting up your studio, head over to the customization options. Here, you can change your studio's background, logo, and other branding elements.
Upload your logo and adjust its placement to suit your style.
## Customize Logo and Colors
Beyond logos, Riverside allows you to modify the colour scheme of your studio. Choose colours that align with your brand identity.
You can also adjust the style of names and titles that appear during your recordings. This feature is particularly useful for live streams, where on-screen graphics can enhance viewer engagement.
## Brand Kit
Recently, Riverside introduced a new feature that allows much more control over the branding for each studio and which saves you a lot of time when you create content and edit such as personalizing intro, outro, logo, color scheme and more.
You can find a detailed look at that in this other article or video.
## Recording and Going Live
When you're ready to record or go live, simply click the record button at the bottom of the studio interface. If you want to stream, ensure your destinations are selected before hitting the live button. This allows you to simultaneously record and stream your session.
## Conclusion and Sponsor Message
Riverside's studio offers a comprehensive suite of features for both recording and live streaming.
Whether you’re recording podcasts, conducting interviews, or live streaming events, Riverside has you covered. If you’re looking to elevate your content creation game, [consider trying Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), and using this coupon for a discount: CRISTI15
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Fixed: Mixed-Language Transcriptions in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/fixing-mixed-language-transcriptions-in-descript/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:34:29.000Z
**This can happen when the transcription language is left on Auto, which makes** [**Descript**](https://cotovan.com/descript) **guess the language instead of sticking to the one you want.**
### The Solution
Set a fixed language for transcriptions and enable a confirmation step before each transcription begins.
1. Open **Descript → Settings → General**
2. Scroll to the **Transcription** section
3. Under **Default transcription language**, pick the language you use most (e.g. English) instead of **Auto**
4. Turn on **Always ask before transcribing**
- This lets you confirm the language before transcribing each file
- It also prevents wasting minutes on files you don’t need to transcribe
- This is the first setting I turn on after reinstalling Descript, btw
> 💡 **Tip:**
> If you work with projects in multiple languages, “Always ask” is a great time saver — Descript will prompt you to select the correct one every time.
Change the setting from Auto to the language you use most often
### Should You Burn Captions in Descript for YouTube, or Upload Them Separately?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/should-you-burn-captions-in-descript-for-youtube-or-upload-them-separately/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:41:55.000Z
**When editing in** [**Descript**](https://cotovan.com/descript)**, you have the option to burn captions directly onto your video. But should you use that feature for YouTube uploads?**
The short answer: **usually, no.** While you *can* burn in captions in Descript, uploading them separately to YouTube gives you and your viewers far more flexibility.
Burning captions in Descript means re-exporting the video with permanent text on screen. If you later upload that version to YouTube, it creates an entirely new video, since YouTube doesn’t allow replacing existing uploads.
Burned-in captions also **can’t be turned off or auto-translated** into other languages.
Uploading captions separately, on the other hand, lets viewers toggle them on or off and use YouTube’s auto-translate feature. This makes your video accessible to a wider audience without locking text permanently onto the screen.
---
## Option 1: Burn captions into your video in Descript (if you really want to)
If you specifically want captions permanently on the screen (for Shorts, Reels, or social media clips), here’s how to do it in Descript:
1. **Correct the transcript**
Make sure the automatic transcript is accurate by editing it in Descript.
2. **Add captions**
Open the **Captions** panel and turn them on.
3. **Customize the look**
Adjust font, size, color, background, and style to match your branding.
4. **Position the captions**
Place them at the bottom, top, or anywhere you prefer.
5. **Adjust display style**
Decide on 1-line or 2-line captions, line width, and how long they show on screen.
6. **Export the video**
When ready, export your video file. Captions will be burned in permanently.
> 💡 *This is best for short-form content where captions should always be visible (e.g., Instagram Reels, TikTok, or YouTube Shorts).*
---
## Option 2: Export captions from Descript and upload them to YouTube (recommended)
For regular YouTube videos, this method is better. It keeps captions flexible, toggleable, and translatable.
### Export an SRT file
1. In Descript, go to **File → Export → Subtitles**.
2. Choose **SRT** with timing.
3. In **YouTube Studio**, go to **Subtitles**.
4. Select your video → **Add language** → **Add subtitles** → **Upload file**.
5. Select **With timing** and upload your SRT.
### Export a plain text transcript for auto-sync
1. In Descript, go to **File → Export → Transcript**.
2. Choose **Plain Text** (no timestamps), or simply click **Copy to Clipboard** from the Transcript panel.
3. In **YouTube Studio**, go to **Subtitles**.
4. Select your video → **Add subtitles** → **Type manually**.
5. Paste the transcript and choose **Auto-sync**. YouTube will align it with your audio.
## Final recommendation
Use Descript to create and correct your captions, but don’t burn them into the video unless it’s for Shorts or Reels.
For standard YouTube uploads, export captions as text (SRT or transcript) and upload them to YouTube. This keeps captions editable, toggleable, and translatable - giving your audience the best viewing experience.
### How to Schedule Podcast Recordings in Riverside.fm
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-schedule-podcast-recordings/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:03:08.000Z
Manage multiple guests without a hitch in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) by scheduling your recording sessions in advance. In this guide, we'll explore the latest features from Riverside that make scheduling podcast recordings easier than ever.
## Riverside's New Feature
Riverside has introduced a new feature that allows you to schedule multiple sessions in advance. Depending on your plan, you can schedule up to three sessions in advance on the Pro plan, while the Business plan offers unlimited sessions.
This is perfect for those who regularly interview guests and want to streamline their recording process.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Navigating the Riverside Interface
Once you're logged into Riverside, on the top left of the sidebar, you'll see your studios. Click on the dropdown to access your specific studio. You can view all the projects you’ve planned in advance along with their recording dates. This scheduled section is where all your sessions will be displayed.
## Scheduling a Session
To schedule a session, navigate to the Scheduled section. If you don’t have any sessions yet, click the button to schedule a new session. You can select the date, time, and duration for your recording. Riverside allows you to choose your time zone to ensure accuracy.
Next, you can invite participants by entering their email addresses or simply copying the studio link. After entering the guest email and clicking create session, the scheduled session appears in your list.
## Inviting Participants
Once your session is scheduled, you can invite more people by clicking the three dots next to the session. This feature enables you to edit session details or copy the session to your Google Calendar for easy management.
It's a straightforward process that ensures everyone knows when and where to join the recording.
## Managing Scheduled Sessions
Riverside displays all your upcoming sessions, allowing you to see dates, times, and the guests you’ve invited. You can easily edit, reschedule, or delete sessions as necessary, keeping your podcast schedule flexible.
## Using Fixed URLs for Easy Access
A standout feature of Riverside is the fixed URL for each studio. This means you can use the same link for all your recordings, making it easy to add to calendar invites or booking systems like Calendly.
The fixed URL is automatically sent to your guests, eliminating the hassle of changing links for every session.
To get your studio link, simply click on the three dots next to your scheduled session, select 'invite people', and copy the link. This ensures that every guest receives the correct link based on their role - whether they’re a guest, producer, or part of the audience.
## Conclusion and Additional Resources
With Riverside's new features, you can easily manage multiple sessions and streamline the entire recording process. If you're interested in learning more about Riverside, [check out their official website](https://cotovan.com/riverside) for high-quality podcast and video recording solutions.
For further learning, consider joining the [Media Makers Club](https://mediamakers.club/?ref=cotovan.com) where you can access a community of learners, editors, and podcasters. You'll find many great resources to enhance your skills in podcasting and video editing.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Apply Branding with One Click in Riverside.fm Brand Kit
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/apply-branding-with-one-click-in-riversidefm-brand-kit/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:03:16.000Z
If you love saving time while you edit your podcast and prepare all your clips and episodes, then I've got a treat for you today. [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) has introduced a new feature in their editor, allowing you to apply a **brand kit** to your edits in just one click. Let's dive into how this works!
## Riverside's New Brand Kit
To start using the brand kit, you need to be in the editor. Once you're in, you'll see a new menu option called "Brand" on the right-hand side of your screen. This feature is available for pro plan users and above. By opening this menu, you gain access to various elements that you can customize for all your future edits.
## Navigating the Editor
In the editor, you can add your logo and customize its placement. For instance, I uploaded two logos and decided to use my Media Makers logo. You can position it in the top left corner or in the center, and even adjust its opacity. This flexibility ensures that your branding is consistent throughout your episodes.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Customizing Your Brand Kit
Next up, let’s talk about the color palette. You can add up to five colors that reflect your branding. I selected a series of yellows and a dark red to match my logo. Once you've added your colors, you can also choose a background for your videos. You can upload a background image or select a plain color from your palette.
Additionally, you can define caption presets for different aspect ratios. For example, if you’re working with a 16:9 widescreen format, you can set up a caption style that includes your branding colors. This feature is particularly useful for creating social media clips, where different formats are essential.
Moreover, you can add custom intros and outros for your videos. For instance, I might include an intro animation for my podcast episodes while opting out for social media clips. For the outro, I usually use a YouTube end screen video, ensuring that my branding is consistent across platforms.
## Applying Your Brand Kit
Once you've set up all these elements, applying them is simple. Just click the "Apply Brand" button, and voilà! Your intro video is added at the beginning, your outro at the end, and your logo appears throughout the episode. This feature significantly streamlines the editing process, saving you a lot of time.
## Creating Social Media Clips
Now, let's explore how to create social media clips using this feature. After generating a bunch of magic clips from your episode, you can easily apply your brand kit to each clip with just one click. This is a huge time-saver, especially if you’re creating multiple short clips for platforms like Instagram or TikTok.
## Customizing for Different Studios
If you work with multiple clients or have different studios, the brand kit is customizable per studio. This means you can set up unique branding elements for each client, ensuring that everything remains consistent. For instance, if I switch to my live streaming studio, I can have a completely different logo and color palette that fits that brand.
This is particularly beneficial for podcast agencies or creators managing multiple shows. You can create different studios for each client, allowing you to tailor your branding to their specific needs. This way, applying your branding is still just a click away.
## Conclusion
This new brand kit feature in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) is a game-changer for anyone serious about podcasting or video content creation. If you want to streamline your editing process and maintain consistent branding across all your content, I highly recommend giving Riverside a try. You can check it out at Riverside: HD Podcast & Video Software | Free Recording & Editing and don't forget to use the coupon code CRISTI15 for an exclusive discount on your first three months!
I hope you found this guide helpful.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Add Background Music in Riverside.fm: A Step-by-Step Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-riverside/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:03:21.000Z
**Adding background music to your podcast or video can greatly enhance the overall production quality and listener experience.** In this tutorial, I'll walk you through how to easily add background music using [Riverside's](https://cotovan.com/riverside) new editor feature.
Whether you want to add music for intros, outros, or throughout your entire episode, I'll show you how to do it efficiently and effectively.
## Navigate the New Editor
To get started with adding background music in Riverside, you'll first need to familiarize yourself with the new Riverside editor interface.
Here's how to access it:
The new music track makes it simple to add and customize background audio for your recordings. Let's explore how to use it effectively.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Add Stock Music to Your Project
Riverside offers a convenient library of royalty-free stock music that you can easily add to your projects. Here's how to use it:
The selected music will automatically download and be placed at your playhead position on the timeline. You can then drag and reposition the music clip as needed.
## Upload and Use Your Own Music
If you prefer to use your own custom music tracks, Riverside makes it easy to upload and incorporate them into your projects:
Once added, you can adjust the positioning and timing of your custom music just like with stock tracks. This gives you full flexibility to use any audio you have rights to in your productions.
## Adjust Music Timing and Volume
Fine-tuning your background music is important for a polished final product. Here's how to adjust timing and volume:
Take time to experiment with music placement and volume to find the right balance with your main audio. The goal is to enhance your content without overpowering it.
## Create and Manage Intros
Adding music to your intro can set the tone for your entire episode. Here's how to create a professional intro:
This method allows you to create a consistent branded intro across all your episodes, complete with perfectly timed background music.
## Fade Music In and Out
Smooth transitions are key to professional-sounding productions. Here's how to fade your background music:
You can also access these controls by clicking the three dots at the end of the music track and selecting "Volume and Effects".
Experiment with different fade durations to find what works best for your content.
## Replace Music Tracks
Sometimes you may want to swap out a music track after placing it. Riverside makes this process simple:
The new track will replace the old one while maintaining any fade settings you've applied. You may need to readjust the length to fit your content, but this feature saves time when experimenting with different background tracks.
## Conclusion
Adding background music in Riverside is a straightforward process that can significantly enhance your audio and video productions. By following these steps, you can easily incorporate music into your intros, outros, and throughout your content.
Remember to balance your music levels carefully and choose tracks that complement rather than distract from your main content.
As Riverside continues to develop its features, we can look forward to even more advanced audio editing capabilities in the future.
## Special Offer from Riverside
Ready to elevate your podcast or video production with seamless background music? Try [Riverside for free](https://cotovan.com/riverside) today and experience their intuitive editor for yourself. As a special offer for my readers, use the coupon code "**CRISTI15**" at checkout to receive an exclusive 15% discount on your first three months of Riverside.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Transcribe Your Own Files with Riverside: A Step-by-Step Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/transcribe-your-own-files-with-riverside/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:03:27.000Z
[**Riverside**](https://cotovan.com/riverside) **offers a robust platform that allows you to upload, transcribe, edit, and repurpose your audio and video files seamlessly.** In this guide, I'll walk you through the process step-by-step:
## Step 1: Upload and Transcribe Your Video
The first step in using Riverside is to upload your existing video or audio files for transcription. This process is straightforward and user-friendly. Here's how to do it:
For example, let's say you have a video titled "*Cristi on iPhone camera*." Simply drag that file into the upload area and click on "Upload."
Riverside will begin processing your file, uploading it to the cloud.
While the file is uploading, you can give it a title. Riverside will automatically transcribe the file for you once the upload is complete.
This transcription is available for editing, making it easy to create social media clips or an entire podcast episode from the content.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Step 2: Editing with the Uploaded File
Once your file is uploaded and transcribed, it's time to edit. Riverside provides a comprehensive editing interface that allows you to refine your content easily.
To get started, navigate to the files area where you'll see both your uploaded file and the transcript. Here, you can:
Riverside also generates initial show notes and chapters based on the transcript.
While these automated show notes can be useful, remember to create your own after finishing your edits to ensure they reflect the final content accurately.
## Step 3: Exploring Additional Features
Riverside is packed with features that enhance your editing and content creation process. Here are some highlights:
These features not only save you time but also enhance the quality of your content, making it more engaging for your audience.
## Step 4: Edit with Riverside's AI Tools
Riverside’s AI tools simplify the editing process and improve the overall quality of your recordings. Here's what you can do:
These tools enable you to focus on content rather than getting bogged down in technical details, making it easier to produce high-quality results.
## Conclusion
Whether you're creating a podcast, social media clips, or show notes, [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) provides all the resources you need to maximize your content's potential.
Ready to get started? [Check out Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside) for high-quality podcast and video recording and editing. Don't forget to use the coupon code "**CRISTI15**" for an exclusive discount on your first three months!
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Multi-Track Editing with Riverside.fm: A Feature-by-Feature Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/mastering-multi-track-editing-riverside/
Last updated: 2025-11-17T14:03:33.000Z
**Let me walk you through Riverside's powerful multi-track editing capabilities, which allows you to take complete control over your audio and video editing.**
Whether you're creating podcasts, video interviews, or social media clips, mastering these features will transform your editing process in Riverside.fm and improve your content quality.
## Step 1: Riverside's New Multi-Track Editor
The introduction of Riverside's multi-track editor is amazing for content creators, and a feature I've been waiting on for a long time. This feature allows you to edit each track independently, enabling control over audio and video.
No longer are you limited to making blanket edits that affect all participants; you can now fine-tune each individual track.
Imagine being able to adjust the volume levels of different speakers, mute crosstalk, or even change the framing of each individual track. The multi-track editing functionality opens up a world of editing possibilities.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Step 2: Navigating the Riverside Studio
Once you've launched Riverside.fm, navigating the studio is straightforward. Your recordings will be displayed prominently, allowing you to select the one you wish to edit.
To get started, simply click on the desired recording, and then hit the 'edit' button. This will create a new 'edit'. You can create multiple edits from the same source recording.
Upon entering the editing interface, you will see a timeline that represents your recording. This timeline is not just a static feature; it allows you to scrub through the content while simultaneously viewing a transcript of your dialogue.
This means you can easily locate sections that require editing without having to listen to the entire recording.
### Understanding the Layout
At the bottom of the screen (in the timeline), you will notice the speaker tracks, each highlighted in different colours corresponding to the speakers' names. This makes it easy to identify whose track you are working on.
You can expand the tracks to see individual audio waveforms, allowing for precise editing.
Update: A recent update improved the multi-track view in the timeline even more - you can now expand all tracks vertically for a big-picture view!
## Step 3: Editing with Multi-Track: Feature by Feature Guide
Now that you're familiar with the layout, let's look at the specific editing features available in Riverside's multi-track editor.
### Scene Management
One of the most powerful features of the multi-track editor is the ability to create scenes. Scenes allow you to segment your recording into distinct sections, each with its own layout. For instance, you can set one scene to display a side-by-side view while another can be full screen, showing only one speaker for a while.
### AI-Driven Layout Changes
Riverside also harnesses the power of AI to automate scene transitions with "Smart Scenes." This means you don’t have to manually switch between layouts; the software can intelligently determine when to switch based on who is speaking.
### Volume Control and Audio Enhancement
With multi-track editing, you have the ability to control the volume of each track independently. This is necessary for balancing audio levels, especially if one speaker is significantly louder than the other.
Additionally, Riverside offers a 'Magic Audio' feature that uses AI to enhance sound quality by removing background noise and improving clarity. This is similar to Descript's "Studio Sound", Adobe's "Voice Enhance", Auphonic, DaVinci Resolve's "Voice Isolation" and others.
## Step 4: Using Scenes for Dynamic Layouts
Scenes are a powerful tool within Riverside's multi-track editor, allowing you to craft dynamic and engaging layouts for your recordings. By creating scenes, you can effortlessly switch between different visual configurations.
To add a scene, simply position your playhead where you want the scene change to occur, click 'Add scene', and adjust the layout options as needed. For instance, you may want to display a full-screen shot of a guest during their speaking segment while maintaining a side-by-side view during discussions and quicker exchanges.
### Automating Scene Changes with AI and Smart Scenes
Riverside takes scene management a step further with its smart scene feature. This AI-driven functionality analyses your entire recording to determine the best layouts based on dialogue flow.
It can automatically switch between different layouts, ensuring that the visual presentation complements the conversation naturally.
I particularly like the fact that it detects when there is a quicker exchange and it doesn't switch the camera very often in that portion, instead showing the speakers side-by-side.
## Step 5: Automating Scene Changes with AI and Smart Scenes
As mentioned earlier, the smart scene feature enhances how you approach scene transitions. By automating these changes, Riverside saves you time and effort while ensuring that the viewer remains engaged throughout the recording.
To set this up, navigate to the layout side panel and select the 'smart scene' option. Riverside will analyse your recording and determine the best layout for each segment, switching between full screen and side-by-side views as needed.
The AI evaluates the dialogue and determines when to switch between layouts, helping maintain a dynamic viewing experience. This is particularly beneficial for fast-paced discussions, where manual switching would be cumbersome and disruptive.
### Fine-Tuning Your Edits
Even with smart scenes, you retain full control over your edits. If the AI’s decisions don’t align with your vision, you can manually adjust scene boundaries and layouts. Simply grab the boundary and move it to where you want the switch to occur.
## Step 6: Magic Audio to Clean Up and Enhance Sound
Audio quality can make or break your content. Riverside's 'Magic Audio' feature uses AI technology to enhance sound quality by removing background noise and improving clarity. This is especially useful in multi-track editing, where each speaker's audio can be processed individually for optimal results.
To activate this feature, simply click on the track you want to enhance, and select 'magic audio' from the options.
### Volume Control for Each Track
Riverside also allows you to adjust the audio levels for each individual track. This means you can ensure that quieter speakers are amplified and louder speakers are toned down, creating a harmonious audio landscape.
## Step 7: Flexibility for Creating Social Media Clips
Creating social media clips from your recordings is a breeze with Riverside's multi-track editing capabilities. Riverside allows you to isolate speakers and create tailored clips that resonate with your audience.
To create a social media clip, select the segment you want to highlight, and either copy it into a new edit, or simply delete any unnecessary portions. You can turn off the video for speakers who are not relevant to the clip, ensuring that the focus remains on the main speaker.
### Customising Social Media Clips
Once you've isolated the relevant portions, you can further customise the clip by adjusting the cropping and layout. This is particularly useful when you want to maintain branding elements like logos and captions while ensuring that the main speaker is prominently featured.
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Selectively Hide Captions in Descript Using Scenes
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/selectively-hide-captions-in-descript-using-scenes/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:09:43.000Z
If you are looking to manage caption (or other object or layer) visibility in your Descript video for specific portions, this tutorial is for you. Whether you're creating educational content, presentations, or social media videos, there are times when you need to temporarily hide captions to prevent text overlap or create cleaner visuals.
Let me show you exactly how to do it.
Prerequisites: Before diving into this tutorial, you should be familiar with Descript's basic interface, know how to import videos, and understand basic transcript editing.
### Key Terms to Know First
Before we begin, let's clarify some important terms you'll encounter:
Descript's main interface with labeled callouts
## Understanding Scenes in Descript
Scenes are powerful tools in Descript that go beyond basic caption management:
In order to show or hide various layers (such as captions) in one scene only, we need to separate the content into scenes first, and create a separate scene for the content with captions, then one scene without captions, and then another scene going back to the captions layout.
To create scenes, we use something called 'scene boundaries'. They are the separators between scenes.
## Three Ways to Create Scene Boundaries
### Method 1: Text Selection (Fastest for Visible Text)
Select text and press / to create a scene surrounding the selection
Note: While this is the quickest method, it might be challenging if your desired scene text spans multiple screens.
### Method 2: Manual Boundary Placement
### Method 3: Timeline Precision
Add scene boundary directly on the timeline
## Removing Captions from Your Scene
After creating your scene, select that scene either by:
Then remove the captions:
Select the scene, select the captions, delete
After following these steps:
Descript's scenes are a powerful way to control layout across your entire episode or video. When they were introduced, they opened up a world of possibilities for changing multi-camera angles, making layers appear, disappear, or change positioning.
I have several videos on my YouTube channel, all dealing with Descript's scenes, converting Zoom calls into multi-cam edits, and more.
### Translate and Voice Your Videos in Another Language with Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/translate-and-voice-your-videos-in-another-language-with-descript/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:44:05.000Z
Descript has recently updated its translation feature, moving out of beta and into a fully supported version. This update allows users to translate video compositions into different languages while also providing the option to dub the audio in the target language.
This blog post will explore how to efficiently use this feature, its limitations, and the process involved in translating and dubbing your content.
## Starting a Translation in Descript
To initiate a translation in Descript, you first need to select the composition you want to translate. Simply right-click on the desired portion of your composition and choose to duplicate it into a new composition. This will allow you to work on a separate version specifically for translation.
Once you have your new composition, it’s essential to rename it for clarity. After this, navigate to the Underlord feature in Descript to start the translation process. Keep in mind that this feature is not available on the free plan; you will need either the Creator or higher plan to access it.
## Preparing Your Composition for Translation
Before translating, ensure that your composition is finalized. Any design elements, such as logos or subtitles, should be added before you initiate the translation. This is crucial because once the composition is translated, it does not maintain an editing relationship with the original. Therefore, any changes made to the original will not reflect in the translated version.
Once you are satisfied with the layout and design, you can proceed to the translation step.
## Translation Limitations and Issues
The translation feature comes with some limitations. For instance, the length of dubbing is restricted based on your subscription plan. If you are on the Creator Legacy Plan, you have a limit of 30 minutes for dubbing. After reaching this limit, you will need to upgrade your plan.
Another limitation is that only certain languages support dubbing. For example, while French supports dubbing, languages like Czech and Greek do not (at the moment). If you want to make corrections to the translation, you will need to be on the Enterprise plan, which has additional features and support.
## Adding Elements Before Translation
As mentioned earlier, adding elements such as captions and text is vital before translating. You can add captions that will be included in the translated version, ensuring consistency in your presentation. Once you are happy with the final layout, you are ready to translate the composition.
## Translation and Dubbing Process
To translate, go to the Underlord section and select the translation option. Choose your target language and enable the dubbing feature if desired.
You can select the AI voice you wish to use for dubbing, which can be your own trained voice or one of the stock voices available in Descript.
Once you submit the translation request, Descript will first translate the text and then generate the audio. The interface allows you to switch between the original and translated versions easily, making it simple to manage multiple translations.
## Corrections on Enterprise Plan
One significant change in the updated feature is the restriction on making corrections post-translation unless you are on the Enterprise plan.
While this was previously available during the beta phase, it is now a feature limited to those who pay for the higher-tier plan. This means that any errors noticed after the translation cannot be amended without upgrading.
## Exporting Translated Versions
Upon completing your translations, you can export them in various formats. When exporting, ensure you select the correct version from the language dropdown menu. This way, you can export the English, French, or German versions as needed.
It’s essential to double-check which version you are exporting to avoid confusion later.
## Handling Multiple Speakers
If your composition includes multiple speakers, Descript allows you to assign different voices for each speaker during the translation process. You can choose specific AI voices for each individual, ensuring that the final product is coherent and maintains the original conversation's tone.
## Conclusion
The translation feature in Descript is a powerful tool for content creators looking to reach a wider audience.
By understanding how to prepare your compositions, navigate the limitations, and utilize the dubbing feature, you can effectively translate and dub your videos into various languages.
### Schedule Multiple Recording Sessions in Advance with Riverside.fm
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/schedule-multiple-recording-sessions-in-advance-with-riversidefm/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:16:07.000Z
**There was a popular request in the Riverside communities to support scheduling unlimited sessions in advance.** Maybe you have a studio you created for your podcast and you'd like to schedule multiple recording sessions in advance with your guests.
Until recently, it was only possible to schedule one session in advance - as soon as you tried to schedule another one, you would basically just be replacing the existing one.
Well, today Riverside announced that you can schedule an unlimited number of sessions in advance in the studio.
Now when you go to [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/riverside), you can schedule recording sessions for every studio.
I have a different studio for everything I do: one for my podcast, one for coaching calls, and one for live streams. So I can now schedule recording sessions in advance if I have more than 1 guest lined up per each studio.
**Update:** Newer Pro plans only allow one studio per account. If you need more studios, you must upgrade.
You can invite your guests to record during a specific time frame, you can manage your future recordings better this way.
[Riverside Roles Explained — Pick Guest, Producer, or AudienceThis quick guide walks you through the three role types - Guest, Producer, and Audience - how they behave during a session, and exactly when to choose each one.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/riverside-roles-guest-producer-audience/)
All you have to do is just go and set your recording date, choose the time zone, and then you can add your guest's email address to invite them right there.
They will receive an email with all the information they need to join the studio at the right time. You can also add this session to the Google calendar right there.
I use Riverside to record my podcast, stream on YouTube and record coaching calls. [Check it out!](https://cotovan.com/riverside)
If you’re eager to learn more about Riverside and wish to have ****a one-on-one Riverside coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Riverside Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Riverside.fm](https://cotovan.com/riverside) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Use Legacy AI Voices in Descript Underlord
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/use-legacy-ai-voices-in-descript-underlord/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:13:16.000Z
In the latest versions of Descript Underlord, there have been significant changes, particularly concerning AI voices. The AI voices were redeveloped last year, and new engines were created, leading to the retirement of some old stock voices. While the new AI voices are more refined and natural, many users still seek the old voices with various styles and emotions.
In this guide, I will walk you through how to enable and use these legacy AI voices in Descript Underlord. Let's get started!
## Step 1: Enabling Legacy AI Voices
First, you need to enable the old AI voices in Descript Underlord as they are hidden by default. Follow these steps to get started:
Open a project in Descript Underlord. I have created a basic text in my project for demonstration purposes.
Next, click on the speaker label and select 'Browse stock AI speakers'. This will show the available stock voices.
You will see voices like Don, which has a dramatic movie trailer kind of voice. However, these voices do not have the emotion styles that the old voices had.
To access the legacy AI voices, click on the filter menu on the top right-hand side. By default, the 'Legacy speakers' option is set to hide. Change this setting to 'Show'.
Once you enable this filter, you will see the old voices labeled as 'Legacy AI'. For example, you can now select the legacy version of Don.
## Step 2: Testing and Using Voice Variations
Now that you have enabled the legacy AI voices, it's time to test and use the different voice variations. Here's how:
Select the legacy AI voice you want to use. In this example, I have chosen 'Don Legacy AI'.
Click on the three dots next to the selected voice. This will give you the option to choose different voice variations.
For instance, you can select the 'Sad' voice variation. Once you choose a variation, the system will generate the audio.
You can see the waveform being generated in the timeline. When the text blinks, it means the system is working on it.
Once the generation is complete, you can play back the audio to see if it meets your requirements.
## Step 3: Final Tips and Conclusion
While using legacy AI voices in Descript Underlord, remember that you need to enable the legacy filter every time you want to select an old voice. This setting does not stay enabled by default.
Legacy AI voices offer a range of styles and emotions that can add depth to your projects. They may not be as refined as the new voices, but they bring unique characteristics that some users prefer.
### How to Download Video from YouTube Directly in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-download-video-from-youtube-directly-in-descript/
Last updated: 2026-03-03T17:15:40.000Z
**Update: Descript has now disabled this feature due to various YouTube problems, unreliability of connection, etc. Not to mention, it's technically against YouTube's terms of use.**
[Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) lets you import videos directly from YouTube without downloading them separately first. This is useful when you want to edit reaction videos, reference clips, or repurpose your own published content.
## How to Import a YouTube Video
1. Open your **Descript project** or create a new one
2. Click the **Import** button or use the **\+ Add media** option
3. Select **Import from URL**
4. Paste the **YouTube video link** into the URL field
5. Click **Add file** — Descript downloads and transcribes the video automatically
The Import from URL dialog in Descript where you paste a YouTube or GIPHY link
## What Happens After Import
- Descript **downloads the video** and adds it to your project files
- The video is **automatically transcribed** — you can edit it like a text document
- You can use the imported video in any composition alongside your own recordings
- This also works with **GIPHY links** for importing animated GIFs
## Tips
- Make sure you have the **rights to use** any YouTube video you import — respect copyright
- The video quality depends on what YouTube makes available
- This feature uses your **transcription minutes**, so keep that in mind if you're on a limited plan
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Use the New Layer Tab in Descript Underlord
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-the-new-layer-tab-in-descript-underlord/
Last updated: 2026-02-22T09:43:33.000Z
The [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) Underlord update introduced a new **Layer** tab (now renamed to Properties) in the right sidebar. This is where you'll now find all the properties for whatever you have selected — whether that's your script, a shape, text, or any other element on your canvas.
In this article, I'll explain how the Layer/Properties tab works and how to use it for common tasks like adjusting volume, applying effects, and changing element properties.
## What the Layer tab shows
The Layer tab reflects **what you currently have selected**. If you click somewhere in your canvas without selecting anything specific, the Layer tab simply lists the layers in your current scene — but doesn't show detailed properties for any of them.
Once you click on a specific layer — for example, the Script layer — the tab expands to show all relevant controls: volume, audio effects, Studio Sound, opacity, layout, animation, and more.
The Layer tab displays all editable properties for the selected layer, including audio levels, effects, opacity, and animation.
## Adjusting volume with the Layer tab
To change the volume of your audio, click on the **Script layer** in the Layer tab. The volume slider appears immediately. You can drag it to adjust the level for the entire clip (or the selection, if you made one using the Range tool).
If you only want to change the volume for a specific portion, use the [**Range tool**](https://cotovan.com/post/all-descript-tools-walkthrough-with-examples-a-complete-guide/) in the timeline to make a selection first, then adjust the volume. You'll see the volume change applied only to that selected range — visible as a dip or boost in the timeline waveform.
You can also select text in the script editor and adjust the volume for just that sentence or paragraph.
### A gotcha with scene-level selection
One confusing behavior: if you click on the scene itself (in the left panel), the Layer tab may show all layers as selected — but dragging the volume slider doesn't actually change anything. To reliably change volume, either select the Script layer directly, use the Range tool in the timeline, or select text in the script.
## Working with elements
When you add elements like shapes, text, or dynamic objects from the **Elements** panel, each one becomes a separate layer in the scene. You can click on any element — either in the canvas or in the Layer tab list — to see and modify its properties.
For example, adding a circle to your scene creates an Ellipse layer. Clicking it reveals controls for color, opacity, position, and more — all within the Layer/Properties tab.
## Layers vs. tracks
Descript uses the term "layers" for individual objects on your timeline. These are **not** the same as traditional tracks. In Descript, layers within a scene do not necessarily play simultaneously — they're stacked visual elements.
The only true "tracks" in Descript exist inside a [**Sequence**](https://cotovan.com/post/sequences-vs-compositions-in-descript/), where [multiple media items](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-correctly-assemble-multi-track-sequence-in-descript/) play in sync. Cuts made outside a sequence affect all layers, which is the track-like behavior.
### Related guides
[How to Correctly Assemble Multi-track Sequence in DescriptThis tutorial covers the correct way to create a multi-track sequence in Descript.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-correctly-assemble-multi-track-sequence-in-descript/)
[Apply Object Properties to All Scenes in Descript StoryboardIf you have an object you added to your composition and you've created multiple scenes, it can be tedious to apply the same properties to it if you've changed your mind or modified it. Clicking through 20 or so scenes just to change one property can quickly become time-consuming. In Descript Storyboard, some properties can be replicated across all scenes the object appears in, using the new "Apply to all scenes" button in Descript. This button is a tricky one though. It only appears when it waCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/apply-object-properties-to-all-scenes-in-descript-storyboard/)
[Create a Typewriter Text Effect in DescriptYou'll learn how to add and customize text elements, set up the typewriter effect using the latest animation features, and apply both in and out animations for a polished look. Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/create-typewriter-text-effect-descript/)
[All Descript Tools Walkthrough with Examples: A Complete GuideDescript packs a lot of tools into one editor — and if you're not sure what each one does, you might be missing features that could save you hours. In this walkthrough, I'll show you every major tool in Descript with real examples, so you can understand how they all work together. The Underlord Panel (Now, AI Tools) Underlord is Descript's AI-powered command center (Now renamed to "AI Tools". When you open a new project, you'll see it in the right sidebar, organized into three sections: \* SCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/all-descript-tools-walkthrough-with-examples-a-complete-guide/)
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Change Orientation, Resolution and Aspect Ratio of Your Project in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-change-project-orientation/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T11:48:07.000Z
Need to switch your [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) project from landscape to portrait — or vice versa? This quick tip shows you how to change the canvas orientation, resolution, and aspect ratio in just a few clicks using **Project Settings**.
## The Default: Horizontal (16:9)
When you create a new project in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia), it defaults to a standard horizontal 16:9 layout — typically FHD (1920×1080). This is the standard for YouTube videos and most screen recordings.
The default Camtasia canvas is horizontal (16:9)
## Open Project Settings
To change orientation, go to **Edit → Project Settings** (or click the Project Settings button from the Zoom level dropdown above the canvas).
You'll see the current dimensions — by default, FHD at 1920×1080.
Project Settings shows your current canvas dimensions
## Choose Your Orientation
Click the **Dimensions** dropdown to see all available presets. Camtasia groups them into three categories:
- **Horizontal** — AD, SD, HD, FHD, 2K, QHD, 4K UHD
- **Square** — 1:1 Small (600×600) and 1:1 Large (1080×1080)
- **Vertical** — 4:5 Small, 4:5 Large, 9:16 FHD (1080×1920)
For social media clips like Instagram Reels, TikTok, or YouTube Shorts, pick **9:16 FHD (1080×1920)** from the Vertical section.
Select a vertical preset like 9:16 FHD for social media content
## Reposition Your Video
After changing orientation, your video won't automatically fill the new canvas. You'll see black bars where the footage doesn't cover the frame.
The video needs repositioning after switching to vertical
Click on the video in the canvas, then drag and resize it to fill the vertical frame. You may need to scale it up and crop the sides to eliminate the black areas.
Drag and scale the video to fill the vertical canvas
## Custom Dimensions
If none of the presets match your needs, you can also choose **Custom** at the bottom of the dropdown and enter any width and height manually. There's also a **Fit to Visible** option that adjusts the canvas to match whatever is currently visible on screen.
Changing orientation is something you'll use often when repurposing horizontal recordings into vertical social media clips. It only takes a few seconds in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia)'s Project Settings.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Create Social Media Clips in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-social-media-clips-tip/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T21:14:29.000Z
Want to turn your horizontal [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) recordings into vertical clips for TikTok, Instagram Reels, or YouTube Shorts? This quick tip walks you through the entire process in under a minute.
## Step 1: Import Your Video
Start by importing your video clip into the **Media Bin**. Drag it onto the timeline to begin editing.
Import your video and add it to the timeline
## Step 2: Switch to Vertical Orientation
Open **Project Settings** and change the canvas dimensions to a vertical format. Select **9:16 FHD (1080×1920)** from the Vertical section of the dropdown — this is the standard size for social media short-form content.
Choose 9:16 FHD from the Vertical presets
If you want to change to more exotic dimensions, you can choose custom and specify the exact resolution you want. [Camtasia allows that too.](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-change-project-orientation/)
## Step 3: Scale and Reposition
Your horizontal video won't fill the vertical canvas automatically. Click on the video, then **scale it up** and reposition it so that the important part of the frame fills the vertical space. You'll be cropping the sides, so make sure the subject stays centered.
Scale and reposition the video to fill the vertical frame
## Step 4: Add Dynamic Captions
Social media clips perform much better with captions. Go to the **Captions** panel in the left sidebar and choose a **Dynamic Caption Style**. Drag your chosen style onto the timeline — [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) will automatically transcribe the audio and generate animated captions.
Choose a Dynamic Caption Style and drag it to the timeline
Camtasia transcribes the audio automatically and when it's finished, the captions appear on the video with word-by-word highlighting, making them easy to follow even with the sound off.
Dynamic captions highlight words as they're spoken
## Step 5: Export
When you're happy with the clip, click **Export** and choose your destination. You can export as a local MP4 file, or upload directly to YouTube.
Export your vertical clip as MP4 or directly to YouTube
## Quick Summary
1. Import your video into the Media Bin
2. Change Project Settings to 9:16 FHD (vertical)
3. Scale and reposition the video on the canvas
4. Add Dynamic Captions from the Captions panel
5. Export as MP4 or upload directly
That's the complete workflow for creating social media clips in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia). Five steps, under a minute to set up.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Reorder Tools in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-reorder-tools-sidebar/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T12:37:40.000Z
Did you know you can rearrange the tools in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia)'s left sidebar? If there are panels you use more than others, you can drag them to the top so they're always within easy reach. Here's how.
## The Default Tool Order
[Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) ships with a set order of tools in the left sidebar: Favorites, Media, Annotations, Transitions, Visual Effects, Animations, Behaviors, Cursor Effects, Audio Effects, Voice Narration, Gesture Effects, and Captions.
The default tool order in Camtasia's sidebar
## Drag to Reorder
To move a tool, simply **click and drag** it to a new position in the sidebar. Grab any tool name and drag it up or down to where you want it.
Click and hold any tool to start dragging it
As you drag, you'll see the tool move with your cursor. Drop it in the new position and it stays there.
Drag the tool to your preferred position
## Your Custom Layout
Once you drop the tool, the sidebar updates immediately. [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) remembers your custom order, so it persists across sessions.
The reordered sidebar — Visual Effects moved higher for quicker access
## Why Reorder?
- **Speed up your workflow** — Put your most-used tools at the top so you spend less time scrolling
- **Personalize your workspace** — Everyone edits differently, so arrange tools to match how you work
- **Group related tools** — Place tools you use together (like Visual Effects and Annotations) next to each other
It's a small customization, but it makes a noticeable difference when you're editing in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) every day.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Narrate PowerPoint Presentations Using Camtasia (Step-by-Step Guide)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/narrate-powerpoint-presentations-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T11:50:52.000Z
If you need to create a video from a PowerPoint presentation — complete with your own voice narration — [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) makes the process straightforward. You can import your slides, narrate them one by one at your own pace, enhance the audio, and organise everything with markers for easy navigation.
This guide walks through the entire process step by step, from importing your PowerPoint into Camtasia to exporting a polished, narrated video presentation.
## Importing Your Presentation into Camtasia
There are two ways to get your PowerPoint slides into Camtasia. Both work — the choice comes down to convenience.
### Option 1: Export Slides as Images from PowerPoint
Open your presentation in PowerPoint (Mac or Windows — it doesn't matter), go to **File → Export**, and choose **PNG** or **JPEG** as the format. You can export every slide or just the current one. PowerPoint will save each slide as a numbered image file into a folder.
Export your slides as PNG or JPEG images from PowerPoint
Then in Camtasia, click **Import Media** and select all the exported images. They'll appear in your media bin, ready to be placed on the timeline.
### Option 2: Import the PowerPoint File Directly (Recommended)
The easier approach is to import the **.pptx file itself** into Camtasia. Camtasia is smart enough to recognise it as a PowerPoint and automatically converts each slide into individual images for you.
Import the .pptx file directly — Camtasia converts slides to images automatically
When prompted, select **Import all slides**. Camtasia will create PNG images at 1920×1080 (Full HD) resolution, which is exactly what you need for most video projects.
All slides imported as individual Full HD images in the media bin
## Adjusting Project Settings for Your Slides
Before you start building your timeline, check your **project settings**. If your default project resolution is set to 4K but your slides are 1920×1080, you'll want to match them.
Click the **zoom level dropdown** at the top of the canvas and select **Project Settings**. Change the resolution to **FHD (1920×1080)** — the same size as your slides — and click **Apply**.
Match your project resolution to your slide dimensions for a perfect fit
Now your slides will fit the canvas perfectly without any scaling or black borders.
## Adding Slides to the Timeline and Recording Narration
Here's where the real work begins. The approach is simple: **add one slide at a time, narrate it, then move to the next**.
### Placing Your First Slide
Right-click on the first slide in your media bin and select **Add to Timeline at Playhead**. Make sure your playhead is at the beginning of the timeline.
First slide on the timeline — default duration is about 5 seconds
The slide will appear on the timeline with a default duration of about 5 seconds (this is Camtasia's default image duration). Don't worry about this — you can easily **drag the edge of the slide to extend it** to any length you need once you've recorded your narration.
### Recording Your Narration
Position your playhead where you want to start speaking, then open the **Voice Narration** panel from the sidebar.
The Voice Narration panel — check your microphone selection before recording
**Important:** Before you start talking, click the microphone dropdown to make sure the **correct microphone is selected**. Use the level meter to check your input — you should see it bouncing as you speak, with a healthy level that's not peaking.
When ready, click **Start Voice Recording**. You'll get a brief countdown, then Camtasia starts recording from the playhead position.
Recording narration — the audio appears as a waveform on the timeline
### Adjusting Slide Duration and Trimming Audio
After you stop recording, you'll likely notice that the slide ends before your narration does. Not a problem — just **grab the edge of the slide and drag it** to match the length of your audio.
Extend the slide duration and trim any silence at the start or end of your recording
You can also **trim the audio** by zooming in and dragging the edges of the audio clip. Camtasia always records a few seconds of lead-in and lead-out, so trimming these keeps your narration tight.
## Enhancing Your Narration with Audio Effects
Once your narration is recorded, you can improve the audio quality with a couple of quick adjustments:
- **Volume/Gain:** Click on the audio clip to adjust the overall volume up or down
- **Audio Compression:** Drag the **Audio Compression** effect from the Audio Effects panel onto your audio clip. Compression evens out the volume, making quiet parts louder and loud parts quieter, giving you a more consistent, professional sound
- **Noise removal:** If needed, to clean up audio noise such as fans, etc.
Audio compression gives your narration a more consistent, professional volume level
If your timing is slightly off, you can **slide the audio clip** forward or backward on the timeline to realign it with the slide content.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Adding More Slides: Slide-by-Slide Workflow
For the second slide (and every slide after), the process is the same:
1. Move to the **end of your current content** on the timeline
2. **Drag the next slide** from the media bin onto the timeline
3. Close any gaps between clips
4. Position your playhead and **record the narration**
5. Apply **audio compression** to the new recording
6. Trim the start and end as needed
Each slide gets its own narration — build your presentation slide by slide
This slide-by-slide approach is one of the biggest advantages over recording a full presentation in one take. If you make a mistake or don't like how a particular narration sounds, you can **delete just that section and re-record it** without affecting anything else. No need to start over from the beginning.
**Save frequently** as you go — you don't want to lose your work.
## Organising Your Presentation with Markers
As your timeline grows with multiple slides and narration clips, it can become hard to tell where each slide begins — especially if some slides look similar. **Markers** solve this by letting you label points on the timeline.
Switch from Quiz to Marker mode, then click the timeline to add markers
To add markers:
1. Click the small **arrow/dropdown** near the timeline header and switch from **Quiz to Marker**
2. Click on the timeline where a slide begins
3. **Name the marker** (e.g., "Slide 1", "Slide 2", etc.)
Named markers make it easy to navigate between slides on the timeline
Markers make navigation much easier, especially for longer presentations with many slides. You can click any marker to jump straight to that point.
## Tips for a Smooth Workflow
- **Narrate in chunks** — Don't try to record everything in one take. The slide-by-slide approach gives you maximum flexibility
- **Re-record freely** — If a take doesn't sound right, delete it and record again. Only that portion is affected
- **Always apply compression** — It makes a noticeable difference in how professional your narration sounds
- **Check your microphone first** — Before every recording session, verify the correct microphone is selected and the level is healthy
- **Trim the silence** — Camtasia adds a few seconds of dead air at the start and end of each recording. Trim these for a tighter result
- **Use markers** — For presentations with more than 3-4 slides, markers keep you organised and make editing much faster
- **Save often** — Save after every slide narration to protect your work
## The Complete Workflow at a Glance
| Step | What to Do |
| -------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- |
| 1\. Import | Import the .pptx file directly into Camtasia |
| 2\. Project Settings | Set resolution to 1920×1080 (Full HD) to match slides |
| 3\. Add Slide | Right-click → Add to Timeline at Playhead |
| 4\. Narrate | Open Voice Narration panel, check mic, record |
| 5\. Adjust | Extend slide duration, trim audio edges |
| 6\. Enhance | Apply Audio Compression for consistent levels |
| 7\. Repeat | Add next slide, narrate, enhance — slide by slide |
| 8\. Organise | Add named markers for easy navigation |
| 9\. Export | Export your finished narrated presentation as video |
That's it — a complete, narrated PowerPoint presentation created entirely in Camtasia. The slide-by-slide approach gives you full control over pacing, lets you re-record any section easily, and produces a professional result with properly compressed audio and organised markers.
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Audio Ducking in Camtasia with the Audio Emphasize Effect
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-audio-ducking-emphasize-effect/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T20:37:06.000Z
When you add background music to a [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) project, you often need the music to get quieter when someone is speaking and come back up during pauses. This is called **audio ducking**, and Camtasia makes it easy with the **Audio Emphasize** effect.
## What Is Audio Ducking?
Audio ducking automatically lowers the volume of one audio track (like background music) when another track (like your voice) is playing. Instead of manually adjusting volume keyframes throughout your timeline, the **Emphasize** effect handles it automatically.
## Finding the Audio Emphasize Effect
Open the **Audio Effects** panel in the left sidebar. You'll see all available audio effects: Audio Compressor, **Emphasize**, Noise Removal, Pitch, Fade In, Fade Out, Captions, and Clip Speed. Drag the **Emphasize** effect onto the audio track you want to prioritize — typically your voice narration track.
The Audio Effects panel with the Emphasize effect highlighted
## Setting Up Your Timeline
For audio ducking to work, you need at least two audio tracks — one with your narration or primary audio, and another with background music. In this example, the timeline has multiple tracks: a callout track, a shape track, the main video with voice, and a separate music track at the bottom.
A multi-track timeline with voice narration and background music
## Emphasize Properties
After applying the **Emphasize effect**, select the clip to see its properties on the right side. The key settings are:
- **Emphasis** — Controls how much the other tracks are reduced (0-100). Higher values mean more ducking. The default of 80 works well for most cases.
- **Ramp** — Choose between **Outside** mode (ducks audio outside the selected clip) or toggle for different behavior.
- **Ramp In** — How quickly the ducking fades in (in seconds). A value of 1s gives a smooth transition.
- **Ramp Out** — How quickly the ducking releases after the voice stops.
The Emphasize properties — Emphasis at 80 with Outside ramp mode
## Applying the Effect
Drag the **Emphasize** effect from the Audio Effects panel onto the track you want to emphasize — your narration track. [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) automatically detects when audio is present on that track and ducks all other audio tracks accordingly.
The Emphasize effect applied to the narration track
## Fine-Tuning the Settings
With the effect applied, you can adjust the properties to get the right balance. If the music is still too loud during narration, increase the **Emphasis** value. If the transitions feel abrupt, increase the **Ramp In** and **Ramp Out** times for smoother fades.
Adjust the Emphasis slider and ramp times to fine-tune the ducking
## The Result
Once applied, the music plays at full volume during pauses and automatically ducks when speaking resumes.
## Quick Reference
- **Effect location:** Audio Effects panel → Emphasize
- **Apply to:** The track you want to keep loud (narration)
- **Emphasis slider:** 80 is a good default (higher = more ducking)
- **Ramp mode:** Outside — ducks audio on other tracks
- **Ramp In/Out:** 1 second for smooth transitions
The Audio Emphasize effect in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) saves you from manually keyframing volume changes. Apply it once, adjust the settings, and your background music automatically ducks whenever you're speaking.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Correctly Assemble Multi-track Sequence in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-correctly-assemble-multi-track-sequence-in-descript/
Last updated: 2026-02-22T08:09:36.000Z
When you record a podcast or interview with separate tracks for each participant, assembling them correctly in [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) is crucial. Get it wrong and you end up with overlapping audio, mismatched timecodes, or missing speakers. Get it right and you have a perfectly synchronized multi-track project with per-speaker editing controls.
## Selecting Your Files
Start by importing your separate track files into Descript. In the Project > Files panel, select the video or audio files for each participant. The important step here is to select all the files you want in the sequence before creating it. Descript needs to know which files belong together so it can properly synchronize and arrange them on the timeline.
Selecting multiple participant files in the Descript Files panel with the Create sequence button ready.
Once your files are selected, click the "Create sequence" button. This tells Descript to treat these files as synchronized tracks that should be edited together, rather than creating separate compositions for each file.
## The Multi-Track Timeline
After creating the sequence, Descript opens the sequence editor with a proper multi-track timeline. Each speaker gets their own track with separate audio waveforms, making it easy to see who is speaking at any point. The tracks are automatically aligned based on their timecodes or content matching.
The Descript sequence editor showing separate audio waveforms for each speaker on the multi-track timeline.
The multi-track timeline gives you individual control over each speaker's audio. You can adjust volume levels, apply effects, or mute tracks independently. This is essential for podcast editing where one speaker might be louder than the other or where you need to remove background noise from only one track.
## Understanding Layers
Outside of the sequence, the Layers panel is where you manage the visual and audio components of each speaker. Each participant appears as a separate layer with their script track, video, and audio. You can control visibility, solo audio tracks, adjust volume per layer, and lock layers you do not want to accidentally modify.
The Layers panel showing individual speaker layers with per-layer visibility and audio controls.
Understanding layers is key to effective multi-track editing in Descript. When you delete text from the transcript, it removes that content from all synced tracks. But when you adjust volume or apply effects, you can target specific layers. This separation gives you both the convenience of text-based editing and the precision of traditional multi-track tools.
## The Complete Editor View
With your sequence properly assembled, the full Descript editor gives you everything in one view: the multi-speaker transcript on the left with labeled speaker sections, the video preview showing your layout, the Layers panel for per-speaker control, and the audio timeline at the bottom. This is your primary workspace for editing the multi-track project.
The complete Descript editor with multi-speaker transcript, video preview, Layers panel, and audio timeline.
## Common Mistakes to Avoid
- **Do not create separate compositions** — If you import each file into its own composition, they will not be synchronized. Always use "Create sequence" and then create a composition from that sequence, to keep tracks linked.
- **Do not use drag-and-drop for multiple files** — Dragging files directly into the script area creates separate entries. Use the Files panel workflow instead.
- **Check file alignment** — After creating the sequence, play it back and verify that speakers are in sync. If tracks drifted, you may need to use aligned files from your recording platform or synchronise them manually.
- **Name your speakers** — After transcription, make sure each speaker is correctly identified and named. This makes text-based editing much easier.
## Sequence vs Composition
Descript has two types of core structures: sequences and compositions. The key differences for multi-track work:
- **Sequence** — Multi-track container with separate tracks for each file. Maintains individual audio control. Use this for interview and podcast projects with separate recordings per speaker.
- **Composition** — Single-track container. It can be created from a single file but also from a sequence, so that you can edit files in sync.
For any project with multiple speakers recorded on separate files, always start with a sequence.
## Wrapping Up
Properly assembling a multi-track sequence in Descript sets the foundation for everything that follows — editing, mixing, multicam switching, and export. Take the time to use the correct workflow from the start. Select your files in the Files panel, create a sequence, verify sync, and you will have a clean multi-track project that is a pleasure to edit.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Master Audio Transitions and Keyframes in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-audio-transitions-keyframes/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T20:44:21.000Z
Getting clean audio transitions in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) is essential for professional-sounding videos. Whether you need a smooth fade in at the start, a fade out at the end, or precise volume control throughout your project, Camtasia's audio tools make it straightforward.
## Setting Up Your Audio
Start by importing your audio file into the Media Bin and placing it on the timeline. Techniques work with any audio: narration, music, sound effects, or podcast recordings.
The Camtasia workspace with an audio track loaded and ready for editing
## Audio Effects Panel
Open the **Audio Effects** panel from the left sidebar. Here you'll find all the audio effects available in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia): Emphasize, Noise Removal, Pitch, **Fade In**, **Fade Out**, Captions, and Clip Speed.
For audio transitions, the two you'll use most are Fade In and Fade Out.
The Audio Effects panel with Fade In and Fade Out effects
## Applying a Fade In
Drag the **Fade In** effect from the Audio Effects panel onto your audio clip in the timeline. The effect attaches to the beginning of the clip. You'll see the waveform gradually increase from silence to full volume over the fade duration.
The Fade In effect creates a smooth volume ramp at the start of your audio
## Applying a Fade Out
Similarly, drag **Fade Out** onto the end of an audio clip. This creates a gradual decrease from full volume down to silence. You can apply Fade Out to any track — if you have music on Track 1 and narration on Track 2, each can have its own independent fade.
## Working with Audio Keyframes
For more precise control, use **audio keyframes**. When you apply a fade effect, Camtasia creates keyframe points on the audio clip's volume line. You can see these as small dots on the green volume line that runs along the audio waveform. The "0%" label indicates where volume drops to zero.
You can also add keyframes manually by clicking on the volume line. Drag keyframe points up or down to adjust volume at any specific point in the timeline. This gives you frame-accurate control over your audio levels.
Audio keyframes on the timeline — the green line shows the volume curve with a keyframe at 0%
## Manual Volume Curves
Beyond the built-in fade effects, you can create custom volume steps by placing multiple keyframes along your audio clip. Click on the green volume line at the point where you want to change volume, then drag the keyframe up or down. This is useful for:
- **Ducking music under narration** — lower the music volume during speech, bring it back up during pauses, although Camtasia has a specialized "ducking" effect called "Emphasize"
- **Emphasizing specific moments** — boost volume at key points
- **Creating custom transitions** — build complex fades that aren't a simple linear ramp
A custom volume curve with keyframes for precise audio control
## Tips for Clean Audio Transitions
- **Default fade duration** works well for most cases — adjust by dragging the keyframe points if needed
- **Zoom in** on the timeline for precise keyframe placement
- **Always Fade Out music** at the end of your video — an abrupt stop sounds unprofessional
- **Combine with Emphasize** for automatic ducking instead of manual keyframes
Audio transitions and keyframes in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) give you everything from quick one-click fades to fine-grained volume control. Start with the built-in Fade In and Fade Out effects, and move to manual keyframes when you need more precision.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Upload to YouTube Directly from DaVinci Resolve
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-upload-to-youtube-directly-from-davinci-resolve/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T09:44:25.000Z
If you're editing in DaVinci Resolve and uploading your finished videos to YouTube, you might not know that **DaVinci Resolve has a built-in YouTube upload feature** that lets you render and upload in one step — no need to export a file first and then manually upload it through your browser.
In this guide, I'll walk you through how to connect your YouTube account to DaVinci Resolve and upload videos directly from the Deliver page. It takes about two minutes to set up, and once connected, DaVinci remembers your account — so future uploads are just a couple of clicks.
## **Setting Up Your YouTube Account in DaVinci Resolve**
Before you can upload directly to YouTube, you need to connect your Google account to DaVinci Resolve. Here's how:
1. Open **DaVinci Resolve** and go to the **Deliver** page (the rocket icon at the bottom)
2. Along the top of the Render Settings panel, you'll see presets for different platforms — click the **YouTube** icon
The YouTube preset on DaVinci Resolve's Deliver page gives you optimized export settings
This gives you YouTube-optimized export settings automatically (resolution, codec, frame rate). But before you can upload, you need to link your YouTube account.
1. Go to **DaVinci Resolve → Preferences** (on Mac) or **File → Preferences** (on Windows)
2. Navigate to the **Internet Accounts** section in the left sidebar
The Internet Accounts section in Preferences shows all available platform connections
Here you'll see all the platforms DaVinci Resolve can connect to: YouTube, Vimeo, Twitter, TikTok, Dropbox, and Blackmagic Cloud. Click the **Sign In** button next to YouTube.
## Granting DaVinci Resolve Permissions to Manage Your YouTube Account
Clicking "Sign In" opens a browser window where Google asks you to authorize DaVinci Resolve.
Select the Google account associated with the YouTube channel you want to upload to
Select the Google account that owns the YouTube channel you want to upload to. If your Google account has multiple YouTube channels, you'll be asked to choose which channel to connect.
**Important:** You can only connect **one YouTube channel** per DaVinci Resolve installation. Choose the channel you upload to most frequently.
Click Allow to grant DaVinci Resolve permission to manage your YouTube videos
Google will ask you to confirm that DaVinci Resolve can **"Manage your YouTube videos"**. Click **Allow** to grant the permission. This is safe — it only allows DaVinci to upload videos on your behalf.
Once authorized, go back to DaVinci Resolve and you'll see your account listed as connected in the Internet Accounts panel. Click **Save** to close Preferences.
## Exporting and Uploading Your Video Directly to YouTube
Now that your account is connected, here's how to upload a video:
1. Go to the **Deliver** page and select the **YouTube** preset at the top
2. Scroll down in the settings panel and check the box: **"Upload directly to YouTube"**
Once you enable that checkbox, additional YouTube-specific fields appear:
Enter your YouTube title, description, and upload settings directly in DaVinci Resolve
- **Title** — The title that will appear on YouTube (this is separate from the file name at the top of the panel)
- **Description** — Add your video description
- **Chapters from Markers** — Optionally include timeline markers as YouTube chapters
- **Upload Thumbnail** — Attach a custom thumbnail
- **Privacy** — Choose Private, Public, or Unlisted
- **Category** — Select a YouTube category (e.g., Film & Animation, Education)
Set Privacy to Private so you can finalize the video in YouTube Studio before publishing
**Pro tip:** I strongly recommend setting the privacy to **Private** for your upload. This way, DaVinci Resolve uploads the video without publishing it immediately. You can then go into YouTube Studio to add a more detailed description, tags, end screens, cards, and schedule the publish time — all before your audience sees it.
When everything looks good, click **"Add to Render Queue"** at the bottom of the panel. DaVinci will ask you to choose a save location for the video file (it still saves a local copy before uploading).
Click Add to Render Queue when your upload settings are ready
## Rendering and Uploading
With your job in the Render Queue, click **"Render All"** to start.
DaVinci Resolve will:
1. Render your video to the local folder you specified
2. Automatically begin uploading to YouTube once rendering is complete
You can monitor the progress in the Render Queue panel on the right — it will show **"Uploading..."** once the render finishes and the upload begins.
The Render Queue shows the upload progress after rendering completes
## Finalizing Your Video on YouTube
Once the upload completes, head over to [YouTube Studio](https://studio.youtube.com/?ref=cotovan.com). You'll see your video appear in the content list with a **"Pending"** status while YouTube processes it.
Your video appears in YouTube Studio as Pending while it processes
From here, you can:
- Edit the title and description further
- Add tags and hashtags
- Upload or change the thumbnail
- Add end screens and cards
- Schedule the video to go public at a specific time
- Set monetization options
The upload is complete — your video is ready to finalize in YouTube Studio
And that's it! The upload completed successfully. Notice in the Render Queue on the right side it confirms **"Upload completed"**.
## Why This Integration Is Worth Using
The best part about this feature is that **DaVinci Resolve remembers your connected account**. Unlike some other video editors where you have to re-authenticate every time, DaVinci keeps the connection active.
So your next upload is literally:
1. Go to Deliver page
2. Select YouTube preset
3. Enter title, set to Private
4. Add to Render Queue → Render All
Two clicks and your video is on its way to YouTube while you move on to your next project.
If you found this guide helpful, check out my [Media Makers Club](https://www.mediamakers.club/?ref=cotovan.com) membership for more video editing tutorials, courses, and a community of fellow creators.
### Invite Editors to Your Descript Project for Seamless Collaboration
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/invite-editors-to-your-descript-project-for-seamless-collaboration/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:08:40.000Z
If you're working in [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) and would like to collaborate with someone, like send your project to an editor to make edits while you keep your project on your drive, there is a very easy way to do that by inviting them to your project.
I see this question a lot, and a lot of people don't know this, but you can actually share every project with your editor without inviting them to your Descript drive.
## Collaboration Made Easy
Inviting someone to your drive means you have to pay for a seat for them, like a monthly subscription for them to have access to your drive and all the projects on it. But if you just need to collaborate with someone on a single project, or would like to avoid these fees, you can do it by inviting that person to every project you need them to work on.
So let me show you how to do this. You open the project, and then on the top right, it shows you all of the different people who have access to this particular project. You can see that I have access here, and I'm also viewing it now, so it tells you if those people are watching or working on the project now.
Also, it shows me that members of my drive have access and can edit this project.
But also you have this plus icon here which I can click, and then I can invite someone to be a member of this project, just have access to this one project. I'm going to have my daughter invited to this project because I work with her sometimes.
And here it says, what permissions would you like to give this person? They can edit, or they can just comment. They will get an email inviting them to this project, and then they will be able to obviously comment or make changes to it.
## What changes can collaborators make?
The changes they can make are all the changes they could do even if they owned the project themselves, with one exception: They cannot initiate transcription on your behalf because the project lives on your drive.
You have your minutes of transcription every month, and then when you share projects with other people, they cannot actually transcribe new files that they add or transcribe files that you added.
So if you're going to work with an editor, then you need to give them permission to the project and transcribe the files they will need to use in advance. Otherwise, they won't be able to transcribe those files.
## Log on with their own Descript account
And this person that you're inviting, they can log on with their Descript account. So make sure that the email you use in here to invite this person is their actual Descript account. And also they can be on a free plan. They don't have to have a subscription to access your project and work on your project that resides on your drive.
## Flexibility and Control
If you have a Pro subscription, you have a project, you can share it with someone, they can log on with their Descript account, they can work on the project, and then when they're done they tell you, but they don't have to send you anything. The project still lives on your drive and you can revoke access at any time.
## Export limitations
So another thing you need to know is that if you are sharing this with someone this way, another limitation is that they cannot export at the full resolution. So if you have a Pro account, you know that in Descript you can export projects in up to 4k resolution and full quality and all those things.
But if you share that project with someone else, they cannot export it at full HD or 4k. They will only be able to export at a very low resolution, 720p usually.
That is really probably something that's not going to be necessary because if you have someone else working with you on projects, you will probably be the one exporting the final edit anyway. So that may not be a problem for you.
## Working with Clients
Just so you know, this is the way that I work with most of my clients. Some of them do invite me to their drive, and I have access to several drives this way so that I can go in there and have access to all the projects on that drive.
But if there are customers or clients who are more financially minded and they don't want to pay a monthly subscription just for me to access their drive, then they can invite me.
And they usually invite me to each project on its own as we work on, and we've been doing this for years. And I do hope that Descript doesn't remove this feature because it's really useful and saves a lot of money.
## Conclusion
So there you have it. That's how you can invite someone. Just click invite to project. And when you do this they receive an email saying Cristi has shared a project with you, click to open and they will be able to open that project again.
They need to be logged into their Descript account and they also have to have the latest version that you have created here, this project in.
So if I have version 81.2, then if they have 81 or earlier than that they will get an error saying that the project is not compatible.
The reason is Descript upgrades the project as soon as you open it in a newer version, and it can no longer be opened in older versions. So your collaborators will have to make sure they upgrade Descript also, at least to the version that you have used to open the project last.
I hope this helps. Thank you for reading. If you enjoyed this information, feel free to explore more of my content and consider subscribing to my newsletter for regular updates and tips on Descript and other related topics or check out Media Makers Club - a place where you can get free access to all my courses, one-on-one coaching discounts, weekly Q&A sessions and more.
### 3 Best Animations in Camtasia (And How to Use Them)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-3-best-animations/
Last updated: 2026-02-20T07:47:15.000Z
[Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) has a lot of animation presets, but you don't need all of them. In this tutorial, I'll show you the **3 animations I use the most** — and how to add them to your Favorites for quick access.
## 1\. Custom Animation
The **Custom** animation is the most powerful option in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia). It adds a keyframe at the current playhead position, letting you animate any property — position, scale, rotation, opacity — with full control.
The keyboard shortcut makes it even faster: **Shift + A** (Mac) or **Shift + A** (Windows). This instantly adds a custom animation keyframe without needing to open the Animations panel at all.
The Custom animation and its keyboard shortcut — Cmd+Shift+A on Mac
Once you add a custom keyframe, the properties appear in the right panel. Here you can set exact values for Scale, Opacity, Rotation, and Position. Move the playhead forward, change the values, and Camtasia animates between the keyframes.
If you're just moving or rotating, you can just grab the object or clip and move it, no need to change values in the Properties panel. Camtasia will record the new values for the animation.
The properties panel let you control every aspect of the animation
## 2\. Restore Animation
The **Restore** animation is the perfect companion to Custom. After you've moved, scaled, or changed an element with Custom keyframes, Restore brings it back to its original state with a smooth transition - an animation equivalent to the previous one but in reverse.
This is incredibly useful for "zoom in, then zoom back out" effects — use Custom to zoom into a detail, then Restore to smoothly return to the original view. It saves you from manually setting the return keyframe values.
Restore smoothly returns any element to its original properties
## 3\. Scale to Fit
**Scale to Fit** automatically scales any element to fill the entire canvas. This is particularly useful when you have a webcam clip or an image that's smaller than your project dimensions and you want it to fill the screen.
Combine Scale to Fit with Custom for dynamic effects: start with the element small in one corner, then Scale to Fit brings it to full screen. Or do it in reverse — start full screen and Custom-animate it down to a corner.
Scale to Fit — automatically scales elements to fill the canvas
## Combining the Three
The real power comes from combining these three animations. A common workflow:
1. **Scale to Fit** — Start with your webcam filling the screen
2. **Custom** — Animate it down to a small corner when showing a screen recording
3. **Restore** — Bring it back to full screen when you're talking to camera again
This creates professional-looking transitions between talking head and screen recording segments without any complex keyframe work.
Animations in action — combining effects for professional transitions
## Bonus: Add to Favorites
You can star any effect or animation in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) to add it to your **Favorites** panel. Click the star icon on Custom, Restore, and Scale to Fit, and they'll all appear in one place — along with any other effects you use frequently (like Glow, Fade, Audio Compression, or Emphasize).
The Favorites panel — star your most-used effects for quick access
## Quick Reference
| Animation | What It Does | Best For |
| ---------------- | -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ |
| **Custom** | Adds a keyframe for any property | Moving, scaling, fading — anything |
| **Restore** | Returns to original state | Zooming back out, resetting position |
| **Scale to Fit** | Scales to fill the canvas | Making webcam/images full screen |
These three animations cover 90% of what you'll need in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia). Master them, add them to Favorites, and learn the **Shift+A** shortcut — you'll be animating faster than ever.
[Basics of Animation in Camtasia: A Beginner’s Guide to Keyframes and MotionAnimation brings static elements to life — and Camtasia makes it surprisingly accessible even for beginners. In this comprehensive tutorial, I cover everything from basic preset animations to custom keyframe-based motion, showing you how to precisely move objects across the canvas. Watch the full tutorial: Understanding the Animations Panel Camtasia’s animationCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/basics-of-animation-in-camtasia-a-beginners-guide-to-keyframes-and-motion/)
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Descript v81: Animation Updates, Effects, AI Improvements and More
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-v81-animation-updates-effects-ai-improvements-and-more/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:54:33.000Z
It's January 23rd, 2024 and Descript has rolled out version 81\. In this update, there are some significant improvements that I am excited to share. Let's dive into them!
## Animations with Variable Speed
One of the standout features in this update is the ability to change the motion style of animations in Descript. I've been asking for this for a long time, ever since I first laid out on animation in Descript.
Previously, all animations moved at a linear speed, meaning they had a constant velocity throughout. However, with this new update, you can now choose from different speed options to add more dynamics to your animations. It makes them seem more 'human', in a way.
The animation options include:
This upgrade is a significant improvement to the animation capabilities in Descript. However, the user interface for animations can still be a bit tricky. I requires quite a few clicks to get anything done or adjusted.
Hopefully, future updates will address this and enhance the overall user experience.
## Unified Cursor and Playhead
Prior to this update, Descript had separate locations for the cursor and playhead, which could be confusing for users. However, in version 81, the cursor and playhead now move in sync.
This means that wherever you click in the transcript or timeline, both the cursor and playhead will align accordingly.
This is a common sense user interface improvement that greatly improves the overall usability of the product.
## Convenient Removal of Effects
An added convenience in this update is the ability to remove effects directly from the sidebar. Previously, removing an effect had this little 'minus' sign next to it which may not have been immediately obvious.
With the new remove effect button located within the properties bar inside the effect drop-down, removing effects has become much more clear and streamlined.
## Enhanced Text-to-Image Feature
Descript's text-to-image feature has received an upgrade in this release. By utilizing artificial intelligence, Descript generates images based on text prompts.
In version 81, Descript has upgraded from DALL-E 2 to DALL-E 3, which is a more advanced model for image processing.
To access this feature, navigate to the media bin, select images, and then choose text-to-image.
Simply enter your prompt, such as "a fox running in a blizzard on a hill in winter" and let Descript work its magic.
The generated images can be easily added to your project, and you can even generate variations for more options.
## Bug Fixes and Improvements
As with any software update, Descript version 81 includes numerous bug fixes and general improvements. It's reassuring to know that the Descript team is continuously working to make the application better with each release.
Here they are, from the Descript changelog:
Stay tuned for more updates!
### Descript Exports a Duplicate Set of Subtitles with My Video
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-exports-a-second-set-of-subtitles-with-my-video/
Last updated: 2025-11-11T19:18:57.000Z
Not all players display these subtitles but most players that support subtitles will allow you to enable them. QuickTime on the Mac will show them by default I believe. The Video player on Windows or VLC can also turn them on.
I suspect this is an accessibility feature and that's probably the reason behind Descript's choice to export them by default. Some users are annoyed by this because if they also burn the subtitles on the video itself, using Captions (previously Fancy Captions), that video will also display those and it appears like the video has two sets of captions.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## How to remove soft subtitles in Descript?
This is a common complaint from Descript users and at the time of this post, there's no way to disable this behaviour in Descript Storyboard.
The only way to get rid of these is post-export at this time is using an external tool such as Losslesscut.
Here's how to remove soft subtitles embedded in your exported video:
Open the video in [Losslesscut](https://cotovan.com/tag/losslesscut/):
Go to the top-left where the "Tracks" are shown and inspect the tracks:
Losslesscut's track inspector allows you to view audio, video and subtitle tracks
You can see in this image, track 2 is mov\_tetx3g – some kind of subtitle file. It shows on the Mac only, I suppose.
Click on the three dots on the right of that track and choose to 'Discard all subtitle tracks':
You can also click the green icon next to that track to disable it when saving:
Close the track inspector window and then choose "Export" to save your video:
Export the video. Losslesscut won't overwrite your original one.
On the final confirmation screen, you should see that the input has the full number of tracks but Losslesscut will confirm how many tracks it's 'keeping':
Click Export here again and you should have a new video file in that same folder where your original was (unless you've chosen a different location).
If you reopen that file in Losslesscut, you should now have only TWO tracks (video and audio). And because Losslesscut usually saves without reencoding, you don't lose any video quality and the process takes 1 second:
So that's how you remove those unwanted 'soft subtitles' from videos where Descript adds them by default.
By the way, Losslesscut is free, although when you visit the download page, you might notice that it takes you to app store links where it's not free. They have to make some money too, don't they? But if you keep scrolling, you should be able to find the free download links for it.
Let me know in the comments if this works for you!
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Descript Migration: Classic to Storyboard - Minicourse
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-migration-classic-to-storyboard-minicourse/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:03:46.000Z
## Don't Panic! We're About to Lose Access to Descript Classic
Descript announced that their old version of the product - the Classic version - would be retired on October 1st. If you were still relying on it, unfortunately you have no choice anymore.
I've been using the new version - Storyboard - for over a year and have been coaching more than 100 clients on how to use it, in addition to my Descript Storyboard Course.
## Let me hold your hand
I'm going to be live on Monday for a one-hour breakdown of the new version vs the old and to answer your questions.
I will be going through a detailed walkthrough and comparison between [Classic and the new version - Storyboard](https://www.mediamakers.club/courses/descript-classic-to-storyboard-migration?ref=cotovan.com):
- Navigating the new interface
- Where has everything moved?
- What is the new name for stuff?
- Where are the files, compositions?
- What are scenes and how do they work?
- What will happen to my old projects?
- And more...
We will go over every feature so that you can have a seamless transition and hit the ground running.
If you're a podcast editor, video editor, podcast manager, or simply want to record and edit your podcast using Descript, and have resisted the change to Storyboard until now, sadly, the window is closing this weekend.
If you haven't taken the plunge into Descript Storyboard yet, this is your chance to get up to speed and have a kickstart!
Update: If you've missed this webinar, I've created a minicourse from it with the same information, but broken down into neat chapters for easy consumption. You can [watch it at your own leisure here](https://www.mediamakers.club/courses/descript-classic-to-storyboard-migration?ref=cotovan.com).
### Backing Up Your Descript Work: Best Practice Advice
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/backing-up-your-descript-work/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:06:39.000Z
A user in the Descript Users Facebook Community asked an interesting question about backing up your Descript projects.
She was worried what's going to happen to all her projects / compositions if Descript stops working or functioning someday. She has a lot of projects or compositions published and hosted by Descript on their website hosting side of it. She uses it for her students as content for learning.
## My recommendation is this:
I think you should not rely on any platform, Descript or other, anything that's not in your control can fail or be discontinued at some point, or be stopped. Or, let's say, you decide to stop paying for Descript and they will remove all of their projects from their platform.
And since Descript doesn't allow you to actually create backups of your projects, a backup you can actually restore; there is a backup functionality in Descript in the 'Help' menu, but that actually just saves the project with the edits and cuts and things like that, it doesn't actually save the files involved in your project.
The files are actually hosted on Amazon's cloud servers and they are just referenced in your project in Descript.The files don't actually live on Descript servers.
When you back up a project in Descript, you will just back up the metadata, let's call it, and the project information with the cuts you made, and all the compositions you made. If you try to then restore those, it can be done.
But this backup is actually used more like a debugging feature, let's call it, when Descript crashes or has a severe issue, they will save a backup of your projects this way. That being said, there is no way to go to Descript and export a project with everything in it, all the dependencies, all of the files, in a single archive, which I can download and keep on my project or my hard drive or some kind of cloud backup that I may have, and then at a later date, restore that and have my project or even open it up and consume it in another application.
## That's not how Descript works
Descript will just keep all the files in the cloud. All the changes you make will be uploaded to the cloud, all of the edits. Every time you update Descript, your projects get updated when you open them. So, that is another thing, because if you back up a version of a project that is, let's say version 75, and a few weeks later there's 76, 77 comes out, your project technically is old now.And as soon as you need to open it in a new version, it needs to be upgraded anyway. So that is the case against relying on Descript for backing up your stuff, or keeping it there long term.
Descript is an editing tool. They allow you to edit and publish your stuff, but other than that, they don't have, as far as I know, or as far as I understand it, they don't have a strategy for long term project retention, backing up, restoration, all those things.
Descript can also be used as a review tool, where you are working on your projects, you can share with your collaborators, with your clients, so they can view it, they can watch your project, they can add comments to it, request changes.
But once you're done, my recommendation is to just export everything, export your video, export your final video, your final podcast episode, your final edit of that episode, export it, and keep that file, and archive it. Export it at the highest resolution or quality you can.
My advice is to keep your original files on archive as well, and just back up everything.
Back up everything to something that you control, not on someone else's platform or program or locked into a specific format.
This applies to anything, programs evolve every year, they have new versions coming out, new updates, so your older projects slowly become obsolete. Which means you need to probably find a way to back up everything in a more universal format.
And this applies also if you're hosting stuff to YouTube. YouTube doesn't guarantee you're going to keep your channel forever. If something comes up and they get upset at you or something, or invalid traffic or any other issue, they may delete your channel and then you've lost all of that work and all those videos.
So that is my advice. Keep everything yourself. Even if you publish your courses to course platforms like Thinkific or Teachable, or if you upload your videos to YouTube, or if you edit stuff in Descript and host it temporarily for review, I say, ultimately, back up everything that you have in a place that you have 100 percent control, a place that you ultimately have a say in.
Maybe it's a Dropbox account or OneDrive, Google Drive, whatever version of a backup platform you have, use that.
I have years of projects backed up on my home server, in my Dropbox account, OneDrive, and I can go back to them whenever I wish. Should I lose everything, maybe even my YouTube channel gets deleted, I can recover all of that stuff.
Do not rely on any of these platforms for long term storage and always back up your full quality files and your source files if you think you're going to need to make changes.
Descript allows you to export your compositions to video, export everything, export your final videos, final edits, final episodes, export your audio files, export your main source files that you used to create the project in the first place, save your logos and export your transcripts, if you used transcripts for, to make transcript corrections and all those things, just back up everything to something that you have ultimate control of.
So that is my advice for you today. I hope it helps.
## Learn Descript in the Media Makers Club
Do you struggle to learn Descript and use it to its full potential? Are you a beginner and feel like there's so much more to learn and use but not enough time or resources?
How about joining Media Makers Club and enter a community of like-minded editors, users of Descript, Camtasia, video creators, podcasters, course creators and youtubers?
When you become a Media Makers Club member, you get free access to the complete Descript Storyboard Course, Mini courses, Webinars, Downloadable resources and Templates, Q&A sessions, and have your questions answered live or in a video by me.
### Sequences vs Compositions in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/sequences-vs-compositions-in-descript/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:04:42.000Z
Sequences and Compositions in [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) are the first things you need to familiarize yourself with as they are the most important. New Descript users usually have difficulty with the distinction between the two so I'll attempt to explain in this article.
## What are Descript sequences?
Sequences are the closest you're going to get in Descript Storyboard to a multi-track audio or video editor. Think Adobe Audition, Adobe Premiere, DaVinci Resolve, Camtasia... that.
Sequences allow you to assemble multiple audio and video files, synchronise them and play them. If you have an interview recorded via Zoom or Riverside or another platform that supports storing separate tracks for each speaker, then you can bring those into Descript, synchronise them in a sequence and that's your assembled 'episode'.
## How do I create a sequence?
You can create a sequence from one or more files. Upload the files to Descript by going to the Media Bin at the top:
You don't have to worry about transcribing the files at this time. It won't affect what you do next.
Select the files (hold down Shift), and create a sequence from them:
If you have other files and you can't use Shift to select them all, just go to the 'Add files' button on the top-right of the Media Bin and choose "Sequence" to create a blank sequence:
As soon as the sequence editor opens up, go to the Add media button on the top right, and add your files one by one, each time selecting 'Add as new track':
When you've finished adding all your files, you can sync them by moving them left or right on their tracks using the Select tool:
Finally, when you're done creating your sequence, click the blue DONE button at the top, and close it.
Go back to the Media Bin, right-click your new sequence (it might be inside the 'Sequences' folder), and either choose "Create composition from file" or drag it to your existing composition, if you have one selected:
There you go, that's how you create a sequence in Descript Storyboard from scratch. Now, when you make edits in your composition, all changes will stay in sync because you'll be editing, cutting, all tracks at the same time.
## What are compositions for in Descript?
You can create compositions directly from files or from sequences. Compositions allow you to edit your transcription and content, arrange elements on screen such as annotations, photos, other video clips, and have them play at the appropriate time.
Yes, you can create compositions from files, but you can't create a composition from a multi-track interview, for example, and have those audio or video files keep in sync when you make edits. That's when you want to create a composition from a sequence.
## How do compositions and sequences work together?
You can create a composition from a sequence. You can't create a sequence from a composition. So it doesn't go both ways.
A composition is also the only thing you can export out of Descript as a final product. After you've made all your edits, text corrections, added music, B-roll, images, annotations, captions, and other elements to your composition, you can export it as a video (or audio, if you're editing an audio-only piece). Then that composition becomes your audio or video file.
### Descript Transcript Correction Doesn't Stick?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-transcript-correction-doesnt-stick/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:38:43.000Z
You may have come across a situation where [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) will ignore your transcription corrections. This is due to a bug that's been around for some time, but can also be due to crosstalk or a conflict in word alignment.
I have several clients that request perfect transcriptions out of the episodes we edit - videos, podcasts, maybe you use Descript to create captions for your videos. It doesn't matter.
However, you may encounter situations when you make a correction in Descript, you press ENTER, it underlines the words for a second and then removes your correction and goes back to the old word. No matter what you do, you can't have it accept and keep that correction. What gives?
## The Main Cause: Crosstalk
This behaviour can be explained most of the time by the existence of crosstalk in your audio. If two people are speaking over each other and you're trying to capture the entire conversation, at some point the transcription engine will miss some words.
But even if you do make a correction and add in the missing words (after all, you're hearing them, aren't you?), the Descript alignment engine may disagree. It may have trouble figuring out which words to keep and which words to discard for that particular piece of audio?
In this situation, you're going to have to resolve the crosstalk somehow by removing some of the audio from the audio track and allowing just one person to speak.
Removing crosstalk is of course not possible if you have a single audio file for the entire conversation, but easier to do in a sequence if you've recorded each person on a separate track.
## Removing crosstalk in a multi-track sequence
In order to remove crosstalk in a sequence, you can either use the Range tool to make a selection on the conflicting track and removing that audio.
You will notice I've made two cuts - before and after the portion I wanted to shift. This is to avoid de-synchronising the rest of the track.
Ideally, you should perform this cleaning up before you make cuts and remove filler words and other edits in the compositions that you create from that sequence. That's to avoid desynchronization or messed up cuts if you move tracks by mistake.
## Microphone Bleed
Another problem that might prevent Descript from accepting your corrections is mic bleed. This usually occurs when both speakers are recorded on each other's track as well - albeit at lower volume.
It really depends on your recording conditions, but if you have mic bleed, Descript will essentially transcribe the entire conversation twice, because it will hear most of the speech on both tracks.
In this situation, if you use those two tracks in a sequence, even through they are perfectly synchronised, you're technically working with a duplicate transcript. This can seriously mess up the alignment engine.
Descript has a 'useful' mic bleed detection that will silence those portions from the audio, but I'm not convinced it also ignores the text that has been transcribed on that track.
For me, experience has shown that the mic bleed removal tool is more trouble than it's worth - most of the time. Not only does it not help with my transcription corrections, but it also loses or eliminates all punctuation from my transcript. Weird bug!
So when you have a mic bleed situation that just makes the transcription correction a stubborn mule, I go into the sequence, use the Range tool, and simply select and delete those more silent, mic bleed portions.
As soon as I do that, my transcription conflicts are resolved.
## If all else fails...
Sometimes even without cross talk, without mic bleed, Descript simply refuses to accept your corrections.
In that case, use the Range tool in the sequence and simply clear out the audio of the opposite track for that portion. Do this even if there's no speech there.
### Stop Wasting Descript Transcription Minutes by Enabling This ONE Setting
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/stop-wasting-descript-transcription-minutes-by-enabling-this-one-setting/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:39:36.000Z
Descript tends to try to 'help' you when you import audio or video files into a project by automatically transcribing them. Let me tell you why that's bad and how to prevent it.
## Automated transcription 'wizards'
Descript's automated 'wizards' are popping up all over the place. After all, Descript is all about transcript editing, right?
You may find yourself importing a file by dragging and dropping it into the media bin or a composition or sequence. Most of these operations automatically transcribe the file thus using up minutes from your allowance.
## You don't need to transcribe all files
You may think that's not a bad thing, Descript is being proactive and helping me.
True. But what if you have two files - one audio and one video, and the video also has audio but you don't really care about transcribing that. Your separate audio file is of much better quality and that's the one you'll be using in your final project anyway. Why transcribe the video? No need! 50% transcription time saved!
## When you're a beginner...
If you're just starting out with Descript and feeling your way around, maybe you're still in the trial or free Descript account period when you have 3 free hours to play with.
If you don't yet know what's happening, how it works, you may find yourself dragging files, Descript transcribes them automatically, and by the time you've figured it out, you've burned right through all of your free transcription minutes. How's that helpful?
## Prevent automated transcription
This is why one of my first few pieces of advice when starting with Descript is to go to the Preferences and turn on "Always ask before transcribing."
This option refers to the transcription language. Descript can transcribe in 20+ languages at the moment so it's really an option to ask you what language you want to transcribe the file in, before it starts. But it's ok, this tick box also serves the other purpose: it stops the automated transcription!
So now, whatever you do, dragging files, importing files, if it ever attempts to transcribe them again, it will pop up this window asking you for the language. If you click the X to close this window, you will stop the transcription and it won't use up your time.
## Transcribe only when you need to
If you have files you do want to transcribe, you can locate them in the Media Bin, right-click on the file and select "Transcribe file." Simple and easy.
Honestly, Descript should make this option the default - always ask before transcribing.
### Adjust Clip Speed in Bulk in Descript Storyboard
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/adjust-clip-speed-in-bulk-in-descript-storyboard/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:40:00.000Z
If you need to change clip properties in bulk in Descript, you'll find it's not as easy as you'd think. Once you've made cuts and edits in your composition, particularly after removing filler words or closing word gaps and such, you typically end up with tens or even hundreds of small clips.
Changing their properties in bulk can be a challenge. And not just for speed, even volume or other properties.
Let's say you want to speed up or slow down the entire composition and make the speed 0.9x on all clips. Selecting a clip on the timeline and then looking on the sidebar will only let you change one clip's properties at a time.
And the sidebar doesn't allow selecting multiple clips:
## Possible solution to apply clip speed in bulk
Select any clip, use the sidebar properties to change its speed. Apply that property change. If you slowed it down, you will see a small icon like a tortoise on the clip: A tortoise indicates the clip has been slowed down. You'll see a rabbit when speeding up.
After applying that clip's speed, copy the clip to clipboard.
Then, select all other clips you want to apply that clip speed change to. You can use the Shift key to select a range of clips. Do not select with the Range tool, that won't work.
Finally, press Ctrl + Shift + V (Paste attributes). On the Mac it's Cmd + Shift + V. This should apply that same clip speed transformation to all of them.
Neat, right?
## Word of warning
There's also a command to Paste Attributes if you right-click on the selected clips, but from what I've noticed, that doesn't work. It will only paste the attribute to the clip you've selected.
But using the keyboard shortcut seems to work. At least for now. I hope Descript don't remove this feature and make it work on the right-click menu as well. It is a timesaver. Why would they remove it, right?
I hope this tip helped, let me know in the comments if you have any questions.
### Split Long Video Into Shorter Videos Without Re-transcribing in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/split-long-video-into-shorter-videos-without-re-transcribing-in-descript/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:40:35.000Z
If you've imported and transcribed a long video with Descript and you've discovered that Descript is too slow when editing, here's how to split that long video AND keep your transcription, without spending more transcription time.
Descript doesn't work well with long videos. This is a fact. I don't know whether the Descript team is working on a solution to make the application more performant, but in the meantime, my recommendation is to not use long videos with Descript.
If your file length is approaching 1 hour or so, you will notice that the application starts to slow down, crash, restart or perform very poorly. If your video is 4K, forget about it! Unless you have a very powerful machine, you will struggle in frustration.
## What if I've already transcribed this long file?
Let's suppose you've imported a video that's 5 hours long into Descript and you transcribed it. Whether you triggered the transcription manually or Descript offered to 'help you' by automatically transcribing, that's it - your 5 hours of transcription have been deducted from your account.Tip: How to prevent automated transcription in Descript by changing one setting.
But all is not lost!
## Split the long file externally
Since Descript's non-destructive editing doesn't allow you to split the files within Descript, you're stuck with your long file.
You can still split the file externally and re-import it. I use Losslesscut to split the files (video, audio). Losslesscut splits files without re-encoding them and it takes seconds.
Insert link youtube here
So let's assume you've decided to split the file externally, from your 5-hour video into 5 chunks, each 1 hour long, with Losslesscut.
## Reimport the files into Descript
I recommend you reimport the files to Descript, either in a separate project for each file, or all of them in the same project. Doesn't matter much.
Before you import, make sure you've enabled the option to prevent automatic transcription as mentioned here.
Now, you have 5 new files in your project, but they are not transcribed. And you don't want to waste 5 more transcription hours by retranscribing these files.
## Replace the transcript on each file
You can still use the same transcript from the first file you transcribed and apply it to the new files.
Here's how to do it:
Descript will align the transcript you provide in that textbox with the audio from the file. This will not take up any transcription time from your account and is free.
This last step should take a few minutes, and you will receive an email from Descript telling you that your 'transcription is ready.' But you can do the same process on the other files while it's working on it.
Follow the same workflow for the remaining files, each time, copy and paste the corresponding piece of transcription from the long piece.
When you're satisfied and your transcriptions have been applied to the new files, you can safely delete the long composition, the shorter compositions you used to copy from AND the original long file. Done!
I hope this workflow works for you. Let me know in the comments if you needed it and were successful. I think saving many hours of transcription time is worth the effort.
### What's New in Descript Storyboard version 58
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/whats-new-in-descript-storyboard-version-58/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:41:10.000Z
A new version of Descript rolled out this week. Here are all the updates from today's update of Descript Storyboard (version 58).
It seems it's mostly interface fixes and improvements as well as some export in 4K possibility in the cloud export and more.
## A new media toolbar
When you select a media layer on the canvas, a new media toolbar pops up which provides quick access to replace it with a different layer or view (from a multi-cam sequence if you have it), as well as quick access to the Crop mode.
When you switch to Crop mode from that media toolbar, you now have several options for changing the aspect ratio in the crop for that video, change the scaling (currently broken, apparently), as well as rotating the media layer:
## Quickly duplicate a layer
You can duplicate a layer using the Ctrl + D (Cmd + D on Mac). I've needed to do this sometimes and copy and paste was a little unreliable.
It seems it only works for layers that are not on the script track (so if you want to duplicate a clip that is part of a multi-cam sequence for example, you can't do that because it won't allow you to duplicate the script track:
## Improved Media Bin
I'm loving the new layout of the Media Bin, it provides more horizontal space by moving the sidebar with all the 'folders' or categories of stock media to the top, rather than on the left. It does make the previews of media files larger, which still doesn't give you a lot of room when clicking on a file:
## Big projects load quicker
Descript claims to have made big projects load faster with this update. After an initial load on the new version, subsequent loads should be much faster.
I have yet to experience this.
I know a lot of customers had trouble in recent weeks with projects just hanging on the dreaded "Retrieving project" screen. Maybe those troubles were part of the fix, I don't know. I haven't seen a significant improvement in my tests yet, but maybe it's because I have a fast machine. I don't know.
Also, I'm not sure what Descript categorizes as a 'big project.' Is it a project with many files, with big files? Long files? Does 4K video qualify as big? Not sure.
## 4K video publishing in the cloud
It used to be that if you were trying to publish via the cloud export (which is much faster than rendering your video on your local machine), you were limited to HD (1920x1080).
With this update, you can publish to the cloud in 4K if you have a Pro or Enterprise Descript plan, as long as the composition you're trying to export is also 4K.
If you want to check, just over over the top-left corner of the canvas, go to Advanced and check that your composition is 4K (or set it to 4K):
I also like that you can now download the cloud-exported video directly from the publish dialog. You no longer need to open that published page in the browser to get your video (once it's rendered):
As a quick note, I still prefer local rendering when I can wait for it. It's higher quality, despite Descript's assurances that it's high quality in the cloud, whatever their definition or setting for 'High' in the cloud is, it's much lower than the local 'High' quality. In my tests, most of the time the cloud-exported file is about half the size of the local one and visibly better.
I've also noticed that scaled up videos come out much worse (super pixelated) in the cloud exports than local versions.
## Markers show on the scene rail
The previous Descript update had the scenes moved to their own resizable 'scene rail' on the far left of the interface.
This week's update shows any markers in-between these thumbnails. Not sure how I feel about it. Somehow, it looks a little more 'messy.' It also doesn't seem to allow dragging scenes in-between the markers, although the markers in my test were in separate scenes on their own... I don't think anyone cares about that.
## Quick recordings published automatically
As you know, Descript has two different recorders: a quick recorder (the one running in your system tray) and the main recorder, launched from within the Record button at the top:
If you create a quick recording using the external 'Quick recorder', it will now be published automatically so that you can share it right away. This is a good thing because if you're intending to create a quick demo or walkthrough to share with someone, you don't want to manually publish and wait for it to be rendered before the link to share is available. This is a good change.
If you don't intend to share the recording, Descript recommends you use the main recorder from within the app, which also records in multi-track.
## Exclude sequence tracks from script
This is a great change. You can now exclude certain tracks within a sequence from the main combined script. This is useful if you've accidentally transcribed all audio files in a sequence and you may have duplicate transcripts.
From past experience, I've noticed that these duplicate transcripts can create issues in Descript when editing the text. Overlapping audio or conflicting words (even if they are the same words), can make it hard to edit everything precisely, such as when you applied a correction and it didn't stick but Descript reverted it immediately.
Well, you can now specify which tracks within a sequence should and shouldn’t be included in the combined script. To do this, go to the top-right of the properties panel and select either Remove from Script or Include in Script.
## Change thumbnail of published video
Descript now uses the first frame of your video as the default thumbnail when publishing to the web. You can also click the tiny thumbnail next to the video name and select a different frame from the video if you wish:
## Scene-level color properties to text layers
You can now assign different color properties to text-based layers, such as fill, border and background. This should give you more control over their look across scenes.
This includes making automated captions look different across scenes which some people might want to use when trying to make 'animated' captions change color from scene to scene in quick succession. Just one workflow I've seen other users ask about:
## Overdub training project is now Storyboard
The interface for the training project used to create your Overdub voice has now been updated and it is using the new Storyboard UI.
That's about it for this week's update. If you wish to be kept in the loop with more updates like these, make sure you subscribe to the free newsletter!
### How to Edit Only Text in Descript and Leave Video and Audio Unaffected?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-edit-only-text-in-descript-and-leave-video-and-audio-unaffected/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:44:07.000Z
In [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript), you can make text edits and corrections by editing, deleting or ignoring words, and having the audio and video kept in sync by deleting them with the words. But in some situations you might not want to affect the audio or video at all. Can you still just correct text?
## How can I make corrections in the transcript?
Sure, you can make corrections to existing text by selecting the word you want to correct and pressing C to bring up the 'correction pop-up':
You can also make corrections by going into 'Correct mode' at the top of the composition, or by pressing C without a selection:
You can delete words using backspace or delete or ignore the words by pressing CTRL + Backspace (Cmd + Backspace on mac):
All of these corrections may also impact your audio and video, because one of the top-selling feature of Descript is... edit video and audio through text.
## What if I only want to edit text?
But when you want to correct JUST text and not worry about your audio, you can go into "Text-edit mode" only.
This mode used to exist in Descript Classic but then it was tucked away somewhere else, its shortcut key was changed, so it seemed like it was gone.
But it's not gone, it's still here in the Edit menu and it's called "Toggle correct text". The new shortcut is Alt + C (Option + C on mac):
This mode is now called "Toggle correct text" and as soon as you switch to it, this is how it works:
So this is more or less a 'secret' edit mode, in addition to the Correct mode and Write mode. I hope Descript doesn't remove this mode.
I've used it a lot in situations where for example, I'd have a guest on a podcast who is a doctor, lawyer or some sort of expert and we didn't want our cuts to seem like we were censoring them. In that case, we'd edit in text-edit mode in order to correct spellings or remove filler words, but the audio and video were untouched.
Let me know in the comments what you think of this and where you'd use it in your workflows.
### How to Change the Orientation of a Video in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-change-the-orientation-of-a-video-in-descript/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:46:01.000Z
It's very easy to change the orientation of a video in Descript Storyboard. You can do it in a composition, you can change from landscape to portrait, square or to a custom orientation.
Just hover the top-left corner of the canvas area and the orientation change drop-down should appear:
You can choose your desired aspect ratio from this menu or you can go to 'Advanced' if you want to choose a custom orientation or to change the pixel size, aspect or framerate of your composition:
Note: You can no longer crop, resize or move around the video while you are in a sequence (and it's not necessary). It used to be possible in the Classic version, but since the new Storyboard version introduced this new layer manipulation mode in the compositions, you don't want to do that anyway.
## Reframe and resize the videos
Once you change the orientation or aspect ratio of your composition, you may have to resize or crop your video to make it fit.
For example, if you wanted to change a landscape video to portrait, you may want to scale the video up until it fills the entire frame:
Use the corner handles to scale your video up or down, or double-click it to go into crop mode.
## Compositions have layers
Compositions help expose the individual tracks from the underlying sequence and you can then control your layers separately as well as create different layouts from the same tracks/layers in different scenes.
When you create a sequence, you add different files to it on different tracks. Then you name those tracks something meaningful so that you know which is what:
Plenty of flexibility.
Here's a video example where I show how you can use the same video (of a Zoom recording) that has two speakers, and create a multi-cam sequence and composition with that, to individually place and control each speaker's video portion:
### Apply Object Properties to All Scenes in Descript Storyboard
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/apply-object-properties-to-all-scenes-in-descript-storyboard/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T11:50:44.000Z
If you have an object you added to your composition and you've created multiple scenes, it can be tedious to apply the same properties to it if you've changed your mind or modified it. Clicking through 20 or so scenes just to change one property can quickly become time-consuming.
In Descript Storyboard, some properties can be replicated across all scenes the object appears in, using the new "Apply to all scenes" button in Descript.
This button is a tricky one though. It only appears when it wants to! Just kidding, it's easy. Read on.
## How to apply object properties across scenes
The object must be selected. That's easy.
The object must appear in more than the current scene. This is a common mistake I see. If you've added an element in Descript, it will typically add it just inside the current scene you're on.
Before you can apply its properties to all scenes, you have to make sure the element spans more than one scene.
If that's already the case, then go ahead and make a change to your object - like resize it, move it, change its colours, etc. As soon as you do that, the button "Apply to all scenes" should appear on the sidebar.
A recent Descript Storyboard update added a button on the top-right of the sidebar, to allow you to replicate the current object's properties to all scenes without making a change first:
## Doesn't work on all properties or objects
! Not all properties will be replicated and some clips will not have this option available. For example, I found that the "Apply properties to all scenes" function does not replicate the layer stack order.
So if an object is in front of another in one scene, and behind it in another scene, this option will not move the object to the same level in all scenes.
I guess Descript cannot guarantee all objects are in the same place across all scenes, and I can see how this could lead to unpredictable results. This is a request currently in the feature request forums you can vote on but I wouldn't hold my breath.
### Upscaling Compositions from Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/upscaling-compositions-from-descript-storyboard-106/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T21:08:38.000Z
A recent update to [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) has blocked the ability to export a composition at a higher resolution than it's currently set to.
If you had a composition that was created as a 720p for example, you were able to choose 1080p at export and it would upscale and export in HD. Not anymore.
After the update to version 63 of Descript Storyboard, it's no longer possible to upscale videos beyond the composition settings. When attempting it, you will see the export options higher than the composition greyed out and the variant that your current composition is set to named "Max":
## Change resolution for composition
To solve this problem, you must change the composition resolution to a higher value or to the resolution you want it to be.
Just go to the top-left of your composition's canvas area and you should see the aspect ratio selector. Click Advanced to open the resolution settings:
On this menu, you can set the resolution and framerate and you can even set a custom resolution if you want to:
After setting it to say, 1080p, the export settings should now allow you to choose that resolution:
I hope this helps, let me know in the comments if you have any questions and don't forget to subscribe free for more tutorials and articles like this by email.
### Unpublishing a Page in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/unpublishing-a-page-in-descript/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T21:09:16.000Z
A recent change in [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) made it a little more difficult to unpublish a composition that you've published as a "Web Page" from the "Publish" menu.
If you were confused where to find this option, read on:
In the Classic version (and until recently, Storyboard version), you were able to click "Unpublish" right from the composition menu if you went to it again.
As of May 2023 this doesn't seem to be possible from the same place.
## How to remove a published Descript page
Instead, after publishing, you have to go to the published page by clicking the link:a
When you get to the page, click the Settings gear icon at the top-right. You should have the "Unpublish" command there:
When you click that, the page disappears and you're redirected to your main drive page.
## Lag in updating the published status in the app
### Create an Animated Customisable Flipbook with Camtasia (2022+)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/create-an-animated-customisable-flipbook-with-camtasia-2022/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T21:10:22.000Z
I set out to create a realistic, 3D-looking, animated, reusable flipbook only with Camtasia, and I recorded the whole process for you.
So here it is, for your viewing pleasure, a minicourse teaching you how to create an animated flipbook in Camtasia from scratch.
You will end up with a reusable library asset that shows animated pages flipping from left to right, with a light beam or glossy pages running across the page, a drop shadow, the pages get darker as they move away from the camera - very realistic.
All the good stuff!
This is a long-ish Camtasia minicourse but I think you will learn a great deal from it about animation, planning, keyframes, light effects, motion blur, animation rotation point, creating reusable and customizable assets with quick properties.
Everything is explained in detail.
If you don't have the patience to create the asset yourself, you can buy it already made for Camtasia 2022, 2023 or later at this link. (Members get it half price!)
You will need Camtasia 2022+ to follow this tutorial because it uses a feature that was introduced in Camtasia 2022 - changing the rotation point for an object. However, in the video I also show how you can achieve it with older versions, you just need to think a little differently.
I do hope you enjoy this and if you have any feedback, I'd love to hear it!
Watch the video now!
### Currently-Known Bugs in Descript (And Possible Workarounds)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/currently-known-bugs-in-descript-storyboard-and-possible-workarounds/
Last updated: 2025-10-31T15:25:16.000Z
Here is a summary of current bugs in Descript Storyboard. If the application behaves in a weird way, something doesn't seem to work as intended or you get unexpected side-effects to certain actions, it's possible it's a bug.
So here are the bugs I'm currently aware of and I can reproduce. I'll try to keep this list updated to the best of my knowledge.
They are hopefully going to be fixed soon. You can subscribe by email for free if you wish to get notified of new ones, workarounds, Descript updates and quick tips and tutorials.
### October 2025
### Layouts are not applied properly or they shuffle the layouts around
The layouts (saved) are applied wrongly - mixing the layers and applying the wrong layer media. For example, I've had saved layouts that worked for months and now they switch the guest for the logo or other media.
No workaround for this one at the moment, except to adjust the layer/fix it after applying it and then copy-paste the layout to your other scenes. Hopefully, the devs will fix it.
### Esc key jumps to the top of the composition
This is a bug that I think was introduced in the last version. When your playback is running, the Esc key usually meant that the script would catch up with the playhead, but now there's a bug, and when you press Esc it jumps all the way to the top of the composition. This happens on all projects when you click inside the transcript area to focus it and then press Esc.
Descript team says they can't reproduce it so I guess that's that. Myself and other users have reported it.
For now, the workaround is to simply press Esc again, which will go back to where you were, or scroll there.
## March 2023
### Upgrading to a paid plan works but still shows you on FREE plan
Resolved March 14th, 2023
Many users are reporting this week that they are upgrading from the FREE plan to a paid plan, the payment goes through and their cards are being charged but the account still seems to be on the FREE plan. Since Descript doesn't work weekends, a lot of users are annoyed.
I suspect this is to do with a recent Stripe problem where new payments were not reported and didn't appear in the dashboard or APIs. Stripe claims to have fixed it but maybe the consequences are now rippling to Descript (Descript uses Stripe to process payments).
I suppose you'll have to wait for Descript staff to come back to work and get your account unstuck.
### Exporting stuck at 0%
In specific cases I haven't been able to identify the cause of, Descript will not export your composition, instead be stuck at 0% and not advance. This has been reported by many users.
Another symptom of this is the length of your composition will show with a weird extended number:
Workaround: At the moment, exporting such a problematic composition to the cloud seems to work in my tests.
### Restore Removed Media Shortcut Bug
When you remove something in your transcript or timeline that produces a cut, some of the media might be clipped and hidden. That's fine. But when you make a selection around that cut and attempt to restore removed media, using the shortcut for this: Ctrl + Shift + Backspace (Cmd + Shift + Backspace on Mac) will not restore media. It will act like the Ignore command instead.
Workaround: Use the item in the right-click menu. That one performs the desired operation.
## February 2023
### Batch Export Aspect Ratio Bug
Batch-exporting compositions that have different aspect ratios will lead to the exported videos being squished. The resulting aspect ratio of the videos will be that of the composition that was selected at the time of the export operation initiation.
Workaround: Export each composition individually to respect the aspect ratio, or create a duplicate copy of the project, delete all compositions you don't want to export, and export 'All compositions'. Sounds like overkill but that's the only way at the moment.
### Template "Update app to use this template" bug
Update: This has been resolved in version 58.1.4\. Update your Descript and you shouldn't have this issue.
When you attempt to apply a template you created in the past (or just created), version 58 shows a message requiring you to "Update the application and restart" when you try to apply a template (despite the fact that you may be using the latest version anyway):
Workaround: If you have that template applied somewhere else in the project or in a different project, it's usually to a scene. You can right-click on that scene's thumbnail, Copy, then right-click the scene you want to apply it to and Paste. It will replicate that scene's layout without using the template.
Workaround 2: Open that template, make a small change to it, doesn't have to be much, and then republish it. This seems to solve this for some users.
### Re-ordering the first scene causes it to disappear
The new Scene Rail was added in February 2023 and along with it came a few functions to help scene management, namely, reordering scenes by dragging them.
A bug I've discovered was that the scene reordering generally works, except when dragging the very first scene. In all my tests, dragging the first scene (to make it second for example), causes the scene to disappear and the content in it to be deleted.
Workaround: If you need to move the content at the beginning of a composition, use Cut and Paste instead. You may have to manually apply the layout changes or any other assets you may have on screen in that scene until this bug is fixed.
## January 2023
### Corrections in a transcript are not applied
This one is hard to reproduce but it's happening nonetheless, particularly when there's crosstalk or conflicting transcripts. I've mentioned this before in a different post along with some fixes:
Workaround: Use the solutions in the article above, but the one way I've fixed it most of the time has been to delete the portion of audio from the conflicting track in a multisequence (even if it's 'silent').
## December 2022
### Punctuation is lost when applying mic-bleed removal
Weird bug that happened to me a lot is when removing 'duplicated transcripts' due to mic bleed in a sequence. If you have a sequence with audio on separate tracks that have mic bleed, you will typically hear the audio of the other person on your track and vice-versa. If that's the case, Descript will have transcribed most of those files twice, because it can 'hear' the words being said by both people on both tracks.
This leads to duplicated transcripts and Descript will identify that as 'mic bleed' and offer to fix it.
It should work (generally) but for me, I've often found that the mic bleed removal also removes ALL punctuation from the combined composition. Obviously, it's not usable that way if you care about your transcript, and I'm not going to manually put in the punctuation either.
### Cinematic Expanding Text Effect in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/cinematic-expanding-text-effect-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:02:21.000Z
A cool 'Hollywood' effect in my latest Camtasia video. I demonstrate how to create a cinematic text expanding effect where the distance between the letters of a word increases as time goes on.
While Camtasia allows for vertical and horizontal spacing changes for words and letters, it's not possible to animate the horizontal spacing.
Only the V. Spacing can be animated in Camtasia, which seems like an oversight
However, I provide a workaround that involves creating a grid and using a single letter as a distancer to maintain equal distance between the letters.
Video here:
By following my step-by-step instructions, you can easily create a reusable asset that you can use to add cinematic expanding titles to your future projects and long the way learn some animation tricks and procedures that will help in other projects.
In this video I also employ the use of my Camtasia Grid Pack which helps align the letters perfectly before and after the expanding animation.
I hope you enjoy the tutorial and I'd love your feedback in the comments.
### Audio Visualizers: New in Camtasia 2023
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/audio-visualizers-new-in-camtasia-2023/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:38:01.000Z
These new assets are found in the Camtasia 2023 library (you must update to version 2023.2.0+) and they work for both Windows and Mac.
I've been meaning to do this for a while, and I kept thinking of ways to achieve this and I did it in the past, but it was like very, very convoluted and complicated. I'm glad to see them available in Camtasia.
Let's have a look at how they work. I added one of my songs to the Camtasia timeline and I can use these visualizers with it now.
You have to go to your library, but before you do that, make sure you update Camtasia to the latest version. The version that I have of Camtasia is 2023.2.0 (on Mac). It is just released yesterday, August 22nd, 2023.
## Types of visualizers
You have to go to your library, there should be a new folder here in your Camtasia 23 library. It's called Audio Visualizers, and if you open that folder, all you have are three of these visualizers.
All you have to do is just add those to your timeline right there on top of your music, and there you go:
You have a visualizer you can extend for as long as you want it to last.
The other visualizers are a ring:
And a much more boring one, a waveform visualizer:
Now, I don't know if there is a plan to allow this to filter which audio files to react to, because if you have speech and music, maybe you just want it to react to speech and leave the music alone. I'm not sure, but I think right now it's reacting to the whole audio that's happening on your timeline at that time.
So here are some some of the customizations you can do for this thing.
## Visualizer customization options
You can change the hue shift, where it kind of cycles through the colors so that you can have some 80s-looking kind of music visualizer. You can change the bar width, add spacing between them, change the count (how many bars appear), the height, roundness, minimum and maximum frequencies it reacts to, and there are some interesting mirroring options along the X and Y axis whith make it look more interesting:
So that's kind of how this works.
The second one is an audio ring and it has similar customization options, plus some 'ring'-specific ones.
If you have a podcast or a extract and you have your picture in the middle, you can put your picture in the middle and have this thing animated around your head, your avatar, whatever.
## Be creative with the visualizers
Of course, you can't build your own, but you can also animate these.
I really like to play and to combine these with other effects that you have at your disposal. In Camtasia, for example, I really like to combine things with the Media Matte effect.
So you can create all of these cool effects with these bars, you can rotate them, you can create a mirrored kind of reflection, change the opacity of them so they look like they're in a reflection in the water.
Plenty of flexibility. Let me know what you think of this, how are you planning on using it? Have you upgraded to Camtasia 2023 yet? If not, here's a link to upgrade at a discount (this is an affiliate link but it means no extra cost to you).
### Fix Informal or Slang Spellings in Descript Transcription
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/fix-informal-or-slang-spellings-in-descript-transcription/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:04:19.000Z
Descript's backend transcription service is far from perfect. At the time of writing this, both Descript Classic and Descript Storyboard use the services of Rev.com, which is an online transcription correction service.
One of the things that annoy me (and many others) is the fact that Descript (or Rev) transcribes various words with their slang or informal spelling. Maybe the person speaking really does pronounce words like that, and Descript picks them up and transcribes them as such.
## Some examples
Want to will be transcribed as wanna. Going to will be gonna. Them will be 'em, and so on.
Now, I'm not saying it's not accurate. Maybe the person speaking really does pronounce the words like that, but you may not like this and you may want to have them spelled correctly. After all, maybe you're transcribing to turn your episode or audio into a blog post or article or a transcript. You may want to have the words correctly spelled.
At the moment, despite protests and requests, Descript hasn't offered a way to configure this. There's no setting to tell Descript to replace these with the proper spelling.
There is also no way to control this spelling using the Transcription Glossary (I tried). Descript will ignore those spellings there if the confidence score is high enough.
My solution?
## Search and replace the slang spellings
Here's my comprehensive list of slang spelled words and the text I replace them with. Feel free to grab it and use it:
- wanna -> want to
- outta -> out of
- shoulda -> should have
- gotta -> got to
- cuz -> because
- 'em -> them
- cause -> because
- kinda -> kind of
- gimme -> give me
- dunno -> don't know
- lemme -> let me
## How to replace the spellings
You can use Descript Storyboard's Search function (Ctrl + F on Windows, Cmd + F on Mac). Type the word you want to search for, say: gonna.
Descript will highlight all the matches in the current composition. Watch out for various cases, make sure you turn on case-sensitive matching if you need to:
Then you can type in the replace box what you want to replace with. In our example, going to.
Press Apply All and done!
Now move to the next one.
If your project has multiple compositions or you've broken your episode into separate clips, you can also search throughout the entire project, not just the current composition. To do that, turn off "Only current composition" in the search options:
Apply all, and there you go! Quickly replacing these across the entire project.
At the moment, this is the only way to deal with this problem unfortunately.
Let's hope Descript adds more flexibility to this. One I'd like is to provide a search-replace list like the one above and for Descript to automatically replace these as soon as transcription is done.
That would save a lot of time.
Feel free to vote on this request to hopefully nudge them in the right direction soon.
### Descript Acquires SquadCast: Free Online Recording for all Subscribers
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-acquires-squadcast-free-online-recording-for-all-subscribers/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:06:43.000Z
15 August, 2023 - Some exciting news from Descript today, it was announced that Descript has acquired SquadCast. So SquadCast is now part of Descript.
If you have a Descript account, the great news is you can now link your Descript account to SquadCast and have online recording for free.
## How to link your Descript account to SquadCast
If you open Descript starting today, 15th of August, 2023, go to the top-right where your account is, and you go to Settings and then go to your Subscription.
And you should have a link here now to Connect to SquadCast. At the moment I have a pro subscription. I'm assuming it works for creator too.
When you click that link, you go to the SquadCast website, and then there you should choose which drive you want to connect to it, and then log in to SquadCast and have your account linked.
And then if you come out of this, look, it also creates an instant Descript session before you start recording. So on the SquadCast website, of course, you see now that the logo actually shows SquadCast by Descript.
So this was in the works for quite some time.
And my account now in SquadCast actually shows my subscription from Descript. Descript Pro subscription, which gives me all of these things that you have here, including 4K, video and so on.
So as soon as you finish recording in SquadCast, your session's going to be transmitted over to Descript for editing, just like all the other integrations.
Descript has had integrations like this for a while with Riverside and other applications and also SquadCast now.
So this is obviously great news, if you're a podcaster and you are already paying for another platform to record with and then download those files, transmit them over, and so on. If you are already paying for Descript to edit your podcast, this is great news so you can actually continue paying. I don't know if that means the prices might go up at some point.
So don't forget, if you actually start this process from within Descript, I think that's the easiest way to do it. You just go to your drive like I showed before, and just connect your account to SquadCast.
By the way, make sure you have the latest version of Descript. This is from version 70.1.2, which has been released yesterday, 14th of August, 2023\. As soon as you have that, go to your drive, go to your Options, Subscriptions and see if you have that link there to connect to SquadCast.
I think you can also connect an existing account, which is what I did, I had an account before with SquadCast that I just linked now to my Descript account, and it has become free.
There you have it. So if you want to try Descript for free, see if it works to link it to your SquadCast and happy podcasting!
### Copy Files Between Projects in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/copy-files-between-projects-in-descript-storyboard-100/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:10:52.000Z
I see this question quite a lot in the Descript communities and I thought I'd make a quick tutorial about it. It is possible to copy files from one project to another in Descript without re-uploading, re-editing or re-transcribing them.
## What's the problem?
Most Descript beginners ask themselves this question sooner or later: how do I copy or share files and content between my Descript projects without re-uploading the same file over and over again and wasting my transcription minutes?
Descript doesn't offer a central repository of content that you can share or reuse between projects so we need to find workarounds.
Descript has templates, of course, but they work a little differently, are scene-based and if you place your content on the script track, you risk having it replaced because templates work with the main track as a placeholder. Enough about that.
How to copy content to another project?
Just open your project (the one you want to copy files from), and look in the Media Bin at the top. You should see all your files there.
Looking at the files, it's not easy to see where each file is used, so if you want to copy an entire conversation for example, where you might even have two or more files assembled in a sequence, you don't want to copy each one individually and re-assemble the whole thing. You've already done that work!
No fear!
Just navigate in Descript to the composition that holds the content you want and make a selection - you can either select the entire composition (Ctrl + A on Windows / Cmd + A on Mac) and then copy (Ctrl + C on Windows / Cmd + C on Mac).
With that information in the clipboard, you now need to paste it to the new project.
Did you know you could open multiple windows of Descript at the same time? Many beginners don't.
You can do this by accessing the 'D' menu on the top-left, go to File > New > Window (or you can press Ctrl + Shift + N on Windows / Cmd + Shift + N on Mac).
With that new window open you can create a new blank project:
When that new project open, just paste the content you copied into a blank composition (Ctrl + V on Windows / Cmd + V on Mac).
You will notice if you open the Media Bin, that all the files used in that composition you copied from are brought over into the new project, all transcribed and ready to go). Even sequences are brought over if they were part of that composition:
Cool right?
Now you can make your new edits in this new project without fear of affecting the initial project or struggling with performance issues if the project was getting big and bogging down Descript.
### How to Export Markers with Timestamps for YouTube from Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-export-markers-with-timestamps-for-youtube-from-descript/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:12:23.000Z
If you often need to export the markers from a [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) composition with timestamps, say for YouTube chapters, it's possible get the markers with timestamps from Descript and it only takes a couple clicks.
Descript Storyboard doesn't have a specific "Export Markers for Youtube" function, but it does have a function to publish a composition as a video to YouTube.
As you go through editing your composition, you may add markers at different points to break down your episode or video and to use them for chapters.
To add markers in a Descript composition, just place your cursor in the text and press M.
In the past, I was copy and pasting them one at a time when I was about to publish the video to YouTube, but no more!
## Pretend you want to publish to YouTube
If you want to grab those and paste them somewhere else (YouTube or others, maybe Vimeo), just go to the Publish dialog on the top-right of the composition:
Then pretend you want to publish to YouTube.
This will open the pre-upload window for YouTube.
You don't have to publish to YouTube this way, but in there will be a small text box with all of your markers and the relevant timestamps for each, right in a format that works with YouTube chapters:
I use this all the time. Just select everything from there, copy and paste where you need it.
Pretty simple, isn't it?
### Here are the ways you can add markers in Descript:
### You can also export video by markers as separate files:
### Export Faster in the Cloud with Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/export-faster-in-the-cloud-with-descript/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:13:06.000Z
Did you know you can export your videos or audios much faster from Descript Storyboard by using the cloud? It's very easy.
Exporting your finished videos from Descript is quite slow on your local computer. You need disk space and a fast processor and it can take a long time. I tested this over many months and the same video can take even 10 times as long if I export it locally.
Descript needs to download the files from the cloud (the original files, not the ones you use to edit with), then send your computer into a spin by pushing the CPU to its maximum.
Well, you can use the cloud Publish in Descript and save yourself a lot of time.
## How to export using the cloud
When you're ready to export, just go to the top-right to the "Publish" section and Descript should default to the Publish tab. Don't go to Export because that's your local export:
Descript will say it publishes as a 'Web link'. What this means is that Descript will create and host a page for you with your video or audio, your transcript.
It will create a link for you that you can use to share that page with others.
Think of it like a video review tool for free. The people that have your link can view your video, leave comments for you such as changes you need to make, if it's a client, and so on.
The video is also rendered in the cloud in no time.
And of course, you can download the video file once it's rendered.
Once you press Publish, Descript will start creating your video and you can click the link to view the page, even before rendering is finished:
As soon as publishing is done, you can play or download the video, or share it with others:
If you wish to unpublish the page, just go to the top-right of the published page and click Unpublish:
## Note about comments:
The comments that viewers post on the published page are not the same as the comments that one can post inside of Descript, during editing. If someone makes comments on the published page that refer to edits they want you to make, you'd have to read them there.
When working with someone who has the project open as an editor, they can leave comments in Descript. Those are different from the publish page comments, which cannot be transferred to Descript.
### Import and Sync Transcripts from External Files in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/import-and-sync-transcripts-from-external-files-in-descript-storyboard-95/
Last updated: 2025-11-11T19:15:17.000Z
If you have an external transcription ready made for your video or audio, you can import it into Descript and synchronize it with the audio or the video. You don't have to waste your transcription minutes in Descript.
But first...
## Prevent Automatic Transcription
By default, Descript will try to automatically transcribe any file you import or drag into it. As soon as you drop a file inside the composition, it will attempt to transcribe it, even though you may not want to.
You can prevent this by turning on one option in the Descript Settings. I've discussed this before.
In short, go to Descript's top-left 'D' menu, and go to Settings:
By enabling this option, Descript will prompt you each time you add a file, allowing you to choose the language for transcription, ensuring no unnecessary transcriptions occur.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Importing Your Audio or Video File into Descript
Now that we've safeguarded our transcription minutes, let's import an external video file into Descript without triggering automatic transcription.
Because we've turned on the option to "Always ask before transcribing", Descript should pop-up with a question. Click the X to close this and not transcribe automatically:
## Preparing an External Transcript
If you already have a transcript, perhaps one that's been meticulously corrected outside of Descript, it's time to prepare it for synchronization. You don't need to do any fancy editing, just a text file will do. Formatting will not be imported anyway.
However, you can include in your transcript speaker labels, separated by a colon, before a person's speech. This will cause Descript to create speaker labels automatically and assign those speakers to the correct text paragraphs:
## Importing and Syncing Your Transcript
With your video imported and your transcript ready, it's time to unite them within Descript.
#### Step 1: Locate the video or audio file in the Media Bin
### Step 2: Right-click on the file and Import Transcript
Now, you'll see a text box where you can paste your transcript.
#### Step 3: Paste your transcript in the text box and click 'Sync'
Depending on the length of your file, it might be a few minutes. When Descript is done, it will notify you by email and also display the transcript (if the file was added in a composition).
If the file was not added in a composition, you can add it and you should see the transcript.
## Handling Alignment Issues: Ensuring Accuracy
Occasionally, alignment issues may arise. Descript provides tools to address these problems and maintain transcript accuracy.
Scroll through your timeline at the bottom and look for sections with alignment issues, often indicated by gray waveform segments that have no words above them.
You can zoom in using Ctrl + Mouse Wheel or Cmd + Mouse Wheel. You can also zoom the timeline in and out by pressing Ctrl +/- or Cmd +/- on Mac. This will allow you to see all the words and the waveform in detail.
You can see how the word appears in the transcript but the waveform is greyed out, which means the word has either not been recognized or it has been mis-aligned.
To fix this, zoom in really close and if the word is there but it's squished or too narrow, hold down Ctrl (on Windows) or Cmd (on Mac) and drag the edge of the word tab to tell Descript where the word actually begins and ends:
## Correcting Missing Text: Filling in the Gaps
What if your transcript is missing text that's present in your audio? Descript offers a solution. You can type in the missing words, at the right location, and Descript will align them to the audio automatically:
#### Step 1: Toggle Correct Mode
Use the shortcut Option+C (Mac) or Alt+C (Windows) to enter Correct Mode. You can also find this in the Tools menu:
#### Step 2: Add Missing Text
This option will switch your transcript to 'correct text' mode and the outline will turn blue. This allows you to just click inside the text and just type the missing words. Descript will align them with the audio:
## Replacing a Transcript: Upgrading to a Corrected Version
If you've previously transcribed a file in Descript but wish to replace it with a corrected external transcript, here's how:
#### Step 1: Locate the file in the Media Bin
#### Step 2: Right-Click and Select "Replace Transcript"
#### Step 3: Paste and Sync
Your transcript is now updated, ensuring accuracy throughout your project.
## Conclusion
In this comprehensive guide, we've explored the ins and outs of importing and syncing transcriptions in Descript. With the ability to prevent automatic transcription, import external transcripts, and seamlessly synchronize text with audio, you're well-equipped to enhance your content creation workflow.
If you found this guide helpful, be sure to subscribe to my newsletter, my YouTube channel, or check out my Descript course.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Never Delete, Always Ignore: Descript Storyboard Transcripts
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/never-delete-always-ignore-descript-storyboard-transcripts/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:48:17.000Z
Here's why this is a great philosophy when editing your transcripts in Descript.
Descript allows you to quickly remove words in the transcription and have the audio or video removed along with those words. That makes for quick cleaning up and removing filler words, gaps, ums and ahs, etc.
But the default behaviour when you click Delete or Backspace, is to completely remove the words from the transcript and to place a little cut symbol in the text:
That's all nice and good but how do you know what you've removed and where? When you review your video and it seems choppy or it appears like some audio is missing or words are cut off, how do you know why that is? You can see a cut there (if you look closely) but you can't tell how much content was removed.
## How to Ignore Words in Descript?
This is why I recommend you always use the Ignore function to remove words or filler words instead of deleting.
To ignore individual words or selections in Descript, just select the text you want to remove and press CTRL + Backspace (Cmd + Backspace on mac). This will cross out that selection and behave just like you had removed it.
You can also ignore a selection by clicking the little crossed out 'S' icon on the pop-up correction bar:
When you want to remove filler words (manually or in bulk), you can select 'Ignore' instead of Delete in the search dialog:
If you do this, whatever you ignore will still not play, you won't see that removed video and you won't hear those removed words, but you will be able to still see them in the script, crossed out:
## How Do You Restore Ignored Words?
Should you discover that those portions would have been better off left in, you can make a selection and Ctrl + Backspace (Cmd + Backspace) again, and bring them back instantly. Since most of editing in Descript is non-destructive, your audio and video are back.
When you export your transcript as text from Descript, those ignored portions can also be well... ignored, so they won't litter your exported file.
Good advice? I think so too.
### Faster Keyboard Navigation and Editing in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/faster-keyboard-navigation-and-editing-in-descript-storyboard/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:52:16.000Z
[Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) has a lot of keyboard shortcuts you can use throughout the interface. I love working on the keyboard and there are some nice little keyboard tricks I use when I want to work faster and not reach for the mouse all the time, particularly when performing repetitive tasks such as cycling through removing filler words or shortening word gaps.
The new Descript interface moved the search 'results' to the far right of the interface, while keeping the main search box at the top of the composition. This makes for a left-right head spinning dizziness-inducing motion, particularly if you have a wider or larger screen.
## Cycle Through Results
That's when I cycle through the results using the F3 key (on the mac it's Cmd + G) to "Find Next". This is a common Windows or Mac keyboard shortcut that thankfully works in Descript to achieve the same thing.
When you get to the next gap or filler word, you can click '*Apply*' once, to apply the shortening or removal. This will cause Descript to perform that operation and move to the next (provided you haven't turned Auto-advance off).
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Apply and Move to the Next
So it will move to the next result automatically and from that point onwards, you can just press ENTER (to Apply again) or F3 (Cmd + G) to find next.
This sees me through hundreds of replacements in minutes, by just using these two keyboard shortcut combinations.
One negative is that if you click outside of the results and do something else, like a manual deletion or something else, it sometimes takes you out of the entire search so you need to get back into it.
But anyway, if you're a keyboard person, this is a fast way to do these repetitive operations.
## Descript's Shortcut Keys
All the Descript's keyboard shortcuts are documented in the little Help icon on the sidebar and they are specific for your OS:
### Descript Has Two Recorders. They are different.
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/descript-has-two-recorders-they-are-different/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T12:53:46.000Z
Descript Storyboard has two different recorders. One runs in the system tray and is called "Quick Recorder" and the other is launched from within the application from among the 5 icons at the top.
You have the same options on both recorders, such as recording your screen, microphone, camera and so on, but the way they record is different.
## The Quick Recorder
The Quick Recorder will record the video of the screen and camera (if you enable it) in a single video stream. So your camera will be 'burned' into your video and can't be removed after the recording.
## The Full Recorder
The full recorder will record everything simultaneously as well, but it will record separate streams for your screen and camera.
This gives you more flexibility because it creates a multi-track sequence for your entire recording and you can then move your camera away, reposition it, turn it off or on for various portions and so on.
I recommend you always use the full recorder, launched from within the app to retain the flexibility of editing separate video tracks.
## Quick Tip for Restarting Descript
The Quick Recorder is essentially Descript just running in the background, always at the ready for quick captures or recordings.
One important thing to note is that if you want to close down Descript for whatever reason, and you close the main application window, you haven't technically closed it down. You have to close or quit the Quick Recorder too. That's when Descript is really closed.
### Word Gap Removal in Descript is Not Silence Removal
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/word-gap-removal-in-descript-storyboard-is-not-silence-removal/
Last updated: 2026-02-16T10:31:40.000Z
You may have audio files that you transcribe and work with in [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) that have speech and other audio. Maybe you have a piece that has audio in more than one language or there's laughter and other sounds on the audio.
If you try to remove 'gaps' using Descript's gap removal, you will sometimes find that it removes all those extra sounds as well. Although the expected behaviour would be to remove 'non-audio' gaps, or silences, Descript removes more.
The reason this happens is because Descript doesn't actually remove 'silence'. It removes 'word gaps'. So any portion of audio that still shows a waveform but doesn't have words recognized there, is treated as a 'gap'. That's why it may be removed.
## Never remove word gaps in bulk
This is one reason I never like to remove word gaps in bulk using Descript's Word Gap Removal tool. I like to go through them one by one and click to remove or shorten them. If I happen upon a segment that has audio (albeit not words), I typically use the Range tool to make my own selection and remove that instead of letting Descript cut off my audio from that portion.
This is a common complaint many Descript users have (myself included). I suppose Descript is being careful to call this 'word gap removal' for a reason. It would be fantastic if another function were built to actually mean silence removal, and the word gap removal be kept.
It's a side-effect of Descript encouraging their users to edit in the transcript more and in the timeline less. How do you indicate 'waveforms' in the transcript? You can't really do it in a meaningful way.
## How it could be done
One way that could be done is if non-word audio were marked on the timeline with a word tab but put something on it like 'noise' or 'non-word audio', and show that in the transcript, allowing editing, stretching it, just like any other word, but show it in a different colour or something. Plenty of ideas.
### What is Room Tone on Gap Clips? Hearing Static in Your Descript Compositions?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/what-is-room-tone-on-gap-clips-hearing-static-in-your-descript-compositions/
Last updated: 2026-03-06T12:45:04.000Z
You may be suffering from 'room tone' static. [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) applies what it calls 'room tone' to gap clips by default. If you're using a gap clip to add some distance between your clips in the timeline, you may discover there's a static hissing noise.
This is most likely due to room tone that Descript adds in order to help keep the sound consistent throughout the recording and avoid 'dead sound' when you cut portions out.
## How to check if I have room tone applied?
You can see if a gap clip has room tone applied to it by selecting it in the timeline, then going to the "Properties" panel, the "Audio" section in the sidebar and that clip will be selected.
Click the option next to it to see if it has room tone applied:
Most of the time, I find this kind of useless and it creates a much louder hiss or noise than it should and it has nothing to do with the room tone of the recording.
So I turn it off by default for all projects.
## Turn off room tone on gap clips
You can turn off room tone on gap clips by going to your Descript Settings, Advanced, "Use room tone on gap clips", and unticking that box. This will turn it off for all projects on your drive from now on:
I believe Descript uses AI to figure out what the 'room tone' is automatically from your recording and generates something similar that promises to fill that gap. This room tone detection is done from the first 30 seconds of audio of a media file but it's not perfect.
Descript's recommendation is to have a few seconds of silence at the beginning of your recording before you start speaking, so that room tone can be captured and an appropriate profile be generated.
## Turn off gap clip room tone on per-project basis
You can also disable this function just for a particular project if you want. Just head over to the three-line menu, File, then choose Project settings:
Then you can switch off that room tone for new gap clips on that project:
Do you use room tone on gap clips? Does it work for you? Let me know in the comments!
### How to Export Separate Tracks from a Descript Composition
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-export-separate-tracks-from-a-descript-composition/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T07:40:43.000Z
If you've recorded a multi-track conversation in [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) — say, a podcast with two speakers — you might need to export each speaker's audio separately. Maybe you want to do further mastering in Adobe Audition or Audacity, or perhaps one track needs extra processing and you want to keep the edits you made in Descript - filler words, gaps removed, volume keyframes and so on.
The problem? Descript doesn't have a built-in "export individual tracks" feature. When you go to Publish > Export, it exports the entire composition as one mixed file. But there's a simple workaround using the **Solo track** feature in the sequence editor.
## Understanding the Setup
In this example, we have a Descript project with two speakers — Cristi and Chris Menard — each recorded on separate audio and video tracks. After making edits (cuts, audio effects like compressor and Studio Sound), the composition is ready. But we need each speaker's audio as a separate file.
A Descript project with two speakers on separate tracks — Cristi and Chris Menard
## Step 1: Open the Sequence Editor
To access individual tracks, you need to enter the sequence editor. There are three ways to get there:
- **Double-click** on a track in the timeline at the bottom of the composition
- Press **Cmd+Shift+O** (Mac) or **Ctrl+Shift+O** (Windows)
- **Right-click** on the timeline and select **Edit Sequence**
Inside the sequence editor, you'll see each speaker's track separately — with their own waveforms and labels.
The sequence editor reveals individual tracks — use the Solo button (S) to isolate one speaker
## Step 2: Solo the Track You Want to Export
Click on the track you want to export first. In the properties panel on the right, you'll see a **Solo** button (marked with an "S"). Click it.
This mutes all other tracks and plays only the selected one. If you have more than two tracks, soloing is much faster than manually muting each of the others.
Click **Done** to return to the composition view. You'll notice that only the soloed speaker's waveform appears in the timeline — the other speaker's portions are now silent.
## Step 3: Export the Soloed Track
With the solo active, go to **Publish > Export > Audio**. In the export dialog:
- Change the dropdown from "Current selection" to **Current composition**
- Select **Lossless WAV** as the format
- Click **Export**
Export as audio — select Current composition and choose Lossless WAV format
The key benefit: the exported file maintains the full timeline length. Where the other speaker was talking, there will be **silence** — this preserves perfect synchronization between tracks.
## Step 4: Repeat for Each Track
Go back into the sequence editor (Cmd+Shift+O), remove the solo from the first track, then solo the next speaker's track. Export again with a different filename.
Repeat this process for every track in your project.
## Verify in Another Program
Import both exported files into Adobe Audition, Audacity, or any DAW. Place them on separate tracks — they should line up perfectly because the silence gaps maintain synchronization. Each speaker's audio is on its own track, ready for independent mastering or processing.
### Why Not Just Download From the Media Bin?
You can save original files from Descript's media bin, but those are the **raw, unedited recordings**. They won't include any cuts, audio effects (Studio Sound, compressor), or other edits you've made in the composition. The solo-and-export method preserves all your edits.
### Related guides
[Descript Changing Your Audio Levels? Here's How to Fix ItYou import audio or video into Descript and suddenly the volume is different from what you recorded. Maybe it's louder, maybe quieter — but it's definitely not what you expected. This is Descript's automatic volume leveling at work, and it catches a lot of people off guard. Here are three places where Descript controls your audio levels, and how to fix each one. Step 1: Check Account-Wide Settings Descript has a global toggle called "Automatic volume levels" buried in your account settings. Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/descript-changing-your-audio-levels-heres-how-to-fix-it/)
[How to Export SRT Subtitles from Descript for Toggleable CaptionsIf you burn captions directly into your video in Descript, they become permanent — viewers can't turn them off. That's fine for social media clips, but for longer content hosted on Vimeo, Wistia, or YouTube, you typically want toggleable captions that viewers can enable or disable. The solution is to export your captions as a separate SRT or VTT file and upload it alongside your video to the hosting platform. How to Export Subtitles from Descript 1\. Click Export in the top-right corner of DCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-export-srt-subtitles-from-descript-for-toggleable-captions/)
[How to Cut an Animated GIF to a Specific Length in DescriptLooped media such as GIFs are difficult to wrangle in Descript. In this short article, I show you how to control exactly where they start and stop.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/cut-animated-gif-length-descript/)
[Descript pricing changes: What You Need to Know!If you use Descript for podcasting, video editing, or transcription, the recent Descript pricing changes that took effect on September 23rd, 2025 are worth paying attention to.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/descript-pricing-media-minutes-ai-credits-topups/)
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Remove Video Background in Descript: Chroma Key vs AI Green Screen
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-remove-video-background-in-descript-chroma-key-vs-ai-green-screen/
Last updated: 2026-02-20T08:22:25.000Z
[Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) offers two different ways to remove your video background — the traditional Chroma Key effect and a newer AI-powered Green Screen filter. Each has its strengths, and in this tutorial I compare both methods side by side.
**Watch the full tutorial:**
## Method 1: Chroma Key
Chroma Key is the classic approach. It works by selecting a specific colour in your video (typically green) and making it transparent. To use it:
1. Select your video clip on the canvas or timeline
2. In the right-hand Properties panel, go to **Visual** **Effects**
3. Click **+** and add **Chroma Key**
4. Select the colour to remove (defaults to green but might need adjusting with the color picker)
Chroma Key applied — the green screen background is replaced with transparency
The Chroma Key panel gives you four controls to fine-tune the result:
- **Color** — Pick the exact background colour to key out
- **Similarity** — How much variation from the selected colour to include (higher = more aggressive removal)
- **Smoothness** — Softens the edge between subject and removed background
- **Spill** — Removes colour spillover from the background onto your subject
Fine-tune the Chroma Key with Similarity (45%), Smoothness (10%), and Spill (10%) sliders
**Pros:** Precise control, works well with proper green screen setups and even green surface.
**Cons:** Requires an actual green/blue screen backdrop. Poor lighting will produce messy edges and uneven removal.
## Method 2: AI Green Screen
The AI Green Screen effect uses machine learning to detect and separate the subject from the background — no physical green screen required. Simply add the **Green Screen** effect from the Effects panel and Descript handles the rest.
Descript offers two background removal methods — the AI-based Green Screen and the traditional Chroma Key
**Pros:** No green screen needed, works with any background, quick to apply.
**Cons:** Edge detection can be imperfect, especially with complex hair or fast movement. Less manual control than Chroma Key. If you have a microphone in front of you, it might poke a hole where the microphone is, right in your torso 😄
## Which Should You Use?
If you filmed with a green screen, use **Chroma Key** — it gives you more control and cleaner edges. If you didn't use a green screen but still want to remove the background, the **AI Green Screen** is your best option. You can even stack both effects if needed.
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Clean Up Audio in Camtasia Using Descript Studio Sound
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-clean-up-audio-in-camtasia-using-descript-studio-sound/
Last updated: 2026-02-24T10:37:43.000Z
If you have ever recorded video tutorials or screencasts in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia), you know the struggle of dealing with background noise. Air conditioning hum, room echo, keyboard clicks — all of those little sounds that creep into your recordings. Camtasia does include a built-in noise removal filter, but it is quite limited. When you push it hard enough to make a real difference, voices start sounding metallic and unnatural.
Fortunately, there is a much better solution: using [Descript's](https://cotovan.com/descript) Studio Sound AI to clean your audio, among others, and then bringing it back into Camtasia for final editing.
In addition to Descript's Studio Sound, you can also use [Auphonic](https://cotovan.com/auphonic), Adobe Voice Enhance and other AI-based noise reduction and speech enhancing platforms. The workflow below will work with all of them.
This workflow takes just a few extra minutes and the difference in audio quality is dramatic. Studio Sound uses AI to isolate your voice and remove everything else — noise, echo, hum, and even music. The result is clean, professional-sounding audio that you can then fine-tune in Camtasia.
## Exporting Audio from Camtasia
The first step is getting your audio out of Camtasia as a standalone file. Go to **File → Export → Export Audio Only** and save it as a **.wav** file. WAV is an uncompressed format, which means you are not losing any quality in the export — important since the audio will be processed and re-imported.
In Camtasia, use File → Export → Export Audio Only to save your audio as a .wav file for processing in Descript.
This exports the entire audio from your timeline. If you have multiple audio tracks, Camtasia mixes them down into one file. Keep the original project open — you will need it later when you bring the cleaned audio back.
## Applying Studio Sound in Descript
Open [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) and create a new project. Import your exported .wav file into the Media bin. Next, you need to create a [sequence](https://cotovan.com/sequences-vs-compositions-in-descript/) from this file — right-click the file and choose to add it to a new multi-track sequence. This places the audio on the timeline where you can apply effects.
With the sequence open, look at the right sidebar and find **Audio Effects**. Toggle on **Studio Sound**. When you enable it, Descript uploads your audio to its cloud servers for AI processing. Depending on the length of your file, this may take a minute or two. You can see the progress as it uploads, processes, and downloads the enhanced version.
Enable Studio Sound in Descript's Audio Effects panel. The AI processes your audio in the cloud and returns a cleaned version.
An important detail: Studio Sound is applied at the **file level**, not the clip level. This means once the file is processed, every instance of that file in your project uses the enhanced version. If you want to learn more about how Studio Sound works and its settings, check out [How to Apply Studio Sound in Descript](https://cotovan.com/how-to-apply-studio-sound-in-descript/).
Studio Sound is free to use for files up to 60 minutes, which covers most tutorial recordings comfortably.
## What Studio Sound Actually Does
Studio Sound is not just a noise reduction filter. It is an AI model trained to isolate human voice from everything else. That means it removes:
- Background noise (fans, air conditioning, street sounds)
- Room echo and reverb (up to a point)
- Music stingers and background music
- Keyboard clicks and mouse sounds
- Any non-voice audio
This is a key insight: **Studio Sound removes everything that is not voice**. If you have intro music or sound effects on the same track as your voice, those will be stripped out too. Plan accordingly — keep music on separate tracks in Camtasia before exporting, mute them during the export, and re-enable them after cleaning.
The flip side of this is that Studio Sound is exceptionally good at making voices sound clean and present, even in recordings made in untreated rooms with lots of echo.
## Downloading the Clean Audio from Descript
Once Studio Sound has finished processing, you need to get the enhanced file out of Descript. In the Media bin, click on your file, then click the **three dots menu** and select **"Copy file to Finder"** (or the equivalent on Windows). You will see an option to download the **"Studio Sound enhanced audio file"** — this is the cleaned version, saved as an .m4a file.
**UPDATE:** This download has been disabled now, in later Descript versions - instead, you have to create a composition from that sequence and EXPORT it.
If you work with [multi-track compositions in Descript](https://cotovan.com/how-to-export-separate-tracks-from-a-descript-composition/), the export process for individual tracks follows a similar pattern through the Media bin.
Save this file somewhere accessible — you are about to bring it into Camtasia.
## Importing Clean Audio Back into Camtasia
Back in your Camtasia project, you will now add the cleaned audio alongside your original. Create a **new audio track below** your original audio track. Then simply drag the .m4a file from Finder (or File Explorer) onto this new track.
Drag the Studio Sound enhanced .m4a file from Finder into a new track in your Camtasia timeline, below the original audio.
Use the **magnetic track** feature (or snap to start) to make sure the clean audio aligns perfectly with the beginning of your project. Since you exported the full timeline audio, it should match up exactly — same duration, same timing.
## Muting the Original Audio the Right Way
Now that you have both the original and the clean audio on separate tracks, you need to silence the original. But here is a critical detail: **do not lock or hide the original track**.
Why? If you lock a track and then make cuts to your video later, the locked track will **not** follow those cuts. It stays frozen in place while everything else shifts, and your audio goes completely out of sync. This is one of those mistakes that can ruin hours of editing work.
Instead, use this method:
1. Right-click on any clip on the original audio track
2. Select **"Select All on Track"** to highlight every clip
3. Press **Shift+S** to **Silence Audio** on all selected clips
Right-click and Select All on Track, then Shift+S to silence the original audio. This keeps the track editable and in sync with future cuts.
This silences the audio without removing the clips. The original track stays fully editable, moves with cuts, and remains in sync. You simply will not hear it anymore because its volume is at zero.
## Post-Processing in Camtasia
With the clean audio in place, you may notice it sounds a bit quieter than the original. Studio Sound focuses on clarity rather than volume, so you will likely need to boost levels.
Apply the **Audio Compression** effect to your clean audio track. This normalizes the volume — bringing up quiet sections and taming loud peaks.
You can also adjust the **gain** (try 150-200%) to bring the overall volume up to a comfortable listening level. Listen back and adjust until it sounds natural and consistent.
## Tips and Warnings
**Studio Sound intensity:** By default, Studio Sound runs at 100% intensity, meaning maximum AI cleanup. You can lower this to blend some of the original ambient sound back in, which can sound more natural in certain contexts. A setting around 75-80% preserves a touch of room tone or some of the original audio where the person speaking might speak a little softer, while still removing most noise.
**Signal-to-noise ratio matters:** Studio Sound works best when your voice is clearly louder than the background noise. If you have sections where your voice drops to a whisper or trails off, the AI may cut those parts out — it cannot distinguish between quiet speech and quiet noise. If your recording has significant volume variations, consider normalizing or compressing the audio *before* sending it through Studio Sound. [Auphonic](https://cotovan.com/auphonic) is great at that.
**Multi-source normalization:** One often-overlooked benefit of Studio Sound is that it normalizes audio from different sources to sound consistent. If you are editing a project with clips recorded in different rooms or with different microphones, running all the audio through Studio Sound helps everything sound like it was recorded in the same space. This is particularly useful for projects that combine screen recordings, webcam footage, and separate voiceover takes.
### Related guides
[How to Export Separate Tracks from a Descript CompositionCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/how-to-export-separate-tracks-from-a-descript-composition/)
[Sequences vs Compositions in DescriptCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/sequences-vs-compositions-in-descript/)
[Descript Has Two Recorders. They are different.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/descript-has-two-recorders-they-are-different/)
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Create Multi-Cam Videos from a Single Zoom Recording in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-multi-cam-videos-from-a-single-zoom-recording-in-descript/
Last updated: 2026-02-22T08:15:15.000Z
When you record a Zoom meeting, you get a single video file with all participants visible in a grid. But what if you want to create a professional multi-camera look — cutting between full-screen shots of each speaker? [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) makes this surprisingly easy using sequences, scenes, and its transcript-based editing.
## Importing the Zoom Recording
Start by importing your Zoom recording into Descript. The file will typically be a single MP4 with all participants shown in a gallery or side-by-side layout. Descript will transcribe the audio and identify the speakers automatically.
Import your Zoom recording into Descript. The single video contains all participants.
## Setting Up the Multi-Track Sequence
The trick is to create a [sequence](https://cotovan.com/sequences-vs-compositions-in-descript/) and add the same video file to **two separate tracks**. Each track represents one "camera angle." Name each track after the speaker it will feature — for example, "Chris" and "Cristi."
Add the same video to two tracks in a sequence, then name each track after its speaker.
Mute the audio on the duplicate track so you don't get doubled audio. Only one track should have active audio.
Now, exit the sequence editor and crop or reposition each track's video to show only one speaker. For the first track, zoom into Speaker A's portion of the Zoom grid. For the second track, zoom into Speaker B.
## Switching Between Speakers with Scenes
This is where Descript's scene-based editing shines. Use **scenes** to switch between which track is visible at any point. When Speaker A is talking, show their full-screen track. When Speaker B responds, switch to their track. You can also create side-by-side scenes where both speakers are visible.
The transcript identifies each speaker, making it easy to switch cameras at the right moments.
The transcript makes this process intuitive — you can see exactly when each speaker starts talking and place your scene cuts accordingly. Use the arrow keys to nudge scene boundaries for precise timing. You can also [display speaker names](https://cotovan.com/descript-display-speaker-names/) as lower thirds to help viewers identify who's talking.
## Scene Layout Options
For each scene, you can choose different layouts:
- **Full screen:** Show only the active speaker, filling the entire frame.
- **Side by side:** Show both speakers at once for conversational moments.
- **Picture-in-picture:** Main speaker large with the other in a small corner window.
This flexibility lets you create dynamic, engaging videos from a single static Zoom recording. The quality won't be great though, specially if you're bringing in a Zoom file - the resolution of these files is usually quite low, and considering you're only zooming in in half a screen or even less, if you have more than one speaker, it will make for a pretty pixelated video.
My recommendation is to record in [Riverside](https://cotovan.com/tag/riverside-articles/) which gives you high resolution raw files of each participant.
Check the [Descript timeline guide](https://cotovan.com/mastering-new-descript-timeline-guide/) for more details on working with tracks and layers.
## Tips for Better Results
- Ask Zoom participants to use **gallery view** during recording so everyone is evenly sized.
- Record at the highest resolution possible — you'll be cropping into portions of the frame, so you need the extra pixels.
- Cut to the listener's reaction occasionally, not just the speaker — this creates a more natural viewing experience.
- Use Descript's **filler word removal** to clean up the transcript before exporting.
### Related guides
[Sequences vs Compositions in DescriptCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/sequences-vs-compositions-in-descript/)
[Display Speaker Names as They Speak in DescriptCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/descript-display-speaker-names/)
[New Descript Timeline: A Comprehensive Step-by-Step WalkthroughCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/mastering-new-descript-timeline-guide/)
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Camtasia 2022: What's New?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-2022-whats-new/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:02:44.000Z
Camtasia 2022 is here. I show you what's new in Camtasia 2022 in this in-depth video. I walk through all the new Camtasia 2022 features I could find and analyze them in detail, showing you what's exciting, what's so-so, what's completely new or what Techsmith has built upon and expanded from the previous versions.
Camtasia 2022 includes an impressive new library with 1000 new assets, among many other things. I've seen some features I requested from a while ago as well as some new ways to achieve cursor animations. Camtasia now includes tighter integration with Audiate and makes it worthwhile for roundtrip workflows for your audio cleaning, effects and then back into Camtasia.
I've taken Camtasia 2022 through its paces over the last couple of weeks and I've edited all of my new projects in it. It has been stable (apart from a couple little bugs), and performance-wise it seems an improvement. I was able to edit this entire video you are watching now, in Camtasia 2022 from start to finish.
I'd love to hear in the comments what you think of the new Camtasia 2022 release, whether you consider it's worth upgrading or not.
If you do consider upgrading, I'd love it if you used [my link](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) (affiliate), which will mean no extra cost to you. In fact, if you are purchasing it for the first time, you should get a 10% discount.
### How to Add Gaps Between Overdub Sentences in Descript
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-gaps-between-overdub-sentences-in-descript/
Last updated: 2026-03-01T13:17:49.000Z
If you use Descript's Overdub (AI text-to-speech) feature to generate AI voiceovers, you've probably noticed that sentences run together with barely any pause between them. Descript doesn't provide a sentence-level spacing tool, so there's no obvious way to add breathing room between your generated lines. Here's a simple workaround that gives you uniform, professional-sounding gaps.
## The Problem: Overdub Sentences Are Too Close Together
When you type out multiple sentences and generate them with [Overdub](https://cotovan.com/post/what-does-unlimited-overdub-mean-in-descript-pro-subscriptions/), Descript renders each sentence as a separate audio clip on the timeline. The problem is that these clips sit right next to each other with little to no silence between them. The result sounds rushed and unnatural — like someone reading a script without pausing to breathe.
Descript only offers word-level tools for adjusting spacing. There's no "sentence gap" slider or paragraph-level timing control. If you try to use the [word gap removal tool](https://cotovan.com/post/word-gap-removal-in-descript-storyboard-is-not-silence-removal/), it operates on the silence between individual words — not between whole sentences. So we need a different approach.
## The Workaround: Drag and Shorten
The trick is a two-step process: first create oversized gaps, then standardize them all at once.
### Step 1: Drag sentences apart on the timeline
In the timeline view, grab each Overdub sentence clip and drag it to the right, creating a gap of more than one second between each pair of sentences. Don't worry about making them exactly equal — just make sure every gap is noticeably larger than your target pause length (for example, if you want 1-second pauses, drag them at least 1.2 seconds apart).
After dragging sentences apart, the gaps are uneven — ranging from about 1.19 to 1.33 seconds in this example.
### Step 2: Use "Shorten word gaps" to standardize
Now click the wrench icon in the toolbar to open the editing tools. Select **Shorten word gaps**. Set it to find gaps longer than 1 second and set the target length to your desired pause duration (1 second works well for most narration). Click **Apply to all** and Descript will trim every [gap clip](https://cotovan.com/post/what-is-room-tone-on-gap-clips-hearing-static-in-your-descript-compositions/) down to your specified length.
The "Shorten word gaps" tool finds all gaps above your threshold and trims them to a uniform length.
One thing to note: Descript calculates the total silence between words, including tiny bits of silence at the edges of clips. So even though you set a 1-second target, the visible gap clip might show approximately 0.85 seconds — the remaining silence is accounted for at the boundaries. The actual heard pause will still be about 1 second.
## Bonus: Convert Overdub to Normal Audio
If you need even finer control — adjusting timing at the individual word level — there's another option. Select all your Overdub clips, then go to **Overdub → Convert Overdub to normal audio**. This converts each Overdub sentence into a standard audio file that you can edit word by word, trim, or rearrange just like any recorded audio.
Converting Overdub to normal audio gives you word-level editing control, but you lose the ability to regenerate the text with Overdub.
The trade-off is significant: once converted, you can no longer edit the text and regenerate the AI voice. The clips become fixed audio files. Use this option when you're happy with the overall script and just need to fine-tune the delivery.
## Subscription Requirement
Keep in mind that Overdub with your own voice clone requires a [Descript Pro subscription](https://cotovan.com/descript). The Creator tier only includes a limited set of 1,001 predefined stock words. If you're serious about using Overdub for narration, Pro is the way to go — it gives you unlimited Overdub with your custom voice.
###
[What does "Unlimited Overdub" mean in Descript Pro subscriptions?Descript has a much-loved feature called Overdub, which allows you to generate audio from text (text-to-speech) with your own voice.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/what-does-unlimited-overdub-mean-in-descript-pro-subscriptions/)
[Word Gap Removal in Descript is Not Silence RemovalYou may have audio files that you transcribe and work with in Descript that have speech and other audio. Maybe you have a piece that has audio in more places than you expect.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/word-gap-removal-in-descript-storyboard-is-not-silence-removal/)
[What is Room Tone on Gap Clips? Hearing Static in Your Descript Compositions?You may be suffering from 'room tone' static. Descript applies what it calls 'room tone' to gap clips by default.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/what-is-room-tone-on-gap-clips-hearing-static-in-your-descript-compositions/)
Do you need help or wish to learn Descript the right way? Join me on ****a one-on-one Descript coaching session.** [Book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Descript Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [Descript](https://cotovan.com/descript) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### What does "Unlimited Overdub" mean in Descript Pro subscriptions?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/what-does-unlimited-overdub-mean-in-descript-pro-subscriptions/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:40:03.000Z
Descript has a much-loved feature called Overdub, which allows you to generate audio from text (text-to-speech) with your own voice.
However, there's a distinction in the subscription plans for this Descript feature:
The Creator Plan limitations to Overdub will instead replace the words with 'gibberish'.
In order to use the Overdub features to create audio from text using your voice, Descript requires a training sample with your voice or a recording of your voice for training purposes. It also requires a specific text to be read and recorded by you, as a permission or authorisation. After your Overdub voice is created, trained, you can use it or share it with other collaborators so they can generate speech from your voice. This is useful if you have a virtual assistant or collaborator who is editing your podcast episodes or audio, so they can easily correct your speech if necessary.
### Add perspective to object in Adobe Photoshop | 3D perspective image object
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/add-perspective-to-object-in-adobe-photoshop-3d-perspective-image-object/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:42:04.000Z
Create a 3D or perspective deformed image in Photoshop, such as website screenshot in 3D for portfolio site or any other 3d-looking object with a shadow using a simple transform tool.
### Photoshop batch resize images using Photoshop's image processor tool
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/photoshop-batch-resize-images-using-photoshops-image-processor-tool/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:43:04.000Z
Quick way to batch resize images in Photoshop using the Image Processor tool to automatically resize many photos in a folder and convert them to JPEG, PSD or TIFF, with size and quality options. This process can also be done from Adobe Bridge.
### What is DNS? What are nameservers? What is their role in my domain name and website?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/what-is-dns-what-are-nameservers-what-is-their-role-in-my-domain-name-and-website/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:44:24.000Z
A friend recently asked me why they needed so many different accounts for managing their domain name and website. After a quick look, their domain name was registered from one company, the site was hosted somewhere else, the nameservers were pointed somewhere else entirely and the DNS was all over the place. I think that came to be this way because of different people being involved in the process over many years. When a change was required, he had to hunt down the different companies and logins to do it.
I tried to explain the difference between the different services involved in maintaining a domain name and website. I hope this explanation below helps you too understand how the different pieces of the puzzle come together to get a website from domain name to live. Hopefully, by the time you read this, you know exactly where to look to, for example, point the website to a different server, move the nameservers somewhere else or alter your DNS zone to add new services (such as email).
## First, you need a domain name
First, you need to buy the domain name. In my case, the domain name is graphicious.co.uk. You buy it from ICANN through one of their authorised resellers (ie. registrars). In your case, you may have bought it through a registrar such as GoDaddy, Hostgator, 123-Reg or whatever. There are thousands of these. You can find out where your domain was registered, if you don't remember, through your WhoIs record.
## Second, you need a server to host your website
You need to get a SERVER to put the actual website on it. This largely depends on the way your website is built (or the way you are planning to build it). You may want to build your website using Wordpress. In that case, the server needs to support the technology required to run Wordpress sites. Other types of website platforms may need different server setups. My site, for example runs on a Windows server, and was built on .NET technology. So this is the main factor that influences your decision. If your site is built by someone else, they will likely have a favourite hosting company they like to work with and will tend to recommend them.
The bottom line is, the server is the final point - where your site lives: your files, images, pages, scripts, etc.
Now, the next two pieces of the puzzles basically help connect your DOMAIN to your SERVER. How does the internet know where the content for your website exists? Read on.
## The DNS zone
In order to connect (or point) the domain NAME to the SITE SERVER, you need a DNS record. DNS stands for Domain Name Service.
When you install a site on a server somewhere (with your hosting company), the site exists on a machine somewhere in a data center, behind an IP address, for example: 186.155.23.26... just a random IP.
But you don't want to put THAT on your business card, do you? So in order to make the site accessible through a friendly (ie. domain) name, you need to map the domain to the IP address. Typically, you do this before you launch your website, part of your initial set up.
That's where the DNS comes in. It's like a phonebook, really. When you ask the question: "Where can I see the contents of graphicious.co.uk?", you ask this in of the DNS or 'the internet's phone book' as some people want to call it. And the DNS replies: graphicious.co.uk is on a machine at the address 186.155.23.26\. And you are taken there by the browser. You don't even notice it.
The DNS records (also known as a DNS ZONE) also include things like 'where should I deliver EMAIL for the domain graphicious.co.uk' (the MX records), and other records to do with the domain name, subdomains, etc.
## The Nameserver
All of these records from the DNS zone need to be STORED somewhere. These records don't exist in thin air, they need to be saved in what is called a 'NAMESERVER'. That's what hosts the DNS records. This is yet another computer with a database that keeps your DNS zone, makes sure it responds to questions from the various people and machines that try to access services on your domain: where is the website located? Where should I deliver your email? Requests for verification of domain ownership and many more, beyond the scope of this article.
So, to sum up:
DOMAIN (name) + HOSTING (files) + NAMESERVER (containing your DNS Zone) = Your site is LIVE.
All these things, in theory, can exist in different places, provided by different companies, which is what can make it hard to figure out what they are, where they are and who is in charge.
Now typically, the REGISTRAR offers NAMESERVER services also, but that is not always the case. Those that don't offer that, and just sell you the domain name, but require you to get your own nameserver... I guess they don't want to bother maintaining DNS servers, which are frequently under attack, they need to manage security, propagation of records, etc.
Most companies that offer these services for the general public tend to keep these aspects out of sight and manage them automatically. Since they offer them as a bundle, they offer the domain name AND the hosting, and then they manage everything in-between for you. I guess they've done a good job of NOT educating people.
As a customer, it's comfortable to buy the domain from someone that also takes care of hosting your 'DNS ZONE' for you. Many companies (Hostgator, GoDaddy and many many more), go a step further and give you website building and hosting services, all in one, so you don't have to worry about anything, just stay with them for everything. While this is good for beginners, it could come with strings attached.
I tend to use GoDaddy for my domain names. They offer domain name AND DNS hosting (included for free). But in other countries (Romania, where I'm from) for example, I had to get the domain from my national registrar and then figure out where to keep my DNS zone because they didn't offer that. So now there were three things to keep track of: my domain, my nameserver provider and my actual website - all on different platforms.
So this is where confusion might arise because you have your stuff spread across all these companies.
What I would recommend is you consolidate these into a single place if you can - or at least the domain name and nameserver. If all these different providers charge you for something, the amount can add up and you're getting invoices from all these different places.
I am guessing that you may be reading this article because you are confused or facing a situation where you don't know where to find your domain, hosting or make changes to your DNS. If you can, you should migrate to a registrar that offers everything in one place (domain AND DNS), then you won't have to worry where your stuff is, why you are getting invoices left, right and center, and when you need to manage/change something, you go to one place.
Well, I hope this article helps clarify at least the basic layout of a domain name and website. If you have any questions, I'd love to hear them in the comments below.
### Talking Head 2.0 Effect in Camtasia: Two Ways to Create Video in a Circle
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-talking-head-circle-effect/
Last updated: 2026-02-21T09:16:56.000Z
The circular talking head effect is one of the most popular overlays in tutorials, presentations, and vlogs. Instead of a rectangular camera feed taking up screen space, your face appears inside a clean circle that can float over any background. In [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia), there are two ways to achieve this — both using built-in tools, no plugins required.
This tutorial covers both methods step by step: using the Media Matte visual effect with an ellipse shape as the mask, and a second approach with a twist. By the end, you will have a professional circular talking head with optional border and shadow effects.
### Watch the full tutorial:
## What Is the Talking Head Circle Effect
The talking head circle effect places your camera footage inside a circular mask, hiding everything outside the circle. This is different from cropping — the masked area becomes transparent, allowing you to layer the circle over screen recordings, slides, or video backgrounds. You see this effect constantly in YouTube tutorials where the creator appears in a small circle in the corner while demonstrating software on screen.
The effect works by combining two elements: your camera footage and a shape that defines the visible area. Camtasia handles the masking through its [Media Matte](https://cotovan.com/post/play-video-inside-phone-or-custom-device-frame-in-camtasia-2021-media-matte-and-masking/) visual effect, which uses one track as the mask for another. The result is a clean, resolution-independent circular cutout that you can resize, reposition, and animate just like any other element on the timeline.
## Method 1: Media Matte with Alpha Mode
The primary method uses Camtasia's Media Matte effect, which is the most flexible and produces the cleanest results. Media Matte works by using the content on one track to define the visible area of content on another track.
Method 1: Using Media Matte in Alpha mode — the ellipse shape on the track below acts as the mask for the camera footage
Here is how it works:
1. **Place your camera footage** on a track in the timeline (for example, Track 2).
2. **Add an ellipse shape** from the Annotations or Shapes panel to the track below (Track 1). - This will serve as the background.
3. **Add another ellipse shape above**, this will serve as the mask
4. **Apply the Media Matte effect** to your shape above — find it in the Visual Effects panel and drag it onto the clip.
5. **Set the mode to Alpha** — this tells Camtasia to use the shape on the track below as the transparency mask.
6. **Resize and position the ellipse** to match the area of your face you want visible.
The Alpha mode is the key setting. It tells Media Matte to make your camera footage visible only where the ellipse shape exists on the track above. Everywhere the ellipse is not present becomes transparent.
## Setting Up the Shape Mask
The shape you place below the camera track defines the exact boundary of the circle. Getting this right is what makes the difference between a rough cutout and a professional-looking effect.
Adding an ellipse shape above the camera track — this shape will define the circular boundary of the talking head
When adding the ellipse shape:
- **Hold Shift while resizing** to constrain the shape to a perfect circle — without this, you may end up with an oval.
- **Match the duration** of the shape to your camera clip — the mask only works where both clips overlap on the timeline.
- **Center it on your face** — position the ellipse so your head is centered within the circle, with enough room for natural head movement during recording.
- **The shape colour does not matter** — Media Matte in Alpha mode only cares about the shape boundary, not its fill colour. Yellow, blue, red — the result is identical.
- **Adding another ellipse**, above, higher than the main mask and grouping it with the mask (then applying media matte to the group), can show your head popping out of the shape, which will make for this novel talking head effect.
If you need to adjust the circle size or position after applying Media Matte, select the ellipse shape on the lower track and move or resize it. The mask updates in real time on the canvas.
## The Finished Circle Effect
Once the Media Matte is applied and the ellipse is positioned, you have a clean circular talking head that is ready for compositing.
The finished result — a clean circular talking head with a coloured border, ready to overlay on any background
At this stage, you can enhance the circle with additional visual touches:
- **Add a border** — the circle shape behind the masked footage (on a track below both the camera and mask tracks), can be larger, with a visible outline or fill colour. This creates a coloured ring around your talking head.
- **Add a drop shadow** — apply the Drop Shadow effect to give the circle depth and separate it visually from the background.
- **Scale it down** — select both the camera clip and the ellipse mask, group them if needed, and resize the entire circle to fit in a corner of the screen.
The border is particularly effective because it provides a clear visual boundary between your circular camera feed and whatever background content appears behind it.
## Compositing Over Video Backgrounds
The real power of the circle talking head becomes apparent when you layer it over other content. Because the area outside the circle is transparent, the talking head floats naturally over any background.
The circle talking head composited over a background video — perfect for tutorials, presentations, or vlogs
Common use cases for the circular talking head overlay:
- **Software tutorials** — your face in the corner while demonstrating an application full-screen.
- **Presentation recordings** — the circle overlaid on your slides, keeping a personal connection with the audience.
- **Vlog intros** — a stylish circular introduction before transitioning to full-frame footage.
- **Course content** — consistent presenter presence without occupying too much screen real estate.
To composite, simply add your background content (screen recording, video, image, or slides) on a track below all the circle elements. The transparent areas of the masked camera footage let the background show through.
## Adding a Border and Shadow
A border and shadow take the circle from looking like a simple cutout to a polished, professional element. Here is the approach:
1. **For the border** — duplicate the ellipse shape and place the copy on a track below the mask. Make it slightly larger than the masking ellipse and give it a visible fill colour (white, black, or your brand colour). The size difference between the two ellipses creates the border width.
2. **For the shadow** — apply a Drop Shadow effect to the border ellipse. Adjust the offset, blur, and opacity until the shadow looks subtle but effective. A 3-5 pixel offset with 50-60% opacity is a good starting point.
3. **Keep it consistent** — if you use this effect across multiple videos, save your project as a template or note down the exact sizes and positions so every video has the same look.
## Tips for a Professional Look
A few practical tips to get the most out of the circular talking head effect:
- **Record with the circle in mind** — frame yourself centrally in the camera with some headroom. Avoid sitting too close or too far, as extreme positions make it harder to fit naturally inside the circle.
- **Use consistent lighting** — the circle effect draws attention to your face, so even, flattering lighting matters more than with a full rectangular frame.
- **Keep the circle small enough** — the purpose is to maintain a personal presence without dominating the screen. Typically 15-25% of the canvas width works well.
- **Position in a corner** — bottom-left or bottom-right are standard positions. Avoid placing the circle over important content in your screen recording or slides.
- **Lock the position** — once you have the circle where you want it, lock the tracks to avoid accidentally moving elements while editing other parts of your project.
## Next Steps
The circular talking head effect is one of those techniques that immediately makes your videos look more polished and professional. Whether you are creating tutorials, course content, or presentations, it keeps your face visible without competing with the main content on screen. Both methods covered in this tutorial work entirely within [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) — no external tools or plugins needed.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Rotate a Video in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-rotate-a-video-in-camtasia-camtasia-quick-tutorial-for-beginners/
Last updated: 2026-02-21T08:51:04.000Z
You can rotate a video in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) either by dragging the rotation handle or by typing exact degree values in the Properties panel. Here's how both methods work.
**Watch the full tutorial:**
## Rotate Manually with the Handle
Place your video on the [timeline](https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-the-timeline-in-camtasia-editing-clips-in-a-camtasia-project-camtasia-tutorial/) and click it to select it. You'll see a small rotation handle in the centre of the clip. Click and drag it — the cursor turns green — and spin the video to any angle. The Properties panel on the right shows the Z-axis degrees updating as you drag.
Dragging the rotation handle lets you freely spin the video — but it's hard to land on exact angles
This method is quick for rough adjustments, but the handle is small and difficult to control precisely.
## Rotate Precisely with the Properties Panel
For exact values, use the Properties panel instead. With the clip selected, find the Rotation section and type the degrees you need directly into the Z field. For example, type **90** for a quarter turn, or **180** to flip the video upside down.
Typing 90 in the Z field gives you a perfect quarter-turn rotation
You can also rotate along the **X** and **Y** axes for perspective-style distortion — useful for creating [3D rotation effects](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-make-3d-rotating-logo-effect-in-camtasia/). To reset any axis, click the small circular arrow next to that value.
[How to make 3D rotating logo effect in Camtasia 2021 | Camtasia TutorialHow to create a rotating 3D logo in Camtasia 2021, from a flat image file? In Camtasia 2021, although you don’t have 3D effects and 3D space, you can still simulate the 3D movement or rotation of objects and with a little bit of creativity, we can import a flatCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-make-3d-rotating-logo-effect-in-camtasia/)
When you're happy with the rotation, go to **Export** and the video will render with your rotation applied.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
### Related guides
[How to mirror a video in CamtasiaIn this very quick beginner tutorial for Camtasia I’m going to show you how you can mirror a video or flip a video or make it, you know, go in the other direction in terms of how it looks on your canvas. I have Camtasia open here, I’m going toCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-mirror-a-video-in-camtasia/)
[How to crop a video in Camtasia | Tutorial for Absolute BeginnersCropping a video in Camtasia is very easy, you can crop the video on the canvas or export a cropped version of your video, depending on what you need.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-crop-a-video-in-camtasia-tutorial-for-absolute-beginners/)
[Camtasia Interface Overview | Step by step Camtasia tutorialThe first part in my course on Camtasia, is an overview of the interface, I’m showing where everything is, how the interface of Camtasia is organised and what each section is for. In the following tutorials, I’ll go through every function of Techsmith’s Camtasia - Screen recording software and weCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-interface-overview-step-by-step-camtasia-tutorial/)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Picture in Picture (PIP) in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-picture-in-picture-pip/
Last updated: 2026-02-17T08:56:13.000Z
The Picture in Picture (PIP) effect lets you show two videos at the same time — a smaller overlay on top of a larger background clip. It is one of the most useful techniques in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) for tutorials, presentations, and reaction-style videos.
This post walks through how to set up PIP from scratch: importing clips, positioning and scaling the overlay, adding transitions, and polishing with drop shadows and animations.
## Watch the full tutorial
## Importing Clips and Setting Up the Timeline
The foundation of any PIP effect is having two video clips on separate timeline tracks, playing simultaneouslt.
The clip on the lower track serves as the full-screen background, while the clip on the upper track becomes the smaller overlay window. Import both clips into the Media Bin, then drag them onto the timeline so they stack vertically — one above the other.
Two city flythrough video clips imported into the Media Bin and placed on separate timeline tracks for the PIP effect.
Make sure the overlay clip is on the track above the background. Camtasia renders tracks from bottom to top, so anything on a higher track appears in front of what is below it. If your overlay is behind the background, simply drag it to a higher track number.
## Scaling and Positioning the Overlay
With the overlay clip selected on the timeline, open the Properties panel. Here you control the size and placement of the PIP window. The key properties are:
- **Scale** — reduce this to make the overlay smaller. A value around 30-40% works well for most PIP layouts.
- **Position (X and Y)** — move the overlay to a corner of the canvas. Common placements are bottom-right or top-right.
- **Width and Height** — you can also set exact pixel dimensions if you need precise sizing.
Scaling and positioning the PIP overlay video with Scale, Position, and dimension properties in the Properties panel.
You can also click and drag the overlay directly on the canvas to reposition it, and use the corner handles to resize. The Properties panel gives you exact numbers when you need pixel-perfect placement.
## Adding Transitions to the PIP Clip
A PIP window that pops in and out abruptly can feel jarring. Adding a transition — especially a fade — makes the overlay appear and disappear smoothly. Open the Transitions panel, find the Fade transition, and drag it onto the beginning and end of the overlay clip on the timeline.
Browsing the Transitions panel with Fade options to apply smooth transitions to the PIP clip.
You can adjust the duration of the transition by dragging its edges on the timeline. A half-second to one-second fade usually looks natural. Other transitions like Slide or Wipe can also work depending on the style you are going for, but Fade is the most commonly used for PIP.
## Polishing with Drop Shadow and Animations
To make the PIP overlay stand out from the background and look professional, add a Drop Shadow effect. This creates a subtle shadow behind the overlay window, giving it depth and separating it visually from the main video. You can find Drop Shadow in the Visual Effects panel.
The completed Picture in Picture effect with Drop Shadow applied and Animations panel showing zoom and opacity options.
For additional polish, the Animations panel lets you add movement to the PIP window. You can animate the overlay to zoom in when it appears, adjust opacity over time, or move it to a different position during the video. This is useful for drawing attention to the PIP at key moments or moving it out of the way when important content appears in the background.
## Tips for Better PIP Results
- **Keep the overlay small enough** — if the PIP window is too large, it competes with the background rather than complementing it. 25-35% scale is a good starting range.
- **Choose a consistent corner** — pick one corner for the PIP and keep it there throughout the video unless there is a reason to move it.
- **Match the content** — PIP works best when the two videos relate to each other. A webcam overlay on a screen recording, a detail shot over a wide shot, or a reaction alongside the main content.
- **Use the drop shadow** — it is a small detail that makes a significant difference in how professional the result looks. Also helps the picture-in-picture video 'pop'
- **Test different transition lengths** — too fast feels abrupt, too slow feels sluggish. Preview and adjust until it feels right.
## Next Steps
Picture in Picture is a technique you will use constantly once you know how to set it up. Whether you are creating tutorials with a webcam overlay, comparing two video sources, or adding context to a presentation, the workflow is always the same: stack the clips, scale and position the overlay, add transitions, and polish with effects.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Animated Halloween-Themed Title in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/animated-halloween-themed-title-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-17T08:27:25.000Z
We'll build spooky graphics using Camtasia's built-in shape tools, layer a night scene together, and bring everything to life with animations. No external assets needed — everything is created right inside Camtasia.
## Watch the full tutorial
## Building the Ghost Shape
The first step is creating a ghost character using Camtasia's annotation tools. By combining multiple ellipse shapes and adjusting their size, position, and color, you can form a recognizable ghost silhouette. Start with a large white ellipse for the body, then add smaller ellipses for the eyes and mouth. The key is layering shapes on top of each other and grouping them so they move as one unit. Once the ghost shape is assembled, you can duplicate it and resize copies to populate your scene.
Building the ghost shape using ellipses in Camtasia
## Creating the Night Scene
Next, build the background for your Halloween title. Use a dark rectangle to cover the entire canvas as the night sky. Add a large yellow or pale circle for the moon, positioning it in the upper portion of the frame.
For the ground, create a dark green or black rectangle along the bottom edge. Tombstone shapes are made by combining rectangles with rounded tops — use Camtasia's callout shapes and adjust the colors to dark gray. Scatter several tombstones across the ground at different sizes to create depth. This layered approach gives you a complete spooky landscape without importing any images.
Creating the night scene with moon and tombstones
## Adding Bats and Animations
With the static scene in place, it's time to add motion. Create simple bat shapes using small triangles or V-shaped annotations. Place them near the moon for a classic Halloween look.
Now apply Camtasia's animation behaviors: use **Custom Animation** to move the ghost shapes across the screen with a gentle floating motion. For the bats, animate them flying across the frame from one side to the other. Add a title text annotation with your Halloween message — try a spooky font style and use a fade-in animation to reveal it dramatically. Stagger the timing of each element's animation so they appear one after another, building suspense.
Adding bat elements and animating the spooky scene
## The Final Result
When all the elements come together, you get a fully animated Halloween title sequence created entirely within Camtasia. The ghosts float gently across the scene, bats fly past the moon, tombstones frame the bottom of the screen, and your title text fades in with style.
This technique demonstrates how powerful Camtasia's shape and animation tools can be — you don't need After Effects or dedicated motion graphics software to create eye-catching title animations for your videos.
The finished Halloween-themed animated title in Camtasia
---
## Take Your Camtasia Skills Further
- [Book a 1-on-1 coaching session](https://cotovan.com/coaching) — get personalized help with your Camtasia projects
- [Join the Media Makers Club](https://mediamakers.club/?ref=cotovan.com) — a community for video creators leveling up their craft
- [Get Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) — the best screen recording and video editing software for tutorials
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Audio time-saving in Camtasia with placeholders | Camtasia Quick Tip
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/audio-time-saving-in-camtasia-with-placeholders-camtasia-quick-tip/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:48:19.000Z
Editing audio in Camtasia can be a pain sometimes, with the limited controls and adjustments you have. Apart from gain, normalization, you can only edit the volume on the timeline, on the track, which can be quite small and hard to adjust precisely.
If you find yourself often reusing or re-editing the same type of audio for your videos (maybe a background track for your project or always using the same type of volume adjustments), you can quickly save time re-doing the same audio changes every time. Watch this video to find out how to re-use audio adjustments from one clip to another, even from one project to another, regardless of the audio file you use.
If you import mp3 or wav files in your projects, you can quickly set the desired volume, volume adjustments using the audio points and save those sets of changes to be reused in another project. You can literally migrate audio changes or replicate them across projects with a simple component you can add to your library.
Hello, this is Cristi. In this quick video, I'm going to show you a Camtasia tip that will help you with your music editing, audio editing, in Camtasia. Some users of Camtasia have expressed disappointment at the ability to control audio volume in Camtasia, and you can do it with the audio points and you have a gain control, and when you import a music file in Camtasia or a sound file, you don't have too many controls to change the volume. So I'm going to show you a little trick, if you are, you reusing the same type of sound or the same type of melodies in your videos, and you need to adjust the volume for all of them, maybe even vary the volume for the, for the song or for the soundtrack, for multiple projects. I want to show you a cool trick to save you some time.
Here I am in Camtasia, and I'm going to import a music file. It's a, it's a wave audio file so this audio file has a constant volume and you can see in the right side, you can have the Gain control like this, which will obviously change the gain on this but you don't have volume control. And the only way to change the volume is to use this audio bar here, the, the control bar for the audio points. And it is very painful to use if it's a small track like this, and yes, they have added the ability to resize your track, so if you want to make more room here, you can make the tracks about as high as you need them.
And that makes your audio points easier to work with. But if I zoom out here, you can see my sound track is quite long here, it's got like nine minutes or something, and if you find yourself having to change the volume a lot on, on soundtracks, maybe different soundtracks on various projects, and you constantly have this pain of changing this volume line all the time, maybe even you want to add some like intro outro, variation, all of that stuff, and you don't want to do those every time.
Let me show you how to do this. It's using a nice component in Camtasia, it's called Placeholders. And I didn't think, but actually placeholders also work with audio files. So let me show you, I have this audio file here, so let's suppose that I'm, you know, I'm going to zoom in here and I've already changed the volume on this, cause I pulled it down here a bit. Maybe I want to use this as a background track. I want to actually make some variation in volume here, so I'm going to just double click on this line here and add a little fade in the middle there. I'm just going to just, you know, give an example, add some audio points here, move this up or down, double click, you know, you, you do your editing on the sound track as any, any way you like to do.
And you can see that I have now this variable volume on this track. Well, let's suppose I want to reuse this on another project, so I don't want to do this exact thing over again. You obviously save your current project like this, but if you right click on this, you can convert this audio track to placeholder, or you can press Control ALT P so when I do this, look at this, the audio has gone and the audio points have gone, you think so, but no, they have not.
So let's suppose now that I'm done with this project, but I want to add this placeholder in my library. Okay. So I'm just going to right click on this, Add to library. This is nine minute long, by the way, it doesn't have to be nine minute long, it just needs to be long enough to accommodate all of your audio points and everything you did on it. Add to library, and I'm going to use this Library here and I'm going to place I'm going to just say Example audio placeholder, like this. So I added this to my library now. The canvas size or visible size doesn't really matter because there's nothing happening on this placeholder, there's just audio stuff. So click okay. Now this thing is in my library right here. Okay.
I'm going to create a new project now, just completely lose the other project. Here we go and now let's see, how can I reproduce that thing? Well, the thing is you go to library and you go to Example audio placeholder, before you bring your audio file in, or you can actually just bring your audio file into your Media bin.
So like so, let's suppose I'm going to just actually choose another file here, so this is a different song. And I'm putting this in my Media bin. Actually, you can actually put it on your timeline as well, it really doesn't make a difference because now I can go to the library, I can just drag this Example audio placeholder in here and watch this.
I take my audio track and you can see now when I highlight my audio track, you can see the audio points on the placeholder too. I'm not going to drag this yet, I'm going to just make this larger, like this. This is the placeholder track, you can see the audio points are already there. So now I can take my audio track and just drop it on top of the placeholder.
You can see the outline of the place holder becomes kind of green. I'm going to release this and you get that question, how do you want to replace this placeholder? Do you want a ripple replace? Which means filling, you know, filling the space and then pushing everything after it further back to make room or replace it from the start, so your, your audio track is going to start at the start of this placeholder or from the end, or, you know, replace it with clip speed which means it's going to make your audio file fit inside of this placeholder. So remember, my placeholder was nine minutes long. Well, this is actually gonna make your track nine minutes long, so the audio file, so that may not be what you want.
So what I'm going to choose is I'm going to Replace from start, like so. And look at this, my audio file is inside of that place holder, and it has all of those audio points and volume adjustment that I've done before. Now, of course, maybe your audio files are not the same volume all of them, you can still adjust this, of course, but this was a time-saver.
So if you're always kind of having the same tracks, the same recorder, same volume, and you want them to be at the same volume, maybe you're doing like a slide show and you don't really care about the music, as long as maybe the volume is lower, then you can use this procedure.
You have your volume already set, just drop the file on top and you can see all the way to the end, my file has been replaced by this audio content here.
So yeah, there you go. This is a quick tip. I'm sure, probably you knew this before from before, but if you did not, I hope this is useful. Thank you for your time.
Feel free to subscribe to [my YouTube channel](https://youtube.com/graphicious?ref=cotovan.com) and I will see you on the next one.
### How to extend a frame in Camtasia | Camtasia 2021 Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-extend-a-frame-in-camtasia-camtasia-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:50:51.000Z
This is how you can extend a frame in Camtasia. I'm using Camtasia 2021 but this works in later versions too, and if you want to create a still frame or a freeze frame for a number of seconds, this is how you do it. In this tutorial for Camtasia I show you how you can extend any frame on a clip on your timeline, for as many seconds as you like. If you need to add narration to a clip and you find that you need more time on a particular still image to explain things, you can expand that frame until you've finished narrating.
Thank you for checking out my quick tutorials and if you have other questions, let me know in the comments and subscribe to my channel for more videos like this, that show you quick tips for Camtasia.
Hello. Let me show you how you can extend a frame in Camtasia. I'm using Camtasia 2021, and if you want to create a still frame or a freeze frame for a number of seconds, this is how you do it. I have a video clip on my timeline here, and if I scrub with my play head here, I want to freeze the action right here for a few seconds.
So all I have to do is just click on the clip, right-click on the play head or on the clip and say Extend Frame. Or I can just press Shift + E and then Camtasia is going to ask me how long do I want that frame to stay still until the video resumes playback. Let's say I wanted to stay still for three seconds, type 3 in here. You can use these arrows to adjust the duration up and down and click OK.
So now you can zoom in and see that my clip has this, these little cuts here. They are part of the clip. If I move it, it's going to move with it, but you can see these indications to show that there's been a stitch and a cut.
So if I play my video now, you will see when it gets around to that point where I created my extend frame, the video will freeze and for three seconds it's going to stay there and then continue playback. So this is how you extend the frame in a clip in Camtasia. I hope this helps. Thank you for watching my quick tutorials and if you have other questions, let me know in the comments and subscribe to my channel for more videos like this, that show you quick tips for Camtasia. See you on the next one.
### How to make slow motion video in Camtasia | Speed up and Slow Down Video Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-make-slow-motion-video-in-camtasia-speed-up-and-slow-down-video-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:52:12.000Z
Hello, this is Cristi, and this is how to speed up and slow down video clips in TechSmith Camtasia. I have two video clips, I'm going to import them into my Media bin from disk and I'm going to put the first one to the timeline right here. You can see this running man, he's running and I want to slow down this video or make it go slower.
Here we go, how to do this? You go to the Visual effects on the left and find the Clip speed effect. You can drag this Clip speed onto your video, like so. The clip turns green for a second and it shows me that the effect was added. Now I look in the right side on the Properties and I have a few fields I can work with, like for example the speed.
By default, the speed is 1 X, which means the video clip is going to play at its normal speed. But if I put here 2 X, for example, I can go faster, or if I put 0.5, for example, I can make that go slower. So I'm going to put 0.5 here to make it go at half the speed. Press Enter, and now you can see the length of the video has become longer, of course, because there's now slower and more time on the video. So if I play it now, you can see now that the clip is playing at half the speed on my timeline. If I copy the same clip and paste it right here and make both of them smaller just to compare them, here we go. Both of them now have 0.5 speed. But if I click on one of them and put it at one X again, this will be the normal speed, you can see that the clip lasts only half the time. If I play both of them at the same time, you can clearly see that one of them is faster, one of them is slower.
And the same thing you can do by speeding up video, go to the Media bin and bring in the other clip. We can see that this clip now is quite slow. This is the original speed of the clip, going quite slowly. If I want to make it go faster again, I go to the Visual effects, drag the Clip speed on it and put here maybe 2 X to make it go faster. Of course the clip has now become shorter and let's play it.
You can see it's going faster.
Another way to add these effects, if I remove this effect here, the Clip speed, a much more convenient way to add clip speed and make the clips faster and slower is to just right-click on the clip itself and select Add clip speed. This does exactly the same thing, adds the Clip speed but you can see now down here, you have this blue bar, which shows you the clip speed and these two stopwatch icons at the end.
If you manually drag these, you'll make the clip go faster or slower, in any direction you like, like, so, so without having to type in numbers. The clip may actually play a little jittery if you don't have proxies on it, so in Camtasia 2021 you can make clips go much smoother in editing, by creating proxies for them. But this is not the point of this video.
So this is how you can create speeding up, slowing down of videos, in Camtasia by applying the clip speed effect from the visual effects or right-clicking on them and adding Clip speed effects, so directly to the clip.
If you have questions, let me know in the comments.
And this has been a very easy, beginner tutorial for Camtasia. I'm covering these in a simple manner, very short videos, just showing you one feature, one effect, one teaching lesson. And if you enjoy them, feel free to subscribe to my channel and let me know in the comments what topics you would like me to cover next and see you on the next one.
### How to mute audio in Camtasia | Camtasia Silence Audio Tutorial for Absolute Beginners
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-mute-audio-in-camtasia-camtasia-silence-audio-tutorial-for-absolute-beginners/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:53:14.000Z
This is a very quick beginner tutorial for Camtasia showing you how to mute audio in your clip in Camtasia. So if you import a video clip from your hard drive like this, you can see it has sound on it.
And if you want to get rid of the sound, you can do multiple things. First thing, easiest thing is to right click on the video, clip on your timeline and say, Silence Audio. This will make the audio volume zero on that clip only. And there you go, you can't hear anything.
Another way to do this, if you want to restore audio on a video clip, you've muted it, you can go to Modify, Remove, All audio points. This will bring your audio right back, like so.
Another way to remove audio in Camtasia is to right-click on the video clip that has your audio and video and use Separate Audio and Video like so, and then the audio track becomes its own separate clip, just with the audio. It's still playing, but you can click on it and remove it like so.
So this removes the audio from the clip, leaving you free to put other audio, music, background, whatever narration, all of that stuff.
Thank you for checking out this tutorial, I hope you enjoyed it. I have more absolute beginner Camtasia tutorials on my channel. Feel free to subscribe and see you on the next one.
### How to merge two videos in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-merge-two-videos-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:54:16.000Z
In this tutorial, I will show you how you can merge two videos in Camtasia, how you can combine two videos from different sources into a different, a single video that you can export.
Very easy. This is Camtasia 2021, and I have my timeline down there, I don't have any clips on it.
So I'm going to import one video from my hard drive to the timeline like so, and another video of another scene in the same timeline, just drag it here. It doesn't really matter where you place it, and there you go. I have two videos on the timeline at the same time, so I placed them one after the other, like so.
If you need the other one to be first, you can just move this here and pull this one there. You notice that the timeline snaps so that the videos connect perfectly. If you need to cut a video short and make the other ones start faster, you can just go to the point where you need to cut it, select the video clip, and you can press S. This will slice the video right there.
If you zoom in and see, there's a piece of video that I cut out, you can delete this and then click on the other clip and bring it to the other point so that they all go one after the other. You're free to also create a transition between these. If you go to Transitions, you can maybe use a fade or a flare or any other transition, Camtasia has about 120\. Let's place the transition between these two clips. You notice how the transition shows on both of them, like so. If I play this now, you can see the videos fading into each other, like so.
When you're ready with the merging of these videos, you can go to the Export and export it as an MP4 file and save it to disk, upload to YouTube, whatever you need to do.
Thank you for watching. This was a very simple, absolute beginner tutorial for Camtasia. I have more videos like this, teaching you all of the basics in Camtasia. Subscribe to my channel for more videos like this in the future. Thank you for your time.
### How to mirror a video in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-mirror-a-video-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:54:58.000Z
In this very quick beginner tutorial for Camtasia I'm going to show you how you can mirror a video or flip a video or make it, you know, go in the other direction in terms of how it looks on your canvas.
I have Camtasia open here, I'm going to drag a video from my disk onto my timeline directly.
Here it is. For the purpose of this video, I'm going to silence the audio and then we are good to go. Here we go. The video is playing in one direction, the boat is going towards the left. So if I want to mirror this video, horizontally, all I need to do is just click on the clip here, and in the right side, on the Properties panel, you have all these three axes of transformation, and we want to transform along the Y axis, 180 degree rotation.
Just put your mouse inside of this field, 1, 8, 0, press Enter, and now there you go, the movie, the video has flipped and now the boat is going in the other direction. Here you go, there is, this is how you mirror a video in Camtasia, and you can also do other things with this, like, if you want to make sure that the video does indeed work, you can make a copy of this, resize it, copy and paste it and place another copy there and move it there and remove the rotation, or you can use this reset button here to remove that rotation. So there you go, you have a video playing the same video into different directions, because we have mirrored it so there you go, you can do all fancy kaleidoscope effect with this. Thank you for watching, I hope you enjoy this and stay tuned and subscribe to my channel for more absolute beginner tutorials in Camtasia.
### How to blur faces in Camtasia | Motion-tracked blur in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-blur-faces-in-camtasia-motion-tracked-blur-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:55:52.000Z
How to blur faces in Camtasia. In this quick tutorial for Camtasia we look at how to hide faces or blur them in videos and also how to track the movement of the faces and move the blur along with the face to make sure the face stays hidden for the entire duration of the clip.
We don't need to just blur faces, but any object or portion of the screen, if we play with the animation a little bit and the blur annotation in Camtasia.
After importing the video you want to blur in Camtasia, you can use the Blur annotation in the Annotations area and add it to the timeline above the clip you want to blur on. If you want to have a stronger effect, you can increase the intensity of the blur, but if it's still too weak, you can always duplicate it, for a pronounced blur effect.
If the faces on your video are not static, make sure you first add a single blur annotation and animate it for the entire duration, so that the blur stays with the face. Use custom animation for this. In the video I show a method to make the tracked blur move at constant speed. After you have the blur successfully and precisely follow the face on the video, you can duplicate the entire blur annotation with the animation onto extra tracks, for a stronger blur effect, that will now behave the same way as the first one.
Thank you for watching. I hope you enjoy these quick tutorials for Camtasia. Let me know in the comments, if you find them useful, and if you have other questions of how to achieve different things. Subscribe to my channel for more tutorials like this.
In this tutorial, I'm going to show you how you can blur faces in video. You don't have to just blur faces, you can blur anything you want in video in Camtasia. But let's look at how to blur faces. I have a video clip here and you can see the people are moving, so they're not static. And you can go to Annotations and go to this teardrop icon here and you have the blur effect here. Drag this effect on top of the video, not on the video itself, but on the track above, like so. Extend the duration for the entire duration of the video, and you can see in my preview here that I have a blurred area that I can move around and scale. So let's suppose I want to blur this face here and resize it to the entire size of the face, like so. But of course my video is moving, so I need to make sure that I can move this around with the face, for example.
This works best if the faces don't move too much and if they do, then you need to adjust it. So the way to adjust this, you need to add an animation for the entire duration of your clip and move the object like so. So let's go to Animations and click on Animations and use this custom animation. Click on it and drag it on your blur annotation, like so. Then extend the end frame and the first frame to the start and the end of your clip, like so. And at the moment it's not moving because I haven't changed it yet, but place it to the end and make sure the key frame turns red and move this blur effect to the face correctly at the end of your clip, and then move it at the start again and make sure it fits the start of the clip, of the face like this. So then you need to right click on the animation, this yellow arrow, right click on it, click on Enable Easing and change the easing to linear. This makes sure that your object, your blur moves at a constant speed.
After you've done this, you need to move your play head around and see where the face is actually escaping the blur area. And it helps if you zoom in, Control key and mouse wheel to zoom in. And then all you have to do is just move around and adjust the blur effect to where it needs to be with your clip selected. And so, for example here, I need to move it down here, and if I move back here somewhere, I move it here. You notice, as I'm making changes, Camtasia adds key frames automatically to my animation and moves it in the place where it needs to be, and it builds the key frames in-between. Depending on the movement in your video, you may have to move this quite a lot, but then at some point it's going to work quite nice and it's going to stay in place. Go again somewhere where you notice it's not quite in place and move it like this, and like this, and you can see the key frames being created wherever I move.
So this is a sort of motion tracking if you want, but it is manual and not just the movement, but you can also adjust the size of the object of the blur effect. At the end, you have a blur area. Let's watch if it works.
So you can see the blurred area follows the face, and the face is blurred throughout the entire duration of the clip.
If the blur is not strong enough, you can duplicate this track with all the animations on it. So click on the track, click on the clip with the blur, control + C to copy, go to the start of your animation and Control V to paste. This actually pastes a duplicate of that. So you notice now the blur is stronger. If you need it even stronger, paste it again at the start. Make sure you paste it at the start so that the frames are in sync and the animation is in sync.
You notice now that the face is not recognizable anymore, this is how you blur faces on videos in Camtasia or moving objects, or maybe car license plates or anything you need to blur, you can do it with this effect on top of the video and then track it with the animation to make sure it stays on the subject.
Thank you for watching. I hope you enjoy these quick tutorials for Camtasia. Let me know in the comments, if you find them useful, and if you have other questions of how to achieve different things. Subscribe to my channel for more tutorials like this. Thank you and see you next time.
### Play video inside phone or Custom Device Frame in Camtasia 2021 | Media Matte and Masking
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/play-video-inside-phone-or-custom-device-frame-in-camtasia-2021-media-matte-and-masking/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:03:42.000Z
This is how you can play a video inside a mobile phone frame in Camtasia - use any image from the internet of a phone or device frame, to mask it and show a video playing inside it, using a feature that was added in Camtasia 2021: Media Matte.
You can choose any device, not just a phone, provided it's static and upright, so that you can easily cut out the screen and replace it with your video. You can then play any video inside this frame by applying a couple effects that are easy to work with in Camtasia 2021.
This very short Camtasia tutorial only shows this procedure. Let me know if you like these quick and dirty tutorials and I will make more.
Okay. So this is a way to add a device frame that you don't download through the Camtasia assets library. You just find an image online and you can see this iPhone here, it doesn't have transparency. It's got a black screen here and it's just as easy to mask it and use it for putting videos inside of the frame.
So let me show you how it is. I downloaded this PNG file. I'm going to import this to Camtasia. So right here, I'm just dragging it to my media library and now I can put it on my canvas right there. By default Camtasia is going to change the canvas size. If you don't have anything else to match the media, you're dragging there, but I don't want that.
So I'm going to go back to Project settings, and change it to HD like this. So you can see that this actual PNG does have alpha around the phone, but not on the screen. So let me bring in another video file that I can, I want to put a video inside of the frame. So I'm going to go here and I've got a few videos here, so let me just bring this one in here.
Okay. And I'm going to put this on the timeline. And I'm going to put it below the phone frame like this. So as you can see now, the video is playing, but of course you can't see it through. So very easy to make this work. You can actually go to the Annotations, go to the Shapes, find a rectangular one and just put it inside of the frame like this, resize it to match the frame.
And the following effect only works in Camtasia 2021, by the way. You go to your Visual effects here and use media matte and drag it to this shape that we just added right now. Let me expand the shape to fit the full length and then go from Alpha, go to Alpha invert. This is actually going to mask out the inside of the frame.
You want to copy this group together, not copy it, sorry, you, you select both of them and group them. And now look, you can see your video file is see-through. Now of course you can make that also disappear by creating another media matte. So let's move the phone layer higher. And on this new layer, I go back to Annotation, I create another one, another rectangle like this. Also make that the full length and this time, just resize this one to be just slightly outside of the frame, like, so, and then apply the media matte to it using visual effects, media matte and there you go. Your video is masked inside of this. You can also select both of them and group them.
So now you've got a phone frame. Video file playing inside of that. If you want to actually, pan around you just open this group here and you can move around your video file like this, and you can add an animation if you want to like, so, you know, and you can move the video, inside it using an animation to focus on whatever area of the screen you like.
And then that's going to pan around and the video is going to move. So this is how you do it. Two media matte effects on two shapes. And then of course, if you want to select both of them now and group them, they become, everything becomes a single object that you can move around. And you can paste it. You create another one here.
Two phones. All you have to do is just go inside and replace the media, the video file. So there you go.
### How to restore the audio points on a videoclip in Camtasia after Silence Audio
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-restore-the-audio-points-on-a-videoclip-in-camtasia-after-silence-audio/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:04:53.000Z
Have you lost your audio in Camtasia? How to restore the audio that you silenced - three methods to bring back or unmute the audio stream on a clip that has been muted or that you have used 'Silence audio' on.
In this quick tip video I show you how to restore your audio in Camtasia, on any clip on your timeline. There are more ways to do it and just be warned: this will reset all audio points on that clip. So if you have created other audio points on a clip and want to preserve them, before you apply this, cut the clip before (or after) the points you want to keep. Then apply this to the other part of the clip.
On your timeline, Camtasia makes it a little hard to find how to bring your audio back. Also the audio points are very hard to grab and handle when they are muted or reduced to minimum volume. You need perfect mouse accuracy to get to them. But here I show you three ways to bring them back.
Hello, this is Cristi from Graphicious. Thank you for joining me. Today I have a quick tip for you for Camtasia. If you have removed the audio or you have silenced the audio from a video clip on your timeline and you don't know how to bring it back, this is for you. I had a question on the YouTube channel about this. Someone asked what to do if they have silenced the audio for a clip and they didn't know how to bring it back.
So there are multiple ways to do this, and I know Camtasia doesn't make this very straight forward in the interface. So let's have a look at how to do this. I'm going to bring in a video that I edited earlier and you will see that it has audio, of course.
And now if you sometimes, you know, you right-click on it and say, Silence Audio, like this, or you press SHIFT+S. Now the audio is gone, you don't see the wave form anymore, but let's say that maybe you change your mind, you want to bring it back, maybe you want to see what it was or use it now. So if you right-click on this you know, you have Silence Audio, but you don't have Bring audio back. You can't do that. You can click Edit audio, which again, it's not going to do anything, it's just going to switch the waveform, but you don't see that one because it's right at the bottom. So what you can do is, the most straightforward way is to select your clip and just go to the Modify menu and go to Remove, All Audio Points.
Now, just to make sure you understand this, if you have actually changed the audio to make different audio points so that you will change the level across your clip, this is going to remove those. So if you haven't actually silenced your entire clip, but just portions of it because you've used the volume controls or the audio points to make the volume louder or softer in some areas, if you choose this option, it's going to remove all of those. So if you don't want to lose those, maybe cut the clip, split the clip, and then leave the part that you want to bring back. But anyway, I'm going to just show you now for the entire clip. Click this, Remove, All audio points. And now this is it, my waveform is back.
So what I was saying earlier, if you double-click on the line here to create an audio point, this is the same thing. You know, if I double-click again to create more audio points and I silence this area, and maybe I silence this area at the end, if I want to bring that back then obviously you can put your mouse right down here and you notice the mouse changes to up and down arrows.
If you click on that, it's going to raise the audio points. So the only thing at the bottom of the clip here, is the, actually the audio line.
So if I right-click again, this is the second method. If I right click again and say Silence audio, or I press SHIFT and S and I don't see this instead of going to that menu that I just showed you, you can just move your mouse very carefully at the bottom here. It may be hard to see and just click and move it up. So there it is. Your audio line is back. So this is one method to bring back the audio, if it's right at the bottom. I know this should be easier, and maybe Techsmith's going to review this in , you know, future versions of Camtasia, but until then, this is how to do it.
So just to show you another way. If you have this audio down here or let's silence the entire audio like this, again, I'm not using the first or the second method. If you zoom in very closely, if you look very closely here on the bottom left, there's a little bit of green. Now this is up to your screen resolution and your mouse accuracy, but actually that right there in the corner, that little green thing is an audio point. So if I click there, look, I see it, I see the audio point, I can drag it and raise it up. The problem is this is going to just pull that audio point up and the rest of the audio is going to kind of go down, so you're going to need to have to, you know, pull the other ones, and it's not very accurate, but you know. Right-click on this, Silence Audio, the easiest way, just Modify, Remove, All audio points for that selected video.
There it is. I hope this helps, if you get stuck like this. Thank you for watching. And if you haven't subscribed to my channel, make sure you subscribe now.
And if you don't have Camtasia, by the way, I showed you this in Camtasia 2021\. If you have not upgraded to Camtasia, I recommend you do it. It's got many new features and if you don't instead buy Camtasia but you buy the maintenance plan that will give you the next version when it comes out next year, usually sometime in April, I think it comes out with a new version. So thanks again for watching. See you on the next one.
### How to make a circle progress bar animation in Camtasia 2020
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-make-a-circle-progress-bar-animation-in-camtasia-2020/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:19:19.000Z
How to make a round progress bar indicator in Camtasia. This simple and quick tip for Camtasia will show you how easy it is to create a circle progress indicator for your projects. It's useful if you want to show how much longer a clip or section of your clip is running or a loading sign or a time until a livestream starts - it has all kinds of applications in your Camtasia projects.
And the beauty of it is that it doesn't take long, it doesn't require special assets or items, just everything you need is inside Camtasia already. This trick makes use of the new track matte features in Camtasia, so it won't work in any version prior to Camtasia 2020.
The progress bar indicator works both ways - clockwise and anti-clockwise. You can change its colour, line weight or thickness and it is completely transparent, which means you can add it on top of other clips at any size.
### How to create monotone or contone photos in Xara Designer Pro X
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-monotone-or-contone-photos-in-xara-designer-pro-x/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:19:52.000Z
How to create monotone or contone photos (monochromatic colour with black) in Xara Designer Pro X. This is a simple procedure using colour in Xara that allows you to take any photo and convert it into a monotone or contone photo, regardless of what colour it is when you start. It's a great and modern artistic procedure that helps brings photos together, using the same colour or make them integrate into an overall design by bringing the images to match an existing colour theme.
We are using the contone functions in Xara Designer Pro X colour palette, when you select a photo, you can choose to give it a light colour and dark colour and the photo will be converted to a contone, using the highlights in the photo (and anything that is not black) to paint them with that colour.
You can also use this procedure to convert images to negative/inverted photos, by simply swapping the colours you choose. You can also convert images to monochromatic or grayscale like this.
### How to create Star Wars Opening Titles Scrolling Text in Camtasia | Step by Step Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-star-wars-opening-titles-scrolling-text-in-camtasia-step-by-step-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:21:13.000Z
How to create the Star Wars Intro Titles text that scrolls into space at the beginning of Star Wars Movies? In this Camtasia tutorial I walk you through the whole process to create these iconic opening credits and make them look as realistic and close to the original as possible.
We use annotations, groups, animation, distortion, gradients, remove colour effect - it's all in here, to achieve a look that is as faithful as the movies we're all geeking about on May the 4th! :) All the assets in this tutorial remain editable and adjustable to the end so you can reuse this to create similar animations as parodies or fan-art videos.
Camtasia has a few quirks we need to navigate, such as being unable to change angles of gradient fills to create a nice faded shadow far into the distance, or distorting an animating an object at the same time.
UPDATE: After posting the video, I realised that if you want to create the fade effect in the distance, it's easier to do it (Camtasia 2020+ only) by creating the rectangle with a gradient fill from white, and apply the Luminosity Invert track matte effect to that track. It will immediately create a nice and smooth fade that doesn't cover anything else. With this procedure you don't need to mess around with the "Remove colour" effect at all but you do have to keep that track above your text.
I hope you can learn something from this tutorial and if you do, please like this video, subscribe to my channel and let me have your feedback in the comments.
### How to create easy, reusable bullet points with Quick Properties and Customisations in Camtasia 2021
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-easy-reusable-bullet-points-with-quick-properties-and-customisations-in-camtasia-2021/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:21:53.000Z
How to create easy, reusable bullet points with Quick Properties and Customisations in Camtasia 2021\. In this new version of Camtasia, you can use quick properties to add customisable fields and options for your assets. In this Camtasia video tutorial we create some bullet points you can reuse in your Camtasia projects, just like in PowerPoint.
If you are trying to create more of your projects and presentations in Camtasia instead of PowerPoint, you can move some of that workflow in Camtasia and the new possibilities for creating customisable assets that you can use in your projects greatly speeds up the process.
You can create customisable assets you can add in your library, such as bullet points with pre-defined text properties, animated bullet points and in-out behaviours, to add dynamic movement and make your projects more interesting.
In this video, I show you how to create the bullet points using annotations, how to animate it, how to add them to the library and how to re-use them. We even look at creating customisable assets with more than one bullet point that you can quickly drag from your library and use in your presentations. All you have to change is the text and you're set. This video is for beginners, it will show you how you can put a little effort upfront but with great payoffs down the line as you'll be saving a lot of time in future projects.
Hello, this is Cristi from Graphicious.
In today's video with Camtasia, we're going to work with Camtasia 2021, and I would like to show you a little trick with Camtasia, to create bullet points.
If you're trying to get away from PowerPoint and you do a lot of presentations and you have like bullet points to show and you want those to be revealed in different times and you want to keep the bullet points on screen and you want to do this without PowerPoint, this is a very easy video to follow.
And we will be looking at a new feature in Camtasia 2021 that's going to help speed up that process. It's possible to use this same thing in Camtasia 2020 or 2019 and previous versions, but this new thing that was added in 2021 is going to help you speed up the process and make everything more reusable.
We're going to just go here in Camtasia, I have a new project open and I'm going to go to annotations.
You can see my canvas here is all black and I don't have any content on the screen at this time. So, I'm going to use a simple text annotation, I'm going to drag this onto the canvas here, and this is going to be the text of a bullet.
So we want to do these bullet points so they are reusable.
The first thing I'm going to make is more room for this text in here and probably, I'm not going to use the same size, so for bullet points, if you want to have like 5 bullet points on the screen, they have to be a bit smaller.
Depending on the amount of text you want to use in a bullet point, you want to make this smaller, maybe this size is fine - 66 points or let's say 60.
And one tip you want to do, just so you know, you want to make these bullet points probably aligned to the left and also to the top. The reason I'm saying this is because you never know what bullet points you're going to need and how much text is going to be in each bullet point. So you want to make them all expandable from the top-left, so that if you have multiple lines in a bullet point, they will nicely wrap onto the next line. So this is an example, this is a bullet point, and it goes on to two lines or even three.
So you can see this bullet point has three lines, and the idea is that in PowerPoint when you have bullet points, they nicely align to the left, and the actual bullet point stays on the outside of them, so that's the reason we're not going to include the actual bullet in here.
So I'm going to just leave this as it is, I'm going to make it a bit wider. Let's suppose this is the width of the bullet point. Now I want to also create the bullet itself. I know Camtasia doesn't create it for you so that's the secret for having them aligned properly.
I'm going to go to the annotations again and move to this tab here with the shapes and I'm going to just grab one of these white rectangles. I'm just going to keep it simple, I'm going to make a white rectangle as a bullet point. Just make it small like this. And the idea is that it is a single line, so the bullet point will have to be a single line of text. If you want to resize it proportionally, hold down the SHIFT key, or if not, you're good to go like this.
This is my bullet point. Let's make it a bit smaller here, there you go.
So that is a simple bullet point with my text.
Now, you can make the text bold if you like, that's fine, up to you. It looks nicer like this with bold. You can zoom in, of course, and adjust the bullet point maybe it's a little too large, like that, so there you go, that is it.
You have the bullet point and you have the text.
Now how can we make this reusable? So, the idea is that we will create a library asset that we can reuse in our projects when we need to have bullet points. So if we want to have 3 bullet points, 5, 1, 2, 10, whatever, we will reuse the same component over and over again on the same screen, scene if you want, we can have these appear at different times. So another thing I want to do is, I want to make the reveal of this text be interesting. Maybe you can do like a fade in or whatever, or you can go to behaviours and you can use one of these behaviours that are pre-built with Camtasia.
So I do like this one that fades in from the left, I can use this one or you can use the pulsating one, depends how interesting you want this to be. And of course, it can be replaced later. I'm going to just use this fade, I'm just going to drag it on top of the annotation or down in the timeline, which I'm going to zoom in a bit now.
So watch what happens with my bullet point. This is how the bullet point appears.
You can customise the in, during and out events, for the duration of this, so in, it's going to fade as you can see, for the in it fades in, and then stays there for a second and then fades out.
So if this is how you want to do it, that is fine, or you can probably take out the OUT event and just say NONE here in the right. So right now it's going to just fade in like this from the left nicely, and it's just going to stay there until it runs out.
So this allows you to make this bullet point stay for as long as you like by changing the duration at the end of the clip.
We have a bullet point, we have a nice coming in, kind of behaviour and we have the white bullet itself.
You can make this interesting as well, maybe you go to transitions and let's say we want to choose like a glow and apply that to the shape here. So while it's fading in, the bullet point kind of glows, so look what happens. Like this. Maybe it's more interesting or you can add a behaviour to that one to make it bounce or whatever.
Keeping things simple, now we have the bullet point, how do we reuse this, because if I just select everything and just copy and paste it, it's just going to make a duplication of everything on my screen, and that is fine, but then everything has to be taken care of so it doesn't get lost and moved by mistake, and you have to change your text as well.
So I'm going to delete my duplicated copy and show you how to do this. We want to make a component and in Camtasia, you can make a component from anything and group it, or add it to your library directly. So this is exactly what I'm going to do here with this element, with the bullet point attached to it. This is my text, I'm happy with the font, I'm happy with the colour, I'm happy with the size of the bullet and everything, so all I have to do now is just select them both on the timeline and group them. You can press CTRL + G or you can select, right-click here and Group. So this is my bullet point now, it has moved into a group. I can now move it anywhere on my screen because it's a single unit. I can still go back in and open this group and make any changes I like to it, including double-clicking on it to change the text. When I'm happy with this I can even rename this if I open the group and click, double-click on the tab here, I can call it Bullet point, like that.
So I have a nice component, it's a group and it's a bullet point with text in it.
So what can I do now to reuse this? Well, one of the things that Camtasia introduces is access to Quick Properties. Before I add this to my library, you can look in the right side here and you can see that the bullet point properties, this object that I have, has now this text here, this is the text of the bullet point and the callout and the colour and the font. So before, in previous versions you could only access these quick property fields from specially built components that Camtasia was giving you in their library packs or annotation packs or whatever.
But now, this version introduces access to these. By yourself you can create these yourself and watch this, this text here, without even opening the group, without double-clicking on it and figuring out where it is, to type new text in, I can just click in here in the text and say: This is bullet point 1\. Press ENTER and it updates the text on your bullet point on the screen.
So this makes it much easier to have access to the content and the text and also makes it nicer for these to be turned into shareable assets.
If you're happy with how your bullet point is behaving, what you can do now is add it to your library because these properties are available here. So you can change even the colour of the bullet point from here, look.
They are customisable beyond just having to double-click on each of them kind of changing it inside.
I'm just going to leave it to white right now. Let's do this, right-click on this group and say Add to Library... I made a presentation library which has nothing in it, and I'm going to just use - you can use Canvas Size, which is going to add this bullet point exactly in the place it is now, so when you bring it in again, it's going to place it in the exact same place, because it records the canvas size, or I can say: Use visible size, so it's just going to save this object. When you bring it in you can move it anywhere.
So I'm going to use visible size, click OK and there it is, in my library.
Right now it shows you this icon on the left, that it has customisable properties on it. Let's see, I want to add two more bullet points. I'm just in my library right now, let's suppose that the first bullet point has been long until here, I'm going to drag another one and place it right here.
So this is my second bullet point. Play that. And it comes on, you can move it so it aligns with the other one and why don't we just add another one here, like that? Put it here. You can't see the beginning of it because it has that behaviour on it, when it comes in, so if you want to play with them before you want to arrange them to where they need to be, maybe take the behaviour off.
This is, three bullet points in my timeline. You can see them here. So if I play my project now, you can see the first bullet point comes in, the second one, the third one. You may notice that my blur animation here on one of the bullet is getting cut off. That's because they are in the group. What you can do to prevent that is right-click on the group and say: Resize Group - To Canvas Size. So that makes every one of these bullets not be constrained by the canvas, the actual little group canvas that's created inside, you just say Resize Group - to Canvas Size, and they all occupy, they all have this same space available to them. Now they don't get cut off anymore, watch what happens: they all appear in a nice fashion like this.
This is a nice, cool thing. In previous versions of Camtasia, you could change the text by double-clicking on the object to get inside of the group and then double-click again on the annotation and 'bullet point 2'. You can change the text like that. Well, this is much easier to do now in Camtasia 2021, because look, I'm clicking on the group itself and automatically on the right side I have access to that text, just like I showed you before.
Let's do the third one, bullet 3, just click in there, bullet point 3\. These are the three bullet points and you're done.
So this is much easier now. One other tip I have for you: If you find yourself that you often use two, three, five bullet points and you don't want to have to manually add each one of them every time you need to put five bullet points or three bullet points, you can create an asset in your library with three bullet points already built in.
So watch what happens, I am on my timeline and I'm going to move all of them to start at the same time, so you can see them all in there coming in, all three like this. So watch what happens again. You see that in the right side every time I click on one of these, they are exposed the text that's available inside of that particular bullet point. But watch what happens: if I want to save an asset that has 3 bullet points by default, I group these together again, select all of them and CTRL + G, and check this out: now, each one of them inside of that group appears in the same screen. So I can change all three bullets at the same time, in one go. I have them all in here, so when you bring your bullet points from PowerPoint, you just bring this up in here, drag this three bullet point asset onto your canvas, put the text in here for each one of them and you're done.
One note though, you notice that only one of them has the call out rectangle and colour changeable. The reason is Camtasia thinks that I didn't want to save that to the library like that so you can do is, you can click on this little icon, open quick property editor, open that and you can see here the ability to take out some of these properties and you make them uneditable if you like. So if I want the callout colour to not be changeable anymore, I can just remove it from here. Or, if I want to add the other ones in, there are three callouts in here, I can click plus on all three of them.
You can even change the order of these fields like that.
So there you go. Each bullet point now has a text that is customisable and a default, callout, you can even change the label of this field. So let's say Bullet Point Text, you just add a label for them, so that you know exactly what you are changing. I change that on all three and click Save. So watch this, Bullet Point, Bullet Point, Bullet Point. There may not be enough room for me to show those in here but you get the point. You can now customise all of these in one go, just by grouping them together.
So when you're happy with the way this component behaves, why not right-click and add it to library? So now I have three-bullet point component, right?
I'm going to use canvas size this time because I don't want to have to expand all those groups every time. Click OK and now my library has a three bullet point.
If somewhere in another presentation or in another video I want to put in here a bullet point with three points, I just drag that from the library and here they are. And click on this and all of the text fields are easy to customise.
So this is a much time-saving feature. You don't actually have to manually create all these bullet points, if you have a workflow like this where you need to do a lot of these components and bullet points and other assets coming in from PowerPoint, it pays to actually create them the first time, save in your library, create the proper fields that you want to customise and just reuse them anytime. And you still have access to move them inside and out, left and right, get them to start earlier or later, depending on your presentation, just by opening this group here. So look, I'm opening the group and now because all three of them start at the same time, that's not very interesting. But you can take one of them and just move it to the side and make the other one start later on and, just like that, you've created three bullet points that come in at different times.
And you can expand this for your entire presentation and just move them about.
And when they are about to come out, you know, leave the screen, you can also do that, you expand the group, you go inside and you say, you know what, bullet nr. 1 has to disappear right about here. So you can go in here, maybe go to transitions, maybe add a fade out or whatever you want to that particular bullet point, and watch this, it's going to leave the screen just by itself. So you are done with that one.
So I hope this tutorial was useful, thank you for watching, thanks for your time. If you find this useful, subscribe to my channel, like it, comment and if you have any questions or Camtasia tutorial ideas, I'm actually looking for ideas right now. If you haven't upgraded to Camtasia, there's a link in the description for that, thank you again for your support and thank you for your time.
See you next time.
### How to crop a video in Camtasia | Tutorial for Absolute Beginners
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-crop-a-video-in-camtasia-tutorial-for-absolute-beginners/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:47:06.000Z
In this short tutorial for beginners, I cover both use cases in cropping a video in Camtasia.
First I show you how you can crop a video on the canvas so that you can fit other videos in the same frame, perhaps achieve a picture-in-picture effect, by resizing or cropping a video and placing another video underneath.
I show you the way to go into Crop mode and also the shortcut to quickly crop a video directly on canvas while you're editing.
The second scenario I demonstrate is how to crop a video and export it cropped, maybe you want to import a video in Camtasia and export it at a different aspect ratio or export a vertical video for iPhone or TikTok or YouTube Shorts, etc. This way you edit your project settings, place a regular video on your canvas and then resize it or position it on the canvas to show the subject in the picture at all times.
I show also a little trick by using custom animations to make sure the subject stays on screen if it moves but your video is vertical, so we do a little bit of object tracking.
Hello in this quick tutorial, I'm going to show you how you can crop a video in Camtasia. It's very easy to crop and it depends on what you want to do with it. If you want to export the video at a specific size, maybe for Instagram or social media, or if you want to crop the video on screen so you can put it beside another clip, it's very easy to do. Let me show you.
I'm going to import a clip, on my timeline, you can see it on the timeline here. And the first thing is maybe I want to crop it so that I can only see this big picture, this big building in here. That is very easy in Camtasia, at the top bar, you can switch from the edit mode to the crop mode by clicking this, and now the outline of the clip turns blue. And now that means that when you resize it, it's not going to resize it, but it's going to crop it. For example, if I pull on the left here, it's cropping all of the other buildings and from the right, like this it's cropping this. You can see the clip is still playing and it still works, I just don't see anything around the area that I cropped. You can crop from the top as well or the bottom, and you can still move it around. The video is still going to play but now you won't see the rest of the video.
You can do this very easily also without switching to the crop mode, by staying in edit mode, and when you want to crop, you just hold down the ALT key. Hold it down and you can see the outline of the video changes to blue, which means you are in crop mode. You can see also on the top bar, you are going into crop mode just temporarily, while you're pressing the ALT key down. So hold it down, and you drag these handles and there is your video coming back so you can change the cropping.
You can resize and the cropping also can be animated. So if you want to keep a lock on this big building here, you can animate it so that when the building moves out of the screen, you can add an animation, go to Animations, Animations, Custom animation, drag the animation here, and then make it longer like this.
And then, when you're moving to the point where the animation, the end frame turns red, you can then press ALT again, to go into crop mode and remove the crop from one side and move it to the other side. So now the building is again in frame. So look what happens, the cropping is animating and tracking my building so that the building is always inside the video frame, and also you are cropping and animating it. So the cropping can be animated.
So this way you can put other images or other clips behind your clip because it is see-through. So for example, if I bring in another video clip and put it on a track behind my original clip, you can see that I can see now the other clip through it, and my clip is playing on top of it.
You can then move it anywhere you like and so on. So this is one way to crop the video on your canvas.
If you actually want to crop the video and export it cropped, of course you need to change your project settings. So let's make a new project and bring in the same video in my project, the same video with the building.
Just place it on your timeline somewhere. And now you can see my video is widescreen HD, but I want to export it for example as a phone size, which is a vertical video. All you need to do is go to the Project settings at the top, the zoom dropdown, go to Project settings and change the canvas size. You can see now it is HD.
I can drop down this menu and choose, for example, something like iPhone XS as an iPhone. You notice I click Apply, and now my video is of course out of the frame. It's not entirely in the frame because this is my screen now. So to do this, to make the video play full screen and cropped, all you need to do is just grab the video, use the handles to resize it like so, and resize it like so. And if you need to adjust it horizontally, you can still do that by dragging it left and right while making sure you're not leaving any blank bars at the top and the bottom, like this.
So again, if you want to keep the building in sight for example, let's say maybe I want to keep this building in here. Of course my video is going to play and that building is going to go out of the video. But again, you can animate this. So let's add an animation, go to Animations, Custom animation, drag it to your video and maybe move it for the entire duration back and forth like this.
And then go to the end and move your video to the very end where that building is moving. So now you can see my viewable area that I care about is inside of the phone frame at all times, like so. When you're ready, you can export your video, and because Camtasia project size has been changed to an iPhone frame, everything else you see on the outside is not going to show in your video.
The video is actually going to be vertical and it's going to have just this content in it. You can add titles and other things, as long as you stay inside of this content area, you are good to go. Thank you for watching. I hope this quick tutorial was helpful. Let me know in the comments and stay tuned for more tutorials like this.
### How to Make 3D Rotating Logo Effect in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-make-3d-rotating-logo-effect-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:54:19.000Z
How to create a rotating 3D logo in Camtasia 2021, from a flat image file? In Camtasia 2021, although you don't have 3D effects and 3D space, you can still simulate the 3D movement or rotation of objects and with a little bit of creativity, we can import a flat image (such as a logo, avatar, etc) and move it in 3D, rotate it, add motion and light effects to it, to make it look quite realistic and professional.
In this Camtasia logo animation tutorial, I'm showing you how to create a spinning 3D logo effect with a nice transition in, transition out, light beam effect for a glossy aspect, from two spotlights, motion blur, everything. The spinning logo created in this tutorial can be superimposed onto any other clip or image and it will show through the image, because it's a transparent / PNG image that you import the first time.
I am also covering how to make this a reusable asset and how to replace the logo so that you only create the animation effect once and you can reuse it with other logos or objects, to create brand animations, intros, overlays and more.
Hello, this is Cristi. In today's Camtasia cool tutorial I'm going to show you how you can create a rotating logo animation with light effects, motion blur, all that stuff, and it makes it look like a 3d logo that's rotating, although the logo we start with, is not 3d at all. So you don't need a 3d program for this.
Here's an example of what I'm showing in this video and what we will accomplish, so stay with me and we will take it one step at a time.
So I'm going to start now with my logo, more like an avatar. So I'm bringing this from my hard drive into Camtasia. I'm going to place it in the media bin for now and then I can use it to put it on my canvas right there.
When you add an image or a clip in Camtasia for the first time in a new project, Camtasia resizes your canvas to that object size as a means to kind of helping you maybe, and I don't like that. So I want to change it back to full HD screen. So I'm going to go to the top drop-down here, go to Project settings and change that back to HD and click Apply.
I'm going to leave it to 30 frames and black background for now. Click Apply on this. So there is my logo, my avatar, and I want to make this rotate and have a bit of a light effect and make it look a little 3d and realistic. So how we can do this? Well, the first requirement is that your logo is a PNG file or it's transparent so that you can see through it.
The reason for that is you may want to actually put the logo on top of another footage. Maybe you want to put it on your, you know, like an overlay in your videos on, in a corner somewhere. So if I bring in a new video in here, from my hard drive, you notice my logo is transparent so I can see through it.
So this is a PNG file with Alpha. If you don't know how to export this, I'm going to have a video about this, how to make logos with transparent backgrounds. I have a video on how to do this in Xara, if you look it up on my channel, but anyway, this is my transparent logo. So this is what I'm going to animate in Camtasia.
So let me remove that video for now. I'm going to lock that layer, so I don't change it by mistake. So here we go. This is my logo. So how can we rotate it? Well, we want it to come from one side and stay on the screen for a bit and then go back to the other side, like it's, it's, you know rotating, in front of me, like a sort of an object and it goes away.
So the way to do this is of course we use custom animations for that. So I'm going to zoom in right here and I'm going to actually make this animation quite short, about two seconds completely, you know, the intro and the outro is going to be completely up to about two seconds. It's not really important how long, you know, the longer you make it, the slower it's going to get, but you can adjust this later, so don't worry about this.
So I'm going to you know, before I add any animations, I'm going to select the logo and hold down the CONTROL key and make it slightly smaller. Something like this. So this is what I want. Maybe you want to have your name underneath or whatever you want to do. Of course you can resize this and put it in the corner or do whatever you want with it.
But let's animate it now. So the first step of the animation is going to be to bring the logo in from one side and we will use a custom animation for this. And I'm just going to place this play head at the middle of the track here. And I have this selected, I'm going to go to Animations and drag a custom animation ending here at the play head, right? So this is the part where the logo comes in. And this is the position where I want my logo to be when it's, when I'm looking at it and nothing's happening. Right. So now I want to, I want to do go back to the first part of the animation, you know, I'm going to move the play head to the first part of the animation here. And I'm going to move the logo out of the screen and the way to do this, we will use first of all, I want to move the logo slightly to the right, because it's going to come from the right side, into the center and then move to the left side.
So I want to first move it to the right, just a little bit, not too much and make sure I'm not moving it too much. Just a little bit and make sure you're snapping to the middle, so you're not moving the logo vertically, just horizontally, you know, I could move it a lot, like, you know, but I don't want to, so the logo is in the center and I want to move it slightly to the right, like so just a little bit about 50 pixels.
If you look in the right side where the Properties are, you can actually type the number in here, 50 position X, which is from the center of your canvas, 50 pixels to the right. That is the first thing we want to. And now we want to rotate the logo along the Y axis. So it's going to rotate along the Y axis like this, and you can use this Y here, click inside, where you see zero degrees and you can use the arrow key and hold it hold the arrow key up and you can see the logo is rotating. If you don't want to wait too long, you can hold down the shift key and just press the arrow up, and it's going to move much faster and all the way up to here until you almost don't see it anymore. Like this, you know, my logo has now disappeared. I can only see just a little tiny line. We will take care of that at the end.
So this is my first animation. Let's see if it works. Great. So now the logo comes on screen and before we do anything else, let's take care of the other part, where the logo goes out of screen. I'm going to expand the clip right here on the right and just place my cursor somewhere in here, it doesn't matter. You can move these around, press SHIFT A or you can go to Animations, Animations, Custom animation, bring another animation down here and, this is the part where I take the logo out of the screen. And of course you remember, I moved it 50 pixels to the right in the first part, I'm going to move it 50 pixels to the left now, minus 50 on the X position, moved to the left.
And now I can use it again, the Y position and rotate against the Y axis and just click this. But this time use the down arrow because I'm flipping it. I'm rotating it to the other side of the screen. Hold down the shift key again, to make it go faster. And until it goes away, almost completely like that. You notice it's not exactly 90 degrees, although you would think so. It's not 90 degrees. The reason for that is, that Camtasia keeps a bit of a, the center of the screen in place, like a little bit of a 3d space. So when you rotate an object along one of the axis , it also takes into consideration how far away it is from the center of the canvas. So in my situation here, because this object is off the center of by 50 pixels or so, it doesn't need to be 90 degrees for me to see it, you know, 90 degrees to look at it, perfectly perpendicular to the screen.
So it's a little bit of a, you know, trying to keep a bit of perspective and a orientation in the 3d space, although Camtasia is not a 3d software, but anyway. They try and do these calculations. So here we go, 88.96\. You know, it doesn't really matter what the number is, as long as I'm looking at it, and I don't see it.
So this is the part where the logo went out of screen. So let's see now the whole thing, here we go. It's coming in, stays there for a bit and goes away like this. Now I can actually cut the rest of the clip because I don't need it to be staying there. It's off the screen. It's gone. I don't need it.
So this is my whole animation. It's about three seconds counting that one second here in the middle, where it's going to be onscreen. So, you know, you may want to make that shorter or longer, that is up to you. If you want it to stay for longer, all you have to do is just expand this clip and move the out animation further back. So now it's going to stay longer on the screen.
I'm actually going to undo this because it will be the next phase is creating the 3d effect to it. So now the 3d effect is this. What you want to do is, when the logo is during the animation, when the logo is coming in, not when it's flat out, when you're looking at it flat out from the front, you technically don't see what's behind it. So, because my logo is kind of flat and thin, you know, look, if I zoom in here, there is no 3d to this logo. It's just the fact that I'm, I'm rotating it like this, and Camtasia creates a bit of a perspective in my movement, then it makes it look like it's a little bit, you know, 3d, but I want to mimic the 3d.
So before I do that, though, I want to add a little more effect to it. You can do this or skip it, it's up to you at the end and at the start, I want to also scale the object. So I want it to be a little smaller. So when it goes away, it looks like it's turning, but it's also going behind the screen. So it's kind of, it's going far away from my viewpoint.
So what I'm going to do is place the cursor at the beginning of the first animation with the logo is a way, and I'm going to use the width and height adjustment here to make the logo smaller, slightly smaller, not too much. You can also use the scale here. It's 38% now, but I actually want to use pixel values.
So you can see that the height is 730 and it stays at 730 all the way here. Look it's 730 when I'm looking at it, 730 when it starts to go back, and 730, when it is you know, it's gone already. So what I want to do is I want to make that smaller. So I'm going to do maybe let's try 650.
That's a bit smaller, right? The position is the same. It's just smaller. Right? So now look, it's it's it looks like it's coming from behind. And again, here at the end, I'm going to make it 650 again, like, so. So now look at the animation. It is going to start here, so you can see it's fading, it's coming in and going away.
Now, if I did too much of this, it means that I made it too small. So it looks like it's kind of pushing backwards. So you may want to do maybe 700, 700 and not 650\. That might be too small. Or where you can do is you can make it go further away from the center. So that's going to look like it's going far, far away, and then it makes sense for it to get smaller.
So look at this. All right, just a little bit more realism. Maybe the distance off center is not long enough. You can, you can make it go further away, but you really want your logo to kind of stay in one place. You don't want it to be flying around all over the screen. So I think I'm going to stop here and this is, I'm happy with this movement here, so let's make it 3d now.
So the way to do this in 3d is actually to make a copy of it, right? So I'm going to just copy this clip with the animations and everything. Copy this, Control C, go to the start and paste, Control V to paste it. The top one is going to be the front logo. Okay. We're going to go front logo and the one on the bottom, you know, behind it, it's going to be the back logo.
That's the logo on the back. Right now they are the same because they are identical. But what I want to do is I want to make the one on the back smaller, completely smaller. All the way you know, sort of the whole animation is going to be smaller and the logo is going to look like it's behind a bit and play a little bit with the offset in animation.
So what I want to do is because it's spinning like this. I want the back one to be smaller, and I wanted to come to, to be separated from the main logo when it's turned. So the way to illustrate this is look, if I go to the back logo here and I'm moving it sort of slightly halfway through, or actually let me just go all the way back to that first animation there.
So what I want to do is actually, I want to make this slightly off from the first one. So the first one is 50 pixels. I want to make this 45 pixels. Right? So it is a little away. Maybe we need to add more, we will see. And at the end, again, we want to do minus 45, that's just five pixels. It may not actually work, but look, if I then move them now and zoom in, you notice they are now offset. When they are in front. I don't see anything, but when they are offset like this, you can start to see they are duplicated, right? So the same here, maybe 45 is not long enough. So let's put here 40\. So that's 10 pixels off. So look, when it's coming now, you can see it's duplicated because it looks like there's another one in the back there.
I also want to make it smaller. So instead, you know, just 40, 40 pixels, so it's a bit off, but I want to make it not so tall as well to make it look like it's a little bit behind. So let's try 650 on this one, right? 650\. There we go. So now, it's too much for 650 is too much. Let's do a 690, just a bit smaller like this.
You can do a lot of experimentation with this. Look, I mean, it looks like I guess it looks like it's okay now and let's do 690 here and minus 40 as well. They end up both of them end up in the same position anyway, and you don't notice it. But when it's in transit, you notice the duplication. And another thing I want to do is I want to select that bottom clip here, turn on global animation.
So that means if I turn this on, Camtasia is going to change the properties in all of the animation points for that particular animation clip for the media. So I actually want to turn this on, and now you notice the icons, they are red, which means whatever I change here is going to change on all the animation on the selected clip.
So you see, I have the back logo selected and now all of the animation points are red, which means whatever I change in here is going to affect all of them. Right. So if I want to kind of experiment with this and not have to change it multiple times, I can actually turn that on. And you know, maybe I don't like it, that it's a bit too small, I want to make it maybe 695\. Let's see. Okay. So a bit taller like that. Okay. So it still looks a bit 3d. And another thing I wanted to do was to turn down the opacity on that clip, so to make it look kind of faded out. Okay. So I can turn off the opacity to about 80% so you can see now the one on the back is a little more transparent if you don't want to do transparency, but you want to change the color of it, you can do that too. Let's go back.
So I'm going to add an effect, Visual effects right down there, visual effects, and I'm going to do a color adjustment on that clip, like so. That by default Camtasia makes it completely white, so I don't want that, I want it to turn down the brightness and the contrast like this and the brightness and bring back the saturation, cause I still want it to be a bit orange and red. So like this, you see now it's darker, and here it's darker and it appears to be. This is actually going to be quite small. So you won't notice these things, but look here in this nice position, it almost looks 3d. So you can change this effect you know, by looking here and say, oh, actually, you know what, I want to change the animation to be maybe taller. So you just place your mouse there, the size of it, and you can change it with the arrow keys until you're happy with that point, you can also change the pixel positions on the start and finish, but you need to turn off the global animation for that to change the distance between the elements. So that it becomes like the object is deeper, you know, extruded in the back deeper, but that's can actually give you a bit more distance in here and it may not look so realistic anymore, if you're paying attention to that phase of the animation.
I hope this makes sense. I know this is kind of becoming a long video, but look at this, in some points of the animation, it looks like it's a 3d point. You can actually skip this whole thing too.
So I'm happy now I'm going to turn off the global animation and let's see what I have so far. I'm going to zoom out here and I'm going to play this. You notice, it's got a little bit of depth. So depending on how fast it's moving, you may or may not notice all of that added depth in there. So that's another phase. Now onto the next thing.
What we want to do now is add that effect of light, a glossy light, a reflection from like two lights that are in front of you because now it's just turning around, but you can't actually see that nice, glossy effect. So to do that, what we need to do is, I mean, look, when you're doing an object that's glossy and you turn it around and it comes in front of the projector, you see that white projector line just dashing on the surface of the object.
This is basically what we will do. So what we will do this, how we will achieve this, we will go and use an annotation, go to shapes and use this white object. Just place it right here on the left side. And make itake it as tall as the logo, maybe even, you know, make it as tall as your canvas. And I'll tell you why, because maybe we want to change this logo later and we put a taller logo in it, so then we want that to still work. I'm going to make this a bit more narrow like this. So this is our beam of light and because the object is turning perfectly horizontally, right. The beam of light is going to move vertically as well. It's going to be horizontally it's going to be from one side to the other.
It's not going to go up and down and kind of diagonally. It's going to move horizontally because that's how my object is moving. So let's suppose the projector with the, let's suppose the light, the reflector is in the front, so when this object turns around, you may see for a second there, you may see the reflection.
So that's what we will do. So the first part of the animation is when the object comes in. So it's going to last about this long, here. Okay. So when it's turning, I see it coming through, but when it's in front of me sitting there, I don't see that light anymore. So this is the only part of the animation where I can see that light going.
Okay. So I'm going to zoom in a bit and the way we will do this is just add a custom animation to this object. You notice it's on the left side now. Go to Animations, custom, drag a custom animation here, make it shorter. You can adjust this later, by the way. And at the end of the animation, we want this object to be all the way on the right side, like, so.
So this is our beam of light, kind of dashing the reflection, dashing across the surface of my object like this. Right. There we go. So we may want to adjust this at the end, don't worry about it, so how can we make this light stay on top of just the surface of the object? Well, it's only going to reflect on the surface of the front of the object, not the back one. So I'm going to select the front logo, you see this one here, that animates. Copy that, the whole thing with animations and everything, and go to the start and paste it. It's going to paste it above the shape element. If it's not, you need to move it to the top on top of the shape element.
So now you see it's covering that, but we will add an effect that was added in Camtasia 2021\. It's called the Media matte. So I'm going to click more, or actually visual effects and scroll down to the media matte and I'm going to add the media matte effect to the top, the front logo, one that I just copied here.
So media matte to the very top one, like, so. So you notice now the media matte using the alpha effect will cut out everything that is not on that surface. So watch this now. That is a bit too fast. Isn't it? So I'm going to make the shape animation longer like this. So you see it right there, it's it's dashing across the surface.
Maybe it starts off too far behind, so maybe I want to just put it started from here instead. So I'm going to go to the animation and just move this object here, like so. So now it's going across, maybe it's a little too early so I can move it, I can move it in front of it. So, you know, just play with this until you're happy with the animation transition like this, it comes across this.
And another nice touch we can do is, if we zoom in here, you notice that this is very, very sharp cutoff with the light. What we want to do is actually we want it to be a bit more blurry, right? So we can add a motion blur, select motion blur, and add it to the light ray.
Here we go. It's becoming blurry now. If it's not, if it's too blurry, you can actually go to the top of the animation and put the intensity down and at the beginning as well, put the intensity of the blur down. So the intensity of the blur is dictated by how far the object travels and how fast it travels.
So the further it goes and the faster it goes, the more pronounced the blur effect will be. So make sure you only change these values at the extremities of the animation, because Camtasia also animates that. So you, you may inadvertently add a timeframe in here, a custom key frame with just a blur change, which is not going to help you.
So place it at the end and just turn it down a bit, and place it at the beginning and turn it down again. Or you can use that animation, global animation trick as before. So like this, you know, it's not so blurry anymore. Actually I'm not crazy about it, so I may, I may actually turn it up. Okay. So I'm going to turn it back up a bit.
When you are far away, you can't really notice a big difference like this. Okay. So there it is, it's traveling across the surface. So if I'm happy now I can only see it for a split second, but it really adds to the effect. If you want to see it longer, you know, just make the clip longer and drag the animation back like so, and you know, it's going to go slower across the surface of the object.
Like this. Now for the other part of the animation, suppose we have two reflectors, two lights you know, spotlights or whatever, one in front of the, you know, next to the other. So we want to see the same effect when the logo goes out of screen. So I'm just going to copy this, control C and place it right here just after the animation starts to move, like so.
There you go, okay. If it's not far enough, you know, because I moved it, I can move it there and it's too late now, so you can move it forward just a bit like, so. So the idea is that you're seeing it just for a split second, and then it goes away like so, so this one feels like we have two lights, one on the left, one on the right, just in front of the logo here.
And when the logo kind of turns around it, first time it catches the light on the right, and then the second time catches the other light. But the movement is in the other direction, so the light moves in the other direction. So this is the effect. So let's see it. Now. There we go. It's coming in and it's going out. Really cool.
So maybe I want this to be slower again, you can stretch it out. It doesn't have to be the same way because the light is not going to be in the same position, so you can add a bit of realism to this. So the blur effect makes it look blurry. Let's add the blur effect, everything to make it look even more interesting when it's moving around.
So you notice that the light, the light sort of ray is blurry, but the edges of the logo are not. So what I want to do is I just want to add this blur effect to the top logo here, and the bottom one as well. Like so, so now I have the blur effect in here. You notice, you see that tiny little blur. If you want to add it to the top mask as well, you can do that, but it's going to blur the edges of the light, even more like this.
So this actually looks like more 3d now with the, the blur effect on it. It almost looks like a bit of depth of field, doesn't it? When it's far away here, look, it's blurry on the edges, and it's sharp in the middle, around the rotation axis. So Camtasia creates all these frames in between. So that's how it does the blur effect just fills in all these frames and shows them for longer, anyway.
So this one is very sharp when you're looking at it, but then when it's moving, it's blurry and it's got that light effect, so there we go. This is our effect. Really? We got it. We did it. So now if I play the whole thing, so cool comes in and fades out and you have all that movement going with it.
So now that looks, you know, if I show that video clip again, you know, I can actually, you can see that the logo is playing quite nicely on top. And if I zoom in here, because of that back logo that I duplicated and made it darker, it almost looks like a 3d logo, doesn't it? So you look, it's almost like a, you know, you could fall for that trick.
If it's moving fast, you can also see it as a 3d logo. So there you go, that's how you do it. And to show you another cool trick, this is not just for your logo or this is not just for one logo. If you want to use the same effect for multiple logos, let me show you. So I'm going to save this project and then let's group everything.
Okay. So I'm just going to select everything here and Control G to group it. So now everything is in a group, right? Another thing you may want to do if you want, as you're getting, cause look, I'm, I'm at the start of the animation and I can see that I can see the logos showing in there, like a little, you know, these lines.
That's not so nice. So one thing you could do is add a fade to this group itself, or you go inside and turn the opacity down on the ends of the animation. So when it starts, if you put the opacity way down, on both logos, what you get is you don't see the logo until maybe too late, right. So you can see it's kind of fading out and you're losing that brightness, that color.
Okay. So I'm going to take that off. I'm going to take the opacity, I'm going to put it all the way back to how it was because that's not really cool. So it needs to appear bright and nice up from the front. But what you can do is you can actually add a short fade to this clip on the group itself to fade everything out or add a fade to each one of these in the group itself.
So what I'm going to do is actually I'm going to just add a fade to the group just to make it short so I'm selecting the group itself, press Shift and T to add your default transition, or you can go to transitions and just drag this fade to it. Now, obviously it's fading for too long select both of them with the shift key and hold down the shift key and make them shorter like this.
All you need is just a couple of frames, so it doesn't show you those little lines at the start, right. So now when I'm not seeing anything, I'm not seeing anything. So look, it shows up, and it goes away and disappears. If it disappears too late, or if you can still kind of see it, then you can make these longer, like so, you know, and just, you know, make sure they disappear when it's appropriate. All right.
Another cool trick I want to show you is this, if you want to change the logo, so like, you know, you created your animation with your logo. Let's make sure let's see if we can swap the logo with another logo. So I'm going to go back to the media library and let's suppose that this is you've added this to your library, you can reuse it. So now I want to change this logo with another one, but I don't want to rebuild these effects all the time, right, cause it's so time consuming. So I'm going to actually import another one of my logos. I'm going to bring that to the media bin here. And I'm just going to put it on the canvas for a second.
You notice it's got my full name in here and the the logo with the handwriting text and whatever, right. Still a PNG. So this is still a PNG image, again, you need that transparency so you can see through be able to add it on top of other stuff. I'm going to just undo this. I have the logo, the new logo in my media bin.
So all you need to do for this, and I'm actually going to copy this group and just go somewhere down the line and paste it here. I don't want to change my first one. Right? So here, I want to change this logo with another one. Very easy. Click to open the group here, and I have all these three logos and it's very easy now I'm going to select the bottom one. That's the back logo, right. And I'm going to right click on the new logo that I imported, right click and say, Replace selected media on timeline. My selected media at the moment is the back logo. Click that it's replaced it. You don't see much. Click on the second one, do the same, right click, replace selected media. And finally, I want to replace that mask that dictates how the light is moving and click on the third one there, right-click, replace selected media. There we have it. So now I have a new logo here. Let's see if the effects still works. I'm going to zoom in a bit and place it.
And look at this, the effects still works fine with this new logo. The new logo may be smaller, but that's fine. You can fix that. You can scale the whole thing up by going back outside to the main timeline. So this is my group now, of course, it's kind of smaller because you know, it's a different logo, but if I hold down the control key and zoom in like this, I'm scaling it. You know, I've got a bigger logo now and the effects still works and everything's scales with it because it's inside of that group. So let me show you now, if I zoom in here and go back to where it's coming in, you notice the blur still works, the light still works, and I may not actually see it, but you may even be able to see that duplication happening. Depending on your background, really, so I'm going to turn on the background again here. Look, the logo is kind of 3d because of that darker bit. That is in the background, right? So because of the blurriness on the edges, it almost looks like a depth of field kind of effect like a lens effect on a camera.
So all we did was we didn't need any 3d software. We have a nice spinning logo here that appears like a TV show, kind of like a TV show kind of title. There you go.
Yeah, so that's great. That's a great effect. And you can, you know, you're free to move this around the scene, you know, scale it, make it larger, smaller, put it in the corners, use it as an overlay in your video. So there you have it. Cool 3d logo animation. And this works with any logo that is, you know, you just import it into your media bin, replace it in the group and when you're happy with it, you just add that group to your to your library and use it every time in your project.
So I hope you enjoy this tutorial. This is a great effect. I've been meaning to do this video for awhile. If you enjoy my tutorials, feel free to subscribe to my channel and really I'm struggling for ideas for videos.
So, if you have any ideas, let me know in the comments, what you would like to see or effects or assets you'd like to create, transitions, intro, whatever animations you like to learn how to make them in Camtasia, I am all ears, let me know. And you know, these have been done in Camtasia 2021\. The motion blur effect and the media matte are only available in Camtasia 2021\. If you have not upgraded, feel free to upgrade using the link in my description. That is an affiliate link, so you'd be supporting my channel at no extra cost to you. So I do appreciate it. Thank you very much for watching and see you on the next one.
### How to Loop a Video in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-loop-a-video-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:55:15.000Z
How to loop or repeat a video in Camtasia. This tutorial is part of a new series of very quick, very easy tutorials for Camtasia, for absolute beginners. If you're experienced in Camtasia, you probably know these things but if you're looking to introduce yourself to the basics, look no further.
These very easy to follow tutorials with examples introduce the basic functionality in the Camtasia video editor, how you can achieve various operations, like this video for example where you learn how to repeat or loop the same clip over and over in Camtasia until you want it to stop.
This tutorial was recorded in Camtasia 2021, but it should work the same way in 2020, 2019 and previous versions.
If you want to loop a video in Camtasia, so it repeats multiple times until you want it to stop, it's very easy. I have a video here. I'm going to import it to the Camtasia timeline. You can see it right here and it's playing and it's about 10 seconds long. Now, if I want to repeat this and loop it as many times as I like, all I have to do is go to the timeline, click on the clip I want to repeat, Control C to copy it, or you can right click and say Copy, and then go to the end, move the play head to the end of this clip and paste it. Control V.
Camtasia will automatically paste the clip on the next available track, on the next track that has space on it. If you want to prevent that and always place it on the same track, you can click on it to move it up, and you can right click and say, Remove all empty tracks. Now all you have to do is place the play head at the end and Control V to paste it again, and again, and again, as many times as you need.
If you then know you want it to be repeated for like a minute or a minute and a half, you just look at the timeline here and you can also place a marker where you want to stop repeating it. So for example, I want to repeat it for a minute and a half and I can click here to place a marker at the minute and a half mark. Then I know exactly where I need to stop. I go back here to the end and paste again, you can see it keeps pasting it.
If you're finding it hard to paste at the end here, maybe you don't have the snapping turned on for the timeline, you can paste it anywhere you like even further down the line. Control V here. Camtasia will always paste it at the end, where the play head is located and you can just click on it and drag it until it snaps or connects to the other clips.
So you can do this as many times as you like, bring it back in here. And when you got to the end of the repeating section, all you can do is just place your play head there, select the last clip and press S to cut the remaining bits. Click on them and delete. So there you go, your clip is repeating until the minute and a half mark, like so.
Then all you have to do is just export the clip. So there you see the clip is looping, six or seven times, no matter how long you need it to be doing that. So I hope this helps. Thank you for watching. Subscribe to my channel and stay tuned for more quick Camtasia tutorials.
### How to animate arrows for a flowchart in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-animate-arrows-for-a-flowchart-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:58:05.000Z
If you want to animate arrows for a flowchart or other diagram or tutorial, there are a few ways you can do it in Camtasia, using animations or using behaviours or simple transitions. It depends on how fancy you want to get. Camtasia offers a few ways of revealing and removing assets on the screen using different methods - behaviours for example, are not just for revealing text, you can also use them for objects.
There area few arrows in Camtasia you can use in the Annotations section. Most of them have text on them but you can delete the text and use them as simple arrow graphics. You can apply a transition, like a wipe to it to reveal it in an interesting way.
Also, you can use more complicated process of revealing the arrow using media matte, with alpha. Cover the arrow and reveal it using your own custom animation. This will give you the most flexibility but it could be more time-consuming, depending on how many arrows you need in your project.
So, if you want to animate the arrows quite simply, I mean, there's a very few, there's a few methods to do it. You could use the arrow annotations on the Annotations tab, here. You have arrows, you have different types of arrows, so you can choose whichever you want here. You can choose the thickness and opacity and color.
Of course you can make it any color you like, and then you point it to where you want it to be. And then you can use a simple behavior or a transition. So depending on what you want to do with it, you can do transitions, like using a wipe or something. So if you go to the Transitions, you can use Wipes and maybe you can use a, a gradient wipe on it like this.
So that will mean it comes in, in a faded way. If it's too short, the animation, you can of course make the transition longer. So it's going to fade in sort of like that.
Another way to do it would be without transitions, you can use Behaviors. So if you go to behaviors and choose maybe one of these ones that fade in from the left or reveal like this, this actually gives you a little bit of animation, so you can see I've applied this one Reveal. If you play it now, the arrow kind of slides in and you can control the action and as well as the speed and duration, and you can also control what it does during the time it spends on screen. And then it has a different animation when it's going out. It slides the other way, if you want to. If not, you can just go to the Out and turn it to None. So it doesn't do anything, it just disappears. So you can control these like that.
Also you can have another type of annotations here on the scribble thingy, sketch motion. They're not overly complex, so you can use this arrow or this one hand drawn, which is not really good for a flow chart.
You can use this one. It's, it's a different arrow here. Okay. Of course you can, you know, it has its own sort of draw animation, which you can't really change, but you can also control the thickness on this and maybe the draw time, make it shorter and longer.
Now, if you want more complex animations with arrows, you want something special then I suppose you can import some arrows from external sources, like PNG files, draw them in here and do transitions with them. One thing I like to do, if I really need an animation, I can really control is to draw an arrow. Let's suppose I bring this arrow in here, you double click on it and remove the text on it, so there you go, you have just one arrow. You can change the color, of course, on it like this, and then you can apply different transitions to it. Or if I really want to slide it in, in a different way, I can actually, the new Annotation with the media matte. So you can go to shape let's go find a shape here and use this rectangular thing.
I'm going to cover the whole arrow, just to show you how you can create your own reveal. So this one covers the arrows. So now what I can do is I can animate this coming in. But this might be too complicated depending on, you know, might be overkill depending on what you, how many arrows you have.
So look, this one is actually now covering or revealing, you know, you can turn it around. I actually should have gone here now and you can go and bring it into the arrow like, so, so then you can reveal the arrow by using the visual effect Media matte on this revealing thingy here. So it has Alpha. So then, you know, it slides in and your arrow appears. If you like to do it from the other side, of course you can reverse the animation.
So leave it here, and then this end, you move it all the way to the right side, like, so. So then when it comes in, it reveals the arrow, you select all of this, you group it like that. And then you have a moving object, a revealing arrow, which you can use in your project just make different copies of it all over the place at different time intervals, you know, and they will reveal each other, like so. So just bring them in when you need.
I hope this helps. Thank you.
### How to blur a video in Camtasia | Camtasia Blur Tutorial for Beginners
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-blur-a-video-in-camtasia-camtasia-blur-tutorial-for-beginners/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:58:47.000Z
How can you blur a video in Camtasia. It's very easy and I am showing in this tutorial how to add a region blur on a video clip, how you can scale it, adjust it, change the blur intensity and even add blur beyond the maximum intensity allowed by Camtasia, if that's what you need.
You import your video into the Camtasia timeline and place it in the timeline, then go to Annotation and find it in the Special selection - the Blur annotation.
The blur effect takes a track of its own and doesn't work in groups for now. If you want the blur effect to be more pronounced than the maximum allowed in the properties panel, you can always duplicate the blur annotation on the timeline and add it again, on a separate track. The blur effect will cumulate and be more pronounced.
You can also adjust the blur position and even animate it, so if you want to track and object or follow a specific area in your clip and keep it blurred, you can animate the blur effect and move it across the canvas.
Hello. If you want to blur a video in Camtasia, this is how you do it. You import your video into the Camtasia timeline and place it in the timeline. And then you can see my video doesn't have any blur. If I want to blur the video, all I have to do is go to the Annotations and here on the tabs, go to the Special selection where you have blur.
So the blur has this icon, like a little tear. You can click on this blur effect and drag it to the track above your clip, like so. You can see that the default area is defined already as blurry, and all you have to do is just resize it so you can move it in the corner and drag the corner to resize it for the entire frame like so. So this is blurry now you can adjust the intensity on the right, if you don't want it to be so strong, you can just pull this lever down and the blur will reduce or increase.
If you want blur to be stronger than this, you can always duplicate this on a track above it, like so. Control C, Control V and then you see, if I keep pasting, the blur intensifies because I'm adding the effect multiple times. If you need then to make the blur effect last for the entire duration of your video, just select these and expand the duration to the very end of where you want the blur to be. So then your entire video is going to be blurred, as you can see here. If you only need to blur certain regions, of course, you can just resize it to just fill that area using these handles like this. And you have only one area blurred, like so. So if you want to cover some sensitive information in your videos or blur faces, you can use this blur to move it around and you can also animate it.
So if I want this tower on the right to always be blurred, all I have to do is go to the start of my clip and then resize it to cover that building like so, and then at the very end, I can add an animation, go to Animations, go to custom animation and drag the animation on the blur track, extend this animation, like so extend it to the left for the entire duration, and then at the end you can move it to where that building is going to be at the end. Maybe even make it larger.
So now the blur should follow the object. If it doesn't blur correctly, you can of course adjust the location by selecting the clip and adjusting its position as you go through your clip. So then you can see that the blur follows your object around, the blur can be animated. I hope you enjoy this tutorial.
Thank you for watching. If you find them useful, subscribe to my channel like it and share it and subscribe for more tutorials like this. Thank you for your time. See you next time.
### How to Mask Videos Inside Custom Shapes in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-mask-videos-inside-custom-shapes-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:00:14.000Z
How to add multiple videos in custom-made shapes, non-rectangular or irregular masks in Camtasia 2021? This video is an answer to a question on the Camtasia Users Facebook group. Someone asked how could they create a video that has multiple videos inside of different shapes in a template, and the shapes are not straight shapes, they are triangles or slanted and irregular shapes.
This effect is easy to achieve and it's a good application of the Media Matte effect in Camtasia, which was introduced in Camtasia 2021\. The Media Matte helps you create this particular kind of template and it allows you to put multiple videos on screen, inside different shapes.
The shapes we create in this tutorial are 100% native to Camtasia, we won't be using any external software to create them, and they are perfectly adjustable, you can change their shape, the size, the mask mode to be Alpha or Alpha Invert.
So Media Matte really is a way to use an object or a shape or another clip or an image, and turn it into a mask to either show or hide whatever is on the track below your object. So what I mean by this is you can apply the Media Matte to a shape of a triangle, for example, and that triangle becomes a mask for whatever you put underneath it, like a video clip or another graphic or whatever. Media Matte can be used also with PNG files that you create in external programs so they can also be turned into masks but keeping things inside Camtasia gives the ultimate flexibility.
In this video we also look at how to group the shapes, discuss how Media Matte is applied and how it affects the clips underneath. We also fix the opacity on the mask and adjust the mask that is not straight or show the flexibility you have by keeping things native to Camtasia.
In this advanced masking tutorial we also look at proxies briefly, and how they make editing faster. We also look at how we can replace the clips inside the mask and how to animate the clips inside the mask, in case we need to keep the subject in view when it changes position.
If you wish to download the file I created in this tutorial, go to this link.
Hello, this is Cristi. This video is an answer to a question that I got on the Camtasia Users Facebook group, and someone asked how could they create a video that has multiple videos inside of different shapes in a template, and the shapes are not straight shapes, they are triangles or slanted shapes and so on.
So I thought it was a good application of the Media Matte effect in Camtasia, which was introduced in Camtasia 2021\. The media matte helps you create this particular kind of template and it allows you to put multiple videos on screen, in different shapes.
Now let's start and have a look at this template. So this is the template that was in the example question and I'm going to show you how you can actually slice up your screen into these shapes. This is just for example, I'm not going to actually use this image in the final video, but this is just to help us kind of cut up the screen into those shapes. And as you can see here in the example, every one of these shapes has a video in it at the end. So how can we achieve this?
Well, first of all, let me check that my Project Settings are correct, so I'm going to switch to HD and apply like this. So this is the shape we're going to use as a reference. I have cut it up in a wrong size here, so I'm going to actually crop this to fit exactly on the screen, using the ALT key. You can just crop away black areas like this, and now let's put this on the screen so that it fits inside of the whole screen, like this. More or less accurate like that. So we, what we want to do is we want to cut up the screen into all these five areas. You can see this line here, that's separating, we can add that later, but these are the shapes. So how can we do this, because in Camtasia you can crop video, which of course you can crop it sideways, you know, left, right, top and bottom, which still keeps the video straight. But how can you actually make these shapes? And of course in Annotations, if you go to Camtasia and you show all of these shapes here in Annotations, you can probably find a triangle here, if I'm not mistaken. If we go to Shapes, so we have triangles here, but of course not all of these are triangles. And if you try and create a triangle like this, let's try the middle one. You can actually play with this and kind of turn it around. And it's really, really difficult to get it into exact shape.
The moment you try and resize it like this, you, you may succeed, but if the triangle is not really a fixed size, it's going to take you a while to do it. So there must be a better way. Plus, this one here, number five is not really a triangle or number four, it's not a triangle, really, unless you turn it and kind of crop it from the outside. You can actually do this like that, but it's gonna take a long time.
So I'm going to show you a different way. The second way, which I'm also not recommending you do is to create all these shapes in a graphic software, external to Camtasia, and just import those in here, and you put it on the, on the screen and use them as a media matte. But again, I tend to like to keep things inside of Camtasia, if I can, native to Camtasia because that gives you the most flexibility, when you want to make changes. Maybe I change my mind and some of these shapes, I want them to be slightly larger or smaller or have different angles in some areas. So then again, I'm going to have a problem because I have to go again to the external software and create the new shapes.
But if I keep things inside of Camtasia all the way, then I can have that flexibility. So let's see how we can actually do this the right way in Camtasia.
So I'm going to just keep this on screen as a reference image, but I'm going to bring in five videos at the end. I'm not going to bring them in yet, I'm just going to create this template first.
We will use a effect that was added in Camtasia 2021 called Media Matte. You'll find it in the Visual Effects here on the bottom there's, Media Matte. Of course, I need to create the shapes first and apply this Media Matte to them. So. The matte thing was available in Camtasia 2020, it was introduced, but you had to do it on a, on a separate track on its own, which was a bit awkward and very many steps, and you know, the new version Media Matte is much easier because you can just drag that onto the object. So Media Matte really is a way to use an object or a shape or another clip or an image, and turn it into a mask to either show or hide whatever is on the track below your object. So what I mean by this is you can apply the Media Matte to a shape of a triangle, for example, and that triangle becomes a mask for whatever you put underneath it, like a video clip or another graphic or whatever.
So that's what we're going to achieve here. But the problem we have is actually creating the shape in the first place. And like I've shown you, it's kind of awkward to do it with triangles here and, of course, if you have shapes that are more complex, like if they have rounded, you know, squiggly edges or whatever other irregular shapes, then of course, you're going to have to do that in a separate graphics program and bring that image in as a PNG and make it, turn it into a mask.
But if it's straight edges like this, it's very easy to do it in Camtasia, so let's see how we can do that. So let's create the first graphic on the top left, video one. That is a very simple one. I'm just going to go to Annotations. So just so you know, we're going to create all of these from individual annotation shapes.
Okay. So I'm going to use a rectangle here. I'm going to just place that rectangle on the entire screen like this. Actually, I don't have to put it on the entire screen, just there and I can change the opacity a little bit, so you can see through. This is not, you know, at the end, we don't need to have annotation, so with, with opacity.
So this is, let me just give it a different shape here. So this is red, okay like that, the color doesn't matter anyway, because when you turn this into a mask with the, with the media matte, the color is not important, it's just important how much shape is there. So you can see here, I've created this shape here, but I need to actually slice off this part of the shape because I don't want this area to be seen here.
So I'm going to use another one just like this. So what we're going to do is just create one shape with another shape. So let's choose this black one, really again, the color doesn't matter. Let's resize it and rotate it until it matches this line here perfectly. You can zoom in if you need to, and just turn this around like that.
And place it here like this. I may not be very accurate with this, so you can go to the rotation controls, click inside of the Z for example, and just use your arrow key to, to slightly twist and turn this object. When you're happy, look at this, so this is one shape, okay. So how can we actually cut out this shape from the bottom shape?
Again, we will use the media matte, go to the visual effects, apply media matte to the black clip here. Let me zoom in on the timeline, and if I apply this, watch what happens, on the black clip, that black clip becomes a mask for the clip underneath, which is the red clip, but here it actually shows you the shape that is outside.
So you have two options. You can shift the black clip to the left area like that. You see that now, so you, you only see the red part. Let me undo this. You can change the Alpha to be Alpha invert, which achieves the same effect, you know, Alpha, Alpha invert, Alpha invert shows you what is outside of the shape.
Alpha shows you what is inside. Let's keep it to Alpha and move this shape here, like that. So that is our first shape. If the angle isn't right, you know, feel free to adjust it a little bit, go to the Z and just press, you know, arrow up or down. And when you're happy with the cutout, select both of them, check this out and Control G to group.
So now this is your shape. There you go, you've got a triangle shape, perfectly created to fit that particular area. So this is one way to do it, to do the shape. So how do you do the other shapes? If they have straight edges, this is exactly what you do. Just create cutouts from them. Let's create the second one, which is down here again, triangles all the way.
And you know, you just, you can actually use a triangle or you can use rectangles and just cut out the corners. So let's go again though, let's rename this one to be, Rename group, let's call it a video one. Okay. So that's the video one mask on the left there. Again, the color doesn't matter, but if you want to, you can actually change the color here so that you can have them color coded, you know, it's really not important.
And that's your color there. So that's video one.
Let's try on video two now. This is on the bottom left here. The same way we just go to create a rectangle like so, and we can resize it, we can turn it around like that to match with one corner, one side actually, and resize this all the way. Maybe zoom out a bit. That may not be the best choice, let's rotate it a little more. So the idea is to just match up with one side first, and resize your object to fit one side like this. Again, you can turn the opacity down so you can see what's underneath. Zoom in there. So you can use your arrows to perfectly position your object and then use another one, just bring it down there and turn it around, turn the opacity down again, rotate it to fit the other shape, the other edge. Use the arrow keys to just move it up and down like this. It takes a little while, but once you're done with this, you are free to go, and here we go. So now this is the shape I want to keep. The intersection of these two shapes is going to be my final shape.
Go again to the Visual Effects, drag the Media Matte onto the white shape like this, and there you have it. That's your shape there. If you group it again, select both of them and group, there you go, you have the other shape. Now of course you can see the other side, the other stuff that's outside of the screen, but that's not important because you only care about this.
So if you right click on this group and you say Resize Group to Canvas Size, it's just going to cut out anything else and show you a nice shape here. Again, you can change the color, it's red. So that is my second one. So the third one is actually still a triangle. So I'm not going to actually go through this, explaining it.
I'm going to just do it, but you get the point. Let's try video five as an example again, and video five again. It's. Let's rename this for now. So that is video two mask. Okay. So video five is actually a three edges here, four, five, so five edges. But again, the idea is the same. You're just gonna go to, you can actually do another way.
You can actually create the shapes around the edges and then group them and use that as an invert mask. So what I mean by this is, you go to the Annotations again and, you know, as always just use rectangles all the way. So you just create these big rectangles like this. Make sure you fill the whole screen because that's one condition of this. Go to the rotation here, use the arrow key to turn it like this very accurately and, you know, just push it down and use the arrow key again until your shape is in place like that.
Now expand the shape to fill everything else. You just want to leave this area visible, right. So that's one shape. Okay. And let's do another shape here. That's going to be this edge on the left. Just resize that and rotate it. So as you can see, we are, we're just bordering this object. Again, stretch that to fill the whole area. You want to cover the entire area of the screen. Okay. So then let's do the bottom one again, it's very simple, just zoom in there and just resize it. Rotate, you know, just fit it exactly on the edge like that. So just use the arrow keys a bit there. So there you go. That's my video five.
Of course now I can't see anything else, but what I've done here is I've created three layers. So I'm just going to copy, a group, all of these three layers, Control G. So that is the video mask. And if I were to add a video now, so let me just show you, if I were to add a video to the canvas, I'm just going to bring in a, a video clip here and put it on the timeline like so, and I'm going to move video mask five. This is five, let's rename it, video five mask. If I move this on top, so above the video clip, so this is how you actually apply these effects to the clips.
So let's suppose that this is your clip here, so you can, you can move it around, resize it, you know, that's my, I guess that building, I want to see that through.
So now you go to the Visual Effects again, if you don't see it, click more, Visual Effects, Media Matte, apply that to the black clip, which is now a group actually. So apply that to the group, there you go, and as always, it just shows you what's inside of the shape, so that's not helpful, but if you go to the right side in Properties, change it to Alpha Invert like that.
So then your video five mask will leave, will let that clip see-through, city fly through. And again, if your mask is not long enough, all you do is just take that group and expand it to the entire clip length. You can do the same with the other ones, because if things are in a group inside of the group, when you expand the group, the end of those clips are just going to expand to however long your group is.
So look at this now, video is inside of shape five. If I play this, it's just playing in there. See what I told you about the flexibility, if you zoom in here, you notice that I have mistaken, I've left this edge here, which is a little, you can see a little bit of white. So it's not perfectly accurate. All you do is to fix that, you just open the video five mask, just open the group like this in, Camtasia 2021, it's very easy to edit the contents of a group because they open in a new tab. Some people don't like that, I kinda like it because it gives you more freedom to work in it. It was very awkward to do it when you had different many, many, many clips inside of a group.
So now let's find that shape, the one on the left, bottom left. This is the one, click on it and you can see now I can individually rotate these. Click inside of the Z and just use the arrow keys to straighten that out. And or you can just move it like this. So I'm fixing that mask without, you know, having to re-import another graphic.
So there you go, it is now perfectly in place. I can just click and close that group, and my shape is just perfectly allowing the video to play like that. Just make sure that all of your groups have the same length, you know, to fit your videos that you're going to put inside of them. With that being said let's, let me just quickly do this on speed playback.
I'm just going to do the other two groups so that we have all five shapes in there, ready for us to put the video clips inside of them.
One thing to note here is that when I put a video clip inside of one of these groups, if I have used the opacity to slide the opacity down so I can see through it, make sure you turn it back up when you're done, because then that's going to actually show you the mask with opacity, which is not very nice. So I'm going to just turn up the opacity. Just go inside in the group and just put the opacity all the way to a hundred percent.
That's going to show your video clip properly in there.
So, as you can see here, I've already added four clips. It's the same clip, but of course you can add your own clips in each one of these and position them. So in my timeline here on the tracks, you can see they're all stacked like this. I still have number four to do, but you can see video one mask has video one on, video 2 mask has video 2 just underneath, so these media matte effects, they work on the track immediately underneath them or the next track that has content just below it. So if you move this track up or down, the effect breaks for that particular clip, because it only affects what's underneath. So that's one important thing to note.
And if you add them like this, you know, you can create all the shapes at once and then you just put all your clips and then apply the effect one, you know, in sequence, until you get all the clips cropped and put inside of your shapes and then you have your effects. And you can actually group the clip with the media matte effect that actually affects it. So for example, if I want to not mess this around, when I'm moving things about, I have video one mask on the bottom left there, and the clip it affects. I can actually select both, and Control G to group them, so now the whole thing is one clip. Look, I can actually move it around on my canvas. I'm moving the wrong one though.
And you can move it around, like this, use your arrows and it just, or you just drag it, so it becomes a single object with the video, just cut out inside of it. So that's one way to organize things by using groups, so then everything stays neat and tidy. And if you need to make changes, you just open the group with using the plus sign there and you just shift things around, you know, change opacity, whatever you can change the positioning of the clip and so on.
So now let me just finish this with number four.
So I moved all of these clips on the timeline in order, on the tracks, in order of numbers, right. So I have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5\. Five is at the top. It doesn't matter any way because you, all you need to do is just leave one track below each one to put your clip in. So I'm going to put this clip again for the fifth time.
I'm just using the same clip and video formats, which I just create a Visual Effects, go to Media Matte and apply that to it and make sure you of course change the Media Matte to Alpha invert, if you have cut out the shape instead of creating the shape from the other shapes. So like this now, you can see now here, my clip is done, my template is done. I have five videos in here, each one of them in a separate shape. So if I click and play, all of the videos are playing individually. So again, if you click on any particular clip, you can resize it, reposition it inside of its own shape. And this is one way to do it, so there you go, you now you can play now all of these videos and they individually stay within their shapes.
I may have something wrong here, let's see. Number five, that's number five, four, I believe one of them might be affecting the other ones. So let me just group them. Five with the five, group like this and move it. And four with the four again, keep them all together, like that and three, two, and I have one. So there you go, this is one way to do it.
And now if you want to swap one of the videos and fit it inside of its respective shape, you just go inside of that shape, you open the group, and there is your clip that you want to replace. So let's suppose I want to bring in a new clip here from my hard drive.
Just drag your new clip in here, select the clip in your Media bin and select the clip on the Timeline, the one that you want to replace, and you can right click on the Media bin for the new video, and you can say Replace Selected Media on Timeline, Ripple replace or Replace from the start, like this. So now, my video is shorter, actually, so I need to move my play head back a bit, but you should now see that new clip in there. So again, click on it and move it around, position it any way you like, you know.
And then your video is going to just play inside of that area right there. It actually helps, if you have Camtasia 2021, it helps to create proxies from these video clips when you're editing, because it's actually much faster. As you can see here, I'm just I'm playing back and sometimes I need to wait for a little bit for it to refresh and recreate, so you just right click on the video clips, select them all in the media bin, right click on them and say, Proxy video, Create Proxy Video. That might take a minute for them to create the proxy video, but after you do that, you're going to notice that all the videos are going to actually play much faster on your timeline, like this. Notice that, so there might be something wrong with my mask here. So if something's happening in your, with your mask, like for example, this one see, it's disappearing for some reason, that probably means that inside of that group, I messed something up. So I'm just going to open the group and check my shapes.
There you go, that is fine, and that is fine. So maybe one of the groups has been changed. Let's see which one it is. Okay. I think it's video number three. If I open that in here and I open the video mask, you can see that my shapes are actually, one of the shapes is wrong and I need to just pull it back here to fill the whole area.
So, one thing to note, if your shapes need to create a specific shape for you to be a mask to have a mask inside of them, then you must have make sure that all of the shapes that compose that shape actually last for the entire duration of your mask. Otherwise, your mask is fluid, I mean, you can have one of these, one of these shapes, if it's not in the right, you know, look, it actually comes in later and it affects the shape of the object that creates the mask. So there's one way to note, if your one of the shapes is behaving weird, just go inside of the group and make sure they all stay in the same place, and they all have the same length. When you expand your group, maybe they get out of sync.
So that's one thing to watch out for.
So there's your object, there's your shape and your template with the videos in there.
One more tip I have for you, if you need to actually move the videos inside of these masks. For example, if I want my building, this building on the bottom right, right, so that's number five.
It actually, again, it helps for you to rename these groups. So that's right click again, Rename. So that's video five, right? So that's video five right there. If you move it around, you'll see it. And by the way, you can lose that template now, in the, in the object on the bottom layer, you can hide it just as a, that's an idea.
So this is video five here. You can animate them and coming in, you know, create a nice, interesting effect. But if one of your videos actually plays, as you can see, it's playing that one actually it's a good, is not a good example because it actually does stay in frame so, but let's suppose that you have a video that you need to move, inside of that shape too, in order to keep the subject in one place, right? So what you can do is you can still apply animations to them. So if I go inside a video five here, and let's suppose I want to move this down during the animation, during the playback, all you do is just click on your group, on your video that is inside of the mask, click on it. You can add a custom animation, go to Animations, Custom, just drag it, there and make it as long as you like. And then during that animation, you can actually maybe shift the video, let's suppose I'm going to just shift it like this. So you can see now the video moves inside of that shape. Just make sure you move it in such a way that you're not revealing the edges of the video, because if you do, then of course, you're going to see the, you know, a black edge or whatever.
And yeah, so just move it inside of that clip. And then when you play it back, the video shifts, but it still stays within that mask. So that is one way to make sure that if you have like singers, for example, just singing and you want them to be in these weird shapes, then you just animate them and make sure they stay in there for the entire duration of the video.
So that is one one trick again. After you remove your guide image again, another tip here, if you, if you move your guide image and you say, well, I don't like this black line here, I want it to be a different color. You can have two choices. You can go to your Project Settings and change your canvas color, so right now it's black, but let's suppose I want to color pick maybe the sky color here or this brown orange, or, you know, or you can just choose whatever color you want. Let's call it that, I don't know, that orange, that was in the guide image to start with. So that's one way to do, change your canvas color, but if let's suppose you have other objects on the screen, or maybe your canvas needs to be black because you don't want to affect your canvas. Maybe you have an intro or something else that needs the black background all you can do, is really just go on the main timeline. Now you can pull these groups together so you can right click on the tracks and say, Remove All Empty Tracks, so again, let me make some room here. So these are your five videos, each one of them has a video inside of it. Again, you can feel free to select all of them and group them together again. So look, I group everything together now, so everything is one single clip, right? Everything's still plays just fine. All of the effect is, is kept together like this. But if you want the background to be different, you just move this up and just go to Annotations and use the rectangle annotation, just drag it in here. Expand it for the entire duration, resize it, you can zoom out and just, you know, resize that. Make sure it's below your effect, of course. And just change the color right there. So that allows you to have flexible, flexible lines around your clips, like so. And it doesn't really matter that it's going outside of the frame because that's not going to be visible.
So I hope this helps. I mean, it was a little bit of a long video here, but I hope I've illustrated the ability to create your own shapes from other shapes, inside of Camtasia and then turn them into masks to mask any clip, any video anywhere you like, and then, you know, produce this interesting video. So thank you for watching.
If you have not subscribed to my channel, feel free to subscribe and feel free to join my Camtasia Support Group for Beginners, for Camtasia on Facebook. And also if you have not upgraded to Camtasia to use these features, and the Media Matte is only available from Camtasia 2021, there is a link in the description to do an upgrade and or, or to buy it, and that would support my channel because it is an affiliate link. It means no extra cost to you. And again, thank you for your time. I will see you on the next one.
### How to use the OLD RECORDER in Camtasia 2021
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-the-old-recorder-in-camtasia-2021/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:01:19.000Z
Camtasia 2021 includes a redesigned screen recorder but you can still use the old recorder in Camtasia 2021, if you want to access the missing features. The new recorder has some options missing, such as the settings for recording location, format, framerate, file naming and more. Thankfully, Techsmith shipped the old recorder with a different filename along with the Camtasia 2021 installation - and it is still compatible and works fine.
In this video I show you how to use the old recorder in the new version of Camtasia, where to find it on the hard drive and how to launch it.
According to Techsmith, the missing features will be re-added into the new recorder in the very near future. Until then, you should not have any problem using the old recorder with Camtasia 2021.
If you haven't got Camtasia 2021 yet, it is now RELEASED and available, at this link.
### How to import PowerPoint presentations into Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-import-powerpoint-presentations-into-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T19:05:11.000Z
In this quick Camtasia tutorial, I'm going to show you how you can import a PowerPoint presentation to Camtasia so that you can edit and make a video from it, add narration, and so on.
I have this very short PowerPoint presentation here. It is a Camtasia guide, it doesn't matter. It has four slides, so I need to find that slide on this, PowerPoint presentation. I need to find it on this. This is my file. And then open Camtasia. I'm using Camtasia 2021\. Although this should work in previous versions and I just simply drag this PowerPoint presentation, on the left to the Media Bin, like, so.
You can see now that PowerPoint is exported, and it is imported in Camtasia as individual slides, you can see them numbered here, 1, 2, 3, and 4\. They're not necessarily in order, and if you can see behind the scenes, actually Camtasia extracted those from the PowerPoint presentation and exported them as individual PNG files. And then you can just drag them onto your timeline, like so. By default, each slide is going to have the default size that you have in your Preferences.
So if you want them to be longer by default, maybe have more slides and you want to drag all of them at once, and if you can see here, look, I'm dragging them all in here. Drag the first one multiple times, but you can see they are about 10 seconds long. The reason for that is because in the Settings, if you go to the Edit menu in Camtasia, go to Preferences, you can go to the Timing section and you see that images have 10 second long by default. So that means that any image you bring into Camtasia is going to last for 10 seconds by default. That doesn't mean you can't change their durations. If you want to make room for the first line, maybe you want to move the three ones at the end and select them and move them like so, and then drag from the left or the right, and expand the duration of the first slide. Or you can click on a slide and if you want to make it longer, you just hold down the Shift key and drag the edge. That's going to push all of the other slides further back so that your slide is longer.
And finally, if you want to add narration to these, as you can see here, I'm changing the slides as my timeline is moving, my playhead. If I want to start in narrating around here, talking about this current slide, I can just place my play head in here, go on the left to Voice Narration. Make sure you select the appropriate microphone you want to record with and click Start Voice Recording. Now I am speaking into my microphone and recording onto my timeline directly into Camtasia.
When you're done, you click Stop and then Camtasia wants to save that narration somewhere. Click Save and then the narration is also going to be inserted where your play head was. So there's my narration here. Now I am speaking into my microphone and recording.
So you get it. If your slide is then too long for your narration, click on the slide, hold down the Shift key and pull the end of the slide and make it shorter.
And that's going to bring all of the other slides, back to your desired point so there you have it. This is how you import a PowerPoint directly into Camtasia, as individual slides, and then add narration to them, change the length, change the duration of each slide and create a presentation, export a video from it and you're done.
Thank you for watching this tutorial. I hope you enjoyed it and you found it useful. If you enjoy it like it and share it, and please let me know in the comments, if you have any questions and I will see you on the next one.
### How to fade audio in and out in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fade-audio-in-and-out-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:18:30.000Z
In this very quick Camtasia tutorial I'm going to show you how you can fade audio in and out and how to change the audio points on an audio file in your Camtasia project.
I have a soundtrack here, I have a song in my media library. I'm going to just drag it down to my timeline here.
And as you can listen to this, it's not fading and it just plays normally from the start.
Right. So this is the audio file. How do I add the fade in effect?
## Fade with the audio effects
Well, it's very easy in Camtasia. You have a section, down here on the left called Audio Effects. The easiest way to add an audio fade is to go here and you have Fade in and Fade out. Just drag that effect onto your file, the audio file and fade out onto the end of the audio file.
You notice if you zoom in, Control and mouse wheel, you notice now that the volume indicated by this line is zero at the start, and then it grows you know, it grows as the video plays. So now let's see if we have achieved the effect.
You can see now that it's fading in. If you're not happy with the length of the effect, all you need to do is just drag this little audio point to the left. So click on it and drag it to the left. So now you're making the fade in much shorter. Let's see.
The audio comes to full volume in about a second or so. Now if you want to change this at the end as well, you can go there and you can zoom in, and again, if your fading is too short or too long, click on the audio point and drag it horizontally like this. So then my audio is going to fade out very smoothly.
You can hear it fading out. I'm not going to wait for the whole duration anyway. So this is one way to fade in and out, but actually there's more professional way to do it. Instead of just adding these pre-made fade in and fade out effects, all you can do is just do it by double clicking on the audio line and fading stuff out.
## Fading audio with the audio points
So I'm just going to remove the audio clip now from the timeline and go back to my Media Library and drag it again on the timeline. It helps if you zoom in, so If I zoom in and I want to create my own fade in and fade out, right? I'm going to go in here and go scroll all the way to the start of the project right here.
And it also helps, in Camtasia 2021 you can change the height of the tracks. So drag on this track and just make it much taller. So now you can see the audio points, the audio line, much easier. So very easy, look how easy it is to create a very quick fade in. Double click where you want the fade in to stop, so right here, double click. And you can see the audio point on the very far left. Click on that one, it may be hard to grab it because it's halfway out and drag it all the way down, like so. There is your fade in effect. Now, if you play this, boom, your audio effect fading is done.
Now another one where you want to do this and changing the audio points is actually handy in other places where you can't just drag the Fade in and Fade out effect to your audio track, if you want to fade it in the middle somewhere. Maybe you want to put in some other song or you want to do narration, Camtasia 2021 has an audio ducking filter as well. If you want to start talking over the music and you want the music to reduce volume, you can use that. I'm not going to cover that in this video, but if you want to make your own fade ins and outs in the middle of the clip, this is the same way you just go to the point where you want to fade in, double click and then double click again on the point where you want to come back to full volume, double click again. So these are the two points where your audio is going to be silent. So double-click again, and push that point down all the way like that, like so. Maybe move it to the left, move it to the right.
You notice the waveform changes volume and shows you an indication of what the volume is going to be. So let's suppose this is the fading out point and I want the fade in point to come in later. So I'm going to move my audio point there and again, double click on the line and bring that down as well, and maybe move it a bit to the right if you can, like so. So now I have this little gap here that I created manually, fading in and out without cutting my audio clip into pieces, without adding all of those effects that are pre-built. I just played with my audio points. There you go. So now the whole thing is silent.
I can speak here. I can say whatever I want and then fades back in. So this is how you work with the audio points and create fade in, fade out in Camtasia 2021.
Some of these things work also in Camtasia, 2020, and 19 I think. The audio point changing and the audio ducking feature, although is only available in 2021\. I hope you found this simple tutorial useful.
If you would like to see more tutorials like this on my channel, for absolute beginners, let me know in the comments what functions you would like me to cover, I'd be very happy to do it and please join my Camtasia Facebook Help for Beginners group, where I'm personally answering questions in there. The link is in the description.
Thanks again for your time. See you next time.
### How to import PowerPoint slides from individual JPEG files into Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-import-powerpoint-slides-from-individual-jpeg-files-into-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:17:49.000Z
In this article/video I show you how to import PowerPoint slides from individual JPEG files (or any other series of images) into Camtasia. It's a simple process and we look at changing the default duration setting for images in Camtasia too. This will make it easier to import the images/slides without having to change the duration for each of them.
Transcript of video:
Hello, let me show you one way to import a presentation, a PowerPoint presentation from individual JPEG files. I have exported this presentation as individual JPEG files to disk, and I can import these into Camtasia using the Import media feature, and put all the slides into Camtasia.
So this is the folder where I exported my individual slides. I have a video about that in my suggestions there and in the description. So these are all the slides from this presentation here, you see them four of them, and they are the size of an HD screen slideshow 1280 by 720, and I want to import these into Camtasia. Each one has its own different filename.
So, let me go into Camtasia. I'm using Camtasia 2021, but this should work in previous versions as well. So this is the folder where I have the slides. I can just select all of them and drag them to my Media Bin or drag them to the timeline. Before you do this, though, you may want to change one little setting in Camtasia. If you go to the Edit menu into Preferences, and go to Timing, there is a setting here that we need to change, if you want the slides to have a longer or shorter duration immediately after you import them. So for example, the images here, maybe I want each slide to last for five seconds or maybe 10 seconds.
I'm going to put the number 10 in here. 10 seconds for images. That means any image I import into my timeline is going to be 10 seconds long by default. That doesn't mean you can't change it later, so if you want some of your slides to be longer or shorter, I'll show you how to do this. Click OK here and now I can go and drag these slides. Select all of them at once, drag them onto my timeline and release like so. And as you can see, each one of them is 10 seconds long. I'm at second 10 and, this is between the first and second slide and you can see them on the screen changing as I go. Of course, now if you want some slides to last longer, all you need to do is just click on it and resize it using the Shift key, hold down the Shift key, and it's going to push all of the other slides after it further down the timeline. If I want to make this one longer, select it and Shift and drag. You can also change the order of the slides, just drag it and move it somewhere else.
And of course, a presentation like this, maybe you want to add narration to it so you can place your cursor where you want to start narrating, go to Voice narration and click Start Voice Recording. Make sure you select the appropriate microphone and then click Start recording and you can speak and add audio to your presentation.
And if you speak for longer and you need again to make the slide longer, all you need to do is just select it, shift and drag, and everything's going to move forward with you.
So this is how you import a sequence of JPEG files into your Camtasia project, maybe exported from PowerPoint, maybe from another source. Add narration to them, and then create a video presentation from your PowerPoint slide deck.
If you have any questions, let me know in the comments and I will see you on the next one.
### How to Highlight Two Areas of the Screen in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-highlight-two-areas-of-the-screen-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-18T12:30:54.000Z
When creating on-screen tutorials in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia), you often need to draw attention to two different parts of the screen at the same time. This technique uses spotlights and annotations to highlight multiple areas simultaneously.
## How to Highlight Two Areas at Once
1. Add your screen recording to the timeline
2. Go to **Annotations** and add a **Spotlight** shape over the first area you want to highlight
3. Add a second Spotlight annotation over the second area
4. Adjust the **size and position** of each spotlight to frame the relevant content
5. Use **animations** to control when each spotlight appears and transitions
Highlighting two areas of an Excel spreadsheet simultaneously in a Camtasia tutorial
## Tips for Multi-Area Highlights
- **Use consistent styling** — keep both spotlights the same shape and opacity for a professional look
- **Add animations** — use Zoom-n-Pan or Smart Focus to transition between highlighted areas
- **Layer your annotations** — place spotlights on separate tracks for independent timing control
- **Consider arrows or lines** — connect the two areas visually to show their relationship
This technique is especially useful for tutorials showing cause-and-effect relationships, like clicking a button and seeing a result in another part of the screen.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Emphasize two areas of the screen at the same time in Camtasia for on-screen tutorials
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/emphasize-two-areas-of-the-screen-at-the-same-time-in-camtasia-for-on-screen-tutorials/
Last updated: 2025-11-08T18:51:12.000Z
Emphasizing two areas of the screen at the same time in Camtasia can be a bit tricky. If you are creating on-screen tutorials, recorded in Camtasia, during editing you might want to zoom in on two different areas of the screen at the same time, to guide the viewer to the screen zone you need to show. This might prove difficult if your screen is wide or if the two areas you need to show are on two opposite sides of the screen. Zooming in on one part of the screen can take the other part out of the screen and it's not visible anymore where the action is.
In this Camtasia tutorial I provide a procedure for using a single screen recording video and zooming in on two different areas of the screen at the same time. We look at how to duplicate or copy the original recording, select just the segment we care about, crop it, resize it, move it around, add effects to it to distinguish it from the main clip, transition it in and out and more.
I share a lot of tips and tricks for Camtasia when dealing with a situation like this where two parts of the screen are visible simultaneously. We look at how to make the perfect selection, copying the entire part of the timeline that has the segment we desire to replicate. Then we look at how we can animate the emphasized clip, cropping it to the area we desire.
We also look at expanding the clip if we've selected less than needed, by trimming too much or too little. Finally, I have some tips about changing the size of the highlighted area when the information on-screen changes and we need a different dimension for it - all using the same clip.
Camtasia provides a lot of flexibility for teachers and trainers that need to make sure the message on-screen is understood, with the multi-track timeline, ability to crop, resize and rotate clips as well as animate the video cropping, which is useful in this case. You can of course zoom in on more than two areas, multiple areas on the screen at the same time, as long as you have room for them and keep the playback in sync with the main clip.
I hope you enjoy this tutorial and please let me know in the comments if you have any questions.
This video's transcript is below. Check out my YouTube channel for much more Camtasia tutorials like this.
Hello, this is Cristi and this video is going to be an answer to another question I got on my YouTube channel about Camtasia and specifically, someone asked how can they show two different areas of the screen in a video tutorial or presentation when the two areas are in opposite sides of the screen, and maybe in Camtasia, you may want to zoom in on a specific area, but then you lose the other area, if it's very far away from the first one. How can you show both of them and present two pieces of information and show two sides of the screen at the same time while having the screen filled up and then you know, you just, not losing any area of the screen.
So how can you do this? It's very easy to do. It basically means that, if you have something like presenting one side of the screen and there's information there that your viewer must see. And then on the other side of the screen maybe at the bottom or on the far right, you have another information that may present the effects of the action being performed or some other piece of data that must be staying on screen. If you zoom in on the screen on one side, and you have a screen recording, then that other side is going to come out of the screen, so then you can see that properly or at all. So I'm going to show you a procedure in Camtasia of showing two areas, two different areas on the screen at the same time while you're presenting.
So let's have a look at this. I have a project here for my friend, Chris Menard. He's presenting a tutorial about Excel, so in these types of tutorials, sometimes he's presenting two different areas of the screen. So let me just, I've added some markers here for speed. So as you can see here on this particular area, you have the information on the left that must be shown, which is the data being worked on and on the right side, you have this panel with information that also must be seen.
So as you can see, there's this big area in the middle of the screen that is not necessary for this particular example. And this is true, usually in Excel tutorials for the pivot tables, for example, because the panel that allows you to configure and format a pivot table is on the far right of the screen and the data is usually on the left side of the screen.
So I am going to show you how you can actually show this information at the same time, without this waste of space here in the middle, this data that's, you know, there's no data in there really. So let's see how we can do it. I've added markers, as I said, because I want to decide quickly where I'm going to be zooming in.
And if I scrub through my video here, you see that at the same time, Chris is explaining on the far right, there's stuff happening. And then we're zooming on the screen, and as you can see now, the right side has disappeared because I've zoomed in my screen.
You first have to decide which segment of your video will be necessary for this. Which part of your video you need to actually do this effect. You may have to do it for the entirety of your tutorial, if you're recording your screen, you're doing an on-screen tutorial, and if you're jumping from one side to another all the time, then maybe this procedure, you will have to do it for the whole video.
But I don't need to do it in this case here. So I only selected this part here or where the marker is. I'm going to show the information starting here, and then in here I have to be careful because I'm zooming in, of course. And then I'm going to stop here at the far right, because I'm done with the tutorial.
So this is the way to do it. Very easy.
Make room on your timeline like this, just you know, make the screen smaller. So the first step is to make a copy of the video, of the screen video that you want to show, okay. So this doesn't work without a copy, you cannot zoom in. There is no effect to zoom in on two different areas of the screen at the same time. So you are going to have to use a copy of the clip.
So just to say, I also have the video stream with Chris on it. You may or may not want to do this. As you can see, because I have to zoom in two opposite sides of the screen, chris is in the middle. So we choose to keep Chris on screen at, you know, as much as we can so he would, he wants to be on screen. So that's why I had to put them in the middle because there is no room on the sides to put him there. He's going to be in the middle of, but if you don't need that, that's not a consideration for you.
So I'm going to select, so basically place your play head at the start of your segment, where you want to start showing both areas and make a selection for the entirety of the segment like that. So this selection is the area, the selection of the video that I want to show both videos, you know, both extremes of the screen at the same time. So that's the part that I need to copy. So I'm going to press Control C to copy this area. And then you may zoom out a bit, you know, to see the entire timeline and Control V.
Now when you do that, of course, you have to be careful. This is the second important step. You must be careful that your copy of your video, the screen of course, needs to be in sync with the first one. So do not remove your selection. I've pasted the pieces of video that I copied, you can see them right here, but of course, because Camtasia always pastes at the playhead and, I've done my selection here and the play head is on the, on the right, at the end of my selection, when I pressed Control V to paste it, paste it, all of them at the play head, but that is wrong because my playhead is way up on the right side. So now my copy of the video is out of sync.
Well, it's very easy to do, if you don't remove your selection and these three clips, are copied, I'm going to, you know, click and drag them and move them inside like this and they snap in place.
So you may want to enable timeline snapping for this to work precisely. You can do that by going to View menu, Timeline snapping, and enable all of these snapping points, particularly the Markers and the Play head and the Media edges, you know, things like that.
So this helps you, if I zoom in, it helps you to match the start of your selection with the copy of the clip, all right. So now my clips are synchronized. I will double click on the play head to remove my selection. And of course now the next step is to remove all the clips I don't want. So I don't want to have Chris on screen. So you see when you copy something on the timeline, it copies everything from start to, you know, from top to bottom. So all of the tracks, if you select on the timeline and you press copy, it's going to make a slice, you know, it takes a slice of all of the clips included in that selection and make a copy of them, but you don't need all of them.
All we need is really just the screen, that's it because that's what we want to show. So as you can see here, it's made a copy of the track where Chris is on camera. I'm going to remove that. Click to select it and delete. And also I have some logos of, you know, Excel logos and backgrounds and things that I use at the start and end of my clip, which is again, something I don't want again, so I'm going to click and delete it.
The other thing you need to do is make sure you silence the audio for your copy, because that means now, if I play this, the audio has been copied as well, and it's gonna, you're going to hear the audio twice or double volume because it's, it's repeated here. So right click on the copy of your clip like this and say, Silence Audio, like that. Or you can press Shift and S.
So now we are ready to proceed. If I zoom in a little more here, you can see that on the bottom is my original video screen, and this one is the copy of the screen, and if I play this now, you're going to see that there's no difference at all.
Verbal look over on the right hand side on my screen there, the recommended pivot table.
So you can see for now nothing has changed. We're not seeing anything different because the copy of the clip is on top of everything else and that means, you know, it's just like a copy. You don't see anything, but this is the next part where we want to proceed with our effect.
So the first thing is you notice that animation here, where I'm zooming in on the left side, I don't want that on the right side too. So I'm going to remove that animation here from the copy of the clip.
So just to help us see better, you can actually change the, you can, maybe if it helps you, you can add a color effect, a temporary color effect to your copy, but we don't need that.
What I want to show you now is, I want to keep this area on the right, on the copy clip and on the main clip, it's just going to proceed as usual with the part on the left. Right? So on the copy of the clip, what I want to do is I want to crop that clip just to the area that I need.
So to crop the clip, you know, you select it and you go into Crop mode at the top here, or you can hold down the ALT key and press drag the edges here with the edges of the clip like this, you know, you see the border of the clip becomes blue and you can just drag these and crop the video.
You're not going to see any difference because it is the same exact clip on the same exact position. But as you can see, I'm cropping the copy now, and I can see Chris again because he was just below the track with the, with Chris on it, with the speaker was on the bottom, on the bottom track there. So then I can now I see that.
So you choose when you want to stop cropping, maybe I'm going to stop cropping right here just after the scroll bar. So now this is the clip that I copied and I cropped it. You can restrict that even further. You know, you just crop the top of it like this, because I just want to crop on the area that I'm interested in right here.
And to help you see better, what I usually do, if I'm going to move this part of the screen independently, I want to show my viewers that that is not actually supposed to be there. It's a copy of the clip, it's an extra area that I chose to highlight or to zoom in on and to show the viewers that that has, that's actually not part of the usual interface and how things should look.
And to help distinguish it from the other one, I usually add a drop shadow to it. So let's do that now. Go to Visual Effects and find the Drop Shadow effect here and drag it onto your copy clip, like this. So now maybe you see maybe not, you can change the direction of the drop shadow.
And usually what I do is I move the direction on the opposite side of where I copied it. So if my clip is on the right side, I'm going to move the angle of the drop shadow to the left. So as you can see here, if I zoom in, you know, I'm not zooming in I'm, I'm resizing this clip holding the Control key.
You see, now this is the copy of my clip that I'm changing the size for. You can of course move it around on screen, anywhere you like. This piece of video is going to play independent of everything else. And if I move it away, you can see the original clip is still there. So I'm going to leave this on the side, but I'm going to actually make it larger like this.
So I'm going to zoom that in for the top, you know, to reach the top of the screen.
Let me undo this just to give you another tip. If you want to show this in a nice and attractive way, what you want to do, maybe is slide it in from the side or take it from where it is and zoom it in with an animation.
So this is going to actually help your viewer realize that, oh, that is the part of the screen you're emphasizing and you're zooming it in, so it comes in from that portion of the screen and you're making it larger for me to see better. But it doesn't mean that it's going to do that in a usual, you know, when I'm usually using that software that you're showing.
So at the very start of the screen, I can zoom in here. So this is the part of the screen that I'm copying. So I can go in here with my play head, add an animation right about here, right? So I'm going to just go to Animations, Animations, Custom Animation, just put that animation at the very start of the clip.
And then here, I'm going to zoom, make it larger like that. So this is the area I want to emphasize. Now, let's see what happens if I go in here.
Payable, look over at the right-hand side.
You can see that information has appeared on screen and then has become larger because that's what I want to show here.
So if you want to adjust even more, you can actually animate the crop as well. So I've decided that I have a little too much space at the top here maybe. So I can ALT key again and crop. Now this, because I have the animation, it's going to crop it and animate it at the same time. So I'm going to make it a bit larger. So, let's see what happens now.
Look over at the right-hand side on my screen.
So there you have it, you can show that area of the screen now larger. And you can keep going, and of course you're editing your video, you scroll through it and you go like this and you notice that Chris is showing stuff here on the right.
I see the mouse cursor and I see him scrolling. So it's important that that area of the screen stays in one place for as long as I need it to show. But at some point he's going to actually change that. And I'm going to show you how to deal with this. So if I keep playing, I have these markers here just to save time.
If I go to that area, now you can now see, all of that area is outside of screen, so don't worry about that. But he has zoomed in on this part of the screen now, and you can see the advantages, that although the original clip has gone out of screen here, I still have my copy on screen where I need it to be.
So let's zoom in here a bit. And now we get to the point where he's actually closing that panel. Watch what happens.
Close.
See that's he, the panel has closed and the area that I'm showing is now wrong. It's no longer showing correctly what's happening because a wider panel has shown up. If you zoom it out here, look, this panel on the right is now a different size.
So my copy of the area does not correspond anymore, it doesn't fit the information, but I still want to show that. So, at this point, I need to put in an animation in here to transition from that size to a larger size to fit the new panel that has shown up. So watch what happens. If I go in here, it's the correct size and if I keep playing, he's pressing the close button here, and boom, the panel has changed. So at this exact point, I already need to have a wider area. So that is okay, that's not a problem. What we need to do is just enlarge the crop area. It's the same clip, you know, I'm not copying the clip again, I'm not making other copy or anything.
All I do is add an animation to this exact point, so custom animation. Make it shorter, so it fits between the points where I'm pressing the Close button and the moment the panel changes. So you can use the one key, one frame scrolling through your timeline, press this button here, and you can go exactly in the point.
So look, this is the part where he's pressing the close button and this is the part where we are showing the new panel. So now this is the part where I need to change the cropping of this area. Press down the ALT key again, hold it down and let's pull the sides. Make sure of course your clip is selected.
Hold down the ALT key and let's make the clip larger. So about here. Now, there may be a part where this other side of the screen is actually being animated. So you need to make sure that look, if I'm advancing through my animation, it is animating a bit, it's sliding in. So actually what I want to do is, I want to crop to the point where it's final here.
So as you can see, I zoom in and my playhead is here. So this is where my animation needs to finish. So click on the end of the animation and just slide it about here, where the animation on screen has stopped animating. Well, sliding. So now I'm cropping this area again to the correct size, like so, and maybe I need to push the top a little higher because I need to see the title and that bar above it, maybe, I don't know. And then scale it down to fit inside the screen, like so.
So now I see the panel again, the new panel, so let's see what happened now, if the animation is going correctly. Go back.
Close.
There you go. So you can slightly see a bit of it just scaling down while it's sliding in.
If this doesn't work for you, you actually can slice that clip and just position it exactly in place. So you won't have this animated transition, you're just going to see the new sliding clip, the new clip in place immediately. So that is up to you how you do this, but we have managed to transition from a narrow panel here to, watch what happens, sliding in, and that is the new panel here, all on the same clip, no changes. Okay.
So now he's continuing to explain this procedure on screen here. So all you need to do is just make sure that for the entire duration of your tutorial, the areas that you need to show are visible on screen and so on.
Now at the end, when you're done presenting these things, how are you going to take this extra clip out? You can of course, just make it disappear, just stop animating and it's gone or you can fade it out or you can slide it out. Okay. So we, at the end here where we finished showing what we need. So again, on the same clip, what I usually do is because I have this shadow here, it looks, you know, it pops out of the screen. I can go again to a custom animation, put it right at the end, and just use the arrow keys to slide it out, like so.
There we have it. So now it's, it's going to slide out of screen, very nice.
Three
There we go. Yep. So now I'm getting to the end of the tutorial anyway, so I'm doing much more animation here. I'm just scaling Chris up, bringing the background back in and the logo and everything, so I'm done with this tutorial.
So this has been the procedure to do, and you can do it multiple times. You can actually scale three copies of the, of the screen. Three, three copies, two copies of different areas of the screen, depending on what you're showing, and where it needs to be. You can of course, like I showed you, you can take this area and move it to the left.
If you want to keep Chris maybe, or your, your speaker or yourself on the right side of the screen here, you can just take this copy of the clip and just place it wherever you like on screen. And because it's in sync with the main clip, it's just going to keep playing in that position. Make sure you silence your audio of course, to avoid duplication. And then you just, you know, you just move that around the screen, just like any other clip.
And another tip, if you realize that you've you've cut that clip too late or too soon, you know, you can still change the size of it. If I come back in here and I decide, not the case in this tutorial, but as an example, if you say, oh, I wish I had copied this clip from like a few seconds before.
That's not a problem. The clip is still there. You just crop it, you know, just trimming it here because that's where you, you started your copy, but watch what happens if I want to bring it in, earlier like here, for example, all you need to do is just use the edge here and just drag backwards. And you can see I'm bringing that area of the screen in here because the whole clip is included in that media file.
You just cropped it, you trimmed it to the portion you copied, but it's still there, so you can make it longer in either direction, if you decided to bring it in earlier, or finish later, you know. You decide you have not copied enough. You can just use it like at the end here, if I wanted to use that part here for the animation, and I still want to show whatever is on screen here, you know, for a couple more seconds, all you need to do is just expand the media here, like so, and just remove your animation and you can see the clip is fading out, like, you know, that's the animation I had there at the end.
So although you've copied one part of your clip, everything else, the rest of the clip is still there, so you can expand your edges. And if you decide that you actually need to bring that in and out all the time for the entire duration, maybe it's a good idea to actually copy the whole clip.
You know, you copy the whole clip once, from your screen recording, just place it at the start, keep it in sync and then cut bits of it you don't want to show and leave the bits you want to show. And put the shadow on them and make them larger, move them in different areas of the screen and this way you ensure they stay synchronized with the main clip.
And if you make any edits or any cuts on the main clip, you're making the same cuts on the other one so that they both cut at the same time.
So this is one other tip. If you wanted to remove a portion of the video here where you have the copy of the clip, let's suppose that I want to remove this part here, like that.
So you notice now I'm cutting the main screen recording, I'm cutting the background graphics, the stream with Chris on camera and the stream with the copy of the clip, that's on the side. So if I press Control X or use this scissor icon here, like this, all three of them have been cut. So they always stay in sync, no matter what I do.
So yes, if it's a project where you think you're going to have to make a lot of these, you know, a lot of cuts, maybe it's the top side of the screen and the bottom side of the screen, and you need to kind of always show them side by side or one on top of the other, just copy the whole thing at the start and then carry on editing and managing both of them.
And if it helps you to distinguish them, you can actually add a color visual effect. If you go to Visual Effects, you can Colorize or add a Color Tint to it, maybe Colorizing, right? So this is my copy clip like this, you can see it's all green. It's ridiculous and exaggerated, but it helps you distinguish the copy clip from the original clip, if it helps you during editing. And then you can just go on the side panel here and remove that effect at the end of your editing session.
So this is one way to show that, you know, you have your distinct clips, if it helps you.
So I hope this was useful. It was a bit of a long tutorial, but I'm trying to show you all the tips and tricks and things to watch out for. So I hope this was helpful, thank you for your time. And if you enjoy my tutorials on Camtasia or any other things on my channel, feel free to subscribe to my channel. And if you have not subscribed, if you have not upgraded to Camtasia, there is a link in the description that if you want to upgrade it or buy it, it's going to help support my channel, it's an affiliate link at no extra cost to you.
And just to mention, what I showed here should work in Camtasia 2021, 2020, and I believe 19, and some of the previous versions where you have this copy and crop ability. So it should work on quite a few versions for Windows and Mac. Thank you again for your time.
I will see you on the next one.
### How to add background music in Camtasia | Tutorial for Beginners
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-camtasia-tutorial-for-beginners/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:14:06.000Z
How to add background music in Camtasia: Absolute beginner tutorial for Camtasia. If you have one or more videos and you import them on the timeline, perhaps you are creating a slideshow or video sequence, you can add many videos, as many as you like, to add background music, you need to bring in your audio file. You can import an MP3 file or a WAV file, add it to the Media Bin or directly on the timeline, on a separate track.
In this video I show you how to import a music file into Camtasia, how to add it to your timeline, on a separate track, how to slice the end of the file, if it's longer than your project. To prevent the audio from cutting off abruptly, you can go to Audio effects and use a Fade out transition to cause the audio to fade out smoothly.
So that's all it takes to add audio background, audio to a video project in Camtasia. If your videos have sound of their own and you don't want that to be part of the project, all you need to do is right-click on the video and silence the audio just for those clips. You can also play with the volumes of speech vs. music, right inside Camtasia, to keep the music going while you're narrating.
Hello, this is Cristi. This is a very quick, absolute beginner tutorial for Camtasia showing you how you can add background music in Camtasia on a project you're working on. So if you have a series of videos, I'm importing a video here, two videos actually, making a slide show from these videos, just playing one after the other.
It's really not important, you can add many video, as many as you like. So these are both on the timeline here, each one on its own track if you want, or both of them on the same track, it doesn't really matter. So to add background music, you need to bring in your audio file. So you can bring in an MP3 file or a WAV file, you can click on this plus sign here in the Media Bin on the left, you can go to Media Bin and import it right here from disk. You can click on this button to import media, or you can just drag the sound file from disk right into the Media Bin here. You can see the audio file there, its own its own category.
And then you need to bring this down to your timeline on its own track. That's all it takes. The audio track lives on its own track right down there or at the top above it. It doesn't really matter how many tracks you have. Just bring the audio here and drop it. So you can see my audio file is longer than my videos.
So let's see if it's playing now.
The audio file is playing, but if I were to export this project right now, I would actually get a three and a half minute clip with just these two videos playing at the start, and then a black screen. So if I want my audio to stop when the video stops, all I need to do is use my mouse wheel to zoom in to the point where my video stops and place my play head at the very end, right there. Select the audio track, and then you can use this scissor icon to split or cut the rest of the video by selecting the rest of it, using this red marker like so, and pressing the slice, the Cut tool like this, and I have cut the rest of the clip.
Another way you can do it, I will undo here. If you go to the end of your video, select the audio clip and press this Slice tool or Split tool like so, or you can press the S key.
This will cut the audio right there. Make sure just the audio track is selected and then click on the bit that is at the end and press Delete to remove it. Now, your project is only 40 seconds or how many seconds your video clip is. And then you see the audio stops right there with the video.
To prevent the audio from cutting off abruptly, you can actually go to Audio effects and use a Fade out transition, like so. Just drag the Fade out transition to the audio track like so. And now the audio will fade out.
So that's all it takes to add audio background, audio to a video project in Camtasia. If your videos have sound of their own and you don't want that to be part of the project, all you need to do is right-click on the video and silence the audio just for those clips.
Thank you for watching. I hope this tutorial was useful, let me know in the comments you have any questions and subscribe to my channel for more beginner Camtasia tutorials.
### How to avoid the spam folder, improve deliverability and make sure your subscribers see your emails
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-avoid-spam-folder-improve-deliverability-when-you-send-emails/
Last updated: 2025-09-04T12:16:07.000Z
“I want to do business with a company that treats emailing me as a privilege, not a transaction.” – Andrea Mignolo
You have a great offer or promotion to send to your subscribers or you have some fantastic news to share about your company. You fire up the email editor and compose the message, add some pictures and send it. The results fail to appear. You get lots of spam complaints or your open rate is abysmal. What happened?
In this guide, I will run through an extensive list of possible reasons why your emails may be arriving in the spam folder and also offer advice on how you can at least minimise that risk.
According to some estimates, more than 80% of the emails sent worldwide are spam, so you can imagine that companies that maintain spam filters are hard-pressed to improve them continuously. And they have become much better in recent years, not least due to the advent of artificial intelligence. Back in 2015, Google claimed their AI-powered spam filters were catching 99.9% of Gmail spam.
“This is great”, you say, “but how does that affect my email marketing?”
Well, it is inevitable that some portion of legitimate emails also gets caught by spam filters due to some factors or others. This is called a ‘false positive’, but it is not entirely inevitable.
In this article, I’m listing a few basic rules and tactics to keep in mind that are in your control to improve your deliverability. Even if these will not completely eliminate the likeliness of your emails getting sent to the junk folder, they will at least minimise it considerably. Please note that some links in this article are affiliate links. If you click through and make a purchase, I may be compensated, at no extra cost to you.
### Be careful with your subject lines
Your subject line one of the first places filters look for spam signals. Using certain ‘spammy’ words such as ‘Respond now’, ‘Make money’, ‘Guaranteed success’, ‘FREE stuff’, ‘Your loan approval’ and others, are sure to get your email flagged.
Typically, spam filters work on a ‘score’ basis. This means that when they analyse your email, they go through a long list of characteristics and check the boxes. Each ‘box’ has a score value and at the end, if your message score is above a set threshold, the email goes straight into the Spam folder. It’s that simple!
Your subject line is one of the first candidates and the first one to be scrutinised – by the spam checkers as well as your audience. When was the last time you opened an email that had the subject line “You’ve won! Reply now to claim your prize!”
Use a clean, well designed and ‘valid’ HTML email template
Email can be text-based and HTML-based. You can easily compose a text-only email and should have no problems but as soon as you want to add formatting, images and other HTML elements, you’re in need of an HTML ‘template’.
Most ‘visual’ email builders provided by ESPs allow you to edit HTML-based emails and use various templates with logos, headers and styles.
However, if you mess around with the templates or get ‘dirty’ with the code, you can easily break it and although it might still ‘look’ good, the HTML code could be corrupted or invalid. This can cause spam filters to misinterpret your email as spam.
Another downside is that if your HTML is invalid, some email client software might actually not display your email properly or not at all! Not all email clients are capable of graceful fall-backs when it comes to invalid code.
As a rule of thumb, choose a clean template to start with, one that most closely resembles the final layout you have in mind and only customise using the ESP’s provided tools. This way you minimise the chance of invalidating your HTML content.
### Be careful with the body of your email
Don’t use ALL CAPITALS in your text. This not only looks desperate and ‘screamy’ but it also affects your spam rating. Write naturally, as you would write a conversation, not trying to recruit viewers for a freak show in the market!
Don’t use too many exclamation marks!!!!!!! If you really need to be happy about something, use just ONE. I know you want your message to stand out and be read but combining a lot of different cases, formatting styles and colours can quickly make your email appear as junk.
Don’t try to obfuscate your text by using white text on a white background, in hopes of increasing your text-to-image ratio (see below).
Don’t use red text. Just don’t! Actually, you know what? Try to stay away from colours at all costs! Not only is it unprofessional, but also increases your chance of your own subscribers marking your message as spam.
### Watch your image vs. text ratio
Image-only emails risk going straight to spam. Since spammers can send emails with images that contain links printed on them, in hopes that they won’t be caught by spam ‘robots’ which cannot read images, they make them a great target for spam filters to just get rid of them.
Some of my previous clients fell into the trap of creating image-only emails. Maybe it’s sheer laziness or the fact that HTML emails are harder to design and make them look pretty – so the easy way out is to just design an entire email newsletter as one big image and include it as a big poster (or a few slices of a poster). This might make an email look ‘pretty’ but it has a very high chance of never being seen by your readers; so, who does that beautiful email benefit? Nobody!
A good image vs. text balance is important in your emails. There isn’t a specific formula that you can apply and certainly, not all ratios work well in all circumstances, but there are some pointers you can guide yourself by.
SpamAssassin, the #1 open source spam checker recommends a 60% text vs 40% image ratio, with at least 400 characters of text. However, increasing the number of images won’t totally ruin your email.
You should try to use common sense and include as many images as it makes sense for your business and for communicating your message effectively. Remember, people don’t have time to read a whole novel in an email.
Also, most people nowadays are reading email on a phone, so keep the number and size of images as low as possible.
### Use ALT tags for images
A high number of your subscribers have images turned off in their email client. This is especially true since lately, most email clients turn images off by default for all senders and it requires specific approval from the recipient to display them. If you send someone an email for the first time, you can almost guarantee that images will be switched off.
Therefore, you should always use ALT tags for images in emails.
There’s nothing more puzzling than opening a ‘newsletter’ from a company and in addition to not seeing any text, not seeing any images either – just one big, blank email!
An ALT tag (short for ‘alternative text’ is a special HTML tag that you can use to provide descriptive text content about an image.
This text is typically visible in-place of the image before it is loaded (or if the image does not load for other reasons – no internet, corrupted image, wrong link, etc.). It is a fall-back for when images are not visible.
It also serves to give screen readers an indication about what the image is for vision-impaired subscribers who use screen readers.
Here’s what this looks like:
When the image loads, this text is no longer visible to the user (but is still visible to spam filters).
Most ESPs nowadays allow you to customise the ALT tag for your images in their editors so you should take advantage of it and not rush through getting your email out the door.
Always provide an ALT text for every image you use, but do not use too much text! Text-stuffing will also get you flagged as spam.
A good guideline is to not make an ALT tag longer than 125 characters. Why 125? Because the world’s most popular Windows screen reader (JAWS) breaks text in chunks of 125 characters when it ‘reads’ the text on-screen.
### Be careful with links
An email without at least one link is a dead-end.
You send a nice, conversational-tone message to your readers, you get them all excited about something and then say goodbye. Is that it? Or do you want to bring them to your website to learn more (or buy something)?
Use links but use them wisely. Don’t include too many and always link to domains with a good reputation.
If you link to your own website – to a landing page, offer or product – make sure that your domain name is in good standing (use HTTPS) and it has a good reputation (check blacklists).
Try to avoid URL shorteners, which can be used by spammers to hide the final URL of the destination link and therefore have a bit of a bad reputation. Preferably, link directly to your website.
The final link can always be viewed by the spam filters even if initially it may be rewritten by your ESP so that they can track clicks. Spam filters can follow redirects and will find your ultimate URL anyway.
Finally, it goes without saying: always check all links you include by actually clicking on them in your email and making sure they work and lead to the pages you intend them to. Not rarely do I get an email with some products featured or some interesting links, only to find that at least one or two are broken or lead to the wrong page.
Sometimes this happens if, for example, you replicate a previous email (a function offered by many ESPs) and replace the products/links. You’re bound to forget one or two. That’s why I always make it a point to click and check all my links when I am done ‘composing’ the message.
### Check your spelling
It always helps to have a second pair of eyes reading your email before you send it. Even the best spellcheckers fail. Have you ever received an email from a ‘Nigerian Prince’ or other phishing or scam message? I’m sure you did. What is the first thing that strikes you? Spelling errors! I don’t know whether it’s because they’re purposefully targeting the least educated and likely to be gullible but most spam messages have spelling mistakes.
A great proofreader and grammar tool I’ve come to rely on lately is Grammarly. It runs in your browser or in your desktop word processors (such as Microsoft Word) and alerts you as soon as it encounters a spelling mistake and lets you fix it on the spot. And since it’s in your browser, it integrates very nicely alongside your ESP’s editor when you compose your email. I didn’t realise I typed so badly before! It's completely free and if you want more (such as phrase recommendations, plagiarism checker, etc., it starts at less than £9/month.
### Include a physical contact address in all emails
Not only is this a legal requirement but it shows that you are a legitimate business with nothing to hide and that you can be reached in case of any questions or complaints.
### Include an unsubscribe link
If people cannot unsubscribe, they will reach for the spam button for sure! Don’t give them more reasons to do it. Include an unsubscribe link at the bottom of your messages and allow your subscribers to opt out should they want to stop hearing from you.
### Use an ESP with a good reputation
I have written about ESPs (Email Service Providers) extensively on this website. Examples of ESPs are ConvertKit , Moosend, MailChimp, Aweber, etc.
Needless to say, you should choose a reputable service that has great deliverability rates and makes a serious effort to maintain their reputation with email providers (Gmail, etc.).
An ESP can make or break all of your email marketing efforts. You can respect all the pointers in this article to the letter, you can spend hours and hours crafting beautiful, interesting and engaging emails, only to have your efforts thwarted by an ill-reputed email service provider.
Good ESPs monitor and screen their accounts very carefully. For example, MailChimp will detect if you are importing a mailing list that you have purchased from somewhere and not allow you to email to it. I am sure others do the same.
There are many technical aspects of getting a good reputation as an ESP (and maintaining it) - such as domain verification, mailing list screening, open rate statistics, IP address warm-up, etc. You don’t need to worry about most of these but I think DIY email sending should not be something to dabble in – leave it with the professionals. Read my article on what is an ESP and why you need one.
If you don’t already have an account with an email service provider, I recommend either ConvertKit (see my review here) or MailChimp as good contenders.
### Don’t send emails repeatedly to bounced addresses
If an email has a soft bounce or two (inbox full for example), it might recover from that. But if a subscriber’s email address repeatedly bounces back your messages, you should remove it from your list. If it’s a hard bounce (email address or domain no longer exists), get rid of it immediately.
Normally, ESPs will automatically clean up emails that hard bounce and retry soft bounces (or turn them into hard bounces after they reject the messages repeatedly). But if they don’t you should watch out for and clean these up.
### Verify and authenticate your domain and IP addresses
Domain name verification and authentication go hand in hand with successful email marketing efforts. Email deliverability is greatly impacted by an unverified or bogus domain name or an IP address that has a bad history.
In order to prove that you are who you say you are and that your ESP is allowed to send email on your behalf, you can configure authentication for your domain name by adding SPF and DKIM records. These are used by ISPs that examine the headers included in your email messages to see whether your ESP is permitted to send emails for your domain through their IP addresses.
If you don’t configure these records on your domain’s DNS zone, then sending through an ESP will typically be done via some of their domain names – in essence, your emails will appear coming from that domain name and you will be taking advantage of (or being affected by) the reputation of those domains.
This could be a good thing or a bad thing. If you are just starting out, possibly using a brand-new domain name for your website or for sending emails and you have no history nor reputation online, it might be a good thing to rest on the reputation of these ‘sending domains’ from your ESP.
Since it is assumed that a reputable ESP will have policies in place to verify, screen out and block bad senders, their domain names (and IP addresses) should be in good standing.
However, if some of the other users who send emails through these ESPs engage in malicious practices, send spam and go unnoticed, then the reputation of these ESPs’ domain names will also suffer and you will be impacted by that as well. For this reason, you might want to authenticate and send emails by relying on the reputation of your own domain name.
Each ESP should have easy instructions on what records you need to add to your DNS zone in order to properly authenticate it and insert the correct permissions. This will tell any ISPs that your ESP is allowed to send email on your behalf.
DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail) is a way to prevent other people from pretending to send from your domain name. If you ask your ESP to configure this for you, it will typically be a unique cryptographic key generated just for you and your domain.
SPF (Sender Policy Framework) also prevents against senders who pose as yourself – spammers who pretend to send email as you. When you add this record in your DNS, it can then be checked by ISPs receiving your emails and proving that the email is really coming from you.
### Don’t attach files to emails
Some ESPs do allow you to attach files to the email newsletters or campaigns you send but it’s not a good idea. File attachments increase your spam score because they are very easy to suspect they might be infected by viruses. People who distribute malware usually send attachments with ‘interesting-looking’ filenames, such as ‘Your-credit-approval.docx’ and so on.
If you really need to send a file to your subscribers, the best way to do it is to upload the file somewhere on a cloud provider (Dropbox, Google Drive, OneDrive, Amazon S3, etc.) or upload it to your own website and link to the file from there. This ensures that the person receiving the email doesn’t have to download a big file when they check their email and keeps your spam score low.
### Don’t use purchased email lists
You may be tempted to purchase a list of ‘thousands of emails’ in order to grow your client base but please resist it! This is a very damaging practice and could seriously harm your marketing efforts going forward.
As mentioned earlier, ESPs will typically have ways to analyse your list against other accounts and if a very high percentage of the emails on your list are the same as on another list, the likelihood that both accounts have imported a purchased list is very high – so it will typically get your account shut down.
Buying a list and using it to send emails could get your domain name and/or IP address blacklisted and is also illegal. Often, those who sell email lists typically harvest them from the internet using web scrapers or find them various data breach hauls. Many of these emails are spam traps and as soon as you send email to them, you are blacklisted.
Another reason not to buy a bunch of addresses is that these emails will be unqualified – they won’t be real prospects, interested in what you have to offer. They will be purely unsuspecting people who couldn’t care less about what you have to offer. Emailing them out of the blue will guarantee a short trip to the spam folder and not the huge sales you were hoping for.
### Use double opt-in when you subscribe your users
Having double opt-in for your subscribers is no longer a luxury or an optional extra. The new laws, particularly GDPR, clearly states that you should have proper consent from your customers to store their information and email them.
Double opt-in is a way you can achieve that by making sure that only people who want to hear from you actually end up on your list. Double opt-in means that a user is not properly subscribed to your mailing list until they click a link sent to their email address.
This achieves two things:
Some lazy subscribers don’t bother to unsubscribe using the correct link – they just report the email as spam and expect to never hear from you again. Little do they care that this can damage your reputation (and your ESP’s). But if a subscriber reports one of your emails as spam in the future, you have proof that they opted in properly and should not be liable.
ESPs typically record the time and date as well as the IP address and more info when someone opts into your list so there’s plenty of proof.
Also, by enabling some extra checkboxes for ‘agreeing to be contacted by email’ and ‘agreeing to the storage and use of personal info’, you should be covered from a GDPR point of view.
### Use personalisation
I believe the days of blank-emailing the same message to your entire list are quickly setting.
Most companies are happy to just add a ‘Newsletter subscription’ form to their website, start building a list and then maybe once a month, send a ‘newsletter’ to their subscribers with a few products or updates.
This is not necessarily bad but not very effective, especially when your goal is to eventually sell some products to these people.
If your users are not interested in your message after you’ve been emailing them a few times, they will stop opening them, stop clicking the links or let their finger wander over the unsubscribe button.
Just like a website or TV show, you need to keep the audience engaged. A great way to stimulate engagement is by sending personalised messages, specially tailored for each subscriber (or group thereof).
It may be more work but it pays off in the long run. Imagine having an e-commerce store selling books and just a general newsletter list for everyone. With so much choice of product, what are you going to send to your subscribers to keep them interested every week?
You could send a selection of books or offers from all of the major categories or a few titles in a promotion you may be running. Let’s suppose all of your subscribers were to open that email - is the content of that newsletter likely to appeal to everyone? Certainly not!
For such a varied audience, you need varied offerings. Here are some ways to figure out what everyone is interested in is to:
It’s never too late to start making use of personalisation and slowly learn more about your subscribers. This will ensure they only receive emails about topics they are interested in and it will result in increased open and click rates, increased sales and... keeping you away from that spam filter!
### Frequently check and clean your email list
One of the most important things you should do frequently is to clean up your email list. An email list can be ‘stale’ for a variety of reasons, most notably:
You have not sent an email in a long time. This can cause your subscribers to forget that they’ve signed up to receive your emails and might be startled when they get one after a long time. A quick reaction is to report it as spam. Bummer!
Some users sign up to your list to receive some incentive (a file download, for example) but they were never really interested in being contacted frequently, so therefore never open your emails or delete them right away. Email providers notice this behaviour and start sending your emails to the spam folder more and more often.
Some users might not see your emails, even if they did want to get them. One example is with subscribers with Gmail accounts – if they have the ‘smart’ inbox enabled, it might automatically categorise their inbound email for them and put all newsletters (or emails that look like newsletters) into the ‘Promotions’ or ’Updates’ or ‘Social media’ inbox – a place they may not look into that often. This leads to your emails just sitting there, unopened.
Other addresses could simply be abandoned. Some people get fed up with all that spam or unwanted emails that they completely abandon their email address and get a new one. Soon, you’re talking by yourself.
For all these reasons and more, it’s good practice to clean up your list from time to time – also called ‘email scrubbing’.
A few good signs of a list that needs cleaning are:
If people don’t open, click or engage with your emails, why keep them on your list? You only do yourself a disservice because this will hurt your reputation with your ESP and you’re losing money too.
ESPs charge you by the number of subscribers - the more you have, the more you pay. Why pay for subscribers that aren’t interested in what you have to say?
It’s up to you to decide whether an email subscriber is ‘stale’ and should be cleaned up. Apart from the usual reasons – such as repeated soft bounces or hard bounces – you should look at:
If these numbers are quite high (say 6 months or longer), then you should definitely clean up your list and remove them.
If your users do open emails but don’t click, you might want to try re-engaging with them by sending a re-confirmation email, asking whether they want to stay subscribed or not, or even sending them an incentive (an offer, voucher, etc.) to maybe try to bring them back.
However, if these don’t yield significant results, remove them from your list. If they want to re-subscribe, that’s fine. If not, you’ve saved some money and improved your statistics for the future, which helps improve your standing with ISPs, email service providers and spam filters.
### Check your email before sending it
There are a number of online tools that can verify your email address, domain and content before you actually send it. Some are free and some are paid. Here are some of them:
https://glockapps.com/spam-testing/
http://mailtester.com/
http://www.isnotspam.com/
### How to create animated STAMPING effect in Camtasia | Camtasia 2021 Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-animated-stamping-effect-in-camtasia-camtasia-2021-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:08:08.000Z
Creating an animated stamp in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) is possible with just a couple simple components. It also works in Camtasia 2020 and 2021\. In this tutorial I'm showing how you can create an animated stamping effect, transparent, with a grungy look, from a simple annotation and a few effects.
This component is then reusable, it can be added on your other projects, saved to library and, if you are using Camtasia 2021, I show a couple of cool tips to make it even more realistic and interesting, as well as more easily customisable. You can, of course use any font you want. This effect is not using graphics coming from external sources. The text written on the stamp is perfectly editable and I'll show you at the end how you can make it customizable in Camtasia 2021 using the quick properties and add it to library ready to reuse.
One thing that I want to do before I animate this is I want to make it look like a bit of grungy kind of thing where it's showing a bit of texture so it doesn't look so boring. The way we achieve this in Camtasia is by including a grungy bitmap with a grungy texture, and then applying an effect to it on top of the stamp text, so that it makes it look kind of random and grungy.
Then we use a track matte to applies a luminosity effect to whatever is underneath the bitmap track to apply the texture to the text so my stamp is looking very rusty, very sort of weird grungy edges.
Then we animate the whole thing, we add it to a group and the stamp is then animated. In Camtasia 2021 you have the motion blur effect for added realism.
Another trick that only works in Camtasia 2021 is then creating the reusable asset by adding custom properties to it, and then add it to your library, and every time you want to apply a stamping effect with a different text or different colours, you can use this self-contained asset.
I hope this was useful and if you enjoy my tutorials, feel free to subscribe to my YouTube channel. And if you have any questions about this video or about any of the other tutorials or Camtasia, please feel free to leave it in the comments and I will respond and try and help you if I can.
If you haven't upgraded to Camtasia 2021, here's a link to buy or upgrade.
\* This is an affiliate link, which helps support my work, at no extra cost to you. Thank you for your support!
### Create Video Wall from multiple synchronised videos in Camtasia | Multi-Video Wall
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/create-video-wall-multiple-synchronised-videos-camtasia-2021-multi-video-wall/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:15:35.000Z
You can create a video wall with synchronised videos and audio in Camtasia 2021\. In this Camtasia tutorial, I'm going to show you a way to create a multi-video grid like those video grids that have become very popular in lockdowns, during the pandemic, recording and assembling concerts, songs or bands, playing music or choir singing in sync over Zoom recordings or over the internet.
So if you have several recordings of people and need to put them together into a single video, arrange them on the screen, this is the tutorial for you. I'm also showing a lot of tips and tricks along the way to make your job easier and also to make the editing more performant and easier to work with in Camtasia.
I think this works also in 2020 and previous versions, but it's actually better in 2021 because it has some features that help you edit faster - such as proxy video, quick properties, improved group editing so you can dive into a group of clips.
In this tutorial, I have chosen both portrait and landscape videos, to illustrate the way you can have these types of videos and still able to assemble them together using cropping and snapping, even though they have different aspect ratios.
We create a grid to help arrange the videos and we turn it into a snapping, transparent, protected grid, to make our job easier at arranging everything. Since Camtasia doesn't have a grid of its own, this will serve us more purposes - arranging AND cleaning up the borders of all videos, all at once, at the end. Plus, the grid is customisable, you can change the colour, thickness, style, etc.
This Camtasia 2021 video grid tutorial is packed with tips for recording, arranging, cropping, framing your videos, as well as working with them in a more efficient and organised way.
If you haven't upgraded to Camtasia, would you consider supporting my work by [clicking on this link before you buy or upgrade?](https://cotovan.com/camtasia)\*
\* This is an affiliate link, which helps support my work, at no extra cost to you. Thank you for your support for this channel, so I can make more video tutorials!
### How to perform object motion tracking in Camtasia 2021 | Motion Tracking Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-perform-object-motion-tracking-in-camtasia-2021-motion-tracking-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:12:32.000Z
How to track an object in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia). Camtasia doesn't have motion tracking natively and I don't know if they're going to introduce that anytime soon, but I want to show you how you can actually still track an object to an acceptable level, depending on the movement you want to track, the length of your video and the desired precision.
It is a manual process, but if you're stuck or you are in a bind or you need to do a tracking on an object to follow something or to add blur to an area on your video that is moving, can still do it using plain old animations in Camtasia. in this video I am going to walk you through a few things that you can use to make this tracking job easier, some options and preferences to change to make it smoother, and then I'm going to show you how to track movement across a video clip with another object.
If you think about it, even in Adobe Premiere or other video editing programs that do have motion tracking, what happens is the tracking is the same - the object is moved frame by frame to a new location, and all that the tracking does is really just follow something, notices the shift in pixels to make sure that it's moving that object to the new coordinates. So ultimately, even these more professional video editors do end up generating key frames for every single frame.
What we will be doing in this Camtasia tutorial, we will be approximating the movement of the object from frame to frame, but depending on your movement, we can get away with not actually doing it frame by frame, because Camtasia can create all the frames in-between.
We need to change the default easing for the animation. By default Camtasia creates what is called easing, and it doesn't create linear easing - it creates a exponential in and out, so we are changing that to avoid having to change it for every little segment, and prevent our tracking object from stuttering during the motion.
After we create a general animation from the start and end of our tracked segment, we then proceed to cut it half way every time, until the movement becomes more accurate and tracks the object closer and closer.
Finally, we employ the use of the keyboard to really dive deep and create frame by frame keyframes where we need it to track the object more closely. Now, depending on the length of your video, obviously this may be too tedious to do so I am aware it may not work for all situations, but like I said, all of the other software does exactly the same, except it does it automatically.
This is one way to create manual object tracking in Camtasia. Obviously, you need to decide on a specific point to follow, and you have a tracking object tracking another object. So this can be useful if you need to maybe blur out some areas in your clip somewhere, you have some confidential information or something that cannot be seen like someone's face or something else that you want to track across a video clip. Depending on the length of that, just create your object and just keep moving it. And if you need to blur out some areas, you may not even need this much of, accuracy on tracking, you just need it to be roughly in the area it needs to be, and just keep moving it with the keys and create these frames automatically by enabling that easing that is linear.
I know Camtasia doesn't have tracking and it's not automatic, but if you really need to do it and incorporate this in your project, this is one way to do it. I hope you enjoyed this tutorial.
If you haven't upgraded to Camtasia 2021, here's a link to buy or upgrade.
\* This is an affiliate link, which helps support my work, at no extra cost to you. Thank you for your support!
### LOTTIE JSON animation files are now supported in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/lottie-json-animation-files-are-now-supported-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:16:12.000Z
Camtasia 2021 includes support for LOTTIE files, which are vector, scalable, animatable files, in JSON format.
You can download these types of files from websites such as LottieFiles.com and others. The initial LOTTIE format was created in Adobe AfterEffects, it had support from AirBnb to develop it and it is like SVG on steroids.
LOTTIE files are very small files, smaller than animated GIFs or MP4 files, because they are vector-based - just instructions and parameters. They are also very portable. Camtasia 2021 can import LOTTIE files and use them in your projects just like any other video clip, photo or asset. They can be scaled, animated, visual effects can be applied to them and so on.
Watch this video to see how you can import these files into Camtasia and maybe have a stab at creating your own?
If you have not yet upgraded to Camtasia 2021, this is a link to get a free trial version or buy/upgrade it.
LOTTIE files are a kind of JSON file that is animated, so they are vector, they are scalable and animated files. A little bit like SVG on steroids, because the instructions in the file actually describe the objects that go in there, the colours, the shapes and everything is vector, so it can be scaled at any size, without loss in quality and also it can be animated.
For a long a time, users of Camtasia have requested more advanced animation functions, and ability to animate maybe characters or other things in Camtasia, and Camtasia has always been a bit behind in terms of animation.
All the animation you can do in Camtasia is pretty much linear. You can't really do very complex stuff and this is a good and welcome new feature that was added in Camtasia 2021, the ability to import these LOTTIE files.
## So where can you get LOTTIE files?
Well, you can go to websites such as LottieFiles.com and you can see here there's a lot of animations that you can download.
There are free animations and also there is a kind of marketplace and some of them are paid, you can buy some of them, you can browse these, you can search and find something that maybe you can use in your project, like a Subscribe button or something like that, or maybe a nice animation. It's a little bit like animated clipart, if you want.
There is also software - open-source and paid - that you can use to create your own LOTTIE files.
Once you download and import them into Camtasia, you can treat LOTTIE animations just like any other clip on your timeline. If you want, you can group it, you can extend frames, you can cut it and make it shorter if you want, or you can apply visual effects to it.
And you can use this as a clipart, like an illustration and because they are vector files, they are scalable to any size. And also, it is transparent, so you can actually put it on top of other objects.
Camtasia 2021 introduces more functions. You can see other new features in Camtasia here.
### How to MERGE multiple videos without re-encoding using a free tool in just a minute
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-merge-multiple-videos-without-re-encoding-using-free-tool-just-minute/
Last updated: 2025-09-04T11:12:29.000Z
How to join two or more videos into a single video, using a free tool called Losslesscut. With Losslesscut you can combine videos into one, provided they have the same resolution, framerate and codec, without re-encoding. This is very fast and easy, it takes only a few seconds and I've used it to combine multiple videos in one, such as a long course that I edited as a multi-part course, and uploaded as a single video.
Losslesscut allows you to simply drag all your videos on top of the window, confirm the order you want them in the final video. It allows you to rearrange the videos and then you click 'Merge' and it will export a final video with all of them combined.
### Lottie File Animation Support in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/lottie-file-animation-support-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-18T12:11:25.000Z
[Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) added support for Lottie file animations, allowing you to import lightweight, scalable vector animations directly into your video projects. Lottie files are widely used in web and app design, and now you can use them in your videos too.
## What Are Lottie Files?
Lottie is an open-source animation format that renders After Effects animations in real time. They're:
- **Lightweight** — much smaller than GIFs or video files
- **Scalable** — vector-based, so they look sharp at any size
- **Transparent** — no background, perfect for overlaying on video
- **Free** — thousands available on [LottieFiles.com](https://lottiefiles.com/?ref=cotovan.com)
## How to Use Lottie Files in Camtasia
1. Download a **.json Lottie file** from LottieFiles.com or another source
2. In Camtasia, go to **File > Import > Media** and select your Lottie file
3. Drag the imported animation from the **Media Bin** onto the timeline
4. Resize and position it on the canvas using the **Properties panel**
5. The animation plays automatically — adjust timing by trimming the clip on the timeline
A Lottie animation (animated rocket) imported and displayed in Camtasia
## Use Cases
- **Animated icons** — loading spinners, checkmarks, arrows
- **Decorative elements** — confetti, sparkles, transitions
- **Character animations** — animated avatars and mascots
- **Infographics** — animated charts and data visualizations
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### Camtasia 2021 More than Doubled Transitions - Here They All Are
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-2021-more-than-doubled-transitions-here-they-all-are/
Last updated: 2026-02-18T12:16:15.000Z
[Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) includes a comprehensive library of transitions you can use between clips. This guide covers every transition category available, so you can pick the right one for your videos.
## Transition Categories
- **Fades** — classic fade to black, fade through white, and cross dissolve
- **Blurs** — zoom in/out blur, motion blur transitions
- **Solids** — growing squares, shrinking circles, and geometric wipes
- **3D** — 3D swing, cube rotate, page flip effects
- **Divisions** — rhombus dots, hexagons, and patterned reveals
- **Slides** — directional slides from any edge
- **Wipes** — linear and radial wipe transitions
The Zoom In blur transition demonstrated in Camtasia 2021 with a jellyfish photograph
## How to Apply Transitions
1. Open the **Transitions panel** from the left sidebar
2. Browse categories or search for a specific transition
3. **Drag and drop** a transition between two clips on the timeline
4. Adjust the **duration** by dragging the edges of the transition on the timeline
5. Preview the result in the canvas
## Tips for Using Transitions
- **Less is more** — stick to 1-2 transition styles per video for a professional look
- **Match the tone** — use subtle fades for corporate content, dynamic 3D effects for creative projects
- **Consistent duration** — keep transitions the same length throughout for visual consistency
- **Save favorites** — right-click transitions you use often and add them to Favorites for quick access
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### What's new in Camtasia 2021: All the new features, functions and improvements
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/whats-new-in-camtasia-2021-all-the-new-features-functions-and-improvements/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:12:24.000Z
As you probably know, Techsmith releases major versions of their software every year, around springtime, and this year is no exception: Camtasia 2021 is releasing in a few weeks.
There are quite a few new features, functions, improvements and workflow tweaks included in this version. In this article I'm walking through the major new features of Camtasia 2021, one by one.
Some of the features have been requested for a long time by the Camtasia users community, there are also some interface tweaks, new functions and optimisations.
## When will camtasia 2021 be released?
Camtasia 2021 releases on April 27th, 2021\. If you don't have Camtasia 2021, you can download a free trial version from this link, when it releases. If you're reading this before the launch date, the link will take you to the current Techsmith website, but if it's after April 27th, feel free to click it to download Camtasia 2021.
In my next few videos and articles, ahead of the launch, I will also be covering each of these new functions in detail, so please subscribe to my YouTube channel.
So, let's have a look at the most important new features in Camtasia 2021:
## 1\. Redesigned Startup Screen
Camtasia 2021 has a new, re-designed startup screen. It has pretty much the same options as the previous one, and you've got options such as: New project, New from template, New recording, and Open an existing project.
Obviously some learning resources and some help links that take you to the online help. I don't notice new functionality here, it's just better organised.
Camtasia 2021 sports a redesigned startup screen
## 2\. New screen recorder
The Camtasia 2021 screen recorder is different. It seems to have lost some of the options that you had with the previous recorder. All you have in the 2021 version are the four different panels. They are a bit larger and you've got the recording area that you can define, the camera turn ON and OFF, the Microphone and System Audio, which you can also enable from the Capture menu in the top-left corner of the window.
If you choose to record full screen, you have a very limited set of options here. You've got the widescreen and the HD versions and the full screen. And then, if you want to choose a region you can click Choose region, and then you can drag the region you want to capture.
If you wish to constrain the defined region to 16:9, you must hold down the Ctrl key and it will have that aspect ratio.
Re-designed screen recorder interface in Camtasia 2021 has lost some of the advanced options and menus
If you are disappointed that the new re-designed recorder is missing the options, settings and preferences menu, Techsmith have said they are working on bringing those back in the very near future. They have also bundled the old recorder along with the installation of Camtasia 2021\. Here's a video on how to use the old Camtasia recorder, in the 2021 version, while you wait:
## 3\. 75 new transitions built into Camtasia 2021
So when you start a new project and you go to Transitions on the sidebar. If you have some media loaded, you will see that you have much more transitions here. It's almost very hard to browse through them. I'll be making a video on my channel showing all of these transitions one by one.
In Camtasia you can filter them by transition type: 3D, blurs, divisions, fades and so on. So you can at least filter them down a bit. Apart from this, the new transitions work the same way as the older ones. You just drag them between two clips and there you go. So obviously you're going to have to explore these on your own.
I'll also record a video about the transitions soon and show case all of them on my YouTube channel, if you don't have Camtasia 2021, just so you can check them out.
Camtasia 2021 has 75 new video transitions you can choose from, organised by type
## 4\. Media Matte Effect
Another cool visual effect that was added in Camtasia 2021 is the media matte effect. So if go to Visual effects you will find Media Matte. Now the media matte works with another object that you place above your clip.
For example, if you go to an annotation and let's suppose I want to use maybe a shape like a star, you put it on top of your clip, on a separate track. Watch what happens now, if you wanted your video to be visible all the inside of this shape, maybe have a circle of video in a circle, like a talking head kind of thing, you had to do all these funny steps and effects with the track mattes.
You have to put the mask object on top of the other track and you needed to right-click on your track and change its Track Matte mode to Alpha or Alpha Invert or any of the other types, depending on the effect.
Well, using the Media Matte Visual Effect in Camtasia 2021, this is very easy to do now, and you don't have to change your tracks anymore.You just go to Visual effects, and you use media matte and you apply this to the object that you want to become a mask. So if you drag it on top of the star, you immediately see the effect was added.
The Media Matte Visual Effect in Camtasia 2021 adds flexibility to masks, without having to use Track Mattes
So now my video below is inside of this area because it is a matte, without affecting your tracks.
And you can move this object around, of course, and your mask will move with it. You can also move your bottom clip, if you want to move that one and the effect will still work. This media matte gives the same options, just like you used to have it in the Tracks Matte, where you right-clicked on the 'eye' icon: all these things are actually available now on the media matte property panel:
Media Matte effect options are similar to Track Mattes, with a few extra tweaks
So by default, you have the Alpha mode. You can change the intensity to turn it into a highlight, just like the usual highlight/spotlight annotation that you had in Camtasia, but also you can change this to be something else like alpha invert, which means it's going to cut out that part from the video underneath.
And it will just kind of hide it. Now. Alpha might be the most useful here because you can quickly mask objects inside of a shape.
This doesn't have to be just a shape. I have an image here with my logo on it and I can turn this into a mask for the clip below. So all I have to do is just go to visual effects, drag the media matte on top of this, and it becomes a mask:
You can use any image or object and apply the media matte effect to turn it into a mask
A clip with a media matte effect applied to it becomes a mask
My image happens to be a PNG with transparency and rounded corners. So you can see now that my image has become a mask, you know, you can play with this any way you like, but the idea is that you can quickly now mask objects using this track matte inside of a shape.
You can select everything and group it. You've got an element within a group with a mask applied to it that you don't have to worry about changing the track blending mode or the track matte itself. You're now free to move this group around and do whatever you like, the effect will be preserved inside of the group.
## 5\. Motion Blur for Animated Clips and Objects
Camtasia 2021 introduces motion blur. This is a visual effect you can add to a clip on your timeline when you animate it. It is an effect that depends on the animation, specifically the animation speed.
You can add this to any clip, for example an annotation with texts on it. When it's animated without this effect, it's moving, you can't see any blur on this. If you stop between the two end points of this animation, you can notice there is no motion blur here:
An annotation on the canvas without motion blur effect
...but if you go to visual effects, you have now this motion blur effect, you can use that on your clip. You don't use it on your animation, just on your clip. So it applies for the entire clip.
And notice now that if I'm in the middle of my animation, the item is blurred like that because it's moving. So you can see that it's moving.
The same annotation with motion blur applied, while it's moving during an animation.
So this gives it a bit of a realistic movement effect, and this works also for images.
This is a simple image that I'm moving from left to, right. If I have the motion blur effect to it, you will see it's blurred. The only difference you're going to have here, the option panel here is going to allow you to change the intensity of the blur effect. This is subject to the animation, so you may want to do this before you animate, because it adds a new animation key frame when you have an existing animation on that clip already. This means that the motion blur is a property you can animate.
If I'm the middle of the animation. I have the motion blur effect added to my object. I can put the intensity all the way up and then I will add an animation to my object and move it to the right, just to generate a movement. Now that I am in the middle of the animation, I have blur.
The motion blur effect in Camtasia 2021 is influenced by the speed of your animation. If you make the animation shorter, you will see that the blur effect intensifies. The faster you move your objects on screen, the longer the blur effect will be. So this will give you quite a nice, realistic effect.
Motion blur effect applied to an animated image in Camtasia 2021
## 6\. Proxy Videos Editing
Another cool feature that was requested by many users on the Camtasia forums was to be able to create proxy videos, mainly due to performance reasons. Most video editing software out there have this now, as video clips get larger and larger with ever-increasing resolutions and framerates.
So this has now been added to Camtasia. I have some clips here on my media bin, so I'm just going to drag all of them to my timeline. Some of these clips are 60 frames per second. So this is going to be very helpful for you when you're editing higher resolution videos or you have a lot of clips and Camtasia is kind of slow.
When I'm scrubbing through my timeline, my video is not smooth at all. In fact, it's very choppy and the more I go in it takes like a second for it to update. So this is obviously not a very good editing experience. So naturally you would like to have proxies to work with. The proxy is actually a lower resolution clip from your main clip that is linked right in the timeline.
And you can preview, you can edit, you're gonna apply effects and everything to it, and everything's gonna move smoothly, until you are ready to export, in which case it's going to export with the actual full resolution videos. So this is going to make your editing much faster. If you have clips on your timeline and you want to use the proxy feature, all you have to do is locate the videos in the media bin, select the video clip, you right-click on it and you say Proxy video > Create proxy video.
Create proxy videos in Camtasia 2021 to help with smoother editing, right in the media bin
And it's going to take a few seconds. It's actually surprisingly fast. You can see the progress bar on each clip as it creates it. It created a proxy, and now my proxy video has a little yellow circle next to it. And also you can see the same image on the timeline - it has that circle next to the icon of the video.
I'm going to make it proxy for all of these clips. So you can do a proxy for multiple clips at the same time. Right click and do the proxy. You're going to see it's generating these at the same time. The proxies have been generated and you don't have to modify your videos on the timeline. They will be automatically replaced and linked with the proxies and now scrubbing on my timeline is very, very fast. Everything is so smooth on my higher resolution screen. I can see that these clips are a little lower resolution than they are originally, obviously, but you cannot compare this editing experience where you're scrubbing really, really quickly.
So this was a major requirement from the users of Camtasia, because as you add more clips to your project, it becomes slower and slower and slower. And obviously, that's subject to your hard drive speed but this is a massive improvement.
And what I've noticed is that. If you have a clip that you've used in a previous Camtasia project and you've created proxies for it, then if you close it and create a new project, import the same clips from the hard drive location, not from the proxy location, but from the original folder and they already show that they have proxies generated.
So Camtasia remembers where it's saved those references to those proxies, and it keeps those proxies. If you need to reuse clips too, in another project, this is going to be a massive time saver. You bringing them in right as proxies, ready to go.
Videos in media bin that have generated proxies have an orange indicator
## 7\. Corner Rounding Effect
You can now apply corner rounding to your video clips or objects.
So you go to visual effects and you have corner rounding right here. You can drag this on top of your clip and in the right side in the properties, you can change the radius of this rounding and you can see now the rounding is. The rounding can be adjusted with the same value for all corners, or you can turn corners on or off to achieve different effects, you can only round two corners if you want, or just one or whichever you decide to round.
This rounding actually works as a mask. And if you have this clip on top of another clip, you will see that where there are rounded corners around it, you can see through. So you can place your video on top of another one and you can still keep the rounding going.
Clips and objects can have their corners rounded in Camtasia 2021
## 8\. Improved Groups Handling and Editing in Camtasia
Camtasia 2021 has improved grouping handling in previous versions of Camtasia. If you had a group of clips or objects on your timeline, like I do have here and I grouped them. If I want to edit the contents of this group, I could double click and the group would just pop open like this, but it would be anything it's in place.
Well, in Camtasia, 2021\. You can now have a better group editing. If I have these clips that are grouped here, I can double click and watch what happens if I go inside of the group. Now, the group opens all the way up here and I can edit the contents. And in fact, you have these tabs here now, and it shows you what group you're in and you can edit this group as its own timeline.
And. When you're done editing, you can go back to the main timeline. So you can see your group in here, but you can edit everything inside the group. So this is much more comfortable to work and it's easier to see. And also if you have markers here in here, they will keep, uh, stay. They will stay in this group, but also if you go to the main timeline and you move the group.
Yeah. The markers move with the group. So this is much better to edit because if you had a larger group, it could become very difficult to edit the things inside the group. If it was just opening on the timeline like this, but now with these tab groups, you can go inside and you can edit everything. And you know, that whatever you're doing in here only applies to the group.
It's like Camtasia creates another timeline. Inside the group. So it's just like almost editing another project inside of your main timeline. And if you have multiple groups, watch what happens. You can rename the groups here on the timeline, just like before this is group two. And if you go inside of this group, it opens a new tab.
So you can now switch between these tab groups to make changes. And you know, when you're done, you can close them. And you were back to your main timeline. So this is much more improved right now. So it makes it easy to kind of dial into a specific area of your project.
When you enter a group in Camtasia, you edit it in a nice new tabbed interface
## 9\. Resize the Track Headers
Another interface improvement that's been added to Camtasia 2021 is the ability to resize the track header right here in previous versions, like 2020, if you were trying to resize this area, or if you wanted to type a longer name in a track, you could not do that.
So this is my first track. I can't see everything in here because it's being cut off well in 2021, you can actually resize this. Header of the track. And although it doesn't let you resize it as much as you like, like make it really, really wide, at least it's an improvements. And you can type a couple of words in here, so you can actually see what you're doing in here. So this is great.
You can resize the track headers in your timeline in Camtasia 2021
## 10\. Add Exported Frame Shortcut Button
There is now a new button on the toolbar here to add exported frame to the timeline. So if you went before, if you went to any point in your timeline and you wanted to grab a snapshot of your current frame and inserted as an image, you can still do that by right. Clicking on the play head right here and selecting add sported frame.
And this is what it does. It just creates a snapshot of the current frame and it adds it here. But now this is much easier. If you just go here and you click on this photo icon, it does the same thing.
Add Exported Frame has its own dedicated button on the timeline toolbar
## 11\. Quick Properties are now exposed and editable
Another great improvement has been the ability to add properties, custom properties and quick properties to annotations and objects like that.
So even it works in groups. So in the previous versions of Camtasia, if you had an annotation with text inside of it, you have to double click to change the name of the text, the content of the annotation. And it was even worse. If you had to reuse this as a, as a reusable component here. It wasn't exposing the text.
So if you are grouping this into a group, you know, you had one group with two annotations here and you wanted to create a reusable asset. Even if you grouped it together like that, you could not change it in the properties here and the text was not available. So you always had to go in to double click, open the group, double click on that, and you get to the text.
Well, okay. In Camtasia 2021, this has been improved. And this is now possible to go to annotations any one of these annotations and you just drag them onto your timeline. Let's say we drag another one in here just as an example. And now if you group these together like this, it becomes a group with two annotations inside.
And notice the text in here. ABC, if you go. To the right panel in the properties. You can see now that you have quick properties. This is another panel here that allows you to change the content of this group separately without having to go into it. And even if you duplicate this, it will give you the ability to resize, to change and do whatever you want.
And the text here, look one, two, three. Four or five, six. So this gives you quick access to all of the text fields inside of the group and all of the annotations that you have even changing the color and the fonts and everything else you can do in here. And each one is now treated separately like that.
And what's more, you can actually click on this here, quick property. Editor to bring up this panel that allows you to even give labels to these properties. So this was something you could do before only on a very limited number of components. Usually those that came with Camtasia and they only exposed these fields and labels through a specific interface just for those ones, because they weren't, there was no interface for you to modify these, but now look, if I want to create one that says, you know, first name, And let's call it, uh, last name, you know, I'm creating labels for this and saving it.
So now these labels appear in the fields on the right side here. And if I'm creating this as a reusable component or reusable asset, I can add it to my library. And every time I bring this into my timeline, right. I have these fields available here for me to customize. So this obviously opens up the door for creating multiple assets.
You can redistribute to your team or share them for free or whatever with other users and what they will come pre-built with all these fields.
Quick Properties can be added to objects, annotations and can create fillable fields
## 12\. Default Timings for Placeholders
Placeholder timings can now be personalized in the settings. So in previous versions of Camtasia, if you wanted to add a placeholder, if you were creating a placeholder from a video clip that existed before.
So if I have this clip in here, and I right-click and say, I want to convert it to placeholder. The placeholder will have the length of that clip. If you inserted a new placeholder, somewhere on your timeline by pressing P, that would have a one minute default length. In Camtasia 2021 now you can right-click and add a placeholder again, but there is an option now in preferences to change the timing for new placeholders.
This is the only option that's been added here. And all of these options have been reordered to be alphabetical, but the placeholder was not available in previous version. So now, if I want to say all of my placeholders should be maybe 10 seconds long. I can change this option here, click.
Okay. And now if I press P it's going to make a placeholder that is 10 seconds long, only. So that is great. It could be a time-saving feature. If you work a lot with placeholders from scratch.
You can add default timings for Placeholders in Camtasia 2021, in the Preferences.
## 13\. Standalone Camtasia Projects in 2021
Improved project handling in Camtasia 2021 means that you can work better with your collaborators on projects. In the past, it was quite annoying because you had the project as one file in Camtasia, and then all of the assets were all over the place.
If you were recording in one folder and you brought in videos from another folder, The pendant files were kept separate. So you could easily lose your media and move the project. And, you know, if you needed to keep things together, you have to go to the file menu and export it as a zip project. So that was an extra operation, but in Camtasia 2021, there is now an option to save a project as a standalone project.
So what this means is if I go to the file menu and save as, I can choose a name for my project stand alone project, for example. And there is now an option here to create standalone project. If I tick this box, it will save my project. And now every media file that I add into my project, like, yeah, this video, for example, and another video and another video.
So I put them on my time. Right. And so on, it will be copied to this. Standalone project folder. It's actually a folder, although you don't see it like that on disk, if you go to this or do you see standalone project .tscproj, which is the extension for a Camtasia project. This is the project that I selected.
It's two kilobytes. And if I have added now media files in this. In this project and I put it all nighttime line, I click file and save again. This time I go back to this project folder. Now the size is 19 nine megabytes for a single file. It's actually not a file. It is a folder, as it says in here. So Camtasia kind of masks everything else inside of this folder and it makes it look like a project with that extension.
But inside of this folder, all of your media files are copied. So if I double click. I go inside and I see the project itself in here and all the media files and watch what happens if I add more media to this project. So I'm going to add a picture here to my project and click save, and you will see that the file.
Has arrived in this folder here. So when you save all of the dependent media is copied inside of that folder and it's kept together without you having to do anything. And this also works with assets that you bring in from your library. So for example, if you're worried that you might be using some assets from your library that you want to share with your colleagues, when you transfer that folder over.
Well, you have to do is look, you just drag that asset into your project. Maybe it's an intro. This one happens to have a sound files and animation and my logo on it and watch what happens if I save now and I go to that folder, all of my media is right here. My logos, my song file. It has all been copied in here.
So this is great. One thing that it doesn't do is when you remove some media from your project, it doesn't actually remove it from this folder here. So watch what happens. I go to media and I delete, I delete them from my timeline and I delete them from the media being, I say, delete unused media. Now I am not using anything and I'm saving this project file.
Save. If I go back, the media is still here, but at least it keeps everything in one folder without you having to worry about it. So this is great. If you. Have a little space on your main drive or you want to keep your projects organized in a single place. All you have to do is just save your project as a standalone project.
And then when you open that and work on it and you save it, it will take care of bringing in there, all of the dependent files. So this is great.
Standalone Projects in Camtasia 2021 will enable you to keep all assets and media in a single place, automatically
## 14\. Audio Level Meter
Another feature requested by some members of the Camtasia community has been to include an audio level meter. So you can have this now. If you play an audio file, you can see this meter in the bottom-right corner showing, and it's very easy to see whether your audio is clipping or not, if the level is too high or too low, and if you click on this, it will open a sidebar here with the audio meter showing.
Camtasia 2021 now has an audio level meter - a feature that was requested by many users
## 15\. Auto-normalize Audio on Individual Clips
Another improvement to audio editing has been that you now have an option to also normalize loudness on a clip basis in Camtasia 2021\. So if you have more audio tracks on your project, you can choose which ones to normalize and which ones not to. Previous versions did not have this. If I'm looking in Camtasia 2020, I have an audio clip selected, I only have Mix to mono and Gain controls, but in Camtasia 2021 if I click on a clip, I have also normalize loudness.
So this is an audio track with some music. I click on another clip that has audio, I also have that option here. Again, this option was only available on a per-project basis, it's still there now, if you go to project settings, you can still have that and that works project-wide but then you can also change this for every media on your timeline that has sound.
Auto-normalize loudness can be enabled now on each clip with audio, not just project-wide in Camtasia 2021
## 16\. Auto-emphasize Audio with Auto-Ducking
Another improvement to audio editing. When you're using multiple tracks that have sound on them, maybe you have one for speech and one for music, like a background track, you can now emphasize the speech automatically using one of the audio effects that's been added in countermeasure 2021\. If you go to audio effects, I have here two tracks.
One of them has a video tutorial. What I'm speaking on and the other one is an audio track, right? Watch what happens if I play both of them right now, you can't really understand the voice because the music is too loud. And just copy some of this text. That's random here. So what to do, this is the effect that's been added here in the audio effects section to emphasize the audio.
So this way you decide which track you care about the most that you need, you want to be heard like your narration or your voice. Okay. And you can automatically dock the other tracks when that track is playing. So if you have like a background track for music, you know, when you're talking, you can automatically duck that, uh, without reducing it completely.
So let me show you, I'm going to add the emphasize effect to my voice track here. And, um, let me just zoom in a bit, drag that here and now you can see that the effect was added and you have some options in the right side panel here, you can emphasize for how much, so that means to lower the volume of the other tracks, as opposed to the main track.
You can also have the ramping position on the outside for the duration or inside, which means the other tracks will lower volume depending on this option here. So. If you want the audio tracks, the music to kind of go a lower volume before you start talking, or before this actual other tracks comes in, you can keep it on the outside or if you want it to start right.
At the moment when you start speaking, you can put it on the inside. So by default, it's outside, you can round pen. You can customize the seconds, how long the duration of the ramp should be. So let's what happened. Let's see what happens here. If I'm playing just before my voice clips and just copy some of this text. So you notice that as soon as like a second before the clip came in, The volume of the music track was lowered. And let's go back to the end here. So you can adjust volume comes back up as soon as the clip ends. So this is much easier to edit like this because in the past, if you needed to achieve this effect, you had to toggle the audio points for all the other tracks. So you had to kind of double-click 4 times around the start and end of the clip and move the whole audio section down, to decrease the volume and create this ducking effect, but now you don't have to do this because this effect does it automatically when the clip that needs to be heard comes in.
And the other cool thing is if you move your clip further - earlier or later - this ducking effect goes with it, regardless of how many other tracks with audio you have playing.
So it doesn't matter where the clip is moved. The clip that needs to be heard best just moves independently and everything else has the volume doc. Before this one starts, you can obviously, you know, change the ramping and ramp out to be longer or shorter. You can also change the volume difference between the surrounding media and the main volume.
The ducking values can be from 0 to 100%, with 0 meaning no ducking at all, and 100% complete silencing of all the other tracks. 80% is the default in Camtasia.
I can see many uses for this. This is a really cool feature.
Auto-emphasize audio with auto-ducking allows you to have an audio play clearly while other audio clips have lowered volume
## 17\. Move track and contents up or down
In previous versions of Camtasia, you could not move a track up or down on the timeline (and also its contents). If you wanted to make room for another track, you had to either insert a track or select all the content and move it to another track.
In Camtasia 2021, you can now move a track up or down as you wish, and its contents will be moved also.
Just right-click on the track header for the track you want to move and select Move > Up / Down:
You can now move tracks and their contents up or down on the timeline in Camtasia 2021
## 18\. Enable Solo Track
If you have a lot of tracks and need to edit or see an isolated track while all the other tracks are hidden, you can now enable Solo Track with one right-click on the track header for the track you want. This will show a green background around the eye icon on the track and make all other tracks invisible. It will also now allow you to move or edit anything on the other tracks, although it doesn't actually lock them.
This shows you just that one 'solo' track in the canvas, allowing you to edit with it isolated like that.
You can even enable more than one 'solo' track and only those are shown and editable.
Solo track allows you to isolate and only display and edit one track, hiding and disabling all the others
## 19\. Save colours for use later
If you need to use the same colour in more places in your project, to avoid having to use the colour picker or copy and pasting, now you can choose a colour in any colour picker and then add it to 'My colours'. This way, you can reuse them from those custom swatches:
You can save colours for later use in your project
## 20\. LOTTIE file support
Camtasia 2021 introduces support for LOTTIE files. This is a file format based on the JSON standard, that includes instructions on how to design graphics - a little bit like clipart, or SVG on steroids - but that can also be animated. These files are very small and now Camtasia supports importing them, playing around with them, animating them, just like any other clip in your timeline.
So these are some of the new features and improvements added in Camtasia 2021\. Don't forget, it releases officially on the 27th of April 2021 and you will be able to check it out by downloading a free trial using this link (when it is available).
## Conclusion
As a general feel, I found Camtasia much more responsive, it works faster and switches between tasks and contexts much smoother than the previous version, even while using a longer project with many clips in it. Your experience may differ, I assume it's up to your computer's configuration and performance also.
I'd love to hear your opinion on whether it's worth upgrading to this new version of Camtasia. Let me know what you think in the comments and if you have any questions, feel free to add them and I will reply as soon as possible.
## How to upgrade Camtasia?
There are a couple ways to upgrade to Camtasia, one is obviously to go and buy it from Techsmith or upgrade using the maintenance plan, which is much lower in price but it gives you free updates for a year, in case Techsmith releases new versions, and it costs less than a full purchase of the software. You can get the maintenance plan at the same time as you buy your software, during checkout, or after. You can then get the latest versions as soon as they release, exclusive training and premium support.
Thank you for reading this far, if this article was useful, Like it, Share it and please subscribe to my YouTube channel for more Camtasia videos, tutorials in the next weeks as the launch date approaches.
Thank you for your time.
### How to stabilize video in Adobe Premiere | Video Stabilisation
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-stabilize-video-in-adobe-premiere-video-stabilisation/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T09:44:33.000Z
Watch this tutorial for beginners on how you can stabilize a video and make it usable, fix shakiness and have your videoclip run smoothly.
In Adobe Premiere Pro you need to apply the effect called 'Warp Stabilizer' to the clip you want to stabilise.
You find this effect in the 'Distort' group, under the Video Effects folder of the Effects panel.
This is a CPU-intensive effect, it doesn't work in real-time. It first needs to analyse your video to determine how the frames are 'shaky' and correct that:
### Separate audio from video in Adobe Premiere | Premiere Pro Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/separate-audio-from-video-in-adobe-premiere-premiere-pro-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:16:54.000Z
How do you separate audio from video in a clip in Adobe Premiere? When you edit a sequence and you import a video clip that has audio but you don't want to use the audio, this is how you separate audio from video in Adobe Premiere Pro.
### How to add transitions between video clips in Adobe Premiere Pro
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-transitions-between-video-clips-in-adobe-premiere-pro/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:17:27.000Z
Quick tutorial on how to add transitions between clips on the timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro. This tutorial shows how to add an effect of 'Cross Disolve' but you can apply any transition and effect that exists in the Effects panel from Premiere.
I'm also showing how you can avoid the 'repeated frames' error that you receive when you try to add a transition to two videoclips.
### Import image sequence into Adobe Premiere as a clip | Premiere Pro Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/import-image-sequence-into-adobe-premiere-as-a-clip-premiere-pro-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:17:59.000Z
How to import an image sequence and convert it to a videoclip in Adobe Premiere? If you have a sequence of images (jpg, png, etc.) of an animation, maybe it's hand-drawn or 3D rendered frame by frame, you can import the image sequence to video with Premiere and convert it to a videoclip you can edit in your sequences.
All you need is to have the images in order with a sequence number each and then use this tutorial to learn how to convert the image sequence to a video clip.
### How to reverse video in ShotCut Free Editor | Play video backwards tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-reverse-video-shotcut-free-editor-play-video-backwards-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-11-11T19:21:02.000Z
If you want to make a video play in reverse in ShotCut editor, it is very simple, and in with this tutorial, you can learn how to do that and also how to separate or mute the audio, or to change the quality of the video conversion.
Step 1: Import your video
First, add your video to the timeline and click to select it:
Import the video you want to reverse on the Shotcut timeline and click it
Step 2: With the video selected, click on “Properties” in the top bar, to bring up the properties panel on the left.
Click Properties on the top bar, while you have the clip selected
Step 3: In this new panel, a “Reverse” function should appear near the bottom. If you don’t see this function, to make the video play backwards, it could be because you have an older version, and this function can be found hidden in the menu with the three lines:
The Reverse function in Shotcut is at the bottom of the properties for the clip
Clicking “Reverse” will bring up a panel with a slider where you can choose the quality of the conversion. If you intend to edit the video further, it may be best to move the slider towards “best.”
As soon as you finish, you will be able to save the new reversed video on your hard drive. In the right panel, a conversion process will begin and the original video will be replaced with the reversed video.
Choosing the conversion quality of the reversed clip in Shotcut
By default, this function reverses both audio and video, so if you don’t want that, or if you want the video to be muted, you can separate audio from video by right-clicking on the video on the timeline and clicking “Detach audio.” Now, you can remove the audio or change it for something else.
Alternatively, you can mute the audio by adding a filter in the “filters” menu on the top bar while the video is selected, and picking from the list “Mute.” Now the video is silent.
Once you start the conversion, a job is added in the Jobs panel in Shotcut
For more video editing tutorials, check out recommendations below or visit my [YouTube channel](https://cotovan.com/youtube).
### How to Create Photo Slideshows with Music in Shotcut (Free Video Editor)
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-photo-slideshows-with-music-in-shotcut-free-video-editor/
Last updated: 2026-02-24T07:21:52.000Z
[Shotcut](https://shotcut.org/?ref=cotovan.com) includes a built-in Slideshow Generator that turns a folder of photos into a fully-transitioned slideshow in seconds. Combined with an audio track for background music, you can create polished slideshows without any manual timeline editing.
## Importing Photos into the Playlist
Open Shotcut and switch to the **Playlist** view. Drag all your photos into the Playlist panel — they'll appear as thumbnails. You can reorder them by dragging within the Playlist to set the sequence. Shotcut accepts JPG, PNG, and other common image formats.
Import your photos into the Playlist panel — drag to reorder the sequence
## Using the Slideshow Generator
With your photos in the Playlist, go to **Playlist menu → Slideshow Generator** (or the grid icon menu). This opens a dialog with several settings:
- **Clip Duration** — how long each photo displays (default 5 seconds)
- **Aspect Ratio Conversion** — options like Crop Centre, Pad Black, or Stretch
- **Zoom Effect** — adds a subtle Ken Burns-style zoom (percentage controls the amount)
- **Transition Duration** — length of the dissolve between photos
- **Transition Type** — Dissolve is the most common choice
- **Transition Softness** — controls how smooth the dissolve appears
The Slideshow Generator dialog — configure duration, transitions, and zoom effects before generating
Click **OK** and Shotcut instantly creates the entire slideshow on the timeline with all transitions placed automatically.
## Adding Background Music
To add music, open an audio file and add it to the **A1** audio track on the timeline. Trim the audio to match the slideshow length, or let it fade out at the end. You can add a fade-out by selecting the audio clip and applying an audio fade filter.
The completed slideshow — photos with transitions on V1 and background music on A1
## Exporting the Slideshow
When everything looks right, go to **Export**, choose a preset (YouTube or H.264 work well), and click **Export File**. Shotcut renders the slideshow as a standard video file you can share or upload.
The entire process — from importing photos to having a finished video — takes under a minute for a basic slideshow. For more control, you can always adjust individual clips on the timeline after the generator has done the initial layout.
### How to Slice and Cut Shapes in Affinity Designer Using the Node Tool
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-slice-and-cut-shapes-in-affinity-designer-using-the-node-tool/
Last updated: 2026-02-25T18:11:07.000Z
Slicing a shape into separate pieces in Affinity Designer isn't as obvious as in some other vector tools. The Divide operation in the geometry toolbar doesn't split a single shape the way you might expect. Instead, you can use the **Node tool** with the **Break Curve** action to cut shapes apart manually.
## Converting to Curves
Start with a shape — a square, for example. Right-click and select **Convert to Curves** (or use the toolbar button). This turns the shape into an editable path with individual nodes at each corner.
## Adding a Diagonal Cut Point
Select the **Node tool** (A), then click on one of the edges where you want the cut to start. This adds a new node at that position. For a diagonal slice through a square, you'll need nodes at two opposing corners — these already exist if you're cutting corner to corner.
## Breaking the Curve
Select the node where you want to make the cut. In the Node tool's action bar at the top, click **Break Curve**. This splits the path at that point, creating two overlapping endpoints where one node used to be. Repeat at the second cut point.
Use the Break Curve action in the Node tool toolbar to split the path at the selected node
## Closing the Two Halves
After breaking both points, you have an open path. Select the two endpoints of one half, then click **Close Curve** in the action bar. This closes the shape into a triangle. Repeat for the other half.
You now have two independent, closed shapes that you can colour, move, and transform separately.
The finished result: a square sliced into two independent triangles that can be styled and moved separately
This technique works for any shape and any cut direction. It's particularly useful when the Divide geometry operation doesn't produce the result you need, since Break Curve gives you precise control over exactly where the cut happens.
### Create Art Portfolio for University in Adobe InDesign (Part 1): INTRODUCTION to InDesign Course
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/create-art-portfolio-for-university-in-adobe-indesign-part-1-introduction-to-indesign-course/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:18:42.000Z
In this series I show how you can create an Art Portfolio in Adobe InDesign. This mini-series is addressed to students or artists who need to create an artwork portfolio to present for their application at University or to show their work to teachers, potential course masters, and so on.
The course will have more parts, each episode dealing with one phase of the project. I will not go into too much detail and will not aim to cover all the tools available in InDesign. We will simply focus on the tools and processes to 'get the job done' and help you get your portfolio done in as short time as possible.
### This is Part 1: Introduction and laying the groundwork
I would like to start a series of videos or maybe an entire course on InDesign with a special emphasis on creating an art portfolio. Recently I've had to create one portfolio like this because my daughter is hoping to study concept art at university. So during the application process, It was necessary to create a portfolio of her artwork - created until now in secondary school and A-level work.
And then we had to organize all these artworks into a portfolio to present to universities as part of the application process and due to this year's COVID situation, a lot of the application has happened online anyway, and the portfolio had to be sent in digitally. And also, if there was an interview that was usually, you know, online.
So we had to prepare the portfolio in a nice way so that it was easy to browse, but it also shows the best of her work.
So let me show you what we will achieve in this course or a tutorial series:
This is the portfolio, of course, a title page with one of the preferred or her favorite elements, which is a sunflower and her name of course, and 2020.
And then we had one page that shows a summary of all the works that are included in the portfolio. This portfolio is in A3 format, but when you send it in digitally, it doesn't really matter what size it is, really, unless you're going to print this or the university has specific requirements.
So we created an A3 format because we also wanted to keep the option of being able to print this if we wanted to. And we indeed printed it online somewhere, we had it sent to us and it looks gorgeous. So in this course, I'm going to walk through the basic functionality of Adobe InDesign.
If you don't have InDesign, you can download the fully-functional trial version. from Adobe. So we will be using the latest version at the time of writing, which is going to be InDesign 2020, part of Creative Cloud. You can get, I think, a cheaper version for students or you can subscribe for just one month and do your portfolio, f the trial version is not enough for you. And I know this time of year, all the students applying for art courses at universities, have to prepare the portfolio. So this tutorial is going to be not necessarily rushed, but it's going to be just using the functions in InDesign that we need to create this portfolio.
We're not going to go into very much detail and systematically take InDesign and teach all of the functions in it, exhaustively. We are just going to focus on the main things we need to use from InDesign to create this particular type of portfolio. And I'm pretty sure most of the portfolios out there are going to be similar to this.
You're going to have perhaps title category pages, perhaps with personal projects and then you are going to have each big art piece on a page, maybe with a little description next to it, maybe a picture to show the scale and just a simple design to present during your application process.
So if this is what you're trying to do now, and you don't know where to turn, this course is for you. Really, I'm not going to spend, like I said, a lot of time detailing all of the functions and just going to help you get the job done.
This is my daughter's portfolio.
You can see the type of work she's doing - sketches, paintings, etc. We even took pictures of her notebook and sketchbooks. So we used some of those because some of the artwork you need to present includes perhaps some of the sketches you're doing and study sheets and all that stuff.
She's actually gone and done a bit of comic books, so you have a few pages showing your sketches and then describing them - a bit of text, describing what you're looking at and then showing the finished product.
So we're going to use this as a way to learn how to make one from scratch.
I hope this course or series of tutorials is going to be useful to you. And if you have any questions, just leave them in the comments for every part. You can also find links to her online portfolio and also links to get Adobe InDesign. If you want to get a trial version of this. So you can use this tutorial and just follow along and build your portfolio.
In the end, we will export the portfolio. So we will cover, these are the topics we will cover in this course. First of all, we will look at InDesign, create a new document.
Prepare the document, prepare the files that are going to go in all the artwork. So it's very important to think about the stuff you're going to put in just before you even start organize your content. This is one of the main main things before you even go into InDesign. It's important that you have all of your artwork digitized.
So we will look at how to do that. And also we will look at laying out the page, importing the graphics, creating the graphic boxes, putting all that stuff on the page and, you know, changing text font, creating the layout, managing pages, all of these things. To end up with a finished product, your finished portfolio, and then exporting that portfolio digitally, making it so that you can send it to, to a university for a, you know, application, or if you want to print it, export it for print so you can print it online and then exporting it as a reduced file.
So that you can maybe even email it to someone or send it using one of the online transfer services. So the file isn't huge. And, you know, depending on how you scan or you photograph your content, the files could be quite huge. So we will be creating a finished. PDF file with your entire portfolio, ready to send to a university or application process or teachers or whatever.
## How we started on the portfolio
So during this process, what we did was we first started with the artwork. So let me show you. What we did just to start. So you can see here, these are all of the folders with all of the artwork that we had. So one thing that I would like to emphasize is the better your content is going in. The better your images are the better your scans or photos are the better your portfolio is going to look.
So what we did was because a lot of Diana's works were quite big. I mean, A2, A1 pieces. They were impossible to scan using a conventional desktop computer scanner. So we had to take pictures of them. What we did was for the ones that we could, we of course scanned using a scanner, but then the ones that were too large for a scanner, we had to take pictures of.
So this is probably one of the tricky parts because we had to take many pictures of them. And of course you can take pictures using your phone. As you know, so you have to have a very good phone to take pictures, or you could ask a friend with a DSLR camera to take a picture like a Canon or Sony or whatever. Take pictures of your artwork in a well lit environment.
So I, I'm not going to be able to show you how we took the pictures. We basically took the pictures in our kitchen. We, we put the lights on, we bought two lights on a stand and. We pointed those at the artwork. And then we took pictures. So let me show you this is one of the pieces or this one. So you can see, we created folders here with all of the different shooting sessions.
So this this artwork, for example, you can see, we took pictures of the artwork going from the top to the bottom. And then finally we created a stitch using Photoshop. So I'm going to show you how to stitch together, like a puzzle pieces of the artwork that you take pictures of. So, because we couldn't put the scanner to use for this P this, these artworks, we had to take pictures of it.
So this is the full size at work. If I open this really quick, this is the the picture, the, the full size image, but then we. Started, we took a full, full size pictures of it. And then we took in from top to bottom, we took a few from top to bottom, like four shots from the top, the middle sort of lowest and the bottom.
And then we stitch those together. Then we took another series just to make sure. That my hand wasn't because I was holding my DSLR, my camera in my hand and just going, shoot, shoot, shoot. Going up from the top to the bottom. Sometimes your, your hand moves or your, you know, shaking and stuff like that.
Maybe shaky you, you get one of the shots. If one of the shots is shaky, then your picture is going to be blurry. Even if you stitch it together. One part of that picture is going to be blurry. So yeah. It's quite important to have like a one day of shooting. If you can't hire, obviously you're a student, you can't really spend money hiring a professional photographer, which we couldn't do.
So I had to take the pictures. We just took a one day and put, took all the artwork, all the photos, all the pictures together, all of the paintings. And we shot all of them in slices. And then we stitched them together in Photoshop, which was another day of work. So as you can see, there's a lot of work involved in just preparing your artwork.
Now, if you're happy, your artwork isn't that large. If your artwork is up to maybe a three format, you can find scanners that scan a three. And that is obviously better because you can scan your artwork, maybe 300 to 600 DPI. And of course, you're going to end up with very good quality because you don't have to worry about blurriness, stitching them together.
You don't have to worry about camera lighting and all of that because the scanner does all of that for you. But if you don't, if you, if your artwork is much larger than that, then you're going to have to photograph it. So the advice I have is find a very well lit room. Create a little mini studio. If you can get an easel and place the picture on the easel and then take photos of it and do not be, I mean, digital photos take as many as you need.
Take a one full side, take a few full sized pictures from afar, then come closer and take chunks of it. Make sure you don't miss one of the portions and then save those as well. And then you can stitch them in Photoshop. And I'm going to show you how that is done. And that you can see here, we have six versions of each photo, four versions, or, you know, so when we were happy with that, so like this one, for example, we took six different types of photos for it.
We took the full size one and then we took top to bottom and then we took another one top to bottom, and then we started doing half and half on the top and the middle, and then we took more and then. Finally, we took another one because I was not happy with it. So in the end I stitched all of these together and I ended up with one good version.
So if I'm showing you this, now you can see these are the different components, different slices. And then if I show you the final stage, this was the final stitch that we liked the best in terms of lighting and in terms of you know, sharpness. So if I zoom in on this one, In Photoshop here, you can see it's quite quite high resolution.
You can see the brush strokes here. So if I zoom into this is a hundred percent, so this is the real size of this photo of this art work. You can notice that here on the side, it is a little blurry. So even this one was not. A hundred percent perfect. If you don't have a professional studio and a professional photographer, then you're going to have to do a best effort thing.
So this is what we have ended up with. This is the version we used in the final work and it turns out it was quite good. I mean, this painting was, I believe. A one size and it ended up being printed on an 83 sheet of paper, pretty much half the sheet. It's almost a April or size. So this was the version we used, so it looked quite good.
And when we printed it and the print arrived, it was quite good. It looked very sharp. Very nice. Just want to emphasize before you start. It's quite important that you have your content digitized, your artwork digitized. And even if you're not going to use all of them, digitize all of them, because then it's very easy to use them online as well.
If you want to create an online portfolio and also incorporate them in your artwork portfolio, this is the first advice digitize your content. And then the second piece of advice is before we start plan out your content, these are all the artworks that we are using in this portfolio. She had much more than this, but of course we couldn't use all of them because then whoever's looking at your portfolio might be bored.
So you really want to be using the best works. The best artwork that represents your, your style, your particular style, and also the artwork is that are going to be part of your portfolio should reflect the sort of the course you're trying to apply for, to show. That is relevant to that course. So in this case, Diana wants to study character design and concept art movies or, or computer games and all of that.
So then she does have a lot of flowers of course, from her previous years. But then the actual work that she really wanted to emphasize was these comics, this character development, and this person that she designed, this character, she designed and uses it in a. In a comic, of course we featured and explained a lot of the story behind this character.
And of course you're showing the other work to just show the, sort of the range of. Well, if you can do, but of course you want to show the stuff that you want to study. I don't want to give you this advice so much because of course, I'm sure you have received plenty of advice from your teachers and from the application websites for the particular University.
So let's dive into in design how to create an art portfolio using InDesign. And I'm not saying InDesign is the only tool you can create this with. You can use other tools and some of them are even free. Personally. I like to use InDesign because it's, it's a professional tool that has all of the functionality that I need.
I also like to use Xara Designer Pro for graphics, and that one is also able to do layout and print quality graphics. So. Let's start. This has been a very long introduction. I'm sorry for that. I'm just trying to lay the groundwork for what's coming. If you enjoy these tutorials or you find them useful, share them with your friends, subscribe to my channel like it, and comment.
If you have any questions, let me know. And I'm very happy to create a specific video showing a specific problem or solution. If you find that I haven't covered anything here, I may have glossed over some stuff that, you know, I should have maybe covered more in depth. So thank you for watching again, see you on the next one.
For all the videos in this Adobe InDesign mini-course, see this YouTube playlist on my channel:
Artwork Portfolio Course
### Creating frame by frame animations and animated GIFs in Xara Designer Pro
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/creating-frame-by-frame-animations-and-animated-gifs-in-xara-designer-pro/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:21:08.000Z
It's possible to create frame by frame animations and export GIF or Flash animations in Xara Designer Pro. It works in older versions also.
You can design frame by frame graphics and change the animation speed and duration of each frame. You can then export and use these on your website or graphics projects, in GIF or Flash format.
If you don't have Xara yet, you can download a fully-functional free trial here
More [Xara tutorials](https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PL5dqU8ndfeoh3EC2vyCxaN1sLE78QqYx8&ref=cotovan.com) on my YouTube channel!
### Camtasia Interface Overview | Step by step Camtasia tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-interface-overview-step-by-step-camtasia-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:21:52.000Z
The first part in my course on Camtasia, is an overview of the interface, I'm showing where everything is, how the interface of Camtasia is organised and what each section is for. In the following tutorials, I'll go through every function of Techsmith's Camtasia - Screen recording software and we will explore each little trick.
Try Camtasia for [free here](https://cotovan.com/camtasia).
### Working with the timeline in Camtasia | Editing clips in a Camtasia project | Camtasia Tutorial
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-the-timeline-in-camtasia-editing-clips-in-a-camtasia-project-camtasia-tutorial/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:22:28.000Z
In this tutorial we go through the timeline editing in a [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) project: how to add clips, move them around, cut them, slice them, group and ungroup them and a couple shortcuts for navigating the timeline when editing a project. We show how to add tracks, how to expand and collapse groups of clips to make editing complex projects easier.
### How to turn hyphenation ON/OFF in Adobe InDesign
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-turn-hyphenation-onoff-in-adobe-indesign/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:23:27.000Z
Find out how to turn off (or on) automatic hyphenation on your text in your Adobe InDesign documents. Hyphenation is on by default, but you may not want to use it. You can turn hyphenation ON/OFF in InDesign at paragraph-level, but that can create a lot of manual work. You can also control hyphenation throughout your document by defining paragraph styles and specifying your hyphenation options there. Then they will apply everywhere.
### How to Create 3D Objects and Text in Xara Designer Pro X
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-3d-objects-and-text-in-xara-designer-pro-x/
Last updated: 2026-02-22T18:03:14.000Z
Xara Designer Pro X isn't a full 3D program, but it includes a surprisingly capable 3D extrusion tool that lets you create 3D shapes and text without leaving the application. If you need a quick 3D effect for a logo, heading, or graphic element, this tool handles it in seconds.
## Finding the 3D Tool
The 3D tool is grouped with the Mold and Bevel tools in the left toolbar. Hold your mouse on the tool group (look for the small flyout arrows) and select **3D Tool**. The cursor changes to a crosshair with a small 3D cube icon.
## Applying the 3D Effect
Create any shape — a star, rectangle, circle, or custom path. Select it, switch to the 3D tool, and simply **click and drag** on the object. It instantly transforms from a flat shape into a 3D extruded object with depth, glossiness, and natural light/shadow.
A flat star shape transformed into a 3D object — just select the shape and drag with the 3D tool
Drag the object to rotate it in space — left, right, up, down. The toolbar provides numeric control over the **extrude depth** (slider goes to 250, but you can type higher values like 450) and the viewing angle.
## Controlling the Lights
Click the **Light** button in the toolbar to reveal the light sources — small arrow icons positioned around the object. Each light can be independently controlled:
- **Reposition a light** by clicking and dragging it around the object. Drag farther from the object for finer adjustments.
- **Change light color** by dragging a color from the palette directly onto a light source. The cursor changes to indicate you're coloring the light.
- Whichever face of the 3D object points toward a colored light takes on that light's color.
Drag colors from the palette onto light sources — each light colors the face it points at
## Bevel and Edge Options
A secondary dropdown in the toolbar provides bevel controls for the extrusion edges:
- **Rounded** — smooth, soft edges
- **45-degree bevel** — angled edges for a sharper look
- **Square-faced** — flat, geometric edges
Each bevel type gives a distinctly different character to the extrusion. Experiment with different combinations of depth and bevel to find the right look.
## 3D Text
The same tool works on text. Type your text, select it, switch to the 3D tool, and drag. All the same controls apply — lighting, depth, bevel types, rotation.
The 3D tool works on text too — all the same lighting and bevel controls apply
You can also change the **corner type** for text — pointy corners for sharp lettering or rounded corners for a softer feel.
### Tips for Using 3D in Xara
- The 3D tool has been in Xara since version 1.2 — much of the rendering code is in assembly language, making it very fast for real-time visualization
- Clicking on the front face rotates the object; clicking on the side changes the extrusion depth — Xara anticipates what you want to adjust
- Modern design trends favor flat design, so use 3D effects sparingly and intentionally
### How to speed up, protect and secure your website with CloudFlare - for free!
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-speed-up-protect-secure-your-website-with-cloudflare-free/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:53:43.000Z
CloudFlare is not a very new player in the Content Delivery Network (CDN) game, but they do lots of things well and brag that thay have more customers than Akamai and Amazon CloudFront combined (a 35% market share they say, as of March 2018, protecting 7,000,000 websites)! That is no small claim!
I suppose a contributing factor to that is that they offer a basic set of services for free and offer upgrades for more advanced features. Nonethless, for a small or start-up website, the basic and free services are quite useful and help introduce you to the wonderful world of CDN.
This tutorial will show you how you can quickly set up CloudFlare and put it in front of your website, in order to protect it, speed it up, secure it with a free SSL certificate and more.
## Just what is CloudFlare anyway?
The name that stuck for CloudFlare so far seems to be 'Next Generation CDN' - but it is more than 'just' a Content Delivery Network. Even in the basic (free) plan they offer a great set of services aimed at accellerating and protecting your website and its visitors from internet threats.
CloudFlare works by taking over your website's DNS and routing all incoming requests through their network. They don't host your website for you, but just protect it and for the most part, you don't have to make any changes to your website to activate it!
If you activate CloudFlare for your website and configure the DNS properly, the visitors to your website (and more importantly, attackers) will not be able to see and connect to your server's IP directly, as CloudFlare sits in front of it and routes requests to your site as if it were hosted on CloudFlare 's servers. This prevents attackers from, for example, running a DDoS attack on your website that hit your server directly.
## Will I have to move my website?
Not at all! Cloudflare is not a hosting service, and you don't have to make any changes to your current website or your hosting. The migration to CloudFlare is just a nameserver change for your domain and then you manage your DNS on CloudFlare's platform instead of the one you have now (for example GoDaddy).
Here are some of the main headlines with services you can activate from the CloudFlare dashboard:
In short, some of the benefits and features that CloudFlare offers are:
### Protects your website and hides your real server from attackers
By taking over your Domain Name Service (DNS), Cloudflare is able to hide your real server's IP address so that attackers can't target it directly. All traffic goes through Cloudflare's network and using intelligent analysis and rules, it is able to identify if a certain visitor is a regular person, an attacker, a bot, and take action based on that information.
### Installs, maintains and updates a free SSL certificate for your website
Cloudflare will activate a free universal SSL certificate on your website and keep it updated automatically. This means that all traffic between your website and your visitors will be securely encrypted and protected from snooping - even without you having to install and maintain a SSL certificate on your own server.
Last year, Google started to rank websites that use SSL certificates a little higher and now considers 'https' to be the standard, instead of http. CloudFlare's free SSL certificate achieves just that and it's absolutely pain - and cost - free! Just make sure you change your website's root URL to use https:// instead of http:// for all requests, after you activate CloudFlare.
### Protects website against attacks by limiting or challenging suspicious visitors
CloudFlare is able to identify suspicious traffic or IP addresses with a bad reputation and, depending on your selection, ask visitors to confirm they are legitimate users and not bots by presenting a challenge page or prevent them from accessing your website for a custom time period. You can adjust your security level and even switch to a very tight mode called 'I'm under attack!'. It allows you to also whitelis or blacklist various IPs (using the IP firewall) or set rules for a Web Application Firewall that checks the integrity of the browser headers and more.
### Accelerates traffic and speeds it up by employing caching
CloudFlare automatically identifies content from your website that can be cached on their own network and serve that faster to your visitors from 'edge' locations. These are servers in Cloudflare's network spread around the world that store your static content, enabling them to serve it to your customers from the closest location to them - therefore speeding up access and saving you bandwidth.
You can see how many requests have been served from the cache and how much bandwidth they are saving you from your account's statistics dashboard.
### Speeds up loading by compressing files and minifying your static scripts
CloudFlare can minify your static script files (such as .js, .css) - this makes them smaller by removing spaces and newlines. It can also compress and optimise your images so they are smaller and load faster. There are a bunch of other speed-related services you can activate (some of them are not free) - just check them out in the 'Speed' section.
### Analytics
Cloudflare will show you information about your visitors, how many they are, where they come from, threats and more - and they boast more analytics than usual services (such as Google Analytics).
There are much more services you get and can activate for certain fees based on usage, but let's start with a free account and go from there:
## 1\. Create a free CloudFlare account
Just head over to cloudflare.com and register for a free account.
## 2\. Add a new website to your CloudFlare account
Once you're in, add a new website to your account and start the set up process.
Type your domain name (without www.) and click 'Scan DNS Records'.
Don't worry, this won't make any changes to your website or DNS yet - it will just scan your DNS and show you the records it found. Nothing will actually change on your site until a few steps later.
While it is scanning your DNS records, you can see a quick video about how CloudFlare works.
## 3\. Check your DNS records
After a few seconds, you are presented with a screen similar to this. The status column is what's interesting - it shows which domain and subdomain is routed through CloudFlare's network and which ones are left to be passed through and hit your server directly.
If you don't have any specific applications or services that need different DNS access, I recommend you click the grey cloud icon to change the option and route all traffic through CloudFlare's network. This will ensure your server is protected. The running services won't be impacted at all.
Make sure all domain names and subdomain names are there. On a couple occasions, I discovered that CloudFlare either couldn't read or had 'lost' one subdomain and after the migration, the application hosted on that subdomain was not accessible. It was a quick fix by adding it straight into CloudFlare's DNS and in a few seconds it was back online.
## 4\. Select your plan
After you've made all the decisions about the DNS routing, you continue to the plan selection.
Depending on your plan, certain services may or may not be available - while some other services are charged on a usage basis.
But for now, as we've said above, we'll go with the free plan which gives us quite a few benefits.
## 5\. Change your nameservers
This is the step that actually activates things and routes the traffic through CloudFlare's nework. It involves changing the nameservers from your registrar's default ones, to CloudFlare's.
CloudFlare displays the current nameservers for your domain name and indicates what you should change them to.
If you don't have access to your domain's management interface with your registrar, you can ask your administrator.
CloudFlare will not work until you make this change.
If your domain was purchased or is managed by GoDaddy, here's a quick tutorial on how to change the nameservers:
### Login to your GoDaddy account
...and access your 'My products' area.
### Go to manage domains
Click 'Manage all' if the domain name is not among the most recent ones:
Find the domain name you want to activate CloudFlare for in the list.
After you click the domain name, click on 'Manage DNS':
Then, as you scroll down you see the 'Nameservers' section. Click 'Change'
Set the nameserver type to 'Custom' and fill in the nameservers you have received from CloudFlare. If you only have one field, you can add more by clicking 'Add Nameserver':
When you are done, click 'Save' and allow a few minutes for the DNS change to take effect.
If all goes well, in a few minutes, refresh your CloudFlare account and the domain name should be active on CloudFlare.
Now is also a good time to check if things still work fine by trying to browse your website.
I found that for a minute or two, the website was giving errors - but it was ok after that.
Also, CloudFlare states that SSL certificates could take up to 24 hours to fully activate, so if you don't already have a SSL certificate installed on your website, I would wait until the next day to switch your website's requests to https, to give the CloudFlare SSL certificate a chance to be properly installed and propagated on all endpoints.
### How to Use the Shadow Tool in Xara Designer Pro X to Add Shadows to Objects
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-the-shadow-tool-in-xara-designer-pro-x-to-add-shadows-to-objects/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T18:42:45.000Z
The Shadow Tool in Xara Designer Pro X (shortcut **Ctrl+F2**) creates three types of shadows: wall, floor, and glow. Each serves a different purpose and can be fine-tuned with blur, transparency, and color controls.
## Wall Shadow
The most common type — creates a shadow parallel to and behind the object. Select an object, click the wall shadow button in the toolbar, and drag to reposition the shadow anywhere around the object.
Wall shadow — the most common type, cast behind the object as if on a wall
## Floor Shadow
Originates at the base of the object and stretches backward in perspective, like a shadow cast on the ground. Drag to control direction and length.
Floor shadow stretches from the base in perspective — like a shadow on the ground
## Glow Shadow
Creates a soft, even shadow around the entire object — like an ambient glow. Unlike wall and floor shadows, glow shadows stay centered and can't be repositioned. Adjust size and transparency only.
## Fine-Tuning Shadows
- **Blur** — increases for a softer, more diffuse shadow; decreases for sharper edges
- **Transparency** — lower for darker/more prominent, higher for subtler shadows
- **Color** — drag a color from the palette onto the shadow to change it
- **Profile** — adjusts the falloff curve from dark to light for realistic shadow gradients
Practical example — recreating a natural shadow on an isolated photo to match original lighting
### How to Create Repeating Patterns in Xara Designer Pro X
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-repeating-patterns-in-xara-designer-pro-x/
Last updated: 2026-02-25T18:10:03.000Z
Xara Designer Pro X can create seamless repeating patterns by combining bitmap copies with the Fill Tool's repeating tile mode. Here's the workflow for turning any design element into a tiled pattern.
## Step 1: Design the Pattern Base
Create the basic unit of your pattern. For a checkerboard, draw two small black squares positioned diagonally. Use **Ctrl+Alt+D** (smart duplication) to repeat the last move precisely.
## Step 2: Create a Bitmap Copy
Select all pattern elements, right-click → **Create Bitmap Copy**. In the dialog, choose **PNG** format with **True colour + Alpha** — the alpha channel preserves transparent gaps between elements.
Create a bitmap copy of your pattern with True colour + Alpha to preserve transparent gaps
## Step 3: Apply as Bitmap Fill
Draw a target shape (rectangle, circle, etc.). Select the Fill Tool (**G**), change the type to **Bitmap**, and choose your pattern from the bitmap selector.
Apply your custom bitmap as a fill — the selector lets you choose which pattern to use
## Step 4: Enable Repeating Tile
Switch from "Single tile" to **Repeating tile** in the toolbar. The pattern seamlessly tiles across the entire shape. Adjust the DPI or drag the fill control points to scale the pattern larger or smaller.
Switch to Repeating tile mode and the pattern seamlessly tiles across the entire object
### How to Animate Objects Along a Circle Path in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-animate-objects-along-a-circle-path-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-20T12:06:50.000Z
Want to make an object orbit along a circular path in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia)? While Camtasia doesn't have a built-in "motion path" tool, you can achieve smooth circular animation using **Custom Animation keyframes** and a clever grouping technique. In this tutorial, you'll learn how to animate any element — a shape, image, or even a video clip — so it moves along a circle path.
This technique works in Camtasia 2019 and later versions. Watch the full video tutorial or follow the step-by-step guide below.
**Watch the video:**
## Step 1: Add a Shape to the Canvas
Start by creating the object that will travel along the circle path. For this example, we'll use a simple yellow circle, but you can use any shape, image, or media.
1. Open [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) and create a new project
2. Go to **Annotations** in the left panel, then click the **Shapes** tab
3. Drag an **Ellipse** shape onto the canvas
4. In the Properties panel on the right, set the **Fill** color to your preferred color and adjust the size — this will be the object that moves around the circle
Add an Ellipse shape from Annotations > Shapes. Set your fill color and size in the Properties panel.
## Step 2: Create a Guide Circle
Next, you need a reference circle that defines the path your object will follow. This guide circle won't appear in the final output — it's just there to help you position keyframes accurately.
1. Add another Ellipse shape to the canvas — make it much larger than the moving object
2. Set the **Fill** to a dark or transparent color so you can see the moving object on top of it
3. Center it on the canvas — this is your orbital path
4. Place it on a separate track below your moving shape (labeled "Guide" in the timeline)
**Tip:** Position your small moving shape at the top of the guide circle to start. This will be the starting position for the animation.
## Step 3: Apply Custom Animation
Now comes the key technique: using **Custom Animation** to create position keyframes that move the object around the circle.
1. Select your moving shape on the timeline
2. Go to the **Animations** tab in the left panel
3. Drag the **Custom** animation onto your shape on the timeline
4. You'll see animation keyframe arrows appear on the clip in the timeline
Drag the Custom animation from the Animations panel onto your shape. Keyframe arrows appear on the timeline clip.
## Step 4: Set Position Keyframes Around the Circle
This is the most important step. You'll manually place the object at different positions around the guide circle, creating keyframes at each point. Camtasia smoothly interpolates the motion between keyframes.
1. Move the playhead to the first keyframe position
2. Drag the shape to the **top** of the guide circle
3. Move the playhead forward (about 1 second) and drag the shape to the **right side** of the guide circle — a new keyframe is created automatically
4. Continue moving the playhead and repositioning the shape: **bottom**, then **left side**, then back to the **top**
**Tip:** Position the shape at the top, right, bottom, left, and back to top (like the 12, 3, 6, and 9 positions on a clock).
## Step 5: Group the Shape and Guide
Here's where the technique gets powerful. By **grouping** the moving shape with the guide circle, you can control the entire animation as one unit — making it easy to reposition, scale, or duplicate.
1. Select both the moving shape track and the guide circle track on the timeline
2. Right-click and choose **Group**
3. The two tracks collapse into a single **"Circle"** group on the timeline
4. Now you can move, scale, or rotate the entire group using the Properties panel
Group the shape and guide circle together. The Properties panel lets you control the entire group's scale, rotation, and position.
## Step 6: Fine-Tune the Animation with Group Keyframes
With the group selected, you can add additional keyframes to control the group's **position** over time. This gives you a second layer of animation — the shape orbits within the group, and the group itself can also move across the canvas.
1. Select the Circle group on the timeline
2. In the Properties panel, adjust the **Position X** and **Position Y** values at different points in time
3. Each position change creates a new keyframe on the group
4. Preview the animation to verify smooth circular motion
Add position keyframes to the Circle group to move the entire orbital animation across the canvas.
**Tip:** If the motion isn't smooth enough, add more keyframe positions around the circle path. You can also adjust the timing by dragging the keyframe arrows closer together (faster) or further apart (slower).
## Step 7: Replace the Shape with a Video Clip
Once you've perfected the circular animation with a simple shape, you can swap it out for any media — a video clip, image, logo, or text.
1. Import your video or image into the **Media Bin** (File > Import > Media)
2. Drag it onto the timeline and place it in the same track as the original shape
3. Delete or disable the original shape
4. Adjust the **Scale** of the new media in the Properties panel so it fits the circle path (in this example, scaling down to about 20%)
5. The new media inherits the same animation keyframes — it now orbits along the circle path
Replace the placeholder shape with a real video clip. Scale it down to fit the circle path — here it's set to 20.2%.
## Tips for Better Circle Animations
- **Hide the guide circle:** Before exporting, either delete the guide circle track or set its opacity to 0%. It's only a visual aid during editing.
- **Adjust timing:** Drag keyframe arrows on the timeline to control the speed of rotation. Closer keyframes = faster motion.
- **Add easing:** Right-click on keyframes and adjust the easing curve for more natural acceleration and deceleration or None for constant speed.
- **Duplicate the group:** Copy the Circle group to create multiple orbiting objects. Offset their starting keyframe positions for a staggered effect.
- **Scale the group:** Instead of resizing individual elements, scale the entire group to make the orbit larger or smaller.
- **Combine with other animations:** Add rotation to the orbiting object itself so it spins as it orbits — great for logos or product shots.
While dedicated motion graphics software like After Effects offers built-in motion paths, this [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) technique is a practical workaround that delivers smooth circular motion without leaving your video editor.
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### 6 Completely Free Graphics and Design Software for Vector and Bitmap Editing
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/6-completely-free-graphics-and-design-software/
Last updated: 2025-10-29T10:33:03.000Z
Whether graphics are your passion, the artistic muse gives you a nudge now and then or you are a design professional, you can always do with some free software. Or maybe you can't afford an investment in graphics and design software right now, if you are just starting out. Most of us have broken our teeth in free software at one point or another.
Even if commercial software in the graphics and design industry have evolved significantly over the years, their free counterparts have not stagnated either. Maybe the free graphics programs don't yet have the same set of functions and capabilities as the commercial ones, some of them can still give them a run for their money.
Let's not waste time. Below are a few free graphic design software recommendations, particularly vector graphics. These are the most popular ones, they are completely free and I have used or am using them personally:
## Free vector graphics software
### Inkscape
This is a free and open-source vector graphics software, based on the SVG format. It is similar to Adobe Illustrator, CorelDraw! or Xara Designer and you can design almost anything with it. If you want to learn a vector design software that gives you the most tools and options from the get go, but also be free, you cannot fail with Inkscape.
The native format of Inkscape is SVG, but you can export your projects to any format supported by browsers and also for commercial printing. I've designed some very complex brochures and publications in Inkscape.
### Gravit Designer
Gravit Designer (which has a free version and a PRO version), helps you create graphics for promotional materials, marketing, illustrations for websites, presentations, social media banners and more.
Gravit supports multiple pages per document, layers, it has easy to understand panels and multiple parametrised editing tools as well as 'freehand' ones. On the right side of the layout you have a context-sensitive properties panel, which changes automatically offering you options that are relevant to the current tool or object you have selected.
The free vefsion of Gravit Designer offers 500 MB of cloud storage space (which allows you to store your projects and access them from another computer), PDF export (at 72 and 150 dpi). In the free version you can only work in the RGB colour space.
In exchange for a yearly subscription ,the PRO version offers unlimited cloud storage space, PDF export up to 300 dpi (good for offset printing), CMYK, HSB colour space editing), you can work offline and have a few more export and project history options.
For beginners, the free version should be more than enough. It allows you to create projects for screen display and the web. So if you're looking for a free tool to design social media graphics, banners, look no further!
### Vectr
Vectr is another software that can be used both online, right in your browser and also as a downloadable version. You can create 2D vector graphics, business cards, logos, icons, website layouts, brochures, posters, presentations and more. On top of that, you can easily share your creations with a simple URL you can send by e-mail or share on social media without the need for attachments.
Vectr allows you to export your graphics to PNG, SVG or JPG, in addition to sharing via a URL. If you don't wish to export your creations but would like to save your projects online, you need a free account.
## Free Bitmap and Photo Editing Software
### Paint.NET
This is a program for the Windows platform only, and even if the name makes it seem like an alternative to the free and very limited Paint software that comes with Windows, do not be deceived: Paint.NET is much more capable than Windows Paint and offers numerous editing functions - even more so than actual creation tools.
Paint.NET emphasizes editing functions: special effects, distorsion, rotation, perspective adjustment, selection, layers and colour adjustments such as contrast, levels, etc. It is a viable alternative to Photoshop, specially if you don't need to go too deep into super-advanced and complicated functions.
### GIMP
GIMP is probably the most popular free alternative to Adobe Photoshop. The project started in the 90s, it comes very close to Photoshop in terms of functions and available tools, workflow and even the names of the different sections and operations.
GIMP is an open-source project, it works on all major platforms and has a plugin architecture that considerably extends its functionality. It supports all major graphics file formats (TIFF, JPEG, GIF, PNG, PSD, etc.) and if for some reason a format is not supported, it's quite likely that you can find a plugin for it - but for the most part, you might not need it if you're not using some exotic file formats.
If you are no afraid of a challenge, you are serious in learning image editing and manipulation but you also do not want to shell out for Photoshop or similar software, GIMP is as good as it gets in terms of price vs. functionality.
### Krita
The Krita project started in 1999 and is targeted at illustrators (animators, digital concept artists, comics artists, cartoon artists, etc.). It is free, open-source and can run on the most popular platforms.
Kritca comes with 100 brushes (adjustable in 9 ways), created for a variety of drawing styles. You can also create animations similar to those you used to be able to make in Flash (now Adobe Animate). It also has vector editing and text editing tools. The projects save to the SVG format.
Krita's interface is easy to personalise, the panels and drawers can be moved around and placed where it's most comfortable, and when you feel at home, you can save the layouts.
### How to Cut Out Objects in Xara Designer Pro X: Region Painter, Marquee, and Shapes
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-cut-out-objects-in-xara-designer-pro-x-region-painter-marquee-and-shapes/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T08:38:05.000Z
Xara Designer Pro X includes several tools for cutting out objects and creating selections: the Region Painter tool, Marquee selection, Magnetic Lasso, and shape-based methods. This tutorial covers all of them with practical examples on both vector shapes and photos.
**Watch the full tutorial:**
## The Region Painter Tool
Found in the toolbar flyout below the Selector tool (shortcut **Alt+F3**), the Region Painter tool works like a paintbrush for selections. Adjust the **nib size** in the toolbar, then paint directly over the area you want to select. A dotted outline appears showing the selected region.
The Region Painter tool lets you paint a selection directly onto objects — the dotted outline shows the selected region
### Cutting Shapes from Vector Objects
After painting your selection on a vector shape, press **Delete** or **Ctrl+X** to cut out the selected area. The result is a vector shape with holes punched through it — the object remains a vector, not a bitmap. Hold **Shift** while painting to subtract from an existing selection.
### Isolating Objects from Photos
Import a photo, then use the Region Painter to paint around the subject you want to keep. Once selected, click the **Invert** button in the toolbar to flip the selection — now the background is selected instead of the subject. Press Delete to remove the background.
Using the Region Painter to select the hourglass from the photo — the dotted line shows the mask boundary
## The Magnetic Lasso
For more precise photo cutouts, the Magnetic Lasso snaps to edges as you trace around an object. Click to set anchor points, and the lasso follows the edge contour between them. Use **Shift** to add straight-line segments and **T** to toggle the magnetic snapping.
The Invert button flips the selection — keeping the subject and removing the background
## The Marquee Selection Tool
For rectangular selections, the Marquee tool draws a box around the area. Simpler than the Region Painter but limited to rectangular regions.
## Shape-Based Cutting (Combine Shapes)
The older method: draw a shape over the area you want to cut, select both the shape and the target object, then use **Arrange → Combine Shapes → Subtract Shapes**. This works but the Region Painter is usually faster for freeform selections.
### YouTube allows you to @mention other channels in your titles and description
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/youtube-allows-you-to-mention-other-channels-in-your-titles-and-description/
Last updated: 2025-09-04T11:09:03.000Z
**YouTube announced a really cool feature that allows you to link channels together easier than before, by @mentioning them.**
Before, when you wanted to link to another channel from one of your videos, you had to find that channel using the YouTube search, copy the URL and paste it in your description, or you needed to know the ID (that very long numbers and letters combination that leads you to a channel), or you had to know the channel username.
But today, YouTube announced that you can actually now mention channels by name in your videos. You can include these mentions in your titles or description, and then when you mention another creator or another channel in your video, their name will become a link to their channel page. The mentioned channel will also get a notification in their inbox which you didn't get when you were just linking to them with the URL.
Here is an example video and I want to mention the creator of these Zoom backgrounds:
Editing a video in YouTube studio, to add @mention
I can add the mention in the title, so I can say 'free Zoom business backgrounds by...' and then you need to put an @ sign just like on most other social media networks, where you mention another person using their username or their name. You put an at sign in front and you can then just type the name of the channel.
In this case i have this channel here GELEVEN. You can see this drop down box showing up, with matching channels that start with the letters you've already typed. As you type, it restrains those results to the one you want.
Drop-down of channel names matching your search
Press ENTER and there you go, if the mention has been successful, it shows with a light grey highlight:
The Mentioned channel appears highlighted
Also if you want, you can add a mention to a YouTube channel in the description. For example, if I want to say thanks and credit the creator of these backgrounds, I'm saying 'Thanks to ...' and then an @ sign, 'GELEVEN for these backgrounds':
Added mention in the video description also
So now that I've added the mentions, I save this video and go to the video page to see what it looks like. As you can see, the 'GELEVEN' username is blue and it links to the channel page.
Also in the description if I click 'Show more', in the description, the username 'GELEVEN' is blue and it's a link.
Mentioned channels appear as links to their page on the video play page
A few things to note:
- You cannot link to channels that have **less than 1000 subscribers**. Google mentioned this in their [support article](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/9637404?hl=en-GB&ref=cotovan.com). Personally, I think it's not so nice, because it could have helped larger channels promote smaller ones...
- You can mention as many channels as you like, provided the whole thing fits within the **character limits** of the title or description fields.
- Although Google doesn't say this, I tried and it doesn't work the other way either: linking from a channel with less than 1000 subscribers TO a larger channel. My suspicion is that this is to prevent bot accounts and spammers from @mentioning larger channels to get attention, particularly if this produces a notification, it would quickly become unbearable.
- You can **only @mention someone from YouTube Studio** on your computer. You can't do it from the YouTube app yet. When you edit a video that has a mention in, from the app on your mobile phone, then that will replace these mentions with just text. So make sure that if you have @mentioned others in your videos, don't edit those on your mobile phone yet, just go into Studio.
- Creators can see who mentioned them if they go to the YouTube app, you can go to the bottom and click on the Inbox, then from that drop down menu you can go to *notifications* to see mentions of your channel. You can probably turn these on or off if you don't want to get notified for every mention, if you have a channel that has a lot of mentions and people can mention you a lot
#####
### Using the Selector Tool in Xara Designer Pro: A Beginner's Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/using-the-selector-tool-in-xara-designer-pro-a-beginners-guide/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T08:36:24.000Z
The Selector Tool is the most fundamental tool in Xara Designer Pro X — it is how you select, move, resize, and rotate objects. This beginner's guide covers everything from basic selection to precise dimensioning and rotation.
**Watch the full tutorial:**
## Selecting and Resizing Objects
Click any object to select it. Eight handles appear around the object: **corner handles** resize proportionally, **side handles** stretch or squash in one direction. Hold **Shift** while dragging to resize from the centre of the object rather than from the opposite corner.
## Precise Resizing with the Info Bar
The **info bar** at the top changes for each tool. With the Selector tool, it shows the object's position (X, Y), dimensions (W, H), and scale (%). You can type exact values — for example, typing **"1920px"** in the width field works even if the document uses centimetres. The **lock icon** between W and H maintains the aspect ratio.
A selected object shows resize handles — the info bar displays exact dimensions in the chosen unit
### Changing Document Units
Go to **Utilities → Options → Units** to change the default measurement unit for the document. Options include Millimetres, Centimetres, Points, Picas, Inches, and Pixels. Switching to Pixels is useful when designing for screen (YouTube thumbnails, web graphics, etc.).
The Options dialog lets you change document units — switch from centimetres to pixels for screen-based designs
## Rotating and Skewing Objects
Click a selected object **a second time** and the handles change from squares to curved arrows — these are **rotation handles**. Drag a corner handle to rotate, or drag a side handle to **skew** (shear) the object. The small crosshair in the centre is the **rotation origin** — drag it to change the point around which the object rotates.
Click a second time to switch from resize to rotation handles — the curved arrows let you rotate the selection
## Grouping and Arranging Objects
Select multiple objects with **Shift+click** or by dragging a selection box. **Ctrl+G** groups them — they move and resize as one unit. **Ctrl+U** ungroups. Use **Arrange → Bring to Front** or **Send to Back** (or their shortcuts **Ctrl+F** / **Ctrl+B**) to change the stacking order of objects.
## Tips
- Always re-enable the aspect ratio lock after manually typing custom dimensions
- Resizing a text object resizes the container, not the text — use the Text tool to change font size
- You can resize by percentage in the info bar by changing the W/H values to %
### Xara Designer Pro X Interface and Tools Overview: Beginner Course Episode 01
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/xara-designer-pro-x-interface-and-tools-overview-beginner-course-episode-01/
Last updated: 2026-02-28T12:47:36.000Z
This is a comprehensive introduction to the entire Xara interface. Xara Designer Pro X is a powerful, affordable all-in-one design tool that combines the capabilities of a vector editor, page layout application, photo editor, and web design tool in a single package.
**Watch the full tutorial:**
## What Is Xara Designer Pro X?
Xara Designer Pro X has been around since the early 1990s (originally as Corel Xara). It combines the functionality of several Adobe applications into one affordable package: vector illustration (like Illustrator), page layout (like InDesign), web design (like the discontinued Fireworks), and photo editing with a full layer system (like Photoshop). It is known for being one of the fastest vector rendering engines available.
## The Main Toolbar
The left sidebar contains all the main tools, including:
- **Selector Tool** — select, move, resize, rotate objects
- **Mask/Photo/Eraser tools** — for photo editing and selections
- **Freehand and Pen tools** — for drawing vector paths
- **Rectangle, Ellipse, QuickShape tools** — for creating shapes
- **Text Tool** — for all typography work
- **Fill and Transparency tools** — gradients, patterns, transparency effects
- **Shadow, Bevel, Blend, Contour, Mould, 3D Extrude** — advanced effects
- **Zoom and Push tools** — navigation
The main toolbar on the left with the Info Bar at the top — both change contextually based on the selected tool
## The Info Bar
The **Info Bar** at the top of the screen is context-sensitive — it changes based on which tool is currently selected. When you select the Selector tool, it shows position and size. When you select the Text tool, it shows font options. This means you always have the relevant options visible without needing to open separate dialogs.
## Navigation
Zooming uses **Ctrl + mouse wheel**. Panning uses the **middle mouse button** (press and drag). The zoom percentage is shown in the top toolbar and can be typed in directly for precise zoom levels.
## The Colour Line
The colour bar at the bottom of the screen provides quick colour access: **left-click** a colour to set the fill, **right-click** to set the outline/stroke colour. The **Colour Editor** (accessible via the colour line) lets you create custom colours with HSV, RGB, or CMYK models.
## Right-Side Panel Galleries
Xara's panel galleries on the right side provide access to different asset types:
### Design Gallery
Pre-made templates for introductions, web designs, social media graphics, print layouts, e-books, and presentations. Drag any template directly onto your canvas.
The Design Gallery provides pre-made templates you can drag directly into your document
### Page and Layer Gallery
Manages pages (for multi-page documents) and layers within each page. Works similarly to Photoshop's layer panel — you can reorder, hide, lock, and name layers.
### Line Gallery
Contains stroke styles beyond simple lines: ink brushes, watercolour effects, fur textures, and other artistic line styles.
### Font and Colour Galleries
The **Font Gallery** previews all installed fonts with sample text. The **Colour Gallery** includes the standard palette plus full Pantone colour libraries (CMYK coated, uncoated, Color Bridge, and metallic).
The Colour Gallery includes standard colours and full Pantone libraries for professional print work
### How to Create a 3D-Looking Scene in Photoshop from a Flat Image
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-a-3d-looking-scene-in-photoshop-from-a-flat-image/
Last updated: 2026-03-30T19:10:41.000Z
Turning a flat 2D image into a realistic 3D object is a valuable Photoshop skill, whether you’re creating book mockups, product displays, or composite scenes. In this tutorial, Cristi walks through the complete process of transforming a flat book cover into a 3D-looking book and placing it into a real photograph.
## What You’ll Need
The tutorial uses freely downloadable 3D book spine templates (green book PNGs) that help guide the perspective transformation. You’ll also need a flat book cover image and optionally a background photograph for the final composite. Start by creating a new document at 2000 pixels and importing your flat book cover.
Start with a flat 2D book cover image in Photoshop — this is what we will transform into a realistic 3D book.
When you drag a picture into another document in Photoshop, it’s automatically created as a [Smart Object](https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-layers-in-photoshop-a-beginners-guide/), meaning you can resize and transform it without losing quality.
## Applying the Distort Transform
The key technique is **Edit > Transform > Distort**. This lets you drag each corner of the image independently, creating the illusion of perspective. Position the book cover to match the angle of the 3D spine template:
1. Select the book cover layer
2. Go to **Edit > Transform > Distort**
3. Drag the corners to match a 3D perspective — pull the right side inward to create depth
4. Use the green book spine PNG as a guide for alignment
After using Edit > Transform > Distort, the flat cover now has a 3D perspective. A separate spine layer adds depth to the book edge.
If you want to learn more about the [Distort and perspective tools in Photoshop](https://cotovan.com/post/add-perspective-to-object-in-adobe-photoshop-3d-perspective-image-object/), check out the companion tutorial that covers the fundamentals of these transformations.
## Adding a Realistic Shadow
A 3D object without a shadow looks like it’s floating. To make the book look grounded:
1. Add a **Drop Shadow** layer effect to the book group
2. Convert the drop shadow to its own layer for more control
3. Use **Transform > Distort** on the shadow layer to angle it naturally
4. Reduce the shadow’s opacity and apply a slight Gaussian Blur for realism
The completed 3D book with a realistic drop shadow, organised in a layer group for easy reuse.
## Integrating into a Real Scene
The final step is compositing the 3D book into a real photograph. Import a background image (this example uses a photo from Unsplash of a book stack with a plant), then position and scale your 3D book to fit naturally within the scene. The perspective, shadow, and lighting should all match the surrounding environment.
The final result: the 3D book composited into a real-life photograph, blending naturally with the scene.
## Tips for Better 3D Mockups
- **Group all book elements** (cover, spine, shadow) into a layer group for easy positioning and reuse
- **Match the lighting direction** of your shadow to the light source in the background photo
- **Use Smart Objects** for the book cover so you can swap in different covers without redoing the transformation
- **Keep the spine layer separate** — you can adjust its colour with Hue/Saturation to match different book covers
### How to Use the Perspective Crop Tool in Photoshop
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-the-perspective-crop-tool-in-photoshop/
Last updated: 2026-07-03T09:54:26.000Z
Ever taken a photo of a book, sign, or document at an angle? The Perspective Crop Tool in Photoshop lets you straighten these skewed images in one step — cropping and correcting the perspective distortion simultaneously.
## Finding the Perspective Crop Tool
The Perspective Crop Tool is nested under the regular Crop tool in the toolbar. To access it:
- **Right-click** (or long-press) the Crop tool icon in the toolbar
- Select **Perspective Crop Tool** from the flyout menu
- Or press **C** to cycle through crop tools until you reach it
The Perspective Crop Tool lives under the Crop tool group — press C or right-click to find it
The tooltip reads: *"Crops an image to correct distortions caused by perspective."*
## Step 1: Draw the Initial Crop Area
Click and drag from the **top-left corner** to the **bottom-right corner** of the object you want to straighten. This creates a rectangular crop grid over your image.
Don't worry about being precise yet — you'll adjust the corners in the next step.
## Step 2: Adjust the Grid Corners
Now drag each corner handle of the crop grid to align with the actual edges of the object. Match the grid lines to the edges of the book, sign, or document in the photo.
Draw the crop selection from corner to corner, then adjust each handle to match the object edges
The more accurately you place the corners, the better the straightening result will be. Take your time to align each handle precisely with the object's actual corners.
## Step 3: Apply the Crop
Press **Enter** (or click the checkmark in the options bar) to apply the perspective crop. Photoshop will straighten the image so the selected area appears perfectly rectangular and front-facing.
After pressing Enter, Photoshop straightens the image — the magazine now appears perfectly flat
## Fixing Distorted Aspect Ratios
Sometimes the perspective crop produces a result that looks slightly squished or stretched. This happens when the original perspective distortion was significant. To fix this:
1. Press **Ctrl+A** (Cmd+A on Mac) to select all
2. Press **Ctrl+T** (Cmd+T) to enter Free Transform
3. Hold **Shift** and drag a corner handle to resize the image to the correct proportions
4. Press **Enter** to apply
5. Go to **Image > Crop** to trim any excess canvas area
### When to Use the Perspective Crop Tool
- **Product photography:** Straighten book covers, packaging, or artwork shot at an angle
- **Architecture:** Correct converging lines in building photos
- **Document scanning:** Straighten photos of documents, whiteboards, or signs
- **Art reproduction:** Get a flat, front-facing view of paintings or posters
### Related guides
[Photoshop batch resize images using Photoshop's image processor toolQuick way to batch resize images in Photoshop using the Image Processor tool to automatically resize many photos in a folder and convert them to JPEG, PSD or TIFF, with size and quality options. This process can also be done from Adobe Bridge.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/photoshop-batch-resize-images-using-photoshops-image-processor-tool/)
[Add perspective to object in Adobe Photoshop | 3D perspective image objectCreate a 3D or perspective deformed image in Photoshop, such as website screenshot in 3D for portfolio site or any other 3d-looking object with a shadow using a simple transform tool.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/add-perspective-to-object-in-adobe-photoshop-3d-perspective-image-object/)
[Working with Layers in Photoshop: A Beginner's GuideWhen Photoshop introduced layers, it revolutionized photo editing. Layers let you stack elements on top of each other while keeping them separate — you can move, edit, or remove any layer without affecting the rest of your design. In this beginner's guide, I'll walk you through the fundamentals of working with layers in Photoshop: creating them, managing them, and using essential operations like duplicating, merging, grouping, and adjusting opacity. Opening the Layers panel The Layers panel Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-layers-in-photoshop-a-beginners-guide/)
### How to Use the Distort Tool in Photoshop to Straighten and Transform Images
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-the-distort-tool-in-photoshop-to-straighten-and-transform-images/
Last updated: 2026-07-03T10:41:26.000Z
Whether you’re working with photos of books, products, signs, or any object photographed at an angle, Photoshop’s Distort tool lets you straighten and transform them into flat, usable images. This tutorial walks through several real-world examples of converting perspective-distorted photos into clean, straight images.
## When to Use the Distort Tool
The Distort tool is ideal when you need to:
- Straighten a book cover photographed at an angle on a shelf
- Flatten a product shot taken in perspective
- Correct a sign or poster that wasn’t photographed head-on
- Transform any 3D-perspective image into a flat 2D view
A perspective-distorted photo of a book opened in Photoshop — the starting point before applying the Distort tool.
## Step-by-Step: Straightening a Distorted Image
1. **Open your image** in Photoshop and duplicate the background layer
2. **Isolate the subject** — use the selection tools to separate the object from its background, placing it on its own layer
3. Go to **Edit > Transform > Distort**
4. **Drag the corners** to reshape the image — pull each corner to where it would be if the object were viewed straight-on
5. **Press Enter** to apply the transformation
The Distort tool in action — drag the corner handles to reshape the perspective and straighten the image.
## Working with Multiple Examples
The tutorial demonstrates the technique on several different images — books photographed on shelves at various angles, a magazine shot in perspective, and other distorted objects. The same basic workflow applies to all of them: isolate the subject, apply the Distort transform, and drag the corners to straighten.
For images that are only slightly tilted, you might find the **Perspective** transform (Edit > Transform > Perspective) more appropriate, as it constrains opposing corners to move in tandem. For more dramatic corrections, **Distort** gives you full independent control over each corner.
The final result — the magazine cover is now perfectly straightened and ready to use.
## Tips for Clean Results
- **Work on a copy** — always duplicate the layer before transforming so you can compare with the original
- **Use Smart Objects** where possible to preserve quality through multiple transformations
- **Zoom in to check edges** after transforming — you may need to crop or touch up the borders
- **The same technique works in reverse** — you can also [add perspective to flat objects](https://cotovan.com/post/add-perspective-to-object-in-adobe-photoshop-3d-perspective-image-object/) to create 3D-looking mockups
### Working with Layers in Photoshop: A Beginner's Guide
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-layers-in-photoshop-a-beginners-guide/
Last updated: 2026-02-22T09:39:35.000Z
When Photoshop introduced layers, it revolutionized photo editing. Layers let you stack elements on top of each other while keeping them separate — you can move, edit, or remove any layer without affecting the rest of your design.
In this beginner's guide, I'll walk you through the fundamentals of working with layers in Photoshop: creating them, managing them, and using essential operations like duplicating, merging, grouping, and adjusting opacity.
## Opening the Layers panel
The Layers panel is your control center. If you don't see it, go to **Window → Layers** or press **F7**. The panel shows all layers in your document as a vertical stack — the top layer in the panel appears on top in your canvas.
## Background vs. regular layers
Every new Photoshop document starts with a **Background** layer. This is a special locked layer — you can't move it or change its stacking order. To convert it into a regular layer, right-click it in the Layers panel and choose **Layer from Background**. Give it a name (or accept the default "Layer 0") and click OK.
Once converted, the background behaves like any other layer. You can move it, transform it, and reorder it. The checkered pattern that appears behind it indicates transparency — areas with no image data.
## Adding layers
Any new element you create — text, shapes, pasted images — automatically goes onto its own layer. For example, selecting the **Type tool** and clicking on the canvas creates a new text layer. The Layers panel shows it as a separate entry from the background.
This separation is the core power of layers: your text and your background are independent. Move the text without touching the background. Change the background color without affecting the text.
Multiple layers stacked in Photoshop. Each layer can be moved, edited, or hidden independently.
## Essential layer operations
### Duplicate a layer
Right-click the layer and select **Duplicate Layer**. Photoshop creates an identical copy. This is useful when you want to experiment with changes while preserving the original.
### Transform a layer
Press **Ctrl+T** (Cmd+T on Mac) to enter Free Transform mode. You can scale, rotate, or skew the selected layer. Press Enter to confirm the transformation.
### Change opacity
Click the **Opacity** slider at the top of the Layers panel and drag it down. Reducing opacity makes the layer semi-transparent, allowing layers below to show through.
### Merge layers
Select multiple layers (hold Shift to select a range, or Ctrl/Cmd to pick individually), then press **Ctrl+E** (Cmd+E). The selected layers combine into a single layer. **Warning:** merging is destructive — you can't separate the layers again without undoing.
### Group layers
Select multiple layers and press **Ctrl+G** (Cmd+G) to put them in a group. Groups act like folders — they organize layers without merging them. You can expand a group to see individual layers, move or transform the group as a unit, and rename it by double-clicking the group name.
Alternatively, drag selected layers onto the folder icon at the bottom of the Layers panel to create a group.
## Merging vs. grouping
This is an important distinction:
- **Merging** (Ctrl+E) — Combines pixel data permanently. The layers become one. You lose the ability to edit them separately.
- **Grouping** (Ctrl+G) — Organizes layers in a folder. Each layer stays independent and editable. You can collapse/expand the group and move it as a unit.
Use grouping when you want to keep things organized but still flexible. Use merging only when you're certain you no longer need separate access to the individual layers.
## Layer visibility
Click the **eye icon** next to any layer in the panel to toggle its visibility. This is useful for checking how your composition looks without certain elements, or for temporarily hiding layers while you work on others.
### Related guides
[Photoshop batch resize images using Photoshop's image processor toolQuick way to batch resize images in Photoshop using the Image Processor tool to automatically resize many photos in a folder and convert them to JPEG, PSD or TIFF, with size and quality options. This process can also be done from Adobe Bridge.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/photoshop-batch-resize-images-using-photoshops-image-processor-tool/)
[Add perspective to object in Adobe Photoshop | 3D perspective image objectCreate a 3D or perspective deformed image in Photoshop, such as website screenshot in 3D for portfolio site or any other 3d-looking object with a shadow using a simple transform tool.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/add-perspective-to-object-in-adobe-photoshop-3d-perspective-image-object/)
### How to Export Multiple Clips from the Same Project in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-export-multiple-clips-from-the-same-project-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-22T10:10:32.000Z
If you're producing a course, a series of tutorials, or a long recording that needs to be split into chapters, you don't need to create separate [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) projects for each clip. You can edit everything in a single project and export multiple files at once using markers.
This is especially useful for e-learning workflows where you have one continuous recording but need to deliver individual lesson files to your LMS or hosting platform.
## Set Up Your Project
Start by adding all your media — video clips, images, audio — to the Media Bin. Drag them onto the timeline in the order you want them. In the video, four landscape images are used as stand-ins for video clips, with a background music track on a separate audio track underneath.
The key point is that your entire production lives in one timeline. Each "chapter" or "section" is simply a stretch of the timeline between two cut points.
## Use Fade Through Black Transitions
If you want clean breaks between sections, use the **Fade through black** transition — not a regular Fade. A standard fade will briefly show the next clip bleeding through during the crossfade, which looks wrong when each section is meant to stand alone.
Use Fade through black (not regular Fade) so each clip ends on a black frame before the next one starts
Drag the Fade through black transition between each pair of clips. This way, each exported file will fade to black at its end and fade in from black at its start — a clean, professional break.
## Fade the Audio at Cut Points
If you have [background music](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-camtasia-tutorial-for-beginners/) running across the full timeline, you'll want it to [fade out and back in](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fade-audio-in-and-out-in-camtasia/) at each cut point. Otherwise your exported clips will have the music abruptly cut off mid-note.
Click the audio track, then double-click on the volume line where each marker will be to create audio points. Pull the volume down to zero at the cut point, and back up on the other side. This gives each exported clip its own smooth audio fade.
## Place Markers at Each Cut Point
This is the core of the technique. Markers tell Camtasia where to split the project into separate files during export.
Three markers placed at each cut point — Camtasia will split the export at each marker position
Move your playhead to where two clips meet and let it snap to the edit point. Then click in the **Marker track** (the blue strip below the time ruler) to place a marker. If you don't see the Marker track, enable it from **Modify > Markers** or press **Ctrl+M**.
Repeat for every cut point. With four clips, you'll have three markers — the start of the [timeline](https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-the-timeline-in-camtasia-editing-clips-in-a-camtasia-project-camtasia-tutorial/) serves as the implicit first split point.
## Export with "Multiple Files Based on Markers"
Go to **Share > Export to Local File** (or your custom production preset). Click through the Production Wizard until you reach the **Video settings** tab. At the bottom, check the box: **Multiple files based on markers**.
The key setting — enable "Multiple files based on markers" in the Video settings tab of the Production Wizard
Click **Next** and you'll see a table of contents screen listing each marker (Introduction, Marker 1, Marker 2, Marker 3, etc.). You can uncheck any segment you don't want to export. Each checked entry becomes a separate video file.
On the final screen, give your production a name — Camtasia will append numbers (e.g., Slides-0, Slides-1, Slides-2, Slides-3) to distinguish each file. Click **Finish** and Camtasia renders all clips in one batch.
## The Result
Four separate video files produced from a single Camtasia project — each one cut at the marker positions
Each file is a self-contained clip with its own transitions and audio fades. No manual splitting, no separate projects, no re-rendering each section individually.
## Tips
- Name your markers descriptively (e.g., "Lesson 1 — Introduction") instead of leaving them as "Marker 1" — these names appear in the table of contents during export
- You can move markers after placing them by dragging them along the Marker track
- The [transition library](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-2021-more-than-doubled-transitions-here-they-all-are/) in newer versions of Camtasia includes many more options beyond Fade through black — but for chapter splits, Fade through black remains the cleanest choice
- This technique works with any export format Camtasia supports — MP4, AVI, WMV, or GIF
### Related guides
[How to Batch Export Multiple Camtasia Projects at OnceCamtasia only lets you work on one project at a time. While a video is exporting, the editor is locked — you can't open or edit another project (on Windows). If you have several finished projects waiting to be rendered, this means sitting through each export one by one. Batch Production solves this. You queue up all your pre-edited projects, pick an output format, and let Camtasia render them sequentially without any supervision. Why Use Batch Production The standard workaround is running muCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-batch-export-multiple-camtasia-projects-at-once/)
[Camtasia Export Settings for Best Quality with Custom ProductionGetting the best possible video quality out of Camtasia comes down to one thing: knowing your export settings. The default presets are fine for quick exports, but if you want full control over resolution, encoding quality, and file size, Custom Production is where the magic happens. In this guide, I'll walk you through every setting so you can export with confidence. Watch the full tutorial: Camtasia Export Settings for Best Quality with Custom Production Accessing Export and Custom ProductioCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-export-settings-for-best-quality-with-custom-production/)
[How to merge two videos in CamtasiaIn this tutorial, I will show you how you can merge two videos in Camtasia, how you can combine two videos from different sources into a different, a single video that you can export. Very easy. This is Camtasia 2021, and I have my timeline down there, I don't have any clips on it. So I'm going to import one video from my hard drive to the timeline like so, and another video of another scene in the same timeline, just drag it here. It doesn't really matter where you place it, and there you go.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-merge-two-videos-in-camtasia/)
If you're wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Adjust Variable Audio Volume Levels in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-variable-audio-volume-levels-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-21T08:35:35.000Z
When you have [background music](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-add-background-music-in-camtasia-tutorial-for-beginners/) running under narration in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia), you need the music to dip when someone is speaking and come back up in the gaps. You can do this entirely by hand using volume keyframes — no audio effects required.
**Watch the full walkthrough:**
## Set Up the Timeline
Import your narration clips and a music track into the Media Bin, then drag them onto the [Camtasia timeline](https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-the-timeline-in-camtasia-editing-clips-in-a-camtasia-project-camtasia-tutorial/). Place the music on one track and the narration clips on a separate track so they overlap in time.
Music on Track 2, narration on the Voice track — both visible with waveforms
Rename your tracks (double-click the track name) so you can tell them apart at a glance. Make the music track taller by dragging the top edge — this reveals the green volume line that runs across the clip.
## Add Volume Keyframes
Click the music clip to select it. You'll see a green line running horizontally across the waveform — this is the volume level for that track. To create a volume dip around a narration section, you need four keyframe points:
1. **Double-click** on the green line just before the narration starts — this is where the music begins to lower
2. **Double-click** again where the narration actually begins — this is the start of the quiet section
3. **Double-click** where the narration ends — this is the end of the quiet section
4. **Double-click** just after the narration — this is where the music returns to full volume
Four keyframe points placed on the volume line — two outer points stay at full volume, two inner points will be pulled down
Each double-click creates an inflection point (keyframe) on the volume line. You can place as many as you need along the clip.
## Adjust the Volume Levels
Now drag the two inner keyframe points downward. You don't want to [mute the audio](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-mute-audio-in-camtasia-camtasia-silence-audio-tutorial-for-absolute-beginners/) completely — lowering the music to about 25–30% keeps a pleasant bed under the narration without competing with the voice.
The inner points dragged down to lower the music volume — the percentage label shows the current level
Preview the result and fine-tune as needed. If the transition sounds too abrupt, slide the outer keyframe points further apart to create a more gradual ramp. If the music is still too loud during speech, drag the inner points lower.
## Adjust an Entire Section at Once
Instead of dragging each keyframe individually, you can drag the line *between* two points. This moves the entire section up or down while keeping both endpoints locked in place horizontally — so you won't accidentally shift the timing.
Repeat this process for every narration clip on your timeline. Each section gets its own set of four keyframe points.
The finished result — three separate volume dips aligned with each narration clip
## Tips
- You can move keyframe points after placing them by dragging them left or right along the volume line
- If you want the [audio to fade](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-fade-audio-in-and-out-in-camtasia/) more gradually, space the outer and inner keyframes further apart
- This technique works on any audio clip — not just music. You can use it to selectively lower or raise volume on narration, sound effects, or ambient audio
- For an automated version of this workflow, try the [Audio Emphasize effect](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-audio-ducking-emphasize-effect/) which does volume ducking automatically when it detects speech
### Related guides
[Master Audio Transitions and Keyframes in CamtasiaGetting clean audio transitions in Camtasia is essential for professional-sounding videos. Whether you need a smooth fade in at the start, a fade out at the end, or precise volume control throughout your project, Camtasia’s audio tools make it straightforward. Setting Up Your Audio Start by importing your audio fileCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-audio-transitions-keyframes/)
[How to restore the audio points on a videoclip in Camtasia after Silence AudioHave you lost your audio in Camtasia? How to restore the audio that you silenced - three methods to bring back or unmute the audio stream on a clip that has been muted or that you have used ‘Silence audio’ on. In this quick tip video I show you howCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-restore-the-audio-points-on-a-videoclip-in-camtasia-after-silence-audio/)
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Adjust Levels in Photoshop: Fix Lighting, Contrast, and Colour
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-levels-in-photoshop-fix-lighting-contrast-and-colour/
Last updated: 2026-02-25T18:14:20.000Z
The Levels adjustment is arguably the single most powerful — and simplest — tool for improving the look of your photos in Photoshop. Whether your images are underexposed, faded, washed out, or lacking contrast, the Levels dialog gives you precise control over the tonal range. This comprehensive tutorial covers everything you need to know about using Levels effectively.
## Understanding the Levels Histogram
Before adjusting anything, it’s important to understand what the histogram is telling you. The histogram displays the distribution of tones in your image:
- **Left side** \= shadows (dark tones)
- **Middle** \= midtones
- **Right side** \= highlights (bright tones)
If the histogram is bunched to one side with empty space on the other, your image lacks full tonal range — and that’s exactly what Levels fixes.
A dark, underexposed photo open in Photoshop — the starting point before applying Levels.
## Adding a Levels Adjustment Layer
Always use a **Levels adjustment layer** rather than applying Levels directly. This keeps your editing non-destructive — you can tweak or remove the adjustment at any time without permanently altering the original image.
1. Go to **Layer > New Adjustment Layer > Levels** (or click the Levels icon in the Adjustments panel)
2. The Properties panel opens showing the histogram and three input sliders
The Levels adjustment layer and histogram — notice how the data is bunched to the right, indicating a dark image.
## The Three Input Sliders
The Levels dialog has three sliders beneath the histogram that control the tonal mapping:
- **Black point (left slider)** — drag right to deepen the darkest tones. Move this to where the histogram data begins.
- **White point (right slider)** — drag left to brighten the lightest tones. Move this to where the histogram data ends.
- **Midtone/gamma (centre slider)** — drag left to brighten the overall image, or right to darken it. This is the most commonly used slider.
The key technique: **drag the black and white point sliders inward to meet the edges of the histogram data**. This ensures your image uses the full tonal range from pure black to pure white, which instantly improves contrast and vibrancy.
After adjusting the Levels — the midtone slider brightens the image, revealing detail hidden in the shadows.
## Correcting Colour Casts with Individual Channels
The Levels dialog also lets you adjust individual colour channels (Red, Green, Blue). This is useful for correcting colour casts — for example, if a photo has a yellow tint, you can boost the Blue channel to counteract it. Select the channel from the dropdown menu and apply the same slider technique.
## Real-World Examples
The tutorial walks through several practical examples:
- **Underexposed photos** — images that are too dark, where pulling the midtone slider left brings out hidden detail
- **Faded/washed-out photos** — where the black and white points need to be pulled inward to restore contrast
- **Scanned images** — old photos or documents that have lost their tonal range over time
- **Photos with colour casts** — using the individual RGB channels to neutralise unwanted tints
A second example: a faded outdoor photo corrected using Levels with both the shadow and highlight sliders adjusted.
## When to Use Levels vs. Curves
Levels and Curves both adjust tonal range, but Levels is simpler and faster for most corrections. Use Levels when you need to:
- Quickly fix overall brightness and contrast
- Correct a colour cast
- Restore tonal range in faded or scanned images
Curves offers more precision for targeted adjustments (like brightening just the midtones without affecting shadows), but for the majority of everyday photo corrections, Levels is all you need. Understanding [how layers work in Photoshop](https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-layers-in-photoshop-a-beginners-guide/) will also help you keep your edits organised and non-destructive.
### How to Create a Contact Sheet in Photoshop Automatically
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-a-contact-sheet-in-photoshop-automatically/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T18:41:42.000Z
Need to combine multiple images into a single overview sheet? Photoshop’s built-in Contact Sheet II automation does this automatically — perfect for sending product photo samples, creating image catalogues, or generating thumbnail overviews from entire folders of images.
## What Is a Contact Sheet?
A contact sheet is a single image containing a grid of smaller thumbnail images. Traditionally used in photography to preview an entire roll of film at a glance, digital contact sheets are equally useful for:
- Sending a sample of product photos to a client for review
- Creating combined thumbnails for online product listings (Etsy, eBay, etc.)
- Generating a visual catalogue of assets
- Printing a quick reference sheet of images in a folder
## Organising Your Images
Before creating the contact sheet, organise your images into folders. Photoshop can process a single folder or include subfolders — if you tick **Include Subfolders**, it creates a separate contact sheet for each subfolder. This is useful when you have product images grouped by category.
## Using Contact Sheet II
Go to **File > Automate > Contact Sheet II** to open the dialog:
The Contact Sheet II dialog lets you configure the source folder, document size, and thumbnail grid layout.
The key settings to configure:
- **Source Images** — choose a folder containing your images. Tick “Include Subfolders” if your images are in sub-directories.
- **Document size** — set the width, height, and resolution. For screen use, 72 PPI is fine; for print, use 300 PPI.
- **Thumbnails** — set the number of columns and rows. More columns means smaller thumbnails. The “Across First” option fills left-to-right before moving down.
- **Use Filename as Caption** — optionally prints the filename beneath each thumbnail for easy identification.
## The Result
Click OK and Photoshop processes all the images automatically. If you have more images than fit on one sheet (based on your column and row settings), Photoshop creates multiple contact sheets.
The finished contact sheet — Photoshop automatically arranges product photos into a neat grid.
If you’re working with large numbers of product photos, you might also want to [batch resize them using Photoshop’s Image Processor](https://cotovan.com/post/photoshop-batch-resize-images-using-photoshops-image-processor-tool/) before creating the contact sheet.
## Customisation Tips
- **Experiment with row/column counts** to find the right balance between thumbnail size and number of images per sheet
- **Group images by subfolder** to get organised, themed contact sheets automatically
- **Flatten and save as JPEG** when done — the contact sheet is created as a layered document with each thumbnail on its own layer
### How to Create Custom Zoom Virtual Backgrounds with Your Logo in Xara
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-custom-zoom-virtual-backgrounds-with-your-logo-in-xara/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T08:33:49.000Z
Instead of using generic virtual backgrounds in Zoom, you can create your own branded background with your logo and website address. This tutorial shows you how to design a professional-looking static virtual background in Xara Designer Pro and apply it in Zoom.
## Why Create a Custom Background?
A branded virtual background adds a professional touch to your video calls. Whether you’re in client meetings, webinars, or team calls, displaying your logo and website subtly reinforces your brand. It’s much better than the default scenery photos that everyone else uses.
## Setting Up the Canvas
Zoom virtual backgrounds work best at 1920×1080 pixels (Full HD). In Xara, create a new custom-sized document at these dimensions. Choose a dark, solid colour or subtle gradient as your base — dark backgrounds tend to work best with virtual background technology since they create good contrast with the person in the foreground.
## Adding Your Logo and Text
Designing a custom dark virtual background in Xara with the logo positioned in the corner.
Import your logo and place it in a corner — typically the top-left or top-right. Keep it small enough to be visible but not distracting. Add your website URL in a clean, readable font. The key is subtlety: you want people to notice your branding without it overwhelming the conversation.
## Design Considerations
- **Keep the centre clear** — that’s where you appear on camera, so avoid placing elements there.
- **Use dark, solid colours** — complex patterns or bright colours can cause flickering with virtual background technology.
- **Export as JPEG** — Zoom supports both JPEG and PNG for static backgrounds.
- **Resolution matters** — use 1920×1080 for crisp, professional results.
## Exporting and Applying in Zoom
Export your design as a high-quality JPEG from Xara. Then open Zoom, go to Settings → Virtual Background, and click the “+” button to add your custom image.
The custom background applied in Zoom's Virtual Background settings.
Your new branded background will appear alongside the default options. You can create multiple versions — a dark one, a light one, one with your website, one without — and switch between them depending on the meeting context.
### How to Change Page Size, Background Colour, and Layout Options in Xara Designer Pro
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-change-page-size-background-colour-and-layout-options-in-xara-designer-pro/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T08:32:47.000Z
When working on print projects like brochures, magazines, or leaflets in Xara Designer Pro, getting the page size and layout right is essential. This tutorial covers all the page options available — from changing sizes to custom dimensions, background colours, and double-page spreads.
## Creating a New Document with a Default Page Size
When you create a new document via File → New, Xara presents the most common document sizes. Select A4 portrait, US Letter, or any other standard format to get started quickly.
## Changing the Page Size After Creation
Right-click on the page to access Page Options, Auto-Fit, and background settings.
Already started designing and need a different page size? Simply right-click on the page and select **Page Options**. This opens a dialog showing your current page size (e.g., A4). From the dropdown, choose a different preset like US Letter, A5, or A3, then click **Apply**. Your page changes but existing content stays in place — you may need to rearrange elements if the new size is significantly different.
## Auto-Fit Objects When Resizing
Xara can automatically scale and reposition your content when you change the page size. Right-click the page, select **Auto-Fit to page**, and choose to fit width only or both width and height. After enabling this, any page size change will attempt to rescale your objects proportionally.
Content automatically repositioned after changing the page size with auto-fit enabled.
However, this feature is off by default for good reason — the results are not always perfect. When switching between very different aspect ratios (like portrait to landscape), clipping and awkward positioning can occur. In many cases, manually rearranging your content gives better results than relying on auto-fit.
## Manually Dragging the Page Edges
For quick, informal resizing, you can drag the page edges directly. First, right-click on the page, open **Page Options**, and un-tick **Lock page size**. After clicking Apply, you can click and drag the right and bottom edges of the page to any size you want.
## Creating a Custom Page Size
Need a specific size like 10cm × 10cm? Right-click, select Page Options, choose **Custom** from the dropdown, and type in your exact width and height values. Click Apply and your page immediately changes to your specified dimensions.
## Changing the Page Background Colour
To design on a coloured background instead of white, right-click the page and go to **Page background** → **Edit page color**. Change the dropdown from “None” to “Color”, then pick any colour from the palette. This is useful when designing materials with dark or coloured backgrounds where white wouldn’t represent the final output.
## Double Page Spread Layout
When designing magazines, newspapers, or brochures with facing pages, right-click the page, open Page Options, and enable **Double page**. This displays your pages side by side rather than stacked vertically, letting you see how a two-page spread looks together — essential for designs that span across the centre fold.
### How to Create Flowing Text and Linked Text Boxes in Xara Designer Pro
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-flowing-text-and-linked-text-boxes-in-xara-designer-pro/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T08:31:39.000Z
Creating magazine-style multi-column layouts in Xara Designer Pro is straightforward once you understand how text boxes link together. This tutorial covers everything from inserting large blocks of text to defining columns, linking text across boxes, and making text flow around objects.
## Simple Text vs. Multi-Column Text
When you use the Text tool and click on the page, you create a simple text block. This is fine for titles or short paragraphs, but it doesn’t support columns or text flow. For magazine-style layouts, you need text areas (also called text boxes).
## Creating Text Areas and Columns
A two-column text layout with text flowing between linked columns and an overflow indicator.
To create a text area, use the Text tool and **click and drag** to define a rectangular area. Once created, you can paste or type large amounts of text into it. To split this into columns, go to the text formatting options and set the number of columns. The text will automatically reflow to fill the columns equally.
## Linking Text Boxes Across the Page
For more control over your layout, create separate text boxes and link them together. When the first box overflows (indicated by a small arrow icon), click the overflow indicator and then click on the next text box. The overflow text will flow into the linked box automatically.
Text flowing across three linked columns with a second page visible below.
You can chain as many text boxes as you need, even across multiple pages. This is the same principle used in professional desktop publishing for creating newspaper and magazine layouts.
## Text Flow Around Objects (Repelling)
When you place an image or shape over a text area, the text doesn’t automatically wrap around it. To enable text wrapping, select the object and use the **Repel** option. You can choose between:
- **Rectangular repelling** — text wraps in a rectangular boundary around the object.
- **Contour repelling** — text wraps closely following the object’s shape.
## Anchoring Objects in Text
You can also anchor objects within a text flow, so they move with the text as content is added or removed. This keeps images positioned relative to the paragraphs they illustrate, just like in a word processor.
### How to Create Scrolling Text Credits in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-scrolling-text-credits-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-22T17:45:45.000Z
Scrolling text credits — like you see at the end of movies — are a frequent request for video projects. Whether you're crediting team members, listing music sources, or adding acknowledgments, [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) makes it straightforward using a text annotation combined with a custom animation.
## Step 1: Add a Text Annotation
Start with a blank project (or at the point in your timeline where credits should appear). Go to **Annotations** in the left panel and drag a text callout onto your canvas.
Double-click inside the text box, select all the default text, and paste your credits. You can use any placeholder text while setting things up — Lorem Ipsum works fine for testing.
Add a text annotation from the Annotations panel and paste your credits text
## Step 2: Format Your Credits
With the text selected, format it to look like proper credits:
- **Center-align** the text
- Break lines into **short phrases** — names, roles, acknowledgments on separate lines
- Adjust the **font, size, and color** in the Properties panel on the right
- You can style individual lines differently — select specific text to change its font weight or color
Resize the text box to control how wide your credits appear on screen.
## Step 3: Position Text Below the Canvas
This is the key trick. With the text annotation selected and the playhead at the **start** of the clip:
1. Press the **Down arrow key** repeatedly to push the text below the visible canvas area
2. Hold **Shift** while pressing Down to move it faster
3. Keep going until the text is completely off-screen below the canvas
You can zoom out with the mouse wheel to see where your text is positioned relative to the canvas.
## Step 4: Extend the Clip Duration
Before adding the animation, decide how long your credits should scroll. Drag the right edge of the text clip in the timeline to extend it — 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or however long you need. Longer clips mean slower, more readable scrolling.
## Step 5: Add a Custom Animation
Go to the **Animations** tab in the left panel. Double-click **Custom** to add a custom animation to your text clip.
Open the Animations tab and double-click Custom to add a custom animation to your text
You'll see an animation arrow appear on the clip in the timeline. This arrow represents the transition from the starting position to the ending position.
## Step 6: Stretch the Animation
By default, the animation only covers a few seconds. You need it to span the **entire clip**. Drag the animation arrow's right edge all the way to the end of the text clip.
Stretch the animation arrow to span the entire clip duration for smooth scrolling
## Step 7: Set the End Position
Move the playhead to the **end** of the clip. Now move the text **upward** — past the top of the canvas — until it's completely off-screen above. Press the **Up arrow key** (hold Shift for faster movement).
The animation will now move the text from below the canvas (start position) to above the canvas (end position), creating the classic scrolling credits effect.
## Step 8: Disable Easing for Constant Speed
By default, Camtasia applies easing to animations — the text will accelerate at the start and decelerate at the end. For credits, you want a **constant scrolling speed**.
Right-click on the animation arrow in the timeline and look for the easing options. Set both the start and end easing to **None** or **Linear** for a smooth, constant scroll.
### Tips for Better Scrolling Credits
- **Longer clips = slower scroll.** If the text moves too fast, extend the clip duration. Sometimes you may want to match the credits to a song or something.
- **Test playback** before rendering — make sure all text is readable at the chosen speed.
- **For very long credits,** duplicate the text clip on the timeline and continue the scroll across multiple clips if needed.
- Use a **black background** with white text for the classic movie credits look.
### Related guides
[Change Orientation, Resolution and Aspect Ratio of Your Project in CamtasiaNeed to switch your Camtasia project from landscape to portrait — or vice versa? This quick tip shows you how to change the canvas orientation, resolution, and aspect ratio in just a few clicks using Project Settings. The Default: Horizontal (16:9) When you create a new project in Camtasia, it defaults to a standard horizontal 16:9 layout — typically FHD (1920×1080). This is the standard for YouTube videos and most screen recordings. Open Project Settings To change orientation, go to Edit Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-change-project-orientation/)
[How to Narrate PowerPoint Presentations Using Camtasia (Step-by-Step Guide)You can import your slides, narrate them one by one at your own pace, enhance the audio, and organise everything with markers for easy navigation.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/narrate-powerpoint-presentations-camtasia/)
If you wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Play a Video Clip Inside a Phone Frame in Premiere Pro
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-play-a-video-clip-inside-a-phone-frame-in-premiere-pro/
Last updated: 2026-03-24T08:41:30.000Z
Placing a video clip inside a phone or device frame is a popular technique for product demos, app showcases, and social media content. In Adobe Premiere Pro, you can achieve this using a PNG phone frame with a transparent screen area and an opacity mask to clip your video to fit perfectly inside it.
## Setting Up the Layers
You'll need two assets: a phone frame PNG with a transparent area where the screen is, and the video clip you want to display inside. Import both into your Premiere Pro project. Create a new sequence, then drag your video onto the V1 track and the phone frame PNG onto V2 (above the video).
Select the phone frame on V2 and use **Effect Controls > Motion > Scale** to resize it so it sits naturally over your video. Position it where you want the phone to appear in the final composition.
## Creating the Opacity Mask
Now select the **video layer on V1**. In Effect Controls, find the **Opacity** section and click the **Free Draw Bezier** pen icon to create a custom mask shape.
The free-draw bezier opacity mask in Effect Controls clips the video to the phone screen area.
Click on each corner of the phone's screen area in the Program Monitor to draw the mask shape. You're essentially tracing the outline of the transparent screen region. The mask hides everything outside the shape, so only the portion of the video inside the phone screen remains visible.
Adjust the **Mask Feather** slightly (1-2 pixels) for cleaner edges that blend naturally with the phone frame. If you've done [masking in Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/how-to-mask-videos-inside-custom-shapes-in-camtasia/), the concept is similar — you're defining a visible area for the video layer.
The final composite with video playing inside the phone frame.
## Nesting for Combined Scaling
Once the mask looks right, you may want to scale or animate the entire composition — phone frame and video together. To do this, select both clips, right-click, and choose **Nest**. This combines them into a single nested sequence that you can scale, rotate, and position as one unit.
### Related guides
[Play video inside phone or Custom Device Frame in Camtasia 2021 | Media Matte and MaskingCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/play-video-inside-phone-or-custom-device-frame-in-camtasia-2021-media-matte-and-masking/)
[How to add transitions between video clips in Adobe Premiere ProCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/how-to-add-transitions-between-video-clips-in-adobe-premiere-pro/)
[Import image sequence into Adobe Premiere as a clip | Premiere Pro TutorialCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/import-image-sequence-into-adobe-premiere-as-a-clip-premiere-pro-tutorial/)
This same technique works for tablets, monitors, or any custom device frame — just swap out the PNG. You can also use it for [scene transitions](https://cotovan.com/how-to-add-transitions-between-video-clips-in-adobe-premiere-pro/) where the video zooms into a device frame.
### How to Change Properties of Annotations in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-change-properties-of-annotations-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-03-14T09:11:23.000Z
When you add annotations to your [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) project — callouts, arrows, shapes, or highlights — you can customise nearly every visual property. Here’s how to change the colour, size, opacity, outline, text font, and more.
## Accessing Annotation Properties
Once you place an annotation on the canvas from the **Annotations** tab, select it and look at the **Properties** panel on the right side. In [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) 2020+, you’ll see three tabs:
- **Clip** — controls the overall opacity, scale, rotation, and position of the annotation
- **Annotation-specific tab** — controls the shape, fill colour, outline colour/thickness, and other visual properties
- **Text** — if the annotation contains text (like a callout), this controls font, size, colour, and alignment
The Annotations properties panel showing shape, fill colour, opacity, and outline settings for a selected callout.
## What You Can Customise
- **Shape** — choose from speech bubbles, rounded rectangles, arrows, and more
- **Fill** — solid colour, or set to none for an outline-only look
- **Opacity** — make the annotation semi-transparent
- **Outline** — add a border with custom colour and thickness
- **Text properties** — font, size, colour, bold, italic, alignment
For more on working with annotations, see the guide on [resizing and rotating annotations in Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-resize-rotate-annotations-in-camtasia-complete-guide/). You can also [save and reuse effects stacks](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-effects-stacks-in-camtasia/) to apply consistent styling across projects.
If you wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Change the Color of Objects in a Video Using Adobe Premiere Pro
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-change-the-color-of-objects-in-a-video-using-adobe-premiere-pro/
Last updated: 2026-06-18T12:14:53.000Z
Need to change the color of a dress, a car, or any object in your video without masking or tracking? Adobe Premiere Pro has a simple built-in effect called **Change to Color** that does exactly this. It targets a specific color in your footage and replaces it with another — no frame-by-frame work required.
## Applying the Effect
Open the **Effects** panel (Window > Effects) and search for "color." Under **Video Effects > Color Correction**, find **Change to Color** and drag it onto your clip in the timeline.
Search for 'color' in the Effects panel and find Change to Color under Color Correction.
Select your clip, then open **Effect Controls**. You'll see the Change to Color settings with two color swatches: **From** (the source color) and **To** (the target color). Click the eyedropper next to "From" and pick the color you want to change directly from the video preview. Then click the "To" swatch and choose your replacement color.
Use the color picker to set the source color (From) and the target color (To) in Effect Controls.
### Related guides
[How to add transitions between video clips in Adobe Premiere ProCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/how-to-add-transitions-between-video-clips-in-adobe-premiere-pro/)
[How to stabilize video in Adobe Premiere | Video StabilisationIf you have a shaky video and would like to make it smoother, you can achieve that in Adobe Premiere quite easily.Cristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/how-to-stabilize-video-in-adobe-premiere-video-stabilisation/)
[Import image sequence into Adobe Premiere as a clip | Premiere Pro TutorialCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/import-image-sequence-into-adobe-premiere-as-a-clip-premiere-pro-tutorial/)
Adjust the **Tolerance** and **Softness** sliders to fine-tune the range of colors being replaced. Too much tolerance and surrounding colors get affected; too little and you'll see remnants of the original color. The effect works best on objects with a relatively uniform, distinct color.
### How to Blur License Plates in Adobe Premiere Pro Using Tracking Masks
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-blur-license-plates-in-adobe-premiere-pro-using-tracking-masks/
Last updated: 2026-02-28T12:49:02.000Z
Adobe Premiere Pro has a built-in masking and tracking engine that makes blurring moving objects straightforward. Whether you need to hide license plates, faces, or any sensitive information in your footage, you can draw a mask, apply a blur effect, and track it across the clip — all without leaving Premiere.
## Adding the Gaussian Blur Effect
Start by selecting the video clip on your timeline. Go to the **Effects** panel and search for **Gaussian Blur** (under Video Effects → Blur & Sharpen). Drag it onto your clip. In the **Effect Controls** panel, you'll see the Gaussian Blur effect appear with a Blurriness slider — leave it at 0 for now while you set up the mask.
## Drawing the Mask
Under the Gaussian Blur effect in Effect Controls, you'll see mask shape icons. Click the **pen tool** (free-draw Bezier) to draw a custom mask shape. In the Program Monitor, click around the license plate to create a mask outline. You don't need to be pixel-perfect — you'll feather the edges later.
A Bezier mask drawn around the license plate — the mask path, feather, and opacity controls are in the Effect Controls panel
Once the mask is drawn, increase the **Blurriness** value (50 or higher works well) and adjust **Mask Feather** to soften the edges so the blur blends naturally with the surrounding footage.
## Tracking the Mask
Since the car is moving, the mask needs to follow the license plate throughout the clip. In the Effect Controls panel under **Mask (1)**, you'll find tracking controls — a set of transport buttons. Click **Track Selected Mask Forward** to have Premiere automatically follow the object frame by frame.
Click Track Selected Mask Forward to make the mask follow the moving license plate automatically
Premiere analyses each frame and adjusts the mask position to follow the license plate. For most footage, the default tracking works well. If the mask drifts on a specific frame, you can pause tracking, manually adjust the mask at that point, and resume.
## Fine-Tuning and Tips
After tracking completes, scrub through the timeline to check the result. Pay attention to moments where the object moves quickly or partially leaves the frame — these are where tracking might lose accuracy.
You can also track **backwards** if you started in the middle of a clip. And if you need to blur multiple objects, add another Gaussian Blur effect with a separate mask — each mask tracks independently.
The finished result — the license plate is blurred and the mask tracked across the entire clip
This technique works for any moving object: faces in crowd footage, brand logos you don't have permission to show, or personal information visible on screen.
### Basics of Animation in Camtasia: A Beginner's Guide to Keyframes and Motion
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/basics-of-animation-in-camtasia-a-beginners-guide-to-keyframes-and-motion/
Last updated: 2026-02-20T07:46:44.000Z
Animation brings static elements to life — and [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) makes it surprisingly accessible even for beginners. In this comprehensive tutorial, I cover everything from basic preset animations to custom keyframe-based motion, showing you how to precisely move objects across the canvas.
**Watch the full tutorial:**
### Understanding the Animations Panel
Camtasia's animation system lives under the **Animations** tab in the left-hand panel. You'll find two categories:
- **Zoom-n-Pan** — Zoom into or pan across your canvas (great for screen recordings)
- **Animations** — Move, scale, rotate, and fade objects
The preset animations include:
- **Custom** — Build your own animation from scratch (most flexible)
- **Full Opacity / No Opacity** — Fade in or fade out
- **Restore** — Return an object to its original state
- **Scale Down / Scale Up / Scale to Fit** — Size changes
- **Smart Focus** — Automatically focuses on the active area of a screen recording
Camtasia's Animations panel with preset animations — Custom lets you build your own from scratch
## Applying Your First Animation
To animate an object:
1. Place an image, text, or shape on the canvas
2. Drag a **Custom** animation from the panel onto the clip on the timeline
3. A yellow arrow appears on the timeline — this is your animation
4. Move the playhead to the arrow's **start point** and position the object where you want the animation to begin
5. Move the playhead to the arrow's **end point** and position the object where you want it to end up
Camtasia interpolates the movement between these two positions. The object will smoothly travel from start to end during the animation's duration.
The yellow arrow on the timeline represents the animation — drag its edges to change the duration
## Controlling Animation Timing
The yellow arrow on the timeline controls everything about your animation's timing:
- **Drag the edges** to make the animation faster (shorter) or slower (longer)
- **Drag the whole arrow** to change when the animation starts
- **Hover over the arrow** to see the exact Start Time and Duration
Hovering over the animation arrow reveals its Start Time and Duration for precise control
You can also adjust animation properties in the Properties panel on the right — Scale, Opacity, Rotation, and Position (X, Y, Z) are all animatable.
## Working with Multiple Animations
Things get interesting when you combine multiple animated objects. Each object lives on its own track, and each can have independent animation timing. This lets you create sequences like:
- A logo that slides in from the left while text fades in from below
- Multiple elements that animate in sequence with staggered timing
- Objects that move, scale, and rotate simultaneously
Multiple animated objects across separate tracks — each with their own animation timing and motion paths
## Copying and Reusing Animations
Once you've set up an animation you like, you can copy it to other clips:
- Right-click the animation arrow and copy it
- Paste it onto another clip on the timeline
- Adjust the end position as needed — the timing and easing carry over
This is a huge time saver when animating similar elements, like a series of bullet points or a grid of images.
## Tips for Better Animations
- **Keep it subtle** — Smooth, short animations (0.5-1.5 seconds) look more professional than dramatic ones
- **Use the Ease In/Ease Out** properties to make motion feel natural
- **Plan your layout** before animating — know where objects start and end
- Check out my [flowchart animation tutorial](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-animate-arrows-for-a-flowchart-in-camtasia/) and [cinematic text effect tutorial](https://cotovan.com/post/cinematic-expanding-text-effect-in-camtasia/) for more advanced techniques
[3 Best Animations in Camtasia (And How to Use Them)Camtasia has a lot of animation presets, but you don’t need all of them. In this tutorial, I’ll show you the 3 animations I use the most — and how to add them to your Favorites for quick access. 1\. Custom Animation The Custom animation is the most powerful option inCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-3-best-animations/)
[How to animate arrows for a flowchart in CamtasiaIf you want to animate arrows for a flowchart or other diagram or tutorial, there are a few ways you can do it in Camtasia, using animations or using behaviours or simple transitions. It depends on how fancy you want to get. Camtasia offers a few ways of revealing andCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-animate-arrows-for-a-flowchart-in-camtasia/)
[Cinematic Expanding Text Effect in CamtasiaA cool ‘Hollywood’ effect in my latest Camtasia video. I demonstrate how to create a cinematic text expanding effect where the distance between the letters of a word increases as time goes on. While Camtasia allows for vertical and horizontal spacing changes for words and letters, it’s not possible toCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/cinematic-expanding-text-effect-in-camtasia/)
If you’re wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I’m here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Use the Favourites Feature in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-the-favourites-feature-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-06-18T12:15:24.000Z
Camtasia 2020 introduced a **Favourites** feature that lets you collect your most-used effects, transitions, annotations, and behaviours into a single, quick-access section. No more switching between tabs to find the tools you use constantly.
## Adding Items to Favourites
To add any effect, transition, annotation, or behaviour to Favourites:
1. Navigate to the item in its original section (e.g., Transitions, Annotations)
2. Right-click and select **Add to Favourites** (or click the star icon)
3. The item now appears in the Favourites section on the left sidebar
The Favourites panel showing saved annotations and transitions, with the Type filter dropdown expanded.
## Filtering Favourites
The **Type** dropdown lets you filter by category — All, Annotations, Transitions, Behaviors, or Animations — so you can quickly find what you need even as your favourites list grows.
This is similar to the [Media Library](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-use-the-media-library-in-camtasia-to-save-and-reuse-assets/) where you store reusable assets, but Favourites is specifically for program features rather than media files. You can also [save and reuse effects stacks](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-save-and-reuse-effects-stacks-in-camtasia/) for commonly applied combinations of effects.
### Audiate by TechSmith: First Look at Text-Based Audio Editing
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/audiate-by-techsmith-first-look-at-text-based-audio-editing/
Last updated: 2026-02-28T12:51:03.000Z
Audiate is a standalone audio editing tool from TechSmith (the makers of [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia)) that lets you edit audio by editing text. Record or import audio, Audiate transcribes it, and you can then cut, move, and rearrange your audio by manipulating the transcript — just like editing a document.
The Audiate start screen where you can import an audio file or record directly in the app.
## How Audiate Works
When you record or import audio, Audiate automatically transcribes the speech to text. You can then:
- **Edit text to edit audio** — select and delete words in the transcript, and the corresponding audio is removed
- **Move and rearrange** — cut and paste text blocks, and the audio moves with them
- **Correct transcription errors** — right-click any word to replace it with the correct text
## Removing Filler Words and Hesitations
One of Audiate’s standout features is automatic filler word detection. It identifies “ums”, “ahs”, and other hesitations in your recording and highlights them. You can then remove them all in one click:
Audiate’s Edit menu includes one-click options to silence or delete all filler words and hesitations.
- **Silence All Hesitations** — replaces filler words with silence (keeps timing intact)
- **Delete All Hesitations** — removes filler words entirely (shortens the audio)
## The Waveform Editor
Beyond the text view, Audiate also provides a traditional waveform editor with the transcribed words labelled underneath each audio segment. This dual view — text above, waveform below — gives you both high-level text editing and precise audio control.
The Waveform Editor shows the audio waveform with each transcribed word labelled underneath for precise editing.
## Integration with Camtasia
Audiate exports directly to Camtasia — your edited audio file drops straight onto the timeline. This is particularly useful for narration workflows where you record your voice-over in Audiate, clean it up, and then bring it into Camtasia for the final video.
### How to Change Video Speed and Duration in Camtasia
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-change-video-speed-and-duration-in-camtasia/
Last updated: 2026-02-21T12:54:09.000Z
Need to speed up or slow down a video clip in [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia)? You can adjust clip speed using a multiplier or set an exact duration in minutes, seconds, and frames. Here are two methods.
## Method 1: Use the Clip Speed Properties Panel
Right-click on a clip in the timeline and select **Add Clip Speed**. This adds a yellow speed bar beneath the clip and opens the Clip Speed panel on the right.
The Clip Speed panel shows the current speed multiplier and lets you set an exact duration.
By default, the speed is **1.00x** (normal). To slow the clip down, enter a value below 1 — for example, **0.50x** plays at half speed. To speed it up, enter a value above 1\. You can also type an exact duration: set the minutes, seconds, and frames fields to your desired length, and Camtasia calculates the speed multiplier automatically.
## Method 2: Drag the Clip Speed Edge
For a more visual approach, hover your mouse over the edge of the yellow Clip Speed bar on the timeline. The cursor changes to a resize arrow — drag left to shorten (speed up) or right to extend (slow down) the clip.
Drag the edge of the Clip Speed bar to visually adjust the duration. A tooltip shows the current speed multiplier.
This method is useful when you want to match the clip length to a specific point on the timeline without calculating exact values.
## Alternative: Apply from the Visual Effects Panel
You can also apply the Clip Speed effect by going to **Visual Effects** in the left panel and dragging **Clip Speed** onto your clip. This does the same thing as the right-click method — it adds the speed bar and opens the properties panel.
### Related guides
[How to Adjust Variable Audio Volume Levels in CamtasiaLearn to use volume keyframes in CamtasiaCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-adjust-variable-audio-volume-levels-in-camtasia/)
[Camtasia Interface Overview | Step by step Camtasia tutorialCamtasia Interface Overview | Step by step Camtasia tutorialCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-interface-overview-step-by-step-camtasia-tutorial/)
[Working with the timeline in Camtasia | Editing clips in a Camtasia project | Camtasia TutorialWorking with the timeline in Camtasia | Editing clips in a Camtasia project | Camtasia TutorialCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-the-timeline-in-camtasia-editing-clips-in-a-camtasia-project-camtasia-tutorial/)
If you wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
### How to Start a New Project in Camtasia: Canvas Size, Frame Rate, and Project Settings
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-start-a-new-project-in-camtasia-canvas-size-frame-rate-and-project-settings/
Last updated: 2026-02-22T10:15:57.000Z
When you launch [Camtasia](https://cotovan.com/camtasia), one of the first decisions you make is how to set up your project. Getting the canvas size, frame rate, and other settings right from the start saves you from having to rearrange everything later. This tutorial walks you through starting a new project and configuring the essential project properties.
## The Welcome Screen: New Project vs. New Recording
When Camtasia opens, you'll see the welcome screen with three options: **New Project**, **New Recording**, and **Open Project**.
If you choose **New Recording**, Camtasia opens the recorder directly. You'll select your capture area — full screen, custom size, or one of the preset dimensions — and start recording. After you stop, the recording automatically appears in the main editor on the timeline.
The Camtasia recorder with options for screen capture area and recorded inputs
If you choose **New Project**, Camtasia opens the main editor with a blank canvas and empty timeline, ready for you to import media files and start editing.
## Project Settings: Canvas Size, Frame Rate, and Audio
The most important step when starting a new project is setting the **canvas dimensions**. This determines the resolution of your final video. You can access project settings by going to **Edit > Project Settings** (or clicking the canvas zoom dropdown and selecting **Project Settings**).
Project Settings dialog — set your canvas dimensions, frame rate, and audio normalization before you start editing
Key settings to configure:
- **Canvas Dimensions:** Camtasia defaults to 1080p HD (1920×1080). You can change this to 4K Ultra HD, 720p, or social media sizes like Instagram or Facebook formats. Choose the resolution that matches your intended output.
- **Frame Rate:** Choose between 30 fps (standard) or 60 fps (smoother motion). For screen recording tutorials, 30 fps is usually sufficient.
- **Auto-normalize loudness:** When enabled, Camtasia automatically levels the audio volume across all clips in your project. This is useful when you combine recordings from different sources or sessions with varying volume levels.
**Important tip:** Always set your canvas size *before* you start editing. If you change it later after adding clips, transitions, and graphics, everything will shift and you'll spend time repositioning elements. Even if you record at 4K, you can still export at a lower resolution — the export settings are separate from the project canvas size.
## Importing Media Files
Once your project settings are configured, the next step is importing your media. You can drag files directly from your computer's file explorer into the Camtasia Media Bin. Camtasia supports a wide range of formats including MP4, MOV, AVI, MP3, WAV, JPEG, PNG (with alpha channel support), GIF, BMP, PDF, and even PowerPoint files.
Drag files from your computer directly into the Camtasia Media Bin to import them into your project
### Related guides
[Change Orientation, Resolution and Aspect Ratio of Your Project in CamtasiaCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-change-project-orientation/)
[Camtasia Interface Overview | Step by step Camtasia tutorialCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-interface-overview-step-by-step-camtasia-tutorial/)
[Working with the timeline in Camtasia | Editing clips in a Camtasia project | Camtasia TutorialCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/working-with-the-timeline-in-camtasia-editing-clips-in-a-camtasia-project-camtasia-tutorial/)
[Camtasia Export Settings for Best Quality with Custom ProductionCristi CotovanCristi Cotovan](https://cotovan.com/post/camtasia-export-settings-for-best-quality-with-custom-production/)
If you're wish to learn more about Camtasia and wish to have ****a one-on-one Camtasia coaching session**, feel free to [book a call with me](https://cotovan.com/coaching).
I'm here to help you with any questions you have and to guide you through the best workflows, tips, workarounds, or just answer any questions you may have!
[Book a session ](https://cotovan.com/coaching)
## Free Camtasia Tips, Tricks, and Training in Your Inbox
I create regular training content on [****Camtasia**](https://cotovan.com/camtasia) \- if you're trying to learn the platform, I intend to teach all the ins and outs. Subscribe here and when a new article or video goes live, you'll be the first to know!
Subscribe for free
Email sent! Check your inbox to complete your signup.
No spam. Unsubscribe anytime.
Files imported into the Media Bin are not yet on the timeline — they're just available for use. Drag them from the Media Bin to the timeline when you're ready to start editing. This two-step process gives you flexibility to organize your assets before committing them to the timeline.
### How to Create Frame-by-Frame Animations and Animated GIFs in Xara Designer Pro
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/how-to-create-frame-by-frame-animations-and-animated-gifs-in-xara-designer-pro/
Last updated: 2026-02-23T08:34:47.000Z
Xara Designer Pro can create simple frame-by-frame animations and export them as animated GIFs or Flash files. While it’s primarily a vector graphics program, this animation capability is useful for creating simple web animations, banner ads, or fun GIFs.
## How Animation Works in Xara
Xara uses a frame-based approach to animation. Each frame is a separate layer that represents one moment in the sequence. You draw slightly different content on each frame, and when played in sequence, they create the illusion of motion — just like a flipbook.
## Creating Animation Frames
The Animation Frame gallery showing all 19 frames of a growing plant animation.
Open the **Animation Frame gallery** from the Utilities menu. Click **New** to create additional frames. Each frame appears as a separate entry in the gallery, showing its start time and display duration. Switch between frames by clicking them in the gallery, then draw or modify the content for that frame.
In this example, I create a simple plant growing animation by drawing the stem slightly taller in each successive frame, adding leaves and petals progressively.
## Setting Frame Timing and Loop Options
Animation properties dialog for controlling loop behaviour and frame display speed.
Click **Properties** in the Animation Frame gallery to open the animation settings. Here you can control:
- **Loop continuously** or set a specific number of loops.
- **Display duration per frame** — controls the overall speed of the animation. A shorter duration means faster playback.
- **Individual frame timing** — you can also adjust timing for specific frames if some need to display longer than others.
## Previewing and Exporting
Click **Preview** to see your animation in a browser window. When you’re happy with the result, export using File → Export Animation. Choose GIF for web-compatible animated images, or SWF for Flash format. The GIF export preserves the frame timing and loop settings you configured.
### Why do your email subscribers complain of spam for no apparent reason?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/why-your-email-subscribers-complain-spam-no-apparent-reason/
Last updated: 2025-11-02T21:10:15.000Z
If you’ve been managing a mailing list for a while, you’re likely no stranger to a few spam complaints here and there from your subscribers. There’s nothing more frustrating than to put together an excellent email broadcast with interesting info, maybe a tutorial, perhaps an offer or some free downloadable content, only to see that a certain number of subscribers ‘complained’. You might even take it personally!
What does that even mean?
Usually, it means they’ve marked your email as spam/junk. But why does that happen? Why would they mark your emails as spam when everything you do is try to be helpful, provide value, inspire people and generally make the world a better place?
Without being oversensitive about it, it’s still not a good idea to bury your head in the sand either, and maybe think about some potential reasons why:
## Did you send unsolicited email?
Let’s get this obvious one out of the way. I’m giving you the benefit of the doubt but if you’ve imported a mailing list you’ve acquired from ‘somewhere’, even if your email service provider’s screeners managed to miss it, you have a bad list, and it’s to be expected that subscribers would mark your emails as spam.
I’m not talking about migrating your list from one ESP to another – that’s fine, it’s still legit – but importing a list you have purchased from someone else or harvested from the internet. This is not only bad practice and will potentially get your email provider account banned but it’s also ruining your reputation and could even be downright illegal! Bottom line, do not send email to people who have not signed up to your list by themselves! They will mark them as spam in an instant!
## Did you have a more extended period of email downtime?
When you have an email list, you have to keep in touch with your subscribers frequently. There are various debates as to the frequency and volume of emails, and it mostly depends on the type of business and the purpose of the list.
It is known that if you don’t email for a while and then suddenly start sending out emails again, some of your subscribers might be confused and may have even forgotten that they’ve subscribed to your list, leading them to mark it as spam.
I’ve had similar situations in the past. This can also happen if you migrate your email list from one ESP with a lower deliverability to one with a higher one: if your old ESP was somehow not delivering, even your frequent emails would have made it into spam automatically. Then, after the move, suddenly those emails ARE delivered but by this time your subscribers have forgotten about you and, guess what? They mark it as spam!
Bottom line: use an ESP with a good reputation and don’t take too long email ‘vacations’.
## Did you suddenly change the topic of your emails?
It’s important to always deliver on your promises – if you’ve promised to offer ‘free tutorials on web design’ when your visitors subscribed, then that’s what you should send. Don’t trick people into signing up to your list promising one thing and then send them something completely different they did not expect. You know the phrase ‘that’s not what I signed up for!’ It’s exactly my feeling.
If you make it clear that I am signing up for ‘life improvement advice’, then that’s what I’m expecting to receive and if you start sending me links to buy, buy, buy stuff, I’ll probably feel cheated and instead of unsubscribing properly, I’ll take my revenge using the Spam button!
Keep things consistent, don’t ‘repurpose’ a list for something else and more importantly, don’t lend your list to unsavoury advertisers, even if that may make you a quick buck short term. You will lose the confidence of your subscribers, and it will hurt you much more in the future.
## Is the unsubscribe link hard to find (or missing)?
If I receive an email newsletter, even if I give it the benefit of the doubt and assume that I may have subscribed to it in the past but I don’t find it useful anymore, I will try to unsubscribe. But if the unsubscribe link is nowhere to be found or it’s buried deep down, written in a minuscule font with an unreadable colour, guess what? I’ll mark it as spam! I’m sure I’m not the only one.
Any serious email service provider (such as ConvertKit, MailChimp, Aweber, etc.) will require that you include an unsubscribe link in all of your emails, so you should make sure that it’s easily found in conventional locations (usually at the bottom), and it’s clearly labelled.
## Could it be some subscribers are just lazy?
Yes, it’s possible: some subscribers are just lazy – instead of scrolling down and trying to find the unsubscribe button to remove themselves properly from your list, they will mark it as spam and be done with it! Email providers (Gmail, Outlook, etc.) will do their job and move that message to spam; problem solved for the subscriber!
Little do they know that by doing this, they are hurting you.
Here’s what happens when someone marks an email as spam:
All these things considered, you can see that if people are lazy and mark your emails as spam just to get off your list, they are not only damaging your reputation but also make it harder for your subscribers who DO want to get your messages to receive them.
People who don’t manage mailing lists do not usually grasp that this apparently harmless gesture damages your deliverability.
If you notice this to be the case, you can try to provide very clear instructions on how to \* correctly\* unsubscribe from your emails, what link to click and so on, maybe even include a quick ‘unsubscribe’ note at the top of your emails, in simple language, before you get into the main content of the email.
I know, nobody wants to lose subscribers, but if those subscribers are no longer interested in receiving your emails, it’s better to part ways before they can spoil it for the rest of your list.
## Conclusion
Whatever the reasons for subscribers complaining about your emails, it’s up to you to keep things as clean and proper as possible: don’t send unsolicited email, don’t use purchased lists, keep your emails regular and make sure to advise your subscribers how they can unsubscribe should they no longer want to receive your emails.
### Why is the referrer header 'unknown' in ConvertKit's form visitor statistics?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/why-is-referrer-header-unknown-convertkit-form-visitor-statistics/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:19:21.000Z
**When you embed a** [**Kit**](https://cotovan.com/convertkit) **(**formerly ConvertKit**) form on your website, Kit starts to record how many visitors see the form, how many people subscribe to it and so on. In your ConvertKit account, you can see these statistics for visitors, subscribers, conversion rate, as well as 'top referrers'.**
The referrer is a header sent by the browser and it contains the page the visitor was on before they arrived at your page.
This is very useful in web analytics and marketing because it gives you insight into where the traffic to your site or page is coming from and is the main way that platforms such as Google Analytics determine where the visitors originate and how they are moving around the internet from page to page.
It helps to see whether your campaigns are working properly and producing results or if social media traffic is increasing (and where it is increasing) and so on.
This is all nice and good, but what I've noticed is that most of the time, in the ConvertKit referrers list, the top one is 'unknown'. Bummer!
The 'unknown' referrer header means that the browser or the ConvertKit JavaScript code could not identify where the visitor came from.
Not very useful, is it? Why is that happening?
In this short blog post, I list the top reasons why the 'referrer' header might be empty or 'unknown':
## 1\. The address was typed directly
The first reason might be that the visitor typed the address directly in their browser - they did not click a link.
If you have the ConvertKit form embedded on the homepage and visitors type your web address in their browser, that would be a 'no referrer' situation. They were not 'referred' from anywhere.
## 2\. Visit from a browser bookmark
If your visitors have your website bookmarked in their browser, then clicking that link will not send a referrer header, because there isn't one.
## 3\. Link from external application
Maybe you sent someone a PDF file with links to your pages in it, or they open your email in a desktop email client, such as Outlook, Thunderbird, etc., or even click a link in some other third-party application. Those typically do not expose the referrer header either.
## 4\. Secure-to-insecure protocol change
The visitor may have arrived on your site on a https:// link but then they changed the protocol to http:// or clicked a link on your site that is linked with http://. When this happens, the visitor is moved from a 'secure' page to an 'insecure' page, so there's no referrer header specified.
This is a security feature in the browsers, but nevertheless, you might want to make sure that your website is accessible via https and you enforce that by making sure you specify a canonical hostname and redirection rules from insecure to secure version of your pages. This way, the visitors will always browse on the secure version and the referrer will be reported.
Nowadays, having a website without secure connection is no longer acceptable.
## 5\. Security software, antivirus or proxy
If your visitor has some kind of security software on their computer, such as an antivirus or even a proxy (used in corporate networks), which strip the referrer header from the requests. If this happens, I'm afraid there's nothing much you can do about it.
## 6\. Search engine crawler or bot
Finally, another reason could be that this was not a real user but just a bot. Google, Bing, AHREFS, SemRush and other bots crawling and indexing your website do not expose a referrer header.
If you see some of these statistics with unknown, surely some percentage of those are bots. Even various people scanning or loading pages from your site using a program such as cURL or other screen-scraping software might also not expose a referrer header.
## Conclusion
There can be many reasons for the referrer to be unknown in ConvertKit (and other applications), but I wouldn't make such a bit thing out of it. After all, I am sure that ConvertKit did not intend to provide a full-blown analytics solution for your forms, it just shows this referrers list as a quick indication about where people seeing your forms might come from.
If you have a landing page hosted by ConvertKit, this is useful to a degree, but if you embed subscription forms on your website, then you should rely on Google Analytics for much more complete information about your traffic.
Google Analytics is more fit for purpose.
### 10 things you must configure and optimise before launching your website
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/10-things-you-cannot-ignore-before-launching-your-website/
Last updated: 2025-11-18T11:30:13.000Z
So you’ve bought a domain name and designed a website - well done! Before you push that button and start telling the world about your website, make sure you check these next aspects in order to make the most of your shiny new web presence, monitor, optimise, secure your website and help your traffic grow:
1. Google Analytics
2. Google Search Console
3. CloudFlare for security and speed
4. SSL certificate for security and visitor reassurance
5. Caching for website performance
6. Image optimisation and compression
7. Script minification
8. Check for broken links
9. Check canonical URLs
10. Backup your website
## 1\. Google Analytics for monitoring your traffic
An analytics solution is very easily added onto any website and it monitors traffic on all pages of your site: it records how many visitors are coming, where are they from, what websites they’ve been referred from, what pages they are looking at, how long they spend on each page and much, much more!
Launching a website without some sort of analytics solution is like driving a car blindfold: you’re on the road but you have no idea where you’re going. You don’t know how your traffic is evolving or if your content publishing has any effect and your campaigns are bringing the right audience.
Although it doesn’t have to be ‘Google’ Analytics, it surely is one of the best and most comprehensive analytics solutions out there. And on top of that, it’s completely free!
## 2\. Google Search Console for insight into how your website performs in search engines
If Google Analytics tells you what happens to traffic on your website, Google Search Console (formerly Webmaster Tools) tells you how your website is performing in Google searches. It tells you how many pages has Google indexed, what keywords you appear in Google with, how many times people see your website, what are your most popular pages in terms of organic traffic and so on.
It also allows you to specify where Google might find your sitemap, in order to more easily discover and index your website.
On the technical side, as soon as you authorise your website on Google Search Console, you start receiving various notifications and alerts related to your website’s health, such as when Google notices an increase in server errors, if it finds malware on your site, it gives you insight into how mobile-friendly your website is, who links to you and on what websites. It’s an invaluable tool and you can also connect it to Google Analytics to see more detailed reports about your search engine rankings.
## 3\. CloudFlare for speed and security
CloudFlare is a company that offers a multitude of services - all to do with website security, content delivery, speed and more. You can enable CloudFlare at DNS level and once you do (takes about 10 minutes to set up), they will be responsible for all DNS requests to your website and in return, you get:
- **Protection:** Because they control your DNS zone, they will effectively hide the IP address of your real server from malicious people, therefore protecting you from attacks that target your server directly. If your IP address is behind CloudFlare, the people and robots on the internet will see CloudFlare’s IP addresses when they query your domain. Also, CloudFlare mitigates a big part of attacks such as DDoS attacks and protect your machine from being flooded with requests.
- **Speed:** CloudFlare offers free caching of your static content (images, HTML, CSS, javascript code) on their Content Delivery Network. What this means is that you will see huge savings in bandwidth - since they will cache your static content on their servers (usually on multiple servers around the world), your visitors will seamlessly receive that content from a server that is closest to them and saves your server a TON of bandwidth. As I write this, I have more than 50 websites on CloudFlare and most of them achieve savings of about 50% or more. Look at the screenshot below for one of my sites on CloudFlare. I manage many e-commerce websites that have thousands of product images. The savings in bandwidth are huge!
- **Security:** CloudFlare offers a free SSL certificate for your entire domain out of the box. All you have to do is enable it in your CloudFlare account for your domain and voila! Your website can be accessed via *https://* . Starting in 2017, Google declared that they will give secure websites a small ranking boost in their search engine, and starting in 2018, they are actively showing in the Chrome browser for websites without SSL as ‘insecure’. Since it’s free, it’s a no-brainer! And you don’t have to install anything on your server to do it!
There are more benefits to CloudFlare, too many to list them in this section. I’ve written a tutorial on [migrating your domain name to CloudFlare](https://old.cotovan.com/post/how-speed-up-protect-secure-your-website-with-cloudflare-free?ref=cotovan.com) if you want to move your site.
## 4\. SSL Certificate for security
As mentioned above, Google is now favouring websites that have SSL and shows others as ‘insecure’ to visitors. Not only does it look bad, but it’s also unsafe to keep going without SSL on your website, particularly when you can have it for free.
There is no more excuse in 2018 to not have SSL on your website! If you’re not migrating to CloudFlare, you can get a free SSL certificate installed by most respectable hosts, using Let’s Encrypt’s free SSL certificates, or you can still buy SSL from any seller just like before. After you install it, make sure to redirect all non-SSL pages to the SSL version so that all visitors will see the secure version of every page.
## 5\. Caching for speed
You can lighten the load on your server by taking advantage of caching. If your website was built on Wordpress, there are many caching plugins you can install and save on CPU cycles (Total Cache, WP Rocket and more), database queries, etc. by pre-generating the pages and serving them from a static cache. This is done automatically for you behind the scenes so that each page loads as fast as possible.
## 6\. Image optimisation and compression
It’s always a good idea to work properly with images from the website build phase - that way, you will save a lot of time when the time comes to go live. You should always only load optimised images, at the right size for the place you use them and not load huge images for example, if you need it to cover only a quarter of a column on a page.
It’s also a good idea to pre-optimise and compress images before loading them to make sure they are at their best size vs. quality. There are many Wordpress plugins that will optimise and compress images for you afterwards, but it’s best if you have a good idea where each image will be used, how large it needs to be and resize it accordingly before uploading.
Images can seriously increase the loading time of your website as well as consume a lot more bandwidth than necessary. If your hosting account has a bandwidth limit, you can easily chew through that with a few unoptimised images, particularly if you have decent traffic.
If you mostly use JPEGs, which is a lossy format, I’ve found that adjusting the compression by just a little bit, can give you drastic savings in bandwidth. I’ve recently made a study on a number of e-commerce websites I operate and I found the optimal image compression for product images. See below the difference in size it makes to alter the compression from 90 (default) to 70 and then 50\. Since for 50, for the specific type of images I needed (product images) the quality ended up too low and impacted it visually, I settled on 70\. But even that, brought the bandwidth used by images down by almost half! Multiply that by thousands of products and the savings (and loading speed) differences are enormous!
As you can see, once you go over the 70 quality setting, the size increases dramatically and from quality 50 to 90, the file size more than doubles!
| **Size at 90 quality (KB)** | **Size at 70 quality (KB)** | **Size at 50 quality (KB)** |
| --------------------------- | --------------------------- | --------------------------- |
| 35.6 | 20.0 | 15.0 |
| 34.4 | 19.3 | 14.5 |
| 35.8 | 20.1 | 15.0 |
| 24.7 | 13.3 | 9.9 |
| 37.3 | 22.0 | 16.9 |
| 27.4 | 15.3 | 11.5 |
| 27.1 | 15.2 | 11.4 |
| 61.2 | 34.9 | 26.3 |
| **Total: 283.5** | **Total: 160.1** | **Total: 120.5** |
I've recorded a video showing how to optimise images in Photoshop and export them for the web:
## 7\. Minification for reducing useless data in scripts
Minification is the process by which you can reduce the size of scripts that your website needs to load in order to function properly.
You may have CSS stylesheets and Javascript files on your website to provide styling, animation, interaction and so on. When you develop your website, these scripts usually have the code arranged nicely with indentation, line breaks, comments, long variable names and spaces for readability, but web browsers don’t need those in order to render your page and perform the tasks. By minification, you can automatically remove those spaces and indents for deployment. This will make the scripts much smaller and consequently, load faster.
In order to be efficient, this process happens on the server-side (there are plugins for Wordpress, you can do it on your development environment when you save the files and CloudFlare offers it out of the box too). Minifying your script files will ensure you get extra points on page speed tests such as Google Page Speed, GTMetrix, YSlow and others.
Here's an example of the Cloudflare configuration that automatically minifies all the static files on your site:
## 8\. Check for broken links
When I work on a website I'm pretty disorganised. I create most pages as drafts before going into each one of them and adding content, making them pretty. Many times I leave links in my content leading nowhere, with the intention to go back later, before launch, and fix them with the appropriate destination. That doesn't always happen so in some situations I may end up with broken links.
In other situations, I don't get content in time from clients so I just put placeholder pages and draft links in place, just to keep things going, and I forget to fix them or the client changes her mind. Regardless of the reason, every website can have broken links. It's doesn't make a good impression to have your shiny new website with broken links and missing pages and it certainly isn't a good idea from a Search Engine Optimisation standpoint.
That's why, before going live (and at regular intervals after going live), I check for missing links on my website. For this task you need a software or service called a 'crawler' - some software that will take your homepage and try to visit that, then find all the links on your website and visit each one of them, and do the same for the links on those pages and so on, until it's scanned your entire website. When it finds broken pages or errors, it will provide a report so you can go and fix them.
My two favourites for this task are:
- [Xenu link sleuth](https://old.cotovan.com/xenu?ref=cotovan.com) \- a free Windows program that will check any link on your site - pages, images, frames, plug-ins, backgrounds, stylesheets and more. It generates a report in real-time, as it scans and also at the end, you can save the report or email it. Works on secure websites as well. The program is very small and works on Windows 95 all the way to Windows 10.
- [Screaming Frog](https://old.cotovan.com/screaming-frog?ref=cotovan.com) \- this is an online tool, which provides more services than just checking for broken links. The free version offers scans for up to 500 URLs (which might be ok for you if your website is not too large). They also help with some SEO tasks such as finding duplicate content, analysing meta and title tags, generating XML sitemaps and more.
Here's an example of a Xenu link sleuth scan result:
Watch this video for a quick tutorial on using Xenu to scan your website for missing links:
## 9\. Check canonical URLs
A common mistake many webmasters make is to not consider their URL structure. This can hurt their SEO and they lose search engine ranking because of that. While it's great to have search-engine-friendly URLs, such as '/my-page/my-subpage' and so on, there's also a sneaky little aspect that is easily overlooked but which could have huge impact on your rankings: canonical URLs.
### What are 'canonical URLs'?
If there is a page on your website that can be accessed at different URLs, or there are different pages on your site that have the same content, search engines might view those pages as 'duplicate content'. Even if the page is the same, simply being able to access it with different URLs is bound to mark one of them as a duplicate and exclude it from the index.
For example, let's say you have a contact page, accessible at:
[http://www.yoursite.com/contact](http://www.yoursite.com/contact?ref=cotovan.com)
and also
[http://yoursite.com/contact](http://yoursite.com/contact?ref=cotovan.com)
This is the same page but you can browse it at the 'www' version of your domain and also without 'www'. To Google, that is a duplicate page. If you don't tell Google exactly which is your canonical (or 'preferred') version of the page, Google will choose for you, treating one as the canonical and ignoring the other, or even considering them both of equal importance.
That's when canonical URLs are helpful - even if your website is creating multiple pages that are essentially the same, just accessible with different URLs, you can specify in each page's meta tags which one is the version you prefer, using the canonical tag, like so:
This way, you tell Google that the version without 'www' is the one you prefer. Along with this, if you've set up your website in Google Search Console (mentioned above), you have to also go there and tell Google what is your 'preferred domain'.
You can [read more here](https://support.google.com/webmasters/answer/139066?ref=cotovan.com) about canonical URLs and other related topics on making your website as easy as possible to index and understand by search engines. If you're using Wordpress, a great tool for this is the Yoast plugin, which in addition to providing a lot of information and assistance with your SEO, also generates canonical URLs, sitemaps and more for you.
## 10\. Backup
All that hard work you've done on your website can go down the drain if you have not set up some backup solution. You've loaded all those images, created the pages, configured all of your plugins, and sometime later some hacker gets into it, the server crashes or you break something yourself - if you don't have a recent backup, you're in for a sleepless night or two!
That's why it's advisable to have a backup in place for your website even before you go live.
Each host might offer some sort of backup included (or at an extra cost), depending on how much you pay them. Some of them offer daily backups, but it's a good idea to have your own copy. You can backup websites via FTP, using various tools, such as Syncback SE or Syncback PRO (my go-to backup tool), or even setting up an account with ManageWP and connecting your site (if you're using Wordpress). This tool will assist you with installing updates, backup and restore, moderating comments and more - all from one place, and for free! However, if you're on the free plan, you only get one backup a month - which might not be ideal. For daily backups, you can set them up on Amazon S3, for example, or on a remote FTP server. There are multiple backup plugins for Wordpress that will back up your entire site to remote servers or even cloud storage providers, such as Dropbox, Google Drive or others.
I prefer to do daily backups to Amazon S3, using Syncback PRO. You can even set up separate backups for every day of the week so that if something goes wrong, you can go back to up to 7 different versions of the site. There's a solution for every situation.
## Bonus: Mailing list subscription
Finally, his is more like a marketing or strategy tip, rather than a technical one: If you're launching a website for any other reason than just posting photos of cats, you should consider starting to build a mailing list. Many website owners, myself included, regret not doing this from the very first day. Some of them do it even before they even launch their site.
If you start building a mailing list now, you will build an audience that is YOURS - people who are interested in YOUR content, want to receive YOUR updates. When the time comes, maybe you will want to sell something or provide a private area and build a community, or even notify them of new content - there's nothing more direct (apart from face to face), that can reach your visitors immediately. A very easy way to start is to just sign up with an Email Service Provider, add a subscription form on the website and you're set! Read my article about [what to look for in an email service provider](https://old.cotovan.com/post/what-is-esp-email-service-provider-why-do-you-need-one?ref=cotovan.com) for help in choosing one.
## Conclusion
There are of course much more things you could do to maximise the impact of your website upon launching it, but the ones described in this article are the most obvious, crucial and relatively easy to implement. Don't leave these as an afterthought for 6 months after! It should take less than a couple hours to get through all of them. You'll be glad you did!
### Building and hosting your website - from free platform to developing your own - what are the options?
URL: https://cotovan.com/post/should-build-website-free-platform-pay-bespoke-developer/
Last updated: 2025-10-08T10:20:33.000Z
If you are considering getting a website for yourself or your business, you may be overwhelmed with the amount of available options. You may have shopped around and investigated and found that the options range from free or very cheap to massively expensive and scary. Things get even more confusing when you're trying to plan something that will last and wonder what will happen with it several years from now.
I've been working in web development for about 14 years and have tried almost everything. Of course, technology evolves every day and new opportunities appear - less complex, less manual work, more design options and extensibility, and everyone is trying to tout their product as unique and hassle-free. But if you strip all the marketing pitches, what you're really facing is a decision on cost for building, cost for maintenance and future-proofing.
In this blog post I'm laying down the main directions you can take when considering launching a website of your own.
## 1\. The free website and free hosting option
On one end of the spectrum, you have the completely free website: created for free at the push of a button by signing up with one of the numerous website services. It could be a free blog on wordpress.com, blogger.com and many others in-between. This is free both to create AND to host. For this, you trade ability to brand it, to customise it, to design it the way you like and maybe even to monetise it. Sure, it’s free, who can argue with that, right?
The main advantage is that it is quick and easy to set up and the service provider takes care of the security updates. But that’s pretty much where the advantages stop.
**The disadvantages are quite numerous:**
Creating a website or blog with one of the free platforms is something I do not recommend at all, particularly if you have long-term plans for it and want to grow it into a community or even, income-making asset.
## 2\. The free website with self-hosted option
One step higher from the previous situation is building a website with one of the numerous open-source platforms – such as Wordpress, Drupal, Joomla, etc. There are a ton of them out there and you just have to figure out which one works best for you. A daunting task if you’re not the technical sort, I know!
Wordpress, for instance, boasts that 24% of the websites on the internet are powered by them. That is impressive! Wordpress is a great platform, and although I’ve mentioned hosting on wordpress.com above as not a good idea, actually downloading the Wordpress software and setting it up on your own server is the better option and you are not limited to what you can do with it.
I’m not turning this post into a promotion for Wordpress, but I’ve used it on several websites with success. Due to its popularity, it has created a massive community around it – developers who create plugins to extend its functionality or create themes to add new designs to it. The platform is free, open and therefore anyone with the knowledge can build a business on top of it.
For a quick start, this is your best and cheapest option, and when I say ‘self-hosted’, I mean you can upload the Wordpress software on a hosting account with any company that supports it – for example BlueHost, Cloudways, HostGator, etc. These companies have a turnkey option where, after you’ve signed up for your account, they can install Wordpress for you for free and you can be up and running in seconds. Sure, you’ll pay for the hosting account each month but it’s not expensive and you can also purchase your domain name through them.
Hosting the website yourself allows you to customise it anyway you want, to upload any plugins you like and any theme you fancy, and even make changes in the code of the site. But, you’re also responsible for updating it with the latest security patches, making sure everything is ship shape and taking care of backups.
If you need extra functions, the Wordpress plugin repository is an immense treasure trove of plugins, modules and extensions that perform from the simplest of tasks to very complex frameworks and entire applications that achieve multiple functions. Most of these are free as well, but many will typically include a Pro version that offers more features at a price. As you discover and experiment with them, you may decide to even pay for upgrades.
A word of warning: Wordpress’ popularity is also its curse.The fact that so many websites on the internet are created with it makes it a very attractive target to hackers and malicious people wanting to take control of your site and either take it down or turn it into a spam zombie machine. Once you self-host your website, you are responsible for these operations, but that’s not too difficult.
Wordpress have recently released an auto-update tool that does that for you when security patches are published.
## 3\. The free website with paid customisations and self-hosting
The next level up is self-hosting your website with one of the free open-source platforms (such as Wordpress) but building some customisations yourself or paying someone to do it. This is typically necessary if none of the plugins that exist can solve a problem you’re having or don’t perform the tasks you require. If the requirements are not too complex, this might be a good time to think about a custom plugin of your own.
If you’re a programmer or developer, you’ve probably stopped reading this article a long time ago, but if you didn’t know, you can build your own plugin. It may not be too difficult, depending on what you’re trying to achieve. Alternatively, you could hire a developer to build it for you and who knows, maybe you can even sell that plugin later if you think you’ve identified a need in the market that has not been met.
## 4\. The custom-built website with self-hosting
This final option is the top of the bunch, when you find that the self-hosted Wordpress website, with plugins (free, paid or developed by yourself) does not quite do it and you realise that you need specific functionality that could be a whole application on its own. It might be that you must build your own bespoke website from scratch or hire a developer or company to do it for you.
This is not a task for the faint of heart and is typically the way corporations go. Custom-built websites give you or your company full control over the development process and the features as well as integration with their backend business systems.
You want to build your own website if you need to scale massively (in the cloud) or to build specific tools (import-export of data) and integrations (such as APIs that interact with applications built by others).
It is also understood that such an enterprise will cost much more than your average self-hosted, free or open-source website.
Here are your choices. Let me know in the comments what way are you considering or have already implemented.
Photo credit: @jack\_anstey